Maintenance Manual

FANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL A

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B-63945EN/03
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series
31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of
Japan. Other models in this manual may also be subject to export controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-63945EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to
ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all
descriptions in this section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must
be undertaken only by a qualified technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become
familiar with the manuals provided by the machine tool builder and
FANUC.
Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ................s-2

WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION ......................s-3
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT ..............................s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS .................................s-6
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY
MAINTENANCE ..............................................................................s-7
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63945EN/03
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the

maintenance personnel (herein referred to as the user) and preventing
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary
information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and
Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-2
WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION
WARNING
1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover
removed
(1) The user's clothing could become caught in the spindle or
other components, thus presenting a danger of injury. When
checking the operation, stand away from the machine to
ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the
spindle or other components.
(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation

without workpiece. When a workpiece is mounted in the
machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering
fragments throughout the area. This presents a serious
danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when
checking the operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics

cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a high-voltage section
(carrying a mark). Never touch the high-voltage
section. The high-voltage section presents a severe risk of
electric shock. Before starting any check of the operation,
confirm that the cover is mounted on the high-voltage
section. When the high-voltage section itself must be
checked, note that touching a terminal presents a severe
danger of electric shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present
potentially injurious corners and projections. Be careful
when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the

operation of the machine. Before starting a production run,
ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a
trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override,
or machine lock function or by operating the machine with
neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result
in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage
to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s-3
5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended

operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum
allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the
machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a
machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the

direction and amount of compensation. Operating the machine
with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
s-4
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT
WARNING
1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the
power magnetics cabinet. If only the power to the CNC is turned
off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section. In
such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also
presenting a danger of electric shock.
2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken

by two persons or more. If the replacement is attempted by only
one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall, possibly
causing injury.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier may retain voltages for a while, such that there is a
danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off.
Allow at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for
these residual voltages to dissipate.
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same
parameter and other settings as the old unit. (For details, refer to
the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine
itself, and present a danger of injury.
s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
WARNING
1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a
parameter, close the machine cover. Never use the automatic
operation function immediately after such a modification. Instead,
confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the
single block function, feedrate override function, and machine
lock function, or by operating the machine without mounting a
tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that
it operates normally, the machine may move unpredictably,
possibly damaging the machine or workpiece, and presenting a
risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so
that those parameters usually need not be modified. When a
parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting
to modify it. If a parameter is set incorrectly, the machine may
move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.
s-6
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
extremely dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory,
because it must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters
even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be
lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.8 of
this manual.
s-7
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to
the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to
the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on
and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute
position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed
on the machine operator's panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries
within a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse
coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.10 of
this manual.
s-8
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate
and remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received
work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to
touch the high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an
insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an
CAUTION
4. Liquid-crystal display
The liquid-crystal display was fabricated using a very precise
processing technology. However, please note in mind that it may
have dead and always-on pixels because of its characteristics and
this is not a failure.
s-9
B-63945EN/03 PREFACE
PREFACE
The manual consists of the following chapters:
Description of this manual
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are
related to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also
provided at the end of this chapter.
2. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 30i HARDWARE
3. LCD-MOUNTED TYPE SERIES 300is/310is/320is
HARDWARE
4. STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
5. MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
Chapters 2 to 5 describes the configuration of the hardware, lists
the hardware units, and explains how to replace printed-circuit
boards.
6. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
This chapter describes the input/output of data, including
programs, parameters, and tool compensation data, aswell as the
input/output procedures for conversational data.
7. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system
configuration, and the signals used by the PMC.
8. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This chapter describes the embedded Ethernet.
9. DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust
the reference position return position.
10. AC SPINDLE
This chapter describes the spindle tuning screen.
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event
of certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot
be turned on or if manual operation cannot be performed.
Countermeasures to be applied in the event of alarms being
output are also described.
p-1
PREFACE B-63945EN/03
APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
C. BOOT SYSTEM
D. MEMRY CARD SLOT
E. LED DISPLAY
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
G. MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
H. ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
J. MEMORY CLEAR
K. PANEL i BIOS SETUP
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to
the separate PARAMETER MANUAL.
Applicable models
This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 30i–A 30i –A Series 30i
FANUC Series 300i–A 300i–A Series 300i
FANUC Series 300is–A 300is–A Series 300is
FANUC Series 31i–A5 31i –A5
Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i–A 31i –A
FANUC Series 310i–A5 310i–A5
Series 310i
FANUC Series 310i–A 310i–A
FANUC Series 310is–A5 310is–A5
Series 310is
FANUC Series 310is–A 310is–A
FANUC Series 32i–A 32i –A Series 32i
FANUC Series 320i–A 320i–A Series 320i
FANUC Series 320is–A 320is–A Series 320is
NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be
applied to some products.For details, refer to the
DESCRIPTIONS manual (B-63942EN).
p-2
B-63945EN/03 PREFACE
Related manuals of
Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i
/300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 32i/320i /320is-A. This
manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL B-63944EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USER’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN *
PARAMETER MANUAL B-63950EN
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor PROGRAMMING B-63943EN-2
MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66264EN
C Language Executor OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63944EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
FL-net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64164EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i B-63874EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (For Machining Center System) B-63874EN-2
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE i (Set-up Guidance Functions) B-63874EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
p-3
PREFACE B-63945EN/03
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR
αi/βi series
Table 2 Related manuals

Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65272EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
B-65302EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65312EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
B-65282EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
B-65322EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series
B-65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series B-65270EN
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS
series PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series,
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi series B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
The above servo motors and the corresponding spindles can be

connected to the CNC covered in this manual. In the αi SV series,
they can be connected only to upgrade versions. In the βi SVSP series,
they cannot be connected.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi
series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
p-4
B-63945EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-2
WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION.................................................. s-3
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT ......................................................... s-5
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS............................................................ s-6
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE.... s-7
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION .................................................................. 1
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ............................................................ 2
1.1.1 Soft Key Structure ....................................................................................................2
1.1.2 General Screen Operations .......................................................................................3
1.1.3 Function Keys ..........................................................................................................5
1.1.4 Soft Keys ..................................................................................................................6
1.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN ....................................................... 16
1.2.1 Display Method ......................................................................................................16
1.2.2 Hardware Configuration Screen .............................................................................17
1.2.3 Software Configuration Screen ..............................................................................18
1.2.4 Outputting System Configuration Data ..................................................................21
1.3 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ............................................................................. 22
1.3.1 Displaying Diagnosis Screen..................................................................................22
1.3.2 Contents Displayed.................................................................................................22
1.4 CNC STATE DISPLAY ................................................................................ 41
1.5 OPERATING MONITOR.............................................................................. 45
1.5.1 Display Method ......................................................................................................45
1.5.2 Parameters ..............................................................................................................46
1.6 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY........................................................... 47
1.6.1 Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen .......................................................................48
1.6.2 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen .................................................................49
1.6.3 Tracing Data ...........................................................................................................60
1.6.4 Outputting Data ......................................................................................................62
1.7 COLOR SETTING SCREEN........................................................................ 68
1.7.1 Screen Display........................................................................................................68
1.7.2 Operations for Color Setting ..................................................................................69
1.7.3 Parameter................................................................................................................71
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63945EN/03
1.7.4 Notes.......................................................................................................................74
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE MONOCHROME LCD .... 75
1.9 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION ............................................. 76
1.9.1 Screen Display........................................................................................................77
1.9.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters......................................................................83
1.9.3 Parameters ..............................................................................................................85
1.9.4 Notes.......................................................................................................................87
1.10 SERVO GUIDE MATE................................................................................. 88
1.10.1 Wave Display .........................................................................................................89
1.10.1.1 Y-time graph...................................................................................................... 90
1.10.1.2 XY graph ......................................................................................................... 112
1.10.1.3 Circle graph ..................................................................................................... 124
1.10.1.4 Fourier graph ................................................................................................... 136
1.10.1.5 Bode graph....................................................................................................... 142
1.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN............................................... 152
1.11.1 Displaying the Maintenance Information Screen .................................................152
1.11.2 Operating the Maintenance Information Screen...................................................153
1.11.3 Half-Size Kana Input on the Maintenance Information Screen............................155
1.11.4 Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information Screen..........................155
1.11.5 Parameter..............................................................................................................156
2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE ............................... 157

2.1 STRUCTURE............................................................................................. 158
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE.................................................................... 159
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS .......................................................... 160
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS
AND CARDS.............................................................................................. 163
2.4.1 Printed Circuit Boards for 7.2"/8.4"/10.4" Display Units ....................................163
2.4.2 Printed Circuit Boards for 15" Display Units.......................................................174
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS................................. 191
2.5.1 Basic Unit .............................................................................................................191
2.5.2 Display Unit .........................................................................................................192
2.5.3 MDI Unit ..............................................................................................................192
2.5.4 Printed Circuit Boards ..........................................................................................193
2.5.5 I/O.........................................................................................................................195
2.5.6 Other Units ...........................................................................................................196
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD .............................................................. 197
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT ................................................. 199
c-2
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY ............................................................................ 201

2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS ..................................................................... 206
2.10 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT ........................................................ 209
3 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE ....... 212
3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION............................................................... 213
3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 213
3.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD CONNECTORS
AND CARDS.............................................................................................. 215
3.4.1 Main Board...........................................................................................................215
3.4.2 Inverter PCBs, Connector Units, and Fan Adapter PCBs ....................................228
3.5 LIST OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND UNITS................................. 232
3.5.1 List of Printed Circuit Boards ..............................................................................232
3.5.2 List of Units..........................................................................................................234
3.5.3 Others ...................................................................................................................235
3.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD .............................................................. 236
3.6.1 Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................237
3.7 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT.................................................................... 239
3.8 REPLACING THE BATTERY .................................................................... 240
3.9 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR ............................................................... 240
3.10 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET ...................... 240
3.10.1 Replacing Method ................................................................................................240
3.11 BACKUP UNIT........................................................................................... 241
3.12 COMPENSATING THE TOUCH PANEL ................................................... 243
4 STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE.............................. 244
4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION............................................................... 245
4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 246
4.4 CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................ 252
4.5 DISPLAY UNIT FOR 30i/31i/32i................................................................ 259
4.5.1 10.4” Display Unit................................................................................................259
4.5.2 15” Display Unit...................................................................................................265
4.5.3 10.4" Display Unit for 2-Unit Display .................................................................273
4.5.4 CNC Display Unit for Automotive Manufacturers ..............................................277
4.6 PANEL i PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ....................................................... 292
4.7 DISPLAY UNIT FOR is SERIES CNC ....................................................... 298
c-3
4.7.1 Main Board of Display Unit for is Series CNC....................................................298

4.7.2 Inverter PCBs, Fan Adapter PCBs, and Connector Units ....................................308
4.7.3 Backup Unit..........................................................................................................312
4.8 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS................................. 313
4.8.1 List of Basic Units................................................................................................313
4.8.2 List of Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit.....................................................313
4.8.3 List of Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i......................................................................315
4.8.4 List of Display Unit for 300i/310i/320i (PANEL i) .............................................319
4.8.5 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is.......................................................................325
4.8.6 MDI Unit ..............................................................................................................329
4.8.7 I/O.........................................................................................................................330
4.8.8 Other Units ...........................................................................................................331
4.9 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT ................................. 332
4.10 REPLACING THE BATTERY .................................................................... 333
4.11 REPLACING A FAN UNIT ......................................................................... 337
4.12 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE DISPLAY UNIT.................................... 340
4.13 REPLACING MAINTENANCE PARTS FOR CNC DISPLAY UNIT
FOR AUTOMOTIVE MANUFACTURERS ................................................. 342
4.13.1 Replacing the Main PCB ......................................................................................342
4.13.2 Replacing the GUI Card .......................................................................................344
4.13.3 Replacing the Compact Flash Card ......................................................................346
4.13.4 Replacing the Fuse of the Unit .............................................................................347
4.13.5 Replacing the Battery ...........................................................................................348
4.13.6 Replacing the Fan Motor......................................................................................348
4.13.7 Replacing the Touch Panel Protection Sheet........................................................349
4.14 REPLACING PANEL i MAINTENANCE PARTS ....................................... 352
4.14.2 Removing the Case Cover ....................................................................................353
4.14.3 Mounting the Case Cover.....................................................................................357
4.14.4 Replacing the Fuse ...............................................................................................359
4.14.5 Replacing the Fan.................................................................................................360
4.14.5.1 Replacing the fan in the PANEL i ................................................................... 360
4.14.5.2 Replacing the fan for the HDD........................................................................ 361
4.14.6 Replacing the CPU Unit .......................................................................................362
4.14.7 Replacing the LCD Backlight ..............................................................................364
4.14.7.1 Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight................................................................. 364
c-4
4.15 REPLACING is SERIES CNC DISPLAY UNIT MAITENANCE PARTS ..... 370
4.15.1 Replacing the Main Board....................................................................................370
4.15.2 Replacing the Fuse ...............................................................................................372
4.15.4 Replacing Fan Motor............................................................................................373
4.15.6 Compensating the Touch Panel ............................................................................373
5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND

STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)................................................ 374
5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD................................................................................... 375
5.1.1 Fast Ethernet Board ..............................................................................................375
5.1.2 Additional Axis Board..........................................................................................379
5.1.3 Additional Spindle Board.....................................................................................381
5.1.4 HSSB Interface Board ..........................................................................................382
5.1.5 FL-net Board ........................................................................................................384
5.1.6 PROFIBUS Board ................................................................................................388
5.1.7 DeviceNet Master Board ......................................................................................391
5.1.8 Option Board Mounting Location ........................................................................399
5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB........................................ 400
5.2.1 Method of Extraction............................................................................................400
5.2.2 Method of Insertion ..............................................................................................400
5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS ....................................... 402
5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES ................................ 405
5.4.1 Demounting a DIMM Module..............................................................................406
5.4.2 Mounting a DIMM Module..................................................................................406
5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT FLASH / GUI CARD ON
THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD.............................................................. 407
5.6 OTHER UNITS .......................................................................................... 409
5.6.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit ..........................................................................409
5.6.2 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit ....................................................411
5.6.3 I/O Link-AS-i Converter ......................................................................................413
5.6.4 Terminal Board Type I/O Module........................................................................421
5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)........................................................... 427
c-5
5.8 SETTING I/O MODULES........................................................................... 432

5.8.1 Distributed I/O Setting .........................................................................................432
5.8.2 Terminal Type I/O Module Setting ......................................................................435
5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS .............................................. 437
5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET ........................... 444
5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE ................................................ 446
5.11.1 Grounding.............................................................................................................446
5.11.1.1 Grounding types .............................................................................................. 446
5.11.1.2 Grounding methods ......................................................................................... 447
5.11.1.3 Cable clamp and shield processing.................................................................. 450
5.11.1.4 Cabinet............................................................................................................. 453
5.11.2 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit .........................................455
5.11.3 Separating Signal Lines........................................................................................458
5.11.4 Noise Suppressor..................................................................................................460
5.11.5 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning..........................................................462
5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS......................................... 464
5.13 ATTACHING AND DETACHING LCD/MDI UNITS .................................... 469
5.13.1 Detaching..............................................................................................................469
5.13.2 Attaching ..............................................................................................................470
5.14 CAUTIONS IN REPLACING PCB’S .......................................................... 471
6 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA......................................................... 472
6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT...................................... 473
6.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA............................................................ 475
6.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output .........................................475
6.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters.................................................................................476
6.2.3 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount ....................................................476
6.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values .........................................................477
6.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount ..............................................................477
6.2.6 Outputting Part Program ......................................................................................477
6.2.7 Inputting CNC Parameters ...................................................................................478
6.2.8 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount.......................................................480
6.2.9 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values............................................................480
6.2.10 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount.................................................................480
6.2.11 Inputting Part Programs........................................................................................481
6.3 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP ................................................................... 482
c-6
7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC........................................... 488

7.1 WHAT IS PMC?......................................................................................... 489
7.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC ................................................................................489
7.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC ..............................................................................................489
7.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses .........................................................................................490
7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION ........................................................................... 493
7.2.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage................................................495
7.2.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link..........................................................................497
7.2.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC .......................................................................498
7.2.4 Multi-Path PMC Interface ....................................................................................499
7.2.5 System Relay Addresses (R9000, Z0)..................................................................500
7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................ 505
7.3.1 Basic Specifications .............................................................................................505
7.3.2 Addresses..............................................................................................................510
7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN............................................................. 512
7.4.1 Transition of the PMC Screens.............................................................................514
7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC MAINTE]) .... 515
7.5.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) ...........................................515
7.5.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)...............................................517
7.5.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)................................518
7.5.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen) .............................520
7.5.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)..........................522
7.5.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) ........................................523
7.5.7 Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen) .........................................................................528
7.5.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Screen)..............................530
7.5.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) ...........................................................532
7.5.10 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen).....................................533
7.5.11 Execution of Trace ...............................................................................................538
7.5.11.1 Operation after execution of trace ................................................................... 539
7.5.11.2 Automatic start of trace setting ........................................................................ 541
7.5.12 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN] SCREEN) ..................................542
7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER])....................................................................................... 545
7.6.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen) .........................................................547
7.6.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen).............................................549
7.6.3 Editing Ladder Programs......................................................................................552
7.6.3.1 NET EDITOR screen....................................................................................... 555
c-7
7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .....................................................................557

7.6.5 Collective Monitor Function ................................................................................558
7.6.5.1 COLLECTIVE MONITOR function............................................................... 559
7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................................................. 562
8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ................................................ 601
8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD......... 602
8.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ........................ 605
8.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function...........................................................605
8.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ......................................... 606
8.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function......................................... 609
8.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function............................................................610
8.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen ............................................ 610
8.2.2.2 Related NC parameters .................................................................................... 614
8.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function............................................ 615
8.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function ...................................................................616
8.2.3.1 Setting up DNS................................................................................................ 616
8.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ............................................................................................. 617
8.2.4 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function....................................................621
8.2.4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 622
8.2.4.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ....................................................... 624
8.2.4.3 Mode selection................................................................................................. 628
8.2.4.4 Setting on the CNC screen............................................................................... 631
8.2.4.5 Setting on the personal computer..................................................................... 635
8.2.4.6 Execution methods........................................................................................... 636
8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ......... 645
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS.................................................. 646
8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function ..................................................................................646
8.4.1.1 Displaying and operating the file list............................................................... 649
8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET .......................................... 651
8.6 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ... 652
8.7 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ................ 657
9 DIGITAL SERVO................................................................................. 661
9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS ............................................... 662
9.2 FSSB DISPLAY AND SETTING SCREEN ................................................ 673
9.3 SERVO TUNING SCREEN........................................................................ 682
9.3.1 Parameter Setting .................................................................................................682
9.3.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen..........................................................................682
c-8
9.3.3 Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors ...........................................................683

9.3.4 Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and Separate Serial Pulsecoder........................685
9.3.5 Alarms Related to Serial Communication ............................................................686
9.3.6 Alarms Related to Disconnection .........................................................................686
9.3.7 Alarm Related to Invalid Parameter Settings .......................................................687
9.3.8 Others ...................................................................................................................688
9.4 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) ......................... 690
9.5 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING........................................ 694
9.6 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE .......................................................... 696
9.7 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ........................................................ 697
10 AC SPINDLE ....................................................................................... 701

10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE .......................................................... 702
10.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control ...................................................................................702
10.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series
(Bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 0)......................................................... 703
10.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series
(Bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 1)......................................................... 703
10.1.1.3 T series............................................................................................................. 703
10.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ......................................................................704
10.1.2.1 Display method................................................................................................ 704
10.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen ...................................................................................... 705
10.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen....................................................................................... 707
10.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen .................................................................................... 709
10.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning
screen ............................................................................................................... 712
10.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters...........................................................714
10.1.4 Warning Interface.................................................................................................716
10.1.5 Spindle Information Screen..................................................................................718
11 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 723

11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES.................................................. 724
11.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred................................724
11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE
EXECUTED ............................................................................................... 726
11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE .................................................... 730
11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ............................................. 734
11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ...................................... 740
11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF.................................... 746
c-9
11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS

TURNED ON ............................................................................................. 748
11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE
PERFORMED, INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED
PROPERLY ............................................................................................... 750
11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO
AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS .................................................................. 753
11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT TO
AN EXPANSION UNIT .............................................................................. 754
11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) ............................................ 755
11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) .... 759
11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) .. 761
11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ............................................................. 762
11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON) ............................................................... 764
11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED)....................................... 765
11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL)................. 765
11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) .................................... 766
11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR).......................................... 766
11.20 ALARM SV5134 (FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)
ALARM SV5137 (FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR)
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT).............................................. 767
11.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) ........................ 768
11.22 SERVO ALARMS ...................................................................................... 769
11.23 SPC ALARMS............................................................................................ 772
11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS.................................................................................... 772
11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS .................................................................................... 773
11.25.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................773
11.25.2 Operations on the System Alarm Screen..............................................................775
11.25.3 System Alarms Detected by Hardware.................................................................779
11.25.4 System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB)...............................................787
11.26 SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O Link ...................... 789
c-10
APPENDIX
A ALARM LIST ....................................................................................... 795
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)................................................................................... 796
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC) .................................................................................. 853
A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen ............................853
A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages .............................................................................856
A.2.3 Operation Errors ...................................................................................................859
A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages ....................................................................871
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) ............................................................. 875
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)........................................................ 883
B LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS ...................................................... 885
C BOOT SYSTEM................................................................................... 886
C.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 887
C.1.1 Displaying the Power ON Sequence ....................................................................888
C.1.2 Starting the Boot System......................................................................................889
C.1.3 System Files and User Files .................................................................................889
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE .............. 891
C.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen.........................892
C.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen........................................................................894
C.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen ......................................................................897
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen ...........................................................................899
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen..........................................................................901
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen...................................................................904
C.2.7 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM .....................................................................................905
C.2.8 Cautions................................................................................................................905
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS ................................... 906
D MEMORY CARD SLOT....................................................................... 908
D.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 909
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) .................................................. 910
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION............................................................... 912
E LED DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 913
E.1 OVERIVIEW .............................................................................................. 914
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ..................................... 915
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING).......................................... 918
c-11
F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) ..................... 919

F.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 920
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES ........................................................... 922
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS ................................................................. 924
F.3.1 BOOT Screen .......................................................................................................924
F.3.1.1 System data manipulation ................................................................................ 925
F.3.1.2 SRAM operation.............................................................................................. 926
F.3.1.3 File operation ................................................................................................... 927
F.3.2 IPL Screen ............................................................................................................928
F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen ............................................................................ 928
F.4 OTHER SCREENS.................................................................................... 929
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen...............................................................................................929
F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ..........................................................930
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen...........................................................................................931
F.4.3.1 Option setting screen (Series 300i/310i/320i) ................................................. 931
F.4.3.2 Option setting screen (Series 300is/310is/320is)............................................. 933
G MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT.............................. 937

G.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 938
G.2 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 939
G.3 OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTION ......................................................... 940
H ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION ..................................................... 943
H.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 944
H.2 EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION.......................................... 946
H.3 DISPLAY UNIT NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION .................... 949
H.3.1 Display Unit Number Setting ...............................................................................949
H.3.2 Display Unit Number Confirmation .....................................................................950
H.4 NODE NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION .................................. 951
H.4.1 Method of Node Number Setting .........................................................................951
H.4.2 Method of Node Number Confirmation ...............................................................952
H.5 CHANGING START SEQUENCES ........................................................... 953
H.6 NCBOOT32E.exe ...................................................................................... 954
H.6.1 Boot Screen ..........................................................................................................956
H.6.2 File Storage Location Selection............................................................................957
H.6.3 System Data Operation.........................................................................................958
H.6.4 S-RAM Operation ................................................................................................959
H.6.5 File Operation.......................................................................................................960
H.6.6 IPL Screen ............................................................................................................961
c-12
H.6.7 CNC Alarm Screen...............................................................................................962

H.6.8 Status Screen ........................................................................................................963
H.6.9 Option Setting Screen...........................................................................................964
H.6.10 Changer Screen.....................................................................................................966
H.7 STARTING OF THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION ...................... 967
I IPL MONITOR ..................................................................................... 969
I.1 OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 970
I.2 STARTING OF THE IPL MONITOR................................................................... 970
I.3 IPL MENU .......................................................................................................... 971
J MEMORY CLEAR ............................................................................... 973
J.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 974
J.2 OPERATION METHOD ............................................................................. 974
J.3 DATA TYPES TO BE CLEARED............................................................... 976
K PANEL i BIOS SETUP........................................................................ 978
c-13
B-63945EN/03 1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function
keys.
The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS.......................................2

1.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN ..................................16
1.3 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..........................................................22
1.4 CNC STATE DISPLAY.............................................................41
1.5 OPERATING MONITOR ..........................................................45
1.6 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY.....................................47
1.7 COLOR SETTING SCREEN.....................................................68
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE
MONOCHROME LCD ..............................................................75
1.9 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION.......................76
1.10 SERVO GUIDE MATE .............................................................88
1.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN........................152
-1-
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION B-63945EN/03
1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS
Operations and soft key display status for each function key are
described below:
1.1.1 Soft Key Structure

The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be
displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed
immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to
the selected function can be selected.
-2-
1.1.2 General Screen Operations
- Procedure
1 By pressing a function key on the MDI panel, the chapter
selection soft keys that belong to the function are displayed.
Example 1)
Operation selection key
Chapter selection soft keys Continuous menu key
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen
of the chapter is displayed. If the soft key of a desired chapter
is not displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple
chapters.
3 When the screen of a desired chapter is displayed, press the

operation selection key to display operations to be performed.
4 Select a desired operation with the operation selection soft key.

Depending on the operation to be executed, an auxiliary menu of
soft keys is displayed. Perform an operation according to the
indications on the auxiliary menu.
Example 2)
Return menu key Operation selection soft keys
Example 3)
Auxiliary menu
5 To return to the display of chapter selection soft keys, press the

return menu key.
A general screen display procedure is provided above.

The actual display procedure varies from one screen to another.
For details, see each description of operation.
-3-
- Button design change depending on soft key state

The soft keys assume one of the following states, depending on the
selection target:
• Chapter selection soft keys
• Operation selection soft keys
• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys
Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change.
From the button images, which state the soft keys are assuming can be
known.
Example)
• Chapter selection soft keys
• Operation selection soft keys
• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys
-4-
1.1.3 Function Keys

Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed.
The following function keys are provided on the MDI panel:
Press this key to display the position screen.
Press this key to display the program screen.
Press this key to display the offset/setting screen.
Press this key to display the system screen.
Press this key to display the message screen.
Press this key to display the graphics screen.
Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro

screen or C language executor screen).
Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro

screen or C language executor screen).
-5-
1.1.4 Soft Keys

By pressing a soft key after a function key, the corresponding screen
of the function can be displayed.
The chapter selection soft keys of each function are described below.
The horizontal four keys on the right-hand side are assigned to chapter
selection soft keys. When multiple pages are used for chapter
selection soft keys, [+] is displayed on the continuous menu key
(rightmost soft key). Press the continuous menu key to switch
between chapter selection soft keys.
NOTE
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that
are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the
option configuration.
If position indications are provided on the left half of the screen when
a key other than the function key is pressed, the left half of the
soft keys is displayed as follows at all times:
-6-
Position display screen

The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key
and the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MONI 3-D (OPRT) +

Page 2
MANUAL
Table 1.1.4 (a) Position display screen

No. Chapter menu Description
(1) ABS Selects the absolute coordinate display screen.
(2) REL Selects the relative coordinate display screen.
(3) ALL Selects the overall coordinate display screen.
(4) HNDL Selects the operation screen for manual handle
operation.
(6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load
meter, serial spindle load meter, and speedometer.
(7) 3-D Displays a handle pulse interrupt amount in

MANUAL three-dimensional manual feed.
-7-
Program screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRA FOLDER NEXT CHECK (OPRT) +

Page 1
M
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
TIME JOG RSTR (OPRT) +

Page 2
Table 1.1.4 (b) Program

(1) PROGRAM Selects the screen for displaying a list of part
programs currently registered.
(2) FOLDER Selects the screen for displaying a list of part
programs currently registered.
(3) NEXT Selects the screen for displaying the command
values of the block currently executed and the next
block to be executed among the command values.
(4) CHECK Selects the screen for displaying programs, position
data, modal information, and so forth
simultaneously.
(6) TIME Selects the screen for displaying executed program
operation time.
(7) JOG Selects the screen for executing, in the JOG mode,
data specified in the program format from the MDI.
(8) RSTR Selects the operation screen for restarting an
interrupted program operation.
-8-
Offset/setting screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MACRO OPR TOOL (OPRT) +

Page 2 MANAGER
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
OFST.2 W.SHFT GEOM.2 (OPRT) +

Page 3
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
PR-LV EXTEND (OPRT) +

Page 4 OFFSET
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
CHUCK LANG. PROTECT GUARD (OPRT) +

Page 5 TAIL
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
TOOL (OPRT) ＋
Page 6 LIFE
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
WORK (OPRT) ＋
Page 7 SET ER
-9-
Table 1.1.4 (c) Offset

(1) OFFSET Selects the screen for setting tool offset values.
(2) SETTING Selects the screen for setting the setting
parameters.
(3) WORK Selects the screen for setting a workpiece
coordinate system offset.
(6) MACRO Selects the screen for setting macro variables.
(8) OPR Selects the screen for operating some operation
switches on the machine operator's panel as soft
switches.
(9) TOOL Selects the screen for setting data related to tool
MANAGER management.
(11) OFST.2 Selects the screen for setting a Y-axis offset.
(12) W.SHFT Selects the screen for setting a workpiece
coordinate system shift value.
(13) GEOM.2 Selects the screen for setting a second geometry
offset.
(17) PR-LV Selects the screen for setting a precision level.
(18) EXTEND Selects the screen for setting the offsets of the
OFFSET fourth and fifth axes.
(21) CHUCK TAIL Selects the chuck tail stock barrier screen.
(22) LANG. Selects the screen for setting a display language.
(23) PROTECT Selects the screen for setting data protection.
(24) GUARD Selects the screen for setting wrong operation
prevention.
(29) TOOL LIFE Selects the screen for operations and setting related
to tool life management.
(31) WRK ERR Selects the screen for setting errors related to
COMP workpiece mounting position.
- 10 -
System screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM DGNOS SERVO SYSTEM (OPRT) +

Page 1 GUIDEM
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MEMORY PITCH SERVO SP.SET (OPRT) +

Page 2 PARAM
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

PMC PMC PMC (OPRT) +
Page 3 MAINTE LADDER CONFIG
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)

MCNG ALL IO OPEHIS (OPRT) +
Page 4 TUNING
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
COLOR MAINTE M-INFO W. DGNS (OPRT) +

Page 5
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)

TOUCH FSSB PRMTUN P.MATE (OPRT) +
Page 6 PANEL MGR.
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)

EMBED PCMCIA ETHNET PROFI (OPRT) +
Page 7 PORT LAN BOARD MASTER
- 11 -
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
REMOTE M CODE 3D ERR (OPRT) ＋

Page 8 DIAG COMP
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)
PROFI DEVNET (OPRT) ＋

Page 9 SLAVE MASTER
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
DUAL R.TIME (OPRT) ＋

Page 10 CHECK MACRO
Table 1.1.4 (d) System

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting parameters.
(2) DGNOS Selects the screen for displaying CNC state.
(3) SERVO GUIDEMSelects the screen for displaying the servo guide mate.
(4) SYSTEM Selects the screen for displaying the current system
status.
(6) MEMORY Selects the screen for displaying the contents of
memory.
(7) PITCH Selects the screen for setting pith error compensation.
(8) SERVO PARAM Selects the screen for setting the servo-related
parameters.
(9) SP.SET Selects the screen for spindle-related setting.
(11) PMC MAINTE Selects the screen related to PMC maintenance such
as PMC signal state monitoring and tracing, and PMC
parameter display/editing.
(12) PMC LADDER Selects the screen related to ladder display/editing.
(13) PMC CONFIG Displays the screen for displaying/editing data other
than ladders that makes up a sequence program and
for setting the PMC function.
(16) MCNG TUNING Displays the screen for setting the parameter set for
emphasis on speed (LV1) or emphasis on precision
(LV10).
(18) ALL IO Selects the screen for data input to and output from the
memory card.
(19) OPEHIS Selects the screen for displaying the history of
operations performed by the operator and issued
alarms.
(21) COLOR Selects the screen for setting colors to be used on the
screen.
(22) MAINTE Selects the screen for setting maintenance items to be
managed periodically.
(23) M-INFO Selects the screen for displaying information about
maintenance performed.
- 12 -

(24) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo
positional deviation values, torque values, machine
signals, and so forth as graphs.
(26) TOUCH PANEL Selects the screen for setting a touch panel.
(27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the
high-speed serial servo bus (FSSB: Fanuc Serial Servo
Bus).
(28) PRMTUN Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for
start-up and tuning.
(31) EMBED PORT Selects the screen for making settings related to the
embedded Ethernet (embedded port).
(32) PCMCIA LAN Selects the screen for making settings related to the
embedded Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(33) ETHNET BOARD Selects the screen for making settings related to the
fast Ethernet/fast data server.
(34) PROFI MASTER Selects the screen for making settings related to the
profibus master function.
(34) PROFI MASTER Selects the screen for making settings related to the
profibus master function.
(37) M CODE Selects the screen for setting an M code group.
(41) PROFI SLAVE Selects the screen for making settings related to the
profi-bus slave function.
(42) DEVNETMASTER Selects the screen for making settings related to the
DeviceNet master function.
(46) DUAL CHECK Selects the screen for making settings related to the
dual check safety function.
(47) R.TIME MACRO Selects the screen for making settings related to the
real-time custom macro function.
- 13 -
Message screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ALARM MSG HISTRY MSGHIS (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

EMBED PCMCIA BOARD (OPRT) +
Page 2 LOG LOG LOG
Table 1.1.4 (e) Message

(1) ALARM Selects the alarm message screen.
(2) MSG Selects the operator message screen.
(3) HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying the details of
alarms issued so far.
(4) MSGHIS Selects the external operator message screen.
(6) EMBED LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages
related to the embedded Ethernet (embedded port).
(7) PCMCIA LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages
related to the embedded Ethernet (PCMCIA
Ethernet card).
(8) BOARD LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages
related to the fast Ethernet/fast data server.
- 14 -
Graphic screen
When the graphic display function is enabled:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) +

Page 1
Table 1.1.4 (f) Graphic

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting graphic parameters.
(2) GRAPH Selects the screen for graphically displaying the tool
path.
When the dynamic graphic display function is enabled:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

DRAW PATH ANIME TOOL (OPRT)
Page 1 PARAM EXEC EXEC POS
Table 1.1.4 (g) Graphic

(1) DRAW Selects the screen for setting drawing parameters.
PARAM
(2) PATH EXEC Selects the screen for drawing tool paths.
(3) ANIME Selects the screen for drawing animation.
EXEC
(4) TOOL POS Selects the screen for displaying tool positions.
- 15 -
1.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN
After the system has started normally, you can find the types of
installed printed circuit boards and software types by displaying a
system configuration screen.
1.2.1 Display Method
1 Press function key .

2 Press soft key [SYSTEM].
3 Two types of system configuration screen, the hardware screen
and software screen, are provided, and you can switch between
these screens by using the page keys.
When all information cannot be displayed on one page of the
screen, you can switch to the next page by using the
keys.
- 16 -
1.2.2 Hardware Configuration Screen
- Screen display
- Displayed information
The following explains the displayed information:
1. NAME
MAIN BOARD
• Displays information on the main board, and cards and
modules on the main board.
OPTION BOARD
• Displays information on the board installed in the option
slot.
DISPLAY
• Displays information on the display unit.
OTHERS
• Displays information on other components (such as an MDI
and a basic unit).
2. SLOT
• Displays the number of the slot in which the option board is
inserted.
- 17 -
1.2.3 Software Configuration Screen
- Screen display
- Displayed information
The following explains the displayed information:
SYSTEM : Software type
SERIES: Software series
EDITION: Software edition
- 18 -
- Displayed systems and corresponding software types

The following lists the correspondence between displayed systems and
software:
System Software type

CNC(BASIC) CNC basic software
CNC(OPT A1) Option assembly A1
CNC(MSG ENG) Language indication (English)
CNC(MSG JPN) Language indication (Japanese)
CNC(MSG DEU) Language indication (German)
CNC(MSG FRA) Language indication (French)
CNC(MSG CHT) Language indication (Chinese (traditional characters))
CNC(MSG ITA) Language indication (Italian)
CNC(MSG KOR) Language indication (Korean)
CNC(MSG ESP) Language indication (Spanish)
CNC(MSG NLD) Language indication (Dutch)
CNC(MSG DAN) Language indication (Danish)
CNC(MSG PTG) Language indication (Portuguese)
CNC(MSG PLK) Language indication (Polish)
CNC(MSG HUN) Language indication (Hungarian)
CNC(MSG SVE) Language indication (Swedish)
CNC(MSG CSY) Language indication (Czech)
CNC(MSG CHS) Language indication (Chinese (simplified characters))
CNC(MSG RUS) Language indication (Russian)
CNC(MSG TRK) Language indication (Turkish)
BOOT Boot system
PMC(SYSTEM) PMC function
PMC(LADDER1) PMC ladder for path 1
PMC(LAD DCS) Dual check safety PMC ladder
CLB(SYSTEM) System software for C board
CLB(USER) User software for C board
SERVO Digital servo software (up to ten programs displayed)
SPINDLE-1 Spindle 1
SPINDLE-2 Spindle 2
SPINDLE-3 Spindle 3
SPINDLE-4 Spindle 4
SPINDLE-5 Spindle 5
SPINDLE-6 Spindle 6
SPINDLE-7 Spindle 7
SPINDLE-8 Spindle 8
SPINDLE-9 Spindle 9
SPINDLE-10 Spindle 10
- 19 -
System Software type

GRAPHIC Graphic function
GRAPHIC1 15-inch display control software 1
GRAPHIC2 15-inch display control software 2
MACRO EXE1 Macro executor 1
MACRO MGI-M MANUAL GUIDE i (macro executor for M series)
MACRO MGI-T MANUAL GUIDE i (macro executor for T series)
CEXELIB Library for C executor
CEXEAPL Application for C executor
MGILIB Library for MANUAL GUIDE i
MGIAPL Application for MANUAL GUIDE i
NET CONTROL Communication management software
EMBED ETHER Control software for embedded Ethernet function
PROFI SOFT Software for PROFIBUS function
PROFI MASTER Control software for PROFIBUSmaster function
PROFI SLAVE Control software for PROFIBUSslave function
DEVNT SOFT Software for DeviceNet function
DEVNT MASTER Control software for DeviceNet master function
DEVNT SLAVE Control software for DeviceNet slave function
FL-NET Software for FL-net function
FL-NET SOFT Control software for FL-net function
FL-NET/ETHER Control software for FL-net/Ethernet coexisting function
ETHER/DTSVR Control software for fast Data Server
CMB(SYSTEM) Customers' board system software
CMB(USER) Customers' board user software
- Display of macro executor

The series and edition are displayed for each number specified at
the time of P-CODE macro creation.
Up to 20 types of macro executor are displayed.
- 20 -
1.2.4 Outputting System Configuration Data

Data displayed on the system configuration screen can be output to an
input/output device.
(1) Press function key .

(2) Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator's panel.
(3) Press soft key [SYSTEM] to display the system configuration
screen.
(4) Press soft key [(OPRT)] and select soft key [PUNCH].
(5) Press soft key [EXCE].
(6) Data is output to the output device selected by parameter No. 20.
Data is output to a file named SYS_CONF.TXT.
- 21 -
1.3 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1.3.1 Displaying Diagnosis Screen
(1) Press function key .

(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnosis screen is displayed.
1.3.2 Contents Displayed
Causes when the machine does not travel in spite of giving a command
Diagnosis 0 CNC internal state 1

[Data type] Bit
NAME Internal state when "1" is displayed
INPOSITION CHECK In-position check is being done.
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
JOG FEED OVERRIDE 0% Jog feedrate override is 0%.
INTER/START LOCK ON Interlock/start lock is on.
SPEED ARRIVAL ON The system is waiting for the speed arrival signal to turn on.
WAIT REVOLUTION The system is waiting for the spindle one-rotation signal in threading.
STOP POSITION OCDER The system is waiting for the rotation of the position coder in spindle
feed per revolution.
FEED STOP A feed stop was made.

[Data type] Bit
FOREGROUND READING Data is being input in the foreground.
BACKGROUND READING Data is being input in the background.
Reader/puncher interface output state
Diagnosis 10 Reader/puncher interface output state

When data is being output through the reader/puncher interface, "1" is
indicated.
State of TH alarm
Diagnosis 30 TH alarm character count (foreground edit)

[Data type] 2-word axis
The position where the TH alarm occurred in foreground input is
indicated by the number of characters from the beginning of the block.
Diagnosis 31 TH alarm character code (foreground edit)

The character code of the character at which the TH alarm occurred in
foreground input is indicated.
- 22 -
Diagnosis 32 TH alarm character count (background edit)

The position where the TH alarm occurred in background input is
indicated by the number of characters from the beginning of the block.
Diagnosis 33 TH alarm character code (background edit)

The character code of the character at which the TH alarm occurred in
background input is indicated.
Display language of the CNC screen
Diagnosis 43 Number of the current display language of the CNC screen

[Data type] Byte
The number of the current display language of the CNC screen is
indicated.
The correspondence between languages and numbers is show below.
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Chinese (traditional characters)
5 : Italian
6 : Korean
7 : Spanish
8 : Dutch
9 : Danish
10 : Portuguese
11 : Polish
12 : Hungarian
13 : Swedish
14 : Czech
15 : Chinese (simplified characters)
16 : Russian
17 : Turkish
Details of serial Pulsecoder
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
#0 OFA Overflow alarm
#1 FBA Disconnection alarm
#2 DCA Discharge alarm
#3 HVA Overvoltage alarm
#4 HCA Abnormal current alarm
#5 OVC Over current alarm
#6 LV Insufficient voltage alarm
#7 OVL Overload alarm
- 23 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 201 ALD PCR EXP
#4 EXP
#7 ALD
ALD EXP Description
Overload alarm 0 - Motor overheat
1 - Amplifier overheat
Disconnection 1 0 Built-in Pulsecoder (hard)
alarm 1 1 Disconnection of separated type Pulsecoder (hard)
0 0 Disconnection of Pulsecoder (software)
#6 PCR The one-rotation signal of the position detector was caught before a
manual reference position return is performed. Since the manual
reference position return grid was established, a manual reference
position return is enabled.
NOTE
This bit is valid only when the operation of the
manual reference position return mode is started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
#0 SPH Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#1 CKA Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#2 BZA Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
#3 RCA Serial Pulsecoder is faulty.
The speed was incorrectly counted.
#4 PHA Serial Pulsecoder or feedback cable is erroneous.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#5 BLA Battery voltage is low (warning)
#6 CSA Hardware of serial Pulsecoder is abnormal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 203 DTE CRC STB PRM
#4 PRM A parameter failure was detected on the digital servo side. See the
cause and measure described in diagnosis No. 352.
#5 STB Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#6 CRC Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#7 DTE Communication failure of serial Pulsecoder.
There is no response for communication.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 204 OFS MCC LDA PMS
#3 PMS Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial Pulsecoder C or feedback
cable.
#4 LDA Serial Pulsecoder LED is abnormal
#5 MCC Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
- 24 -
#6 OFS Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital servo
Details of separate serial Pulsecoder alarms
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 205 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
#0 SPH A soft phase data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#1 PMA A pulse error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#2 BZA The battery voltage for the separate Pulsecoder is zero.
#3 CMA A count error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#4 PHA A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
#5 BLA A low battery voltage occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#6 LDA An LED error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 OHA Overheat occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 206 DTE CRC STB
#5 STB A stop bit error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#6 CRC A CRC error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
#7 DTE A data error occurred in the separate Pulsecoder.
Details of invalid servo parameter alarms (on the CNC side)

When servo alarm No. 417 is issued, and diagnosis No. 203#4 = 0, its
cause is indicated.
When diagnosis No. 203#4 = 1, see diagnosis No. 352.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 280 DIR PLS PLC MOT
#0 MOT The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 PLC The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3 PLS The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution,
specified in parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#4 DIR The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter
No. 2022 (the value is other than 111 or -111).
Position error amount
Diagnosis 300 Position error of an axis in detection unit
Feed rate [mm/min] × 100 1

Position error = ×
60 × servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit
Machine position
Diagnosis 301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit
- 25 -
Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
Diagnosis 302 Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point
[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] Machine unit
[Valid data range] 0 to ±99999999
NOTE
For the reference position setting without a dog,
the distance from the beginning of the reference
position setting without a dog to the first grid point
is assumed.
Reference counter
Diagnosis 304 Reference counter amount in each axis

[Unit of data] Detection unit
[Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999
Motor temperature information
Diagnosis 308 Servo motor temperature (°C)

[Data type] Byte axis
[Unit of data] °C
[Valid data range] 0 to 255
The temperature of the coil of the servo motor is indicated. When
the temperature reaches 140°C, a motor overheat alarm is issued.
Diagnosis 309 Pulsecoder temperature (°C)

[Unit of data] °C
The temperature of the printed circuit board in the pulsecoder is
indicated. When the temperature reaches 100°C (approximately
85°C for the temperature of atmosphere in the pulsecoder), a motor
overheat alarm is issued.
NOTE
1 Temperature information has the following error:
• 50°C to 160°C ±5°C
• 160°C to 180°C ±10°C
2 The temperature at which an overheat alarm is
issued has an error of up to 5°C.
- 26 -
Cause that sets bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0

You can find the cause that sets bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to
0 by checking diagnosis Nos. 310 and 311.
Once diagnosis No. 310 or 311 is set to 1, this setting is kept
unchanged until the zero point of the absolute position detector of the
corresponding axis is set again. Possible causes that set APZ to 0 are
as follows:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1
#0 PR1 One of the following parameters was changed:
No.1803#7, No.1815#1, No.1820, No.1821, No.1822, No.1823,
No.1850, No.1874, No.1875, No.2022, No.2084, No.2085
#1 PR2 Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 was changed. Alternatively,
when bit 7 (SMA) of parameter No. 8302 was set to 1, APZ of the
axis to be synchronized together was set to 0.
#2 BZ1 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Inductosyn)
#3 BZ2 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Separate position detector)
#4 NOF The Inductosyn did not output offset data.
#5 ALP The zero point was set by MDI when the α pulse coder had not rotate
one or more turns.
#6 DTH An axis detach operation was performed by the controlled-axis detach
signal DTCH <G124> or by setting bit 7 (RMV) of parameter No.
0012.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1
#0 AL1 An SV alarm (SV301 to SV305) was issued.
#1 AL2 Broken-wire alarm SV445 or SV447 was detected.
#2 AL3 A battery voltage of 0 V was detected. (Serial Pulsecoder)
#3 AL4 Rotation count abnormality alarm RCAL was detected.
#4 GSG The status of broken-wire alarm ignore signal NDCAL (G202)
changed from 1 to 0.
#5 XBZ A battery voltage of 0 V or a count error was detected. (Separate
serial position detector)
#6 DUA The difference in error between the semi-closed loop and closed loop
became too large when the dual position feedback function was being
used.
Details of invalid servo parameter setting alarms (on the servo side)
Diagnosis 352 Detail number for invalid servo parameter setting alarm
Indicates information that can be used to identify the location
(parameter) and cause of an invalid servo parameter setting alarm
(servo alarm No. 417).
This diagnosis information is valid when the following conditions are
satisfied.
• Servo alarm No. 417 has occurred.
• Bit 4 of diagnosis No. 203 (PRM) = 1
See the following table for the displayed detail numbers and the
corresponding causes. For further detail information that could be
- 27 -
used to take measures, refer to FANUC AC Servo Motor αis/αi/βis

series Parameter Manual (B-65270EN).
• Detailed descriptions about invalid servo parameter setting alarms
Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
83 2019 Illegal learning control parameter → See Correct the parameter setting so that each
Supplementary. parameter is within a valid range.
A value specified as the number of velocity pulses Decrease the value specified as the number of
0233 2023
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. velocity pulses to within 13100.
Decrease the value specified as the number of
A value specified as the number of position pulses position pulses to within 13100. Use the
0243 2024
is greater than 13100 when initialization bit 0 = 1. position feedback pulse conversion coefficient
(No. 2185).
0434 The internal value of the velocity loop integration Decrease the value specified in the velocity loop
2043
0435 gain has overflowed. integration gain parameter.
Use a function (No.2200#6) for changing the
0444 The internal value of the velocity loop proportional internal format of the velocity loop proportional
2044
0445 gain has overflowed. gain. Alternatively, decrease the setting of this
parameter.
0474 The internal value of the observer parameter
2047 Change the setting to: (-1) × (desired setting)/10
0475 (POA1) has overflowed.
0534 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2053
0535 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0544 The internal value of the dead zone compensation Decrease the setting until the invalid parameter
2054
0545 parameter has overflowed. setting alarm will not occur any longer.
0694
0695 The interval value of the velocity feed forward
2069 Decrease the velocity feed forward coefficient.
0696 coefficient has overflowed.
0699
0754 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2075
0755 overflowed. in it.
0764 The setting of the parameter listed at the left has This parameter is presently not in use. Specify 0
2076
0765 overflowed. in it.
Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
No positive value has been set for the flexible feed numerator.
gear numerator. Alternatively, satisfy the following condition: Feed
0843 2084
Alternatively, the following condition exists: Feed gear numerator ≤ denominator × 16
gear numerator > denominator × 16 (except for phase A-/B-specific stand-alone type
detector).
No positive value has been set as the flexible feed Specify a positive value as the flexible feed gear
0853 2085
gear denominator. denominator.
Decrease the machine velocity feedback
0884
The internal value of the machine velocity coefficient.
0885 2088
feedback coefficient has overflowed. Alternatively, use the damping control function,
0886
which has an equivalent effect.
The maximum allowable value for the machine
A value of 100 or greater was specified in the
velocity feedback coefficient for axes with a serial
0883 2088 machine velocity feedback coefficient for an axis
stand-alone type detector is 100. Decrease the
with a serial stand-alone type detector.
setting to within 100.
The internal value for suppressing N pulses has Decrease the setting of the parameter listed at
0996 2099
overflowed. the left.
The retract distance related to an abnormal load
1033 2103 differs between the L and M axes (if the same-axis Set the same value for both the L and M axes.
retract function is in use).
No value has been entered for the AMR
1123 2112 conversion coefficient parameter when a linear Specify the AMR conversion coefficient.
motor is in use.
- 28 -
Parameter
Detail number Cause Measure
number
2118 No dual position feedback conversion coefficient Set an AMR conversion coefficient.
1183 2078 is set.
2079
If the value specified as the number of velocity Decrease the value for the parameter listed at the
1284
2128 pulses is small, the internal value of the current left to within a range where no alarm will occur
1285
control parameter overflows. any longer.
If the value specified as the number of velocity Reset "a" to a smaller value when the setting of
1294
2129 pulses is large, the internal value of the current the parameter listed at the left is broken up into: a
1295
control parameter overflows. × 256 + b
Enlarge the AMR offset setting range
The setting of the linear motor AMR offset has
1393 2139 (N2270#1=1) to input a value within a range of
exceeded ±45.
±60.
1493 2149 A value greater than 6 is set in this parameter. A value not greater than 6 is permitted to be set
in this parameter. Correct the setting with a
value not greater than 6.
1503 2150 A value greater than or equal to 10 is set. The setting must be less than 10.
1793 2179 A negative value or a value greater than the Set a positive value smaller than the setting of
setting of parameter No. 1821 is set. parameter No. 1821.
1853 2185 A negative value or a value greater than the Set a positive value smaller than the setting of
setting of parameter No. 2023 is set. parameter No. 2023.
No positive value has been set in the reference Specify a positive value in the parameter listed at
8213 1821
counter capacity parameter. the left.
10016 The internal value of a parameter used to detect Do not use the runaway detection function
2200#0
10019 runaway has overflowed. (specify bit 0 = 1).
The scale reverse connection bit has been set up The scale reverse connection bit cannot be used
10053 2018#0
for a linear motor. for linear motors.
If you want to use this amplifier, reset the function
The amplifier in use does not support the HC bit listed at the left to 0.
10062 2209#4
alarm avoidance function. If you want to use the HC alarm avoidance
function, use an amplifier that supports it.
Supplementary: Details of an illegal learning control parameter

Set parameter No. 2115 to 0, and parameter No. 2151 to 6265 to
change the value of DGN No. 353 to a binary number. You can find
a detailed cause from the bit position of the obtained binary number at
which 1 is set.
Position Cause
B3 The band-pass filter (No. 2512) is not in the range.
B4 The profile number (No. 2511) is not in the range.
B5 The specified data period (No. 251, 2519, 2521, 2523, or 2525)
is not in the range.
B6 The total number of profiles (No. 2510) is not in the range.
B7 This alarm is issued when G05 starts during a memory clear
operation.
B8 This alarm is issued when the total number of profiles (No. 2510)
is not 0, and the profile number (No. 2511) is 0.
B9 This alarm is issued when the automatically-set thinning shift
value exceeds the range because the specified data period is too
long.
- 29 -
Diagnosis 355 Communication alarm ignore counter (separate type)
Diagnosis 356 Link processing counter (built-in type)
Diagnosis 357 Link processing counter (separate type)
The number of times a communication error occurred during serial

communication with the detector is indicated.
Data transmitted during communication is guaranteed unless another
alarm occurs. However, if the counter value indicated in this
diagnosis information increases in a short period, there is a high
probability that serial communication is disturbed by noise. So, take
sufficient measures to prevent noise.
* For details, refer to a relevant manual on FANUC SERVO
MOTOR αi series.
Diagnosis 358 V ready-off information
This information is provided to analyze the cause of the V

ready-off alarm (servo alarm SV0401).
Convert the indicated value to a binary representation, and check bits
5 to 14 of the binary representation.
When amplifier excitation is turned on, these bits are set to 1
sequentially from the lowest bit, which is bit 5. If the amplifier is
activated normally, bits 5 to 14 are all set to 1.
Therefore, check the bits sequentially from the lowest bit to find the
first bit that is set to 0. This bit indicates that the corresponding
processing could not be completed and so the V ready-off alarm was
caused.
#15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #09 #08
SRDY DRDY INTL CRDY
#07 #06 #05 #04 #03 #02 #01 #00

*ESP
# 06 *ESP Converter emergency stop state released

# 10 CRDY Converter ready
# 12 INTL DB relay released
# 13 DRDY Amplifier ready (amplifier)
# 14 SRDY Amplifier ready (software)
* For details, refer to a relevant manual on FANUC SERVO

MOTOR αi series.
Diagnosis 360 Communication alarm neglect counter (built-in type)

The diagnosis information is the same as that of diagnosis No. 355.
See the descriptions in diagnoses No.355 to 357.
- 30 -
Diagnosis 360 Cumulative value of specified pulses (NC)

[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] -99999999 to 99999999
Cumulative value of move commands distributed from the CNC since
power-on is indicated.
Diagnosis 361 Compensation pulses (NC)

[Data type] 2-word
Cumulative value of compensation pulses (backlash compensation,
pitch error compensation, and so on) distributed from the CNC since
power-on is indicated.
Diagnosis 362 Cumulative value of specified pulses (SV)

[Data type] 2-word
Cumulative value of move pulses and compensation pulses received
by the servo system since power-on is indicated.
Diagnosis 363 Cumulative feedback (SV)

[Data type] 2-word
Cumulative value of positional feedback pulses the servo system
received from the pulse coder since power-on is indicated.
Diagnosis data related to the Inductosyn absolute position detector
Diagnosis 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
M (absolute position of the motor)-S (offset data)
λ (pitch interval)
The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.
Diagnosis 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn

Off set data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.
- 31 -
Diagnosis data related to the serial spindles
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 400 LNK
#7 LNK Communication with the spindle control side has been established.
Diagnosis 403 Temperature of spindle motor

[Data type] Byte spindle
[Unit of data] °C
The temperature of the winding of the spindle motor is indicated.
This information can be used to determine the overheat alarm of the
spindle.
(The temperature that causes an overheat alarm varies from motor to
motor.)
NOTE
1 Temperature information has the following error:
• 50°C to 160°C ±5°C
• 160°C to 180°C ±10°C
2 The indicated temperature and the temperature
causing an overheat alarm have the following error:
• For lower than 160°C 5°C maximum
• For 160 to 180°C 10°C maximum
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE
#0 CRE A CRC error occurred (warning).
#1 FRE A framing error occurred (warning).
#2 SNE The sender or receiver is not correct.
#3 CER An abnormality occurred during reception.
#4 CME No response was returned during automatic scanning.
#5 SCA A communication alarm was issued on the spindle amplifier side.
#7 SSA A system alarm was issued on the spindle amplifier side.
(The above conditions are major causes of alarm SP0749. These
conditions are caused mainly by noise, a broken wire, a momentary
failure of power, and so on.)
Diagnosis 410 Spindle load meter indication [%]

[Data type] Word spindle
[Unit of data] %
-1
Diagnosis 411 Spindle load meter indication [min ]
[Unit of data] min-1
Diagnosis 417 Spindle position coder feedback information

[Data type] 2-word spindle
- 32 -
Diagnosis 418 Positional deviation of spindle in position loop mode

Diagnosis 425 Spindle synchronization error

When the spindles are in synchronization mode, the absolute value of
the synchronization error when each spindle is set as the slave axis is
indicated.
Diagnosis 445 Spindle position data

[Unit of data] Pulse
For the serial spindle, position coder signal pulse data from the
one-rotation signal is indicated as the position data of the spindle.
This data is valid when bit 1 of parameter No. 3117 is set to 1.
To display spindle position data, spindle orientation must be
performed once.
Diagnosis data related to rigid tapping
Diagnosis 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping

Diagnosis 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping

Difference in error amount between spindle and tapping axis during rigid
Diagnosis 452 tapping (momentary value)
[Unit of data] %
Difference in error amount between spindle and tapping axis during rigid
Diagnosis 453 tapping (maximum value)
[Unit of data] %
Diagnosis 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping (cumulative value)
Difference in spindle-converted move command during rigid tapping

Diagnosis 455 (momentary value)
- 33 -
Difference in spindle-converted positional deviation during rigid tapping

Diagnosis 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)
Diagnosis 458 Tapping axis distribution amount during rigid tapping (cumulative value)
Diagnosis 459 Selected spindle number during rigid tapping

[Data type] 2-word path
Difference in spindle-converted move command during rigid tapping

Diagnosis 460 (maximum value)
Difference in spindle-converted machine position during rigid tapping

Difference in spindle-converted machine position during rigid tapping

Diagnosis 462 (maximum value)
Diagnosis data related to the small-hole peck drilling cycle
Total number of times a retraction operation has been performed during

Diagnosis 520 drilling since G83 was specified
Total number of times a retraction operation has been performed in

Diagnosis 521 response to the reception of the overload torque detection signal during
drilling since G83 was specified
The total numbers of times output in Nos.520 and 521 are cleared to
zero by a G83 command issued after the small-hole peck drilling cycle
mode is entered.
Coordinate value of the drilling axis at which retraction operation starts

Diagnosis 522 (least input increment)
Difference between the coordinate value of the drilling axis at which the
previous retraction operation started and the coordinate value of the drilling
Diagnosis 523 axis at which the current retraction operation starts (least input increment:
previous value minus current value)
- 34 -
Diagnosis data related to the dual position feedback function
Diagnosis 550 Closed loop error

[Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999
Diagnosis 551 Semi-closed loop error

Diagnosis 552 Error between semi-closed and closed loops

[Data type] Word axis
Diagnosis 553 Amount of dual position compensation

The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the
following positions:
Semi-closed loop
error (No. 551)
Motor
Command + + +
Σ Kp Speed Machine
control
- + -
Servo amplifier
Ps
Conversion
coefficients
Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)

(No. 550) Amount of dual
position
+ × Time compensation (No.
constant 553)
+ - +
Σ (Parameter No. 2080)
- +
Error between
semi-closed and
closed loops (No.
552)
- 35 -
Automatic alteration of tool position compensation
Diagnosis 0560 Manual tool compensation state number

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] None
When incomplete operation was performed in manual tool
compensation, one of the following numbers is used for notification.
0 : Manual tool compensation was completed normally.
1 : The data of T code command falls outside the allowable range.
2 : The offset value falls outside the range.
3 : The offset number falls outside the range.
4 : Automatic operation or axis movement is being performed in the
CNC.
5 : The CNC is in the tool-nose radius compensation mode.
6 : The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG mode, HNDL (INC)
mode, and REF mode.
7 : A CNC parameter is illegal.
8 : The CNC is in the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode or
tool center point control mode.
State of high-speed HRV current control
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 700 HOK HON
[Data type] Bit axis
The state of high-speed HRV current control is displayed.
#0 HON The motor is controlled in the high-speed HRV current control mode.
#1 HOK This bit is set to 1 when high-speed HRV current control is enabled.
High-speed HRV current control is enabled when the following
conditions are satisfied:
• Bit 0 (HR3) of parameter No. 2013 is set to 1.
• Bit 0 (HR4) of parameter No. 2014 is set to 1.
• Servo software, servo modules, and servo amplifiers suitable for
high-speed HRV current control are used.
• When a separate detector interface unit is used, the separate
detector interface unit is suitable for high-speed HRV current
control.
Thermal growth compensation along tool vector
Diagnosis 705 Thermal growth compensation amount for each axis

[Valid data range] −32768 to +32767
The compensation amount for each axis in thermal growth
compensation along the tool vector is indicated.
- 36 -
Spindle error and warning states
Diagnosis 710 Spindle error state

Diagnosis 712 Spindle warning state

When an error (yellow LED ON + error number indication) or a
warning occurs in a spindle amplifier module (SPM), the number is
indicated on the diagnosis screen.
If neither error nor warning occurs, 0 is indicated.
For spindle errors, refer to "FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series

Maintenance Manual" (B-65285EN).
For warnings, see Subsection 10.1.4, "Spindle Warning Interface" in
this manual.
OVC level
Diagnosis 750 OVC level

[Unit of data] %
The proportion of soft thermal (OVC) in the alarm issuance level is
indicated.
Linear inclination compensation function
Diagnosis 751 Each axis linear inclination compensation

Compensation of linear inclination compensation for each axis is
indicated.
Automatic data backup
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 1016 ANG ACM DT3 DT2 DT1 AEX
[Data type] Bit
The execution state of backup is indicated.
#0 AEX Automatic data backup is being performed.
#1 DT1 Data 1 was updated in the previous backup.
#6 ACM Automatic data backup was performed.
#7 ANG An error occurred in automatic data backup.
- 37 -
Fan rotation speed
Diagnosis 1002 FAN1 rotation speed

[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] 1/min
FAN1, FAN2
The rotation speed of the fans in the CNC controller are
indicated.
FAN3, FAN4
The rotation speed of the fans in the stand-alone CNC with 15"
LCD display are indicated.
If there is no applicable fan, 0 is indicated.
Spindle revolution number history function
Diagnosis 1520 Spindle total revolution number 1
Diagnosis 1521 Spindle total revolution number 2

[Unit of data] 1000 min-1
The number of revolutions of the spindle is counted and the total
number of revolutions is indicated.
Detector battery exhaustion
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 3019 EXP INP ABP
If a detector battery low alarm is issued, the cause can be checked.
#3 ABP The battery of the A/B phase is low.
#4 INP The battery of the serial pulse coder (built-in position detector) is low.
#5 EXP The battery of the separate detector of serial type is low.
Diagnosis data related to axis synchronous control
Diagnosis 3500 Synchronization error amount

The difference in position (synchronization error amount) between the
master axis and slave axis is indicated. This data is indicated for the
slave axis.
- 38 -
Diagnosis 3501 Synchronization error compensation value

Cumulative value of compensation pulses (synchronization error
compensation value) output to the slave axis is indicated. This data is
indicated for the slave axis.
Diagnosis data related to synchronous/composite control
Diagnosis 3502 Indication of synchronization error amount for each axis

When synchronization deviation is detected (SERx of parameter No.
8162 is set to 1), the positional deviation difference of the slave axis
from the master axis is indicated.
The positional deviation difference is:
(Positional deviation of master axis) ± (positional deviation of slave axis)
↑
+ when mirror image is applied to synchronization command
− when mirror image is not applied to synchronization
command
Diagnosis data related to linear scale with absolute address reference marks
Diagnosis 3545 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Measurement point 1

Diagnosis 3549 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Status display
Diagnosis 3550 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Scale value

- 39 -
Diagnosis 3551 Linear scale with absolute address reference marks Scale value (High)

Linear scale with absolute address reference marks
Scale value = Diagnosis No.3551 × 1,000,000,000 + Diagnosis No.3550
Interpolation state
Diagnosis 5000 Smoothing mode
[Data type] Bit

NAME Interpolation state when "1" is indicated
Smooth IPL on When smooth interpolation G5.1 Q2 is specified and all conditions are
satisfied, "1" is indicated. The G5.1 Q2 command turns on AI
contour control at the same time. Therefore, the AI contour control
mode signal AICC<Fn062.0> turns on and AICC1/AICC2 blinks in
the state display at the lower right of the screen.
SMOOTHING ON When nano smoothing G5.1 Q3 is specified and all conditions are
satisfied, "1" is indicated. The G5.1 Q3 command turns on AI
contour control at the same time. Therefore, the AI contour control
mode signal AICC<Fn062.0> turns on and AICC1/AICC2 blinks in
the state display at the lower right of the screen.
- 40 -
1.4 CNC STATE DISPLAY
- Description of each display
(9) DATA IS OUT OF RANGE
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8)
(5) : (10) :
(5) is displayed in the (10) is displayed at the
area for (3) and (4). position where (8) is
now displayed.
Fig. 1.3.2 (a)
(1) Current mode
MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
(2) Automatic operation status

**** : Reset (When the power is turned on or the state in which
program execution has terminated and automatic operation
has terminated.)
STOP : Automatic operation stop (The state in which one block has
been executed and automatic operation is stopped.)
HOLD : Feed hold (The state in which execution of one block has
been interrupted and automatic operation is stopped.)
STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system
operates automatically)
MSTR : Manual numerical command start state (The state in which a
manual numerical command is being executed)
Alternatively, tool retract and recover operation state (The
state in which a recover operation and repositioning
operation are being performed)
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status

MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving.
DWL : Indicates the dwell state.
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
- 41 -
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed

FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being
executed. (Waiting for the complete signal from the PMC)
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
(5) Emergency stop or reset status

--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
--RESET-- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status

ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed
display.)
BAT : Indicates that the voltage of the lithium battery (the
backup battery of the CNC) has decreased. (Blinks in
reversed display.)
APC : Indicates that the voltage of the backup battery of the
absolute pulse coder has decreased. (Blinks in reversed
display.)
FAN : Indicates that the rotation speed of the fan has
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
Space : Indicates a state other than the above.
(7) Current time

hh : mm : ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
(8) Program editing status

INPUT : Indicates that data is being input.
OUTPUT : Indicates that data is being output.
SEARCH : Indicates that a search is being performed.
EDIT : Indicates that another editing operation is being
performed (insertion, modification, etc.)
LSK : Indicates that labels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR : Indicates that the program is being restarted
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
OFST : Indicates that the tool length compensation amount
measurement mode is set (for the machining center
system) or that the tool length compensation amount
write mode is set (for the lathe system).
WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount
measurement mode is set.
AICC1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI
contour control I mode.
AICC2 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI
contour control II mode.
MEM-CHK : Indicates that a program memory check is being made.
WSFT : Indicates that the workpiece shift amount write mode is
set.
LEN : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (tool
length offset value of the M series) is set.
RAD : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (tool
radius compensation amount of the M series) is set.
- 42 -
WZR : Indicates that the active offset value change mode

(workpiece origin offset value) is set.
TOFS : Indicates that the active offset value change mode (tool
offset value of the M series) is set.
OFSX : Indicates that the active offset value change mode
(X-axis tool offset value of the T series) is set.
OFSZ : Indicates that the active offset value change mode
(Z-axis tool offset value of the T series) is set.
OFSY : Indicates that the active offset value change mode
(Y-axis tool offset value of the T series).
TCP : Indicates that operation is being performed in the tool
center point control.
TWP : Indicates that operation is being performed in the tilted
working plane command mode.
Space : Indicates that no editing operation is being performed.
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation

When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.),
when input is disabled (wrong mode, write disabled, etc.), or when
input/output operation is incorrect (wrong mode, etc.), a warning
message is displayed. In this case, the CNC does not accept the setting
or input/output operation (retry the operation according to the
message).
Example 1)
When a parameter is entered
Example 2)
When a parameter is entered
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
- 43 -
(10) Tool post name

The number of a path whose status is indicated is displayed.
PATH1 : Indicates that the status being indicated is for path 1.
Other names can be used depending on the settings of
parameters 3141 to 3147.
The tool post name is displayed at the position where (8) is
now displayed.
While the program is edited, (8) is displayed.
- 44 -
1.5 OPERATING MONITOR
Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter
can be displayed.
1.5.1 Display Method

1 Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of
parameter No.3111)
2 Press the key to display the position display screen.
3 Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONITOR] is
displayed.
4 Press the soft key [MONITOR], then the operating monitor
screen is displayed.
CAUTION
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to
200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio
of the current spindle speed to the maximum
spindle speed (100%). Although the speed meter
normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor,
it can also be used to indicate the speed of the
spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to
1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed
are set to parameter No. 3151 to 3153. If
parameters 3151 to 3153 are all zero, the load
meter of the basic axes are displayed.
- 45 -
1.5.2 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM
[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path
#5 OPM Operating monitor

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
#6 OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen indicates:

0: Spindle motor speed
1: Spindle speed
- 46 -
1.6 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
The waveform diagnosis display function traces values of data such as

servo positional deviation amount, torque, and machine signals and
plots and displays a graph representing changes in the traced data.
This function facilitates servo motor and spindle motor adjustment and
fault location when trouble has occurred.
The waveform diagnosis function can trace the following data:

(1) Servo-related data
• Positional deviation amount
• Pulse amount after distribution
• Torque amount
• Pulse amount after acceleration/deceleration
• Current command value
• Heat simulation data
• Composite speed of all axes
(2) Spindle-related data
• Speed of each spindle
• Load meter value
• Spindle-converted positional deviation difference
(3) Machine signal
• ON/OFF state of the external I/O signal specified by a
signal address
Up to four servo and spindle data items or up to 32 signals can be

traced at the same time.
Data can be traced under the following three conditions:

(1) Data is acquired at any point of time.
(2) Data immediately after a specified event is acquired.
(3) Data immediately before a specified event is acquired.
In condition (1), the time to end tracing can be delayed by a specified

time. This allows data before and after the occurrence of an event
can be acquired.
Traced data can be output to an external input/output device.
- 47 -
1.6.1 Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen
1 Press the function key .

2 Pressing the [W.DGNS] soft key displays a screen as shown
below.
3 Pressing the [(OPRT)] operation soft key displays the following
soft keys:
- Servo and spindle data

Each waveform is drawn in a specified color. The numbers and
colors of the first and second waveforms are indicated in the upper left
part, and the numbers and colors of the third and fourth waveforms are
indicated in the upper right part.
- I/O signals
When displayed over the waveforms of servo and spindle data, up to
four I/O signals are plotted in the lower half of the screen.
In this case, the addresses of the plotted signals are indicated in the
second column on the left side.
When only signal data is displayed, up to nine signals are plotted in
the entire screen.
The addresses of the plotted signals are indicated in the first column
on the left side.
- 48 -
1.6.2 Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen
Display
2 Press the soft key [W.DGNS].
3 Pressing the soft key [PARAME] displays the waveform
diagnosis parameter screen.
- 49 -
Editing
1 Follow the steps explained in "Display" to display the screen.
2 Pressing the cursor keys moves the cursor on the

screen.
3 Press numeric keys, then press the MDI key or [INPUT]
soft key to set the entered value.
4 Press the [(OPRT)] operation soft key to display the following
operation soft keys:
Pressing continuous menu key displays the following soft

keys:
Pressing [TRACE] displays the trace setting screen of the

waveform diagnosis parameter screen.
Pressing [WAVE] displays the waveform setting screen of the
Pressing [SIGNAL] displays the signal setting screen of the
- 50 -
Trace setting
- Trace condition
One of the following three trace conditions can be selected to start and
end tracing:
Type 1 (1: JUST)

Data is traced only for a specified period of time immediately after the
[TRACE] soft key is pressed.
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed
Type 2 (2: AFTER)

When the [TRACE] soft key has been pressed, data is traced only for
a specified period of time immediately after a specified trigger event
occurs.
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed Event occurs
Type 3 (3: BEFORE)

When the [TRACE] soft key has been pressed, data is traced only for
a specified period of time immediately before a specified trigger event
occurs.
Trace time
Time
[TRACE] pressed Event occurs
Setting Trace condition

1 Type 1
2 Type 2
3 Type 3
- 51 -
- Sampling cycle
Set the sampling cycle period for waveforms and the sampling cycle
for signals as follows:
Type Setting
Waveform Multiple of 2 ranging from 2 ms to 4096 ms
Signal Multiple of 2 ranging from 2 ms to 4096 ms
- Trace time
Set the period for tracing data.
The trace time specifies a period of time during which tracing is to be
performed for waveforms and signals. If the trace period is
insufficient, increase the sampling cycle, or decrease the measurement
items.
Approximately 32700 points of data can be traced. One point is used
for each sampling cycle of one channel. For signal measurement,
one channel is used regardless of the number of signals measured at
the same time.
When one channel of waveform is traced with a sampling cycle of 4
ms, tracing can be performed for 130 s.
When one channel of waveform is traced with a sampling cycle of
4096 ms, tracing can be performed for 37 hours.
Valid data range: 2 to 133939200

Unit of data: msec
Example of maximum trace time determined by the sampling cycle
and the number of channels
No. of channels
1ch 4ch + signal
Cycle
2 ms 65 s 13 s
4 ms 130 s 26 s
8 ms 261 s 52 s
4096 ms 37 hours and 12 minutes 7 hours and 26 minutes
- Delay time
When type 3 is selected as the trace condition, the end of tracing can
be delayed by a specified time after the occurrence of an event.
Valid data range: 0 to 65528 (in 8-ms increments)
Unit of data: ms
NOTE
If the input numeric value is not a multiple of 8 ms,
the value is rounded off to the nearest multiple of 8
ms.
- Graduation unit on the horizontal axis

Set an increment per graduation on the horizontal axis.
Valid data range : 1 to 100000000
Unit of data : ms
- 52 -
Trigger setting
- Trigger type
If you specify the occurrence of an event as a trigger when selecting a
trace condition in the trace setting of the waveform diagnosis
parameter screen (2: AFTER or 3: BEFORE is specified as the
trace condition), set the type of the trigger.
If 2 (AFTER) is selected as the trace condition, tracing starts when a
set trigger event occurs. If 3 (BEFORE) is selected as the trace
condition, tracing ends when the trigger event occurs.
Setting Trigger type

1 Alarms only
2 A specified signal is turned on.
3 A specified signal is turned off.
4 The status of a specified signal changes.
5 An alarm is issued, or a specified signal is turned on.
6 An alarm is issued, or a specified signal is turned off.
7 An alarm is issued, or the status of a specified signal changes.
- Alarm type
When the issuance of an alarm is specified as a trigger in the setting of
the trigger type (the trigger type is set to 1, 5, 6, or 7), set the type of
alarms used as a trigger as listed in the table below. When a
particular alarm type is not to be specified, use alarm signal AL as the
trigger.
Setting Alarm type

1 PW alarms
2 IO alarms
3 PS alarms
4 OT alarms
5 OH alarms
6 SV alarms
7 SR alarms
8 MC alarms
9 SP alarms
10 DS alarms
- 53 -
Setting Alarm type

11 IE alarms
12 BG alarms
13 SN alarms
14 EX alarms
15 PC alarms
- Alarm No.
If 6 (SV alarms) or 9 (SP alarms) is specified as the alarm type,
specify the target alarm number with an integer from 1 to 9999.
To specify all alarm numbers as the alarm target, set -1.
- Axis No.
If 6 (SV alarms) or 9 (SP alarms) is specified as the alarm type,
specify the target axis for the alarm with an axis number.
To set all axes as the alarm target, set -1.
NOTE
For multiaxis control, the axis number must be an
absolute axis number instead of a relative axis
number in each path.
- Signal address
When use of a signal as a trigger is specified for the trigger type (the
trigger type is set to 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7), enter the address of the signal
used as the trigger.
With a multi-path PMC, an address on a PMC path is set by
specifying the path number together with the address.
Example: 2:F0001.1
As shown in the above example, set a PMC path number plus a colon
(:) plus an address. With the standard PMC, which has just one path,
no path number needs to be specified.
NOTE
1 For PMC path numbers, refer to "Multi-Path PMC
Function" in "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL-A PMC
Programming Manual" (B-63983EN).
2 If the keyboard used does not have the ":" key, use
";" or "/" instead of ":".
- 54 -
Waveform setting
- Trace data type

Set the type number of data to be traced as listed below:
Setting Type Unit
0 (Not traced)
1 Servo positional deviation Pulse (detection unit)
2 Servo pulses after distribution Pulse (detection unit)
3 Servo torque %
4 Servo pulses after Pulse (detection unit)
acceleration/deceleration
5 Actual servo speed min-1
6 Servo current command value %
7 Servo heat simulation data %
8 Composite speed of all axes mm/min or min-1
9 Spindle speed min-1
10 Spindle load meter %
11 Difference in spindle-converted Pulse (detection unit)
positional deviation
NOTE
The servo torque and current command value are
represented by percentages to parameter No. 2086
(rated current).
- 55 -
- Axis number/path number

Specify an axis number or path number according to the type of data
to be traced as follows:
Type Setting
Servo positional deviation Controlled axis number (1 to 32)
Servo pulses after distribution
Servo torque
Servo pulses after
Actual servo speed
Servo current command value
Servo heat simulation data
Composite speed of all axes Path number (1 to 10)
Spindle speed Controlled spindle number (1 to 8)
Spindle load meter
Difference in spindle-converted
NOTE
- Graduation unit on the axis

Set an increment per graduation on the vertical axis. This setting is
valid for servo and spindle data.
Valid data range : 1 to 100000000
- Waveform color
Set the number of a color to be used for drawing the waveform as
listed below. The numbers represent associated system colors.
Default drawing color

Setting
（Associated system color）
Black
0
(Data display color)
Red
1
(Alarm display color)
Green
2
(Title display color)
Yellow
3
(Cursor display color)
Blue
4
(Subtitle display color)
Purple
5
(Input key display color)
Blue
6
(Color selection window bar display color)
White
7
(Background color for specifiable data)
- 56 -
Signal setting
- Signal setting
When the ON/OFF state of an input/output signal is to be traced, set
the address of the signal.
With a multi-path PMC, an address on a PMC path is set by
specifying the path number together with the address.
Example: 2:F0001.1
As shown in the above example, set a PMC path number plus a colon
(:) plus an address. With the standard PMC, which has just one path,
no path number needs to be specified.
NOTE
1 For PMC path numbers, refer to "Multi-Path PMC
Function" in "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL-A PMC
Programming Manual" (B-63983EN).
2 If the keyboard used does not have the ":" key, use
";" or "/" instead of ":".
3 For signal data, even when just one signal address
is input in an address 1 to 32, one channel is used.
4 When tracing is not performed, enter 0.
5 Up to 32 signals can be measured at the same time.
- 57 -
Guide to selecting items

- Alarm type
1 When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed with the cursor positioned
at the alarm type in the trigger setting, the [EXPLAIN] soft key
appears.
2 Pressing the [EXPLAIN] soft key displays a list of alarm types.
- Data type
at the trace data type in the trace waveform setting, the
[EXPLAIN] soft key appears.
2 Pressing the [EXPLAIN] soft key displays a list of trace data
types.
- 58 -
- Waveform color
at the waveform color in the trace waveform setting, the
[EXPLAIN] soft key appears.
2 Pressing the [EXPLAIN] soft key displays a list of waveform
colors
- 59 -
1.6.3 Tracing Data
Starting tracing
1 Display the waveform diagnosis graph screen.
2 Press the [TRACE] soft key to start tracing.
"Now Sampling…" appears in the upper part of the screen. When

tracing ends, the indication "Now Sampling…" disappears.
Even when the screen display is changed to another screen, tracing
continues.
Canceling tracing
When the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed during tracing, tracing stops.
Moving, extending, and reducing a waveform
When [H-DOBL] or [H-HALF] is pressed, the length of the time axis

on one screen is extended or reduced, respectively.
When a waveform cannot fit in one screen, the time axis can be
moved by pressing [←TIME] or [TIME→].
Furthermore, pressing [CH-1], [CH-2], [CH-3], or [CH-4], a submenu

appears.
- 60 -
When [WAVE.EX] or [WAVE.RE] is pressed, the length of the time

axis on one screen is extended or reduced, respectively. The
graduation unit on the horizontal axis, which is a parameter, also
changes automatically.
The graduation unit changes from 1 to 2 to 5 to 10 to 20 to 50 to 100,
and so on.
When [WAVE.↑] or [WAVE.↓] is pressed, each waveform of servo
and spindle data can be moved upward or downward.
Displaying signal data
Up to 32 signals can be measured at the same time. Up to nine

signals can be displayed at the same time if only signal data is
displayed, or up to four signals can be displayed if signal data is
displayed over waveforms.
When [SIG.↑] or [SIG.↓] is pressed, the currently displayed signals
are changed.
NOTE
Signal data cannot be moved.
- 61 -
1.6.4 Outputting Data

Waveform diagnosis data can be output to an input/output device.
Specifying a format
When outputting data, you can select one of the two formats, which
are the FS16i compatible format (called the 16 compatible format
hereinafter) and the FS30i format (called the 30 format hereinafter).
If bit 0 (IOF) of parameter No. 10600 is set to 0, the 30 format is
selected; if bit 0 (IOF) of parameter No. 10600 is set to 1, the 16
compatible format is selected.
Output format
Traced data is input or output as a text file with the following format:
- Identifiers
Identifier word (T) Meaning
T0/T1 Header
T60 Servo positional deviation
T61 Servo pulses after distribution
T62 Servo torque
T63 Actual servo speed
T64 Servo current command value
T65 Servo heat simulation data
T68 Measurement item
T69 Date and time (start of measurement)
T70 Servo pulses after acceleration/deceleration
T75 Composite speed of all axes
T80 Spindle speed
T81 Spindle load meter
T82 Difference in spindle-converted positional deviation
T90 Measurement period (waveform)
T91 Measurement period (signal)
T92 Date and time (end of measurement)
T98 Signal data
(1) Header
30 format
T 1 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
16 compatible format
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
- 62 -
(2) Date and time of start/end of tracing

- Starting date and time
T 6 9 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
Year Month Day Hour Min Sec
- Ending date and time
T 9 2 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
Year Month Day Hour Min Sec
NOTE
The ending date and time is output only in the 30
format.
(3) Waveform sampling cycle
T 9 0 D * * * * ;
Waveform sampling cycle
(4) Signal sampling cycle
T 9 1 D * * * * ;
Signal sampling perio
NOTE
The waveform sampling cycle and signal sampling
cycle are output only in the 30 format.
- 63 -
(5) Selection items
T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
Measurement item Axis No./path

No./signal address
P0 Servo positional deviation Controlled axis number
P1 Servo pulses after distribution (1 to 32)
P2 Servo torque
P3 Actual servo speed
P4 Servo current command value
P5 Servo heat simulation data
P6 Servo pulses after
P10 Composite speed of all axes Path number (1 to 10)
P20 Spindle speed Controlled spindle
P21 Spindle load meter number
P22 Difference in spindle-convert (1 to 8)
P30 Signal Signal address
NOTE
Items P6 to P30 are output only in the 30 format.
- 64 -
(6) Waveform diagnosis data
T 6 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 1 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 2 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 3 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 4 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 6 5 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 7 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 7 5 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 0 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 1 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 8 2 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
T 9 8 D * * , * * , ~ * * ;
D** ~ ** : Waveform diagnosis data × No. of axes/No. of

paths/No. of signals
Blocks are output in the following order:

Header (16 compatible/30 format)
Date and time (start of measurement) (16 compatible/30 format)
Date and time (end of measurement) (30 format only)
Waveform measurement period (30 format only)
Signal measurement period (30 format only)
Selection item (16 compatible/30 format)
Waveform diagnosis data (16 compatible/30 format)
NOTE
Signal data of waveform diagnosis data is output
after all waveform data is output.
- 65 -
- Sample file
T01WAVE DIAGNOSE Header

T69D20040101,120125 Start time
T92D20040101,120130 End time
T90D2 Waveform period
T91D4 Signal period
T68P0D1,2 Measurement item/axis
T68P4D1
T68P10D1
T68P30DG0010.4,G0010.5,G0010.6 Measurement item/signal
T60D643,6420 Waveform data

T64D270
T75D1855
T60D673,6451
T64D265
T75D1855
T60D702,6480
T64D268
T75D1855
:
T75D1855
T98D0,0,1 Signal data
T98D0,0,1
T98D0,0,1
:
- 66 -
Outputting a file
1 Display the waveform diagnosis graph screen.
2 When the [(OPRT)] operation soft key is pressed, soft keys are
displayed in the following operation selection state:
3 Change the mode to the EDIT mode.

4 Enter a file name in the key-in buffer, and press the [PUNCH]
soft key. If no file name is input, the file name is assumed to be
WAVE-DGN.TXT by default.
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key shown below to start outputting data:
6 When data output ends, or when the [CAN] soft key is pressed,
the initial operation selection state is restored.
NOTE
While data is being traced, data output is not
allowed.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10600 IOF
[Input type] Parameter input

[Type of data] Bit
#0 IOF The output format used for waveform diagnosis is:

0: 30i /31i /32i format (30 format).
1: 16i /18i /21i format (16 compatible format).
- 67 -
1.7 COLOR SETTING SCREEN
On the color setting screen, the colors of the VGA screen can be set.
1.7.1 Screen Display

2 Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[COLOR] soft key is displayed.
3 Pressing the [COLOR] soft key displays the color setting screen.
- 68 -
1.7.2 Operations for Color Setting
Modification to color settings (color palette values)

1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key displays the following operation
soft keys:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are
to be modified.
The current color palette values of the individual color elements
are displayed.
3 Select a color element to be modified, with the [RED], [GREEN],
or [BLUE] operation soft key.
Multiple color elements can be selected at a time.
Each of the [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys toggles
between selection and deselection each time the soft key is
pressed.
(The [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] soft keys, when not
displayed, can be displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key.)
4 By pressing the [BRIGHT] or [DARK] operation soft key,
modify the brightness of the selected color element.
Storing color settings (color palette values)

Set color palette values can be stored.
1 Select a storage area by pressing the [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or

[COLOR3] operation soft key.
Color 1 ....... Color 1 (standard color) data parameters (Nos. 6581
to 6595)
Color 2 ....... Color 2 data parameters (Nos. 10421 to 10435)
Color 3 ....... Color 3 data parameters (Nos. 10461 to 10475)
2 Press the [STORE] operation soft key. The following operation

soft keys are displayed:
3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. The current color palette
values are stored in the selected area.
Pressing the [CAN] operation soft key or the leftmost key does
not store the current color palette values.
- 69 -
Calling color settings (color palette values)
1 Select an area for storing color palette values by pressing the

[COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] operation soft key.
(The [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] soft keys, when
not displayed, can be displayed by pressing the rightmost soft
key.)
2 Press the [RECALL] operation soft key. The following operation
soft keys are displayed:
3 Press the [EXEC] operation soft key. Color palette values are
called from the selected area for modification to the color
settings. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are
stored.
Pressing the [CANCEL] operation soft key or the leftmost key
does not call color palette values.
- 70 -
1.7.3 Parameter
6581 RGB value of color palette 1 for color set 1
[Data type] 2-word

[Unit of data] rrggbb 6-digit number
(rr: Red data, gg: Green data, bb: Blue data)
When a number shorter than 6 digits is specified, the unspecified
higher digit or digits are treated as 0.
[Valid data range] 00 to 15 for each color data (same as the tone level on the color setting
screen)
When a value equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification
of 15 is assumed.
(Example) When setting the color tone level as red = 1, green = 2, and blue = 3,
specify "10203".
- 71 -
[Data type] 2-word

screen)
of 15 is assumed.
specify "10203".
- 72 -
[Data type] 2-word

screen)
of 15 is assumed.
specify "10203".
- 73 -
1.7.4 Notes
(1) Immediately after the power is turned on, color 1 is used as the
screen color.
If no color palette values are stored in color 1, the FANUC
standard color is used for display.
(2) Do not modify the parameters of the standard color data by direct
MDI key input. When modifying the parameters of the RGB
value, be sure to perform a storage operation on the color setting
screen.
(3) If the screen display becomes invisible because an incorrect
value is input in an RGB value parameter, turn off the power
then turn on the power again while holding down the ＋
keys. All stored color data is cleared, and the screen is

displayed in the FANUC standard color.
This operation, however, clears all contents of the memory
including parameters and programs. Take special care when
performing this operation.
- 74 -
1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE

MONOCHROME LCD
The brightness of the monochrome LCD can be adjusted.
- Procedure
To adjust the brightness of the monochrome LCD, follow the
procedure below on the SETTING (HANDY) screen.
2 Press soft key [SETING] to display the SETTING DATA screen.
Press multiple times until the SETTING (HANDY)
screen appears.
Fig. 1.8 (a) Adjustment of the brightness of the SETTING screen
3 Move the cursor to the CONTRAST item.

4 When soft key [(OPRT)] is pressed, soft keys [ON:1] and
[OFF:0] are displayed.
Each time soft key [ON:1] is pressed, the brightness of the screen
is increased.
Each time soft key [OFF:0] is pressed, the brightness of the
screen is decreased.
NOTE
1 The new brightness of the screen is saved across
power-off.
2 This setting item appears only when the
monochrome LCD is connected.
- 75 -
1.9 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION
When the I/O Link Option for the FANUC servo unit βi series (called
I/O Link βi below) is used for CNC additional axes (slaves), the
Power Mate CNC manager function can be used to display and set up
various types of data of these slaves on the CNC.
The Power Mate CNC manager function enables the following display
and setting operations:
Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
Parameter display and setting
Alarm display
Diagnosis data display
System configuration screen display
Up to eight slaves can be connected to each I/O Link channel.
- 76 -
1.9.1 Screen Display

2 Press the continuous menu key several times until the
[P.MATE MGR.] soft key is displayed.
3 Pressing the [P.MATE MGR.] soft key displays the absolute

coordinate screen, which is the initial screen of the Power Mate
CNC manager. On this screen, you can select each of the
following items by pressing the corresponding soft key:
ABS: Absolute coordinate display
MACHIN: Machine coordinate display
PARAM: Parameter screen
MSG: Alarm list
DGNOS: Diagnosis screen
SYSTEM: System information
To select another function after one of the functions listed above
is selected, press the return menu key until the soft keys
appear as shown above. Then, select the desired function.
4 Terminating the Power Mate CNC manager function
Press the return menu key once or twice. The soft keys of the
CNC system appear, and the Power Mate CNC manager
terminates.
Alternatively, you can select another function by pressing an
MDI function key ( , , , etc.) to terminate the
Power Mate CNC manager function.
Selecting a slave
When slaves are connected to multiple I/O Link channels, pressing
[NEXT CH.] or [PREV. CH.] displayed by pressing the [(OPRT)] soft
key changes the displayed channel.
In the upper section of the screen, the following information items are
displayed for the connected slaves (up to eight slaves):
- I/O Link group number (0 to 15)
- Alarm status
The cursor is positioned at the number of the slave for which to
display information (active slave). When multiple slaves are
connected, pressing the [NEXT SLAVE] or [PREV. SLAVE] changes
the active slave.
You can display the slave status and select a slave on any screen of the
Power Mate CNC manager function.
- 77 -
Current position display screen

The current position display screen displays the current position and
actual feedrate of the slave.
The following current position data is displayed:
Absolute coordinate (current position in the absolute coordinate
system)
Machine coordinate (current position in the machine coordinate
system)
- Display method
Press soft key [ABS] or [MACHIN] to display the absolute coordinate
screen or machine coordinate screen, respectively.
Power Mate CNC manager: Machine coordinate screen
Axis name display

You can change the axis name by setting it in the I/O Link βi
parameters (Nos. 0024 and 0025). Up to two characters can be set.
(Use the ASCII codes of 0 to 9 and/or A to Z). When no axis name
is set or the setting data is invalid, the axis name is set to 1.
This axis name is used only for position display of the Power Mate
CNC manager function and irrelevant to the controlled axis on the
CNC.
- 78 -
Parameter screen
The parameters required for the functions of the slave must be
specified in advance.
Press soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
This screen displays only the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi series I/O Link
Option Maintenance Manual.
• Selecting and searching for a parameter

1 First, select the active slave.
2 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
3 Enter a parameter number and press the [NO. SRH] soft key.
The search starts.
You can also select a desired parameter number by pressing
the cursor keys and page keys
and moving the cursor.
- 79 -
• Setting a parameter
You can directly set an I/O Link βi parameter of the slave from
the CNC.
1 Select a desired parameter using either of the above
methods.
2 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys
appear:
3 Enter setting data.

4 Press the [INPUT] soft key or MDI key .
Alarm screen
If an alarm is issued for the slave, “ALARM” is displayed in the slave
status field in the upper section of the screen.
At this time, you can display the alarm screen to check the details of
the alarm.
Up to 40 alarm codes are displayed on the screen.
For details of the alarms, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi series
I/O Link Option Maintenance Manual.
- Display method
Press the [MSG] soft key. On the screen, only error codes are
displayed.
Example of displaying alarms for I/O Link βi of slave 0
- 80 -
Diagnosis screen
The diagnosis screen displays diagnosis information of the slave.
Diagnosis data is displayed in bit or integer (decimal) representation.
For details of diagnosis data, refer to FANUC SERVO MOTOR βi
series I/O Link Option Maintenance Manual.
- Display method
1 Press the continuous menu key .
2 Press soft key [DGNOS] to display the diagnosis screen.
Searching for diagnosis data

1 First, select the active slave.
2 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
3 Enter a diagnosis number and press the [NO. SRH] soft key.
The search starts.
You can also select a desired parameter number by pressing the
cursor keys and page keys and moving
the cursor.
- 81 -
System configuration screen

The system configuration screen displays information on the system
software of slaves.
- Display method
1 Press the continuous menu key .
2 Press the [SYSTEM] soft key to select the system configuration
screen.
Series and edition of the I/O Link βi system software
- 82 -
1.9.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters
Outputting parameters
Parameters are output to the CNC memory or a memory card as a data
file in the program format. Set the first registration program number
in parameter No. 8760. For each slave, program with a
predetermined number is created.
When parameters are output to the CNC memory, a program with the
specified program number is created.
When parameters are output to a memory card, a file is created, of
which file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
Program number = setting-of-parameter (parameter No. 8760) + (m -

1) × 100 + n × 10
m: Channel number (1 to 4)
n: Group number
Example: When parameter No. 8760 is set to 8000
Channel 1 (I/O Link β: Group 0)
8000 + 0*100 + 0*10 = 8000
8000 + 1*100 + 1*10 = 8110
8000 + 2*100 + 2*10 = 8220
8000 + 3*100 + 3*10 = 8330
The group number is the slave number displayed in the slave status
field in the upper section of the screen in reverse video.
When bit 3 (PMO) of parameter No. 0961 is set to 1, the numbers of
the parameters to be output can be set only with a group number.
Select a desired input device using bits 1 (MD1) and 2 (MD2) of

parameter No. 0960.
Connect a memory card or check the unused area of the CNC
memory, then follow the steps below:
1 For multipath control, display the Power Mate CNC manager
screen from the screen for path 1.
2 Select the active slave.
Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
3 Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
4 Press the [EXEC] soft key.

During input, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.
- 83 -
NOTE
1 Parameters can be saved in other than the MEM
mode or in the emergency stop status.
2 To save parameters in a memory card, if a file with
the same name is found in the memory card, the
parameters cannot be saved. Delete the file from
the memory card or change the file name by setting
parameter No. 8760.
To save parameters in a program area, save
operation is performed according to the setting of
bit 2 (REP) of parameter No. 3201.
Inputting parameters
A data file of parameters output to the CNC memory or a memory
card as a program is input to the slave determined by the program
number. The program number and memory device are determined
as described in “Outputting parameters.”
1 For multipath control, display the Power Mate CNC manager

screen from the screen for path 1.
2 Select the active slave.
3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
4 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:
5 Press the [EXEC] soft key.

During output, “OUTPUT” blinks in the message field.
NOTE
1 Parameters can be input in other than the MEM
mode or in the emergency stop status.
2 For multipath control, parameters can be input and
output only using the Power Mate CNC manager
screen for path 1. They can only be input from
and output to the CNC memory for path 1.
- 84 -
1.9.3 Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PPE PMN MD2 MD1

#1 MD1
#2 MD2 The slave parameters are input from and output to either of the
following devices:
Parameter MD2 Parameter MD1 I/O destination
0 0 Program memory
0 1 Memory card
#3 PMN The Power Mate CNC manager function is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled. (Communication with the slave is not performed.)
#4 PPE Setting slave parameters using the Power Mate CNC manager:
0: Can always be performed regardless of the setting of PWE.
1: Follows the setting of PWE.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0961 PMO

[Data type] Bit
#3 PMO The O number of a program for saving and restoring the I/O LINK β
parameter is set based on:
0: Group number and channel number
1: Group number only
8760 Program number of data input/output (Power Mate CNC manager)

[Data type] 2-word path
This parameter sets the program numbers of programs to be used for
inputting and outputting slave data (parameters) when the Power Mate
CNC manager function is used.
For a slave specified with I/O LINK channel m and group n, the
following program number is used:
Setting + (m - 1) × 100 + n × 10
If the setting is 0, the parameters of the slave specified with channel 1
and group 0 cannot be input from or output to the CNC memory
because the program number is set to 0. The parameters can be input
from and output to a memory card.
(Set a value with which any used program number does not exceed
99999999.)
- 85 -
Warning
If an alarm is issued for the Power Mate CNC manager, a warning
message is displayed.
Message Description
DATA ERROR An attempt was made to execute [PUNCH] (NC → β) for a program
not found in the program area.
WRITE PROTECTED An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) for a program
area when the memory protection signal (KEY) is off.
EDIT REJECTED An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the program
area already contained a program with the same name as that to be
created by executing [READ] (β → NC).
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the number
of the program to be created by executing [READ] (β → NC) was
selected.
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when bit 0 (TVC)
of CNC parameter No. 0000 was set to 1. (Parameters Nos. 0000 to
0019 are output, but parameter No. 0020 and subsequent parameters
are not output.)
An attempt was made to execute [PUNCH] (NC → β) when a memory
card did not contain any program for which [PUNCH] (NC → β) could
be executed.
An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) for a protected
memory card.
NO MORE SPACE An attempt was made to execute [READ] (β → NC) when the program
area did not have enough unused space.
FORMAT ERROR Data other than digits, signs, CAN, and INPUT was entered as the
setting of a parameter.
TOO MANY FIGURES Data consisting of 9 or more digits was entered for a bit-type
parameter.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The setting exceeds the valid data range.
- 86 -
1.9.4 Notes
- Connecting an I/O Link

When I/O Link βi is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC assigns
I/O addresses. The slave data is input and output in 16-byte units.
Therefore, be sure to specify 128 as the number of input/output points.
Up to eight slaves can be connected.
The module name is OC021 (16-bit input) or OC020 (16-byte output).
BASE is always 0 and SLOT is always 1.
- Function of ignoring the Power Mate CNC manager

After setting and checking data required for each slave connected, you
can stop communication with the Power Mate CNC manager function
to send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave.
When bit 3 (PMN) of parameter No. 960 is set to 1, communication
between the CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is all open to the
ladder. While this bit is 1, the Power Mate CNC manager function
does not operate.
- Data protection key
When the program data protection key of the CNC is on, no
parameters can be input to the CNC program memory.
- 87 -
1.10 SERVO GUIDE MATE
The servo guide mate enables various types of data related to the servo
motor and spindle motor to be displayed on the screen in the form of
graphs. This allows you to readily measure the machine precision,
thereby making it easy to grasp changes in precision resulting from
the aging process, an earthquake, or collision of the machine.
Overview
Set up as outlined in Fig. 12.5(a), the servo guide mate displays
graphs representing the feedback data related to the servo motor and
spindle motor that are controlled through the execution of the program.
It features such functions as drawing graphs representing
chronological changes in data and the motor path, as well as
displaying an enlarged view of error associated with the circular
operation.
CNC
G r a p h d is p la y
Feedback
d a ta
P a r a m e te r s e ttin g
D a ta b u f f e r P r o g r a m e x e c u tio n
F e e d a x is
S e rv o m o to r
S p in d le m o to r
S p in d le
Sensor
Fig. 1.10 (a) Outline of the servo guide mate setup
- 88 -
1.10.1 Wave Display

The wave display function can acquire various types of data related to
the servo motor and spindle motor and display graphs in several
different drawing modes for the analysis of the measurement data. A
graph is made up of the two elements described below. To display a
graph, therefore, operations for the wave display need to be set, in
addition to the measurement data.
1 Measurement data
This refers to raw data, such as position and torque, acquired
from the CNC on a per-channel basis.
2 Operations
This collectively refers to the results of operations performed for
measurement data. A graph cannot be displayed unless
necessary operations are set.
This denotes that the following relationship holds true:
Wave display (graph display) = measurement data + operations
In the remainder of this chapter, the term channel (CH) is used to refer
to a specific set of measurement data and the term draw to refer to a
specific displayed wave.
CH1 : Measurement data 1
Draw3 : Display waveform 3
A conceptual diagram of the wave display is shown below.
Measurement data Display data
Operation
CH1 Draw1
Data
CH2 Draw2 Screen
acquisition display
CH3 Draw3
CH4 Draw4
Measurements of both the servo motor and spindle motor can be made
for up to four channels simultaneously. Also, data can be measured
at up to 10000 points per measurement item.
The following five drawing modes are available.
1 Y-time graph
This mode displays wave data along the time axis, as by an
oscilloscope.
2 XY graph
This mode provides a 2-dimensional path display using 2-axis
data.
3 Circle graph
This mode displays an enlarged view of the path deviation from
the specified circle arising during circular cutting.
4 Fourier graph
This mode displays the frequency spectrum by performing digital
Fourier conversion for the range of data displayed by the Y-time
graph.
5 Bode graph
This mode displays a Bode diagram in the form of single
logarithm graph for the horizontal axis.
- 89 -
Note
- Axis number
NOTE
1.10.1.1 Y-time graph

The Y-time graph displays wave data for the measurement data along
the time axis, as by an oscilloscope.
Up to four draws can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the Y-time graph
Procedure
The procedure for displaying the measurement data is described
below.
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until [SERVO
GUIDE MATE] is displayed.
3 Click the [SERVO GUIDE MATE] soft key.
4 Click the [Y-TIME] soft key.
The wave display screen is displayed as shown below.
5 Click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key.

6 Click the [DATA IN] soft key.
- 90 -
7 Click the [SAMPLING] soft key.

The data-in screen is displayed as shown below.
8 Move the cursor to the parameter you want to set, by pressing the
cursor key.
9 Enter data and then press the key.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you set all the parameters.
11 Click the [SET CHANNEL] soft key.
The channel setting screen is displayed as shown below.
To set any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the setting screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
cursor key.
- 91 -
13 Enter data and the press the key.

15 Click the [RE-DSPGRAPH] soft key.
16 Click the [OPERATION & GRAPH] soft key.
The operation and graph setting screen is displayed as shown
below.
To set any draw other than the one currently displayed, display
the setting screen for the desired draw by pressing the or
key.
cursor key.
- 92 -
21 Click the [SCALE SET] soft key.

The scale setting screen is displayed as shown below.
cursor key.
27 Click the [START] soft key.
28 Start the automatic or manual operation.
29 When the measurement is completed, the wave display screen is
displayed as shown below.
- 93 -
- Changing the operation and graph setting screen

The procedure for changing the operation and graph setting screen as
necessary is described below.
below.
key.
cursor key.
- 94 -

Based on the new operation and graph settings, the wave display
screen is displayed as shown below.
- Changing the scale screen

The procedure for changing the scale settings as necessary is
described below.
cursor key.
- 95 -

Based on the new scale settings, the wave display screen is
- Manipulating the Y-time graph

By clicking the following soft keys, you can perform the operations
corresponding to them.
[MEASUREMENT] : Performs a measurement-related operation.
[←] : Shifts the time axis to the right.
[→] : Shifts the time axis to the left.
[H-AXIS EXP] : Expands the time axis.
[H-AXIS RED] : Reduces the time axis.
[DRAW 1UNDSP] : Sets whether or not to display Draw 1.
[DRAW 1 ↑] : Shifts Draw 1 downward.
[DRAW 1 ↓] : Shifts Draw 1 upward.
[DRAW 1 V-EXP] : Expands Draw 1.
[DRAW 1 V-RED] : Reduces Draw 1.
[AUTO SCALE] : Enables auto scaling.
- 96 -
[V-AXIS EXP] : Expands all draws.

[V-AXIS RED] : Reduces all draws.
[OPE/G SET] : Sets operations and graphs.
[SCALE SET] : Sets scales.
[COM1 INPUT] : Inputs comment 1.
[XY] : Switches to the XY graph.
[CIRCLE] : Switches to the Circle graph.
[FOURIER] : Switches to the Fourier graph.
[BODE] : Switches to the Bode graph.
- Performing measurement
When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key, you can perform
the operations corresponding to the menu items that follow.
[START] : Starts measurement.
[ORIGIN] : Sets the origin value.
[STOP] : Stops measurement.
[DATA IN] : Specifies measurement-related settings.
- Changing measurement settings

1 When you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key and then the
[DATA IN] soft key, you can perform the operations
corresponding to the menu items that follow.
2 Click the [LIST] soft key.
The list screen is displayed as shown below.
To display any channel other than the one currently displayed,
display the list screen for the desired channel by pressing the
or key.
3 Check the current settings on the list screen.
- 97 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 98 -

13 The new settings will take effect next time you perform
measurement. Change the operation/graph settings and scale
settings according to the new channel settings.
Explanation
- Setting the data-in screen
• Measurement data points
Enter a numerical value between 1 and 10000. This setting
represents the number of data points to be measured. The data
measurement time is calculated by multiplying the data points by
the sampling cycle. If different sampling cycles are set for the
servo axis and spindle axis, the data points for the shorter
sampling cycle apply. The data points for the longer sampling
cycle is decreased according to the sampling cycle ratio.
• Trigger path and sequential number
Enter numerical values - path number and sequential number -
that specify when to trigger measurement. Numerical values
that can be specified as path numbers are sequential, starting at
Path 1, with the maximum value being the number of paths that
are set to the CNC. The range of sequential numbers is from 0
to 99999. If 0 is specified as the sequential number,
measurement starts immediately after you click the
[MEASUREMENT] soft key and then the [START] soft key.
• Sampling cycle (servo and spindle)
Enter numerical values that specify the sampling cycles for the
servo axis and spindle axis separately. The specifiable values
are listed in Table 1.10.1.1(a), Sampling cycles.
- 99 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (a) Sampling cycles

Input Meaning (sampling
Servo axis Spindle axis
value cycle)
1 100ms Specifiable Specifiable
8 500µs Specifiable Specifiable
9 250µs Specifiable Unspecifiable
10 125µs Specifiable Unspecifiable
11 62.5µs Specifiable Unspecifiable
• Auto scaling
Enter a numerical value that specifies whether to perform auto
scaling each time a measurement is made. The specifiable
values are 1 (do not perform), 2 (perform only once), and 3
(perform each time). When auto scaling is enabled, the wave
scale is changed so that the entire wave can be displayed within
the display range of the graph. Therefore, when you want to
monitor changes in the wave size, it is better to fix the scale,
rather than using the auto scaling function.
• Synchronization mode selection
The specifiable values are 1 (do not select) and 2 (select).
This function may be useful in cases where data is not
synchronized in terms of time due to different sampling cycles
when interpolation between servo axis and spindle axis is
performed through Cs contour control or other means. (In some
cases, the function may not produce any effect.)
• Date and time
The date and time when data is measured are displayed. (This
is a read-only item.)
- 100 -
- Setting the channel setting screen

Up to four sets of measurement data can be specified per channel.
Be sure to set measurement data starting with the smallest channel
number.
• Axis
Specify an axis number for the data to be specified. Use a
positive control axis number when specifying a servo axis or a
negative control axis number when specifying a spindle axis.
The maximum number that can be specified is equal to the
number of servo axes and spindle axes that are set to the CNC
respectively. When enabling channels, be sure to specify the
channel numbers sequentially, starting with the smallest channel
number. Setting 0 disables the channel (not measured).
• Type
When a servo axis is selected, the specifiable values are as shown
in Table 1.10.1.1(b), Servo motor measurement data types.
When a spindle axis is selected, the specifiable values are as
shown in Table 1.10.1.1(c), Spindle motor measurement data
types. Specify the type of data you want to measure.
Table 1.10.1.1 (b) Servo motor measurement data types

Input
Item name Description
value
5 POSF Position feedback integrated value
1 VCMD Velocity command
2 TCMD Torque command
3 SPEED Motor speed
4 ERR Position error
7 SYNC Right tapping synchronization error (tap axis only)
8 ABS Absolute position of the built-in pulse coder
22 DTRQ Estimated disturbance torque
24 DLTCM Synchronous axis torque difference
23 SFERR Dual position feedback semi-full error
48 IR R phase current value
49 IS S phase current value
50 IEFF Effective current
20 ROTOR Rotor phase
21 SIN_T Rotor position SINθ
Disturbance input frequency (used to measure
15 FREQ
frequency characteristics)
Disturbance torque (used to measure frequency
16 FRTCM
characteristics)
25 OVCLV OVC level
- 101 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (c) Spindle motor measurement data types

Input
Item name Description
value
1 SPEED Motor speed
2 INORM Motor current amplitude
3 TCMD Torque command
4 VCMD Velocity command
5 VERR Velocity error
7 PERR1 Position error
8 ORERR Orientation position error
9 PCPOS Position feedback integrated value
10 MCMD Command pulse per ITP cycle
11 PERR2 Position error
13 CSPOS Position feedback integrated value
14 SPCMD Velocity command data
15 SPCT1 Spindle control signal 1
16 SPCT2 Spindle control signal 2
17 SPST1 Spindle status signal 1
18 SPST2 Spindle status signal 2
19 ORSEQ Orientation sequence data
20 FREQ Vibration frequency
21 FRTCM Vibration torque command
25 PA1 AD value of the motor sensor A phase signal
26 PB1 AD value of the motor sensor B phase signal
27 PA2 AD value of the spindle sensor A phase signal
28 PB2 AD value of the spindle sensor B phase signal
29 MFBDF Motor feedback incremental data
30 SFBDF Spindle feedback incremental data
32 DTRQ Estimated load torque
• Unit
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(d),
Measurement data units. However, as shown in Table
1.10.1.1(e), Corresponding measurement data units, you cannot
specify any unit other than that corresponding to the type of
measurement data. Under normal circumstances, the
automatically set values do not need to be changed. When
performing polar coordinate conversion or other operation that
requires information about the actual position of the rotation axis,
deg needs to be selected as the unit.
Table 1.10.1.1 (d) Measurement data units

Input value Unit Input value Unit
4 mm 31 A(p)
5 m 33 %
6 µm 34 pulse
7 nm 35 bit
8 inch 32 Hz
9 deg 36 --
20 1/min 38 V(p)
14 m/min 39 rev
- 102 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (e) Corresponding measurement data units

Servo motor data Corresponding Spindle motor Corresponding
type unit data type unit
4 : mm
6 : µm
5 : POSF 1 : SPEED 20 : 1/min
8 : inch
9 : deg
20 : 1/min 36 : --
1 : VCMD 2 : INORM
14 : m/min 31 : A(p)
31 : A(p) 33 : %
2 : TCMD 3 : TCMD
33 : % 31 : A(p)
20 : 1/min
3 : SPEED 4 : VCMD 20 : 1/min
14 : m/min
4 : mm
6 : µm
4 : ERR 5 : VERR 20 : 1/min
8 : inch
9 : deg
7 : SYNC 36 : -- 7 : PERR1 9 : deg
4 : mm
6 : µm 9 : deg
8 : ABS 8 : ORERR
8 : inch 34 : pulse
9 : deg
22 : DTRQ 31 : A(p) 9 : PCPOS 9 : deg
24 : DLTCM 31 : A(p) 10 : MCMD 34 : pulse
4 : mm
6 : µm
23 : SFERR 11 : PERR2 34 : pulse
8 : inch
9 : deg
31 : A(p)
48 : IR 13 : CSPOS 9 : deg
33 : %
31 : A(p)
49 : IS 14 : SPCMD 36 : --
33 : %
31 : A(p)
50 : IEFF 15 : SPCT1 36 : --
33 : %
20 : ROTOR 9 : deg 16 : SPCT2 36 : --
21 : SIN_T 36 : -- 17 : SPST1 36 : --
15 : FREQ 32 : Hz 18 : SPST2 36 : --
16 : FRTCM 31 : A(p) 19 : ORSEQ 36 : --
25 : OVCLV 33 : % 20 : FREQ 32 : Hz
21 : FRTCM 31 : A(p)
25:PA1 38:V(p)
33:%
26:PB1 38:V(p)
33:%
27:PA2 38:V(p)
33:%
28:PB2 38:V(p)
33:%
29:MFBDF 9:deg
39:rev
30:SFBDF 9:deg
39:rev
32:DTRQ 33:%
- 103 -
• Conversion coefficient
Set the weight of the data selected for each channel type
(numerator = physical amount). For POSF and other
position-related data, specify the amount of travel per pulse.
For VCMD and SPEED, specify 3750. For TCMD, specify the
maximum current value of the amplifier in use.
• Conversion base
Set the weight of the data selected for each channel type
(denominator = raw data unit). Under normal circumstances,
use the value that is automatically set when the type is selected.
Usually, the system automatically sets 1 for POSF and other
position-related data, 32768 for VCMD and SPEED, and 7282
for TCMD.
• Origin value
Specify the value that is to be set as the initial value for each
channel when you click the [MEASUREMENT] soft key and
then the [ORIGIN] soft key.
• Extended address
Under normal circumstances, this item is unspecifiable and not
used. (This is a read-only item.)
• Shift
Under normal circumstances, this item is unspecifiable and not
used. (A value may be set automatically when the type is
selected.)
- Setting the operation and graph setting screen

In the operation and graph setting screen, up to four graphs can be set
per draw.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(f), Y-time
graph operations.
An operation cannot be specified if it does not meet the graph
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.1(g), Y-time graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.1 (f) Y-time graph operations

Input Operation
Description
value name
1 N/A Not displayed.
Normal display
(The data of the sleeted channel is displayed as is,
2 Y-Time without performing any operations.) Input 1 is the
vertical axis. All measurement channels are
available to be selected.
First order differential display of position data
(equivalent to velocity)
3 Diff1 ( VT ) Input 1 is the vertical axis. Only those channels
whose positions have been measured can be
selected.
- 104 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (f) Y-time graph operations

Input Operation
Description
value name
Second order differential display of position data
(equivalent to acceleration)
4 Diff2 ( AT ) Input 1 is the vertical axis. Only those channels
whose positions have been measured can be
selected.
Tangent speed display
Only those channels whose positions have been
5 Tangent
measured can be selected. The combined speed
of input 1 and input 2 is displayed.
N axis tangent speed display
measured can be selected. The combined speed
for the position data from the channel specified by
6 Tangent N
input 1 to the channel specified by input 2 is
displayed.
All channels to be combined need to have position
data.
Feed smoothness display
measured can be selected. This item displays the
7 Smooth deviation from the ideal position calculated on the
assumption that the tool moves from the displayed
start time (start point) to the end time (end point) at a
constant speed.
Synchronization error display
measured can be selected. This item displays the
8 Synchro
difference between input 1 and input 2. Currently,
only 1-to-1 ratio is supported as the proportion of
input 1 to input 2.
Bit display
The status of the corresponding bit specified by input
9 Bit
2 is displayed, based on the measurement data for
the channel specified by input 1.
Table 1.10.1.1 (g) Y-time graph conditions

Coordinate
Operation Input 1 Input 2 Remarks
conversion
Channel whose
1 : Normal position has Not specified
been measured
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has
position has
been measured
been measured
2 : Y-Time 2 : Polar (only when the
(only when the
data unit is
data unit is
mm, µm, or
deg)
inch)
Channel whose Channel whose
3 : Angular position has position has
been measured been measured
- 105 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (g) Y-time graph conditions

Coordinate
conversion
Channel whose
3 : Diff1 ( VT ) 1 : Normal position has Not specified
been measured
Channel whose
4 : Diff2 ( AT ) 1 : Normal position has Not specified
been measured
1 : Normal position has position has
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has
position has
been measured
been measured
5 : Tangent 2 : Polar (only when the
(only when the
data unit is
data unit is
mm, µm, or
deg)
inch)
Make sure
that the
Channel whose Channel whose measured
6 : Tangent N 1 : Normal position has position has data unit is
been measured been measured either mm,
µm, or inch,
or deg.
Channel whose
7 : Smooth 1 : Normal position has Not specified
been measured
8 : Synchro 1 : Normal position has position has
Channel whose
9 : Bit 1 : Normal position has Bit position
been measured
• Input 1
Specifiable values are sequential, with channel 1 being 1. The
maximum value is the largest channel number for which
measurement is set during the channel setting process. A value
that does not meet the graph display conditions defined in Table
1.10.1.1(g), Y-time graph conditions cannot be specified in input
1.
- 106 -
• Input 2
measurement is set during the channel setting process. Note
that, when Bit is specified as the operation, values are
sequentially set, with bit position 0 being 10. In this case, the
maximum value is 25, which indicates bit position 15. A value
1.10.1.1(g), Y-time graph conditions cannot be specified in input
2.
• Display unit
Specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(h), Display
units. The conditions for specifying these display units are as
shown in Table 1.10.1.1(i), Y-time graph display units.
Table 1.10.1.1 (h) Display units

Input value Unit Input value Unit
1 sec 19 1/sec
2 msec 20 1/min
3 µsec 21 mm/sec/sec
4 mm 22 mm/min/min
5 m 23 m/sec/sec
6 µm 24 m/min/min
7 nm 25 inch/sec/sec
8 inch 26 inch/min/min
9 deg 27 deg/sec/sec
10 mdeg 28 deg/min/min
11 mm/sec 29 1/sec/sec
12 mm/min 30 1/min/min
13 m/sec 31 A(p)
14 m/min 32 Hz
15 inch/sec 33 %
16 inch/min 34 pulse
17 deg/sec 35 bit
18 deg/min 36 --
- 107 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (i) Corresponding Y-time graph display units

Input 1 measurement
Operation Specifiable display unit
data unit
4 : mm 4 : mm
5:m 5:m
6 : µm 6 : µm
7 : nm 7 : nm
8 : inch 8 : inch
9 : deg 9 : deg
11 : mm/sec
12 : mm/min
13 : m/sec
14 : m/min
14 : m/min
15 : inch/sec
2 : Y-Time
16 : inch/min
17 : deg/sec
18 : deg/min
20 : 1/min
19 : 1/sec
20 : 1/min
31 : A(p) 31 : A(p)
32 : Hz 32 : Hz
33 : % 33 : %
34 : pulse 34 : pulse
35 : bit 35 : bit
36 : -- 36 : --
11 : mm/sec
4 : mm
12 : mm/min
5:m
13 : m/sec
6 : µm
14 : m/min
7 : nm
15 : inch/sec
3 : Diff1 ( VT ) 8 : inch
16 : inch/min
17 : deg/sec
18 : deg/min
9 : deg
19 : 1/sec
20 : 1/min
21 : mm/sec/sec
4 : mm
22 : mm/min/min
5:m
23 : m/sec/sec
6 : µm
24 : m/min/min
7 : nm
25 : inch/sec/sec
4 : Diff2 ( AT ) 8 : inch
26 : inch/min/min
27 : deg/sec/sec
28 : deg/min/min
9 : deg
29 : 1/sec/sec
30 : 1/min/min
4 : mm 11 : mm/sec
5:m 12 : mm/min
6 : µm 13 : m/sec
5 : Tangent
7 : nm 14 : m/min
8 : inch 15 : inch/sec
9 : deg 16 : inch/min
- 108 -
Table 1.10.1.1 (i) Corresponding Y-time graph display units

Input 1 measurement
Operation Specifiable display unit
data unit
4 : mm 11 : mm/sec
5:m 12 : mm/min
6 : µm 13 : m/sec
6 : Tangent N
7 : nm 14 : m/min
8 : inch 15 : inch/sec
9 : deg 16 : inch/min
4 : mm 4 : mm
5:m 5:m
6 : µm 6 : µm
7 : Smooth
7 : nm 7 : nm
8 : inch 8 : inch
9 : deg 9 : deg
4 : mm
5:m
6 : µm
Not affected by the
8 : Synchro 7 : nm
measurement unit.
8 : inch
9 : deg
36 : --
Not affected by the
9 : Bit Not specified.
measurement unit.
• Coordinate conversion
Specifiable values are 1 (Normal; no coordinate conversion), 2
(Polar; coordinate conversion for polar coordinate interpolation),
and 3 (Angular; coordinate conversion for angular axis control).
The conditions for the specifiable coordinate conversion types
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(j), Corresponding Y-time graph
coordinate conversion types. Note that no conditions are
imposed for specifying Normal (no coordinate conversion).
Table 1.10.1.1 (j) Corresponding Y-time graph coordinate conversion

types
Specifiable coordinate
Operation Input 1 Input 2
conversion
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has been
position has been
measured
measured 2 : Polar
(only when the
2 : Y-Time (only when the
data unit is mm,
5 : Tangent data unit is deg)
µm, or inch)
position has been position has been 3 : Angular
measured measured
• Inclination
Specify the inclination in degrees. The specified value is
effective only when Angular (coordinate conversion for angular
axis control) is specified as the coordinate conversion type.
- 109 -
- Setting the scale screen

The scale screen lets you set up to four scales per draw and specify the
graph scale with respect to the time axis.
• Start point
Set the center coordinate of the displayed data (Draw 1 to Draw
4; vertical axis).
Set the display start time for time (horizontal axis).
• Division
Set the value of the displayed data per grid (Draw 1 to Draw 4;
vertical axis).
Set the amount of time per grid for time (horizontal axis).
- Operation for measurement

• Origin
Arrange that the origin value, set on a per-channel basis in the
channel setting screen, will be the initial value for the
measurement data when measurement is started. This operation
is effective only for those channels for which position
measurement is set.
Limitation
- Data update cycle
Position-related data is updated at intervals of 1 ms, and power-related
data is updated at the current cycle. Therefore, even if you specify a
sampling cycle that is shorter than the data update cycle, the displayed
data remains unchanged during the present data update cycle.
- Sampling cycle and the number of channels measured

Regarding the sampling cycle and the number of channels measured,
there are limitations as shown in Table 1.10.1.1(k).
Table 1.10.1.1 (k) Sampling cycle and the number of channels

measured
Sampling cycle Maximum number of channels measured
1ms or more 4
500µs 4
250µs 4
125µs 4
2
62.5µs
(Channel 3 or later cannot be input.)
The following limitations are imposed on the servo axis and spindle
axis.
Number of channels that can be acquired per servo DSP
• Up to four channels can be acquired when the sampling cycle is 1
ms or longer, 500 µs, or 250 µs.
• Up to two channels can be acquired when the sampling cycle is
125 µs.
• Only one channel can be acquired when the sampling cycle is
62.25 µs.
- 110 -
Number of channels that can be acquired per spindle axis

• Up to two channels can be acquired when the sampling cycle is1
ms or longer.
• Only one channel can be acquired when the sampling cycle is
500 ms.
- 111 -
1.10.1.2 XY graph
This graph provides a 2-dimensional path display of measurement data
by using 2-axis data.
Up to two draws can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the XY graph
Procedure
below.
4 Click the [XY] soft key.

- 112 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 113 -

below.
the setting screen for the desired draw by pressing the PAGE
or
PAGE
key.
cursor key.
- 114 -

cursor key.
- 115 -

below.
key.
cursor key.
- 116 -


described below.
cursor key.
- 117 -

- Manipulating the XY graph

[←] : Shifts the horizontal axis to the right.
[→] : Shifts the horizontal axis to the left.
[H-AXIS EXP] : Expands the horizontal axis.
[H-AXIS RED] : Reduces the horizontal axis.
[↑] : Shifts the vertical axis downward.
[↓] : Shifts the vertical axis upward.
[V-AXIS EXP] : Expands the vertical axis.
[V-AXIS RED] : Reduces the vertical axis.
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-Time graph.
- 118 -

or key.
- 119 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 120 -

Explanation
See the Explanation section for the Y-time graph describing the
setting of the data-in screen.

See the Explanation section for the Y-time describing the setting of
the channel setting screen.
- 121 -

In the operation and graph setting screen, up to two graphs can be set
per draw.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.2(a), XY
graph operations.
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.2(b), XY graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.2 (a) XY graph operations

Input Operation
Description
value name
XY display
11 XY Input 1 is the horizontal axis. Input 2 is the vertical
axis.
Table 1.10.1.2 (b) XY graph conditions

Coordinate
conversion
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has
position has
been measured
been measured
11 : XY 2 : Polar (only when the
((only when the
data unit is
data unit is
mm, µm, or
deg)
inch)
• Input 1
1.10.1.2(b), XY graph conditions cannot be specified in input 1.
• Input 2
1.10.1.2(b), XY graph conditions cannot be specified in input 2.
• Display unit
The specifiable value is 4 (mm) only.
- 122 -
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.2(c), Corresponding XY graph
coordinate conversion types.
Table 1.10.1.2 (c) Corresponding XY graph coordinate conversion

types
conversion
position has been position has been 1 : Normal
measured measured
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has been
position has been
measured
11 : XY measured 2 : Polar
(only when the
(only when the
data unit is mm,
data unit is deg)
µm, or inch)
measured measured
• Inclination

• Start point
Set the center coordinates of the horizontal axis and vertical axis
of the displayed data, respectively.
• Division
Set the value of one grid of the horizontal axis and vertical axis
of the displayed data, respectively.
- Operation for measurement

operation for measurement.
Limitation
See the Limitation section for the Y-time graph.
- 123 -
1.10.1.3 Circle graph

This graph displays an enlarged view of the path deviation from the
specified circle arising during circular cutting.
Only one draw can be displayed.
Displaying and setting the circle graph
Procedure
below.
4 Click the [CIRCLE] soft key.

- 124 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 125 -

below.
cursor key.
- 126 -
cursor key.
- 127 -

below.
cursor key.
- 128 -

described below.
cursor key.
- 129 -
- Manipulating the Circle graph

[←] : Moves the center coordinate position to the
left.
[→] : Moves the center coordinate position to the
right.
[↑] : Moves the center coordinate position
upward.
[↓] : Moves the center coordinate position
downward.
[ERROR EXP] : Expands the error display.
[ERROR RED] : Reduces the error display.
[RADIUSEXP] : Expands the radius.
[RADIUSRED : Reduces the radius.
[ZOOM EXP] : Expands the zoom.
[ZOOM RED] : Reduces the zoom.
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-time graph.
- 130 -

or key.

cursor key.
- 131 -

or key.
cursor key.
- 132 -
Explanation
setting of the data-in screen.

See the Explanation section for the Y-time describing the setting of
the channel setting screen.

The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify graph settings.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.3(a), Circle
graph operations.
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.3(b), Circle graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.3 (a) Circle graph operations

Input Operation
Description
value name
Circle error display
Input 1 is the horizontal axis, and input 2 is the
21 Circle vertical axis.
The reference circle used to calculate the error is set
on the scale page.
Table 1.10.1.3 (b) Circle graph conditions

Coordinate
conversion
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has
position has
been measured
been measured
21 : Circle 2 : Polar (only when the
(only when the
data unit is
data unit is
mm, µm, or
deg)
inch)
- 133 -
• Input 1
1.10.1.3(b), Circle graph conditions cannot be specified in input
1.
• Input 2
1.10.1.3(b) Circle graph conditions cannot be specified in input
2.
• Display unit
The specifiable value is 4 (mm) only.
are as shown in Table 1.10.1.3(c), Corresponding Circle graph
coordinate conversion types.
Table 1.10.1.3 (c) Corresponding Circle graph coordinate conversion

types
conversion
position has been position has been 1 : Normal
measured measured
Channel whose
Channel whose
position has been
position has been
measured
21 : Circle measured 2 : Polar
(only when the
(only when the
data unit is mm,
data unit is deg)
µm, or inch)
measured measured
• Inclination

• Center
Set the center coordinates of the circle (respective coordinates of
the horizontal and vertical axes).
• Radius
Set the radius of the circle.
- 134 -
• Division
Set the scale of the circle display.
• Zoom
Set the zoom percentage when expanding the display in the
direction of the center angle at the quadrant change point
(direction change point for each axis). This is effective for
getting a detailed view of quadrant protrusions. Under normal
circumstances, set this value to 1.0.
performing measurement.
Limitation
- 135 -
1.10.1.4 Fourier graph

This graph displays the frequency spectrum by performing digital
Fourier conversion for the range of data displayed by the Y-time
graph.
Up to four draws can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the Fourier graph
Procedure
below.
1 Display the Y-time graph according to the relevant procedure.
2 Click the [FOURIER] soft key.
- 136 -

below.
cursor key.
cursor key.
- 137 -


below.
cursor key.
- 138 -


described below.
cursor key.
- 139 -

- Manipulating the Fourier graph

[GAIN ↑] : Shifts the gain graph downward.
[GAIN ↓] : Shifts the gain graph upward.
[GAIN V-EXP] : Expands the gain graph.
[GAIN V-RED] : Reduces the gain graph.
[PHASE ↑] : Shifts the phase graph downward.
[PHASE ↓] : Shifts the phase graph upward.
[PHASE V-EXP] : Expands the phase graph.
[PHASE V-RED] : Reduces the phase graph.
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-Time.
- 140 -
Explanation
The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify up to four
graph settings per draw.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.4(a), Fourier
graph operations.
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.4(b), Fourier graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.4 (a) Fourier graph operations
Input Operation
Description
value name
Displays the frequency spectrum by performing
31 Fourier
digital Fourier conversion.
Table 1.10.1.4 (b) Fourier graph conditions

Operation Condition Remarks
Draws of the Y-time graph correspond to those
of the Fourier graph on a one-to-one basis.
31 : Fourier
The Fourier operation can be set only when the
corresponding Y-time graph draw is effective.

• Start point
Set gain and phase data values for the center of the graph.
• Division
Set the value of one grid.
• Frequency
Set the minimum and maximum values of the horizontal axis.
Since the unit is dependent on the time range selected for the
Y-time graph, 1 is not necessarily equal to 1 Hz.
(Example) When a 0.1-second time range is selected, 1 is equal
to 1 Hz.
Limitation
- 141 -
1.10.1.5 Bode graph

This graph displays a Bode diagram for the measurement data in the
form of a horizontal axis logarithm graph.
Only one draw can be displayed at a time.
Displaying and setting the Bode graph
Procedure
below.
4 Click the [BODE] soft key.

- 142 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 143 -

below.
cursor key.
cursor key.
- 144 -


below.
- 145 -
cursor key.

described below.
cursor key.
- 146 -

- Manipulating the Bode graph

[GAIN ↑] : Shifts the gain graph downward.
[GAIN ↓] : Shifts the gain graph upward.
[GAIN V-EXP] : Expands the gain graph.
[GAIN V-RED] : Reduces the gain graph.
[PHASE ↑] : Shifts the phase graph downward.
[PHASE ↓] : Shifts the phase graph upward.
[PHASE V-EXP] : Expands the phase graph.
[PHASE V-RED] : Reduces the phase graph.
[Y-TIME] : Switches to the Y-Time.
- 147 -

or key.
- 148 -

cursor key.
or key.
cursor key.
- 149 -

Explanation
setting the data-in screen.

setting the channel setting screen.
The content of the screen is completely the same. To display the
Bode graph, however, specify the channel settings exactly as shown in
Table 1.10.1.5(a), Bode graph channel settings. During this step, be
sure to disable channel 4 (set 0 for the channel 4 axis).
Table 1.10.1.5 (a) Bode graph channel settings

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Axis Specify the same servo motor axis.
Type 2 : TCMD 16 : FRTCM 15 : FREQ
Unit 33 : % 33 : % 32 : Hz
Conversion
100 100 1
coefficient
Conversion base 7282 -7282 1
Origin value 0 0 0
- 150 -

The operation and graph setting screen lets you specify graph settings.
• Operation
The specifiable values are as shown in Table 1.10.1.5(b), Bode
graph operations.
display conditions defined in Table 1.10.1.5(c), Bode graph
conditions.
Table 1.10.1.5 (b) Bode graph operations

Input Operation
Description
value name
Displays a Bode diagram in the form of a horizontal
41 Bode
axis logarithm graph.
Table 1.10.1 (c) Bode graph conditions

Operation Condition
The measurement and channel settings must meet the
following conditions.
CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 3
AXIS Specify the same servo motor axis.
TYPE 2 : TCMD 16 : FRTCM 15 : FREQ
UNIT 33 : % 33 : % 32 : Hz
41 : Bode
CONV.COEF 100 100 1
CONV.BASE 7282 -7282 1
ORIGIN
0 0 0
VALUE
Channel 4 must be disabled (channel 4 axis must be set
to0).

• Start point
Set gain and phase data values for the center of the graph.
• Division
Set the value of one grid.
• Frequency
Set the minimum and maximum values of the horizontal axis.
The unit is Hz.
performing measurement.
Limitation
- 151 -
1.11 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN
The maintenance information screen is provided to record the history

of maintenance performed by a service person of FANUC or machine
tool builder.
The screen has the following features:
• MDI alphabetical input is allowed.
(Half-size kana input is for Japanese display only.)
• The recording screen can be scrolled in units of lines.
• Edited maintenance information can be input and output.
• Records are stored in Flash ROM.
• Double-byte (shift JIS) codes can be displayed.
1.11.1 Displaying the Maintenance Information Screen
1. Press function key .

2. Press continuous menu key several times until soft key
[M-INFO] is displayed.
3. Press the soft key [M-INFO]. The maintenance information
screen appears.
When selected, the maintenance screen shows the latest information.

The status (mode, number of empty character spaces, cursor line,
column number) is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Column
Line
<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6>

Fig. 1.11.1 (a) MAINTENANCE INFORMATION screen
- 152 -
Status display
<1> Kana/alphabetic
KN: Half-size kana input mode.
ABC: English input mode
<2> OVER / INSERT
OVER: Overwrite mode
INSERT: Insert input mode.
<3> EDIT / READ
EDIT: Editing allowed
READ: Editing inhibited
<4> Number of empty character spaces
Number of empty character spaces as half-size characters
<5> Current cursor line
Position of the line on which the cursor is currently located.
<6> Current cursor column
Position of the column at which the cursor is currently located.
NOTE
The numbers of lines and columns that can be
displayed by each LCD are:
• 10.4” display unit: 37 characters × 12 lines
• 7.2”/8.4” display unit: 38 characters × 11 lines
• 15” display unit: 38 characters × 19 lines
1.11.2 Operating the Maintenance Information Screen

The maintenance information screen has view mode and edit mode,
which are selected by pressing the soft key [END] or [EDIT].
Initially, view mode is selected. To start editing, select edit mode by
pressing the soft keys [(OPRT)] and [EDIT]. When the editing is
completed, press the soft key [END] key. Then, select soft key
[SAVE] or [QUIT]. Unless soft key [SAVE] is selected, the edited
data will be lost at next power-up.
To scroll the screen showing the recorded information, press a cursor
keys or page keys on the MDI panel.
The following keys are used for editing (character input) and viewing:
- 153 -
Table 1.11.2 (a) Table of (edit) operations on the maintenance

information screen
Mode Key Description
View Soft key
[EDIT] Allows editing.
[JUMP] Displays the beginning or the end.
Cursor keys Scrolls the screen up or down.
Page keys Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Edit Soft key
[END] Ends editing. Select whether to save the edited data.
[KN/ABC] Switches between half-size kana input and alphabetic input
modes. (Supports Japanese display only.)
[CLEAR ALL] Clears all maintenance information. (This key is enabled
when the parameter MDC (No.3116#7) is set to 1.)
[I/O] Reads or punches the maintenance information.
[JUMP] Moves the cursor to the beginning or end.
Cursor keys Moves the cursor position up or down.
Page keys Scrolls the screen up or down in units of whole screens.
Alphanumeric/ Allows alphabetical, numeric, or special character input.
special character (For details of half-size kana input, see Item, " Half-size
keys kana input".)
key Switches between insert and overwrite modes.
• If the key input buffer does not contain any character,

deletes the one character at the cursor position.
key
• If the key input buffer contains characters, deletes the
characters from the buffer.
deletes the one character before the cursor.
key
• If the key input buffer contains characters, deletes the
one character from the buffer.
starts a new line.
key
• If the key input buffer contains characters, outputs the
characters from the buffer to the information screen.
- 154 -
1.11.3 Half-Size Kana Input on the Maintenance Information Screen

By pressing soft key [KN/ABC], you can switch between half-size
kana input and alphabetic input modes.
In half-size kana input mode, alphabetic characters are converted in
accordance with the "half-size kana/Roman character conversion
table" and resultant half-size kana characters are displayed in the key
input buffer.
Pressing the key causes the characters in the key input buffer to
be output to maintenance information.
Pressing the key causes the characters to be deleted from the
key input buffer and the one character of the maintenance information
on which the cursor is positioned to be deleted.
Pressing the key causes cancels conversion, and deletes one
character from the key input buffer. If the key input buffer does not
contain any character, the one character of the maintenance
information that immediately precedes the cursor is deleted.
1.11.4 Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information

Screen
The following warnings occur on the maintenance information screen.
Warning message Meaning

NO MORE SPACE An overflow occurred in CNC memory.
ALARM The operation could not be performed
because an alarm was generated in the CNC.
BUSY Wait for CNC processing to end or make a
retry.
ILLEGAL DATA Investigate data and correct it as required.
WRONG MODE The CNC is in wrong mode.
COMMAND ILLEGAL USE A corresponding CNC option cannot be found.
PARAMETER ERROR CNC parameter settings contain an error.
EDIT REJECTED An attempt was made to perform an edit
operation on data that could not be edited.
WRITE PROTECT Writing is prohibited.
COMMAND REJECT The CNC rejected the execution of the
processing. Check the execution conditions.
- 155 -
1.11.5 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3116 MDC

#7 MDC Maintenance information data:

0: Cannot be erased entirely.
1: Can be erased entirely.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 MIF

[Data type] Bit
#1 MIF Editing of the maintenance information screen is:

0: Not prohibited.
1: Prohibited.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8901 MEN

#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 156 -
B-63945EN/03 2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE
2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i

HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards in the LCD-mounted
type Series 30i/31i/32i control units, the functions of the card PCBs
on the printed circuit boards, and the procedures for replacing
consumables.
2.1 STRUCTURE...........................................................................158
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE...............................................159
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ....................................160
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD CONNECTORS AND CARDS.................................163
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS .........174
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD.........................................193
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT ............................199
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY ........................................................201
2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS .................................................206
2.10 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT ..................................209
- 157 -
2.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
2.1 STRUCTURE
Control/LCD unit MDI unit
Optical cable Servo motor
Servo amplifier
I/O Link
Distributed I/O module, I/O Unit MODEL-A
Machine operator’s panel/

Power magnetics circuit etc.
- 158 -
2.2 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE
Main board
- CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2-axis to 24-axis control
- Spindle interface
- LCD/MDI interface
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High-speed DI
- RS-232C
- Memory card interface
- PC function
（300is/310is/320is）
Fast Data Server board
Data server function

Ethernet communication function
Additional axis board

Basic system
Additional axis control function
I/O Link
Additional spindle board
Additional spindle control function
HSSB interface board
High-speed serial bus interface
Various types of network boards Options

FL-net board
Profibus master board
Profibus slave board
Device Net master board
Device Net slave board
Unit without optional slots
or
Unit having one optional slot
or
Unit having two optional slots
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be mounted.
- 159 -
2.3 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

LCD display unit
Main board
24V-IN(CPD16A) 24 VDC power supply
MDI UNIT
MDI(CA55) CK27
R232-1(JD56A) RS-232-C I/O unit

5th and 6th serial spindles
R232-2(JD36A RS-232-C I/O unit

/JD54) Touch panel
HDI(JA40)
High-peed skip input
Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B Operator's
JD1A panel
24VDC CPD1 Distributed

Power
JD1B I/O board, magnetics
I/O unit, etc.
JD1A cabinet
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
3rd and 4th
serial PSM
spindles
Position coder
SPM
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1-axisamplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1
24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
ETHERNET(CD38A Ethernet
/CD38S)
- 160 -
When optional functions are provided

Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
PSM Position coder
7th spindle
SPM
Additional axis board To 8th spindle
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
panel
JD1A
24VDC CPD1 Distributed I/O

board, I/O unit,
JD1B etc. Power
magnetics
JD1A cabinet
- 161 -
Fast Ethernet board

Optional slot
Memory card Prepare the memory card recommended by FANUC.
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer

or PANEL i
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
(another Profibus unit)
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
(another DeviceNet unit)
DeviceNet slave
board
FL-net board
FLNET(CD38N) FL-net unit
Note 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a

personal computer or PANEL i is connected
using an HSSB interface.
- 162 -
2.4 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

CONNECTORS AND CARDS
2.4.1 Printed Circuit Boards for 7.2"/8.4"/10.4" Display Units
- Main board specification

Name CNC model Specification
Main board A1 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8100-0980
Main board A2 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8100-0981
Main board A3 32i-A (without Ethernet) A20B-8100-0982
Main board A4 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0400
Main board A6 32i-A (without Ethernet) A20B-8101-0402
- 163 -
- Connector mounting location
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41

CD38A
CK20A
CK21A CDP16A
JD36A JD51A
CA79A
JGM CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41

CD38A
CK20A
CK21A CPD16A
JD36A JD51A
- 164 -
Connector number Application

COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD36A RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A DC24V-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter
CD38A Ethernet
- 165 -
- Card and power supply mounting location
Connector
Connector
(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card
Connector
(3) Power supply unit
No. Name Specification Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes The maximum
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes number of axes is
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes also limited
Axis control
(1) A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes depending on the
card
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes model.
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes For the 32i, HRV4
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes is unapplicable.
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
HRV2 : Up to 24 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
- 166 -

A20B-3300-0477 Standard version
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0476 Standard version Support for
DRAM 64MB optional settings
A20B-3300-0470 High-speed version
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0478 High-speed version Support for
A20B-3300-0491 Dedicated to the 32i
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0493 Dedicated to the 32i Support for
Power supply
(3) A20B-8101-0010
unit
- 167 -
- DIMM module mounting location
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module
Connector Connector
DIMM
module
socket

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0220 SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0221 SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0163 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0223 SRAM 1MB The FROM
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB stores various
A20B-3900-0224 SRAM 2MB control software
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB programs, user
FROM/SRAM A20B-3900-0226 SRAM 1MB software
(2)
module A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB programs, and so
A20B-3900-0227 SRAM 2MB forth.
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0230 SRAM 256kB battery-backed
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB memory module.
A20B-3900-0231 SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0232 SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0233 SRAM 512kB
- 168 -
- Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
Axis control card Display Peripheral Ethernet PMC module

control control control
I/O Link
1,2ch control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
Lithium battery MDI Ethernet I/O Link 24VDC

FSSB
RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Serial spindle
HDI
: Detachable card or module
- 169 -
- LED display
Rear of unit
(a) Alarm (red)

(b) Ethernet status (green)
ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
LOW
COM
LINK
(c) 7-segment LED

(green) (yellow)
- 170 -
(a) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
Low battery voltage.
1
The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.

An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board.
4
The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or the
FSSB may be broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
Abnormal power supply operation.
6 The cause may be noise or a power supply unit
failure.
: On : Off
Alarm LED Meaning

LOW The CPU card may be faulty.
(b) Ethernet statusLED

Alarm LED Meaning
Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
LINK (green)
correctly
COM (yellow) Turned on when data is transferred
(c) 7-segment LED

See Appendix E “LED Display”.
- 171 -
- Jumper plug setting
TMBB(Short)
Ensure that this is short-circuited.
Main board
- Inverter PCBs and Connector Units
Name Specification
Inverter P.C.B. For 7.2” color LCD A20B-8100-0961
For 8.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0963
For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
Connector unit A15L-0001-0091
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with
self-tapping screws.
- Configuration of the inverter
Main board
Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A

10.4-inch LCD CP1 CN1
CPD12(when A20B-8101-002x)
- 172 -
- Locations of the inverter and connector unit
inverter Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
- 173 -
2.4.2 Printed Circuit Boards for 15" Display Units

Name CNC model Specification
Main board B1 for 15-inch display unit 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0022
Main board B2 for 15-inch display unit 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0026
Main board F1 for 15-inch display unit 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0372
Main board F2 for 15-inch display unit 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0376

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are connectors

COP10A-1 COP10A-2
installed on the servo card.)
CA55 (FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
module
COP
CD38S
JD54 JD51A
CPD16A
JNA CA87A CN79A CA98
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or CP95
CA55
(FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power supply
CPD12
module
CK20A
CK21A JD54 JD51A
CDP16A
- 174 -

CA55 MDI
JD56A RS-232C SERIAL PORT 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C SERIAL PORT 2
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A DC24V-IN
CA98 Video signal interface
CA87A Fan adapter
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface
- 175 -

(1) For main boards B1 and B2 for 15" display units
Connector Connector Connector
(1) Axis control card (2) CPU card (3) Display control card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
The maximum
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
number of axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
is also limited
depending on
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
the model.
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
For the 32i,
HRV4 is
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
unapplicable.
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
- 176 -

DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(2) CPU card
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
Display control For 15” color LCD
(3) A20B-3300-0420
card display unit
(4) Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Configuration of the display control card

In the display control card, a compact flash card is installed.
Compact flash card
Connector
Display control card Compact flash

Connector side
Name Specification Remarks

Compact flash card A02B-0303-C990#A Including software
- 177 -
(2) For main boards F1 and F2 for 15" display units
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
The maximum
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
number of axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes
is also limited
depending on
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes
the model.
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes
For the 32i,
HRV4 is
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
unapplicable.
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
- 178 -

Standard version
A20B-3300-0477
DRAM 32MB
Standard version
A20B-3300-0474
DRAM 64MB
Standard version
A20B-3300-0475
DRAM 128MB
Standard version Support for
A20B-3300-0476
Standard version Support for
A20B-3300-0472
High-speed version
A20B-3300-0470
DRAM 64MB
High-speed version
A20B-3300-0471
DRAM 128MB
(2) CPU card
High-speed version Support for
A20B-3300-0478
High-speed version Support for
A20B-3300-0479
Dedicated to the 32i
A20B-3300-0491
DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0490
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0492
DRAM 128MB
Dedicated to the 32i Support for
A20B-3300-0493
Dedicated to the 32i Support for
A20B-3300-0495
Display control For 15” color LCD
(3) A20B-3300-0551
card display unit
- 179 -
Compact flash card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector
In the main board, a compact flash card is installed.

Compact flash card A02B-0303-C990#B Including software
- 180 -
- DIMM module mounting location

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM
module
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0220 SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB
A20B-3900-0221 SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0163 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0223 SRAM 1MB The FROM
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB stores various
A20B-3900-0224 SRAM 2MB control software
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB programs, user
FROM/SRAM A20B-3900-0226 SRAM 1MB software
(2)
module A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB programs, and so
A20B-3900-0227 SRAM 2MB forth.
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0230 SRAM 256kB battery-backed
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB memory module.
A20B-3900-0231 SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0232 SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
A20B-3900-0233 SRAM 512kB
- 181 -
- Block diagram
(1) For main boards B1 and B2 for 15” display units
Main board
Display control card CPU card
Display
DRAM
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
Ethernet 1,2ch control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display
unit
Ethernet RS232C Lithium battery MDI 24VDC

FSSB I/O Link
Memory card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
- 182 -
(2) For main boards F1 and F2 for 15” display units
Main board
Display
DRAM
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
Ethernet
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display unit
RS232C
Lithium battery MDI 24VDC

Ethernet Memory card FSSB I/O Link
Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
- 183 -
- LED display
Rear view
Unit of rear
(c) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
(green)
(b) GUI status
DNV3
(d) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
(f) 7-segment LED

(a) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 184 -
Rear view
Rear of unit
(c) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
(green)
(b) GUI status
DNV3
(d) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
(f) 7-segment LED

(a) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 185 -
(a) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC

system alarm occurrence
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
1
The battery may be running out.

board.
4
FSSB may be broken.
DIMM module.
5
failure.
: On : Off
Alarm LED Meaning

(b) Changes in status LED at power-on time (Display control

side status: Green LED)
Status LED
Status
No. (DNV1 to 3)
3 2 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where
1 the system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and display control
card is being initialized. If the status does not proceed
3
further beyond this indication, the CPU card, display
card, or main board may be faulty.
Start-up on the display control card side is being
awaited. If the status does not proceed further beyond
4
this indication, the display card or main board may be
faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the display
control card, or a RAM error occurred in the interface
between the CPU card and display control card.
5
If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, display card, or main board
may be faulty.
: On : Off
- 186 -
(c) LED (red) indication at display control system alarm

occurrence
If the LED lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
Common RAM error.
DNV4
The main board may be faulty.
(d) Display control POWER (green LED) indicates that power

is supplied to the display control card.
(e) Ethernet statusLED

Alarm LED Meaning
Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
LINK (green)
correctly
(f) 7-segment LED

- 187 -

Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMBB(Short) or TMSF1(Short)

Ensure that this is left open. Ensure that this is short-circuited.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMSF1(Short)
- 188 -
- Inverter PCBs and Connector Units

Inverter P.C.B. A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter PCB A20B-8100-0969
Conversion cable A660-4042-T047 Two cables
used
Connection cable between A660-2005-T469#L200R0
the main board and the
inverter
NOTE
- Configuration of the inverter
Main board
CA87A
CPD12(when A20B-8101-002x)
For 15.0-inch LCD

Fan adapter
CN1
15.0-inch Inverter
LCD unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Connection cable for the inverter
Conversion cable
- 189 -
- Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit
Fan adaoter PCB Connector unit

Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power supply
COP module
Conversion cable (A660-4042-T047)
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of the
two cables from the inverter.
- 190 -
2.5 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
2.5.1 Basic Unit
Model Name Drawing number Remarks

30i-A Basic Unit (No slot) A02B-0303-B500
Basic Unit (No slot) A02B-0303-B520 Support for
optional settings
Basic Unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-B501
Basic Unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-B521 Support for
optional settings
Basic Unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B502
Basic Unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B522 Support for
optional settings
31i-A5 Basic Unit (No slot) A02B-0306-B500
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
optional settings
Model Name Drawing number Remarks

All models Case Unit (No slot) A02B-0303-C500
Case Unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-C501
Case Unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-C502
- 191 -
2.5.2 Display Unit
Model Name Drawing number ID Remarks

All models 7.2” color LCD A02B-0303-D504 1001
8.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D503 1011
10.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D500 1010
10.4” color LCD (with touch panel) A02B-0303-D501
15” color LCD For main A02B-0303-D513 0101 Production
board B1, B2 ceased
A02B-0303-D523
For main A02B-0303-D564
board F1,F2
15” color LCD (with For main A02B-0303-D514 Production
touch panel) board B1, B2 ceased
A02B-0303-D524
For main A02B-0303-D549
board F1,F2
2.5.3 MDI Unit
Model Name Drawing number ID Remarks

All models T series/English/small keyboard A02B-0303-C120#T 04
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
M series/English/small keyboard A02B-0303-C120#M 08
For 7.2”/8.4”，ONG
T series/English/Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C121#T 40
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
M series/English/Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C121#M 02
For 7.2”/8.4”用，ONG
Horizontal type, ONG
Vertical type, ONG
Vertical type, ONG
English/Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C128 20
QWERTY
- 192 -
2.5.4 Printed Circuit Boards

* Refer to Chapter 5 for details of Option board.
Name Drawing number ID Remarks
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A1 A20B-8100-0980 00301
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
31i-A, 32i-A main board A2 A20B-8100-0981 00302
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
32i-A main board A3 A20B-8100-0982 00303
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD, without Ethernet)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A4 A20B-8101-0400 00320
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
32i-A main board A6 A20B-8101-0402 00322
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board B1 A20B-8101-0022 00306
(for 15” LCD)
31i-A, 32i-A main board B2 A20B-8101-0026 00312
(for 15” LCD)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board F1 A20B-8101-0372 0031A
(for 15” LCD)
31i-A, 32i-A main board F2 A20B-8101-0376 0031E
(for 15” LCD)
CPU card A1 A20B-3300-0477 0040C
(Standard version, DRAM 32MB)
CPU card A2 A20B-3300-0474 0040D
CPU card A3 A20B-3300-0475 0040E
CPU card A5 A20B-3300-0476 0041D Support for optional
(Standard version, DRAM 64MB) settings
CPU card A6 A20B-3300-0472 0041E Support for optional
(Standard version, DRAM 128MB) settings
CPU card B2 A20B-3300-0470 00406
(High-speed version, DRAM 64MB)
CPU card B3 A20B-3300-0471 00407
CPU card D2 A20B-3300-0478 00418 Support for optional
(High-speed version, DRAM 64MB) settings
CPU card D3 A20B-3300-0479 00419 Support for optional
(High-speed version, DRAM 128MB) settings
CPU card C1 A20B-3300-0491 00421
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 32MB)
CPU card C2 A20B-3300-0490 00420
CPU card C3 A20B-3300-0492 00422
CPU card C5 A20B-3300-0493 00424 Support for optional
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 64MB) settings
CPU card C6 A20B-3300-0495 00426 Support for optional
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 128MB) settings
Axis control card B11 A20B-3300-0445 00106
(FSSB 1-path)
- 193 -

Axis control card B12 A20B-3300-0448 0010B
(FSSB 1-path)
Axis control card B13 A20B-3300-0447 0010A
(FSSB 1-path)
(FSSB 2-path)
(FSSB 2-path)
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0160 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 1MB) A20B-3900-0220 SRAM: 03
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 256kB) A20B-3900-0230 SRAM: 01
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00700
Display control card For main board B1,B2 A20B-3300-0420 0000x1
For main board F1,F2 A20B-3300-0551 0101XX
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C
HSSB board A20B-8101-0111 00611
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030 00701
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031 00702
Profibus master board A20B-8101-0050 00704
Profibus slave board A20B-8101-0100 00705
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 00706
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 00708
Back panel (No slot) A20B-2003-0600 01
Back panel (1 slot) A20B-2003-0810 00
Back panel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0610 10
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010 –
Inverter (for 7.2" color LCD) A20B-8100-0961 –
Inverter (for 15" color LCD) A14L-0143-0002 –
Touch panel control printed circuit board A20B-8002-0310 –
- 194 -
2.5.5 I/O
Name Drawing number Remarks

Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module A1 A20B-2002-0470 DI/DO: 72/56,
DI=general 16, matrix
56, with MPG interface
Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module B1 A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with
MPG interface
Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module B2 A20B-2002-0521 DI/DO: 48/32
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O basic module A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion module A A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with
MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion module B A03B-0815-C003 DI/DO: 24/16
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion module C A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output )
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion module D A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: basic module B1 A03B-0815-C040 DI/DO:48/32, with MPG
interface
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: basic module B2 A03B-0815-C041 DI/DO:48/32, without
MPG interface
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: expansion A03B-0815-C042 DI/DO:48/32
module E1
Terminal type I/O module: basic module A03B-0823-C001 DI/DO:24/16, with I/O
Link I/F
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module A A03B-0823-C002 DI/DO:24/16, with MPG
interface
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module B A03B-0823-C003 DI/DO:24/16, without
MPG interface
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module C A03B-0823-C004 DO: 16 (2A output )
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module D A03B-0823-C005 Analog input
Main panel machine operator's panel A02B-0303-C231
Sub panel A machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C232
Sub panel D machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C244
Operator's panel connector unit (Source type output A) A16B-2202-0731 DI/DO: 64/32
Operator's panel connector unit (Source type output B) A16B-2202-0730 DI/DO: 96/64
Handy machine operator's panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine operator's panel A02B-0259-C220
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter (For AS-I Ver.2.0) A03B-0817-C001
I/O Link distributed adapter (2ch) A20B-1007-0680
- 195 -
2.5.6 Other Units
Name Drawing number Remarks

Separate detector interface unit (basic 4 axes) A02B-0303-C205
Separate detector interface unit (additional 4 axes) A02B-0236-C204
Analog input separate detector interface unit (basic 4 axes) A06B-6061-C201
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC-side HSSB interface board (2CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus A20B-8101-0162
PC-side HSSB interface board (1CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus A20B-8101-0163
Case for the 0-slot basic unit A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan for the 0-slot basic unit A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2 units
Fan for the 1-slot/2-slot basic unit A02B-0303-K121 60 mm square, 1 unit
40 mm square, 1 unit
Backup part for the control unit: Battery A02B-0200-K102
Backup part for the control unit: Power fuse A02B-0236-K100
Backup part for the control unit: Power fuse (for 15" color LCD) A02B-0236-K101
- 196 -
2.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD
WARNING
Only those personnel who have received approved
safety and maintenance training may perform this
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the board,
be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits
presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
CAUTION
Before starting replacement work, back up the
contents (such as parameters and programs) of the
SRAM memory of the CNC. Otherwise, the
contents of the SRAM memory may be lost during
replacement work.
Replacement procedure
1 Remove the LCD-mounted type control unit, referencing Section
5.13, “MOUNTING AND REMOVING LCD AND MDI
UNITS.”
2 Remove the two screws at the bottom of the case, then remove
the case while pushing down the claws located on the upper side.
At this time, the fan and battery cables need not be detached.
- 197 -
Claw
NOTE) The screws are attached to the case so as not to

Screws be dropped.
3 Detach the cables from the connectors CA88A (PCMCIA

interface connector), CA79A (video signal interface connector),
and CK20A and CK21A (connectors for soft keys) on the main
board. Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board.
The connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection)
directly connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So,
detach the main board by moving the main board downward.
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK20A
CK21A
4 When mounting the main board, reverse steps 2 and 3.
- 198 -
2.7 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT
WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, locate and remove
the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have
received approved safety and maintenance training
may perform this replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fuse, be
careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
hazard.
- Fuse mounting location for 10.4” LCD
Rear of unit
Fuse
Ordering code Rating

A02B-0236-K100 5A
- 199 -
- Fuse mounting location for 15” LCD
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power supply
COP module
Fuse

A02B-0236-K101 7.5A
- 200 -
2.8 REPLACING BATTERY
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control
unit. The power to the SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery
mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The above data is not
lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup battery is
mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can maintain the
contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
In general, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no
longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are
lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.
When using a lithium battery

- Replacement procedure
When a lithium battery is used
Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B-0200-K102
(FANUC specification: A98L-0031-0012)).
1 Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off
the power.
2 Remove the battery from the rear of the CNC unit.
First, unplug the connector, then take the battery out of its case.
The connector is not latched. Pull the cable to unplug the
connector.
When a unit with no option slot is used, the battery case is
located on the rear of the unit as shown in the figure below.
When a unit with option slots is used, the battery case is located
beside a fan on the top.
3 Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
4 Clamp the battery cables as shown in the figure below.
- 201 -
Connector
Battery
case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
When a unit with no option slot is used
Battery
case
Connector
Lithium battery
A02B-0236-K102
When a unit with option slots is used
Battery cable
Clamping battery cables
- 202 -
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may
result in the battery exploding. Replace the battery
only with the specified battery (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Steps 1 to 3 should be completed within 30
minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a
battery for any longer than the specified period.
Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps 1 to 3 may not be completed within 30
minutes, save all contents of the SRAM memory to
the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents
of the SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be
restored easily.
For the method of operation, refer to Section 4.9 or
Appendix D.
When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other

rules of your local government. Also, cover the terminals of the
battery with vinyl tape or the like to prevent a short-circuit.
- 203 -
When using commercial alkaline dry cells (size D)

1 Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available.

2 Turn on the power to the control unit.
3 Remove the battery case cover.
4 Replace the cells, paying careful attention to their orientation.
5 Reinstall the cover onto the battery case.
CAUTION
When replacing the alkaline dry cells while the
power is off, use the same procedure as that for
lithium battery replacement described above.
Alkaline dry cell × 2
Cover
Connection terminal
on the rear
Mounting hole × 4
Battery case
- 204 -
When replacing the lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
- Method of connection
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector to
which the lithium battery is connected.
The lithium battery, provided as standard, can be replaced with
external batteries in the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) according to
the battery replacement procedure described above.
Connector
CAUTION
1 Install the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in a
location where the batteries can be replaced even
when the power to the control unit is on.
2 The battery cable connector is attached to the
control unit by means of a simple lock system. To
prevent the connector from being disconnected
due to the weight of the cable or tension within the
cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the
connector.
- 205 -
2.9 REPLACING FAN MOTORS
When a reduction in the speed of the fan motor is detected, the FAN
warning message blinks on the LCD screen.
When a failure such as stop of the fan motor is detected, an overheat
alarm or system alarm is issued and the system stops operating.
Therefore, as soon as the FAN warning appears, replace the fan motor.
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan
motor, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating
cover).
hazard.
- Fan ordering information

Ordering code Remarks
Unit with no option slot A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2 units
Unit with 1 slot or 2 option slots A02B-0303-K121
- 206 -
- For units with no expansion slots

1 Before replacing a fan motor, turn off the power to the CNC.
2 Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig. a).
The connector is latched. Unplug the connector while holding
down the latch placed at the upper part of the cable connector.
3 Detach the latch securing the fan motor, then demount the fan
motor ((2) of Fig. a).
4 Insert a new fan motor into the fan case ((3) of Fig. a), then
reconnect the connector.
Fig. a
(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case
Caution) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

direction. (Face the label upward.)
- 207 -
- For units with 2 expansion slots

2 Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig. b).
3 Detach the latch securing the fan cover ((3) of Fig. b), then
demount the fan cover from the unit.
4 The fan is secured to the fan cover. Detach the latch, then
demount the fan motor ((2) of Fig. b).
5 Install a new fan motor onto the fan cover. Then, reinstall the fan
cover onto the unit, and reconnect the connector.
(3) Fan cover (1) Connector

Fig. b
(2) Fan
Cation) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

- 208 -
2.10 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT
WARNING
replacement work.
hazard.
CAUTION
replacement work.
- Order specification of the backlight

Backlight Order specification Individual specification
For Manufactured
A02B-0236-K112 A61L-0001-0142#BLS
7.2”LCD by Sharp
The backlight of the 10.4" color LCD cannot be replaced.
- 209 -
Claw

Screws be dropped.

interface connector) and CK20A (connectors for soft keys) on
the main board.
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CK20A
CK21A
- 210 -
3 Remove the two screws under the main board and remove the
metal plate to which the main board is attached from the
escutcheon section.
Connector
Connector
Axis control card CPU card
Connector
Power supply unit
4 Remove the three screws at the left on the surface of the LCD
unit, open the cover to expose the backlight, replace the cable of
the inverter with a new one.
Con
nect
LCD unit
display surface
Backlight
5 Upon completion of the replacement, assemble the unit by

reversing steps 1 to 4. At this time, prevent foreign matter or
dust from entering the unit.
- 211 -
3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
3 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series

300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards in the LCD-mounted
type Series 300is/310is/320is control units, the functions of the card
PCBs on the printed circuit boards, and the procedures for replacing
consumables.
3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .........................................213

3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .....................................................213
CONNECTORS AND CARDS................................................215
3.5 LIST OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND UNITS .........232
3.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD.........................................236
3.7 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT................................................239
3.8 REPLACING THE BATTERY................................................240
3.9 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR...........................................240
3.10 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET240
3.11 BACKUP UNIT .......................................................................241
- 212 -
B-63945EN/03 3.LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
3.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
See section 2.1 for hardware configuration of Series

300is/310is/320is.
3.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW
See section 2.2 for hardware overview of Series 300is/310is/320is.
- 213 -
For the 300is/310is/320is, the following connection is required, in addition to the connection common to the
30i/300is/31is/310is/32i/310is.
300is/310is/320is
control unit
24V-IN(CPD16A)
SPDL (JA41)
I/O LINK(JD51A) The functions and connections of the
HDI(JA40) connectors on the left are the same as for the
MDI(CA55) Series 30i. See Section 2.3, “TOTAL
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.”
FSSB(COP10A-1)
FSSB(COP10A-2)
R232-1/S.SPDL(JD56A)
{ RS-232-C I/O device
Serial spindle
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54)
USB printer
USB keyboard
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
Ethernet backbone cable
BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75 or CA113)
BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)
See Section 2.3, "TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS" for connection other than the above.
- 214 -

CONNECTORS AND CARDS
3.4.1 Main Board
- Specification
Item Specification
A20B-8101-0020
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (For 10.4"LCD) or
A20B-8101-0028
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0023
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0021
A20B-8101-0024
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (For 10.4"LCD) or
A20B-8101-0029
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0025
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (For 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0370
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0373
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0371
310is-A, 320is-A main board G4 (For 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0374
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0375
- 215 -

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear view
Rear of unit
(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 connectors installed on the servo card.)
CA76
CA55 (FUSE)
JA40 JA41 Power
supply unit
COP
CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
or
CPD16A
CA113
CA98
JGM CA87A CN79A
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or CA76 CD46L

CA95
CA55
(FUSE)
JA40 JA41
Power
CPD12
supply unit
CD38S
CK20A
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A
or
CA113 CPD16A
- 216 -

CA55 MDI
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1/serial spindle
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2/USB
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A DC24V-IN
CA79A Video signal interface (10.4"/12.1”LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (15" LCD only)
CD46L USB interface
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4" LCD)
Fan adapter (for 12.1”/15"LCD)
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 or CA95 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface (12.1”/15"LCD only)
CA75 or CA113 Bach-up unit interface
CA76 Buzzer interface
- 217 -
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes The maximum number of
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes axes is also limited
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes depending on the model.
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes For the 320is, HRV4 is
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes unapplicable.
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 Standard version, DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0476 Standard version, DRAM 64MB Support for optional settings
A20B-3300-0472 Standard version, DRAM 128MB Support for optional settings
A20B-3300-0470 High-speed version, DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0471 High-speed version, DRAM 128MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0478 High-speed version, DRAM 64MB Support for optional settings
A20B-3300-0479 High-speed version, DRAM 128MB Support for optional settings
A20B-3300-0491 Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0493 Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 64MB Support for optional settings
A20B-3300-0495 Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 128MB Support for optional settings
- 218 -

A20B-3300-0420 For main board C1, C2, C4,
10.4”/15” LCD and memory (64MB)
C5
A20B-3300-0421 For main board
10.4”/15” LCD and memory (128MB)
C1,C2,C4,C5
(3) GUI card
A20B-3300-0422 12.1” LCDLCD and memory (64MB) For main board C3,C6
A20B-3300-0423 12.1” LCD and memory (128MB) For main board C3,C6
A20B-3300-0551 Memory (128MB) For main board G1 to G6
A20B-3300-0552 Memory (256MB) For main board G1 to G6
- 219 -
- DIMM module and compact flash card mounting location

(1) For main boards C1 to C6
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM module
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector
GUI card
(3) Compact flash card
Connector
GUI card
(connector side)
- 220 -
(2) For main boards G1 to G6

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM module (3) Compact flash card
Connectorｺﾈｸﾀ

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB SRAM 1MB The FROM stores various
A20B-3900-0220 control software programs,
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB SRAM 2MB user software programs,
A20B-3900-0221 and so forth.
A20B-3900-0163 FROM 32MB SRAM 1MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0223 battery-backed memory
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB SRAM 2MB module.
A20B-3900-0224
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB SRAM 1MB
FROM/SRAM A20B-3900-0226
(2)
module A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0227
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0230
A20B-3900-0231
A20B-3900-0232
A20B-3900-0233
- 221 -

(3) Compact flash A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB (Production ceased)
card A87L-0001-0173#064MB 64MB (Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB(Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBC 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBC 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBB 1GB(Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#001GBC 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBC 2GB
- Block diagram
Main board
DRAM Display
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
USB Ethernet 1,2ch control
control control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display
unit
USB Lithium battery MDI 24VDC

Ethernet RS232C FSSB I/O Link
Memory card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
- 222 -
Main board
DRAM Display
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
USB 1,2ch control
Ethernet control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display unit
RS232C
USB Memory Lithium battery MDI 24VDC

Ethernet FSSB I/O Link
card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
- 223 -
- LED display
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
(green)
(2) GUI status
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 224 -
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
(green)
(2) GUI status
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER
DNV2 (green)
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
- 225 -
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system
alarm occurrence
defective.
CNC alarm
No. LED Status
3 2 1
1
The battery may be is running out.
An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main board.
4 The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or the FSSB may
be broken.
An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the DIMM
module.
5
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may have
dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
6
The cause may be noise or a power supply module failure.
: On : Off
Alarm LED Meaning

(2) Changes in status LED (GUI side status: Green LED) indication
at power-on time
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3 2 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the system
1
was started up successfully and is running normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and GUI card is being
initialized.
3
If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication, the
CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be faulty.
Start-up on the GUI card side is being awaited.
4 If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication, the
GUI card or main board may be faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the GUI card, or a RAM
error occurred in the interface between the CPU card and GUI
5
card. If the status does not proceed further beyond this indication,
the CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be faulty.
: On : Off
(3) Alarm LED (red) indication at GUI system alarm occurrence

If the LED lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
Common RAM error.
DNV4
: On : Off
- 226 -
(4) GUI POWER (green LED) indicates that power is supplied to the
GUI card (at the time of back-up operation as well).
(5) 7-segment LED


Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMIBB or TMSF1(Short)

Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE(OPEN) TMSF1(Short)
- 227 -
3.4.2 Inverter PCBs, Connector Units, and Fan Adapter PCBs

Inverter PCB For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
(Used also as the
fan adapter)
For 12.1” LCD A14L-0143-0003
For 15” LCD A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter For 10.4” color LCD Used also as the inverter
PCBs (Used also as the above
fan adapter)
For 12.1” LCD A20B-8100-0969
For 15” LCD
Connection For 12.1” LCD A660-2006-T050#L130R0
cable between For 15” LCD A660-2005-T469#L200R0
the main board
and the
inverter
Conversion For 15” LCD A660-4042-T047
cable
NOTE
- 228 -
- Details of the inverter

Display unit main board for
300is/310is/320is
(A20B-8101-006x)
For 10.4” LCD
10.4” LCD unit Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A

CP1 CN1
CPD12
For 12.1” LCD

Fan adapter
CN1
12.1” LCD unit Inverter

CN2 CN1 Connection cable for the inverter
CN3
For 15.0” LCD

Fan adapter
CN1

CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Conversion cable
- 229 -
- Inverter PCBs, connector units, and fan adapter PCBs

1) For 10.4” LCD
Inverter PCB Connector unit
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
2) For 12.1” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit
Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
- 230 -
3) For 15” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit
Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
- Conversion cable for the inverter

When a 15" LCD is used, a conversion cable needs to be run between
the LCD backlight cable and the inverter connector.
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter PCB. Plug into a
matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be
connected to either of the two cables from the inverter.
Conversion cable (Two cables (A660-4042-T047) are used.)
- 231 -
3.5 LIST OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND UNITS
3.5.1 List of Printed Circuit Boards
Parent
Name Ordering code Remarks
specification
Main board C1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0020 ID=00304
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0303-H105
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C3 (300is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=00307
C2 (300is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=00305
C1 (310is-A5, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0020 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0306-H105
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C3 (310is-A5, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0306-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=00307
C2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0306-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=00305
C4 (310is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0024 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0307-H105
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C4 (320is-A , for 10.4"LCD) A20B-8101-0024 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D506
A02B-0308-H105
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505 and
D541
C6 (320is-A , for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0308-H106 A20B-8101-0027 ID=00313
C5 (320is-A , for 15"LCD) A02B-0308-H107 A20B-8101-0025 ID=00311
G1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0303-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
G3 (300is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
- 232 -
Parent
specification
Main board G2 (300is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
G1 (310is-A5, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0306-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
G3 (310is-A5, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0306-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
G2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0306-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
G4 (310is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0307-H103 A20B-8101-0374 ID=0031C
G6 (310is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0307-H104 A20B-8101-0377 ID=0031F
G5 (310is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0307-H108 A20B-8101-0375 ID=0031D
GUI card For main 10.4” /15"LCD and A02B-0303-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
board C1 to memory ( 64MB)
C6 10.4” /15"LCD and A02B-0303-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
memory (128MB)
12.1” LCD and A02B-0303-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X0
memory (64MB)
12.1"LCD and A02B-0303-H143 A20B-3300-0423 ID=0001X0
memory (128MB)
For main Memory (128MB) A02B-0303-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
board G1 to ID=0110XX
Memory (256MB) A02B-0303-H146 A20B-3300-0552
G6
Power supply unit A02B-0303-H110 A20B-8101-0010
Inverter printed For 10.4"LCD - A20B-8100-0962
circuit board For 12,1"LCD - A14L-0143-0003
For 15"LCD - A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter For 12.1”/15”LCD - A20B-8100-0969
Backup unit printed circuit board - A20B-2100-0820
Back panel No slot - A20B-2003-0600 ID=01
1 slot - A20B-2003-0810 ID=00
2 slots - A20B-2003-0610 ID=10
- 233 -
3.5.2 List of Units
Parent
specification
LCD unit For main board C1 10.4"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H125 A02B-0303-D505 ID=1111
to C6 With touch panel A02B-0303-H127 A02B-0303-D506 Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D541 ID=1111
12.1"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H170 A02B-0303-D509 ID=1110
With touch panel A02B-0303-H171 A02B-0303-D534 H171 only
With touch panel A02B-0303-H172 A02B-0303-D510 Without soft
key
15"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H225 A02B-0303-D515 ID=1101
Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D525 ID=1101
With touch panel A02B-0303-H227 A02B-0303-D516 ID=1101
Production
ceased
A02B-0303-D526 ID=1101
For main board G1 10.4"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H121 A02B-0303-D563 ID=1111
to G6 With touch panel A02B-0303-H129 A02B-0303-D541
12.1"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H173 A02B-0303-D557 ID=1110
With touch panel A02B-0303-H174 A02B-0303-D544 H174 only
With touch panel A02B-0303-H175 A02B-0303-D545 Without soft
key
15"LCD Without touch panel A02B-0303-H228 A02B-0303-D558 ID=1101
With touch panel A02B-0303-H229 A02B-0303-D551
Case unit No slot 300is-A A02B-0303-B600 A02B-0303-C500
A02B-0303-B620
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B600
A02B-0306-B620
310is-A A02B-0307-B600
A02B-0307-B620
320is-A A02B-0308-B600
A02B-0308-B620
1 slot 300is-A A02B-0303-B601 A02B-0303-C501
A02B-0303-B621
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B601
A02B-0306-B621
310is-A A02B-0307-B601
A02B-0307-B621
320is-A A02B-0308-B601
A02B-0308-B621
2 slots 300is-A A02B-0303-B602 A02B-0303-C502
A02B-0303-B622
310is-A5 A02B-0306-B602
A02B-0306-B622
310is-A A02B-0307-B602
A02B-0307-B622
320is-A A02B-0308-B602
A02B-0308-B622
The case unit includes the case, backpanel, fan, and battery.
- 234 -
3.5.3 Others
Parent
specification
Compact flash card 32MB A02B-0303-H151 A87L-0001-0173#032MBA Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC Proper operation: 32MB
64MB A02B-0303-H152 A87L-0001-0173#064MB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC Proper operation: 64MB
128MB A02B-0303-H153 A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
A87L-0001-0173#256MBC
A87L-0001-0173#512MBC
1GB A02B-0303-H156 A87L-0001-0173#001GBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#001GBC
A87L-0001-0173#002GBC
Connection cable between For 12.1"LCD - A660-2006-T050#L130R0
the main board and the For 15"LCD - A660-2005-T469#L200R0
inverter
Conversion cable (for 15" LCD backlight) - A660-4042-T047 Two cables used
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0281-K801 For main board C1 to C6
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0303-K801 For main board G1 to G6
Case No slot - A02B-0303-D100#0A

1 slot - A02B-0303-D100#1A
2 slots - A02B-0303-D100#2A
0-slot basic unit fan - A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2 units
1-slot/2-slot basic unit fan - A02B-0303-K121 60 mm square, 1 unit
Backup part for the control unit: Battery - A02B-0200-K102
Fuse - A02B-0236-K101
NOTE
This section describes the printed circuit boards
and units specific to the 300is/310is/320is. For
the printed circuit boards and units common to the
300is/310is/320is and 30i/31i/32i, see Section 2.5.
- 235 -
3.6 REPLACING THE MAIN BOARD
WARNING
replacement work.
hazard.
CAUTION
replacement work.
- 236 -
3.6.1 Replacement Procedure

UNITS.”
Claw

Screws be dropped.

interface connector), CD46L (USB interface connector), and
CK20A and CK21A (connectors for soft keys) on the main
board.
When the 10.4" LCD is used, remove CA79A (video signal
interface connector). When the 12.1" LCD is used, remove
CA79A (video signal interface connector) and CPD12. When the
15" LCD is used, remove CA98 (video signal interface
connector) and CPD12. When a touch panel is provided, remove
TP2 or CA95 (connector for the touch panel) as well.
- 237 -
4 Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board. The
connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection) directly
connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So, detach the
main board by moving the main board downward.
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
TP2
CD46L
CDP12
CK20A
CK21A
5 When mounting the main board, reverse steps 2 through 4.
- 238 -
3.7 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT
WARNING
hazard.
- Ordering codes of fuses

A02B-0236-K101
- Fuse mounting location
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power
COP supply unit
Fuse
- 239 -
3.8 REPLACING THE BATTERY
See Section 2.8, "REPLACING THE BATTERY" for replacing the

battery.
3.9 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR
See Section 2.9, "REPLACING FAN MOTORS" for replacing the fan
motor.
3.10 REPLACING THE TOUCH PANEL PROTECTION SHEET
For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch
panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there are
flaws and contamination on this protection sheet that make the screen
hard to read, replace the protection sheet. Prepare the following items.
Name Ordering code

Touch panel protection For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
sheet For 12.1” LCD A02B-0236-K118
For 15.0” LCD A08B-0082-K020
3.10.1 Replacing Method

See "Replacing the protect sheet" in Section 5.7, "LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY (LCD)".
- 240 -
3.11 BACKUP UNIT
- Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
Backup unit cable
A02B-0281-K801
(for main board C1 t to C6)
Backup unit cable
A02B-0303-K801
(for main board G1 t to G6)
- Mounting positions of connectors

CN9
Backup unit PCB
Front view
Connector name Function

CN9 Supplying the backup power
When the LED (PC POWER) on the main printed circuit board lights,
do not touch any parts in the basic unit and backup unit. The Series
300is/310is/320is operates for about 12 seconds after the main power
is turned off.
NOTE
For the main boards C1 to C6 (cable specification:
A02B-0281-K801), the backup interface connector
(CA55) and MDI connector (CA55) on the main
boards have the same shape.
Be careful not to insert a wrong cable into the
connectors.
- 241 -
- Replacing the backup unit

When "NCBOOT32- A battery backup hardware alarm (04E5)"
appears on the 300is series screen, replace the backup unit.
Procedure
<1> Turn off the CNC power, replace the backup unit, and turn on the
power again.
<2> When the Windows screen appears, press the Ctrl keyrr and Aux
key of the MDI in sequence to display the start menu, and start
Windows Explorer.
<3> Execute "Storage Card¥Fanuc¥NCBOOT32.exe".
<4> When a pop-up menu appears at the lower left of the screen,
select "Open".
<5> Check "Enable battery backup unit" to enable backup operation.
<6> Select "OK" to close NCBOOT32.
<7> Execute "Storage Card¥Fanuc¥NCBOOT32.exe".
<8> When a pop-up menu appears at the lower left of the screen,
select "Save".
<9> Turn off the CNC power and back on again. Confirm that a
backup operates normally and no alarm appears.
- 242 -
3.12 COMPENSATING THE TOUCH PANEL
Open the control panel and start the stylus.

Perform compensation according to the instructions in the window.
- 243 -
4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE B-63945EN/03
4 STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES

HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards of the CNC control
unit of the stand-alone type 30i series and card PCB functions on the
printed circuit boards. The chapter also describes procedures for
replacing consumable items.
4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .........................................245

4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW .....................................................246
4.4 CONTROL UNIT.....................................................................252
4.5 DISPLAY UNIT FOR 30i/31i/32i............................................259
4.6 PANEL i PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD..................................292
4.7 DISPLAY UNIT FOR is SERIES CNC ...................................298
4.8 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS .........313
4.9 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT ...........332
4.10 REPLACING THE BATTERY................................................333
4.11 REPLACING A FAN UNIT ....................................................337
4.12 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE DISPLAY UNIT .............340
4.13 REPLACING MAINTENANCE PARTS FOR CNC DISPLAY
UNIT FOR AUTOMOTIVE MANUFACTURERS ................342
4.14 REPLACING PANEL i MAINTENANCE PARTS ................352
4.15 REPLACING is SERIES CNC DISPLAY UNIT
MAITENANCE PARTS ..........................................................370
- 244 -
B-63945EN/03 4.STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE
4.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Display unit MDI unit
Control unit
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Optical cable
Distributed I/O module, I/O unit MODEL-A, etc.
I/O Link
Machine operator's panel,

power magnetic circuit, etc.
- 245 -
4.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW
4 slot rack 2 slot rack
Main board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
Options (Slot 1 to 4) Basic system
Fast Ethernet board Main board

Data server function - CPU for controlling CNC
Ethernet communication function - Power supply
- 2-axis to 24-axis control
Additional axis board - Spindle interface
- DISPLAY interface
Additional axis control function
- I/O Link
I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High-speed DI
Additional spindle board - RS-232C
Additional spindle control function - Memory card interface
HSSB interface board

High-speed serial bus interface board
Various types of network boards

FL-net board
Device Net master board The unit with optional slots can have as many option boards
Device Net slave board installed as the number of the slots.
- 246 -
Main board
Slot
24V-IN(CPD19A) 24 VDC power supply

24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device
Optical fiber ccable
LCD UNIT MDI UNIT
COP21A,B,M,
DISPLAY(COP21A)
DC24V CP1A CA55 CK27
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
PANEL i or personal
computer
HDI(JA40) High-peed skip input
Distributed Manual pulse generator

I/O board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
JD1B Operator's
I/O Link(JD51A)
panel
JD1A
24VDC CPD1 Distributed Power

I/O board, magnetics
JD1B
I/O unit,
JD1A etc. cabinet
JD1B βi amplifier Servo motor

JD1A with I/O
R232-1(JD56A)
RS-232-C I/O device
5th, 6th spindles
R232-2(JD36A)
RS-232-C I/O device
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
PSM
Position coder
3rd, 4th
spindles
SPM
Servo card To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
Optical fiber cable

COP10B Axis 1
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SVM servo motor
COP10A
FSSB(COP10A-2)
COP10B Axis 2
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Axis 4
SVM servo motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.)

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
ETHERNET(CD38A) CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector
interface unit 2
Ethernet
- 247 -
When one or more option boards are present

Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
PSM Position coder
7th spindle motor

SPM
Additional axis board To 8th spindle motor
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
panel
JD1A
24VDC CPD1 Distributed I/O

board, I/O unit, Power
JD1B etc. magnetics
JD1A cabinet
- 248 -
Fast Ethernet
Optional slot
board
Memory card Prepare the memory card recommended by FANUC.
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer

or PANEL i
(Note 1)
Profibus master
board
Profibus slave
board
DeviceNet master
board
DeviceNet slave
board
FL-net board
FLNET(CD38N) Note 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a

FL-net unit
personal computer or PANEL i is
connected using an HSSB interface.
- 249 -
- The connection diagram of the CNC display unit for automotive manufacturers is
shown below.
CNC control unit

Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i -MODEL A)
Main board
24V-IN(CPD19A) Power supply (+24VDC)

DISPLAY(COP21A)
I/O Link (JD51A)
I/O Link unit

I/O Link (JD1B)
I/O Link (JD1A)
CNC display unit for automotive Power supply (+24VDC)

manufacturers
I/O Link unit
HSSB (COP21M)
+24V (CPD18)
Card slot
I/OLink(JD1A)
I/OLink(JD1B)
USB mouse
USB keyboard
USB mouse
USB keyboard
- 250 -
For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is required on the unit.
CNC control unit
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
Display unit for is series CNC
24VDC power supply
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
{
RS-232-C I/O device
Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer
R232-1(JD36) RS-232-C I/O device
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB Ethernet

backbone
BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75 or CA113)
BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)
- 251 -
4.4 CONTROL UNIT

Item Ordering code
30i/300i/300is-A main board A16B-3200-0520
31i/310i/310is-A5 main board
31i/310i/310is-A main board A16B-3200-0521
32i/320i/320is-A main board
- Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc.
Battery case BAT1 : Battery
JD56A : RS232C serial port/serial spindle

JD36A : RS232C serial port
CNM1B : Memory card JD51A : I/O Link

JA40 : High-speed DI
JA41 : Serial spindle
LINK,COM : LED for embedded Ethernet
CD38A : Embedded Ethernet
FUSE ALM : Fuse burn-out
CPD19A(right) : 24VDC IN
CPD19B(left) : 24VDC OUT
COP21A : Connection to LCD unit
COP10A-2 : FSSB STATUS : 7-Segment LED
ALARM : Alarm LED

COP10A-1 : FSSB MTSW : Rotary SW
PSW : Push SW
GND : SG connection terminal
STATUS 7-segment LED: This LED usually indicates the state of the
CNC. This LED is used also for setting
and maintenance using the rotary switch
MTSW and the push switch PSW.
MTSW rotary switch: This rotary switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the
PSW push switch.
PSW push switch: This push switch is used for setting and
maintenance operations, in combination
with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the
MTSW rotary switch.
- 252 -
- Mounting positions of cards and DIMM modules
(5) FROM/SRAM module
(2) CPU card
(1) Axis control card

(4) PMC module
- Method of detaching the main board

The main board is secured to the control unit by the fan unit. So,
when the fan unit is attached to the control unit, the main board cannot
be detached.
When attaching or detaching the main board, be sure to detach the fan
unit.
For the method of detaching the fan unit, see Section 4.11,
“REPLACING A FAN UNIT”.
- 253 -
No. Item Ordering code Function Remarks

HRV2 : Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0445 HRV3 : Up to 3 axes
HRV4 : Up to 1 axis
HRV2 : Up to 8 axes The maximum
A20B-3300-0448 HRV3 : Up to 6 axes number of axes is
HRV4 : Up to 2 axes also limited
HRV2 : Up to 12 axes depending on the
(1) Axis control card A20B-3300-0447 HRV3 : Up to 9 axes model.
HRV4 : Up to 3 axes For the
HRV2 : Up to 16 axes 32i/320i/320is,
A20B-3300-0442 HRV3 : Up to 12 axes HRV4 is
HRV4 : Up to 4 axes unapplicable.
A20B-3300-0440 HRV3 : Up to 18 axes
HRV4 : Up to 6 axes
A20B-3300-0477 Standard version,
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0476 Standard version, Support for optional
DRAM 64MB settings
A20B-3300-0472 Standard version, Support for optional
DRAM 128MB settings
A20B-3300-0470 High-speed version,
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0471 High-speed version,
DRAM 128MB
(2) CPU card
A20B-3300-0478 High-speed version, Support for optional
DRAM 64MB settings
A20B-3300-0479 High-speed version, Support for optional
DRAM 128MB settings
A20B-3300-0491 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0490 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 64MB
A20B-3300-0492 Dedicated to the 32i, Support for optional
DRAM 128MB settings
DRAM 64MB settings
DRAM 128MB settings
(4) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
- 254 -
No. Item Ordering code Function Remarks

A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB
SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0163 FROM 32MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB
SRAM 2MB
FROM stores
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB
various control
FROM/SRAM SRAM 1MB
(5) software products.
module A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB
SRAM is backed up
SRAM 2MB
by a battery.
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB
SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
SRAM 512kB
- 255 -
- Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
Axis control card Display Peripheral Ethernet PMC module

control control control
I/O Link
1,2ch control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display
unit
Lithium battery MDI Ethernet I/O Link 24VDC

FSSB
RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Serial spindle
HDI
- 256 -
- LED display
LED for embedded Ethernet

LINK (Upper, green)
COM (Lower, yellow)
FUSE ALM : Fuse burn-out detection LED
STATUS : 7-Segment LED
ALARM : Alarm LED

1 4
2 3
- 257 -
(1) Alarm LED (red) display when a system alarm occurs

defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
1
The battery may be running out.
board.
4
FSSB may be broken.
DIMM module.
5
failure.
: On : Off
Alarm LED Meaning

4 (LOW) The CPU card may be faulty.
(2) Ethernet status LED

Alarm LED Meaning
LINK (green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
correctly
(3) 7-segment LED
Dot
Alarm LED Meaning

Dot Turned on when the display unit is not connected to
connector COP21A.
If this LED is turned on when the display unit is
connected, it is probable that the optical cable is
broken, the display unit is not powered on, or the
display unit is faulty.
See Appendix E “LED Display” for others.
- 258 -
4.5 DISPLAY UNIT FOR 30i/31i/32i
4.5.1 10.4” Display Unit
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
10.4” display unit A1 Without a touch panel A02B-0303-C071
10.4” display unit A2 With a touch panel A02B-0303-C081
10.4” display unit B1 Without a touch panel A02B-0303-C074
10.4” display unit B2 With a touch panel A02B-0303-C084
- Display unit printed circuit board

Name Drawing number
Display control For display unit A1 or A2 A20B-8101-0210
board For display unit B1 or B2 A20B-8101-0320
Inverter A20B-8100-0962
Touch panel control board A20B-8002-0310
(for display unit A2 or B2) A20B-8002-0312
- 259 -

(1) For display unit A1 or A2
Rear of unit
CA55
CA55 JA36A
JA36A
CK20A CN1
CN1
COP21A
COP21A
CK21A
CK21A
CA79A
CA87A
CA88A
Display unit control
board
CA55 COP21A
JA36A
CN1
CK21A
CK20A

CA55 MDI
JD36A Touch panel interface
CN1 24VDC
CA87A Inverter
COP21A HSSB interface
- 260 -
(2) For display unit B1 or B2
Rear of unit
CA55 JD36A
CK20A CPD19B
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
Display unit control board CA88A
COP21B
CA55 JD36A
CK20A CPD19B
CK21A
CP1B CP1A

CA55 MDI
JD36A Touch panel interface
CPD19B (CP1A, CP1B) 24VDC
CA87A Inverter
COP21A HSSB interface
- 261 -
- LED display
(1) Display unit A1 or A2 board
POWER
(2) POWER (green)

(3) ERROR (red) ERROR
(1) HSSB (green)

HSSB
LED name Meaning

Lights when this board is normally connected to the
HSSB (green LED)
CNC and communication is enabled.
POWER (green LED) Lights the power is normally turned on.
Lights when a hardware component detects a failure
ERROR (red LED) in this display unit. The display control board may be
defective.
When a failure is detected in the CNC body or a communication error

due to a HSSB cable break or the like occurs, the ERROR (red) LED
does not turn on. In this case, blinking display indicating a failure
appears in the display unit.
- 262 -
(2) Display unit B1 or B2 board
(2) POWER (green)

(3) ERROR (red) ERROR POWER
(1) HSSB (green)

HSSB
LED name Meaning

Lights when this board is normally connected to the CNC
HSSB (green LED)
and communication is enabled.
POWER (green LED) Lights the power is normally turned on.
Lights when a hardware component detects a failure in this
ERROR (red LED)
display unit. The display control board may be defective.

- 263 -
- Positions of the inverter printed circuit board and touch panel printed circuit
board
(1) For display unit A1 or A2
Touch panel printed circuit board
Inverter printed circuit board
（For display unit A2）
Rear of unit
(2) For display unit B1 or B2

Touch panel printed circuit board
（For display unit B2）
Rear of unit
- 264 -
4.5.2 15” Display Unit
15” color LCD C1 (soft key) A02B-0303-C091
15” color LCD C2 (soft key/touch panel) A02B-0303-C092
15” color LCD D1 (soft key) A02B-0303-C093
15” color LCD D2 (soft key/touch panel) A02B-0303-C094
- Main board
Name PCB specification
For 15” color LCD C1,C2 A20B-8101-0062
For 15” color LCD D1,D2 A20B-8101-0382
- 265 -

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Display unit for stand-alone type 30i
Rea of unit
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
CA98
CA87A
Display unit for stand-alone type 30i
Main board CA88A
CA95
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36

CA55 MDI
JD36 RS-232C serial port 1
CPD18 DC24V-IN
CA87A Fan adapter
- 266 -

COP21M HSSB interface
CD38S Ethernet
CA95 Touch panel interface
- Mounting positions of the cards and compact flash card

1) For 15" color LCD C1, C2

(Mounted on the back of the GUI card)
Connector
(1) Display control card
Connecto
No. Name Specification Function

(1) Display control card A20B-3300-0420
(3) Compact flash card A02B-0303-C990#A Including software
- 267 -
2) For 15" color LCD D1, D2
Connector
(1) Display control card

(3) Compact
flash card
Connector
No. Name Specification Function

(1) Display control card A20B-3300-0551
(3) Compact flash card A02B-0303-C990#B Including software
- 268 -
- LED display
1) For 15" color LCD C1, C2
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
(1) LED display (HSSB)

LED name Meaning
BSRDY(green LED) Lights when the unit can communicate with the NC via the HSSB.
ALM2(red LED) Indicates a common RAM error. It is likely that the main board may be defective.
(2) LED display (Ethernet status)

LED name Meaning
LINK(green LED) Lights when the unit is connected normally with the HUB.
COM(orange LED) Lights when data is being sent or received.
(3) LED display (PC)

LED name Meaning
LEDP(green LED) Indicates that the display unit is supplied with power.
LED1(green LED) Reserved
- 269 -
2) For 15" color LCD D1, D2
Unit of rear
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)

LED name Meaning

LED name Meaning

LED name Meaning
DNV5(green LED) Indicates that the display unit is supplied with power.
DNV6(green LED) Reserved
- 270 -

1) For 15” color LCD C1, C2
Reserve(Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
2) For 15” color LCD D1, D2
Reserve(Open)
- Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and connector units

Inverter PCB A14L-0143-0002
Connection cable between the A660-2005-T469#L200R0
main board and the inverter
Conversion cable A660-4042-T047 Two cables used
NOTE
- 271 -
- Positions of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit

Inverter PCB Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit

When a 15” LCD is used, a conversion cable needs to be run between
matching connector.
Two conversion cables (A660－4042－T047) are used.
- 272 -
4.5.3 10.4" Display Unit for 2-Unit Display
First 10.4” display unit E1for Without a touch
A02B-0303-C072
2-unit display panel
Second 10.4” display unit Without a touch
A02B-0303-C073
E2for 2-unit display panel
Inter-unit video cable (30m) A02B-0303-K843
Inter-unit video cable (20ｍ) A02B-0303-K840
Inter-unit MDI cable (30m) A02B-0303-K848
- Display unit printed circuit board

Name Drawing number
Display control board for For the first unit A20B-8101-0321
2-unit display For the second unit A20B-8101-0322
- 273 -
Rear view of display unit for 2-unit display
CA103
JA73
CA55
CK20A
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
Display unit control board

CA88A
CA103
JA73 COP21B
CA55
CK20A CP1B CP1A
CK21A
Connector number Application Remarks

CA55 MDI
CPD19B (CP1A, CP1B) DC24V
CA88A PCMCIA interface Not provided for the second unit.
CA87A Inverter
COP21Ｂ HSSB interface Not provided for the second unit.
CA103 Inter-unit video signal interface
JA73 Inter-unit MDI interface
- 274 -
- LED display
(2) POWER (green)

(3) ERROR (red) ERROR POWER
(1) HSSB (green)

HSSB
LED name Meaning Remarks

Lights when this board is Not provided for the
HSSB (green LED) normally connected to the CNC second unit.
and communication is enabled.
Lights the power is normally
POWER (green LED)
turned on.
Lights when a hardware Not provided for the
component detects a failure in second unit.
ERROR (red LED)
this display unit. The display
control board may be defective.

- 275 -
- Position of the inverter printed circuit board

(1) For display unit E1 or E2
Rear view of display unit for 2-unit display
CA103
JA73
CA55
CK20A
COP21B
CK21A
CP1B CP1A
- 276 -
4.5.4 CNC Display Unit for Automotive Manufacturers
Connectors and Cards of the Printed Circuit Board

CNC display unit for automotive manufactures
A13B-0198-B201
With no touch panel and no I/O link
A13B-0198-B202
With the touch panel and no I/O link
A13B-0198-B211
With no touch panel and I/O link
A13B-0198-B212
With the touch panel and the I/O link
- Main PCB
Main PCB of the CNC display unit for automotive
manufacturers A20B-8101-0385
- Mounting position of the main PCB
Main PCB
- 277 -
CA98
CA87A
Main PCB
CA88A
CA95
CA113
CD38S CD46L
CPD15
COP21M
CA117 CPD18
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36

CA55 MDI
CA87A Fan adapter
CD38S Not used.
CD46L Connector interface for connection of a USB mouse and USB
keyboard
CPD18 DC24V-IN
JD36 Not used.
JD54 Connector interface for connection of a USB mouse and USB
keyboard
CA113 Not used.
CPD15 DC power interface of the I/O link board
CA117 LED interface
- 278 -
Connector
(1) GUI card

(3)
Compact
flash card
Connector

(1) GUI card A20B-3300-0551
(3) Compact flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
- 279 -
- Block diagram
Main PCB
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT
software
Compact
Flash card Peripheral
Peripheral
control 2 control 1 Power supply unit
5V, 3.3V,
2.5V
USB control
Display unit DC24V

Memory card HSSB
USB
- 280 -
- LED display
CA87A CA98
Main PCB
CA95 CA88A
CA113
CD38S CD46L
CPD15
COP21M
CPD18
CA117
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green) ALM2 BSRDY
LINK(green) (red) (green)
COM(orange)

LED name Meaning
BSRDY (green LED) Lights when the unit can communicate with the NC via the HSSB.
ALM2 (red LED) Indicates a common RAM error. It is likely that the main board may be defective.

LED name Meaning
LINK (green LED) Lights when the unit is connected normally with the HUB.
COM (orange LED) Lights when data is being sent or received.

LED name Meaning
DNV5 (green LED) Indicates that the unit is supplied with power.
DNV6 (green LED) Reserved
DNV7 (green LED) Reserved
- 281 -
ABC CAPS
(green) LOCK
(green)
POWER CARD STATUS
(green) (green) (red)(green)

Keyboard
(4) LED display (MDI)

LED name Meaning
ABC (green LED) Lights when the function key is in the alphabet input mode.
CAPS LOCK (green LED) Lights when CAPS LOCK is enabled.
POWER (green LED) Lights when the unit is powered on.
CARD (green LED) Lights when data is being written to or read from the built-in memory card.
Lights in red during power-on or in green when after startup.
STATUS (green/red LED) Normally, this LED lights in green, but lights in red if a hardware alarm such as
overheating, fan stop, or bus disconnection occurs.
RESERVE(OPEN)
- 282 -
- Inverter PCBs, Fan adapter PCBs, and Connector Units

Inverter PCB A14L-0143-0002
Connection cable between the main A660-2005-T469#L200R0
PCB and the inverter
Conversion cable for the inverter A660-4042-T047 Two cables
used
NOTE
- PCB mounting location
Fan adapter PCB

Conversion
cable for the
inverter
Connection cable between the main PCB and the

inverter PCB
- 283 -

CNC display unit for
automotive
manufactures
Main PCB
Fan adapter (A20B-8101-0385)
CN1 CA87A
15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01 CPD12
CN03
CN04
CN05
Connection cable for the

inverter
Conversion cable for the
inverter

matching connector.
- 284 -
I/O Link adapter (Unit specification: only A13B-0198-B211 and -B212)

I/O Link adapter PCB A20B-8002-0500
- I/O Link adapter mounting location
I/O Link adapter
- Details of the I/O Link adapter

CNC display unit for
automotive
manufactures
Main PCB
(A20B-8101-0385)
I/O Link apater
LCD unit
CK33
CPD15 CPD15
Power cable
(A660-2005-T779#L160R0)
- 285 -
Use of NCBOOT32
1. Purpose
NCBOOT32 perform the following operations.
• Displays the BOOT screen.
On this screen, it is possible to perform CNC maintenance work
such as installation or backup of the CNC system program or
saving, restoration, or clearing of SRAM.
• Displays the IPL screen.
• Displays the CNC alarm screen.
• Monitors the state of communication with the CNC and makes
reconnection during occurrence of an error.
2. Startup
The rotary switch on the Series 30i/31i/32i-A CNC main printed
circuit board can be used to change the startup sequence.
To start NCBOOT32 or return to the normal operation, turn off the
power, change the position of the rotary switch, and turn on the power
again.
(1) Rotary switch position in normal operation: 0

1. The CNC and display unit wait for communication to be
established.
2. The system waits for the battery to be charged completely
(only when the battery unit is enabled).
3. The system monitors a communication error and CNC
system alarm.
(2) Rotary switch position during startup of NCBOOT32 (during

maintenance): F
1. The CNC and display unit wait for communication to be
established.
2. The system displays the BOOT screen.
3. The system displays the IPL screen.
4. The system displays the CNC power-on screen.
5. The system monitors a communication error and CNC
system alarm.
3. Basic operations by MDI keys

(1) Pressing a button
<1> Select a button with the TAB key. The selected button is
bordered by a bold line and the characters in the button are
enclosed by a dotted line.
<2> Press the INPUT key.
(2) Selecting a tab
<1> Select a tab with the TAB key. The characters in the
selected tab are enclosed by a dotted line.
<2> To switch between tab screens, press the left or right arrow
key.
- 286 -
(3) Selecting an item in a list

<1> Select a list box with the TAB key. The selected item in
the list is displayed in reverse video and the characters are
enclosed by a dotted line.
<2> To switch between items, press the upper or lower arrow

key.
(4) Selecting an item in a combo box
<1> Select a combo box with the TAB key. The selected item
in the combo box is displayed in reverse vide.
<2> To switch between items, press the upper or lower arrow
key.
(5) Key input of a character
<1> Perform selection with the TAB key. The entered

characters are displayed in reverse video.
<2> Press the keys of the characters to be input, in sequence.
(6) Changing the setting of a check box
<1> Select a check box with the TAB key. The characters of
the check box are enclosed by a dotted line.
<2> Press the SP key (SHIFT+SP).
4. Description of the screens

(1) BOOT screen
• When a subboard is installed, select the board in the [Board]

board.
• The [Setting...] button can be used to change the folder for
inputting or outputting files.
Select a folder of the PC or the memory card of the CNC.
This setting can be changed anytime.
- 287 -
(a) Operation of system data

System data (such as control software and ladder programs)
on the NC side is handled on this screen.
• The [Load...] button opens the file selection screen.

Specify the file to be loaded.
• The [Save] button saves the selected system data on
the NC side in a file.
• The [Check] button checks the selected system data on
the NC side.
• The [Delete] button deletes the selected system data on
the NC side.
- 288 -
(b) Operation of SRAM

This screen saves or restores the SRAM data of the NC.
• The [Backup] button saves data and the [Restore]

button restores data. The center field indicates the
progress of the operation.
Since the name of a backup file is automatically
determined based on the SRAM size as in the NC, the
name cannot be changed.
(c) Operation of a file

This screen manipulates a file on a memory card of the
CNC or in a folder of the PC.
• The [Delete] button deletes the selected file.
- 289 -
• The [Refresh] button updates the file list to the latest

state. Press this button when, for example, the
memory card is replaced.
(2) IPL screen

The data on the IPL screen depends on the model of the CNC.
Carry out operation according to the menu.
For details of the menu on the IPL screen and supported

functions, see the table below.
Corresponding MDI key operation

Title on the IPL screen during power-on
(Operation in the standard CNC)
0. EXIT
1. IPL MONITOR <-> + <.>
2. BACK-UP CNC DATA ALL CLEAR <DELETE> + <RESET>
3. LOCKED PROGRAM ALL CLEAR <M> + <0>
- 290 -
(3) CNC alarm screen

This screen appears when a system alarm occurs in the CNC.
(The following screen is an example. The data on the screen
depends on the system alarm that occurs in the CNC.).
- 291 -
4.6 PANEL i PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
- Specification
Item Specification
Main board A(Pentium 3, for 10.4”VGA LCD and A20B-8100-0935
12.1”SVGA LCD) A20B-8101-0505
Main board A (Pentium 3, for 10.4”SVGA LCD) A20B-8100-0939
A20B-8101-0505
Main board A (Pentium 3, for 15.0”XGA LCD) A20B-8100-0936
A20B-8101-0506
Main board B (Pentium M, for 10.4”VGA LCD and A20B-8101-0365
12.1”SVGA LCD)
Main board B (Pentium M, for 10.4”SVGA LCD) A20B-8101-0369
Main board B (Pentium M, for 15.0”XGA LCD) A20B-8101-0366
Backpanel (for Pentium 3) A20B-8002-0330
Backpanel (for Pentium M) A20B-8002-0331
Power supply P.C.B. A20B-2100-0920
- Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc.

(1) Main board A(for Pentium 3)
TM7 Jumper pin
(050x) TM19
(050x)
CA85
VR1
CPU
CA79
Socket
Chipset1
PCMCIA
(GMCH)
Controller
DIMM Socket (SD-RAM)
CA82
JA64
CK22
CPD12
CK23
BIOS Chipset2 Chipset3
(ICH2) SIO
CD46L
ROM
CD37
CPC11
CD41M
CD41L
JD33
JD46
JA61
JA63
JD9
CD34 CD32U
(上)
CA81A
CK21
CK20
CD38U CD32L
CA86
(下)
CA81B
GR4 GR6 TM22A TM7A
TM6 TM5 TM1 (093x) (093x)
GR6
RE4
RE2
RE3
RE1
GR5
GR4
(050x) TM2 (TM18) LED Jumper pin

Jumper pin TM3
Jumper pin LED
GR3
GR2
TM4 (093x) (050x)

GR1
(093x) : Mounted only for A20B-8100-093x.

(050x) : Mounted only for A20B-8101-050x
- 292 -
(2) Main board B (for Pentium M)

TM19 TM7
(06F) (06F)
Jumper pin
CA85
CA79
CPU Socket
Chipset1 PCMCIA
(GMCH) Controller
DIMM Socket (DDR-SDRAM)
CA82
JA64
CK22
CPD12
CK23
Chipset3
Chipset2 SIO
CD46L
CD37
(ICH2)
BIOS
ROM
CPC11
CD41M
CD41L
JD33
JD46
JA61
JA63
JD9
CD34 CD32U
(上)
CA81A
CK21
CK20
CD32L
CD38U
CA86
(下)
CA81B
GR4 GR6
LED
TM5 TM1
GR6
RE2
RE3
RE1
RE4
GR3 GR5
GR2 GR4
TM18
TM3 Jumper pin
06F : General version 06F and later TM4 LED
GR1
05E : General version 05E and earlier (05E) (06F)
(3) Backpanel
CA78B PCI Slot 2

LED2A
LED1A
CA78A PCI Slot 1

COP21M
HSSB PCI I/F

Controller
JA64 PC Extension I/F
- 293 -
(4) Power supply P.C.B.
CN3
CPE11B
CPE11A
CPD14
CPD11A
CPD11B
CPD11C
FUSE
CPE11C
CPD12
- 294 -
- Block diagram
Touch panel
CD37
PCMCIA I/F PCMCIA Clock generator
CA82 controller JA63 CRT
USB I/F
CD46L CPU CD34 FDD SIGNAL
Memory
DIMM CD32Ｌ KEYBOARD
CNA1
Chipset
CA85 (GMCH)
LCD signal LVDS DV CD32Ｕ MOUSE
line
CA79
LVDS RV Chipset Chipset JD9 CENTRO
(ICH2) (SIO)
JD33 RS232-1
JD46 RS232-2/USB
Main
board PHY
PCI CD38U ETHERNET
Inverter CPC11
bus
CD41L USB1
Power CD41M USB2
supply
circuit MDI
Vtt,Vcore, controller JA61 MDI I/F
1.5V,1.8V,
CK20 2.5V CA81A HDD-1
Soft key (horizontal type)
Soft key (vertical type) CK21 CK22
CA81B HDD-2
CPD12 JA64
CN3
Battery
CK22
60-mm-square HSSB Optical

fan controller module COP21M HSSB
CPE11B
DV Clock generator
40-mm-square
fan CPE11A PCI extension slot
CA78A
Power PCI extension slot

supply CA78B
board Back panel
Power supply CPE11C HDD FAN

circuit
+5V,+3.3V CPD11A FDD POWER
+12V,-5V
-12V,-24V CPD11B HDD POWER
CPD11C HDD POWER

Fuse
CPD14 +24V
- 295 -
- Setting and adjustment points

(1) Jumper pin setting
Name Meaning Setting position Description
TM1 FDD Short To use this PANEL i FDD, select this
TM1
operation setting. It is factory-selected.
mode
Open To use the conventional FANUC
TM1
FDD, select this setting.
TM2(TM18) Reserved substrate version 03 Leave these jumper pins factory-set
TM3 TM2 and earlier no matter what the revision of the
: Open board is.
TM3
: Short
substrate version 04
and later
TM18 : Open
TM3 : Short
TM4 If the unit fails to start after

TM4 Left main-board replacement, turn off the
power and keep TM4 at the
right-side position for several
seconds. After this, re-set it to the
left-side position and turn on the
power.
TM5 LCD type (P-3) (P-M) To use 10.4”VGA LCD, select this
TM6 change TM6 TM5 TM5 setting.
(P-3) (P-M) To use 12.1” SVGA LCD, select this

TM6 TM5 TM5 : Open setting.
: Short This setting is factory-selected.
(P-3) To use 10.4”SVGA LCD, select this

TM6 TM5 setting.
TM7 Alarm setting It is factory-selected. Select this

change setting except for use with the CF
: Open card type PANEL i.
: Short
Select this setting for use with the
CF card type PANEL i.
NOTE
These jumper pins may be set up differently if the
unit is configured for some specific manufacturers.
- 296 -
(2) Variable-resistor setting
VR1: This variable resistor is intended to adjust signals for the 15" LCD.
It is factory-set properly. Do not change the setting.
VR1
(3) LEDs on the main board
RE2
RE3
RE1
RE4
GR5
GR4
GR6
CD41M
CD32
GR3
GR2
GR1
Name 1 Name 2 Color Status
RE1 TRM Red Temperature alarm. It is issued if a temperature
outside a specified range is detected.
RE2 BAT Red Battery alarm. It indicates that the battery be replaced.
RE3 FAN Red Indicates that one of the two basic-unit fans or the HDD
fan has stopped. Replace it.
When this LED lights, even if nothing is displayed on
screen and the fan operates normally, this unit may be
in the reset state.
RE3 S5 Red Indicates that the power-off state (Soft Off) is entered.
Generally, this LED does not remain on, but it may
remain on and nothing is displayed on screen if BIOS is
incorrectly set. In this case, clear CMOS data.
GR1 5V Green Indicates that the unit is powered.
GR2 HDD Green Indicates that the HDD is being accessed.
GR3 PCM Green Indicates that the PCMCIA card is being accessed.
GR4 LINK Green Indicates that the Ethernet link is running.
GR5 100M Green Indicates that the Ethernet link is running at 100 MHz.
GR6 ACT Green Indicates that the Ethernet network is running.
(4) LEDs on the backpanel

Name 1 Color Status
LED1A Red A parity alarm has been issued on the backpanel.
LED1B Green Indicates that HSSB communication is normal.
- 297 -
4.7 DISPLAY UNIT FOR is SERIES CNC
4.7.1 Main Board of Display Unit for is Series CNC
- Specification
Item Specification
Main board (15” LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B021,-B022 A20B-8101-0061
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002 A20B-8101-0063
Main board (10.4" and 12.1" LCD or
specification) A20B-8101-0067
For A13B-0198-B011,-B012,-B032 A20B-8101-0063
Main board (10.4"LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B041,-B043 A20B-8101-0380
Main board (12.1"LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B051,-B052,-B053 A20B-8101-0383
Main board (15”LCD specification) For A13B-0198-B061,-B063 A20B-8101-0381
- 298 -
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor

Rear of unit
CA75
or
CD38S CA113
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
CA79A CA98
CA87A

CA76 Main board
CA88A
CA95 CA75
or
CD38S CA113 CD46L
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
- 299 -

CA55 MDI
JD36 RS-232C serial port 1
CPD18 DC24V-IN
CA79A Video signal interface (10.4"/12.1”LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (15" LCD only)
CD46L USB interface
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4" LCD)
Fan adapter (for 12.1”/15"LCD)
CD38S Ethernet
CPD12 Inverter interface (12.1”/15"LCD only)
CA75 or CA113 Bach-up unit interface
CA76 Buzzer interface
- 300 -
- Mounting positions of cards and the compact flash card

For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
(Mounted on the back of the GUI card)
Connector
(1) GUI card
Connector
No. Name Specification Remarks

(1) GUI card A20B-3300-0420 10.4”/15" LCD and memory (64 MB)
A20B-3300-0421 10.4” / 15" LCD and memory (128MB)
A20B-3300-0422 12.1” LCD and memory (64MB)
A20B-3300-0423 12.1" LCD and memory (128MB)
(3) Compact flash card A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB (Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#064MB 64MB (Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBC 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBC 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBC 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBC 2GB
- 301 -
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Connector
(1) GUI card

(3)
Compact
flash card
Connector
No. Name Specification Remarks

(1) GUI card A20B-3300-0551 Memory (128MB)
A20B-3300-0552 Memory (256MB)
(3) Compact flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB(Production ceased)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBC 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBC 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBC 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBC 2GB
- 302 -
- Block diagram
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Main board
GUI card
DRAMM Display control
CPU
BOOT Compact
software Flash card
Power supply
Peripheral Peripheral unit
control 2 control 1 5V, 3.3V,
2.5V
USB Ethernet
control control
Display unit
USB Ethernet RS232C HSSB 24VDC

Memory card
- 303 -
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Main board
GUI card
DRAM Display control
CPU
BOOT
software
Ethernet Peripheral Compact Peripheral

control control 2 Flash card control 1
Power supply
unit
5V, 3.3V,
2.5V
USB
control
Display unit
RS232C
HSSB 24VDC
Ethernet USB Memory cardﾞ
- 304 -
- LED display
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK

LED name Meaning
LED name Meaning
LED name Meaning
LEDP(green LED) Indicates that the unit is supplied with power.
- 305 -
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063 の場合
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)

LED name Meaning
LED name Meaning
LED name Meaning
DNV5(green LED) Indicates that the unit is supplied with power.
- 306 -

For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Reserve(Open)
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Short or Reserve
Reserve(Open)
- 307 -
4.7.2 Inverter PCBs, Fan Adapter PCBs, and Connector Units

Inverter PCB For 10.4”LCD A20B-8100-0962
(Used also as
the fan adapter)
For 12.1”LCD A14L-0143-0003
For 15”LCD A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter PCBs For 12”LCD
For 15”LCD A20B-8100-0969
Connection cable For 12.1”LCD A660-2006-T050#L130R0

between the main For 15”LCD A660-2005-T469#L200R0
board and the
inverter
Conversion cable For 15”LCD A660-4042-T047 Two cables
used
NOTE
- 308 -

Display unit main board for
is series CNC
For 10.4” LCD
10.4” LCD unit Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A

CP1 CN1
CPD12
For 12.1” LCD
Fan adapter
CN1

CN2 CN1
CN3
For 15.0” LCD

Fan adapter
CN1
Connection cable for

the inverter
CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Conversion cable
- 309 -
- Inverter and connector units for 10.4” LCD

Rear of unit
- Inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for 12.1” LCD

Rear of unit
- 310 -
- Inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for 15” LCD

Rear of unit

matching connector.
- 311 -
4.7.3 Backup Unit
- Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
See Section 3.11 “Back-up Unit”.
NOTE
For A13B-0198-B001, -B002, -B011, -B012, -B021,
-B022, and -B032 (cable specification:
A02B-0281-K801), the MDI connector (CA55) and
the backup interface connector (CA75) on the main
board have the same shape, so be careful not to
insert a wrong cable into the connectors.
- 312 -
4.8 LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
4.8.1 List of Basic Units
Type Item Ordering code Remarks

30i/300i/ Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0303-B802
300is-A Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0303-B822 Support for
optional settings
Basic unit with 4 slots A02B-0303-B804
Basic unit with 4 slots A02B-0303-B824 Support for
optional settings
310is -A5 Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0306-B822 Support for
optional settings
optional settings
310is -A Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0307-B822 Support for
optional settings
optional settings
320is -A Basic unit with 2 slots A02B-0308-B822 Support for
optional settings
optional settings
4.8.2 List of Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit
Item Ordering code ID Remarks

30i/300i/300is-A, 31i/310i/310is-A5 A16B-3200-0520 00308
Main board
31i/310i/310is-A, 32i/320i/320is-A A16B-3200-0521 00309
Main board
CPU card A1 A20B-3300-0477 0040C
CPU card A2 A20B-3300-0474 0040D
CPU card A3 A20B-3300-0475 0040E
CPU card A5 A20B-3300-0476 0041D Support for
(Standard version, DRAM 64MB) optional settings
CPU card A6 A20B-3300-0472 0041E Support for
(Standard version, DRAM 128MB) optional settings
CPU card B2 A20B-3300-0470 00406
CPU card B3 A20B-3300-0471 00407
- 313 -

CPU card D2 A20B-3300-0478 00418 Support for
(High-speed version, DRAM 64MB) optional settings
CPU card D3 A20B-3300-0479 00419 Support for
(High-speed version, DRAM 128MB) optional settings
CPU card C1 A20B-3300-0491 00421
CPU card C2 A20B-3300-0490 00420
CPU card C3 A20B-3300-0492 00422
CPU card C5 A20B-3300-0493 00424 Support for
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 64MB) optional settings
CPU card C6 A20B-3300-0495 00426 Support for
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 128MB) optional settings
(FSSB 1 path)
Axis control card B12 A20B-3300-0448 0010B
(FSSB 1 path)
Axis control card B13 A20B-3300-0447 0010A
(FSSB 1 path)
(FSSB 2 path)
(FSSB 2 path)
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00700
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C
HSSB board A20B-8101-0111 00611
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030 00701
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031 00702
Profibus master board A20B-8101-0050 00705
Profibus slave board A20B-8101-0100 00705
- 314 -

DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 00706
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 00708
Backpanel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0580 01
Backpanel (4 slots) A20B-2003-0650 10
Fan connection unit A20B-9002-0350 –
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0011 –
* Refer to Chapter 5 for details of Option board.
4.8.3 List of Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i
- 10.4” LCD specification

Specification Name Ordering code Remarks
10.4” color LCDA1 Display control board A20B-8101-0210 ID=0061A
(without a touch panel) Inverter A20B-8100-0962
A02B-0303-C071 LCD unit A02B-0303-D071 ID=1010
10.4” color LCDB1 Display control board A20B-8101-0320 ID=0061B
(without a touch panel) Inverter A20B-8100-0962
10.4” color LCDA2 Display control board A20B-8101-0210 ID=0061A
(with a touch panel) Inverter A20B-8100-0962
A02B-0303-C081 Touch panel A20B-8002-0310
A20B-8002-0312
Touch panel cable A660-2042-T145#L200R0
LCD unit A02B-0303-D081 ID=1010
10.4” color LCDB2 Display control board A20B-8101-0320 ID=0061B
(with a touch panel) Inverter A20B-8100-0962
A02B-0303-C084 Touch panel A20B-8002-0310
A20B-8002-0312
Touch panel cable A660-2042-T145#L200R0
LCD unit A02B-0303-D501 ID=1010
First 10.4” display unit E1for 2-unit display Display control board A20B-8101-0321 ID=0061C
Second 10.4” display unit E1for 2-unit Display control board A20B-8101-0322
display Inverter A20B-8100-0962
- 315 -
- 15” LCD specification

15” color LCD C1 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(without a touch panel) Display control card A20B-3300-0420
A02B-0303-C091 Compact Flash card A02B-0303-C990#A Including software
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Inverter A14L-0143-0002
inverter and the main PCB
Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A20B-0303-D519 ID=1101
Production ceased
A02B-0303-D529 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 Two fans used
15” color LCD C2 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(with a touch panel) Display control card A20B-3300-0420
A02B-0303-C092 Compact Flash card A02B-0303-C990#A Including software
LCD unit A20B-0303-D520 ID=1101
Production ceased
A02B-0303-D530 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
15” color LCD D1 Main board A20B-8101-0382
(without a touch panel) Display control card A20B-3300-0551
A02B-0303-C093 Compact Flash card A02B-0303-C990#B Including software
LCD unit A20B-0303-D562 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
- 316 -

15” color LCD D2 Main board A20B-8101-0382
(with a touch panel) Display control card A20B-3300-0551
A02B-0303-C094 Compact Flash card A02B-0303-C990#B Including software
LCD unit A20B-0303-D553 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
- CNC display unit for automotive manufacturers

A13B-0198-B201 Main PCB A20B-8101-0385
Without a touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Without I/O Link
Conversion cable for the inverter A660-4042-T047 Two cables used
LCD unit A13B-0198-D201
GUI card A20B-3300-0551
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBC Software is
separately ordered.
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A02B-0303-K120 Two pieces
Fan measuring 40-mm
per side
A13B-0198-B202 Main PCB A20B-8101-0385
With a touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Without I/O Link
GUI card A20B-3300-0551
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Software is
Compact Flash card or separately ordered.
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2
Fan
units
- 317 -

A13B-0198-B211 Main PCB A20B-8101-0385
Without a touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0002
With I/O Link
I/O Link board A20B-8002-0500
DC power cable A660-2005-T779#160R0
GUI card A20B-3300-0551
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2
Fan
units
A13B-0198-B212 Main PCB A20B-8101-0385
With a touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0002
With I/O Link
I/O Link board A20B-8002-0500
DC power cable A660-2005-T779#160R0
GUI card A20B-3300-0551
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2
Fan
units
- 318 -
4.8.4 List of Display Unit for 300i/310i/320i (PANEL i)
Main printed circuit boards (for Pentium 3)

Ordering code (main
Unit LCD type Parent specification (basic unit)
PCB)
PANEL i 10.4” VGA A20B-8100-0935 A08B-0084-B501 to 4
A20B-8101-0505 A13B-0196-B502, -B504
10.4” SVGA A20B-8100-0939 A08B-0084-B531 to 4
A20B-8101-0505 A13B-0196-B532, -B534
15.0” A20B-8100-0936 A08B-0084-B521 to 4
A20B-8101-0506 A13B-0196-B522, -B524
PANEL i in automotive 15.0” A20B-8100-0936 A08B-0084-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
manufacturer specification A20B-8101-0506 A13B-0196-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
Main printed circuit boards (for Pentium M)

Ordering code (main
Unit LCD type Parent specification (basic unit)
PCB)
PANEL i 10.4” VGA A20B-8101-0365 A08B-0086-B501 to 4, -B611
/ 12.1” , -B613
A13B-0199-B502, -B504
, -B612, -B614
10.4” SVGA A20B-8101-0369 A08B-0086-B531 to 4, -B631
, -B633, -B652, -B654
A13B-0199-B532, -B534
, -B632, -B634
15.0” A20B-8101-0366 A08B-0086-B521 to 4, -B621
, -B623, -B672, -B674
A13B-0199-B522, -B524
, -B622, -B624
PANEL i in automotive 15.0” A20B-8101-0366 A08B-0086-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
manufacturer specification , -B722 to 3, -B732 to 3
A13B-0199-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
, -B722 to 3, -B732 to 3
* A main board of general version 06F or later needs to be used for
A08B-0086-B6xx/B7xx and A13B-0199-B6xx/B7xx.
- 319 -
Inverter printed circuit boards

Ordering code (main
LCD type Parent specification (basic unit)
PCB)
10.4” VGA A14L-0132-0001#A A08B-0084-B501 to 4 A13B-0196-B502, -B504
A08B-0086-B501 to 4 A13B-0199-B502, -B504
10.4” SVGA A14L-0143-0003 A08B-0084-B531 to 4 A13B-0196-B532, -B534
A08B-0086-B531 to 4 A13B-0199-B532, -B534
A08B-0086-B631, -B633 A13B-0199-B632, -B634
A08B-0086-B652, -B654
12.1” A14L-0143-0001 A08B-0086-B611, -B613 A13B-0199-B612, -B614
15.0” A14L-0143-0002 A08B-0084-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3 A13B-0196-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
A08B-0084-B521 to 4 A13B-0196-B522, -B524
A08B-0086-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3 A13B-0199-B522, -B524
A08B-0086-B521 to 4 A13B-0199-B422 to 3, -B432 to 3
A08B-0086-B621, -B623 A13B-0199-B622, -B624
A08B-0086-B672, -B674 A13B-0199-B722 to 3, -B732 to 3
A08B-0086-B722 to 3, -B732 to 3
Touch panel printed circuit boards

Ordering code
Unit (touch panel Parent specification (basic unit)
PCB)
PANEL i A20B-8002-0310 A08B-0084-B523,4 A13B-0196-B524
A08B-0086-B523,4 A13B-0199-B524
A20B-8002-0312 A08B-0084-B503,4 A13B-0196-B504
A08B-0084-B533,4 A13B-0196-B534
A08B-0086-B503,4 A13B-0199-B504
A08B-0086-B533,4 A13B-0199-B534
A08B-0086-B613 A13B-0199-B614
A08B-0086-B623 A13B-0199-B624
A08B-0086-B633 A13B-0199-B634
A08B-0086-B654
A08B-0086-B674
PANEL i in A20B-8002-0310 A08B-0084-B423 A13B-0196-B423
automotive A08B-0084-B433 A13B-0196-B433
manufacturer A08B-0086-B423 A13B-0199-B423
specification A08B-0086-B433 A13B-0199-B433
A20B-8002-0312 A08B-0086-B723 A13B-0199-B723
A08B-0086-B733 A13B-0199-B733
- 320 -
Printed circuit boards of other units

Ordering code
Parent specification
Item Unit (PCB of other
(basic unit)
units)
A20B-8002-0330 A08B-0084-xxxx
Backpanel printed-circuit board
A13B-0196-xxxx
Power supply printed-circuit (common)
A20B-8002-0331 A08B-0086-xxxx
board
A13B-0199-xxxx
I/O Link adapter 2 A20B-2100-0920
(common) (common)
printed-circuit board
PANEL i in A20B-8002-0500 A08B-0084-B432 to 3
automotive A08B-0086-B432 to 3
manufacturer A08B-0086-B732 to 3
Backpanel printed-circuit board
specification A13B-0196-B432 to 3
A13B-0199-B432 to 3
A13B-0199-B732 to 3
Drive units
Maintenance drive Parent
Item Unit Remarks
unit drawing number specification
PANEL i in A08B-0084-C120#E A08B-0084-H120
3.5” HDD unit automotive A08B-0084-C120#F
*1 *2 manufacturer
specification
PANEL i A08B-0084-C130#E A08B-0084-H130 When 10.4” LCD and
A08B-0084-C130#F QWERTY MDI are
used.
A08B-0084-C131#E A08B-0084-H131 When 10.4” LCD and
A08B-0084-C131#F QWERTY MDI are
used.
FDD unit (common) A02B-0207-C009 - Panel mounted type
FDD cable (common) A02B-0207-K801 - Length : 1m
FDD drive unit (common) A08B-0084-K001 - FDD
PANEL i in A08B-0084-K010 -
automotive
CD-ROM unit CD-ROM drive
manufacturer
specification
*1: The maintenance HDD unit is subject to change.

*2: The maintenance HDD unit includes a HDD fan but not a signal
cable or a power cord.
CAUTION
A combination of hard disk, floppy disk, and
CD-ROM drives may fail to operate normally if any
of them is not recommended by FANUC.
- 321 -
- CF card unit
Maintenance drive unit Parent
Item Unit Remarks
drawing number specification
CF card (common) A87L-0001-0197#2GB A08B-0086-H100 2GB
(master) *1 to H104
CF card (common) A87L-0001-0197#128MB A08B-0086-H101 128MB
(slave) *1 (common) A87L-0001-0197#256MB A08B-0086-H102 256MB
A87L-0001-0197#1GB A08B-0086-H104 1GB
CF card adapter PCB (common) A20B-8002-0660 A08B-0086-H100
*1 to H104
*1: The CF card and CF card adapter PCB may be changed in the
future.
CAUTION
This unit may not operate with a CF card other
than those specified by FANUC.
Base unit (Pentium 3 model)

Maintenance base
LCD I/O Link Soft Touch
Unit unit drawing Parent specification
type adapter key panel
number *3
PANEL i 10.4” Absent × × A08B-0084-D501 A08B-0084-B501
VGA ○ × A08B-0084-D502 A08B-0084-B502 A13B-0196-B502
LCD × ○ A08B-0084-D503 A08B-0084-B503
A08B-0084-D505 *4
○ ○ A08B-0084-D504 A08B-0084-B504 A13B-0196-B504
A08B-0084-D506 *4
10.4” Absent × × A08B-0084-D531 A08B-0084-B531
SVGA ○ × A08B-0084-D532 A08B-0084-B532 A13B-0196-B532
LCD × ○ A08B-0084-D533 A08B-0084-B533
A08B-0084-D535 *4
○ ○ A08B-0084-D534 A08B-0084-B534 A13B-0196-B534
A08B-0084-D536 *4
15.0” Absent × × A08B-0084-D521 A08B-0084-B521
LCD ○ × A08B-0084-D522 A08B-0084-B522 A13B-0196-B522
× ○ A08B-0084-D523 A08B-0084-B523
○ ○ A08B-0084-D524 A08B-0084-B524 A13B-0196-B524
PANEL i in 15.0” Absent ○ × A08B-0084-D402 A08B-0084-B422 A13B-0196-B422
automotive LCD ○ ○ A08B-0084-D403 A08B-0084-B403 A13B-0196-B403
manufacturer A08B-0084-B423 A13B-0196-B423
specification Present ○ × A08B-0084-D412 A08B-0084-B432 A13B-0196-B432
○ ○ A08B-0084-D413 A08B-0084-B413 A13B-0196-B413
A08B-0084-B433 A13B-0196-B433
*3: Unlike the parent specification (basic unit), the maintenance base
unit does not include any of the main printed-circuit board,
backplane printed-circuit board, power supply printed-circuit
board, cover, and inverter. It mainly consists of the base plate,
LCD unit, ornamental frame, touch panel, and soft keys.
- 322 -
*4: When using A08B-0084-D5x5 or -D5x6, change the touch panel

printed circuit board from A20B-8002-0310 to A20B-8002-0312
accordingly.
Base unit (Pentium M model)

Maintenance base
number *3
PANEL i 10.4” Absent × × A08B-0086-D501 A08B-0086-B501
VGA ○ × A08B-0086-D502 A08B-0086-B502 A13B-0199-B502
LCD × ○ A08B-0086-D503 A08B-0086-B503
○ ○ A08B-0086-D504 A08B-0086-B504 A13B-0199-B504
× ○ A08B-0086-D505 A08B-0086-B503
*4
○ ○ A08B-0086-D506 A08B-0086-B504 A13B-0199-B504
*4
10.4” Absent × × A08B-0086-D531 A08B-0086-B531
SVGA A08B-0086-B631
LCD ○ × A08B-0086-D532 A08B-0086-B532 A13B-0199-B532
A08B-0086-B652 A13B-0199-B632
× ○ A08B-0086-D533 A08B-0086-B533
○ ○ A08B-0086-D534 A08B-0086-B534 A13B-0199-B534
× ○ A08B-0086-D535 A08B-0086-B533
A08B-0086-B633
*4
○ ○ A08B-0086-D536 A08B-0086-B534 A13B-0199-B534
A08B-0086-B654 A13B-0199-B634
*4
12.1” Absent × × A08B-0086-D511 A08B-0086-B611
LCD ○ × A08B-0086-D512 A13B-0199-B612
× ○ A08B-0086-D513 A08B-0086-B613
○ ○ A08B-0086-D514 A13B-0199-B614
15.0” Absent × × A08B-0086-D521 A08B-0086-B521
LCD A08B-0086-B621
○ × A08B-0086-D522 A08B-0086-B522 A13B-0199-B522
A08B-0086-B672 A13B-0199-B622
× ○ A08B-0086-D523 A08B-0086-B523
A08B-0086-D525 A08B-0086-B623
*4
○ ○ A08B-0086-D524 A08B-0086-B524 A13B-0199-B524
A08B-0086-D526 A08B-0086-B674 A13B-0199-B624
*4
automotive LCD ○ ○ A08B-0086-D402 A08B-0086-B423 A13B-0199-B423
manufacturer Present ○ × A08B-0086-D403 A08B-0086-B432 A13B-0199-B432
specification ○ ○ A08B-0086-D404 A08B-0086-B433 A13B-0199-B433
automotive LCD A08B-0086-B722 A13B-0199-B722
manufacturer *5
specification ○ ○ A08B-0086-D412 A08B-0086-B423 A13B-0199-B423
A08B-0086-B723 A13B-0199-B723
*5
- 323 -
Maintenance base
number *3
Present ○ × A08B-0086-D413 A08B-0086-B432 A13B-0199-B432
A08B-0086-B732 A13B-0199-B732
*5
○ ○ A08B-0086-D414 A08B-0086-B433 A13B-0199-B433
A08B-0086-B733 A13B-0199-B733
*5
*3: Unlike the parent specification (basic unit), the maintenance base
unit does not include any of the main printed-circuit board,
backplane printed-circuit board, power supply printed-circuit
board, cover, and inverter. It mainly consists of the base plate,
LCD unit, ornamental frame, touch panel, and soft keys.
*4: For maintenance of A08B-0086-D5x3 or -D5x4, when using
A08B-0086-D5x5 or -D5x6, change the touch panel printed
circuit board from A20B-8002-0310 to A20B-8002-0312
accordingly.
*5: For maintenance of A08B-0086-D40x, when using
A08B-0086-D41x, change the touch panel printed circuit board
from A20B-8002-0310 to A20B-8002-0312 accordingly.
CPU and memory

Maintenance drawing
Item Parent specification
number
CPU Celeron733MHz A08B-0084-C210 A08B-0084-H010
Pentium III 866MHz A08B-0084-C220 A08B-0084-H020
Pentium III 1260MHz A08B-0084-C230 A08B-0084-H030
Celeron M 1.3GHz A08B-0086-C210 A08B-0086-H010
Pentium M 1.6GHz A08B-0086-C220 A08B-0086-H020
Main memory 128MB (Celeron, Pentium III) A76L-0500-0020 A08B-0084-H001
256MB (Celeron, Pentium III) A76L-0500-0021 A08B-0084-H002
512MB (Celeron, Pentium III) A76L-0500-0022 A08B-0084-H003
256MB (Celeron M, Pentium M) A76L-0500-0026 A08B-0086-H001
512MB (Celeron M, Pentium M) A76L-0500-0027 A08B-0086-H002
1GB (Celeron M, Pentium M) A76L-0500-0028 A08B-0086-H003
Maintenance equipment
Maintaining the unit or installing applications in it requires the
following equipment.
Item Ordering number

Full-keyboard 101 key type A86L-0001-0210
(PS/2 I/F) 106 key type A86L-0001-0211
Mouse (PS/2 I/F) A86L-0001-0212
- 324 -
4.8.5 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is

- Basic unit of the is series CNC display unit
A13B-0198-B001 Main board A20B-8101-0063 or
10.4” color LCD A20B-8101-0067
Without touch panel Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
LCD unit A02B-0303-D507 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B002 Main board A20B-8101-0063 For A02B-0303-D508
10.4” color LCD A20B-8101-0067 For A02B-0303-D543
With touch panel
LCD unit A02B-0303-D508 Production ceased
A02B-0303-D543 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B011 Main board A20B-8101-0063
12.1” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Without touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0003
LCD unit A02B-0303-D511 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B012 Main board A20B-8101-0063
With touch panel Inverter A14L-0143-0003
LCD unit A02B-0303-D512 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
- 325 -

A13B-0198-B021 Main board A20B-8101-0061
15” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Conversion cable for the A660-4042-T047 Two cables used
inverter
LCD unit A20B-0303-D517 ID=1101
Production ceased
A02B-0303-D527 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B022 Main board A20B-8101-0061
With touch panel
inverter
LCD unit A20B-0303-D518 ID=1101
Production ceased
A02B-0303-D528 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B032 Main board A20B-8101-0063
Without spft key Connection cable between the A660-2006-T050#L130R0
LCD unit A20B-0303-D535 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B041 Main board A20B-8101-0380
Without touch panel Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D559 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B043 Main board A20B-8101-0380
With touch panel Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D543 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
- 326 -

A13B-0198-B051 Main board A20B-8101-0383
LCD unit A02B-0303-D560 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-1098-B052 Main board A20B-8101-0383
Without spft key Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A02B-0303-D547 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B053 Main board A20B-8101-0383
LCD unit A02B-0303-D547 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B061 Main board A20B-8101-0381
inverter
LCD unit A02B-0303-D561 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
A13B-0198-B063 Main board A20B-8101-0381
inverter
LCD unit A02B-0303-D555 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
- 327 -
- GUI card
For A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022,-B032
Parent
Type Ordering code Remarks
specification
GUI card for DRAM 64MB A13B-0198-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
10.4”/15”LCD DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
GUI card for DRAM 64MB A13B-0198-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X1
12.1”LCD DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H143 A20B-3300-0424 ID=0001X1
For A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B052,-B053,-B061,-B063
Parent
Type Ordering code Remarks
specification
GUI card DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
DRAM 256MB A13B-0198-H146 A20B-3300-0552 ID=0110XX
- Compact Flash card

Type Parent specification Ordering code Remarks
32MB A13B-0198-H151 A87L-0001-0173#032MBA Production ceased
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
Proper operation:
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
32MB
64MB A13B-0198-H152 A87L-0001-0173#064MB Production ceased
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Production ceased
Proper operation:
A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
64MB
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBC
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#001GBC
Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#002GBC
- Base unit
Parent
Item Ordering code Remarks
specification
Base unit A02B-0303-H160 A20B-2100-0820 For installation on the back
of the MDI unit
A02B-0303-C161 For installation in the
cabinet
Backup unit cable A02B-0281-K801 A660-2042-T196#L500R0A For
A13B-0198-B001,-B002,
-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
A02B-0303-K801 A660-2006-T312#L500R0 For
A13B-0198-B041,-B043,
-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
- 328 -
4.8.6 MDI Unit
Model Name Ordering code ID Remarks

30i/31i/32i/ T series/English/Standard A02B-0303-C125#T 40
300is/310is/ keyboard
320is Horizontal type, ONG
M series/English/Standard A02B-0303-C125#M 02
keyboard
T series/English/Standard A02B-0303-C126#T 40
keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
QWERTY
300i/310i/ T series/English/Standard A02B-0303-C320#T 40
320i keyboard
keyboard
T series/English/Standard A02B-0303-C327#T 40
keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
QWERTY
FA full-keyboard (English) A02B-0236-C131#EC
FA full-keyboard (Japanese) A02B-0236-C131#JC
FA full-keyboard (English, with A08B-0082-C150#EC
punch panel cover)
FA full-keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C150#JC
with punch panel cover)
FA full-keyboard (English, with A08B-0082-C151#EC
punch panel)
FA full-keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C151#JC
with punch panel)
- 329 -
4.8.7 I/O

Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module A1 A20B-2002-0470 DI/DO: 72/56
DI=general 16, matrix
56, with MPG interface
Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module B1 A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with MPG
interface
Distributed I/O operator’s panel I/O module B2 A20B-2002-0521 DI/DO: 48/32
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O basic module A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with MPG
module A interface
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion A03B-0815-C003 DI/DO: 24/16
module B
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output )
module C
Distributed I/O connector panel I/O expansion A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
module D
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: basic A03B-0815-C040 DI/DO:48/32, with MPG
module B1 interface
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: basic A03B-0815-C041 DI/DO:48/32, without
module B2 MPG interface
I/O module type-2 for connector panel: expansion A03B-0815-C042 DI/DO:48/32
module E1
Terminal type I/O module: basic module A03B-0823-C001 DI/DO:24/16, with I/O
Link interface
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module A A03B-0823-C002 DI/DO:24/16, with MPG
interface
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module B A03B-0823-C003 DI/DO:24/16, without
MPG interface
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module C A03B-0823-C004 DO: 16 (2A output )
Terminal type I/O module: expansion module D A03B-0823-C005 Analog input
Main panel machine operator's panel A02B-0303-C231
Sub panel A machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C232
Sub panel D machine operator's panel A02B-0236-C244
Operator's panel connector unit (Source type A16B-2202-0731 DI/DO: 64/32
output A)
Operator's panel connector unit (Source type A16B-2202-0730 DI/DO: 96/64
output B)
Handy machine operator's panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine operator's panel A02B-0259-C220
- 330 -
4.8.8 Other Units

Separate detector interface unit (basic 4 A02B-0303-C205
axes)
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0236-C204
(additional 4 axes)
Analog input separate detector interface A06B-6061-C201
unit (basic 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial
spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC-side HSSB interface board (2CH.) A20B-8101-0162
Compatible with the PCI bus
PC-side HSSB interface board (1CH.) A20B-8101-0163
Compatible with the PCI bus
Fan unit for 2 slots A02B-0303-C101 With fan
A02B-0303-C103
Fan unit for 4 slots A02B-0303-C102 With fan
Fan for the 2-slot basic unit A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square,
2 units
Fan for the 4-slot basic unit A02B-0303-K122 80 mm square,
1 unit
Backup part for the control unit: Battery A02B-0200-K102
Backup part for the control unit: Power A02B-0265-K100
fuse
Backup part for the display unit: power A02B-0303-K101
fuse (for 30i series 10.4” color LCD)
Backup part for the display unit: power A02B-0236-K100
fuse (for 30i series 15” color LCD and is
series display unit)
- 331 -
4.9 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT
WARNING
Before starting the replacement of a fuse, remove
the cause of the fuse burn-out.
Accordingly, the replacement should be performed
by a person fully trained in maintenance and
safety. If the cabinet is opened to replace the
fuse, take extreme care not to touch any
high-voltage area (marked with and covered
by a shock prevention cover). If the area is
uncovered, direct contact with this area will result
in an electric shock.
- Mounting position of the fuse of the control unit

The fuse of the control unit is mounted on the main board.
Main board
Fuse
Fuse alarm LED
24V connector
CPD19A
CPD19B
- Ordering code of the fuse

Ordering code Rating Individual information
A02B-0265-K100 7.5A A60L-0001-0046#7.5
- 332 -
4.10 REPLACING THE BATTERY
Offset data, and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control
unit. The power to the SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery
mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The above data is not
lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup battery is
mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can maintain the
contents of memory for about a year.
When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message "BAT"
blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.
When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible.
In general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the system configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no

longer be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this
state causes system alarm to occur because the contents of memory are
lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing the
battery.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the
factory.
When using a lithium battery

If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal
code: A98L-0031-0012) handy.
1 Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
2 Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.
Disconnect the connector first. Then, remove the battery from
the battery case. The connector is not latched. Simply pulling
the cable detaches the connector.
The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of
the main board.
3 Replace the battery, then connect the connector.
- 333 -
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause
an explosion. Avoid using any battery other than
the one specified here (A02B-0200-K102).
CAUTION
Complete steps 1 to 3 within 30 minutes.
If the battery is left removed for a long time, the
SRAM would lose the contents.
If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be
completed within 30 minutes, save the whole
contents of the SRAM to a memory card. The
contents of the memory can be easily restored with
the memory card in case the memory loses the
contents.
Discard the dead battery, observing appropriate municipal rules and

regulations. When discarding the battery, insulate the terminal with a
tape so that no short-circuit would occur.
- 334 -
When using commercial D-size alkaline dry cells

- Replacing the battery
1 Have commercial D-size alkaline dry cells handy.
2 Turn the CNC on.
3 Remove the lid from the battery case.
4 Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the dry cells in
a correct orientation.
5 Replace the lid on the battery case.
CAUTION
In the power-off state, the battery should be
replaced as in the case of the lithium battery, which
is descried above.
2 dry cells
Lid
Connection terminal
on the back
4 mounting holes
Case
- 335 -
When replacing the lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
- General method
Use the connector connected to the lithium battery for an external
battery.
Following the battery replacement procedure described above, replace
the standard lithium battery with an external battery in a battery case
(A02B-0236-C281).
CAUTION
1 Place the battery case (A02B-0236-C281) in such
a position that the battery can be replaced even
while the control unit is active.
2 The connector of the battery cable uses a simple
lock system. Fix the cable within an area of 50 cm
from the connector, removing tension on the cable.
This is required to prevent the connector from
coming off because of the weight of the cable or
tension on the cable.
- 336 -
4.11 REPLACING A FAN UNIT
When a reduction in the speed of the fan motor is detected, the FAN
warning message blinks on the LCD screen.
When a failure such as stop of the fan motor is detected, an overheat
alarm or system alarm is issued and the system stops operating.
Therefore, as soon as the FAN warning appears, replace the fan motor.
WARNING
If the cabinet is opened to replace a fan unit, take
extreme care not to touch any high-voltage area
(marked with and covered by a shock prevention
cover). If the area is uncovered, direct contact
with this area will result in an electric shock.
- Ordering code of fan units

Ordering code Quantity
For 2-slot cabinet A02B-0303-C101 1
For 4-slot cabinet A02B-0303-C102 1
- 337 -
- Replacing a fan unit

Detaching a fan unit
<1> When replacing the fan motor, be sure to turn off the power to
the machine (CNC).
<2> Push up the latch at the top of the unit until the latch is
disengaged.
Push up the latch.
Latched Unlatched
CAUTION
Just disengage the latch. Do not push up the latch
after the latch is disengaged. If you continue
pushing up the latch forcibly, the latch can break.
<3> Place a finger at the bottom of the front of the fan unit then push
up the fan unit.
Push up the fan unit.
<4> Push up the fan unit until the fan unit is slanted by about 30
degrees.
<5> Pull out the fan unit toward you in the slanted direction.
<4> Push up the fan unit until it <5> Pull out the fan unit toward
is slanted by about 30 you in the slanted direction.
degrees.
- 338 -
Attaching a fan unit

<1> Insert a fan unit deeply into the main unit at a slanted angle of
about 30 degrees until the fan unit touches the wall of the main
unit.
<2> Lower the fan unit slowly on the main unit.
<3> Push down the fan unit on the near side to couple the fan unit
with the top of the main unit.
<1> Insert the fan unit at <2> Lower the fan unit. <3> Push down the fan unit to
an angle of about 30 couple it with the main
degrees. unit.
CAUTION
The fan unit and main unit are coupled directly with
each other by a connector. The coupling section of
the connector can break if the units are coupled
incorrectly.
<4> Push down the latch at the top of the fan unit for latching.
Push down the latch.
Unlatched Latched
<5> Turn on the power, then check that no fan alarm is issued and
that both fans are rotating.
NOTE
1 If the power is turned on when the fan unit and the
main unit are not coupled correctly, the fans do not
rotate or a fan alarm is issued even through the
fans are rotating.
2 When a large amount of force is required to couple
the fan unit with the main unit, check if pins of the
connector of the base printed circuit board are bent
and if the base printed circuit board is inserted
correctly.
- 339 -
4.12 REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE DISPLAY UNIT
WARNING
Display unit for 30i/31i/32i
Fuse

A02B-0303-K101 3.2A
- 340 -
Display unit for 30i/31i/32i
Fan motor Fan motor
Rear view
Power supply unit
Fuse

A02B-0236-K100 5A
- 341 -
4.13 REPLACING MAINTENANCE PARTS FOR CNC DISPLAY

UNIT FOR AUTOMOTIVE MANUFACTURERS
4.13.1 Replacing the Main PCB
WARNING
replacement work.
hazard.
Claws
Screws
NOTE) The screws are attached to the case so as not to be
dropped.
At this time, the fan need not be detached.
2 Remove the cables from connectors CA88A (PCMCIA interface
connector), CD46L (USB mouse and USB keyboard connector
interface), JD54 (USB mouse and USB keyboard connector
interface), CA98 (video signal interface connector), CPD12
(inverter interface), CA117 (LED interface), and CPD15 (I/O
Link adapter DC power interface) on the main PCB. When the
touch panel is attached, remove CA95 (touch panel interface).
- 342 -
3 Remove the screws securing the main PCB. Connector CA87A

(fan adapter connection connector) directly connects the main
PCB to the fan adapter PCB, so slightly move the main PCB
below and remove the main PCB.
4 When mounting the main PCB board, reverse steps 1 to 3.
CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main PCB
CA95
CD46L
JD54 JD36
CDP12
CPD15
CA117
- 343 -
4.13.2 Replacing the GUI Card
WARNING
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the card
PCB, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
cover).
hazard.
Method of extraction
1 Pull up the spacer metal fitting.
2 Insert your finger into the gap on the back of the GUI card and
lift it up slowly in the direction indicated by the arrow in step 2-2
in the figure below. (Note: At this time, hold the neighborhood of
the main board on the opposite side with the other hand
whenever possible. A force of 7 to 8 kgf is required for
extraction. Be careful not to drop the card board due to the
momentum of extraction.)
3 When one side of the card board is raised slightly by pulling up
the cover, do not fully extract the card board, but push back the
cover softly.
4 When the card board is pushed back to be parallel with the main
board, pinch two sides of the card board and pull up the card
board. This completes the extraction of the card board.
Insert your finger into the gap on the back of
the GUI card and lift it up slowly in the
direction indicated by the arrow to remove it. Push back the
cover softly.
Connector side
240-pin
Spacer side
connector on
the back
Top view of the GUI card Step 2-2 Step 2-3
Side view
- 344 -
Method of insertion
1 Check that the metal fittings of the spacers are raised.
2 To align the card board insertion position, touch the spacer fixing
end faces of the card board with the spacers as shown in the
figure below. (At this time, the board can be touched with the
spacers for easier position alignment by slightly holding up the
connector side and lowering the spacer side only.)
3 While aligning the card board with the spacers, lower the
connector side slowly then cause the connectors to touch each
other.
4 Push the connector side of the card board slowly. At this time,
push the card board against the board on the rear side of the
connector. The force required for connector insertion is about 10
kgf. If the connector cannot be mated by a force of about 10 kgf
or more, the card board may be aligned incorrectly, and the
connector can break. In this case, realign the card board. (Note:
Do not press the radiation fin installed on an LSI chip. Otherwise,
the radiation fin can break.)
5 Push in the spacer metal fittings.
Spacer
Spacer fixing
end face
Connector side
Spacer side
240-pin
connector on
the back
Spacer
- 345 -
4.13.3 Replacing the Compact Flash Card
WARNING
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the
module, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
cover).
hazard.
Method of extraction
1 Raise the stopper of the compact flash card socket.
2 Turn the latch inward and pull out the card.
Method of insertion
1 Raise the stopper and insert the card into the socket.
2 Push the card until it is locked.
3 Lower the stopper to fix the card.
Latch
Compact flash card socket
Stopper
Compact Flash card
- 346 -
4.13.4 Replacing the Fuse of the Unit
WARNING
hazard.
Fuse specification
A02B-0236-K100 5A
Fuse mounting location
Fuse
- 347 -
4.13.5 Replacing the Battery

The CNC display unit for automotive manufacturers has no battery, so
replacement work is not present.
4.13.6 Replacing the Fan Motor
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing the fan
cover). Touching the uncovered high-voltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric
shock hazard.
Fan ordering information

A02B-0303-K120 40 mm square, 2 units
2 Unplug the connector of a fan motor to be replaced ((1) of Fig. a).
3 Detach the latch securing the fan motor, then demount the fan
motor ((2) of Fig. a).
4 Insert a new fan motor into the fan case ((3) of Fig. a), then
reconnect the connector.
Fig. a
(1) Connector
(2) Fan (3) Fan case
Caution) Install a fan so that it flows air in the upward

- 348 -
4.13.7 Replacing the Touch Panel Protection Sheet
Maintenance parts of the touch panel

Item Ordering code
Touch panel protection sheet For 15” LCD A08B-0082-K020
Touch panel pen - A02B-0236-K111
LCD with a touch panel

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen.
For this operation, be sure to use a FANUC-supplied pen
(A02B-0236-K111) dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp-pointed
pen is used, for example, to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface
may be flawed or damaged. Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen
directly with a finger. Otherwise, the operability of the LCD may
deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get dirty.
Protection sheet for the touch panel

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel
to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection
sheet is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a
consumable part.)
Replacing the protection sheet

- Materials used
(1) Protection sheet : A08B-0082-K020: For 15" LCD with a touch
panel
(2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off =
detergent for kitchen can be used)
(3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touch
panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of the
touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
⇒ If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left on
the surface. Remove oil completely.
⇒ If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel,
the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely
and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
- 349 -
2) Applying the protection sheet

<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the backing
sheet).
Fold
<2> Peel off the backing sheet.

<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of the
sheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet do not
touch the escutcheon.
OK NG
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection sheet.
⇒ With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the touch
panel, do not attempt to correct the position of the
protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the entire
sheet completely.
⇒ Check that the four corners and four sides of the protection
sheet do not float.
3) Checks after replacement

<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the protection
sheet.
<2> After power-on, check that there is no touch panel portion kept
pressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takes
place.
- 350 -
Compensation of the touch panel

- Conditions under which compensation is required
The touch panel needs to be compensated when:
1. The LCD unit is replaced.
2. The touch panel is replaced.
3. Memory All Clear is performed.
- Method of compensating the touch panel

1. Press the ALT-O key to display the following function menu.
2. Select [Stylus] to display the calibration screen.
3. When the crosshair cursor appears, press and hold the center of
the cursor until it disappears (about three seconds).
4. When the cursor position moves, perform step 3 again. Repeat
this process a total of five times.
5. Press the RETURN key to close the calibration screen. To
cancel the settings of the touch panel, press the ESC key.
- 351 -
4.14 REPLACING PANEL i MAINTENANCE PARTS
NOTE
Insert a new battery within 5 minutes after the old
battery is removed from the connector.
Usually, following the battery replacement
procedure stated below will not lose the BIOS
settings. Should they be lost, the messages ”251:
System CMOS checksum bad – Default
configuration used.” and “Press <F2> to enter
SETUP” appear when the power is turned on.
If you have been using non-default BIOS settings
for the PANEL i, re-set them up exactly. Usually,
the unit is used with the default settings.
1 After keeping the PANEL i turned on for at least 5 seconds, turn

off the power, and detach it from the panel so that you can work
from behind.
2 Remove the connector from the lithium battery and take out the
battery from the battery holder.
3 Insert a new battery into the connector (BAT1) within 5 minutes,
and put it into the battery holder.
4 Re-install the PANEL i.
5 Turn on the power, and make sure that the BIOS parameters are
intact (no error occurs at startup).
Connector
(BAT1)
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Note) Recommend exchanging battery once a year.
Fig. 4.14 Replacing the Battery
- 352 -
4.14.2 Removing the Case Cover

If you spend 5 minutes or more in removing the battery, it is likely
that the BIOS settings may be lost. Should they be lost, the messages
“251: System CMOS checksum bad – Default configuration used.”
and “Press <F2> to enter BIOS” appear at restart.
If you are using the unit with non-default BIOS settings, check the
settings before removing the case cover. When the above
messages appear, re-set up the BIOS.
If you are using the default settings (factory-set), just exit the BIOS
setting procedure after the messages appear.
(1) Removing the LCD cable (for the 15.0” LCD only)
<4> <3>
<1>
<2>
<1> Remove the screw from the upper right section of the unit.
<2> Cut the cable clamp.
<3> Remove the video connector fastener.
<4> Detach the video connector.
(2) Pulling out the fan and battery cables
<1> Pull out the two fan cables. The connectors are latched in
a simple manner. Pull them out by holding down the
latch with a flat-blade screwdriver.
<2> Pull out the battery cable.
- 353 -
(3) Detaching the PCI card
<2> <1>
<1> Remove the PCI holding part.

<2> Remove the screw, and pull out the PCI card.
(4) Removing screws from the case
b
d
c e
Note) Screws a to c are locked so that they will

not drop off the case.
<1> For units other than the 15” LCD, remove the screw (a)
from the upper right section of the unit.
<2> Remove the other screws (b to e) from the case.
- 354 -
(5) Checking the shape of the PCI holding plate at the bottom of the
unit
<1> Old type <2> New type
<1> If the holding plate is an old type, remove it first.

<2> If the holding plate is a new type, remove the screw
indicated with an arrow, and loosen the fitting shown in a
dotted circle. Remove the cover as shown in (8).
(6) Removing the PCI holding plate 1 (for the old type only)
<1> Remove two screws from the PCI holder.
(7) Removing the PCI holding plate 2 (for the old type only)
<1> <2>
<3>
<1> Open the PCI holding plate to about 30 degrees.

<2> Tilt it a little to the far side.
<3> Pull it out.
- 355 -
(8) Removing the cover
- 356 -
4.14.3 Mounting the Case Cover

(1) Position the upper side of the cover in the right place, and lower
it.
Be careful. They are tight.
Be careful not to have the case cover caught on Make sure that the power supply PCB and
the DIMM latch. backplane PCB get in grooves.
(2) Mount the PCI holder, and fasten the case cover with screws (4
or 5 places).
(3) Mount the PCI card and the PCI card holder.
- 357 -
(4) Attach the cable connector.
40-mm-square fan
60-mm-square fan
Battery
(5) Attach the LCD cable, and mount the metal fitting and cable
clamp.
(For the 15.0” LCD unit only)
- 358 -
4.14.4 Replacing the Fuse
NOTE
First find out what caused the fuse to blow, and then
remove the cause.
The fuse blows if there is a short-circuit in the PANEL i.
If the fuse has blown, check to see if:
• A conductor has touched the main printed-circuit board.
• The PCI expansion board is defective or inserted
incorrectly.
• The cable is connected incorrectly.
If any fuse blows, it is likely that some failure or another
may have occurred in the system. Before turning on the
power again, make sure that the system is intact by
inspecting it visually and smelling it. If you find any
defective part, you need to have it replaced.
(1) Remove the connection cable, and take off the PANEL i from the
cabinet.
(2) Remove the cover. (See Subsection 4.14.2.)
(3) Remove the blown fuse, and install a new one securely.
(4) Mount the cover, and re-install the PANEL i (see Subsection
4.14.3). Attach the cable.
(5) Turn on the power, and make sure that the PANEL i gets started.
Detaching/attaching the cover

(See Subsections 4.14.2 and
4.14.3.)
Fuse
A08B-0084-K020
Fig. 4.14.4 Replacing the fuse
- 359 -
4.14.5 Replacing the Fan
4.14.5.1 Replacing the fan in the PANEL i

1 Turn off the power to the PANEL i.
2 Get a new fan ready.
3 Detach the connector from the fan in the PANEL i. The
connector is latched. Pull it out by unlatching it with a
flat-blade screwdriver as shown below.
4 Replace the fan. Be careful not to mount it in the wrong
orientation.
5 Attach the connector of the new fan correctly; 60-mm-square fan
(-K101) to CPE11B and 40-mm-square fan (-K100) to CPB11A.
Air Flow
60-mm-square fan
A08B-0084-K101
Be careful not to
mount the fan in the
wrong orientation.
40-mm-square
fan
A08B-0084-K100
Be careful not to
mount the fan in
the wrong
orientation.
(40-mm-square fan) CPE11A
(60-mm-square fan) CPE11B
Pull out the connector by

unlatching it gently with a
flat-blade screwdriver. Do not
pull it hard, or it may be
damaged.
Fig. 4.14.5(a) Replacing the Fan
- 360 -
4.14.5.2 Replacing the fan for the HDD

2 Get a new fan ready.
3 Remove the fan connector (CPE11C) from the power supply
board. The connector is latched. Detach it by pulling it up
slightly to unlatch.
4 Remove the two fastening screws from the fan to detach the fan.
5 Fasten the new fan with two screws. Attach it to the connector
(CPE11C). Be careful not mount it in the wrong orientation.
NOTE
Before replacing a fan in a unit designed to the
auto maker’s specification, remove the HDD unit.
To power supply P.C.B.
CPE11C (3 pins)
Fan
A08B-0084-K102
Be careful not to
mount the fan in the
wrong orientation.
Air Flow
Two screws
Fig. 11.4.5(b) Replacing the fan for the HDD
Fig. 11.4.5(c) Replacing the fan for the HDD (for unit designed to auto
maker’s specification)
- 361 -
4.14.6 Replacing the CPU Unit

2 Remove the cover. (See Subsection 4.14.2.)
3 Remove two (or three) screws and the CPU holding plate (A).
4 (For the Pentium 3 model)
Lift the CPU socket lever, and detach the CPU unit (B).
(For the Pentium M model)
Insert the flat head screw driver into the screw of the CPU socket
through the hole in the CPU fin, turn it counterclockwise to
release the CPU socket, and remove the CPU unit (B).
5 Mount a new CPU unit, and reverse the steps to re-assemble the
unit.
(For the Pentium 3 model)
CPU holding plate A

(Refer to Subsections 4.14.2
and 4.14.3.)
- 362 -
(For the Pentium M model)
CPU holding plate A
Fig. 4.14.6 Replacing the CPU unit
- 363 -
4.14.7 Replacing the LCD Backlight
NOTE
For the 15.0” LCD type, it is impossible to replace
the backlight independently. It must be replaced
together with the maintenance base unit
(A08D-0084-Dxxx).
4.14.7.1 Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight

2 Remove the cover. (See Subsection 4.14.2.)
3 Detach the LCD backlight cable and the LCD signal cable.
4 If the unit is provided with a touch panel, remove the touch panel
flat cable from the touch panel controller printed-circuit board
connector CN1.
LCD signal cable
LCD backlight cable
Flat cable from the touch

panel
(Refer to Subsections 4.14.2
and 4.14.3.)
Fig. 4.14.7(a) Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight (1)
- 364 -
5 Remove two screws, and detach the CPU holding plate.

Remove two screws, and detach the PCI holding plate (if it has
not been detached).
Also remove three screws, the soft key cable, PCMCIA cable,
and USB cable, and then detach the printed-circuit board.
ネジ
Screw (three
places)
PCMCIA cable
USB cable
Two screws Two screws
Soft key cable
CPU holding plate CPU holding plate
Fig. 4.14.7(b) Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight (2)
6 Remove screws, and detach the ornamental frame.

Four screws
Fig. 4.14.7(c) Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight (3)
- 365 -
7 Remove screws, and detach the LCD unit.
Screws
Fig. 4.14.7(d) Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight (4)
- 366 -
8 As shown below, unlock and pull out the case that contains the
backlight, and then replace the backlight.
The lock is here.

CP1
Lift this portion gently, and pull out

the backlight. (For details, see the
figure below.)
LCD Rear
view
Lock
Lift this portion.
Fig. 4.14.7(e) Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight (5)
CAUTION
When pulling out the backlight, do not pull the
cable.
9 To re-assemble the unit, reverse the steps 1 to 8.

(Be careful not to get the cable caught under the holding plate or
any other stuff.)
- 367 -

If the PANEL i is provided with a touch panel, the touch panel surface
is covered with protection sheet. If the protection sheet is scratched
or dirty to make the screen less visible, replace it with the spare listed
below.
Item Specification
Touch panel protection For 10.4” VGA LCD A02B-0236-K110
sheet For 10.4” SVGA LCD
For 15.0” LCD A08B-0082-K020
Replacing procedure of touch panel protection sheet

1 Peel away the old protection sheet by holding it at the tab and
pulling it.
Hold the sheet at
this tab when
replacing it
Protection sheet
2 Wipe dirt, moisture, grease, and protection sheet glue residual (if
any) off the LCD surface carefully.
3 As shown in the figure at the lower left, fold the tab of the
protection sheet toward the front side (to about 60 degrees).
- 368 -
4 As shown in the figure at the lower right, remove the backing

film from the new protection sheet surface that is to face the
LCD panel.
Tab
Protection
sheet
Surface
LCD unit side
5 Paste the protection sheet with its tab at the upper right while
being careful to protect the gap between the LCD panel and the
protection sheet from dirt and any other foreign matter.
- 369 -
4.15 REPLACING is SERIES CNC DISPLAY UNIT

MAITENANCE PARTS
4.15.1 Replacing the Main Board
WARNING
replacement work.
hazard.

UNITS.”
At this time, the fan cable need not be detached.
Claw

Screws be dropped.
- 370 -

interface connector), CD46L (USB interface connector), and
CK20A and CK21A (connectors for soft keys) on the main
board.
When the 10.4" LCD is used, remove CA79A (video signal
interface connector). When the 12.1" LCD is used, remove
CA79A (video signal interface connector) and CPD12. When the
15" LCD is used, remove the cable holding plate, then remove
CA98 (video signal interface connector) and CPD12. When a
touch panel is provided, remove TP2 (connector for the touch
panel) as well.
4 Next, remove the screws used to secure the main board. The
connector CA87A (connector for inverter connection) directly
connects the main board with the inverter PCB. So, detach the
main board by moving the main board downward.
CA79A CA98
CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CA95
CD46L
CDP12
CK20A
CK21A
5 When mounting the main board, reverse steps 2 through 4.
- 371 -
4.15.2 Replacing the Fuse
WARNING
- Ordering code of the fuse

A02B-0236-K100 5A
- Mounting position of the fuse
Rear of unit
Power supply unit
Fuse

No battery replacement is needed on the is series CNC display unit,
because it has no battery.
- 372 -
4.15.4 Replacing Fan Motor
WARNING
When opening the cabinet and replacing a fan
cover).
hazard.
- Ordering code of fan motor

A02B-0303-K120 40-mm-square fan (two)
- Replacement procedure of fan motor

See Section 2.9 “Replacing Fan Motors” for replacement procedure of
fan motor.

For the LCD display unit with a touch panel, the surface of the touch
panel is covered with the protection sheet to protect it. When there are
flaws and contamination on this protection sheet that make the screen
hard to read, replace the protection sheet. Prepare the following items.
Name Ordering code

Touch panel protection For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
sheet For 12.1” LCD A02B-0236-K118
For 15.0” LCD A08B-0082-K020
- Replacing Method
See "Replacing the protect sheet" in Section 5.7, "LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY (LCD)".
4.15.6 Compensating the Touch Panel

See Section 3.12, “COMPENSATING THE TOUCH PANEL”.
- 373 -
AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) B-63945EN/03
5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH

LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND
STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
This chapter describes printed-circuit boards and units common to
LCD-mounted and stand-alone types. It also explains conditions for
installing them and how to replace their consumable parts.
5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD ...............................................................375

5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB .................399
5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS ................402
5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES ......405
5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT FLASH /
GUI CARD ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD..............407
5.6 OTHER UNITS ........................................................................409
5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)....................................413
5.8 DISTRIBUTED I/O SETTING ................................................432
5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS.........................435
5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET ..441
5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE ...........................446
5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS ...................448
5.13 ATTACHING AND DETACHING LCD/MDI UNITS...........469
5.14 CAUTIONS IN REPLACING PCB’S .....................................471
- 374 -
5.MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE
B-63945EN/03 AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)
5.1 OPTIONAL BOARD
5.1.1 Fast Ethernet Board
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030
JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector
CNH6
CD38R
Connector number Use

CNH6 ATA card interface
CD38R 100BASE-TX Ethernet interface
- 375 -
- LED indications
The board incorporates the following LEDs: Four green STATUS
LEDs and one red ALARM LED for indicating the status. Two green
LEDs, one yellow LED, and one red LED for indicating the
communication status. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as
follows:
: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care
Detailed view of LEDs
CD38R
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(STASUS) (green)
3(STATUS) (green)
2(STATUS) (green)
1(STATUS) (green)
- 376 -
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is
Immediately after one of the following:

power-on → The firmware is not stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC.
→ The board is defective.
The board has started.
Start of board If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
be defective.
The firmware has been downloaded to the board.
Completion of firmware
If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
downloading
be defective.
The firmware OS has started.
one of the following:
Firmware OS started.
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
Completion of firmware one of the following:

OS initialization → The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
The Ethernet parameters have been read.
Completion of one of the following:

parameter reading → The Ethernet option or Data Server option is not
installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
Start completion The board has started normally.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Normal status The board is operating normally.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED indication Status Meaning
100BASE-TX
BTX The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
connection in progress
10BASE-T connection
BTX The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
in progress
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
Transmission/
COM Data is being transmitted or received.
reception in progress
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued
- 377 -
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long
on-time and short on-time.
LED LED
indication indication
[Long on-time] [Short on-time]
Status Description
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a problem on another

board board was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general
Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
instruction
Illegal slot instruction Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off
with long on-time and short on-time in a manner
not indicated above, contact FANUC.
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED indication Status Description
The LED is on or blinks at short intervals
COL ■ Collision occurs. when the Ethernet communication traffic
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.) (communication amount) is high or ambient
noise is high.
The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also when
LIL □ Not connected to hub the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to
the hub properly.
A parity error occurred in memory on the
ALM ■ Parity error occurs.
board. The board is defective.
- 378 -
5.1.2 Additional Axis Board
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A

COP10A FSSB
JD1A I/O LINK
CA69A Servo check
- Block diagram
Servo control
FSSB I/F
I/O Link (4th ch)

DV/RV
BACKPLANE
- 379 -
- LED display
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
FSSB_OP
LED name Meaning

FBBS_OP ON: FSSB connected (FSSB OPEN)
- 380 -
5.1.3 Additional Spindle Board
- Specification
Item Ordering code
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320
JGP
(JA71L: Additional spindle board B only)
JA41L

JA41L Serial spindle and position coder
- Block diagram
Spindle control
Serial
spindle
BACKPLANE
- 381 -
5.1.4 HSSB Interface Board
- Specification
Item Function Ordering code
HSSB interface board HSSB × 1 channel A20B-8101-0111
JGP
COP21N

COP21N High-speed serial bus interface
- Block diagram
HSSB control
Personal
computer
or
PANEL i
BACKPLANE
- 382 -
- LED display
LEDR (red)
BRDYA (green)
LED name Meaning

LEDR Lights to indicate that the high-speed serial bus on this
board is connected normally and ready to communicate.
BRDYA Lights to indicate that a link has been established.
- 383 -
5.1.5 FL-net Board
- Specification
Item Ordering code
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031
LSI
MPU
CD38N
- 384 -
- LED indications
The board incorporates the following LEDs: Four green STATUS
LEDs and one red ALARM LED for indicating the status. Two green
LEDs, one yellow LED, and one red LED for indicating the
communication status. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
follows:
CD38N
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(POK) (STASUS) (green)
3(LNK) (STATUS) (green)
2(RES) (STATUS) (green)
1(ROS) (STATUS) (green)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.
- 385 -
LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED indication
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
Immediately after one of the following:

power-on → The firmware is not stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC.
The board has started.
Start of board If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
be defective.
The firmware has been downloaded to the board.
Completion of firmware
If the board is stopped in this condition, the board may
downloading
be defective.
The firmware OS has started.
one of the following:
Firmware OS started.
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
Completion of firmware one of the following:

OS initialization → The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC
is destroyed.
◊◊ Start completion The board has started normally.
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
ROS Normal software Blinks at 1-second intervals when the communication
operation software on the FL-net board operates normally.
RES Normally OFF Normally, off
LNK Participating in network Turned on when the node participates in the FL-net
network
POK Normal parameters Turned on when all FL-net parameters are valid.
LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
10BASE-T connection
BTX The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
in progress
100BASE-TX
BTX The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
connection in progress
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
Transmission/
COM Data is being transmitted or received.
reception in progress
ALM
No alarm No alarm is issued
(HER)
- 386 -
LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long
on-time and short on-time.
LED LED
indication indication
[Long on-time] [Short on-time]
Status Description
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a problem on another

board board was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general
Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
instruction
Illegal slot instruction Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off
with long on-time and short on-time in a manner
not indicated above, contact FANUC.
LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED indication Status Description
COL ■ Collision occurs. When a data collision occurs on the
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.) network, the LED is lit or blinks. (Note)
The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also when
LIL □ Not connected to hub the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to
the hub properly.
ALM ■ A parity error occurred in memory on the
Parity error occurs.
(HER) board. The board is defective.
NOTE
The FL-net manages the token-based transmission
right so that no collision occurs. If this LED is
turned on frequently, a communication error has
occurred due to noise, or an Ethernet compliant
product other than the FL-net is connected.
In such a case, check the devices connected to the
network and the network installation status.
- 387 -
5.1.6 PROFIBUS Board
- Specification
PROFIBUS Master board A20B-8101-0050 Master function only
PROFIBUS Slave board A20B-8101-0100 Slave function only

[PROFIBUS Master board]
MPU
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN1 LSI
[PROFIBUS Slave board]
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN2
LSI
- 388 -
- LED indicators and their meanings
[LED indicators for DP-Master function]
CN1
LED2 LED1
NOTE
The face plate is indicated by the broken line.
LED
Color Description
name
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started
running.
LED1 Green ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to
start running.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Indicates whether communication is being normally
carried out.
LED2 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
- 389 -
[LED indicators for DP-Slave function]
CN2
LEDB LED3 LED2 LED1
NOTE
The face plate is indicated by the broken line.
LED
Color Description
name
Indicates that the CPU on this board has started
running.
LED1 Green ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to
start running.
Indicates that communication has started.
ON: Communication has started.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on or if:
LED2 Green - No parameter data and configuration data have been
received.
- Invalid parameter data and configuration data have
been received.
Indicates whether communication is being normally
carried out.
LED3 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
Indicates that a RAM parity alarm condition has
occurred on this board.
ON: A RAM parity alarm condition has occurred.
LEDB Green
Once it has been turned on, it stays on until the power is
turned off.
- 390 -
5.1.7 DeviceNet Master Board
Specification
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330
Connector and LED mounting location

- Master board
LSI
Daughter board
From left to
right
LEDWD
LED3
LED2 NS MS (LED)
LED1
LED0
Outside line
connector
TBL
Face plate
- 391 -
- Slave board
LED
Green LED3
Green LED2
Green LED1
Green LED0
LED
Green
Green
LEDWD Red
Red
Red
MS NS
Outside line connector

TBL
Face plate
LED indicators and their meanings

- Master board
This board provides four green LEDs and one red LED for status
indication.
In addition, the internal daughter board has two LEDs that emit red
and green light.
Name Color Description

Indicates the activation state of the
LED0 to LED3 Green
DeviceNet application software.
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the daughter board.
MS (Module Status) indicates the states of
MS Red/Green
nodes.
NS (Network Status) indicates the state of
NS Red/Green
the network.

follows:
- 392 -
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (during power-on)
LED indication State and cause when

Action when stopped after power-on
L3L2L1L0 stopped after power-on
Power-off
After power-on, the DeviceNet
Store the DeviceNet application software in the Flash
application software does not
ROM of the CNC.
start.
Initializing the firmware on the

daughter board.
Checking memory on the Replace the DeviceNet master board.

daughter board.
Recognizing the firmware on

the daughter board.
Reading DeviceNet
Enable the DeviceNet master function (software option).
parameters.
Verifying that DeviceNet
parameter "NETWORK" is set Set DeviceNet parameter "NETWORK" to "ONLINE."
to "ONLINE."
Setting the bus parameter in
Replace the DeviceNet master board.
DeviceNet parameters.
Setting the slave parameter in Set the slave parameter in DeviceNet parameters

DeviceNet parameters. correctly. Or, replace the DeviceNet master board.
Check duplication with the MAC ID of a slave device.
Check if cables are connected correctly.
Checking duplicate MAC IDs.
Check if power for communication is correctly supplied.
Check if slave devices are turned on.
The DeviceNet application
software has been initialized
and I/O communication starts.
LED indication of LEDWD

LED
Status Description
indication
Daughter board The daughter board failed.

failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
LED indication of MS and NS (during normal operation)

LED
Status Description
indication
MS Immediately after The MPU on the daughter board is
NS power-on being reset.
MS Green The firmware on the daughter board is
Initializing
NS making a initialization.
Checking
MS Green The firmware on the daughter board is
duplication of
NS checking duplicated MAC IDs.
MAC IDs
MS Green I/O communication The firmware on the daughter board is
NS Green stopped stopping I/O communication.
The firmware on the daughter board is
MS Green I/O communication
successfully performing I/O
NS Green in advance
communication.
- 393 -
LED indication of MS and NS (during occurrence of an error)

LED indication Status Error and action
MS Red Daughter board The daughter board failed.
NS ◊ failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
MS Red Daughter board The daughter board failed.
NS failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
MAC IDs are duplicate.
Duplicate MAC
Verify the following:
IDs
→ MAC IDs are not duplicate by check the MAC IDs of all nodes.
Communication stopped because a communication error occurred
frequently.
MS ◊
NS Red
→ The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value.
Busoff detection
→ The cable length is appropriate.
→ The cable is not loose or broken.
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main line.
→ There are not much noise.
Power for communication is not supplied.
Network power
failure
→ Power for communication is properly supplied.
Transmission is not completed successfully.
MS ◊ → All slaves are turned on.
NS → There is no other master on the network.
Transmission error → The communication rates of all nodes are set to the same value.
No slaves are present.
→ The slave is turned on.
Slave not present
The slave I/O size setting does not match the setting of the actual
MS ◊
Slave I/O size slave.
NS Red
mismatch Verify the following:
→ The slave I/O size setting matches the setting of the actual slave.
I/O communication timed out.
I/O communication
error
- 394 -
- Slave board
This board provides four green LEDs (LED0 to LED3) and one red
LED (LEDWD) for status indication.
In addition, there are two LED sets (MS and NS) that consist of one
red LED and one green LED.
Name Color Description

Indicates the activation state of the DeviceNet
LED0 to LED3 Green
application software.
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the board.
Green Indicates the unit status, which is the status of
MS
Red the local node.
Green Indicates the network status, which is the
NS status of the entire network including the local
Red
node.

follows:
: Off : On : Blinking ◊: Don't care ?: Undefined
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3

Power-off
After power-on, the DeviceNet
Store the DeviceNet application software in the Flash
application software does not
ROM of the CNC.
start. Or, the DeviceNet slave
Or, confirm that the DeviceNet slave function (software
function (software option) is
option) has been purchased.
disabled.
Remove the noise factor and then turn the slave power
Initializing the firmware on the off and back on again.

board. When the error persists, replace the DeviceNet slave
board.
The board firmware has been off and back on again.

initialized. When the error persists, replace the DeviceNet slave
board.
A line baud rate check is in

progress.
A MAC ID duplication check is

in progress. These faults are recoverable.
Waiting for I/O communication When communication is normally established, the status

to be established. changes to "I/O communication is normal". Each status
I/O communication is normal. corresponds to DeviceNet MPU status transition NOTE).
I/O communication has timed

out.
I/O communication is idle.
- 395 -

These faults are not Check the following and then turn the slave power off
↑ ↓ recoverable on the board side. and back on again.
MAC ID duplication has been → MAC IDs are not duplicate by check the MAC IDs of
(Repetition) detected. all nodes.
Check the following and then turn the slave power off
and back on again.
These faults are not → The communication rates of all nodes are set to the

recoverable on the board side. same value.
↑ ↓
Busoff was detected due to → The cable length is appropriate.

frequent occurrence of a → The cable is not loose or broken.
(Repetition)
communication error. → A terminal is placed on only both ends of the main
line.
Any of other unrecoverable
failures occurred on the board.
↑ ↓ off and back on again.
The pattern indicated by LED0
??? When the error persists, replace the DeviceNet slave
to LED2 is other than the
(Repetition) board.
above two patterns.

↑ ↓ An unrecoverable failure
Contact FANUC.
occurred on the CNC side.
(Repetition)
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication
normal" status is not made, confirm that the power
for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
LED indication of LEDWD

LED
Status Description
indication
Remove the noise factor and then turn
the slave power off and back on again.
Board failure
When the error persists, replace the
DeviceNet slave board.
- 396 -
LED indication of MS and NS (during normal operation)

In the "during normal operation" status, when communication is
normally established, a transition to the "I/O communication normal"
status is made.
LED
Status Description
indication
MS Green The onboard firmware is being
MS Red Immediately initialized when the onboard MPU is in
NS Green after power-on the reset status or reset release
NS Red status.
The onboard firmware performs
MS Green processing in the order below.
MS Red Communication <1> Waits for the DeviceNet
NS Green under application software to be
NS Red preparation initialized.
<2> Checks the baud rate.
<3> Checks MAC ID duplication.
Waiting for
MS Green
establishment of
MS Red
I/O
NS Green
communication
NS Red
to be established
MS Green
I/O Each status corresponds to DeviceNet
MS Red
communication MPU status transition NOTE).
NS Green
normal
NS Red
MS ◇ Green
I/O
MS ◇ Red
communication
NS Green
timeout
NS Red
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication
normal" status is not made, confirm that the power
for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
- 397 -
LED indication of MS and NS (during occurrence of an unrecoverable failure)

In the "during occurrence of an unrecoverable failure" status, once an
error occurred, recovery is not performed unless this slave station is
powered off and back on again.
LED
Status Error and action
indication
Check the following and then turn the
Duplicate MAC slave power off and back on again.
IDs → MAC IDs are not duplicate by check
the MAC IDs of all nodes.
MS ◇ Green Check the following and then turn the
MS ◇ Red slave power off and back on again.
→ The communication rates of all nodes
NS Green
are set to the same value.
NS Red
Busoff detection → The cable length is appropriate.
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends
of the main line.
MS Green Remove the noise factor and then turn
Other
MS Red the slave power off and back on again.
unrecoverable
NS ◇ Green When the error persists, replace the
onboard failures
NS ◇ Red DeviceNet slave board.
- 398 -
5.1.8 Option Board Mounting Location

It is stipulated in which slot each option board must be inserted. When
inserting option boards during expansion or maintenance work,
observe the following rules.
1. 2-slot type option board with display unit incorporated or
separated
Check the number of each option board to be inserted with Table
5.1.8, and insert one with a lower number and one with a higher
number, respectively, in slots 1 and 2.
2. 4-slot type option board with display unit separated
Check the number of each option board to be inserted with Table
5.1.8, and insert one with the lowest number among them, one
with the next lowest, one with the next highest, and one with the
highest in slots 1, 3, 4, and 2 in the stated order.
Table 5.1.8
No. Name
1 PROFIBUS master board
Fast Ethernet board (This board also is used when Data Server is
2
used.)
3 FL-net board
4 DeviceNet master board
5 DeviceNet slave board
6 PROFIBUS slave board
7 HSSB board
8 Additional spindle board
9 Additional axis board
LCD-mounted type CNC Stand-alone type CNC
4-slot rack 2-slot rack

Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
- 399 -
5.2 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB
5.2.1 Method of Extraction

<1> Detach the cable connected to the option board and the cable that
interferes when the option board is extracted.
<2> Pinch handles A and B for extraction.
<3> Pinch handle A, and extract the printed circuit board while
disengaging the latch.
5.2.2 Method of Insertion

<1> Pinch handles A and B for extraction, then insert the option
board until the option board plugs into the connector of the back
panel.
<2> Plug the detached cables again correctly.
For LCD-mounted type control unit
- 400 -
For stand-alone type control unit
- 401 -
5.3 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS
WARNING
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a card
PCB, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
cover).
hazard.
CAUTION
SRAM data of the CNC. Otherwise, the contents of
the SRAM memory may be lost during replacement
work. (See Appendix C.2.5.)

<1> Pull up the spacer metal fitting.
<2> A molded cover is attached to a corner of the servo card and CPU
card although the shapes of the covers attached to the cards differ
from each other. Insert a finger into the rear of the cover and pull
up the cover slowly in the arrow direction shown in the figure
below. (Note: At this time, hold the neighborhood of the main
board on the opposite side with the other hand whenever possible.
A force of 7 to 8 kgf is required for extraction. Be careful not to
drop the card board due to the momentum of extraction.)
<3> When one side of the card board is raised slightly by pulling up
the cover, do not fully extract the card board, but push back the
cover softly.
<4> When the card board is pushed back to be parallel with the main
board, pinch two sides of the card board and pull up the card
board. This completes the extraction of the card board.
- 402 -
For extraction, insert a finger into the rear

of this cover, then pull up the cover in the
arrow direction. Push back the
cover softly.
Please put a finger

in the reverse of
this part and pull
up this part when
removing this PCB.
Connector side
240-pin
Spacer side
connector on
the back
Top view of the servo card Step 2-2 Step 2-3
Side view
Connector side
240-pin
Spacer side
connector
on the back
Top view of the CPU card
- 403 -

<1> Check that the metal fittings of the spacers are raised.
<2> To align the card board insertion position, touch the spacer fixing
end faces of the card board with the spacers as shown in the
figure below. (At this time, the board can be touched with the
spacers for easier position alignment by slightly holding up the
connector side and lowering the spacer side only.)
<3> While aligning the card board with the spacers, lower the
connector side slowly then cause the connectors to touch each
other.
<4> The mating position can be determined more easily by moving
the card board back and forth slightly in the arrow direction.
<5> Push the connector side of the card board slowly. At this time,
push the card board against the board on the rear side of the
connector. The force required for connector insertion is about 10
kgf. If the connector cannot be mated by a force of about 10 kgf
or more, the card board may be aligned incorrectly, and the
connector can break. In this case, realign the card board. (Note:
Do not press the radiation fin installed on a CPU and LSI chip.
Otherwise, the radiation fin can break.)
<6> Push in the spacer metal fittings.
Spacer
Please put a finger

in the reverse of this
part and pull up this
part when removing
Spacer fixing
this PCB.
end face
Connector side
Spacer side
240-pin
connector on
the back
Spacer
- 404 -
5.4 MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM MODULES
WARNING
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing a module,
hazard.
CAUTION
work.
Before replacing the SRAM module, make a
backup copy of the SRAM data. Restore it after
replacement. (See Appendix C.2.5.)
- 405 -
5.4.1 Demounting a DIMM Module

(1) Open the claw of the socket outward. (See Fig. a.)
(2) Extract the module slantly upward. (See Fig. b.)
5.4.2 Mounting a DIMM Module

(1) Insert the module slantly into the module socket, with side B
facing upward. (See Fig. b.)
(2) Push the module downward until it is locked. (See Fig. c.)
At this time, push it down with pushing two points of (*) in the
figure.
Fig. a
Fig. b
Fig. c
(*)
(*)
- 406 -
5.5 INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT FLASH / GUI

CARD ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL CARD
WARNING
replacement work.
When opening the cabinet and replacing the
module, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
cover). Touching the uncovered high-voltage
circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric
shock hazard.
CAUTION
work. (See Appendix C.2.5.)
- 407 -

<1> Face side B of the display control / GUI card upward, then pull
up the retainer of the socket.
<2> Turn the latch toward the far side, then extract the compact flash
card.

<1> Pull up the retainer, then insert a compact flash card into the
socket.
<2> Push the card until it is locked.
<3> Lower the retainer to hold the card.
Display control / Latch

GUI card (side B)
Retainer
Compact flash card
- 408 -
5.6 OTHER UNITS
5.6.1 Separate Detector Interface Unit
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A02B-0303-C205
Additional unit A02B-0236-C204

CNF1 (CNF2)
JF101(JF105)
JF102(JF106)
JF103(JF107)
JF104(JF108)
JA4A
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit.

CP11A 24 VDC power input
CP11B 24 VDC power output
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface
JF101 to JF104 (JF105 to JF108) Separate detector interface
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute
detector
CNF1 (CNF2) Connection of the additional unit
- 409 -
- LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and OPEN) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are
indicated below.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 OPEN
LED indication
No. LED Meaning

1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 OPEN Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
- 410 -
5.6.2 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A06B-6061-C201
The additional unit A02B-0236-C204 mentioned in the previous
subsection can be used with this interface unit.

CNF1
JF111
JF112
JF113
JF114
JA4A

CP11A 24 VDC power input
CP11B 24 VDC power output
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface
JF111 to JF114 Separate detector interface
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute detector
CNF1 Connection of the additional unit
- 411 -
- LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and OPEN) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The locations and meanings of the LEDs are
indicated below.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
LED indication
No. LED Meaning

1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 OPEN Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
- 412 -
5.6.3 I/O Link-AS-i Converter
- Specification
Name Specification
For AS-i Ver 2.0 A03B-0817-C001
For AS-i Ver 2.1 A03B-0817-C002
AS-i terminal board

CP1A, CP1B JD1A JD1B

CP1A 24-VDC power supply input
CP1B 24-VDC power supply output
JD1A Second I/O link stage
JD1B First I/O link stage
AS-i terminal board AS-i communication cable connection
- 413 -
- LED displays and setting switch

The I/O Link-AS-i converter is equipped with status display LEDs and
a setting switch. The equipped LEDs include four green, four red, and
two 7-segment LEDs. Shown below are the location and use of each
LED as well as what the setting switch is used for.
(1) LED
(2) 7-segment LEDs
(3) Setting switch
Note: This label is only on Ver 2.1

of AS-i converter.
- 414 -
(1) LED displays

Function Label Color Description
POW Green Lights to indicate that the power for the I/O Link - AS-i converter is on.
ERR Red Lights to indicate a failure (whose details can be checked using the
other LED displays (including the 7-segment LED displays) and status
information on the I/O Link).
I/O Link RDY Green Lights to indicate that the I/O Link is ready to communicate.
ALM Red Lights to indicate that an alarm condition (whose details can be
checked using the 7-segment LED displays) has occurred on the I/O
Link.
AS-i AUP Green Lights to indicate that the current operation mode is the protected
mode and automatic address is available.
CM Green Lights to indicate that the current operation is the configuration mode
and goes off to indicate that the current operation is the protected
mode.
APF Red Lights to indicate an AS-i power fail.
CER Red Lights to indicate that a registered slave configuration (LPS, ID code,
or I/O configuration) does not match the currently connected slaves.
(2) 7-segment LED displays

LED display Description
No display Normal operation
(If the setting switch is in the DISP
position, the LED displays light according
to the operation mode as listed below.)
E0 AS-i master error
E1 AS-i master EEPROM error
E2 ROM error
E3 RAM error
E5 Command execution error, SET switch execution error
E6 I/O Link slave watchdog alarm
E7 I/O Link RAM error
E8 Watchdog alarm 1
E9 or "⋅" (dot) at the tens digit Watchdog alarm 2
00 to 31 Slave address display
"⋅" (dot) at the ones digit Lights when the B slave address is displayed.
88 Initialize operation, mode shifting, AS-i power fail
Operation mode Normal operation When setting switch is in DISP position

Configuration mode No display The LES of each connected salve unit is
displayed at 1-second intervals.
Protected mode The lowest slave address Each slave unit that has encountered a
among those which configuration mismatch is displayed at 1-second
encountered a intervals (in an LPS-LES mismatch list).
configuration mismatch is Note: Nothing is displayed if there is no
displayed. mismatched slave unit.
- 415 -
(a) Order in which Ver 2.1 displays slave numbers

The slave number of the standard slave or the A slave is displayed first
(with "⋅" at the ones digit off). The slave number of the B slave is
displayed next (with "⋅" at the ones digit on).
Example: Address #10 Standard slave

Address #20A A/B slave
Address #20B A/B slave
Address #30 Standard slave
If the above slave units are connected, their slave numbers are
displayed in the order shown below.
Address #10 Address #20 Address #30 Address #20B

Standard slave A/B slave Standard slave A/B slave
X10 X10 X10 X10
X1 X1 X1 X1
●B－ ●B－ ●B－ ●B－
SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE
"⋅" (dot) at the ones

digit lights.
- 416 -
(3) What the setting switch specifies

Setting Operation mode
switch Configuration Protected mode
DISP Slave addresses are displayed.
No other input is acceptable until all salve addresses are displayed.
The LES of each of all connected slaves are Each slave unit which has encountered a
displayed at about 1-second intervals. configuration mismatch is displayed at about
1-second intervals (in an LPS-LES mismatch
list).
Note) Nothing is displayed if there is no
mismatched slave unit.
SET The operation modes are switched.
Note) Keeping pressing the switch will not change the modes. Keep your hand off the switch for
at least 1 second to make it off.
Keeping pressing the switch for at least 5 Keeping pressing the switch for at least 5
seconds causes the current slave configuration seconds selects the configuration mode.
(LPS, ID code, I/O configuration, and
parameters) to be registered, enables automatic Keeping pressing the switch for not longer than 5
addressing, and selects the protected seconds causes nothing.
mode.(Note 1)
Keeping pressing the switch for not longer than 5

seconds selects the protected mode but does
not cause the configuration to be registered or
enables automatic addressing.(Note 1)
NOTE
If a slave unit with address "0" is connected, no
configuration registration is made and the
protected mode is not selected. Alarm "E5" is
displayed.
- 417 -
- Dealing with errors
Check error status according to the LED display or status

signals on the I/O Link.
Status signal on the I/O

LED display Link (X represents a
PMC address)
Alarm or AS-i
Possible cause and action
warning ERR data
7-segment
LED X+18 ready Other
LED
bit1 X+18
bit0
Normal operation - Off 0 1 - -
Configuration CER on (Note 1) 0 1 X+16 The current slave configuration does not match
mismatch bit7=0 the registered configuration. In the protected
mode, selecting DISP causes the slave address
encountering a configuration mismatch to be
displayed.
The possible causes include a slave unit failure,
broken AS-i cable, and noise-induced AS-i
communication error.
Initialization or - 88 0 0 X+16 Or X+17
mode change in bit0=1 bit0=1
progress
AS-i power fail APF on 88 1 0 X+16 Check to see if the AS-i power supply is normal
bit1=1 and cables from the AS-i power supply are normal.
Normal operation is resumed when the AS-i power
returns to normal.
AS-i master ERR on E1 1 0 X+17 Turn the power off and on again. Because the
EEPROM fail bit2=0 configuration may be corrupted, register the
configuration again (see NOTE on the next page).
If the alarm occurs again, replace the converter
unit.
AS-i master fail ERR on E0 1 0 X+18 Turn the power off and on again. If the alarm
bit2=1 occurs again, replace the converter unit.
ROM fail ERR on E2 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
bit3=1
RAM fail ERR on E3 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
bit4=1
Watchdog 1 ERR on E8 1 0 X+18 Replace the converter unit.
bit5=1
Watchdog 2 ERR on E9 or ×10 1 0 - An I/O Link system alarm occurred on the host
"⋅" CNC.
Replace the converter unit.
I/O Link ERR on E6 - - - An I/O Link system alarm occurred on the host
Slave CNC.
Watchdog The possible causes include a power failure in
another unit on the I/O Link and a broken I/O Link
cable as well as a noise-induced I/O Link
communication error.
I/O Link RAM fail ERR on E7 - - - An I/O Link system alarm occurred on host CNC.
Replace the converter unit.
- 418 -
NOTE
- In the protected mode, the lowest address number among those encountering a
configuration mismatch is displayed. In the configuration mode, nothing is
displayed.
- Use ladder programs to detect and display converter unit errors.
- If a converter unit error occurs, both the DO and DI are turned off.
- If it is impossible to continue AS-i communication, a watchdog alarm condition
occurs in the slave unit. How the DO behaves at the watchdog alarm is
determined according to the slave unit type and parameter setting used. See the
relevant slave unit specification.
- How to handle AS-i master EEPROM errors
If the 7-segment LEDs display "E1", it is likely that the registered configuration may
be corrupted. So, register it again according to the following chart.
Turn off power
Place switch in SET position, and turn on power again.
7-segment LED displays "E1" (keep switch in SET position).
Keep switch in SET position until LED "CM" changes from off to on or from on to off.
(This operation may take 5 seconds or more.)
Take your hand off switch, and turn power off and on again to restart system.
If 7-segment LEDs do not display "E1", registered configuration has been repaired.
(If LED "CM" lights, protect registered configuration for subsequent operation. Keep switch in SET position
until "E1" disappears. This operation takes 5 seconds or more.)
If 7-segment LEDs still display "E1", replace converter unit.
Note that if "E1" is displayed, the CNC may fail to start up.
The converter having this function is one shipped in or after June 2005.
Those shipped before do not support this function. If EEPROM fails to operate
normally, replace the converter unit.
- 419 -
- How to re-install
Once the I/O Link - AS-i converter is replaced, the new I/O Link - AS-i must be loaded with AS-i slave information
according to the following procedure.
The procedure can be executed even when no I/O Link is connected (when power is supplied to the I/O Link - AS-i
converter but not to the CNC or when no I/O Link cable is attached).
Start
Mount I/O Link-AS-i converter, AS-i slave, and AS-i power supply.
Connect AS-i cable.
Turn on power for I/O Link-AS-i converter and AS-i.
YES Mode LED "CM"

Configuration mode? Configuration On
Protected Off
NO
Keep pressing SET switch for at least 5 seconds to select configuration mode.
Press DISP switch and check slave number of currently connected slave.
Keep pressing SET switch for at least 5 seconds to select protected
End of loading
NOTE
1 When the protected mode is selected, the slave
configuration is registered, and automatic
addressing is enabled.
2 Turning the I/O Link-AS-i converter power on/off
causes no operation mode change. To change
the operation modes, use the SET switch.
- 420 -
5.6.4 Terminal Board Type I/O Module
- Specification
Name Specification
Basic module A03B-0823-C001
Expansion module A A03B-0823-C002
Expansion module B A03B-0823-C003
Expansion module C A03B-0823-C004
Expansion module D A03B-0823-C005
- Connector and LED mounting location

Basic module A03B-0823-C001
As seen from A in figure at left.

A (See figure at right.)
DI/DO status display LED
CA105
T2
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
T4 CP11A 24-VDC power supply input
CP11B 24-VDC power supply output
JD1A Second I/O link stage
JD1B First I/O link stage
T3 CA105 Expansion module connection
JD1A T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
T3 DI terminal board with yellow label
T4 DI terminal board with pink label
CP11A
JD1B
LED displays
CP11B LED Description

PWR Lights when power is on.
Power supply status DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights when DO is on.
display LED Fuse, 2 A DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Lights when DI is on.
- 421 -
Expansion module A A03B-0823-C002

CA105
CA106
T2
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
JA3 MPG interface
(to next-stage expansion module)
CA106 Expansion module connection
(to previous-stage basic module)
T3 T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
JA3
T2 DO terminal board with lime green
label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
DO 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights when DO is on.
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Lights when DI is on.
- 422 -
Expansion module B A03B-0823-C003

A (See figure at right.) CA105
CA106
T2
T1
Connector Use
/terminal
T4 board
number
(to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
DI 0 to 7 (3 bytes) Lights when DI is on.
- 423 -
Expansion module C A03B-0823-C004

DO status display LED (green)
DO alarm display LED (red)

CA105
CA106
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
T2
(to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 DO terminal board with aqua label
T2 DO terminal board with lime green label
Rotary switch
LED displays
LED Description
ALARM 0 to 7 (2 bytes) Lights to indicate an alarm.
- 424 -
Expansion module D A03B-0823-C005

CA105
CA106
T1
Connector
/terminal
Use
board
number
T2
（to previous-stage basic or expansion
module)
T1 Analog input CH1 and CH2 terminal board
with yellow label
T2 Analog input CH3 and CH4 terminal board
with pink label
Rotary switch
- 425 -
Alarm detection function of expansion module C

The DO driver for expansion module C has overvoltage protection and
broken-wire detection functions as well as the same overheat
protection (overcurrent and temperature protection) function as for the
basic module and expansion modules A and B. The protection circuit
is provided for each DO1 bit.
If any of these functions operates, the corresponding bit of the LED
"ALARM" of the module lights.
The following table lists the output status of each LED or DO when
the protection functions operate.
- Status when the protection functions operate

DO status DO alarm
PMC Module DO DO alarm LED
Status display LED information allotted
output output (red)
(green) to DI area
Normal operation 0 OFF Does not light. Does not light. 0
1 ON Lights. Does not light. 0
Overheat protection 0 OFF Does not light. Does not light. 0
function operated 1 OFF Does not light. Lights. 1
Overvoltage protection 0 OFF Does not light. Lights. 1
function operated 1 OFF Does not light. Does not light. 0
Broken-wire detected 0 OFF Does not light. Does not light. 0
1 ON Lights. Lights. 1
NOTE
1 If the overheat or overvoltage protection function
mentioned above operates, the corresponding DO
bit is kept off until the cause is removed. Once the
cause is removed, the DO bit becomes on even if
the system is not restarted.
2 Broken-wire detection is performed by monitoring
the current flowing through a load connected when
the DO is on with an output device in the module. If
the detected current becomes about 100 mA or
lower, it is assumed that a broken wire has been
detected. For this reason, if a light load (such as an
LED) is connected, a broken wire is detected,
resulting in a DO alarm condition. However, unlike
the other protection functions, the broken-wire
detection function does not cause the DO to
become off. In addition, if a connected condition is
resumed after a broken-wire condition is detected,
the broken-wire condition can be removed even if
the system is not restarted.
- 426 -
5.7 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
LCD with a touch panel

The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For
this operation, be sure to use a FANUC-supplied pen
(A02B-0236-K111) dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp-pointed
pen is used, for example, to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface
may be flawed or damaged. Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen
directly with a finger. Otherwise, the operability of the LCD
may deteriorate, and the LCD screen may get dirty.
Protection sheet for the touch panel

A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel
to protect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection
sheet is damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a
consumable part.)
Replacing the protection sheet
• Materials used
(1) Protection sheet
A02B-0236-K110 : For 10.4" LCD with touch panel
(2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off =
detergent for kitchen can be used)
(3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
• Replacement procedure
(1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the
touch panel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface with
alcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface
of the touch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still
left on the surface. Remove oil completely.
If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch
panel, the protection sheet cannot adhere to the panel
completely and will sometimes peel off easily.
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
- 427 -
(2) Applying the protection sheet

<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to the
backing sheet).
Fold
<2> Peel off the backing sheet.

<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sides of
the sheet first. Check that the sides of the protection sheet
do not touch the escutcheon.
OK NG
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheet while
pushing out air between the touch panel and protection
sheet.
With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to the
touch panel, do not attempt to correct the position of
the protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the
entire sheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of the
protection sheet do not float.
(3) Checks after replacement

<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the
protection sheet.
<2> After power-on, check that there is no touch panel portion
kept pressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takes
place.
Touch panel calibration

- Conditions that require calibration
Touch panel calibration is needed under the following conditions:
(1) The LCD unit was replaced.
(2) The touch panel was replaced.
(3) The touch panel control printed-circuit board was replaced.
(4) Memory all clear was performed.
- 428 -
- Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 DCL

[Data type] Bit
#5 DCL The touch panel compensation screen is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Set this parameter to 0 usually. Touch panel compensation becomes
necessary only when the panel is replaced or memory all clear
operation is performed. Set this parameter to 1 only when performing
touch panel compensation. Upon completion of compensation, set this
parameter to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 DDS

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#2 DDS The touch panel is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily, for
example, at start-up time.
- Calibration method
Calibration procedure
<1> Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of
parameter No. 3113 to 1.)
<2> Press function key .

<3> Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH
PANEL] soft key is displayed.
- 429 -
<4> Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key.
The [TP CAL] soft key is displayed.
<5> Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key causes a full-screen touch panel
calibration screen to appear.
<6> Click the 9 calibration points with a stylus pen. The marker of a
normally clicked point changes from "+" to "o". If you fail to
click right on a "+" mark, the message "Your stylus pen is not
right on a "+" mark. Click again." appears.
- 430 -
<7> After clicking all 9 calibration points, clicking the key

completes calibration. To quit or retry calibration, click the
key. The previous screen appears again. Before
clicking 9 calibration points, clicking the key aborts

calibration.
<8> When calibration ends normally, the message "Calibration
ended" appears.
<9> After completing calibration, disable the touch panel calibration
screen (by resetting the DCL parameter (bit 5 of parameter No.
3113) to 0) to prevent operation mistake.
- 431 -
5.8 SETTING I/O MODULES
5.8.1 Distributed I/O Setting

By changing the setting (rotary switch) on an expansion module, a
connection can be made to skip an expansion module or expansion
modules as shown below.
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1
skipped skipped and 2 are skipped
Method of setting (control and setting method)

A control (rotary switch) is provided on the location shown below of
each expansion module. When changing the setting, turn the rotary
switch with a flat-blade screwdriver with a tip diameter of about 2.5
mm.
- 432 -
Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as indicated
below.
Setting
Indication Meaning of setting
position
Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this position at
0 0 the time of shipment from FANUC.
This setting is not skipped an expansion module.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
1 -
when the one preceding expansion module is skipped.
Set the rotary switch of an expansion module to this position
2 2
when the two preceding expansion modules are skipped.
3 - Setting prohibited
4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.
4, -, 6, -,
5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
4 to F 8, -, A, -,
6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
C, -, E, -,
7, B, or F has the effect of 3. (← setting prohibited)
Examples of setting
(When expansion module 1 is skipped)

Set the rotary switch of expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
to setting position = 1. Do not change the

setting (setting position = 0) of expansion
Basic module
module 3.

Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3

module 1.
Basic module
(When expansion module 1 and expansion

module 2 are skipped)
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
to setting position = 2.
Basic module
- 433 -
This function was not available initially, but was recently added. This
function became available, depending on the type of module, as
indicated below.
Expansion module B (DI/DO = 24/16, A03B-0815-C003 Available starting with

without a manual pulse generator shipment in June 1998 and
interface) later
Expansion module C (DO = 16, 24A A03B-0815-C004 Available starting with
output) shipment in August 1998
and later
Expansion module D (analog input) A03B-0815-C005 Available starting with
shipment in August 1998
and later
NOTE
To expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with a
manual pulse generator interface)
(A03B-0815-C002), a rotary switch is added as the
other modules are modified. However, expansion
module A is always installed at the location of
expansion module 1, so that the setting of
expansion module A need not be changed.
- 434 -
5.8.2 Terminal Type I/O Module Setting

By changing the setting (rotary switch) on an expansion module, a
connection can be made to skip an expansion module or expansion
modules as shown below.
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
Basic module
Basic module
Basic module
When expansion module 1 is When expansion module 2 is When expansion modules 1
skipped skipped and 2 are skipped
Method of setting (control and setting method)

A control (rotary switch) is provided on the location shown below of
each expansion module. When changing the setting, turn the rotary
switch with a flat-blade screwdriver with a tip diameter of about 2.5
mm.
Standard setting
Each setting position of the rotary switch has the meaning as indicated
below.
Setting
position
Standard setting. The rotary switch is set to this position at
0 0 the time of shipment from FANUC.
This setting is not skipped an expansion module.
If an expansion module is skipped, make this setting for the
1 -
one that would follow the skipped expansion module.
- 435 -
Setting
position
If two expansion module are skipped, make this setting for
2 2 the one that would follow the second of the skipped
expansion modules.
3 - Setting prohibited
4, 8, or C has the effect of 0.
4, -, 6, -,
5, 9, or D has the effect of 1.
4 to F 8, -, A, -,
6, A, or E has the effect of 2.
C, -, E, -,
7, B, or F has the effect of 3. (← setting prohibited)
Rotary switch setting example

Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3 to setting position = 1. Do not change the

Basic module
module 3.

Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3

module 1.
Basic module
(When expansion module 1 and expansion

module 2 are skipped)
Expansion module 1
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 3
to setting position = 2.
Basic module
NOTE
The expansion module A (A03B-0823-C002 with
manual Pulsecoder I/F) is always installed in a
location for expansion module 1, the setting need
not be changed.
- 436 -
5.9 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS
WARNING
Before replacement of a blown fuse, the cause of
the blown fuse must be corrected. So, fuse
replacement work must be done only by a person
who is trained in the related maintenance and
safety requirements. When opening the cabinet
and replacing a fuse inside, be careful not to touch
the high-voltage circuits (marked with and fitted
with an insulating cover). Touching the uncovered
high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.
For the specification of the fuse of each unit, see the list of
consumables in Appendix B, “LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS.”
- 437 -
- Fuse mounting location on the connector panel I/O modules
Fuse
Expansion module 3
Expansion module 2
Expansion module 1
Basic module
Cable for the I/O Link (A03B-0815-C001)
Cable for a manual pulse generator
NOTE
No fuse is provided on the expansion modules. A
fuse is provided on the basic module only.
- 438 -
- Fuse mounting location on the connector panel I/O modules (type-II)
Connector for the I/O Link Fuse
Inter-module connection
flat cable
Connector for the I/O Link
Connector for a manual pulse generator

Expansion module
Basic module
NOTE
- 439 -
- Fuse mounting location on the operator's panel I/O modules
I/O connector
JD1A
JD1B
JA3
Fuse
Power supply connector
This drawing is for A20B-2002-0470, A20B-2002-0520, and A20B-2002-
0521.
- Fuse mounting location on the separate detector interface unit
Power supply
connector
Optical
Fuse connector
- 440 -
- Fuse mounting location on the I/O Link-AS-i converter
LED
Setting switch
Fuse
7-segment LED
AS-i
block
Terminal
JD1A JD1B
- 441 -
- Fuse mounting location on the terminal type I/O modules

Basic module
Fuse
NOTE
- 442 -
- Fuse mounting location on the machine operator’s panel
Fuse
Cover
NOTE
- 443 -
5.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE CABINET
The control units and various peripheral units supplied from FANUC
are designed assuming that those units are accommodated in enclosed
cabinets. The cabinets mentioned here include:
• Cabinet that is manufactured by a machine tool builder to house

control units and peripheral units
• Operation pendant that is manufactured by a machine tool
builder to house control units and an operator's panel
• Similar products
The table below indicates the environment conditions for installing

control units in these cabinets.
Display LCD-mounted
Display
type control unit and
Condition stand-alone type
display unit (excluding
control unit
units with a data server)
Operating 0 °C to 58 °C 0 °C to 55 °C
Ambient Storage and
-20 °C to 60 °C
temperature transportation
of units Change in
0.3 °C/minute max.
temperature
Relative humidity: 75% or less
Normal
No condensation
Humidity
Short term (not Relative humidity: 95% or less
exceeding 1 month) No condensation
0.5 G or less
The evaluation test is performed under the
following conditions.
10 to 58Hz : 0.075 mm (amplitude)
Operating
Vibration 58 to 500Hz : 1 G
Direction of vibration: Each of X, Y, and Z
Sweep frequency: 10 cycles
The test conforms to IEC60068–2–6.
Non-operating 1.0 G or less
Height above Operating Up to 1000m (Note)
sea level Non-operating Up to 12000m
The control units shall be kept from direct
Atmosphere exposure to coolant, lubricant, and chippings.
There shall be no corrosive gas.
- 444 -
NOTE
When the CNC is installed at a height of more than
1000 m above the sear level, a restriction is
imposed on the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC inside the cabinet.
For every 100 m rise from 1000 m above the sea
level, decrease the maximum allowable ambient
temperature for the CNC by 1.0°C.
Example:
The maximum allowable ambient temperature for
the CNC inside the cabinet installed at a height of
1750 m above the sea level is determined as
follows:
55°C - 1750/100 × 1.0°C = 47.5°C
So, the allowable ambient temperature range is
0°C to 47.5°C.
When a hard disk is used, the following restrictions
are imposed on the height of installation:
Height above the sea level for operation:
-60 m to 3000 m
Height above the sea level for non-operation:
-60 m to 12000 m
- 445 -
5.11 COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE
The CNC is becoming increasingly smaller as the surface mount

technology and custom LSI technology advance.
In many cases, as the CNC becomes more compact, the mounting
locations of its constituent units become closer to a noise source in the
power magnetics cabinet.
In general, noise is generated by electrostatic coupling,
electromagnetic induction, or a grounding loop, and is induced into
the CNC.
The CNC incorporates sufficient countermeasures against external
noise. However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of
noise quantitatively, and many unknown factors are involved. So, to
improve the operation stability of a CNC machine tool system, noise
generation must be minimized, and the induction of generated noise
into the CNC must be suppressed.
For design of equipment including a power magnetics cabinet, take
these countermeasures on the machine side against noise into
consideration.
5.11.1 Grounding
Grounding the power magnetics cabinet and devices is very important
to prevent an electric shock and suppress a noise influence. The
following describes the grounding methods for suppressing the noise
influence.
5.11.1.1 Grounding types

The CNC system uses the following three types of grounding:
(1) Signal grounding

This type of grounding is used to supply a reference potential (0
V) for the electrical signal system.
(2) Frame grounding
This type of grounding is used for safety reasons as well as to
suppress external and internal noise. For example, grounding is
provided for the device frames, panels, and shielding on the
interface cables connecting the devices.
(3) System grounding (PE)
This type of grounding is used to connect frame grounds, which
are provided for the individual devices or between the units, to
the ground as a system at a single point.
- 446 -
5.11.1.2 Grounding methods

Typically, noise that becomes a problem is high–frequency noise. To
suppress high–frequency noise, it is important that the devices are
grounded at low impedance (Note).
The grounding schemes for this purpose are described below.
(1) Multipoint grounding scheme
In this grounding scheme, when grounded at sufficiently low
impedance, the cabinet metal plates are used as ground plates, to
which grounding is provided in the vicinity of each device.
This scheme has a great effect of suppressing high–frequency
noise because it enables grounding to the low–impedance metal
plates of the cabinet in the shortest distance. However, the noise
suppression effect depends on the cabinet structure because the
cabinet metal plates are used as ground plates.
See Subsection 5.11.1.4 for the cabinet. Fig. 5.11.1.2 (a) is a
schematic wiring diagram.
When the multipoint grounding scheme is adopted, the units can
be grounded at low impedance, and ground wires can be
shortened, so that wiring may be simplified.
(2) Single–point grounding scheme
In this grounding scheme, grounding separation is achieved
between the signal system and power system, and grounding is
provided at a single point to suppress the noise influence of the
power system on the signal system.
This scheme tends to need longer connection wires for grounding
the devices. To produce a sufficient effect of suppressing
high–frequency noise, it is therefore necessary to use
larger–diameter wires or use two or more wires for each
connection. Fig. 5.11.1.2 (b) is a schematic wiring diagram.
NOTE
Impedance includes a resistance component that
converts electric current to heat as well as a
component called "reactance", and indicates a
characteristic of resistance to the flow of
alternating current at a certain frequency.
- 447 -
Servo unit
Ground bar for

shield clamp
CX1A JF*
Provide grounding in CNC
the vicinity of a
device
24V power
supply Operator’s panel
- 448 -
AC input Connection at low
impedance Pendant box
(Low-impedance metal plates)
Signal line
Power
line
Cabinet
(Low-impedance metal plates) Machine side
Fig. 5.11.1.2 (a) Schematic diagram for multipoint grounding scheme

System grounding (PE) Frame grounding
Separate the signal line and power
Note) Do not apply a coating to the connection surface
of a ground wire. line when routing them. System grounding (PE)
B-63945EN/03
Cabinet Servo unit Pendant box
B-63945EN/03
Achieve grounding Ground bar for

separation between shield clamp
CX1A JF*
the signal system and
CNC
power system.
24V power Power system ground

supply bar Operator’s panel
- 449 -
AC input
Signal system ground bar
Signal line
Power
Signal system ground bar line
Machine side
Fig. 5.11.1.2 (b) Schematic diagram for single-point grounding scheme

System grounding (PE) Frame grounding
Separate the signal line and
power line when routing them. System grounding (PE)
5.11.1.3 Cable clamp and shield processing

Signal lines basically require shield clamps. The influence of external
noise can be suppressed by properly providing the signal lines with
the shield clamps.
Partially peel the sheath off a cable and expose the shield, and press
the exposed portion against the ground bar with the clamp. Care
should be taken so that the ground bar and shield have a surface
contact in a larger area. (See the figure below.)
When the multipoint grounding scheme is used, care should be taken
so that the ground bar for the shield clamp and cabinet are connected
at low impedance by, for example, preventing the cabinet side contact
surface from being coated.
Grand bar
Cable
Clamp
40mm-80mm
Fig. 5.11.1.3 (a) Cable clamp (1)
- 450 -
Mounting plate
of the machine
Control unit
Ground plate
Clamp
Shield cover
Fig. 5.11.1.3 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare a ground plate as shown below.
Ground terminal
(to be connected to
ground)
Clamp mounting hole
Mounting hole
Fig. 5.11.1.3 (c) Ground plate
For a ground plate, use an iron plate that is as thick as 2 mm or more

and is plated with nickel.
- 451 -
Ground plate
8mm
12
mm
20mm
Fig. 5.11.1.3 (d) Ground plate hole diagram
Reference: Outline drawing of the clamp
Up to 55mm
28mm
6
mm
17mm
Fig. 5.11.1.3 (e) Outline drawing of clamp
Ordering code of the clamp:

A02B-0124-K001 (set of 8 clamps)
- 452 -
5.11.1.4 Cabinet
A cabinet is an important element in improving noise immunity and
suppressing radiated noise. One of the causes of problems related to
noise immunity and radiated noise is faulty electrical continuity
between the metal plates that make up the cabinet. Typically, noise
that becomes a problem is high-frequency noise, against which
measures must be taken in the cabinet design.
(1) Basic cabinet structure

A cabinet should basically be made of metal.
To improve noise immunity, there must be low-impedance
electrical continuity between the metal plates that make up the
cabinet, which are the side plates, top plate, and bottom plate,
and a welding-type cabinet structure is recommended.
As for a cabinet welding method, bead welding is more suitable
than spot welding for providing low-impedance electrical
continuity between the metal plates.
For an assembly-type cabinet structure, provide electrical
continuity by bringing the metal plates into direct contact with
each other, without applying a coating to their joint surface areas.
In a structure that has the metal plates connected only with wires
because of structural constraints, low-impedance connections are
more difficult to make than in a structure in which welding is
made or the metal plates are brought into direct contact with each
other. It is necessary to maintain sufficient levels of items such as
the cross-sectional area of a wire to use, continuity of
connections, and contact areas.
Bead welding Bring the metal plates into direct contact with each
other, without applying a coating to their joint areas.
NOTE
For improved noise immunity, how to provide
low-impedance electrical continuity in the cabinet is
described here. To construct a protective circuit, a
protective grounding connection must be made
between the metal plates by using electric wires with a
cross-sectional area appropriate for the AC input power
capacity of the unit mounted on each metal plate.
- 453 -
(2) Mounting units on the cabinet

The shortest possible lengths of unit ground wires should be used
to make connections. A ground wire with a small conductor
diameter causes impedance to high-frequency noise to become
particularly higher, leading to an insufficient grounding effect.
For the location of the ground terminal of each unit, refer to the
manual relevant to the unit. The following shows the
recommended method by which the metal plate with the unit
mounted is installed on the cabinet. Care should be taken so that
the cabinet and metal plate are connected to each other on their
broad areas with no coating. It is not recommended that electrical
continuity be provided only by screws, because impedance to
high frequency cannot be sufficiently low.
<Good example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit
Shortest connection Continuity on areas

with thick ground wire with no coating
<Bad example>
Cabinet
Metal
plate
Unit
Continuity only by screw Thin ground wire,

in a coated area long ground wire
- 454 -
5.11.2 Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit
Connecting the 0 V output in the CNC to a protective circuit (ground)

The IEC 204-1 and JIS B 6015 standards specify the following:
• Protection against malfunctions due to ground faults
"To make the control circuit prevent malfunctions of a machine tool
due to a ground fault and not to prevent the machine tool from
stopping, either of the ground and electronic circuits shall be
connected to a protective circuit."
Note that for each FANUC CNC, the 0V output in the CNC is
connected to a protective circuit (ground).
Machine
24 VDC power
Power supply
magnetics
Output
cabinet
signal
Relay
NC ground terminal
Machine protective circuit (ground) network
Connection to the ground in the user factory
This bold line indicates grounding for the control unit described in the connection manual.
As shown in this figure, by just connecting the ground terminal of the control unit to the machine ground,
the 0 V output of the relay circuit in the power magnetics cabinet is connected to the ground (protective
circuit).
- 455 -
Connecting the ground terminal of an LCD-mounted type control unit
Connect the 0-V line in the control unit with the ground plate of the
cabinet or a nearby plate via the protective grounding terminal (see
above figure).
- 456 -
Connecting the ground terminal of a stand-alone type control unit

For 2-slot rack For 4-slot rack
Signal ground
terminal (Faston
terminal)
Ground cable
2
2 mm or more Grounding plate of
the cabinet
PE
Connect the 0-V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to
the ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B-0166-K330).
- 457 -
5.11.3 Separating Signal Lines

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in
the following table.
Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group Signal line Action

A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A
Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from
AC/DC power lines (containing groups B and C, or cover
the power lines for the servo and group A with an
spindle motors) electromagnetic shield (Note
AC/DC solenoid 2).
AC/DC relay See Subsection 5.11.4 and
connect spark killers or diodes
with the solenoid and relay.
B DC solenoid (24 VDC) Connect diodes with the DC
DC relay (24 VDC) solenoid and relay.
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit Bind the cables in group B
and power magnetics cabinet separately from group A, or
DI/DO cable between the I/O unit cover group B with an
and machine electromagnetic shield.
24 VDC input power cables Separate group B as far from
connected to the control unit and group C as possible.
its peripherals It is desirable to perform
shield processing.
C Cable between the CNC and I/O Bind the cables in group C
unit separately from group A, or
Cable for position and velocity cover group C with an
feedback electromagnetic shield.
Cable between the CNC and Separate group C as far from
spindle amplifier group B as possible.
Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield
Cable for the manual pulse processing as described in
generator Subsection 5.11.1.3.
Cable between the CNC and the
MDI (Note 3)
RS-232C and RS-422 interface
cable
Cable for the battery
Other cables for which shield
processing is specified
NOTE
1 Binding the cables in one group separately from
another means that the groups are placed 10 cm or
more apart from one another.
2 Covering a group with an electromagnetic shield
means that shielding is provided between groups
with grounded steel plates.
3 The shield is not required when the cable between
the CNC and MDI is no more than 30 cm in length.
- 458 -
Power magnetics cabinet

Operator's cabinet
24 VDC Spindle Servo I/O CNC

power amplifier amplifier unit control
supply unit
To motor
etc. Duct
Cables in group A Cables in groups B, C
Section of duct
Group A Groups B, C
Cover
- 459 -
5.11.4 Noise Suppressor

The AC/DC solenoid, AC/DC relay, and other devices are used in the
power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices
are turned on or off.
This pulse voltage is induced through a cable or any other component,
causing the electronic circuits to be disturbed.
Take the following measures against the pulse voltage:
1) See Subsection 5.11.1.3 for groups A and B, and use spark killers
for AC circuits or diodes for DC circuits.
2) See "Notes on selecting the spark killer" below for information
about selection of spark killers or diodes.
Notes on selecting the spark killer

• Use a CR-type spark killer. (Use it for AC circuits.)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak pulse voltage, but
cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends the use of a CR-type spark killer.)
• The reference CR values of the spark killer shall conform to the
following based on the current ((I (A)) and DC resistance of the
coil in the stationary state:
1) Resistance (R): Equivalent of the DC resistance of the coil
2 2
2) Capacitance (C): I to I (µF)
10 20
I : Current of the coil in the stationary state [A]
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
Spark killer
AC
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Mount the spark killer near a motor or a relay coil.
NOTE
Use a CR-type noise suppressor. A varistor-type
noise suppressor is useful in clamping the peak
pulse voltage, but cannot suppress the sudden rise
of the pulse voltage.
- 460 -
Diode (use it for DC circuits)
+
Diode
Select a diode which can withstand a

DC relay voltage about twice the applied voltage and
a current about twice the applied current.
- 461 -
5.11.5 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning

To protect the devices from surge voltages due to lightening, it is
recommended to install surge-absorbing elements between the lines of
the input power and between one line and ground. This does not,
however, assure protection from all surges due to lightening.
The recommended items are as follows. (Items made by Okaya
Denki Sangyo Co.)
For the 200-V system

Between lines R⋅A⋅V-781BYZ-2
Between line and ground R⋅A⋅V-781BXZ-4
For the 400-V system

Between lines R⋅A⋅V-152BYZ-2A
Between line and ground R⋅A⋅V-801BXZ-4
Installation procedure
The surge-absorbing elements used for measures against surges due to
lightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the
figure below. The figure below shows an example in which an
insulating transformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an
insulating transformer is installed, surge-absorbing element 2
(between line and ground) is not required.
- 462 -
Notes
(1) For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy
line must be as short as possible.
Wire Size: The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or
greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for
the connection of surge-absorbing element
1 and that (b) of surge-absorbing element 2
must be 2 m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages
(1000 VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove
surge-absorbing element 2. Otherwise, the overvoltages would
activate the element.
(3) The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a
surge voltage exceeding the capacity of the surge-absorbing
elements is applied and the surge-absorbing elements are
short-circuited.
(4) Because no current flows through surge-absorbing elements 1
and 2 during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be
shared by other electric devices on the machine. It can be used
with the control power supply of the servo unit power supply
module or with the power supply for the fan motor of the spindle
motor.
- 463 -
5.12 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS
(1) When the voltage of the battery for absolute Pulsecoders

becomes low, DS alarms 306 to 308 occur.
(2) When DS alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery
becomes low) occurs, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used.
(3) If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, DS alarm 306
(battery zero alarm) occurs. In this case, the current positions for
the Pulsecoders can no longer be maintained.
In this state, DS alarm 300 (reference position return request
alarm) occurs. Return the tool to the reference position after
replacing the battery.
(4) The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are
used in a six-axis configuration with αi/βi series servo motors
and one year if they are used in a six-axis configuration with α/β
series servo motors. FANUC recommends that you replace the
batteries periodically according to the battery service life.
(5) To connect the battery, use the battery case or incorporate the
battery into the servo amplifier. Note that the attachment method
of the battery depends on the connection method and the type of
servo amplifier.
- Replacing batteries
To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from
being lost, turn on the machine power before replacing the battery.
The replacement procedure is described below. (Note: The turning-on
step is not required when the αi series servo motor or βis series servo
motor (βiS 0.4 to βiS 22) is used.)
<1> Turn the servo unit (machine) on.

<2> Place the machine in the emergency stop state.
<3> Confirm that servo motors are not active.
<4> Make sure the DC link charge LED is off.
<5> Remove the old battery and then attach a new one.
<6> Now, replacement has been completed. The system power can be
turned off.
- 464 -
NOTE
The absolute Pulsecoder of the αi/βi (βiS 0.4 to βiS
22) series servo motor is incorporated with a
backup capacitor as standard. This backup
capacitor enables an absolute position detection to
be continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no
zero point return need be performed if the time
during which servo amplifier power is kept off for
battery replacement is within 10 minutes. If battery
replacement takes 10 minutes or more, the power
must remain turned on.
CAUTION
1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch
bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be
careful not to touch any high-voltage circuits due to
the electric shock hazard.
2 Before replacing the battery, make sure the DC link
charge LED is off. Otherwise, an electric shock may
be received.
3 Be sure to use the specified battery. If another type
of battery is used, it may overheat, blow out, or
catch fire.
4 Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
5 During attachment of the battery, insert the
factory-attached protection socket into the CX5X or
CX5Y connector, whichever is not used. If the +6 V
pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may
overheat, blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute
position information in absolute Pulsecoders may
be lost.
- 465 -
- Replacing D-size alkaline dry cells in the battery case

Replace four D-size alkaline batteries (A06B-6050-K061) in the
battery case installed in the machine.
<1> Have four D-size alkaline batteries on hand.
<2> Loosen the screws on the battery case. Remove the cover.
<3> Replace the alkaline batteries in the case. Pay careful attention to
the polarity of the alkaline batteries.
<4> Attach the cover.
Screws
Cover
CAUTION
Install the battery with correct polarity. If the battery
is installed with incorrect polarity, it may overheat,
blow out, or catch fire. Or, absolute position
information in absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
- 466 -
- Attaching the built-in battery (αi series servo amplifier)

Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6073-K001) to the servo amplifier.
[Attachment procedure]
(1) Remove a battery cover from the servo amplifier.
(2) Attach the battery as shown below.
(3) Re-attach the cover.
(4) Connect the connector of battery with CX5X of the servo
amplifier.
SVM
Inserting way
Cable side
Red: +6V
Connector Black: 0V
Battery
CX5X, CX5Y
Battery cover
+6V
0V
CAUTION
Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.
- Attaching the built-in battery (β series servo amplifier)
Attach the lithium battery (A06B-6093-K001) to the servo amplifier.
[Attachment procedure]
(1) In case of SVU-12 or SVU-20, remove the battery cover under
the servo amplifier grasping its left and right sides. In case of
SVU-40 or SVU-80, remove the cover attached on right side of
the servo amplifier grasping its upper and lower sides.
(2) Remove the connector of battery. (Connector CX5X or CX5Y)
(3) Replace the battery and connect the connector.
(4) Mount the battery cover.
- 467 -
Battery
Battery cover
SVU-12, SVU-20
Battery Battery cover
Pass the battery cable to this slit.
SVU-40, SVU-80
CAUTION
1 The connector of the battery can be connected with
either of CX5X and CX5Y.
2 Attaching the battery from the cable outlet applies
tension to the cable. Therefore, attach the cable
from another place to prevent the cable from being
stretched. If this cable is connected on a stretch
condition, a bad conductivity may be occurred.
- Used batteries
Old batteries should be disposed as "INDUSTRIAL WASTES"
according to the regulations of the country or autonomy where your
machine has been installed.
- 468 -
5.13 ATTACHING AND DETACHING LCD/MDI UNITS
The 30i series LCD units (except the 15" LCD type) and MDI units
are fastened with screws from the front surface. The screws are
covered with screw caps.
5.13.1 Detaching
Slot
Screw caps (4 places)
<1> Pull out each screw cap by inserting a precision flat-blade

screwdriver into their slot.
<2> Rotate each screw under the screw cap to detach the unit.
- 469 -
5.13.2 Attaching
ＡＢ
ＢＡ
ＡＢ
Only the type-A screw cap has a

boss (for discrimination purposes).
<1> Fasten the four corners with screws.

<2> There are two types of screw caps. Attach each type as shown
above. Push them in until their top surface becomes flushed
with the unit surface while paying attention to their orientation.
NOTE
If a screw cap is lost or damaged, order spares,
using the following ordering information:
A02B-0303-K190 :
A set of 100 type-A screw caps and 100 type-B
screw caps
A02B-0303-K191 :
A set of 80 type-A screw caps and 100 type-B
screw caps
- 470 -
5.14 CAUTIONS IN REPLACING PCB’S
The following basic units of the FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL

A support the "FANUC Remote Option System" in June 2006 and on.
So, the optional parameter management method for them has been
altered accordingly.
There are several cautions that should be observed in replacing printed
circuit boards. Follow the replacement procedure below.
The change applies to the basic units listed below.

Model Basic unit
Series 30i/300i/300is-A A02B-0303-B520,B521,B522
A02B-0303-B620,B621,B622
A02B-0303-B822,B824
Series 31i/310i/310is-A5 A02B-0306-B520,B521,B522
A02B-0306-B620,B621,B622
A02B-0306-B822,B824
A02B-0307-B620,B621,B622
A02B-0307-B822,B824
A02B-0308-B620,B621,B622
A02B-0308-B822,B824
PCB replacement procedure

1) The new management method holds optional parameters as an
optional information file (under the name of OPRM INF) in
FROM.
Before replacing a printed-circuit board, back up the optional
information file as well as SRAM data and user files as usual.
If the optional information is corrupted during replacement, the
backed-up data will become necessary in recovery work.
2) As usual, after replacing a printed-circuit board, restore the
SRAM data and user files as required.
3) If the FROM/SRAM module is replaced, it is necessary to restore
the optional information file that was held in the FROM module.
Use the data backed up at step 1). Once restoration is finished,
alarm PS5523 "Option authentication wait state" will occur when
the power is turned on. It is necessary to access FANUC’s web
site and perform optional parameter authentication work with the
"FANUC Remote Option System" within the period of validity
(within 30 days since the occurrence of the alarm). (Within the
period of validity, alarm PS5523 can be canceled by a reset.)
4) Replacing a printed-circuit board may result in a change to the
CNC ID number. Check it on the CNC screen. If it is
different from one described on the data sheet, correct the data
sheet.
- 471 -
6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B-63945EN/03
6 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the
parameters, the part programs and the tool offset values.
6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT ................200

6.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA.......................................202
- 472 -
B-63945EN/03 6.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA
6.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
Setting procedure of parameters

Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3.
1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

2 Press function key several times or press soft key
[SETTING] to display SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3 Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press and
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.
4 Press function key several times to display the following

screen.
PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234 N12345
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL To make the cursor
display in bit unit,
S 0 T0000 press the cursor key
REF **** *** *** 10: 15: 30 or .
[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is

displayed.
<1> Soft key [NO. SRH] :
Searched by number.
Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].
<2> Soft key [ON : 1] :
Item with cursor position is set to 1 (bit parameter)
<3> Soft key [OFF : 0] :
Item with cursor position is set to 0 (bit parameter)
<4> Soft key [+INPUT] :
Input value is added to the value at cursor (word type)
<5> Soft key [INPUT] :
Input value is replaced with the value at cursor (word type)
<6> Soft key [READ] :
Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface.
<7> Soft key [PUNCH] :
Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface.
- 473 -
6 After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE

on the SETTING screen to 0. Press to release alram 100.
7 Convenient method
<1> To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key
or , then the cursor becomes bit length and you can

set parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).
<2> To set data consecutively, use key.
(Ex.1)
This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 1234
0 ⇒ 4567
0 9999
0 0
(Ex.2)
0 1234
0 ⇒ 0
0 9999
0 0
<3> To set the same data sequentially, press = .
(Ex.1)
0 1234
0 ⇒ 1234
0 1234
0 0
<4> Bit parameters can be set as follows:

(Ex.1)
00000000 00011000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0⇒ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000 00011000
00000000 00000000
8 After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE
to 0.
- 474 -
6.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA
The CNC memorized the following data.

Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally.
(1) CNC paramter
(2) PMC parameter
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)
6.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output

Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.
Parameters required for output are as follows :
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output devices
made by FANUC. Change these settings according to the unit you
actually use.
(Parameter can be changed in MDI mode or emergency stop status.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO
ISO 0: Output with EIA code
1: Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)
0020 Selection of I/O channel

(*) 0 : Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
1: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
4: Memory card interface
NOTE
An operation example shown here assumes that
data input/ output is performed with an input/output
unit connected to the JD56A. (I/O channel = 0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output when data is output.
1: Feed is not output when data is output.
ASI (*) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1: ASCII code is used.
SB2 0: No. of stop bits is 1.
(*) 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
- 475 -
0102 Number specified fot the input/output device
Set value Input/output device

0 RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232-C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud Rate

1: 50 7: 600 11: 9600
3: 110 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
4: 150 9: 2400
6: 300 (*)10:4800
6.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters

1 Enter EDIT mode or the emergency stop condition.
2 Press function key and soft key [PARAMETER] to select
a parameter screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are
started to be output.
6.2.3 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press the function key and continuous menu key
several times, then press [PITCH] to select the pitch error
compensation setting screen.
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error
compensation amount is started to be output.
- 476 -
6.2.4 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values

When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable No. 500
and later are output.
2 Press continuous menu key and soft key [MACRO] to
select custom macro variable screen.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro
variable values are output.
6.2.5 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Press function key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the
tool compensation amount screen.
3 Press [(OPRT)] key and continuous menu key .
4 Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool
compensation amount is started to be output.
6.2.6 Outputting Part Program

1 Confirm the following parameters. If this parameter is set to 1,
rather than the value indicated by l, change to MDI mode and
then reset to 0.
However, if you changed the parameter setting, restore the
original value after finishing this work.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s are edited.
1: Programs of 9000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s are edited.
1: Programs of 8000s can be protected.
(Protected programs are not output.)
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to
display program text.
4 Press [(OPRT)] key and press continuous menu key .
5 Input a program number to be output. To output all programs
input as:
6 Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.
- 477 -
6.2.7 Inputting CNC Parameters

1 Set to the emergency stop state.
2 Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
In addition, (*) indicates the standard setting for input/output
devices made by FANUC. Change these settings according to the
unit you actually use.
<1> Press function key several times, and press
[SETING] to display SETTING screen.
<2> Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
<3> Press function key to select the parameter screen.
<4>
0020 Selection of I/O channel
(*) 0: Channel 1 (JD56A of mother board)
4: Memory card interface
<5>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
NFD 0: Feed is output when punching out.
1: Feed is not output when punching out.
ASI 0: EIA or ISO code is used.
1: ASCII code is used.
(*) 1: No. of stop bits is 2.
<6>
0102 Specification number of I/O device
Set value Input/output device

0 RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
4 RS-232-C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
FANUC PPR
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
<7>
0103 Baud rate
1: 50 7: 600 11: 9600
3: 110 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
4: 150 9: 2400
6: 300 (*)10:4800
- 478 -
3 Press continuous menu key .

4 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters
are started.
5 Upon completion of parameter input, turn off the power then turn
on the power again.
6 Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse
coder. In such a case, perform reference position return again.
- 479 -
6.2.8 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount

1 Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.
2 Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
3 Press function key and soft key [PROGRAM] to display
program contents.
4 Press function key several times, soft key [PARAM],
continuous menu key and [PITCH] to select the screen for
pitch error compensation amount.
5 Press the function key and continuous menu key
7 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8 After data has been input, press function key twice to
display the SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER
WRITE to 0.
6.2.9 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values

* If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input
the variable values.
1 Select EDIT mode.

2 Press function key then soft key [PROGRAM] to display
program contents.
3 Press the function key and press continuous menu key
5 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
6.2.10 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount

1 Select EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3 Press function key , and soft key [OFFSET] to display the
tool compensation amount screen.
5 Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.
- 480 -
6.2.11 Inputting Part Programs

Confirm the following parameters. If the setting is different from the
value indicated by (*), reset to the specified value only during this
work. (Change it in MDI mode).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL
NPE When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0: Regarded as the end of program.
(*) 1: Not regarded as the end of porgram.
RAL When programs are registered:
(*) 0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8
NE9 (*) 0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 9000s are protected.
NE8 (*) 0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
* For PPR, item 4 is not required.
1 Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.
2 Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3 Press function key and press soft key [PROGRAM] to
select a part program file.
4 Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.
- 481 -
6.3 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP
It is possible to back up data held in the CNC’s FROM/SRAM by

storing it automatically in the FROM, which requires no battery and to
restore the baked-up data as required. If data is lost from the CNC
due to unforeseen circumstances, this function can be used to restore
the data easily.
Also, it is possible to hold up to three occurrences of backup data.
With this function, the CNC data can be quickly switched to a
post-machine adjustment state or an arbitrary backup state.
SRAM (requires batteries)
Backup All types of data, such as

parameters and offset data, in
SRAM
FROM (requires no battery)
NC programs and directory

information
Backup data 1
Backup data 2
Restore
Backup data 3
Explanation
- Data to be backed up
Data in the CNC is backed up by storing it in the FROM, which
requires no battery.
• NC programs and directory information held in the FROM
(which requires no battery)
• Various types of data, such as parameters and offset values, held
in the SRAM (which requires batteries)
Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No.10340 to 1 enables NC programs
and directory information in the FROM to be backed up. Set this
parameter only when necessary, because the required backup time and
data storage size vary depending on the size of the programs.
Setting parameter No. 10342 enables up to 3 occurrences of backup
data to be held.
- 482 -
- Backup modes
The following three backup modes are available.
1. Automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on
2. Automatic backup occurring at intervals of a specified number of
days when the power is turned on
3. Backup started manually at an emergency stop
- Automatic backup occurring every time the power is turned on

Data in the CNC can be backed up automatically when the power is
turned on.
This mode can be used by:
• Setting bit 0 (ABP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1
• Setting parameter No. 10342 to 1 or greater
• Setting bit 2 (AAP) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 if also NC
programs and directory information in the FROM must be
backed up
- Automatic backup occurring at intervals of a specified number of days when the

power is turned on
Data in the CNC can be backed up automatically when the power is
turned on for the first time in a specified number of days since the
previous backup.
• Selecting the first backup mode (automatic backup occurring
every time the power is turned on)
• Setting parameter No. 10341 with a number of days at intervals
of which automatic backup is to be made cyclically
- Backup started manually at an emergency stop

Data in the CNC can be backed up by starting an appropriate
procedure manually in an emergency stop state. This mode makes it
possible to back up data without turning off the power for the CNC at
an arbitrary timing, such as when machining has been set up or before
a holiday.
backed up
[Backup procedure]
1. Put the machine in an emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 (EEB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1 to start backup.
This parameter becomes 0 just after the backup sequence has
started.
3. The execution status of backup can be checked with No. 1016 on
the diagnosis screen described later.
- 483 -
NOTE
It takes time since the beginning of backup till the
end of backup. So, if data being backed up is
updated, it is likely that a mismatch may occur
between the original data and backup data. When
updating data in the CNC at an emergency stop,
watch the automatic data backup in-progress signal
ATBK and perform appropriate processing.
- Backup execution status

In the backup modes used at power-on time, 10 dots “.” are used to
indicate the execution status of backup. For example, the completion
of backup is indicated with: “AUTO BACKUP : ……….END
The diagnosis screen can also be used to check the execution status of
backup as follows:
• No.1016#0 (AEX): Backup in progress
• No.1016#6 (ACM): Backup completed
• No.1016#7 (ANG): Error during backup
• No.1016#1 (DT1), #2 (DT2), #3 (DT3): Updated data
- Write-protected backup data

Factory-set or post-adjustment machine status data can be held as
write-protected backup data by specifying the number of pieces of
backup data to 2 or greater with parameter No. 10342. The first
piece of backup data is handled as write-protected backup data.
This function is enabled by:
• Setting bit 1 (ABI) of parameter No. 10340 to 1
backed up
[Backup procedure]
1. Set bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 to 1.
2. Turn the power for the CNC off and on again. When the power
is turned on, the first piece of backup data is updated
automatically, and bit 6 (EIB) of parameter No. 10340 becomes
0.
The second and third pieces of backup data are updated each time
another type of backup (automatic backup occurring every time the
power is turned on, automatic backup occurring at intervals of a
specified number of days when the power is turned on, or backup
started manually at an emergency stop) is made.
- Parity check
A parity check is made at backup. If a parity error is detected, the
backup is not completed.
- 484 -
- Restoring backed-up data

With the BOOT SYSTEM, executing the following procedure can
restore backed-up data from FROM.
1. From the BOOT’s TOP menu, select “7. SRAM DATA
UTILITY”. The following menu appears. Select ”3”.
SRAM DATA UTILITY
1.SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD )

2.SRAM RESTORE ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
3.AUTO BKUP RESTORE ( FROM -> CNC )
4. END
2. From the menu below, select data and run restore.

AUTO BACKUP DATA RESTORE
1. BACKUP DATA1 yyyy/mm/dd **:**:**

4 END
3. Exit BOOT.
Signal
Automatic data backup in-progress signal ATBK<F0520#0>
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal is "1" during automatic data backup. When updating data
in the CNC at an emergency stop, perform appropriate processing
according to the state of this signal.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0520 ATBK
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10340 EEB EIB AAP ABI ABP

[Data type] System-common type
#0 ABP Automatic data backup at power-on is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#1 ABI Overwrite-protected backup data is:

0: Regarded as invalid.
1: Regarded as valid.
#2 AAP Backup of NC programs and directory information in FROM is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 485 -
#6 EIB When the CNC is turned on next, overwrite-protected backup data is:
0: Not updated.
1: Updated.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 2 or a greater value is
set in parameter No. 10342, and bit 1 (ABI) of
parameter No. 10340 is set to 1.
#7 EEB When an emergency stop occurs, a backup operation is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when 1 or a greater value is
set in parameter No. 10342.
10341 Interval at which automatic data backup is performed periodically

[Data type] Word system-common type
[Unit of data] No unit
When automatic data backup is performed periodically, this parameter
sets the interval as the number of days. When the power is turned on
after a set number of days has passed from the date of the previous
backup, a backup operation is performed. If 0 is set in this parameter,
this function is disabled.
10342 Number of backup data items

[Data type] Byte system-common type
[Unit of data] No unit
This parameter sets the number of backup data items. If 0 is specified,
backup is not performed.
Diagnosis display
This function enables the status of backup execution to be checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1016 ANG ACM DT3 DT2 DT1 AEX
#0 AEX Indicates whether automatic data backup is being executed, as

follows:
0: Not being executed
1: Being executed
- 486 -
#1 DT1 Indicates whether data 1 has been updated in the previous backup, as
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
follows:
0: Not updated
1: Updated
#6 ACM Indicates whether automatic data backup has been executed, as

follows:
0: Not executed
1: Executed
#7 ANG Indicates whether an error has occurred in automatic data backup, as

follows:
0: Not occurred
1: Occurred
Caution
CAUTION
1 A value that can be set in parameter No. 10342
(number of occurrences of backup data held) is
limited according to the program size, SRAM
capacity, and the FROM/SRAM module used.
2 Do not turn off the power for the NC during backup
or restoration.
3 If backed-up data is restored, parameters
submitted to automatic backup are returned to the
state in which they were when backed up.
Change them as required.
- 487 -
7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B-63945EN/03
7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

This section briefly describes the PMC function. It also explains the
CNC-PMC interface.
7.1 WHAT IS PMC? ......................................................................489

7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION.......................................................493
7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................505
7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN .........................................512
7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
([PMC MAINTE]) ....................................................................515
7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR
SCREENS ([PMC LADDER]).................................................545
7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES............................................................562
- 488 -
B-63945EN/03 7.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC
7.1 WHAT IS PMC?
The programmable machine controller (PMC) is a programmable

controller (PC) built into a CNC to perform sequence control for a
machine tool (spindle rotation, tool change, machine operator's panel
control, and so on).
Sequence control is to perform control steps successively in a
predetermined sequence or according to the logic operation.
Programs for performing sequence control for machine tools are called
sequence programs. Generally, sequence programs coded in the
Ladder language are used.
7.1.1 Basic Configuration of PMC

The following is the basic configuration of the PMC:
CNC PMC Machine
Internal External
I/O Sequence I/O
program
Signal input to PMC

Internal relay
Signal output from PMC
Fig. 7.1.1 Basic configuration of PMC
The sequence program reads input signals, performs operations, and

outputs results in a predetermined sequence.
7.1.2 I/O Signals of PMC

Input signals of the PMC include signals input from the CNC (such as
M and T function signals) and signals input from the machine (such as
the cycle start button and feed hold signal button). Output signals of
the PMC include signals output to the CNC (such as the cycle start
command and feed hold signal command) and signals output to the
machine (such as turret rotation and spindle stop). The PMC controls
these I/O signals by executing a sequence program to control the
machine tool.
- 489 -
7.1.3 PMC Signal Addresses

PMC signal addresses indicate the locations of I/O signals exchanged
with the machine, I/O signals exchanged with the CNC, and signals
for internal relays and data (PMC parameters) in nonvolatile memory.
PMC addresses are roughly classified as shown in Fig. 7.1.3 (a).
F X Signals
Signals to/from
PMC
to/from CNC machine
G Y (MT)
Nonvolatile memory
(1) Variable timer (T)
Internal relay (R) (2) Counter (C)
(3) Keep relay (K)
(4) Data table (D)
Extra relay (E) (5) Extra relay (E)

(NOTE)
Fig. 7.1.3 (a) PMC-related addresses
NOTE
Optionally, extra relays (E) may be assigned to
nonvolatile memory locations.
The PMC signal address format consists of an address number and bit
number (0 to 7) as follows:
Bit number (0 to 7)
Address number (letter followed by decimal
number)
Fig. 7.1.3 (b) PMC address format
The first letter of an address number represents the type of the

signal.
In sequence programs, an address of a byte may be specified. In
the above example, specify X127 to specify a byte address. In
this case, the period "." and bit number are unnecessary.
- 490 -
Table 7.1.3 lists the address symbols and corresponding signals.
Table 7.1.3 Address Symbols and signal types

Symbol Signal type
F Input signal from CNC to PMC (CNC → PMC)
G Output signal from PMC to CNC (PMC → CNC)
X Input signal from machine to PMC (MT → PMC)
Y Output signal from PMC to machine (PMC → MT)
R Internal relay
E Extra relay
Z System relay
A Message display
T Variable timer
C Counter
K Keep relay
D Data table
M Input signal from another PMC path
N Output signal to another PMC path
L Label number
P Subprogram number
(1) Addresses of signals between the PMC and CNC (F and G)

These addresses are assigned to interface signals between the
CNC and PMC. The relationships between the signals and
addresses are defined by the CNC.
F indicates an input signal from the CNC to PMC.
G indicates an output signal from the PMC to CNC.
(2) Addresses of signals between the PMC and machine (X and Y)

I/O signals exchanged with an externally connected machine can
be assigned to any addresses within an available range to control
the machine.
X indicates an input signal from the machine to PMC.
Y indicates an output signal from the PMC to machine.
(3) Addresses of internal relays and extra relays (R and E)

These addresses are used to temporarily store operation results
during sequence program execution processing.
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile memory
locations.
The address locations of internal relays also include a reserved
area used by the PMC system software. The signals in the
reserved area cannot be written by sequence programs.
(4) System Relay Addresses (Z)

The System Relay is used to control a sequence program by
PMC System software. And, some addresses such as 'Operation
results of functional instructions' are used to condition of a
sequence program.
For PMC memories A and B, the system relay addresses are
R9000 to R9499.
- 491 -
(5) Signal addresses for message display (A)

Instruction “DISPB” used in sequence programs include
instructions to display a message on the CNC screen. These
addresses are used by such instructions.
(6) Nonvolatile memory addresses

The contents of these address locations are not erased even when
the power is turned off.
These addresses are used for management of the data items listed
below. These data items are called PMC parameters.
(a) Variable timer (T)
(b) Counter (C)
(c) Keep relay (K)
A reserved area used by the PMC system software is partly
included.
(d) Data table (D)
(e) Extra relay (E)
Optionally, E addresses may be assigned to nonvolatile
memory locations.
These addresses are used to temporarily store operation
results during sequence program execution processing.
(7) Addresses for multi-path PMC Interface (M, N)

These addresses are used to the Multi-path PMC interface.
M indicates an input signal from another PMC path.
N indicates an output signal to another PMC path.
(8) Other addresses

(a) Label number (L)
Sequence program instructions include an instruction to
cause a jump to a specified position in the middle of
processing. This address indicates the jump destination used
by this instruction. The contents of L address can not be
read/written in sequence program.
(b) Subprogram number (P)
In sequence programs, a main program can call
subprograms. P addresses indicate the numbers of these
subprograms. The contents of P address can not be
read/written in sequence program.
- 492 -
7.2 MULTI-PMC FUNCTION
The multi-PMC function allows one PMC system to execute multiple

sequence programs at the same time.
PMC memory for each sequence program is basically independent,

and the same PMC address can be used for different purposes of the
individual PMCs. Extra relays (E addresses) can be shared among
PMCs as shared memory. All PMCs can read from and write to this
area, so the area can be used for the interface between the PMCs. M,N
addresses can be also used for the interface between the PMCs.
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC
X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-, X0-, Y0-,

F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-, F0-, G0-,
R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-, R0-, A0-,
T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-, T0-, C0-,
K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-, K0-, D0-,
P1-, L1- P1-, L1- P1-, L1-
M0-, M0-,
N0- N0-
M0-,
N0-
Shared memory (E0 -)
Fig. 7.2 (a) PMC memory of multi-PMC function
A program for each PMC is saved as an independent file and can be

edited, updated, and backed up separately.
The CNC systems and the I/O Link channels to be controlled by

PMCs can be changed by CNC parameter setting. In a parameter-set
configuration, one PMC may control all CNC systems, or each PMC
may control a different CNC system.
- 493 -
Fig. 7.2 (b) shows a configuration example.
CNC PMC
Machine 1st PMC Operator's

control group panel for
machine
control, etc.
(1)
Peripheral
2nd PMC equipment,
etc.
Loader
3rd PMC Operator's
control group
panel for
loader, etc.
Fig. 7.2 (b) Multi-PMC function configuration example
If the Series 30i/31i/32i-A system is used to control more than one

CNC path, some paths can be grouped to share data within a group
and to stop all the paths in the group if an alarm condition occurs in
one of the paths. The group is referred to as the machine group.
The system supports up to 3 machine groups. Each group has a
separate emergency stop signal address.
A PMC is basically assigned to each machine group.
- 494 -
7.2.1 Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage

For the multi-PMC function, the order of PMC execution and
execution time percentages of the PMCs can be set with CNC
parameters.
Execution order
If parameters related to the execution order are not set (0 is set), the
following order sequence is assumed by default:
1st PMC 2nd PMC 3rd PMC
Other processing such as

tracing
Fig. 7.2.1 (a) Default execution order of multiple PMCs
Execution time percentage

If parameters related to execution time percentages are not set (0 is
set), the following execution time percentages are assumed by default:
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
1st PMC 2nd 3rd

PMC PMC
(75%)
(15%) (10%)
Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)
Fig. 7.2.1 (b) Execution time percentages of multiple PMCs
- 495 -
An example of changing the execution order and execution time

percentages by setting CNC parameters is explained below. In the
following, sequence programs are executed in the order from the third
PMC to the first PMC to the second PMC with the execution time
percentage of the third PMC set to 30%, the percentage of the first
PMC to 50%, and the percentage of the second PMC to 20%:
3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC
Other processing such as

tracing
Fig. 7.2.1 (c) Example of setting execution order of multiple PMCs
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
3rd PMC 1st PMC 2nd PMC

(30%) (50%) (20%)
Ladder execution cycle (4 or 8 ms)
Fig. 7.2.1 (d) Example of setting execution time percentages of multiple

PMCs
For details of parameter setting, see PMC PROGRAMMING

MANUAL.
- 496 -
7.2.2 Setting I/O Address for I/O Link

The I/O addresses of I/O Link channels can be assigned with CNC
parameters.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), all channels are assigned to
the first PMC by default as follows:
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
Channel 3
X/Y400 to X/Y527
Channel 4
X/Y600 to X/Y727
Fig. 7.2.2 (a) Default I/O addresses of I/O Link channels
In the following example, channel 1 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of

the first PMC, channel 2 is assigned to X/Y200 to X/Y327 of the first
PMC, channel 3 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the second PMC,
and channel 4 is assigned to X/Y0 to X/Y127 of the third PMC:
1st PMC
Channel 1
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Channel 2
X/Y200 to X/Y327
2nd PMC
Channel 3
X/Y0 to X/Y127
3rd PMC
Channel 4
X/Y0 to X/Y127
Fig. 7.2.2 (b) Example of I/O address assignment for I/O Link channels
For details of parameter setting, see PMC PROGRAMMING

MANUAL.
- 497 -
7.2.3 Interface Between CNC and PMC

The PMC to control the interface between the CNC and PMC and
PMC addresses (F/G addresses) can be set with CNC parameters.
With these parameter settings, a desired interface control system can
be built, in which the entire CNC-PMC interface of the CNC may be
controlled by a single PMC or the CNC-PMC interface may be
controlled by multiple PMCs.
For the CNC-PMC interface, a memory area consisting of 10 blocks,
each of which is an addressable, 768-byte DI/DO area, is provided.
When viewed from the ladder program in each PMC, these addresses
begin with 0.
If these parameters are not set (0 is set), the initial settings are
assumed, where the F/G addresses of the CNC equals the F/G
addresses of the first PMC as follows:
CNC 1st PMC

F/G0 to F/G767 of CNC F/G0 to F/G767 of 1st PMC
Fig. 7.2.3 (a) Initial settings for CNC-PMC interface
In the following example, F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767

of the CNC are assigned to F/G0 to F/G767 and F/G1000 to F/G1767
of the first PMC, and F/G2000 to F/G2767 of the CNC are assigned to
F/G0 to F/G767 of the second PMC:
CNC 1st PMC
F/G2000 to F/G2767 of CNC

2nd PMC
F/G0 to F/G767 of 2nd PMC
Fig. 7.2.3 (b) Setting example for CNC-PMC interface
- 498 -
7.2.4 Multi-Path PMC Interface

The multi-path PMC interface is the communication means between
two PMC paths.
Generally, Each path of multi-path PMC system has individual PMC

memory space except E address. And, E address can be used to share
data of multi-path PMC system. However, this method has a risk that
the memory is over written by other PMC path inappropriately.
When using this function, the input and output signals of each path
become definitely. So, you can send or receive the data on between
two PMC paths safely.
When you output data to N address at one of PMC paths, it can be
referenced by M address in other PMC path.
Ex.) When using this function with 1st PMC and 2nd PMC :
1st PMC 2nd PMC
M M
N N
Moreover, signals of M address are synchronized during 1 scan of 2nd

level program. Therefore, you can reference the same signal status on
the first step and the last step of level2 program, like as X and F
address.
- 499 -
7.2.5 System Relay Addresses (R9000, Z0)

The System Relay is used to control a sequence program by PMC
System software. And, some addresses such as 'Operation results of
functional instructions' are used to condition of a sequence program.
The System Relay uses the following PMC address by each PMC
Memory Type.
Table 7.2.5 (a) Address of System Relay

Type of PMC memory System Relay
PMC memory A
R9000 to R9499
PMC memory B
PMC memory C Z0 to Z499
NOTE
The address conversion of the System Relay is
necessary when a Sequence Program is changed
between PMC Memory-C and other PMC Memory
types.
Operation results of functional instructions

This area holds information necessary for individual ladder levels,
such as the operation results of functional instructions. This
information is saved/restored when the task is switched.
(1) R9000, Z0 (operation output register for the ADDB, SUBB,

MULB, DIVB, and COMPB functional instructions)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Z0
The result is 0.
The result is negative.
The result has overflowed.
(2) R9000, Z0 (error output for the EXIN, WINDR, and WINDW
functional instructions)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9000
Z0
The result is erroneous.
(3) R9002 to R9005, Z2 to Z5 (operation output registers for the

DIVB functional instruction)
The remainder of a division performed with the DIVB functional
instruction is output to these addresses.
- 500 -
System timers
Four signals can be used as system timers.
Their specifications are as follows.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
Z91
Constantly OFF signal
Constantly ON signal
200msec cyclic signal

(104msec ON and 96msec OFF)
1sec cyclic signal

(504msec ON and 496mec OFF)
R9091.5
Z91.5
104msec 96msec
200msec
R9091.6
Z91.6
504msec 496msec
1sec
CAUTION
1 Each signal is initially OFF.
2 The signals R9091.0, R9091.1, Z91.0, and Z91.1
are set at the beginning of the first ladder level on
every cycle.
3 Each pulse signal (ON-OFF signal) has an error of
±8 or 4 ms (ladder execution period).
- 501 -
Ladder execution start signal

Ladder stop signal
Ladder execution status signal
Using the ladder execution start and stop signals in a ladder program
can detect when the ladder program starts and stops.
Referencing the ladder execution status signal from an external system
or program, such as the network board, C language executor program,
FOCAS1 Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of
the ladder program.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9015
Z15 "Ladder execution start signal"

(can be referenced only from the
ladder program)
"Ladder stop signal"

(can be referenced only from the
ladder program)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R9091
Z91
"1st Ladder execution status signal"
0: Ladder at a stop
1: Ladder being executed
"2nd Ladder execution status signal"

0: Ladder at a stop
"3rd Ladder execution status signal"

0: Ladder at a stop
Signal operation
Run
Ladder execution status
Stop
"Ladder execution start signal" 1

(R9015.0, Z15.0) 0
"Ladder stop signal" 1

(R9015.1, Z15.1) 0
"Ladder execution status signal" 1

(R9091.2, R9091.3, R9091.4, 0
Z91.2, Z91.3, Z91.4)
One ladder One ladder

scan cycle scan cycle
- 502 -
(1) Ladder execution start signal (R9015.0, Z15.0)

When directed to start ladder program execution, the system
software starts executing the ladder program, turns on this signal,
and keeps it on for the first one scan cycle. Like R9000 or Z0,
this signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding
to each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is
securely turned on for the first one scan cycle after the start of
execution no matter on what execution level the signal is
referenced. This signal is turned on when:
(a) Ladder execution begins at power turn-on.
(b) The [RUN] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(c) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs
the ladder to start.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution has begun, making it possible to program
preprocessing related to ladder execution.
CAUTION
Reference this signal only within a ladder program.
Do not reference it from an external system or
program as it indicates the status of ladder
execution separately for each ladder execution
level.
(2) Ladder stop signal (R9015.1, Z15.1)

When directed to stop ladder program execution, the system
software turns off this signal and keeps it off for the last one scan
before stopping ladder program execution. Like R9000 or Z0,
this signal indicates the status of ladder execution corresponding
to each ladder execution level. For this reason, this signal is
securely turned off for the last one scan before the stop of
execution no matter on what execution level the signal is
referenced. This signal is turned off when:
(a) The [STOP] soft key on the PMC screen is pressed.
(b) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package directs
the ladder to stop.
(c) On the PMC DATA I/O screen, the ladder program is
loaded to the PMC.
(d) FANUC LADDER-III or a ladder editing package stores the
ladder program to the PMC.
Referencing this signal in a ladder program can detect when
ladder execution stops, making it possible to program
postprocessing related to ladder execution (that is, preprocessing
for ladder execution stop). Before the ladder is stopped, for
example, it is possible to put signals in an proper state for safety
purposes.
- 503 -
CAUTION
1 Reference this signal only within the ladder
program. Do not reference it from an external
system or program as it indicates the status of
ladder execution separately for each ladder
execution level.
2 If the power is turned off or a CNC system alarm
occurs, ladder execution and I/O signal transfer are
immediately stopped for safety purposes. In this
case, therefore, this signal cannot be used.
(3) Ladder execution status signal (R9091.2,R9091.3,R9091.4,

Z91.2, Z91.3, Z91.4)
Referencing this signal from an external system or program, such
as the network board, C language executor program, FOCAS2
Ethernet, or HSSB library, can detect the execution status of the
ladder program.
(4) Example of using the signals

(a) Example of calling a subprogram just before the ladder
stops
R9015.1
(Z15.1)
SUB65 Pxxxx
CALL
(b) Example of forcibly turning off an output signal

programmed on the first ladder level just before the ladder
stops
R9015.1
Input (Z15.1) Output
(c) Example of sending an execution-in-progress signal to the

outside
Outputting the status of this signal as the DO signal (output
address from the PMC) assigned to the I/O Link causes the
CNC unit to be interlocked with an external system.
CNC unit
Y0.0
R9015.1
I/O Link slave
(Z15.1) Y0.0
I/O Link
- 504 -
7.3 PMC SPECIFICATIONS
7.3.1 Basic Specifications

Table 7.3.1 (a) Basic specifications of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A PMC
Function 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC 32i-A PMC/L
1st PMC
(option) (option) (Note1)
PMC Memory Type PMC Memory-B PMC Memory-A PMC Memory-A (Note2) (Note2)
PMC Memory-C PMC Memory-B Shared with 1st
Shared with 1st PMC
PMC
Programming language Ladder Ladder (Note3) Ladder (Note3) Ladder Ladder
Step sequence
Number of ladder levels 3 3 3 2 (Note4) 2 (Note4)
Level 1 execution period 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec 4 or 8 msec
(Note5)
Processing power
• Basic instruction 25 nsec/step 25 nsec/step 25 nsec/step 1 µsec/step 1 µsec/step
processing
speed(Note6)
• Basic instruction 480 nsec/step 480 nsec/step 480 nsec/step 19.2 µ sec/step 19.2 µ sec/step
processing
speed(Positive/Negative
transition contact)
Program capacity (Note7)
• Ladder Up to about Up to about Up to about Up to about Up to about
100,000 steps 64,000 steps 64,000 steps 3,000 steps 5,000 steps
• Symbol & Comment At least 1KB At least 1KB At least 1KB At least 1KB At least 1KB
• Message At least 8KB At least 8KB At least 8KB At least 8KB At least 8KB
Instructions
• Basic instructions 14 14 14 14 14
• Functional instructions 93 (105) 93 (105) 93 (105) 82 (102) 92 (105)
(Note8)
Instructions(Option)
• Basic instructions 24 24 24 24 24
• Functional instructions 218 (230) 218 (230) 218 (230) 207 (227) 217 (230)
(Note8)
CNC interface
• Inputs (F) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes 768 bytes × 2
(Note9) (Note9) (Note9)
• Outputs (G) 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes × 10 768 bytes 768 bytes × 2
(Note9) (Note9) (Note9)
- 505 -
30i/31i/32i-A PMC
Function 2nd PMC 3rd PMC DCS PMC 32i-A PMC/L
1st PMC
(option) (option) (Note1)
DI/DO
• I/O Link (Note 11)
• Inputs (X) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024
points (Note10) points (Note10) points (Note10) points
• Outputs (Y) Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 4,096 Up to 64 points Up to 1,024
points (Note10) points (Note10) points (Note10) points
Symbol & Comment
(Note12)
• Number of symbol 40 40 40 40 40
characters
• Number of comment 255 255 255 255 255
characters (Note13)
Program storage area Up to 2MB Up to 768KB Up to 768KB 128KB 128KB
(Flash ROM) (Note14)
- 506 -
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety and handles the safety related signals.
Refer to "Series 30i/31i/32i Dual Check Safety Operators Manual (B-64004EN)" for
details.
2 There is no kind of PMC Memory Type in DCS PMC and 32i-A PMC/L.
3 The Step Sequence is unavailable in 2nd PMC and 3rd PMC even if selecting PMC
Memory-B or Common PMC Memory mode.
4 These instructions are intended to maintain source-level compatibility with programs
for other models. A program can be created on level 3, but it is not executed.
5 CNC parameter No. 11930 is used to specify a level-1 execution period. See PMC
Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details. Note, however, that it is impossible
to specify a level-1 execution period for each PMC separately.
6 It is the processing speed of Basic Instruction other than Positive/Negative transition
contact.
7 The maximum overall program size (including the maximum number of ladder steps,
symbols/ comments, and messages) varies depending on option settings. See
PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
8 For the number of functional instructions, each parenthesized number indicates the
number of all functional instructions, and each non-parenthesized number, the
number of valid functional instructions.
9 It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific CNC system.
See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
10 On series 30i, you can use up to four I/O Link channels (4,096 input points and
4,096 output points). On series 31i/32i, you can use up to three I/O Link channels
(3,072 input points and 3,072 output points). The channel number 1 of I/O Link
(1,024 input points and 1,024 output points) is a basic function. The channel number
2 to 4 are optional function. To use more than one channel of I/O Link, the "I/O Link
expansion" option is necessary for each I/O Link channel.
It is possible to specify which program is used to control a specific I/O Link channel.
See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
11 The update cycle of the signals from I/O Link depends on the combination with each
PMC and each I/O Link channel. See PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for
details.
12 These are the number for extended symbol and comment character. The number of
basic symbol character is 16 and the number of comment character is 30. See PMC
Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
13 This number is the number of single-byte characters. When you use double-byte
characters as a comment, the number becomes half.
14 The capacity of the program storage area varies depending on option settings. See
PMC Programming Manual (B-63983EN) for details.
- 507 -
Table 7.3.1 (b) Basic specifications of each PMC Memory Type

30i/31i/32i-A PMC
1st, 2nd and 3rd PMC DCS PMC
Function 32i-A PMC/L
PMC PMC PMC
(Note 1)
Memory-A Memory-B Memory-C
PMC Memory
• Internal relay (R) 1,500 bytes 8,000 bytes 16,000 bytes 1,500 bytes 1,500 bytes
• System Relay 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes 500 bytes
(R9000 or Z)
• Extra relay (E) (Note2) 10,000 bytes 10,000 bytes 10,000 bytes (Note 3) 10,000 bytes
• Message display (A)
⋅ Display requests 2,000 points 2,000 points 4,000 points (Note 4) 2,000 points
⋅ Status displays 2,000 points 2,000 points 4,000 points (Note 4) 2,000 points
• Nonvolatile memory
• Timer (T)
⋅ Variable timer 80 bytes 500 bytes 1,000 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
(40 pieces) (250 pieces) (500 pieces) (40 pieces) (40 pieces)
⋅ Variable timer 80 bytes 500 bytes 1,000 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
precision (Note 5) (40 pieces) (250 pieces) (500 pieces) (40 pieces) (40 pieces)
• Counter (C)
⋅ Variable counter 80 bytes 400 bytes 800 bytes 80 bytes 80 bytes
⋅ Fixed counter 40 bytes 200 bytes 400 bytes 40 bytes 40 bytes
• Keep relay (K)
⋅ User area 20 bytes 100 bytes 200 bytes 20 bytes 20 bytes
⋅ System area 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes 100 bytes
• Data table (D) 3,000 bytes 10,000 bytes 20,000 bytes 3,000 bytes 3,000 bytes
(Note 6) (Note 7)
• Step sequence
⋅ Step number (S) (none) 2,000 bytes 2,000 bytes (none) (none)
Functional instructions
• Variable timers (TMR) 40 pieces 250 pieces 500 pieces 40 pieces 40 pieces
• Fixed timers 100 pieces 500 pieces 1,000 pieces 100 pieces 100 pieces
(TMRB/TMRBF)
• Variable counters 20 pieces 100 pieces 200 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
(CTR)
• Fixed counters (CTRB) 20 pieces 100 pieces 200 pieces 20 pieces 20 pieces
• Rising/Falling edge 256 pieces 1,000 pieces 2,000 pieces 256 pieces 256 pieces
detection (DIFU/DIFD)
• Labels (LBL) 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces 9,999 pieces
• Subprograms (SP) 512 pieces 5,000 pieces 5,000 pieces 512 pieces 512 pieces
- 508 -
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety
Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details.
2 The extra relay is common memory for the multi-PMC function. To put it another
way, its size covers all of the first, second, and third PMCs. And, it can be used as
nonvolatile memory by option (except PMC/L).
3 No extra relay is available for DCS PMC.
4 The message display relay is ineffective in DCS PMC because the message display
function is unavailable in it.
5 This area is used to specify the precision of the variable timer. Do not use this
area in user programs.
6 To use all of data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-B in 2nd
PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (7KB)" option. If
this option is not added, the expanded data table area (D3000 to D9999) is not kept
after rebooting CNC.
7 To use all of data table area as nonvolatile memory with PMC Memory-C in 1st
PMC, please add the "PMC nonvolatile data table area expansion (10KB)" option. If
this option is not added, the expanded data table area (D10000 to D19999) is not
kept after rebooting CNC.
- 509 -
7.3.2 Addresses
Table 7.3.2 (a) Addresses of the PMCs for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A
30i/31i/32i-A PMC
Signals Symbol 32i-A PMC/L
PMC
PMC Memory-B PMC Memory-C (Note 1)
Memory-A
Input signal to X X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127 X0 ~ X127
the PMC from X200 ~ X327 X200 ~ X327 X200 ~ X327
the machine X400 ~ X527 X400 ~ X527 X400 ~ X527
X600 ~ X727 X600 ~ X727 X600 ~ X727
X1000 ~ X1127 X1000 ~ X1127 X1000 ~ X1127
(Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 2)
Output signal Y Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127 Y0 ~ Y127
from the PMC Y200 ~ Y327 Y200 ~ Y327 Y200 ~ Y327
to the machine Y400 ~ Y527 Y400 ~ Y527 Y400 ~ Y527
Y600 ~ Y727 Y600 ~ Y727 Y600 ~ Y727
Y1000 ~ Y1127 Y1000 ~ Y1127 Y1000 ~ Y1127
Input signal to F F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767 F0 ~ F767
the PMC from F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767 F1000 ~ F1767
the CNC F2000 ~ F2767 F2000 ~ F2767 F2000 ~ F2767
F3000 ~ F3767 F3000 ~ F3767 F3000 ~ F3767
F4000 ~ F4767 F4000 ~ F4767 F4000 ~ F4767
F5000 ~ F5767 F5000 ~ F5767 F5000 ~ F5767
F6000 ~ F6767 F6000 ~ F6767 F6000 ~ F6767
F7000 ~ F7767 F7000 ~ F7767 F7000 ~ F7767
F8000 ~ F8767 F8000 ~ F8767 F8000 ~ F8767
F9000 ~ F9767 F9000 ~ F9767 F9000 ~ F9767
Output signal G G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767 G0 ~ G767
from the PMC G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767 G1000 ~ G1767
to the CNC G2000 ~ G2767 G2000 ~ G2767 G2000 ~ G2767
G3000 ~ G3767 G3000 ~ G3767 G3000 ~ G3767
G4000 ~ G4767 G4000 ~ G4767 G4000 ~ G4767
G5000 ~ G5767 G5000 ~ G5767 G5000 ~ G5767
G6000 ~ G6767 G6000 ~ G6767 G6000 ~ G6767
G7000 ~ G7767 G7000 ~ G7767 G7000 ~ G7767
G8000 ~ G8767 G8000 ~ G8767 G8000 ~ G8767
G9000 ~ G9767 G9000 ~ G9767 G9000 ~ G9767
Input signal M M0 ~ M767 M0 ~ M767 M0 ~ M767
from other
PMC path
Output signal N N0 ~ N767 N0 ~ N767 N0 ~ N767
to other PMC
path
Internal relay R R0 ~ R1499 R0 ~ R7999 R0 ~ R15999 R0 ~ R1499 R0 ~ R1499
System relay R/Z R9000 ~ R9499 R9000 ~ R9499 Z0 ~ Z499 R9000 ~ R9499 R9000 ~ R9499
Extra relay E E0 ~ E9999 E0 ~ E9999 E0 ~ E9999 (Note 5) E0 ~ E9999
- 510 -
Table 7.3.2 (b) PMC Addresses list (2)

30i/31i/32i-A PMC
Signals Symbol 32i-A PMC/L
PMC PMC PMC
(Note 1)
Memory-A Memory-B Memory-C
Message display A
Display request A0 ~ A249 A0 ~ A249 A0 ~ A499 A0 ~ A249 A0 ~ A249
Display status A9000 ~ A9249 A9000 ~ A9249 A9000 ~ A9499 A9000 ~ A9249 A9000 ~ A9249
Timer T
Variable timer T0 ~ T79 T0 ~ T499 T0 ~ T999 T0 ~ T79 T0 ~ T79
Variable timer T9000 ~ T9079 T9000 ~ T9499 T9000 ~ T9999 T9000 ~ T9079 T9000 ~ T9079
precision
(Note 3)
Counter C
Variable counter C0 ~ C79 C0 ~ C399 C0 ~ C799 C0 ~ C79 C0 ~ C79
Fixed counter C5000 ~ C5039 C5000 ~ C5199 C5000 ~ C5399 C5000 ~ C5039 C5000 ~ C5039
Keep relay K
User area K0 ~ K19 K0 ~ K99 K0 ~ K199 K0 ~ K19 K0 ~ K19
System area K900 ~ K999 K900 ~ K999 K900 ~ K999 K900 ~ K999 K900 ~ K999
Data table D D0 ~ D2999 D0 ~ D9999 D0 ~ D19999 D0 ~ D2999 D0 ~ D2999
Label L L1 ~ L9999 L1 ~ L9999 L1 ~ L9999 L1 ~ L9999 L1 ~ L9999
Subprogram P P1 ~ P512 P1 ~ P5000 P1 ~ P5000 P1 ~ P512 P1 ~ P512
Step number S (none) S1 ~ S2000 S1 ~ S2000 (none) (none)
(Step sequence)
NOTE
1 This PMC is used for Dual Check Safety function (option). See "Dual Check Safety
Operators Manual(B-64004EN)" for details.
2 This area is reserved for PMC management software. No I/O can be allocated in
this area. Do not use it in user programs.
3 This area is used to specify the precision of a variable timer.
- Don't modify the value of timer and precision except for writing same value when
working the timer.
- Don't set the value other than the following range.
- If above rules are violated, the working of the timer is not guaranteed.
- Other than the range from T9000 to T9999 are reserved.
The value of precision

0: Default (8msec or 4msec)
1: 1msec
2: 10msec
3: 100msec
4: 1sec
5: 1min
4 This area is common memory for the multi-path PMC function. It is possible for
each program to read the same value from, and write it to, the area.
5 No extra relay is available for the Dual Check Safety PMC.
- 511 -
7.4 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN
The basic configuration of the PMC screen is described below.
Screen title Ladder PMC alarm PMC path NC program number

execution status
NC status indication [+]

Soft key page
turning key
Key entry line
Message display line
Return key
POS PROG OFFSET

SETTING
Function keys
SYSTEM MESSAGE GRAPH
• Screen title: Displays the name of a specific

submenu of the PMC.
• Ladder execution status: Displays the execution status of the
ladder program.
• PMC alarm: Indicates whether any PMC alarm is
occurring.
• PMC path: Displays the currently selected PMC.
• NC program number: Displays the number of the currently
selected NC program.
• Key entry line: Line for entering a numerical value or
character key string.
• Message display line: Displays an error or warning message.
- 512 -
• NC status indication: Displays the NC mode, the execution

status of the NC program, the currently
selected NC path number.
• Return key: Used to switch from the PMC operation
menu to a specific PMC submenu or
from a specific PMC submenu to the
main menu of the PMC.
• Soft key page turning key: Used to turn soft key pages.
About the PMC screen

When you click the "SYSTEM" function key and then turn the soft
key page by clicking the [+] soft key, the main menu of the PMC is
displayed.
The PMC main menu offers the following three types of submenus,
which are respectively used for specific purposes.
• PMC maintenance
• PMC ladder
• PMC configuration
Each of these PMC submenus is explained below.
(1) PMC maintenance menu

This menu displays the screens related to the maintenance of the
PMC, such as those for PMC signal status monitoring and traces
and for PMC data display and editing.
(2) PMC ladder menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the ladder program.
(3) PMC configuration menu

This menu displays the screens related to the display and editing
of the data other than the ladder constituting the sequence
program, as well as the screen for setting the PMC functions.
This manual briefly describes the screen of each of the PMC

maintenance and PMC ladder menus. For detailed descriptions and
the PMC configuration menu, refer to "FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A
PMC Programming Manual."
- 513 -
7.4.1 Transition of the PMC Screens
SYSTEM
PMC main menu PMC maintenance submenu

STATUS Signal status screen (See Subsection 7.5.1.)
PMC MAINTE
I/O LINK I/O link connection status screen (See Subsection 7.5.8.)
<
PMC ALARM PMC alarm screen (See Subsection 7.5.2.)
I/O Data I/O screen (See Subsection 7.5.7.)
TIMER PMC parameter (timer) screen (See Subsection 7.5.3.)
COUNTR PMC parameter (counter) screen (See Subsection 7.5.4.)
PMC parameter (keep relay) (See Subsection 7.5.5.)

KEEP RELAY screen
DATA PMC parameter (data table) screen (See Subsection 7.5.6.)
TRACE Signal trace screen (See Subsection 7.5.9.)
Signal trace (parameter setting) (See Subsection 7.5.10.)

TRACE SETING
screen
I/O DGN II/O DIAGNOSIS screen (See Subsection 7.5.12.)
PMC ladder submenu

PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen (See Subsection 7.6.1.)
< Ladder display/editing screen (See Subsection 7.6.2.)

LADDER
DUP. CHECK Duplicate coil check screen
PMC configuration submenu

PMC CONFIG TITLE Title display/editing screen
< CONFIG PARAM Configuration parameter screen
Setting screens (general, message shift,

SETING I/O link assignment data selection,
override)
PMC STATUS PMC status screen (multi-PMC switch)
SYSTEM PARAM
System parameter display/editing
screen
MODULE I/O module display/editing screen
Symbol and comment display/editing

SYMBOL screen
MESAGE Message display/editing screen
Online monitoring parameter setting

ONLINE
screen
- 514 -
7.5 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS ([PMC

MAINTE])
7.5.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen)

The SIGNAL STATUS screen displays the data at all addresses
specified in the program. The data of each address consists of a bit
pattern (0s and/or 1s) and a hexadecimal or decimal number at the
rightmost position on a byte-by-byte basis.
Signal status display area
Additional information line
The additional information line at the bottom of the screen displays

the symbol and comment of the address on which the cursor is placed.
When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.
Address Symbol Comment
Table contents
• ADDRESS: Address referenced by a sequence program
• 0 to 7: Data at each bit position
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
• DEC: Display of each byte in decimal
Operation procedure
(1) Press the [STATUS] soft key. The screen shown above appears.
(2) Key in an address whose data to be displayed, then press the
[SEARCH] soft key.
- 515 -
(3) The data starting at the input address is displayed as a bit pattern.
(4) To display the data at another address, press the cursor keys,
page keys, or [SEARCH] soft key.
(5) To modify the status of a signal, switch to the forced I/O screen
by pressing the [FORCE] soft key.
NOTE
The [FORCE] soft key is displayed and usable
when the forced I/O function is enabled. For details,
see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(6) On the forced I/O screen, an overridden X signal or Y signal is

prefixed by a greater-than sign (>) to indicate the setting of
override.
Soft keys on the Signal Status screen
Address search Switching to the forced I/O screen PMC path switching
Switching to display in decimal
Switching to display in hexadecimal
Fig. 7.5.1 (a) Soft keys on the SIGNAL STATUS screen
- 516 -
7.5.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)

On this screen, an alarm message output from the PMC is displayed.
To move to the PMC alarm screen, press the [PMC ALARM] soft key.
Page display
Alarm message display area
In the alarm message display area, an alarm message output from the
PMC is displayed. When many alarm messages are output to two or
more pages, the page keys can be used to switch from one page to
another.
In the page display area to the right of the title, the number of the page
currently displaying messages is indicated.
For information about messages displayed, see Appendix A “Alarm

List.”
- 517 -
7.5.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display timer values for functional
instruction variable timers (TMR:SUB 3). This screen can be used in
one of two modes: the simple display mode and the comment display
mode. To move to the TIMER screen, press the [TIMER] soft key.
Page display
Key input line

Message
display line
Additional information
line
Simple display mode
Comment display
area
Comment display mode
- 518 -
Table contents
• NO.: Timer number specified for a functional instruction
timer.
• PRESET: Timer setting value
• ACC: Timer accuracy
• COMMENT: T address comment
In the PRESET column, timer setting values are displayed. When the
timer accuracy is 8, 48, 1, 10, or 100 ms, only a numeric value is
displayed. When the timer accuracy is the second or minute, a time
value is displayed using H, M, and S with the separator "_" used to
delimit one unit from another as follows:
aaH_bbM_ccS
In the ACC column, timer accuracy values are displayed. The table
below indicates the time setting values and notation of each accuracy
value.
Accuracy Minimum time Maximum time

Timer No.
notation setting setting
1 to 8 48 (initial value) 48 ms 1572.8 seconds
9 to 250 8 (initial value) 8 ms 262.1 seconds
1 to 250 1 1 ms 32.7 seconds
1 to 250 10 10 ms 327.7 seconds
1 to 250 100 100 ms 54.6 minutes
1 to 250 S 1 second 546 minutes
1 to 250 M 1 minute 546 hours

Soft keys on the TIMER screen
Switching the display mode T address search
Switching to the soft keys for accuracy setting
Setting accuracy to 100 ms
Setting accuracy to 1 second
Setting accuracy to 10 ms Setting accuracy to an initial value
Setting accuracy to 1 ms Setting accuracy to 1 minute
- 519 -
7.5.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen)

This screen is used to set and display the maximum and minimum
counter values for functional instruction counters (CTR: SUB 5). This
screen can be used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and
the comment display mode. To move to the COUNTER screen, press
the [COUNTR] soft key.
Page display
Key input line Message display line
Simple display mode
Comment display
area
- 520 -
Table contents
• NO.: Counter number specified for a functional
instruction counter
• PRESET: Maximum counter value (a minimum counter value
is specified by a counter instruction)
• CURRENT: Current counter value
• COMMENT: Comment on the C address of a setting value

If the cursor is placed on a PRESET value, the symbol and comment
of the address of the PRESET value are displayed. If the cursor is
placed on a CURRENT value, the symbol and comment of the address
of the CURRENT value are displayed.
Counter types and maximum values

Counter type PRESET maximum value CURRENT maximum value
BINARY 32767 32767
BCD 9999 9999
Soft keys on the COUNTER screen
Display mode switching C address search
- 521 -
7.5.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen)

This screen is used for setting and displaying the Keep Relays. To
move to the KEEP RELAY screen, press the [KEEP RELAY] soft
key.
Page display
Contents of the table

• ADDRESS: Address refered by sequence Program
• 0 to 7: Contents of each bit
• HEX: Value of the byte data in hexadecimal notation

When the cursor is placed on a byte, the byte symbol and comment are
displayed.
Since Keep Relay is nonvolatile memory, the contents are not lost
even if you turn off the power.
The Keep Relay area consists of parts as follows.
30i/31i/32i-A
Second PMC Third PMC Dual check
First PMC
(option) (option) safety PMC
User area K0–K99 K0–K19 K0–K19 K0–K19
Area for management software K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999 K900–K999
CAUTION
If the area for the PMC management software is
protected by the programmer protection function,
the area is not displayed on the KEEP RELAY
screen. For details, see FANUC Series 30i-MODEL
A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
- 522 -
7.5.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen)

There are two data table types (data table control data table and data
table). To move to the data screen, press the [DATA] soft key.
(1) DATA TABLE CONTROL screen ([List] screen)

Pressing the [DATA] soft key displays the DATA TABLE
CONTROL screen for data table management. This screen can be
used in one of two modes: the simple display mode and the
comment display mode.
Display of the
number of groups
Page display
Key input line

Message display line
Simple display mode
Comment
display area
- 523 -
Table contents
• GROUP TABLE COUNT: Number of data items in the data table
• NO.: Group number
• ADDRESS: Data table start address
• PARAMETER: Data table control parameter
• TYPE: Data length (0 = 1 byte, 1 = 2 bytes, 2 = 4 bytes, 3
= bit)
• DATA: Number of data items in each data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the start D address of each group

When the cursor is placed on the PARAMETER, TYPE, or DATA
column, the current setting is displayed.
The ADDRESS column displays the start address of a data table.

Multiple groups may share an address. When the [SYMBOL] soft key
is pressed, the symbol of the start address is displayed.
NOTE
The data table control parameters have the following meanings:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0: Binary format
1: BCD format (Bits 2 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Without input protection
1: With input protection
0: Binary or BCD format (Bit 0 is valid.)
1: Hexadecimal format (Bits 0 and 3 are invalid.)
0: Signed (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
1: Unsigned (valid only when bits 0 and 2 are set to 0)
NOTE
1 When data table control data is protected by the
programmer protection function, the data table
control data screen is not displayed. For details,
see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
2 When PMC parameters are output using the I/O
screen (see Subsection 7.5.7, “Data Input/Output
([I/O] Screen)”), only the data of an address D area
set in the data table control data is output from the
data table screen. The data of an address D area
not set in the data table control data is not output.
- 524 -
Soft keys on the DATA TABLE CONTROL screen
Display mode switching Data table control data initialization
Switching to the zoom screen Switching to the soft keys for parameter setting
Input of the number Symbol display Switching to the soft keys for data size
of groups switching setting
Group number search Address display

switching
Soft keys for parameter setting
Setting for signed decimal Setting for hexadecimal
Setting for unsigned Setting for BCD Protection state modification

decimal
Soft keys for data size setting
Setting for byte Setting for bit
Setting for word Setting for double word
- 525 -
(2) DATA TABLE screen ([ZOOM] screen)

If the data table control data is specified, clicking the [ZOOM]
soft key on the data table control data screen displays the data
table setting screen. This screen can be used in one of three
modes: the simple display mode, the comment display mode, and
the bit display mode.
Group
information line
Page display

Simple display mode
Comment display area
- 526 -
Bit display mode

Table contents
• NO.
• ADDRESS: Address used by the sequence program
• DATA: Data value of data table
• COMMENT: Comment on the D address
• 0 to 7: Data of each bit
• HEX: Display of each byte in hexadecimal
The group information line at the top of the screen displays a group
number, group start address, settings, and comment on the start
address.

In the bit display mode, a bit symbol and comment, or a byte symbol
and comment are displayed, depending on the cursor position.
Soft keys on the DATA TABLE screen
Display mode switching Address search
Switching to the list screen Group number search
- 527 -
7.5.7 Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen)

To move to the I/O screen, press the [I/O] soft key.
On this screen, sequence programs, PMC parameters and PMC

message data for multi-language display can be written to the
specified device, read from the device, and compared. The query
selection cursor, which moves vertically from one question to another,
is displayed, as is the option selection cursor, which moves
horizontally from one option to another.
The following types of devices can be used for input/output. The

desired device type can be selected by positioning the query selection
cursor to "DEVICE" and moving the option selection cursor to that
type.
• MEMORY CARD: Data can be output to and input from a

memory card.
• FLASH ROM: Data can be output to and input from flash
ROM.
• FLOPPY: Data can be output to and input from handy
files or floppy cassettes.
• OTHERS: Data can be output to and input from other
general-purpose RS-232C input/output
devices.
The multi-path PMC system enables an I/O target PMC to be selected.

In STATUS in the lower part of the screen, a detailed explanation of
execution and the execution status are displayed. During write, read,
and comparison, the size of the data already transferred is indicated as
the execution (intermediate) result.
- 528 -
The following gives a display example shown when PMC parameters

are written to a memory card:
Soft keys on the I/O screen
Execution Switching to the port setting screen
Switching to the list screen
Cancellation
- 529 -
7.5.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Screen)

I/O LINK MONITOR screen shows the types and the ID codes of I/O
Units that are connected to I/O Link in order of Group number.
To switch the screen display to the I/O LINK MONITOR screen,
press the [I/O LINK] soft key.
Channel number
I/O Unit type
Group number I/O Unit ID code
Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
CONNECTION UNIT 80 Connection Unit
OPERATOR PANEL 82 Connection Unit for Operators
Panel
I/O-B3 83 I/O B3
IO UNIT-MODEL A 84 I/O Unit-MODEL A
86
87
PLC SERIES 90-30 45 PLC SERIES 90-30
POWER MATE / I/O LINK BETA 4A Power Mate or I/O Link β
SERIES 0 50 Series 0
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG1) 53 Machine Operators Panel
Interface
LINK CONNECTION UNIT 96 I/O Link Connecting Unit
I/O UNIT-MODEL B 9E I/O Unit-MODEL B
R-J MATE 61 R-J Mate
CONNECTOR PANEL MODULE A9 I/O module for connector panel
OPERATOR PANEL A1 AA I/O module for operator's panel
OPERATOR I/F BOARD (MPG3) 6B Operator Interface(with MPG)
LOADER I/O AF I/O Board for Loader
FRC DIF B0 DIF Board for ROBOCUT
- 530 -
Table 7.5 Displayed type and true type of I/O Units

Displayed I/O Unit ID True I/O Unit
FRC MIF B1 MIF Board for ROBOCUT
I/O CARD B2 I/O board
ROBOSHOT I/O CARD A B3 I/O for ROBOSHOT
LOADER I/O (MATRIX) B4 I/O Board for Loader(Matrix)
PROCESS I/O FA B5 Process I/O for robot controller
PROCESS IO 89 Process I/O for robot controller
I/O LINK ADAPTER 8B I/O Link adapter
ROBOT CONTROLLER 52 Controller for robot
GE Fanuc PLC 54 GE Fanuc PLC
OPERATOR PANEL 95 I/O for Series 0
LASER OSCILLATOR 97 Laser Oscillator
FIXED I/O TYPE A 98 I/O for Robot Type A
FIXED I/O TYPE B 99 I/O for Robot Type B
AS-I CONVERTER 77 AS-i Converter
OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module(for Operator Panel
48/32)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL A A8 I/O Module(for Machine Operator
Panel of 0 Type)
CONNECTION UNIT C1 (MPG) A8 Connection Unit C1(with MPG)
MACHINE OPERATOR PANEL B A8 I/O Module (for Machine Operator
Panel)
I/O MODULE WITH LCD A8 LCD display embedded I/O
UNKNOWN UNIT - Unknown I/O Unit
CAUTION
1 IDs other than those for the I/O units listed in Table
7.5 represent undefined units.
2 I/O Units not for this CNC are written in Table 7.5.
Soft keys
Displays connection status of the Displays connection status of

previous channel the next channel
- 531 -
7.5.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen)
SIGNAL TRACE screen (initial screen)
Before trace operation can be executed, the trace parameters must be

set. Press the [TRACE SETING] soft key to switch the screen display
to the trace parameter setting screen.
By setting the PMC setting screen, the trace function can be
automatically started after the power is turned on. In this case as well,
the trace parameters must be set beforehand.
NOTE
For the setting to automatically start the trace
function after the power is turned on, see
Subsection 7.5.11.2.
- 532 -
7.5.10 Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen)

On the trace parameter setting screen, a sampling condition can be set.
The screen consists of two pages. Use the page keys to switch between
the pages.
Trace parameter setting screen (first page)
(a) SAMPLING/ MODE

Determines the sampling mode.
• TIME CYCLE: Samples at every specified cycle
time.
• SIGNAL TRANSITION: Monitors the signal at a set cycle
and samples when the signal makes
a transition.
(b) SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION
The resolution of sampling is inputted. The default value is the
minimum sampling resolution (msec), which varies depending on
the CNC.
Setting range: Minimum sampling resolution to 1000 (msec)
An input value is rounded off to a multiple of the minimum
sampling resolution (msec) which is closest to but not greater
than the input value.
(c) SAMPLING/ TIME
This parameter is displayed when "TIME CYCLE" is set on
"SAMPLING/ MODE". The execution time of trace is inputted.
The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the number of
specified signal address changes the range of the value that is
able to input. The range is displayed on the right side.
- 533 -
(d) SAMPLING/ FRAME

This parameter is displayed when "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is
set on SAMPLING/ MODE". The number of sampling is
inputted. The value of "SAMPLING/ RESOLUTION" or the
number of specified signal addresses changes the range of the
value that is able to input. The range is displayed on the right
side.
(e) STOP CONDITION
Determines the condition to stop the trace.
• NONE: Does not stop the tracing automatically.
• BUFFER FULL: Stops the tracing when the buffer becomes
full.
• TRIGGER: Stops the tracing by trigger.
(f) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
When "TRIGGER" is set on "STOP CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
stop trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
Example: 2:R9200.1 + Input key
A setting can be made by entering "PMC number" + ":" +
"address" as indicated above.
(g) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
parameter is enabled. Determine the trigger mode when the trace
is stopped.
• RISING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by falling
down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Stops the tracing automatically by rising
up or falling down of the trigger signal.
h) STOP CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ POSITION
parameter is enabled. Input the ratio of the sampling time or
number which specifies the position where specified trigger
condition is on. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal before the trigger condition, you should set a big value
in this parameter. If you would like to examine the transitions of
the signal after the trigger condition, you should set a small value
in this parameter.
Example: The case that sampling time is 10 seconds and trigger
position is set as "10%".
Trigger position
← 1 sec →← 9 sec →
- 534 -
(i) SAMPLING CONDITION

When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE",
this parameter is enabled.
Determine the sampling condition.
• TRIGGER: Samples the status of specified signals
when the specified sampling condition is
on.
• ANY CHANGE: Samples the status of specified signals
when the signals change.
(j) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ ADDRESS
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input signal address or symbol name as
sampling trigger.
A PMC number can be set for a trigger address by entering the
PMC number at the time of address setting.
(k) SAMPLING CONDITION/ TRIGGER/ MODE
and "TRIGGER" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", this
parameter is enabled. Input trigger mode that determines the
condition of specified trigger.
• RISING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up of the trigger signal.
• FALLING EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
falling down of the trigger signal.
• BOTH EDGE: Samples the status of specified signals by
rising up or falling down of the trigger
signal.
• ON: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is on.
• OFF: Samples the status of specified signals
during the trigger signal is off.
- 535 -
In page 2 of the PARAMETER SETTING screen, you can set the

addresses or symbols that should be sampled.
Trace parameter setting screen (second page)
(a) Setting addresses

In case of inputting discrete bit addresses, any bit address can be
inputted.
Moreover, when you input byte address, all bits of the address
(bits 0 to 7) are set automatically. Maximum 32 points of signal
address can be inputted.
With the multi-PMC system, an address can be set for a desired
PMC by specifying its PMC number.
When no PMC number is specified, the specification of the
currently selected PMC is assumed. In this case, "PMC number"
+ ":" is automatically prefixed to a specified address.
When only one PMC is used as in the standard PMC system, no
PMC number needs to be specified.
- 536 -
NOTE
1 For the PMC numbers, see Section 7.2.
2 If there is not “:” key in your keyboard, use “;” or “/”.
3 The signals of the PMC for dual check safety
cannot be traced.
4 Increasing the number of the signal address
changes the capacity of "SAMPLING/ TIME" or
"SAMPLING/ FRAME" in page 1. If the capacity is
changed, the following warning message is
displayed. (The "n" on the message means the
maximum value that is able to input.)
a) In case of "TIME CYCLE" mode
"SAMPLING TIME IS REDUCED TO n SEC."
b) In case of "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode
"SAMPLING FRAME IS REDUCED TO n."
b) Soft keys
Soft keys on the setting screen of sampling address are as follows
• DELETE: Clears the value of the edit box on the
cursor.
• SYMBOL/ Changes the address display to the symbol
ADDRESS:
display. However, display of the address
that is not defined the symbol does not
change. This soft key also changes to
"ADDRESS". The following soft keys are
displayed.
• MOVE UP: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal above one line.
• MOVE DOWN: Exchanges the signal indicated the cursor
for the signal below one line.
• DELETE ALL: Clears all of the value of the edit box.
c) Trigger setting
When "SIGNAL TRANSITION" is set on "TRACE MODE" and
"ANY CHANGE" is set on "SAMPLING CONDITION", it can
be set whether to use the setting address as the signals that should
trigger the sampling in the setting signals. As for the signal
address where the trigger was set, "9" is displayed right. Soft
keys on the Trigger setting screen are as follows:
• TRGON: Sets the Trigger on.
• TRGOFF: Sets the Trigger off.
The default setting is trigger on for all signals.
- 537 -
7.5.11 Execution of Trace

After the trace parameters are set, a trace operation can be started by
pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key and the [RUN] soft key on the
SIGNAL TRACE screen. The following is the screen examples of the
trace execution by "TIME CYCLE" mode and "SIGNAL
TRANSITION" mode.
Execution of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Execution of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)

The result of trace is immediately displayed during execution of the
trace.
When the stop conditions that is set in parameter setting screen is
satisfied the execution is finished. Pushing [STOP] soft key aborts the
execution. In "SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode, graphic display is not
refreshed until any signal for sampling trigger changes.
- 538 -
7.5.11.1 Operation after execution of trace

When the execution is finished, the result of trace is displayed. The
followings are the screen examples of trace by "TIME CYCLE" and
"SIGNAL TRANSITION" mode.
Result of trace screen (TIME CYCLE mode)
Result of trace screen (SIGNAL TRANSITION mode)
The cursor indicating current position is initially displayed on the

original point (0 point). The position of the cursor is displayed in
"CURSOR POSITION" in the upper of the screen. The cursor can
move horizontally with the <←> or <→> key. After the execution,
following operation is enabled.
- 539 -
a) Scroll of screen
• Cursor up/down key and Page up/down key
Enables the vertical scroll for the specified signal
• Cursor right/left key, [NEXT>>] soft key and [<< PREV] soft
key
Enables the horizontal scroll of the graph.
b) Automatic calculation of the selected range
Pushing [MARK] soft key marks the current position and
displays the mark cursor.
If the mark cursor duplicates with the current position cursor, the
current position cursor has priority of display. The "MARK
POSITION" that shows the position of the mark cursor and
"RANGE" that shows the range between the mark cursor and the
current position cursor are displayed in the upper of screen.
Moving the current position cursor changes these values. Pushing
[MARK] again releases the select range mode.
Result of trace screen (Mark cursor display)
c) Zoom in/Zoom out of waveform

Pushing [ZOOM IN] soft key magnifies the display of chart.
Pushing [ZOOM OUT] soft key reduces the display of chart.
Pushing these soft keys also change the scale value of the
graduation on the graph. When trace is just finished, the default
zooming level was the most magnified level. In [ZOOM OUT]
mode, "X" is displayed as following screen example when the
transitions of signal cannot be expressed accurately enough. The
limitation of [ZOOM OUT] displays all of result of the trace in
one page.
- 540 -
Result of trace screen (Zoom out display)
d) Exchange of sampling signal

Pushing [MOVE UP] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by
the signal cursor for the signal one line above. Pushing [MOVE
DOWN] soft key exchanges the signal indicated by the signal
cursor for the signal one line below. The result of the operation is
cancelled by the execution of trace or putting the power off.
When you would like to preserve the order of displayed signals
against the executing or powering off, please change the order on
"SAMPLING ADDRESS" screen.
7.5.11.2 Automatic start of trace setting

Trace execution is automatically started after power-on by setting a
PMC setting data.
• TRACE START = MANUAL/AUTO
NOTE
For details of the method of setting PMC setting
data, see PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-63983EN).
- 541 -
7.5.12 MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS ([I/O DGN] SCREEN)

In I/O Diagnosis screen, you can check the status of each I/O variable.
You can also check the configuration of I/O devices and the
communication status with them.
Listing order
Additional information
GRP (GROUP)
To include a specific string which means a kind of signals in a part of
symbol string, these signals on I/O diagnosis screen are classified and
you can easy to understand the status of signals.
The group names of the I/O variables are displayed, which are
extracted (Max. 4 chars) out of their symbol names as configured in
“GROUP FORMAT” in the setting screen.
The groups to be displayed can be specified by soft key.
[ALL GROUPS] All groups are displayed.
[GROUP] The group entered by key or the group under the
cursor is selected to be displayed.
PROG.SYMBOL (SYMBOL)
The symbol names of the I/O variables are displayed.
ADDRESS
The actual locations of I/O variables are displayed.
VALUE
The current values of I/O variables are displayed as signed decimal,
according to the data type of them (i.e. BOOL, BYTE, WORD, and
DWORD).
- 542 -
I/O INFORMATION
The information related to I/O network is displayed in the display
format below:
<I/O type><Network type> : <Network address> : <status>
I/O type:
Module type Shown as
Input module I
Output module O
Other *
Network type:
Network type Shown as
PROFIBUS P
I/O LINK Ln (n: channel number)
Network address:
Network type Network address notation
PROFIBUS <Slave #>.<Slot #>
I/O LINK <Group #>.<Base #>.<Slot #>
NOTE
This screen shows the I/O information according to the
network setting that became effective at the time of the
last power-on.
The notes for each network device are as follows:
PROFIBUS
1. If you have changed some of the profibus parameters,
you have to cycle the power once to make the changes
take effect.
I/O LINK
1. Only the I/O Link assingments, which are made
effective by the setting of “Machine Signal Interface” in
Configuration Parameter menu and the setting of
“Selectable I/O Link Assignment Function”, are
displayed.
2. If you have changed the following parameters, you have
to cycle the power once to make them take effect:
• “I/O module assignment data”
• “Machine signal interface” in PMC configuration
parameter
• “Selectable I/O Link assignment function”
3. If you have stored new sequence program to PMC, its
I/O Link assignment data will not take effect until you
write it into Flash-ROM and cycle the power once.
- 543 -
Status: the status of communication

“OK” or “NG” is displayed.
REMARK
The remarks up to 8 characters extracted from comment data are
displayed. To specify the remark at this field, set “100” to the
attribute value of the comment, which you want to show in this field,
on FANUC LADDER-III,
Additional information window

In this window, symbol and comment of the I/O variable under the
cursor are displayed. When language dependent comment attributes
are specified, corresponding comment is displayed according to the
current language setting of the CNC.
In FANUC LADDER-III, the attribute value of comment should be set
to 0 to 15 to display language dependent comment
Attribute value: 0 to 15
0: English 9: Danish
1: Japanese 10: Portuguese
2: German 11: Polish
3: French 12: Hungarian
4: Chinese (Traditional) 13: Swedish
5: Italian 14: Czech
6: Korean 15: Chinese (Simplified)
7: Spanish 16: Russian
8: Dutch 17: Turkish
NOTE
In case of the extended symbol and comment, the
comments on the screen will be switched
dynamically another language when the language
setting of CNC changes.
Soft key
Softkeys on the I/O Diagnosis screen
Search for data Switch to the address order display Switch to the specified group display
Switch to the address order display Switch PMC path Screen settings
Switch to the address order display Switch to the all group display
- 544 -
7.6 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS

([PMC LADDER])
The PMC LADDER menu contains the screens related to PMC

Ladder diagrams, such as the program list screen and the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screens.
You can switch to the PMC LADDER menu by operating on the
"SYSTEM" key and then the [PMC LADDER] soft key.
SYSTEM
PMC main menu

PMC LADDER menu
PMC LADDER LIST Program list screen
LADDER LADDER DIAGRAM

< MONITOR/EDITOR screen
DUP. CHECK Duplicate coil check screen
Clicking the [LADDER] soft key causes the sequence program to be

dynamically displayed, allowing you to monitor operation. The editor
screen allows you to make changes to relay and functional instructions
in the sequence program to change the operation of the sequence
program.
The ladder diagram display/editor functions consist of the following
screens:
(1) Ladder diagram display screen (LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen)
Displays ladder diagrams to monitor the current states of relays,
coils, and so on.
(2) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
Displays only a selected ladder net to monitor the current states
of relays, coils, and so on.
(3) LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a ladder diagram in units of nets.
(4) NET EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a single net in a ladder diagram.
(5) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Allows you to select the subprogram to be displayed on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
(6) PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
Allows you to edit a ladder program in units of subprograms.
Also allows you to select the subprogram to be edited on the
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
- 545 -
The following screens can be called from the LADDER DIAGRAM

EDITOR screen:
(7) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE VIEWER
screen
Allows you to view the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
(8) FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION DATA TABLE EDITOR
screen
Allows you to edit the contents of the data table for a data table
attached functional instruction.
NOTE
You can protect these screens by using the
programmer protection function. For details, see
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL.
You can change between screens as shown in the figure below.
PMC main menu
[<] [PMC LADDER]

PMC LADDER menu
[<] [<]
[LADDER] [LIST]
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
MONITOR screen VIEWER screen
[LIST]
Display function
(monitor)
[SWITCH] [LIST] [ZOOM]
[EXIT] [EDIT]
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
[ZOOM]
LADDER DIAGRAM PROGRAM LIST
Edit function EDITOR screen EDITOR screen
[LIST]
[EXIT] [CREATE NET] [ZOOM]
NET EDITOR screen
Fig. 7 Changes between screens
NOTE
The [EDIT] soft key on the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen is displayed so that it is available if
the programmer protection function is enabled. While
the online monitor function is enabled, you cannot
move to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. (To
stop the online monitor function, change the settings
of "RS-232C" and "HIGH SPEED" to "NOT USE".
- 546 -
7.6.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)

The PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen shows program information
such as the program size.
SP area
Size area
Ladder preview display area
Program number area
(1) Screen structures

(a) A program list is displayed on the left side of the screen; on
the right side, the ladder diagram of the program currently
indicated by the cursor on the program list is displayed.
(b) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.
(c) The program list displays up to 18 programs at a time in the
list display area.
- 547 -
(2) Area of program list

(a) In the "SP area", the protect information for subprograms is
displayed, so are their program types.
(Key): Ladder program, cannot be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Magnifying glass): Ladder program, can be viewed,
cannot be edited
(Pencil): Ladder program, can be viewed,
can be edited
(b) Program name is displayed in the "PROG NO." field for
each program.
There are three kinds of program names.
COLLECT: It means the collective program.
GLOBAL: It means the whole program.
LEVELn (n = 1, 2, 3): It means the Ladder level 1, 2 and 3.
Pm (m = subprogram number):
It means subprogram.
By changing the "ADDRESS NOTATION" item on the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Setting screen to
"SYMBOL", you can display symbols.
(c) The program size is displayed in the "SIZE" field for each
program.
If the program size is not over 1024 byte, the unit is shown
in byte.
If it is over 1024 byte, the unit is shown in kilo (1024) byte
with "K".
Ex.) The case that program size is not over
1024 byte.
1023 bytes: "1023" is shown.
Ex.) The case that program size is over 1024
byte.
20000 bytes: "19K" is shown.
(Sizes are rounded off to whole
numbers before being displayed.)
Soft key of PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
Search for program
Display the contents

of program
- 548 -
7.6.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)

LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen shows the on/off status of
contacts and coils, and the contents of address specified for parameter
of functional instructions.
From the PMC LADDER menu, you can switch to the LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR screen by using the [LADDER] soft key. You
can use following operation at this screen, including "Forced I/O
function (Forcing mode)", by which you can force the relay or the
address parameters of functional instructions to a new status or value.
• Switch subprogram to show [LIST]
• Search for address or others [SEARCH MENU]
• Show data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Go to COLLECTIVE MONITOR Screen [SWITCH]
• Forced I/O function (Forcing mode) "number" + INPUT key
Title information (REMARKS) Current subprogram
Area for LADDER Diagram
Key input line

Message line

(a) Title information (REMARKS) of the LADDER Program,
the current subprogram, and the current position
information of the Diagram displayed in this screen, are
displayed above the LADDER Diagram.
When you select a subprogram to be displayed, range for
search function is indicated at right of the top line as
"LOCAL" or "GLOBAL". In case of "LOCAL", the range
for search function is restricted within the current
subprogram. In case of "GLOBAL", on the other hand,
search function searches whole of LADDER program, and
switch current subprogram automatically according to the
result of searching.
- 549 -
(b) In the additional information line near the bottom of the

screen, the following information of the address under the
cursor when the cursor is shown.
• Net number of the net with the cursor
• Address and its symbol and comment information
• Current value
(c) In the message line, error messages or inquiry messages will
be displayed depending on the situation.
(d) In the area for LADDER diagrams, 8 × 8, 8 × 6, 8 × 4, 7 × 8,
7 × 6, and 7 × 4 relays can be displayed (horizontally and
vertically). For details, see 30i-MODEL A PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(e) The gage indicating the current display position in relation
to the whole Ladder program is displayed at the right end of
the screen.
(2) LADDER diagram

(a) Nets wider than the screen width are displayed as
"Continuous Net" using continuous marks (">A1>"). Same
continuous marks mean they are connected with each other.
(3) Monitor
(a) Contacts and coils are displayed in different colors
according to the status of the signal. The status of power
flow is not displayed.
(b) Usually, the parameters of functional instructions are
monitored and displayed. You can suppress the monitor and
display by an appropriate setting. For details, see PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
- 550 -
(4) Displaying Symbols and Comments

(a) Usually, addresses are displayed above contacts and coils.
For an address with a symbol assigned, you can change the
setting so that the symbol is displayed instead of the address.
You can add colors to addresses. For details, see Subsection
“Setting the Display Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR Screen” in the PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL.
(b) If the address of a contact has a comment attached, the
comment is displayed below the contact. You can change its
display mode by changing the setting. You can add colors to
comments. For details, see Subsection “Setting the Display
Format of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen” in
the PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
(c) If the address used with coil has a comment string assigned,
the comment strings will be displayed at the right margin
beside the coil. You can use this margin area to display an
additional relay instead of the comment string by setting: at
this setting, one more relay can be displayed in each
diagram line. You can add colors to comments. For details,
see Subsection “Setting the Display Format of the
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR Screen” in the PMC
PROGRAMMING MANUAL.
Main soft keys of LADDER Diagram Monitor screen
LADDER Diagram Editor Switch to COLLECTIVE Screen Settings

Program List
MONITOR screen
Display Data Table

Exit
Search soft keys
Search Write Coil Search previous Search next
Jump to Search Functional Pick up a Ladder

Top/Bottom Search Address or Net Instruction Diagram net Switch range
- 551 -
7.6.3 Editing Ladder Programs

At LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen you can edit LADDER
program to change its behavior.
To switch LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, press [EDIT] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.
Following operations are available at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen.
• Delete by net [DELETE]

• Move by net [CUT] & [PASTE]
• Copy by net [COPY] & [PASTE]
• Change address of contacts and coils
"bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions
"number" or "byte address"
+ INPUT key
• Add new net [CREATE NET]
• Change construction of net [ZOOM]
• Make changes effective [UPDATE]
• Abandon changes [RESTRE]
• Cancel edit [CANCEL EDIT]
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
- 552 -
CAUTION
1 You can edit ladder programs regardless of whether
they are active or not. To execute a ladder program
with the results of editing being reflected, you must
update the ladder program. To do this, click the
[UPDATE] soft key, or update the program when
exiting from the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen. For details of the method of protecting
editing, see “PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(B-63983EN).”
2 After you have edited a sequence program, the
results of editing will be lost if the power is turned off
without first writing the edited sequence program to
flash ROM.
Write the sequence program to flash ROM on the
I/O screen. If you set "WRITE TO F-ROM(EDIT)" to
"YES" on the general functions' setting parameter
screen, a confirmation message will be displayed,
prompting you to ask whether to write a sequence
program to flash ROM after the end of editing. For
details of this setting, see “PMC PROGRAMMING
MANUAL (B-63983EN).”

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, except that no monitor displays of relays and
parameters of functional instructions are displayed.
(b) At right side of LADDER Diagram area, a position bar is
always displayed, which indicates screen position within
current subprogram: in LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen, this position bar is exclusively displayed with
comments of write coil. Sometimes, this position bar hides a
part of write coil comments.
(2) LADDER Diagram

(a) Style of LADDER Diagram is basically same with
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, except that
functional instructions are drawn always in "COMPACT"
format that has no monitor displays.
(b) Cursor is shown always. And the net, which will be an
object of following editing operations, is emphasized in
screen.
- 553 -
Soft keys of LADDER Diagram Editor screen
Program List
Change to Search soft keys Select net Copy net
Edit new net Delete net Cut net Paste net

Automatic input
Add net
Make changes
effective Exit
Change address Setting screen Cancel edit
Abandon changes Run/stop LADDER

Display address
map display
screen
WARNING
You have to pay special attention to modify running
LADDER program. If you modify LADDER program in
wrong way, or update LADDER program with the
machine in improper status, it may cause unexpected
reaction of the machine. You have to make it sure
that modifications you make on LADDER program is
appropriate, machine is in proper status, and nobody
is near the machine, when you update LADDER
program.
- 554 -
7.6.3.1 NET EDITOR screen

At NET EDITOR screen, you can create new net, and modify existing
net.
• Changing existing nets

If you move a net with the [ZOOM] soft key, you will enter a mode
(Modify mode) in which you can add changes to the net currently
indicated by the cursor.
• Adding a new net
When [CREATE NET] soft key is used, this screen is in "New
mode" to create new net from nothing.
Following operations are available at this screen:

• Place new contacts and coils "bit address" + [ ], [ ],
etc.
• Change type of contacts and coils [ ], [ ], etc.
• Place new functional instructions [FUNC]
• Change type of functional instructions [FUNC]
• Erase contacts, coils, and functional instructions [ ]
• Draw/erase connecting lines [ ], [ ], [ ]
• Edit data table of functional instructions [DATA TABLE]
• Insert line/column [INSERT LINE], [INSERT COLUMN],
[APPEND COLUMN]
• Change address of contacts and coils "bit address" + INPUT key
• Change parameters of functional instructions "number" or "byte
address" + INPUT key
• Abandon modifications [CANCEL EDIT]
• Restore the net to the state it was before editing [RESTRE]
Fig. 7.6.3 (a) Structure of the NET EDITOR screen
- 555 -

(a) It is basically same with LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR
screen, except that only one net is in this screen, and that
position bar at right edge of screen does not appear at this
screen.
(b) Current edit mode is indicated at right of the top line as
"NEW MODE" or "MODFY MODE". When [ZOOM] soft
key at LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen is used to
reach NET EDITOR screen, the screen is in Modify mode,
and when [CREATE NET] soft key is used, it is in New
mode.
(c) Current net number is displayed at right of the top line. The
net number is same with the net number in previous
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.
(d) NET EDITOR screen expands image of net horizontally for
a wider net according to its width, while LADDER
DIAGRAM MONITOR/EDITOR screen folds nets wider
than screen width. When net width is expanded over screen
width, attempt to move cursor out of screen will scroll net
image to the direction.
The net of maximum size occupies area of 1024 elements,
but actually available area may be little less for internal use
according to the internal condition: "element" means the
space that is occupied by single relay.
Soft keys of Net Editor screen

Horizontal Automatic
A contact Normal coil connection Delete input
B contact Inverted coil Functional Left vertical Right vertical

instructions connection connection
Set coil Data table Edit next net Insert column Cancel edit
Reset coil Abandon changes Insert line Add column Exit
- 556 -
7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen

At PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen you can create new program
and delete a program in addition to the function of PROGRAM LIST
VIEWER screen. To reach this screen, press [LIST] soft key at
LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Following operations are
available at PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen. For more detail of
these operations, see the descriptions of each key to operate.
• Create new program [NEW]
• Delete a program [DELETE]
Fig. 7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen
On the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR screen, a preview of the editor

screen for the ladder program currently positioned by the cursor on the
program list is displayed on the right of the screen.
Soft keys of Program List Editor screen
Display the contents of program Add new program
Search for program Delete a program
- 557 -
7.6.5 Collective Monitor Function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen allows you to specify the
ladder net containing the coils to be monitored, so that you can
monitor only the necessary ladder net.
The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen can be called in either of the
following ways:
(1) Calling from the PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
On the program list screen, move the cursor to the "COLLECT"
program position, then click the [ZOOM] soft key.
Fig. 7.6.5 (a) PROGRAM LIST VIEWER screen
(2) Calling from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen

On the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click the
[SWITCH] soft key.
Fig. 7.6.5 (b) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
- 558 -
7.6.5.1 COLLECTIVE MONITOR function

The COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is such as that shown below.
At first, it does not display any ladder diagram. Ladder nets will be
added to this screen as they are selected with coil search and pickup
operations. Up to 128 nets can be added to the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. If an attempt is made to add more, the most
recently added 128 nets will be displayed.
Fig. 7.6.5 (a) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen (initial screen)
(1) Operations using the soft keys
Soft keys of Collective Monitor screen

Initialization of COLLECTIVE
Program List Jump to the ladder diagram net MONITOR screen
Pick up a ladder Switches to LADDER Delete a net Screen setting

diagram net DIAGRAM MONITOR screen
Fig. 7.6.5 (b) Soft keys of COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
(2) Specifying the ladder diagram to monitor

The operation for picking up ladder nets which you want to
monitor on COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen is as follows.
(a) Specification of ladder nets on COLLECTIVE MONITOR
screen
• Specify the address by key input
Pick up a ladder net by keying in the address used by a
coil.
- 559 -
• Indication from a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE

MONITOR screen
Indicate a relay on an already picked up ladder net, with
the cursor, to pick up the net that uses the relay address
for the coil.
(b) Specifying a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen
Specify a net from the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR
screen to pick it and load it into the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
(3) Picking up a ladder net on the COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen

You can pick up a ladder net from the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) Address specification
(i) Enter the address to monitor (for example, R10.1).
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen.
(b) Specification of an address from a ladder net on the screen
(i) Move the cursor to a relay on the ladder net that uses
the address you want to monitor.
(ii) Click the [PICKUP] soft key.
(iii) The net in which a coil uses the address specified in (i)
will be picked up and loaded at the beginning of the
screen, and the cursor moves to the specified coil
position.
Fig. 7.6.5 (c) COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen
- 560 -
(4) Picking up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM

MONITOR screen
You can pick up a ladder net from the LADDER DIAGRAM
MONITOR screen. The procedure for picking up a ladder net is
as described below.
(a) From the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen, click
the [SEARCH] soft key to display the soft keys for search.
(b) Move the cursor to the ladder net to pick up.
(c) Click the [PICKUP] soft key to pick up and load the net
specified in (b) at the beginning of the COLLECTIVE
MONITOR screen.
(d) For the ladder net picked up and loaded into the
COLLECTIVE MONITOR screen, the "•" mark is
displayed at the left end of the net.
Fig. 7.6.5 (d) LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen (search soft keys)
- 561 -
7.7 LIST OF ADDRESSES
Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows:
[Example of controlling one path using one PMC]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~
[Example of controlling three path using one PMC]
CNC G0000~ X000~
Path 1 F0000~ Y000~

PMC Machine tool
G1000~
Path 2 F1000~
G2000~
Path 3
F2000~
- 562 -
[Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system]
CNC Signal PMC

I/F
G0000~ G0000~
Path 1 X000~
F0000~ F0000~
Y000~ I/O device

G1000~ G1000~ First for first
PMC machine
Path 2 F1000~ F1000~
First G2000~ G2000~

machine Path 3
group F2000~ F2000~
G3000~ G3000~
Path 4 F3000~ F3000~
G4000~ G4000~
Path 5 F4000~ F4000~
G5000~ G0000~
Path 6 F5000~ F0000~ X000~
Second I/O device
G6000~ G1000~ PMC for second
Y000~
machine
Path 7
F6000~ F1000~
Second
machine
group G7000~ G2000~
Path 8 F7000~ F2000~
G8000~ G3000~
Path 9 F8000~ F3000~
X000~
G9000~ G0000~
Third Third I/O device
machine Path 10 F9000~ F0000~ PMC Y000~ for third
group machine
NOTE
Each PMC of a multipath PMC system has an
independent signal area. The F, G, X, and Y signal
addresses of each PMC begin with 0. On the other
hand, the F and G signal addresses from the
viewpoint of the CNC are fixed for each path
number. Note that the F and G signal addresses
used in programming of each ladder are different
from those from the viewpoint of the CNC.
- 563 -
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both lathe system and machining center system are
described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal
address figure as shown below. This means either lathe system or
machining center system does not have this signal. Upper part is for
lathe system and lower part is for machining center system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn053 *CDZ ROVLP UINT TMRON
M series
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the lathe
system while the other signals for both the lathe system and
machining system.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
T series
Gn040 OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 1]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for machining center system only.
- 564 -
NOTE
1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal is
*ESP<X008.4>, *ESP<X008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively.
2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of
a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (for path 1 on PMC side) : #1
#1 to #3 represent signals prepared exclusively for, respectively, paths 1 to 3 on the
PMC side.
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP
For the G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, and #SP represent signals
prepared exclusively for, respectively, each path, controlled axis, and spindle on the
CNC side.
- PMC axis control group type : #PX
#PX represents signals prepared for each PMC axis control group.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used in
each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
: :
10th path : n=9 (No. 9000 to 9999)
5 If more than eight axes per path are used with controlled axis type signals, use
parameter No. 3021 to take an appropriate measure.
6 If more than four axes per path are used with spindle type signals, use parameter
No. 3022 to take an appropriate measure.
- 565 -
MT → CNC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004 ESKIP -MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 -MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 +XAE2#1 +XAE1#1

#1
T series SKIP
SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
X004 ESKIP +XAE3#1 +XAE2#1 +XAE1#1

#1 #1 #1 #1
M series SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3
SKIP6 #1 SKIP2 #1 SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1
X005
X006
X007 *DEC8
#2
*DEC7
#2
*DEC6
#2
*DEC5
#2
*DEC4
#2
*DEC3
#2
*DEC2
#2
*DEC1
#2
X008 *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP)
X009 *DEC8
#1
*DEC7
#1
*DEC6
#1
*DEC5
#1
*DEC4
#1
*DEC3
#1
*DEC2
#1
*DEC1
#1
X010 *DEC8
#3
*DEC7
#3
*DEC6
#3
*DEC5
#3
*DEC4
#3
*DEC3
#3
*DEC2
#3
*DEC1
#3
X011 ESKIP#3 -MIT2#3 +MIT2#3 -MIT1#3 +MIT1#3 +XAE2#3 +XAE1#3

#3
T series SKIP
X011 ESKIP#3 +XAE3#3 +XAE2#3 +XAE1#3

#3 #3 #3 #3
X012
X013 ESKIP#2 -MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 -MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 +XAE3#2 +XAE2#2

#2
T series SKIP
X013 ESKIP#2 +XAE3#2 +XAE2#2 +XAE1#2

#2 #2 #2 #2
- 566 -
PMC → CNC
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0#P
Gn001 ED15#P ED14#P ED13#P ED12#P ED11#P ED10#P ED9#P ED8#P
Gn002 ESTB#P EA6#P EA5#P EA4#P EA3#P EA2#P EA1#P EA0#P
Gn003
Gn004 MFIN3#P MFIN2#P FIN#P
Gn005 BFIN#P AFL#P TFIN#P SFIN#P MFIN#P
Gn006 SKIPP#P OVC#P *ABSM

#P
SRN#P
Gn007 RLSOT
#P
EXLM#P *FLWU
#P
RLSOT3#P ST#P STLK#P RVS#P
Gn008 ERS#P RRW#P *SP#P *ESP#P *BSL#P *CSL#P *IT#P
Gn009 PN16#P PN8#P PN4#P PN2#P PN1#P
Gn010 *JV7#P *JV6#P *JV5#P *JV4#P *JV3#P *JV2#P *JV1#P *JV0#P
Gn011 *JV15#P *JV14#P *JV13#P *JV12#P *JV11#P *JV10#P *JV9#P *JV8#P
Gn012 *FV7#P *FV6#P *FV5#P *FV4#P *FV3#P *FV2#P *FV1#P *FV0#P
Gn013 *AFV7#P *AFV6#P *AFV5#P *AFV4#P *AFV3#P *AFV2#P *AFV1#P *AFV0#P
Gn014 ROV2#P ROV1#P
Gn015
Gn016
F1D#P
Gn017
Gn018 HS2D#P HS2C#P HS2B#P HS2A#P HS1D#P HS1C#P HS1B#P HS1A#P
Gn019 RT#P MP2#P MP1#P HS3D#P HS3C#P HS3B#P HS3A#P
Gn020 HS4D#P HS4C#P HS4B#P HS4A#P
- 567 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn021
Gn022
#P
Gn023 ALNGH
#P
RGHTH HREV#P HNDLF
#P
Gn024 EPN7#P EPN6#P EPN5#P EPN4#P EPN3#P EPN2#P EPN1#P EPN0#P
Gn025 EPNS#P EPN13

#P
EPN12
#P
EPN11
#P
EPN10
#P
EPN9#P EPN8#P
Gn026 *SSTP4#SP SWS4

#P
PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#P
Gn027 CON#P *SSTP3#SP *SSTP2#SP *SSTP1#SP SWS3

#P
SWS2
#P
SWS1
#P
Gn028 PC2SLC#P SPSTPA#SP *SCPFA#SP *SUCPFA#SP GR2#SP GR1#SP
Gn029 *SSTP#P SOR#P SAR#P GR32#SP GR31#SP GR22#SP GR21#SP
Gn030 SOV7#P SOV6#P SOV5#P SOV4#P SOV3#P SOV2#P SOV1#P SOV0#P
Gn031 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P GR42#SP GR41#SP M3R#P
Gn032 R08I#SP R07I#SP R06I#SP R05I#SP R04I#SP R03I#SP R02I#SP R01I#SP
Gn033 SIND#SP SSIN#SP SGN#SP R12I#SP R11I#SP R10I#SP R09I#SP
Gn034 R08I2#SP R07I2#SP R06I2#SP R05I2#SP R04I2#SP R03I2#SP R02I2#SP R01I2#SP
Gn035 SIND2
#SP
SSIN2
#SP
SGN2
#SP
R12I2#SP R11I2#SP R10I2#SP R09I2#SP
Gn037 SIND3
#SP
SSIN3
#SP
SGN3
#SP
Gn038 *BECLP#P *BEUCP#P

SDPC
#P
SPPHS
#P
SPSYC
#P
SBRT#P *PLSST
#P
Gn039 GOQSM #P WOQSM #P

OFN5#P OFN4#P OFN3#P OFN2#P OFN1#P OFN0#P
WOSET#P PRC#P S2TLS#P
Gn040 OFN9#P OFN8#P OFN7#P OFN6#P
Gn041 HS2ID#P HS2IC#P HS2IB#P HS2IA#P HS1ID#P HS1IC#P HS1IB#P HS1IA#P
Gn042 DMMC#P HS3ID#P HS3IC#P HS3IB#P HS3IA#P
- 568 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn043 ZRN#P DNCI#P MD4#P MD2#P MD1#P
Gn044 MLK#P BDT1#P
Gn045 BDT9#P BDT8#P BDT7#P BDT6#P BDT5#P BDT4#P BDT3#P BDT2#P
Gn046 DRN#P KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK#P KEYP
Gn047 TL128#P TL64#P TL32#P TL16#P TL08#P TL04#P TL02#P TL01#P
Gn048 TLRST
#P
TLRSTI
#P
TLSKP
#P
LFCIV#P TL512#P TL256#P
Gn049 *TLV7#P *TLV6#P *TLV5#P *TLV4#P *TLV3#P *TLV2#P *TLV1#P *TLV0#P
Gn050 *TLV9#P *TLV8#P
Gn051
*CHLD#P CHPST
#P
*CHP8#P *CHP4#P *CHP2#P *CHP1#P
Gn052
Gn053 *CDZ#P SMZ

#P
ROVLP
#P
UINT
#P
TMRON
#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
Gn059 NSYNCA#P TRRTN

#P
TRESC
#P
#P
Gn060 *TSB
RGTSP4#SP RGTSP3#SP RGTSP2#SP RGTSP1#SP #P

Gn061 RGTAP
Gn062 HEAD2 RTNT#P
Gn063 NMWT
#P
NOZAGC#P SLSPB
#P
SLSPA
#P
NOWT HEAD
INFD#P
Gn064 ESRSYC#P SLPCB

#P
SLSPA
#P
- 569 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn065 HCSKP4
#P
HCSKP3
#P
HCSKP2
#P
HCSKP1
#P
HSRT
#P
Gn066 EKSET RTRCT

#P
ENBKY IGNVRY#P
MLTC#P
Gn067 HCREQ HCABT MCHK#P MMOD#P CGREN
#P
MTL07#P MTL06#P MTL05#P MTL04#P MTL03#P MTL02#P MTL01#P MTL00#P

Gn068
MTL15#P MTL14#P MTL13#P MTL12#P MTL11#P MTL10#P MTL09#P MTL08#P

Gn069
Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA#SP SRVA

#SP
CTH1A#SP CTH2A#SP TLMHA#SP TLMLA#SP
Gn071 RCHA
#SP
RSLA#SP INTGA
#SP
SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA
#SP
ARSTA#SP
Gn072 RCHHGA#SP MFNHGA#SP INCMDA#SP OVRIDA#SP DEFMDA#SP NRROA#SP ROTAA#SP INDXA

#SP
Gn073 MPOFA#SP SLVA#SP MORCMA#SP
Gn074 MRDYB#SP ORCMB#SP SFRB#SP SRVB

#SP
CTH1B#SP CTH2B#SP TLMHB#SP TLMLB#SP
Gn075 RCHB
#SP
RSLB#SP INTGB
#SP
SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB
#SP
ARSTB#SP
Gn076 RCHHGB#SP MFNHGB#SP INCMDB#SP OVRIDB#SP DEFMDB#SP NRROB#SP ROTAB#SP INDXB

#SP
Gn077 MPOFB#SP SLVB#SP MORCMB#SP
Gn078 SH07A#SP SH06A#SP SH05A#SP SH04A#SP SH03A#SP SH02A#SP SH01A#SP SH00A#SP
Gn079 SH11A#SP SH10A#SP SH09A#SP SH08A#SP
Gn080 SH07B#SP SH06B#SP SH05B#SP SH04B#SP SH03B#SP SH02B#SP SH01B#SP SH00B#SP
Gn081 SH11B#SP SH10B#SP SH09B#SP SH08B#SP
Gn082 EUI07#P EUI06#P EUI05#P EUI04#P EUI03#P EUI02#P EUI01#P EUI00#P
Gn083 EUI15#P EUI14#P EUI13#P EUI12#P EUI11#P EUI10#P EUI09#P EUI08#P
Gn084
Gn085
Gn086 -Ja#P +Ja#P -Jg#P +Jg#P
- 570 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn087 MP42#P MP41#P MP32#P MP31#P MP22#P MP21#P
Gn088 HS4ID#P HS4IC#P HS4IB#P HS4IA#P
Gn089
#P
G2SLC G2Y#P G2Z#P G2X#P G2RVY
#P
G2RVZ
#P
G2RVX
#P
Gn090
Gn091
Gn092
Gn093
Gn094
Gn095
Gn096 HROV#P *HROV6#P *HROV5#P *HROV4#P *HROV3#P *HROV2#P *HROV1#P *HROV0#P
Gn097
Gn098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
Gn099
Gn100 +J8#SV +J7#SV +J6#SV +J5#SV +J4#SV +J3#SV +J2#SV +J1#SV
Gn101 *+ED28#SV *+ED27#SV *+ED26#SV *+ED25#SV *+ED24#SV *+ED23#SV *+ED22#SV *+ED21#SV
Gn102 -J8#SV -J7#SV -J6#SV -J5#SV -J4#SV -J3#SV -J2#SV -J1#SV
Gn103 *-ED28#SV *-ED27#SV *-ED26#SV *-ED25#SV *-ED24#SV *-ED23#SV *-ED22#SV *-ED21#SV
Gn104 +EXL8
#SV
+EXL7
#SV
+EXL6
#SV
+EXL5
#SV
+EXL4
#SV
+EXL3
#SV
+EXL2
#SV
+EXL1
#SV
Gn105 -EXL8
#SV
-EXL7
#SV
-EXL6
#SV
-EXL5
#SV
-EXL4
#SV
-EXL3
#SV
-EXL2
#SV
-EXL1
#SV
Gn106 MI8#SV MI7#SV MI6#SV MI5#SV MI4#SV MI3#SV MI2#SV MI1#SV
Gn107 *+ED38#SV *+ED37#SV *+ED36#SV *+ED35#SV *+ED34#SV *+ED33#SV *+ED32#SV *+ED31#SV
Gn108 MLK8#SV MLK7#SV MLK6#SV MLK5#SV MLK4#SV MLK3#SV MLK2#SV MLK1#SV
- 571 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn110 +LM8#SV +LM7#SV +LM6#SV +LM5#SV +LM4#SV +LM3#SV +LM2#SV +LM1#SV
Gn111
Gn112 -LM8#SV -LM7#SV -LM6#SV -LM5#SV -LM4#SV -LM3#SV -LM2#SV -LM1#SV
Gn113
Gn114 *+L8#SV *+L7#SV *+L6#SV *+L5#SV *+L4#SV *+L3#SV *+L2#SV *+L1#SV
Gn115
Gn116 *-L8#SV *-L7#SV *-L6#SV *-L5#SV *-L4#SV *-L3#SV *-L2#SV *-L1#SV
Gn117
Gn118 *+ED8
#SV
*+ED7
#SV
*+ED6
#SV
*+ED5
#SV
*+ED4
#SV
*+ED3
#SV
*+ED2
#SV
*+ED1
#SV
Gn119
Gn121
Gn122 PK8#SV PK7#SV PK6#SV PK5#SV PK4#SV PK3#SV PK2#SV PK1#SV

#P #P
PKESS2 PKESS1
Gn123
Gn124 DTCH8#SV DTCH7#SV DTCH6#SV DTCH5#SV DTCH4#SV DTCH3#SV DTCH2#SV DTCH1#SV
Gn125 IUDD8#SV IUDD7#SV IUDD6#SV IUDD5#SV IUDD4#SV IUDD3#SV IUDD2#SV IUDD1#SV
Gn126 SVF8#SV SVF7#SV SVF6#SV SVF5#SV SVF4#SV SVF3#SV SVF2#SV SVF1#SV
Gn127
Gn128 MIX8#SV MIX7#SV MIX6#SV MIX5#SV MIX4#SV MIX3#SV MIX2#SV MIX1#SV
Gn129
Gn130 *IT8#SV *IT7#SV *IT6#SV *IT5#SV *IT4#SV *IT3#SV *IT2#SV *IT1#SV
- 572 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn131
Gn132 +MIT2#P +MIT1#P

+MIT8#P +MIT7#P +MIT6#P +MIT5#P +MIT4#P +MIT3#P
Gn133
Gn134 -MIT2#P -MIT1#P

-MIT8#P -MIT7#P -MIT6#P -MIT5#P -MIT4#P -MIT3#P
Gn135
Gn136 EAX8#SV EAX7#SV EAX6#SV EAX5#SV EAX4#SV EAX3#SV EAX2#SV EAX1#SV
Gn137
Gn138 SYNC8#SV SYNC7#SV SYNC6#SV SYNC5#SV SYNC4#SV SYNC3#SV SYNC2#SV SYNC1#SV
Gn139
Gn140 SYNCJ8#SV SYNCJ7#SV SYNCJ6#SV SYNCJ5#SV SYNCJ4#SV SYNCJ3#SV SYNCJ2#SV SYNCJ1#SV
Gn141
Gn142 EBUFA#PX ECLRA#PX ESTPA#PX ESOFA#PX ESBKA#PX EMBUFA#PX ELCKZA#PX EFINA

#PX
Gn143 EMSBKA#PX EC6A#PX EC5A#PX EC4A#PX EC3A#PX EC2A#PX EC1A#PX EC0A#PX
Gn144 EIF7A
#PX
EIF6A
#PX
EIF5A
#PX
EIF4A
#PX
EIF3A
#PX
EIF2A
#PX
EIF1A
#PX
EIF0A
#PX
Gn145 EIF15A#PX EIF14A#PX EIF13A#PX EIF12A#PX EIF11A#PX EIF10A#PX EIF9A

#PX
EIF8A
#PX
Gn146 EID7A
#PX
EID6A
#PX
EID5A
#PX
EID4A
#PX
EID3A
#PX
EID2A
#PX
EID1A
#PX
EID0A
#PX
Gn147 EID15A#PX EID14A#PX EID13A#PX EID12A#PX EID11A#PX EID10A#PX EID9A

#PX
EID8A
#PX
Gn148 EID23A#PX EID22A#PX EID21A#PX EID20A#PX EID19A#PX EID18A#PX EID17A#PX EID16A#PX
Gn149 EID31A#PX EID30A#PX EID29A#PX EID28A#PX EID27A#PX EID26A#PX EID25A#PX EID24A#PX
Gn150 EDRN#P ERT#P EOVC#P EROV2

#P
EROV1
#P
Gn151 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P
Gn152
- 573 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn153
Gn154 EBUFB#PX ECLRB#PX ESTPB#PX ESOFB#PX ESBKB#PX EMBUFB#PX ELCKZB#PX EFINB

#PX
Gn155 EMSBKB#PX EC6B#PX EC5B#PX EC4B#PX EC3B#PX EC2B#PX EC1B#PX EC0B#PX
Gn156 EIF7B
#PX
EIF6B
#PX
EIF5B
#PX
EIF4B
#PX
EIF3B
#PX
EIF2B
#PX
EIF1B
#PX
EIF0B
#PX
Gn157 EIF15B#PX EIF14B#PX EIF13B#PX EIF12B#PX EIF11B#PX EIF10B#PX EIF9B

#PX
EIF8B
#PX
Gn158 EID7B
#PX
EID6B
#PX
EID5B
#PX
EID4B
#PX
EID3B
#PX
EID2B
#PX
EID1B
#PX
EID0B
#PX
Gn159 EID15B#PX EID14B#PX EID13B#PX EID12B#PX EID11B#PX EID10B#PX EID9B

#PX
EID8B
#PX
Gn160 EID23B#PX EID22B#PX EID21B#PX EID20B#PX EID19B#PX EID18B#PX EID17B#PX EID16B#PX
Gn161 EID31B#PX EID30B#PX EID29B#PX EID28B#PX EID27B#PX EID26B#PX EID25B#PX EID24B#PX
Gn162 EOVCB#PX
Gn163 *EFOV7B#PX *EFOV6B#PX *EFOV5B#PX *EFOV4B#PX *EFOV3B#PX *EFOV2B#PX *EFOV1B#PX *EFOV0B#PX
Gn164
Gn165
Gn166 EBUFC#PX ECLRC#PX ESTPC#PX ESOFC#PX ESBKC#PX EMBUFC#PX ELCKZC#PX EFINC

#PX
Gn167 EMSBKC#PX EC6C#PX EC5C#PX EC4C#PX EC3C#PX EC2C#PX EC1C#PX EC0C#PX
Gn168 EIF7C
#PX
EIF6C
#PX
EIF5C
#PX
EIF4C
#PX
EIF3C
#PX
EIF2C
#PX
EIF1C
#PX
EIF0C
#PX
Gn169 EIF15C#PX EIF14C#PX EIF13C#PX EIF12C#PX EIF11C#PX EIF10C#PX EIF9C

#PX
EIF8C
#PX
Gn170 EID7C
#PX
EID6C
#PX
EID5C
#PX
EID4C
#PX
EID3C
#PX
EID2C
#PX
EID1C
#PX
EID0C
#PX
Gn171 EID15C#PX EID14C#PX EID13C#PX EID12C#PX EID11C#PX EID10C#PX EID9C

#PX
EID8C
#PX
Gn172 EID23C#PX EID22C#PX EID21C#PX EID20C#PX EID19C#PX EID18C#PX EID17C#PX EID16C#PX
Gn173 EID31C#PX EID30C#PX EID29C#PX EID28C#PX EID27C#PX EID26C#PX EID25C#PX EID24C#PX
Gn174 EOVCC#PX
- 574 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn175 *EFOV7C#PX *EFOV6C#PX *EFOV5C#PX *EFOV4C#PX *EFOV3C#PX *EFOV2C#PX *EFOV1C#PX *EFOV0C#PX
Gn176
Gn177
Gn178 EBUFD#PX ECLRD#PX ESTPD#PX ESOFD#PX ESBKD#PX EMBUFD#PX ELCKZD#PX EFIND

#PX
Gn179 EMSBKD#PX EC6D#PX EC5D#PX EC4D#PX EC3D#PX EC2D#PX EC1D#PX EC0D#PX
Gn180 EIF7D
#PX
EIF6D
#PX
EIF5D
#PX
EIF4D
#PX
EIF3D
#PX
EIF2D
#PX
EIF1D
#PX
EIF0D
#PX
Gn181 EIF15D#PX EIF14D#PX EIF13D#PX EIF12D#PX EIF11D#PX EIF10D#PX EIF9D

#PX
EIF8D
#PX
Gn182 EID7D
#PX
EID6D
#PX
EID5D
#PX
EID4D
#PX
EID3D
#PX
EID2D
#PX
EID1D
#PX
EID0D
#PX
Gn183 EID15D#PX EID14D#PX EID13D#PX EID12D#PX EID11D#PX EID10D#PX EID9D

#PX
EID8D
#PX
Gn184 EID23D#PX EID22D#PX EID21D#PX EID20D#PX EID19D#PX EID18D#PX EID17D#PX EID16D#PX
Gn185 EID31D#PX EID30D#PX EID29D#PX EID28D#PX EID27D#PX EID26D#PX EID25D#PX EID24D#PX
Gn186 EOVCD#PX
Gn187 *EFOV7D#PX *EFOV6D#PX *EFOV5D#PX *EFOV4D#PX *EFOV3D#PX *EFOV2D#PX *EFOV1D#PX *EFOV0D#PX
Gn188
Gn189
Gn190 OVLS8#SV OVLS7#SV OVLS6#SV OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV
Gn191
Gn192 IGVRY8#SV IGVRY7#SV IGVRY6#SV IGVRY5#SV IGVRY4#SV IGVRY3#SV IGVRY2#SV IGVRY1#SV
Gn193 HDSR#P
Gn194
Gn195
Gn196 *DEC8
#SV
*DEC7
#SV
*DEC6
#SV
*DEC5
#SV
*DEC4
#SV
*DEC3
#SV
*DEC2
#SV
*DEC1
#SV
- 575 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn197 MTD MTC MTB MTA
Gn198
Gn199 IOLBH2 IOLBH1
Gn200 EASIP8#SV EASIP7#SV EASIP6#SV EASIP5#SV EASIP4#SV EASIP3#SV EASIP2#SV EASIP1#SV
Gn201
Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SV NDCAL5#SV NDCAL4#SV NDCAL3#SV NDCAL2#SV NDCAL1#SV
Gn203 RWFL AOFS2

#P
AOFS1
#P
CHGAO#P
Gn204 MRDYC#SP ORCMC#SP SFRC

#SP
SRVC
#SP
CTH1C#SP CTH2C#SP TLMHC#SP TLMLC#SP
#SP
Gn205 RCHC
#SP
RSLC INTGC
#SP
SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP
OVRIDC#S
Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP P DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC
#SP
#SP
Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC MORCMC#SP
Gn208 SH07C#SP SH06C#SP SH05C#SP SH04C#SP SH03C#SP SH02C#SP SH01C#SP SH00C#SP
Gn209 SH11C#SP SH10C#SP SH09C#SP SH08C#SP
Gn212
Gn213
Gn214
Gn215
Gn216
Gn217
Gn220 *CGROV7
#P
*CGROV6
#P
*CGROV5
#P
*CGROV4
#P
*CGROV3
#P
*CGROV2
#P
*CGROV1
#P
*CGROV0
#P
Gn251 LCBS
- 576 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn263
Gn264 ESSYC4#SP ESSYC3#SP ESSYC2#SP ESSYC1#SP
Gn265 PKESE4#SP PKESE3#SP PKESE2#SP PKESE1#SP
Gn266 MRDYD#SP ORCMD#SP SFRD

#SP
SRVD
#SP
CTH1D#SP CTH2D#SP TLMHD#SP TLMLD#SP
Gn267 RCHD
#SP
RSLD#SP INTGD
#SP
SOCND#SP MCFND#SP SPSLD#SP *ESPD#SP ARSTD#SP
OVRIDD#S
Gn268 RCHHGD#SP MFNHGD#SP INCMDD#SP P DEFMDD#SP NRROD#SP ROTAD#SP INDXD#SP
MORC
Gn269 MPOFD
#SP
SLVD#SP #SP
MD
Gn270 SH07D#SP SH06D#SP SH05D#SP SH04D#SP SH03D#SP SH02D#SP SH01D#SP SH00D#SP
Gn271 SH11D#SP SH10D#SP SH09D#SP SH08D#SP
Gn273 SIND4
#SP
SSIN4
#SP
SGN4
#SP
Gn274 CSFI4#SP CSFI3#SP CSFI2#SP CSFI1#SP CONS4#SP CONS3#SP CONS2#SP CONS1#SP
Gn275
Gn276 UI107#P UI106#P UI105#P UI104#P UI103#P UI102#P UI101#P UI100#P
- 577 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn288 SPSYC4#SP SPSYC3#SP SPSYC2#SP SPSYC1#SP
Gn289 SPPHS4#SP SPPHS3#SP SPPHS2#SP SPPHS1#SP
Gn290 PGCK#P
Gn291
Gn292 ITCD ITCD3 ITCD2 ITCD1 ITRC
Gn293
Gn294
Gn295 CNCKY C2SEND
Gn296 DI8#SV DI7#SV DI6#SV DI5#SV DI4#SV DI3#SV DI2#SV DI1#SV
Gn297 AOFS2
#P
AOFS1
#P
CHGAO#P BCAN#P
Gn298 RNDH#P TB_BASE

#P
Gn299
Gn300
Gn301
Gn302
Gn303
Gn304
Gn305
Gn306
- 578 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn307
Gn308
Gn309
Gn310
Gn311
Gn312
Gn313
Gn314
Gn315
Gn316
Gn317
Gn318
Gn319
Gn320
Gn321
Gn322
Gn323
Gn324
Gn325
Gn326
Gn327
Gn328 TLRSTI4
#P
TLRSTI3
#P
TLRSTI2
#P
TLRSTI1
#P
TLRST4
#P
TLRST3
#P
TLRST2
#P
TLRST1
#P
- 579 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn329 TLNCT4
#P
TLNCT3
#P
TLNCT2
#P
TLNCT1
#P
TLSKP4
#P
TLSKP3
#P
TLSKP2
#P
TLSKP1
#P
Gn330 TKEY5 TKEY4 TKEY3 TKEY2 TKEY1 TKEY0
Gn331
Gn332
Gn333
Gn334
Gn335
Gn336
Gn337
Gn338
Gn339
Gn340
Gn341 *+ED48
#SV
*+ED47
#SV
*+ED46
#SV
*+ED45
#SV
*+ED44
#SV
*+ED43
#SV
*+ED42
#SV
*+ED41
#SV
Gn342 *-ED48
#SV
*-ED47
#SV
*-ED46
#SV
*-ED45
#SV
*-ED44
#SV
*-ED43
#SV
*-ED42
#SV
*-ED41
#SV
Gn343 *+ED58
#SV
*+ED57
#SV
*+ED56
#SV
*+ED55
#SV
*+ED54
#SV
*+ED53
#SV
*+ED52
#SV
*+ED51
#SV
Gn344 *-ED58
#SV
*-ED57
#SV
*-ED56
#SV
*-ED55
#SV
*-ED54
#SV
*-ED53
#SV
*-ED52
#SV
*-ED51
#SV
Gn345
Gn346
Gn347 NOT3DM#P HDN#P
Gn348
Gn349
Gn350
- 580 -
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn351
Gn352 *FHRO7#P *FHRO6#P *FHRO5#P *FHRO4#P *FHRO3#P *FHRO2#P *FHRO1#P *FHRO0#P
Gn353 FHROV#P *FHRO9#P *FHRO8#P
Gn354 THD07
#P
THD06
#P
THD05
#P
THD04
#P
THD03
#P
THD02
#P
THD01
#P
THD00
#P
Gn355 THD15
#P
THD14
#P
THD13
#P
THD12
#P
THD11
#P
THD10
#P
THD09
#P
THD08
#P
Gn356 THSTB
#P
THML
#P
Gn357
Gn358 WPRST8 WPRST7 WPRST6 WPRST5 WPRST4 WPRST3 WPRST2 WPRST1
to
Gn375
Gn376 SOV27 SOV26 SOV25 SOV24 SOV23 SOV22 SOV21 SOV20
Gn379 HS5ID#P HS5IC#P HS5IB#P HS5IA#P HS5D#P HS5C#P HS5B#P HS5A#P
Gn380 MP52#P MP51#P
Gn381
Gn382
Gn383
Gn384
Gn385
Gn386
Gn387
Gn388
- 581 -
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn389
Gn390
Gn391
Gn392
Gn393
Gn394
Gn395
Gn396
Gn397
Gn398
Gn399
Gn400 *SUCPFD#SP *SUCPFC#SP *SUCPFB#SP
Gn401 *SCPFD#SP *SCPFC#SP *SCPFB#SP
Gn402 SPSTPD#SP SPSTPC#SP SPSTPB#SP
Gn403 SLPCD#P SLPCC#P SLSPD#P SLSPC#P
Gn404
Gn405
ITF08#P ITF07#P ITF06#P ITF05#P ITF04#P ITF03#P ITF02#P ITF01#P

Gn406
ITF10#P ITF09#P
Gn407 ITCD6 ITCD5 ITCD4
Gn408 MDISL HEAD4 HEAD3 STCHK#P
Gn409
Gn410
- 582 -
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn411 HS4IE
#P
HS3IE
#P
HS2IE
#P
HS1IE
#P
HS4E
#P
HS3E
#S
HS2E
#P
HS1E
#P
Gn412 HS5IE
#P
HS5E
#P
to
Gn512 MCST8
#P
MCST7
#P
MCST6
#P
MCST5
#P
MCST4
#P
MCST3
#P
MCST2
#P
MCST1
#P
Gn513 MCST16#P MCST15#P MCST14#P MCST13#P MCST12#P MCST11#P MCST10#P MCST9

#P
Gn514 MCFIN#P
Gn515 PPK8
#SV
PPK7
#SV
PPK6
#SV
PPK5
#SV
PPK4
#SV
PPK3
#SV
PPK2
#SV
PPK1
#SV
Gn516 SEMI8 #SV SEMI7#SV SEMI6#SV SEMI5#SV SEMI4#SV SEMI3#SV SEMI2#SV SEMI1#SV
#P #P
Gn517 GAE3
#P GAE2 GAE1
Gn518 BOV
#P
Gn519 TSE#P
Gn520
Gn521 SRVON8 SRVON7 SRVON6 SRVON5 SRVON4 SRVON3 SRVON2 SRVON1
Gn522
Gn523 SVRVS8 SVRVS7 SVRVS6 SVRVS5 SVRVS4 SVRVS3 SVRVS2 SVRVS1
Gn524
MT8N07#P MT8N06#P MT8N05#P MT8N04#P MT8N03#P MT8N02#P MT8N01#P MT8N00#P

Gn525

Gn526

Gn527

Gn528
to
Gn531 HBTRN
#P
MRVM
#P
FWSTP
#P
Gn532
- 583 -
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn533 SSRS #P
SSR4 #SP
SSR3 #SP
SSR2 #SP
SSR1#SP
Gn534 AXC4#P AXC2#P AXC1#P
Gn535
Gn536 SPSP#P
to
Gn544 MHLC5
#P
MHLC4
#P
MHLC3
#P
MHLC2
#P
MHLC1
#P
Gn545 MHUS5
#P
MHUS4
#P
MHUS3
#P
MHUS2
#P
MHUS1
#P
Gn546
Gn547
Gn548 *CL8#SV *CL7#SV *CL6#SV *CL5#SV *CL4#SV *CL3#SV *CL2#SV *CL1#SV
to
Gn767
- 584 -
CNC → PMC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD#P
Fn001 MA#P TAP#P ENB#SP DEN#P BAL#P RST#P AL#P
Fn002 MDRN#P CUT#P SRNMV#P THRD#P CSS#P RPDO#P INCH#P
Fn003 MEDT#P MMEM# MRMT#P MMDI#P MJ#P MH#P MINC#P

P
Fn004 MREF#P MAFL#P MSBK#P MABSM#P MMLK#P MBDT1

#P
Fn005 MBDT9
#P
MBDT8
#P
MBDT7
#P
MBDT6
#P
MBDT5
#P
MBDT4
#P
MBDT3
#P
MBDT2
#P
Fn006 ERTVA#P MDIRST#P TPPRS
Fn007 BF#P TF#P SF#P MF#P
Fn008 MF3#P MF2#P
Fn009 DM00#P DM01#P DM02#P DM30#P
Fn010 M07#P M06#P M05#P M04#P M03#P M02#P M01#P M00#P
Fn018
Fn019
Fn020
- 585 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn021
Fn022 S07#P S06#P S05#P S04#P S03#P S02#P S01#P S00#P
Fn026 T07#P T06#P T05#P T04#P T03#P T02#P T01#P T00#P
Fn030 B07#P B06#P B05#P B04#P B03#P B02#P B01#P B00#P
Fn034 SRSRDY#P SRSP1R#SP SRSP2R#SP SRSP3R#SP SRSP4R#SP

GR3O#P GR2O#P GR1O#P
Fn035 SPAL#P
Fn036 R08O#SP R07O#SP R06O#SP R05O#SP R04O#SP R03O#SP R02O#SP R01O#SP
Fn037 R12O#SP R11O#SP R10O#SP R09O#SP
Fn038 ENB3#SP ENB2#SP SUCLPA#SP SCLPA#SP
Fn039 #P #P ENB4#SP MSPOSA#SP

CHPCYL CHPMD
Fn040 AR07#SP AR06#SP AR05#SP AR04#SP AR03#SP AR02#SP AR01#SP AR00#SP
Fn041 AR15#SP AR14#SP AR13#SP AR12#SP AR11#SP AR10#SP AR09#SP AR08#SP
Fn042
- 586 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn043 SYCAL4#SP SYCAL3#SP SYCAL2#SP SYCAL1#SP
Fn044 SYCAL
#P
FSPPH
#P
FSPSY
#P
FSCSL
#P
Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA#SP LDT2A

#SP
LDT1A
#SP
SARA
#SP
SDTA#SP SSTA#SP ALMA
#SP
Fn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#SP SLVSA#SP RCFNA#SP RCHPA#SP CFINA

#SP
CHIPA
#SP
Fn047 INCSTA#SP PC1DEA#SP
Fn048 CSPENA#SP
Fn049 ORARB#SP TLMB#SP LDT2B

#SP
LDT1B
#SP
SARB
#SP
SDTB#SP SSTB#SP ALMB
#SP
Fn050 MORA2B#SP MORA1B#SP PORA2B#SP SLVSB#SP RCFNB#SP RCHPB#SP CFINB

#SP
CHIPB
#SP
Fn051 INCSTB#SP PC1DEB#SP
Fn052 CSPENB#SP
Fn053 EKENB RPALM#P RPBSY#P PRGDPL INHKY
Fn054 UO007
#P
UO006#P UO005
#P
UO004
#P
UO003
#P
UO002
#P
UO001
#P
UO000
#P
Fn055 UO015
#P
UO014#P UO013
#P
UO012
#P
UO011
#P
UO010
#P
UO009
#P
UO008
#P
Fn056 UO107
#P
UO106#P UO105
#P
UO104
#P
UO103
#P
UO102
#P
UO101
#P
UO100
#P
Fn057 UO115
#P
UO114#P UO113
#P
UO112
#P
UO111
#P
UO110
#P
UO109
#P
UO108
#P
Fn058 UO123
#P
UO122#P UO121
#P
UO120
#P
UO119
#P
UO118
#P
UO117
#P
UO116
#P
Fn059 UO131
#P
UO130#P UO129
#P
UO128
#P
UO127
#P
UO126
#P
UO125
#P
UO124
#P
Fn060 ESCAN#SP ESEND

#P
EREND
#P
#P
MTLA MTLANG#P
Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2 BCLP
#P
BUCLP
#P
#P #P
S2MES S1MES
Fn062 PRTSF
#P
D3ROT
#P
HSRA
#P
AICC#P
Fn063 PSYN#P WATO#P COSP2

#P
COSP1
#P
PSAR#P PSE2#P PSE1#P
#P #P
TIALM TICHK
Fn064 COSP#P TLCHB
#P
TLCHI
#P
TLNW
#P
TLCH
#P
- 587 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#
SYNMOD
Fn065 P RTRCTF#P RSMAX
#P
RGSPM#P RGSPP#P
#P
Fn066 #P FEED0 RTPT#P
PECK2
Fn067
Fn068
Fn069
Fn070 PSW08
#P
PSW07
#P
PSW06
#P
PSW05
#P
PSW04
#P
PSW03
#P
PSW02
#P
PSW01
#P
Fn071 PSW16
#P
PSW15
#P
PSW14
#P
PSW13
#P
PSW12
#P
PSW11
#P
PSW10
#P
PSW09
#P
Fn072 OUT7#P OUT6#P OUT5#P OUT4#P OUT3#P OUT2#P OUT1#P OUT0#P
Fn073 ZRNO#P MD4O#P MD2O#P MD1O#P
Fn074 OUT15
#P
OUT14
#P
OUT13
#P
OUT12
#P
OUT11
#P
OUT10
#P
OUT9#P OUT8#P
Fn075 SPO#P KEYO DRNO#P MLKO#P SBKO#P BDTO#P
Fn076 ROV2O
#P
ROV1O
#P
RTAP#P MP2O#P MP1O#P
Fn077 RTO#P HS1DO

#P
HS1CO
#P
HS1BO
#P
HS1AO
#P
Fn078 *FV7O#P *FV6O#P *FV5O#P *FV4O#P *FV3O#P *FV2O#P *FV1O#P *FV0O#P
Fn079 *JV7O#P *JV6O#P *JV5O#P *JV4O#P *JV3O#P *JV2O#P *JV1O#P *JV0O#P
Fn080 *JV15O
#P
*JV14O
#P
*JV13O
#P
*JV12O
#P
*JV11O
#P
*JV10O
#P
*JV9O#P *JV8O#P
Fn081 -J4O#P +J4O#P -J3O#P +J3O#P -J2O#P +J2O#P -J1O#P +J1O#P
Fn082 RVSL#P CGRMD

#P
Fn083
Fn084 EUO07
#P
EUO06
#P
EUO05
#P
EUO04
#P
EUO03
#P
EUO02
#P
EUO01
#P
EUO00
#P
Fn085 EUO15
#P
EUO14
#P
EUO13
#P
EUO12
#P
EUO11
#P
EUO10
#P
EUO09
#P
EUO08
#P
Fn086
- 588 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn087
Fn088
Fn089
Fn090 ABTSP3＃SP ABTSP2＃SP ABTSP1＃SP ABTQSV#P
Fn091 ABTSP4＃SP MMMOD

#P
MRVSP
#P
MNCHG
#P
MRVMD
#P
Fn092 HSBIN
#P
TRSPS
#P
TRMTN
#P
TRACT
#P
Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#P SVWRN1#P LFCIF

#P
Fn094 ZP8#SV ZP7#SV ZP6#SV ZP5#SV ZP4#SV ZP3#SV ZP2#SV ZP1#SV
Fn095
Fn097
Fn099
Fn101
Fn102 MV8#SV MV7#SV MV6#SV MV5#SV MV4#SV MV3#SV MV2#SV MV1#SV
Fn103
Fn104 INP8#SV INP7#SV INP6#SV INP5#SV INP4#SV INP3#SV INP2#SV INP1#SV
Fn105
Fn106 MVD8
#SV
MVD7
#SV
MVD6
#SV
MVD5
#SV
MVD4
#SV
MVD3
#SV
MVD2
#SV
MVD1
#SV
Fn107
Fn108 MMI8#SV MMI7#SV MMI6#SV MMI5#SV MMI4#SV MMI3#SV MMI2#SV MMI1#SV
- 589 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn109
Fn110 MDTCH8#SV MDTCH7#SV MDTCH6#SV MDTCH5#SV MDTCH4#SV MDTCH3#SV MDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SV
Fn111
Fn112 EADEN8#SV EADEN7#SV EADEN6#SV EADEN5#SV EADEN4#SV EADEN3#SV EADEN2#SV EADEN1#SV
Fn113
Fn114 TRQL8
#SV
TRQL7
#SV
TRQL6
#SV
TRQL5
#SV
TRQL4
#SV
TRQL3
#SV
TRQL2
#SV
TRQL1
#SV
Fn115
Fn116 FRP8#SV FRP7#SV FRP6#SV FRP5#SV FRP4#SV FRP3#SV FRP2#SV FRP1#SV
Fn117
Fn118 SYN80
#SV
SYN70
#SV
SYN60
#SV
SYN50
#SV
SYN40
#SV
SYN30
#SV
SYN20
#SV
SYN10
#SV
Fn119
Fn120 ZRF8#SV ZRF7#SV ZRF6#SV ZRF5#SV ZRF4#SV ZRF3#SV ZRF2#SV ZRF1#SV
Fn121
Fn122 HDO7#P HDO6#P HDO5#P HDO4#P HDO3#P HDO2#P HDO1#P HDO0#P
Fn123
Fn124 +OT8#SV +OT7#SV +OT6#SV +OT5#SV +OT4#SV +OT3#SV +OT2#SV +OT1#SV
Fn125
Fn126 -OT8#SV -OT7#SV -OT6#SV -OT5#SV -OT4#SV -OT3#SV -OT2#SV -OT1#SV
Fn127
Fn128
Fn129 *EAXSL
#P
EOV0#P
Fn130 EBSYA#PX EOTNA#PX EOTPA#PX EGENA#PX EDENA#PX EIALA

#PX
ECKZA#PX EINPA
#PX
- 590 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn131 EMF3A#PX EMF2A#PX EABUFA#PX EMFA
#PX
Fn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PX EM21A#PX EM18A#PX EM14A#PX EM12A#PX EM11A#PX
Fn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PX EGENB#PX EDENB#PX EIALB

#PX
ECKZB#PX EINPB
#PX
Fn134 EMF3B#PX EMF2B#PX EABUFB#PX EMFB

#PX
Fn135 EM28B#PX EM24B#PX EM22B#PX EM21B#PX EM18B#PX EM14B#PX EM12B#PX EM11B#PX
Fn136 EBSYC#PX EOTNC#PX EOTPC#PX EGENC#PX EDENC#PX EIALC

#PX
ECKZC#PX EINPC
#PX
Fn137 EMF3C#PX EMF2C#PX EABUFC#PX EMFC

#PX
Fn138 EM28C#PX EM24C#PX EM22C#PX EM21C#PX EM18C#PX EM14C#PX EM12C#PX EM11C#PX
Fn139 EBSYD#PX EOTND#PX EOTPD#PX EGEND#PX EDEND#PX EIALD

#PX
ECKZD#PX EINPD
#PX
Fn140 EMF3D#PX EMF2D#PX EABUFD#PX EMFD

#PX
Fn141 EM28D#PX EM24D#PX EM22D#PX EM21D#PX EM18D#PX EM14D#PX EM12D#PX EM11D#PX
Fn142 EM48A#PX EM44A#PX EM42A#PX EM41A#PX EM38A#PX EM34A#PX EM32A#PX EM31A#PX
Fn143
Fn144
Fn145 EM48B#PX EM44B#PX EM42B#PX EM41B#PX EM38B#PX EM34B#PX EM32B#PX EM31B#PX
Fn146
Fn147
Fn148 EM48C#PX EM44C#PX EM42C#PX EM41C#PX EM38C#PX EM34C#PX EM32C#PX EM31C#PX
Fn149
Fn150
Fn151 EM48D#PX EM44D#PX EM42D#PX EM41D#PX EM38D#PX EM34D#PX EM32D#PX EM31D#PX
Fn152
- 591 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn153
Fn154
Fn155
Fn156
Fn157
Fn158
Fn159
Fn160 MSP07
#P
MSP06
#P
MSP05
#P
MSP04
#P
MSP03
#P
MSP02
#P
MSP01
#P
MSP00
#P
Fn161 MSP15
#P
MSP14
#P
MSP13
#P
MSP12
#P
MSP11
#P
MSP10
#P
MSP09
#P
MSP08
#P
Fn162
Fn163
Fn164
Fn165
Fn166
Fn167
Fn168 ORARC#SP TLMC#SP LDT2C#SP LDT1C#SP SARC

#SP
SDTC
#SP
SSTC#SP ALMC
#SP
Fn169 MORA2C#SP MORA1C#SP PORA2C#SP SLVSC#SP RCFNC#SP RCHPC#SP CFINC

#SP
CHIPC
#SP
Fn170 INCSTC#SP PC1DEC#SP
Fn171 CSPENC#SP
Fn172 PBATL
#P
PBATZ
#P
Fn173
Fn174
- 592 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn175
Fn176
Fn177
Fn178
Fn179
Fn180 CLRCH8#SV CLRCH7#SV CLRCH6#SV CLRCH5#SV CLRCH4#SV CLRCH3#SV CLRCH2#SV CLRCH1#SV
Fn181
Fn182 EACNT8#SV EACNT7#SV EACNT6#SV EACNT5#SV EACNT4#SV EACNT3#SV EACNT2#SV EACNT1#SV
Fn183
Fn184 ABDT8#SV ABDT7#SV ABDT6#SV ABDT5#SV ABDT4#SV ABDT3#SV ABDT2#SV ABDT1#SV
Fn185
Fn186
Fn187
Fn188 AMRST8#SV AMRST7#SV AMRST6#SV AMRST5#SV AMRST4#SV AMRST3#SV AMRST2#SV AMRST1#SV
Fn189
Fn190 TRQM8#SV TRQM7#SV TRQM6#SV TRQM5#SV TRQM4#SV TRQM3#SV TRQM2#SV TRQM1#SV
Fn191
Fn192
Fn193
Fn194
Fn195
Fn196
- 593 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn197 MFSYND MFSYNC MFSYNB MFSYNA
Fn198
Fn199 MCHAO#P
Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SP R05O2#SP R04O2#SP R03O2#SP R02O2#SP R01O2#SP
Fn201 R12O2#SP R11O2#SP R10O2#SP R09O2#SP
Fn202 AR072
#SP
AR062
#SP
AR052
#SP
AR042
#SP
AR032
#SP
AR022
#SP
AR012
#SP
AR002
#SP
Fn203 AR152
#SP
AR142
#SP
AR132
#SP
AR122
#SP
AR112
#SP
AR102
#SP
AR092
#SP
AR082
#SP
Fn206 AR073
#SP
AR063
#SP
AR053
#SP
AR043
#SP
AR033
#SP
AR023
#SP
AR013
#SP
AR003
#SP
Fn207 AR153
#SP
AR143
#SP
AR133
#SP
AR123
#SP
AR113
#SP
AR103
#SP
AR093
#SP
AR083
#SP
Fn208 EGBM8#SV EGBM7#SV EGBM6#SV EGBM5#SV EGBM4#SV EGBM3#SV EGBM2#SV EGBM1#SV
Fn209
Fn210 SYNMT8#P SYNMT7#P SYNMT6#P SYNMT5#P SYNMT4#P SYNMT3#P SYNMT2#P SYNMT1#P
Fn211 SYNOF8#P SYNOF7#P SYNOF6#P SYNOF5#P SYNOF4#P SYNOF3#P SYNOF2#P SYNOF1#P
Fn212
Fn213
Fn214
Fn215
Fn216
Fn217
Fn218
- 594 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn263
Fn264 SPWRN8
#P
SPWRN7
#P
SPWRN6
#P
SPWRN5
#P
SPWRN4
#P
SPWRN3
#P
SPWRN2
#P
SPWRN1
#P
Fn265 SPWRN9
#P
Fn266 ORARD#SP TLMD#SP LDT2D#SP LDT1D#SP SARD

#SP
SDTD
#SP
SSTD#SP ALMD
#SP
Fn267 MORA2D#SP MORA1D#SP PORA2D#SP SLVSD#SP RCFND#SP RCHPD#SP CFIND

#SP
CHIPD
#SP
Fn268 INCSTD#SP PC1DED#SP
Fn269 CSPEND#SP
Fn272 AR074
#SP
AR064
#SP
AR054
#SP
AR044
#SP
AR034
#SP
AR024
#SP
AR014
#SP
AR004
#SP
Fn273 AR154
#SP
AR144
#SP
AR134
#SP
AR124
#SP
AR114
#SP
AR104
#SP
AR094
#SP
AR084
#SP
Fn274 CSFO4#SP CSFO3#SP CSFO2#SP CSFO1#SP FCSS4#SP FCSS3#SP FCSS2#SP FCSS1#SP
Fn275
Fn276 UO023
#P
UO022
#P
UO021
#P
UO020
#P
UO019
#P
UO018
#P
UO017
#P
UO016
#P
Fn277 UO031
#P
UO030
#P
UO029
#P
UO028
#P
UO027
#P
UO026
#P
UO025
#P
UO024
#P
Fn278
Fn279
Fn280 UO207
#P
UO206
#P
UO205
#P
UO204
#P
UO203
#P
UO202
#P
UO201
#P
UO200
#P
Fn281 UO215
#P
UO214
#P
UO213
#P
UO212
#P
UO211
#P
UO210
#P
UO209
#P
UO208
#P
Fn282 UO223
#P
UO222
#P
UO221
#P
UO220
#P
UO219
#P
UO218
#P
UO217
#P
UO216
#P
Fn283 UO231
#P
UO230
#P
UO229
#P
UO228
#P
UO227
#P
UO226
#P
UO225
#P
UO224
#P
Fn284 UO307
#P
UO306
#P
UO305
#P
UO304
#P
UO303
#P
UO302
#P
UO301
#P
UO300
#P
- 595 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn285 UO315
#P
UO314
#P
UO313
#P
UO312
#P
UO311
#P
UO310
#P
UO309
#P
UO308
#P
Fn286 UO323
#P
UO322
#P
UO321
#P
UO320
#P
UO319
#P
UO318
#P
UO317
#P
UO316
#P
Fn287 UO331
#P
UO330
#P
UO329
#P
UO328
#P
UO327
#P
UO326
#P
UO325
#P
UO324
#P
Fn288 FSPSY4#SP FSPSY3#SP FSPSY2#SP FSPSY1#SP
Fn289 FSPPH4#SP FSPPH3#SP FSPPH2#SP FSPPH1#SP
Fn290 PRGMD#P PCKSV

#P
Fn291
Fn292 ITED
Fn293 HPS08#P HPS07#P HPS06#P HPS05#P HPS04#P HPS03#P HPS02#P HPS01#P
Fn294 HPS16#P HPS15#P HPS14#P HPS13#P HPS12#P HPS11#P HPS10#P HPS09#P
Fn295 CNCKYO C2SEND
Fn296 DM8#SV DM7#SV DM6#SV DM5#SV DM4#SV DM3#SV DM2#SV DM1#SV
Fn297 MCHAO#P MBCAN#P
Fn298
Fn299
Fn300
Fn301
Fn302
Fn303
Fn304
Fn305
Fn306
- 596 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn307
Fn308
Fn309
Fn310
Fn311
Fn312
Fn313
Fn314
Fn315 TLMEM#P TMFNFD#P TLMOT#P TLMG10#P TLMSRH#P TLSKF#P
Fn316
Fn317
Fn318
Fn319
Fn320
Fn321
Fn322
Fn323
Fn324
Fn325
Fn326
Fn327
Fn328 TLCHI4#P TLCHI3#P TLCHI2#P TLCHI1#P TLCH4#P TLCH3#P TLCH2#P TLCH1#P
- 597 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn329 TLCHB4#P TLCHB3#P TLCHB2#P TLCHB1#P TLSKF4#P TLSKF3#P TLSKF2#P TLSKF1#P
Fn330
Fn331
Fn332
Fn333
Fn334
Fn335
Fn336
Fn337
Fn338
Fn339
Fn340
Fn341 SYCM8#SV SYCM7#SV SYCM6#SV SYCM5#SV SYCM4#SV SYCM3#SV SYCM2#SV SYCM1#SV
Fn342 SYCS8#SV SYCS7#SV SYCS6#SV SYCS5#SV SYCS4#SV SYCS3#SV SYCS2#SV SYCS1#SV
Fn343 MIXO8#SV MIXO7#SV MIXO6#SV MIXO5#SV MIXO4#SV MIXO3#SV MIXO2#SV MIXO1#SV
Fn344 OVMO8#SV OVMO7#SV OVMO6#SV OVMO5#SV OVMO4#SV OVMO3#SV OVMO2#SV OVMO1#SV
Fn345 OVSO8#SV OVSO7#SV OVSO6#SV OVSO5#SV OVSO4#SV OVSO3#SV OVSO2#SV OVSO1#SV
Fn346 SMPK8#SV SMPK7#SV SMPK6#SV SMPK5#SV SMPK4#SV SMPK3#SV SMPK2#SV SMPK1#SV
Fn347
Fn348
Fn349
Fn350
- 598 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn356 THREND#P MTHML#P
Fn358 WPSF8 WPSF7 WPSF6 WPSF5 WPSF4 WPSF3 WPSF2 WPSF1
Fn395
Fn396
Fn397
Fn398
Fn399
Fn400 SUCLPD#SP SUCLPC#SP SUCLPB#SP
Fn401 SCLPD#SP SCLPC#SP SCLPB#SP
Fn402 MSPOSD#SP MSPOSC#SP MSPOSB#SP
Fn403 SYNER
#P
Fn404 COSP4
#P
COSP3
#P
Fn405
Fn406
Fn407
Fn408
Fn409
Fn410
Fn411
Fn412
Fn413
Fn414
- 599 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn415
Fn416
Fn417
Fn418
to
Fn511
Fn512 MCSP#P MCRQ#P MCEXE

#P
Fn513 ZRNR#P DNCIR

#P
MD4R#P MD2R#P MD1R#P
Fn514 MCEX8
#P
MCEX7
#P
MCEX6
#P
MCEX5
#P
MCEX4
#P
MCEX3
#P
MCEX2
#P
MCEX1
#P
Fn515 MCEX16#P MCEX15#P MCEX14#P MCEX13#P MCEX12#P MCEX11#P MCEX10#P MCEX9

#P
Fn516 MSEMI8#SV MSEMI7#SV MSEMI6#SV MSEMI5#SV MSEMI4#SV MSEMI3#SV MSEMI2#SV MSEMI1#SV
Fn517 RP18#SV RP17#SV RP16#SV RP15#SV RP14#SV RP13#SV RP12#SV RP11#SV
Fn518 RP28#SV RP27#SV RP26#SV RP25#SV RP24#SV RP23#SV RP22#SV RP21#SV
Fn519
Fn520 ACDEC
#P ATBK
Fn521 SVREV8 SVREV7 SVREV6 SVREV5 SVREV4 SVREV3 SVREV2 SVREV1
Fn522 SPP8 SPP7 SPP6 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1
to
Fn531 MMDISL
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn532 SYNO8 SYNO7 SYNO6 SYNO5 SYNO4 SYNO3 SYNO2 SYNO1
Fn533
to
Fn767
- 600 -
B-63945EN/03 8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
8 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet
function.
Chapter 8, "EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION", consists of the

following sections:
8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA

ETHERNET CARD ..................................................................602
8.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .605
8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
DEVICES..................................................................................645
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS .............................646
8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET .....................651
8.6 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED
ETHERNET FUNCTION .........................................................652
8.7 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
FUNCTION...............................................................................657
- 601 -
8.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63945EN/03
8.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET

CARD
The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two

types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet
card.
A selection can also be made to stop the embedded Ethernet function.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot
for temporary communication.
CAUTION
1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the
first time, set an IP address and other items carefully
as instructed by the network administrator, then
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting
may cause a communication failure on the entire
network.
2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network
can increase the communication processing load on
the CNC even if the unit is not communicating with
the CNC.
Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide
network. Use a router or the like to separate the
network including the CNC from the other networks.
NOTE
1 The embedded Ethernet port of FANUC Series
32i-A is available as an option.
2 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by
FANUC. General Ethernet cards available on the
market cannot be used.
3 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC
LADDER-III or SERVO GUIDE.
4 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary
communication as described above. Avoid using
the card for continuous communication.
5 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a
memory card slot, with a part of the card left
uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet
card, take great care not to damage the card by
hitting the protruding part of the card.
When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the
card immediately, in order to prevent any damage
to the card.
- 602 -
Related NC parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 ETH

[Data type] Bit
#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (embedded Ethernet port or
PCMCIA Ethernet card) is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
NOTE
This parameter is valid with series 656F and edition
06 or later.
Selection of embedded Ethernet with the 300is, 310is, and 320is of

14896 stand-alone type

[Data type] Word
Set embedded Ethernet usable with the 300is, 310is, and 320is of
stand-alone type.
0 : For the embedded Ethernet port, the connector (CD38A) for
Ethernet on the control unit is used.
For the PCMCIA Ethernet card, the card slot on the side of the
display unit is used.
1 : For the embedded Ethernet port, the connector (CD38A) for
Ethernet on the control unit is used.。
For the PCMCIA Ethernet card, the card slot (CNM1B) on the
control unit is used.
2 : For the embedded Ethernet port, the connector (CD38S) for
Ethernet on the rear of the display unit is used.
For the PCMCIA Ethernet card, the card slot on the side of the
display unit is used.
3 : For the embedded Ethernet port, the connector (CD38S) for
Ethernet on the rear of the display unit is used.
For the PCMCIA Ethernet card, the card slot (CNM1B) on the
control unit is used.
No.14896 embedded Ethernet port PCMCIA Ethernet card
0 Port in the CNC Memory card slot on a side of the display unit
1 Port in the CNC Memory card slot in the CNC
2 Port in the rear of the display unit Memory card slot on a side of the display unit
3 Port in the rear of the display unit Memory card slot in the CNC
NOTE
This parameter is valid with the
FS300is/310is/320is-A of stand-alone type, and
series 656F and edition 08 or later.
- 603 -
Notes on using Ethernet with Windows CE of FS300is/310is/320is-A

With the FS300is/310is/320is-A, the Ethernet interface on Windows
CE may be used by both of the embedded Ethernet function of the
CNC and application software on Windows CE.
Note that the restrictions below are imposed accordingly.
NOTE
1 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A of LCD-mounted
type is used and the PCMCIA Ethernet card is
selected for the embedded Ethernet function,
application software on Windows CE cannot use the
embedded Ethernet port. When the embedded
Ethernet port is selected for the embedded Ethernet
function, application software on Windows CE
cannot use the PCMCIA Ethernet card.
2 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A of stand-alone
type is used, the connection location of the
embedded Ethernet function varies according to the
setting of NC parameter No. 14896. So, the
restrictions below are applied to the Ethernet
interface on Windows CE.
(1) When 0 is set in NC parameter No. 14896 and
the PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected for the
embedded Ethernet function, application
software on Windows CE cannot use the
embedded Ethernet port.
(2) When 1 is set in NC parameter No. 14896,
application software on Windows CE can use
the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA
Ethernet card.
(3) When 2 is set in NC parameter No. 14896, the
restriction on item 1 above (for the
LCD-mounted type) is applied.
(4) When 3 is set in NC parameter No. 14896 and
the embedded Ethernet port is selected for the
embedded Ethernet function, application
software on Windows CE cannot use the
PCMCIA Ethernet card.
3 When the FS300is/310is/320is-A is used,
application software on Windows CE can perform
communication simultaneously on a port (embedded
Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card) selected for
the embedded Ethernet function.
- 604 -
8.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded

Ethernet function.
8.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time
NOTE
1 When running user's original application software
created by using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function,
use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five
FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be connected to one
CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or
personal computers may overload the CNC,
reducing the communication speed.
- 605 -
8.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for
operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Procedure
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED
PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for
the PCMCIA Ethernet card are made when a
connection to SERVO GUIDE and FANUC
LADDER-III is established.
- 606 -
COMMON screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is

displayed.
Settings items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the
network.
ROUTER IP Specify the IP address of the router.
ADDRESS Specify this item when the network contains a router.
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
DEVICE Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA
Ethernet card is displayed.
- 607 -
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the
(TCP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid input range is
5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
(UDP) FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the
NOTE
1 When a connection to the CIMPLICITY i CELL is
established, set the UDP port number and time
interval above as described in the FANUC
CIMPLICITY i CELL Operator's Manual (B-75074).
2 The unit of the time interval is 10 ms. The allowable
range is between 10 and 65535. A time interval
less than 100ms cannot be set.
3 Decreasing the time interval setting increases the
communication load and can affect the network
performance.
Example) If the interval is set to 100 (100 x 10 ms
= 1 second), broadcast data is sent
every 1 second.
- 608 -
Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card

The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default
values, for ease of connection with SERVO GUIDE or FANUC
LADDER-III.
IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0
TIME INTERVAL :0
If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified
setting is reset to the default value.
The embedded Ethernet port does not have a default value.
8.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

The following shows a setting example required for the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
through FOCAS2/Ethernet.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
TCP port number 8193 8193 setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0
PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is
Default gateway None used for setting.
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100
The arguments of the data window library
NC TCP port 8193
function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for
number
setting.
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101
NC TCP port 8193
number
- 609 -
8.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function

This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer
function to operate using the embedded Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the
embedded Ethernet port.
2 The number of FTP communications to which one
CNC can be connected using the FTP file transfer
function is one.
8.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen

On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the
FTP file transfer function.
Procedure
2 Soft keys [EMBED PORT] appear.
3 By pressing the [EMBED PORT] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter
parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port
and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card
are independent of each other.
If the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key is pressed, the
PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up. However,
the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is
not necessary usually.
- 610 -

displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
network.
Display items
Item Description
- 611 -
transfer screen (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)
1 Press soft key [FTP TRANS]. The FTP transfer screen is

displayed.
2 Page keys can be used to make settings for the three
host computers for connection destinations 1 to 3.
FTP transfer screen (1st page) FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file
transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that "21"
is to be specified usually.
USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the
host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the
host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be
specified.)
If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the
host computer becomes the log-in folder.
- 612 -
Operation
Select a destination.
1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT]
to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys
[CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key

[CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or [CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2,
or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer
corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the
target computer to be connected.
When destination 1 is selected
- 613 -
8.2.2.2 Related NC parameters

The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are
described below.
I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a

0020 foreground input device
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.
For embedded Ethernet port

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH

[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an
FTP server presence check based on PING is:
0: Made
1: Not made
NOTE
Usually, set this parameter to 0 (to make a check).
If this parameter is set to 1 (not to make an FTP
server presence check based on PING), several
tens of seconds may be required until an error is
recognized when no FTP server is present on the
network.
Mainly for security, a personal computer may be
set to ignore the PING command. When
communicating with such a personal computer, set
this parameter to 1 (not to make an FTP server
presence check based on PING).
- 614 -
8.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function

The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file
transfer function to operate.
(WindowsXP Professional is used as the OS for the personal
computer).
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs
through the FTP file transfer function.
• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates.
• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file
transfer function.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None
Connection Port number 21 21 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
host 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 setting.
User name user user
Password user user
Login DIR None None The parameter screen is used for setting.
NC parameter No. 20 9 9
PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer

IP address 192.168.0.200 (WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway None "User acount” of the personal computer (WindowsXP)
User name user is used for setting.
Password user
Login DIR Default "Internet service manager" of the personal computer
(WindowsXP) is used for setting.
- 615 -
8.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function

The DHCP/DNS function is set up by using the COMMON screen
(DETAIL) and NC parameters.
8.2.3.1 Setting up DNS

This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS.
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS function, with reference to "Related NC
Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working
(hereafter referred to as a DNS server), reboot the CNC, then
press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order.
The COMMON screen (DETAIL) appears.
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS
IP address field.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key

to call a desired COMMON screen (DETAIL). Specify a
DNS IP address.
- 616 -
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
ADDRESS 1, 2 The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP
addresses 1 and 2 in that order.
8.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP

This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DHCP.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP function, with reference to "Related NC
Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working
(hereafter referred to as a DHCP server), reboot the CNC, then
press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED PORT] and [COMMON] in that order.
The COMMON screen appears.
5 If the DHCP function of the CNC has been enabled and if the
DHCP server is connected successfully, the DHCP server
automatically specifies the following items.
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is
displayed in each field.
6 If the DNS function has also been enabled and if the DHCP
server and the DNS server work together (if the DNS server
supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.
- 617 -
COMMON screen (basic and detail)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key

to call a desired Ethernet common setting screen (basic,
detail).
If the DHCP server is connected successfully and if the setting data
can be obtained, the screen is displayed as shown below.
When the DHCP server is connected successfully
If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host
name in the "NC-<MAC-address>" format.
Example of automatically assigned host name
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, the screen is displayed as

shown below.
When the DHCP server cannot be connected
- 618 -
Check items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server is connected successfully,
SUBNET MASK the items obtained from the DHCP server are
ROUTER IP ADDRESS displayed.
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2 If the DHCP server cannot be connected,
DOMAIN "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC.
If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the
DHCP server notifies the DNS server of this host name.
If the host name is left blank, a host name is
automatically assigned in the "NC-<MAC-address>"
format.
Example of automatically assigned host name:
NC-080019000001
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of embedded Ethernet
- 619 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS D1E

[Data type] Bit
#3 D1E With the embedded Ethernet port, when the DHCP function is used:
0: The default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function are
specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0
TIME INTERVAL 0
1: The default parameters for CIMPLICITY i CELL are specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 8192
TIME INTERVAL 50
#5 DNS With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
#6 DHC With the embedded Ethernet port, the DHCP function is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
A change in these parameters becomes effective after the power is

turned off and on or after the embedded Ethernet function is restarted.
- 620 -
8.2.4 Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function

This subsection describes the setting required to operate the
unsolicited messaging function with the embedded Ethernet function.
Software conditions
The software conditions for using the unsolicited messaging function
are indicated below.
- CNC system software

Software Drawing number Series Edition
Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A A02B-0303-H501#G002 G002
CNC system software A02B-0303-H501#G012 G012
A02B-0303-H501#G022 G022
A02B-0303-H501#G032 G032
23.0 or later
Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 A02B-0306-H501#G121 G121
Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
A02B-0308-H501#G201 G201
CNC system software
A02B-0303-H501#G023 G023
A02B-0303-H501#G033 G033
6.0 or later
Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 A02B-0306-H501#G123 G123
Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
A02B-0308-H501#G203 G203
CNC system software
- Communication software
Ethernet communication management application
A02B-0303-J572#656F 656F 12 or later
software
Embedded Ethernet control software A02B-0303-J571#656E 656E 11 or later
- Graphic software
Software for the 15" display unit graphic function A02B-0207-J595#60VB 60VB 1.8 or later
- Windows CE standard application/library

Windows CE.NET
A02B-0207-J809 1.8 or later
standard application/library
- 621 -
8.2.4.1 Overview
This subsection provides an overview of the unsolicited messaging
function and describes the execution procedure.
Overview of the unsolicited messaging function
An overview of the unsolicited messaging function is provided below.

With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages
(CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited manner to application software on
the personal computer according to a command from an NC program
or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application
processing on the personal computer to periodically inquire about the
state of the CNC can be eliminated.
When the conventional function is used
Application software
Inquiry
Response Application checks for
CNC/PMC data changes.
When the unsolicited messaging function is used
NC program or ladder Application software

program アプリケーションソフトウェア
NC program or ladder
program checks for Application receives
Notification
CNC/PMC data notification from CNC.
changes.
NOTE
The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the
- 622 -
Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure
The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is

described below.
1 Preparation on the personal compute
Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the
unsolicited messaging function and install the unsolicited
message server on a personal computer. For the method of
creating an application using the FOCAS2 function for the
unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the
unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited
Messaging Function", in "FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2
CNC/PMC Data Window Library Operator's Manual".
2 Preparation on the CNC
Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling
unsolicited messaging.
For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program,
see Subsection 8.2.4.6, "Execution methods".
3 Setting of the communication parameters for the
unsolicited messaging function
To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following
communication parameter settings are needed:
(1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
(2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging
function
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC
mode for setting on the CNC screen and the PC mode for setting
on the personal computer.
For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Subsection 8.2.4.2,
"Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function" through Subsection
8.2.4.5, "Setting on the personal computer".
4 Starting the NC program or ladder program
Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2,
"Preparation on the CNC". At this time, no unsolicited message
is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the
unsolicited messaging function", is executed.
5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function
Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal
computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named
"Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or
ladder program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is
made from the NC program or ladder program, an unsolicited
message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.
6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function
To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2
function cnc_unsolicstop on the personal computer. This
execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready")
where no unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request
for transmission is made from the NC program or ladder
program.
- 623 -
8.2.4.2 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

This subsection describes the setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet
function for operating the unsolicited messaging function.
Procedure
1 Enable the unsolicited messaging function according to "Related
NC parameters" described later.
2 Start the CNC again then press function key .
3 Soft key [EMBED PORT] is displayed. (Press the continuous
menu key until the soft key is displayed.)
4 Press soft key [EMBED PORT]. The Ethernet Setting screen for
the embedded Ethernet port is displayed.
5 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] then make settings on
each screen.
6 Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message
screen is displayed. (Press the continuous menu key until the
soft key [UNSOLI MSG] is displayed.) For details of the
Unsolicited Message screen, see Subsections starting with
Subsection 8.2.4.3, "Mode selection".
- 624 -

displayed.
Settings items
Item Description
network.
Display items
Item Description
NOTE
Set page 2 (DETAIL screen) of the COMMON
screen when using the DNS/DHCP function. For
details, see Subsection 8.2.3, "Setting Up the
DNS/DHCP Function".
- 625 -
When using the DNS function, press soft key [COMMON] then press
page key . The COMMON screen (DETAIL) is
displayed. Set the DNS IP address setting items.
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
ADDRESS 1, 2 The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP
addresses 1 and 2 in that order.
- 626 -
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the unsolicited
(TCP) messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function). The
valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER Set this item to 0 when it is used as the unsolicited
(UDP) messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function).
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the unsolicited
messaging function (FOCAS2/Ethernet function).
- 627 -
8.2.4.3 Mode selection

This subsection describes the selection of a mode for setting the
unsolicited messaging function.
Unsolicited Message screen (BASIC)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG]. The Unsolicited Message screen

(BASIC) is displayed.
Unsolicited Message screen 1 (BASIC)
Setting items
Item Description
MODE Select a mode for setting the unsolicited messaging
function.
For the method of selection, see "Operation" described
later.
• When "CNC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the CNC screen.
In this case, setting on the personal computer is
disabled.
For details, see Subsection 8.2.4.4, "Setting on the
CNC screen".
• When "PC MODE" is selected
This mode enables setting on the personal
computer.
In this case, setting on the CNC screen is disabled.
For details, see Subsection 8.2.4.5, "Setting on the
personal computer".
- 628 -
NOTE
1 The mode is set to "PC MODE" at the time of initial
use.
2 The mode can be switched only in the "Not Ready"
state. For the "Not Ready" state, see "Display
items" provided later.
3 If the mode is switched from "CNC MODE" to "PC
MODE", all parameters set on the CNC screen are
cleared.
4 The mode can be switched on the available device
side only.
Operation
The mode can be switched as described below.
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [MODE] is displayed.
2 Press soft key [MODE]. Soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC
MODE] are displayed.
- 629 -
Display items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the personal computer
currently connected.
(Example of display format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS Displays the current state.
The following five states are available:
<1> Not Ready
State where data is not transmitted even when a
request for data transmission is made from an NC
program or ladder program
<2> Ready
State where data is transmitted when a request for data
transmission is made from an NC program or ladder
program
<3> Sending...
State present from the acceptance of a request for data
transmission from an NC program or ladder program
until data transmission is completed
<4> Receiving...
State present from completion of data transmission
until response data is received
<5> Completed
State present from reception of response data until
response data processing is completed
[Supplement]
• Data transmission
Means unsolicited message transmission (CNC→PC).
• Response data
Means a response to an unsolicited message
(PC→CNC).
AVAILABLE Device where embedded Ethernet is currently enabled.
DEVICE The embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card is
displayed.
NOTE
1 To switch the state from "Not Ready" to "Ready”,
the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart needs to be
executed on the personal computer.
2 To switch the state from other than "Not Ready" to
“Not Ready”, the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
needs to be executed on the personal computer.
3 For the timing charts of the states, see Subsection
8.2.4.6, "Execution methods".
- 630 -
8.2.4.4 Setting on the CNC screen

This subsection describes the method of setting on the Unsolicited
Message screen.
NOTE
1 To enable the settings on the CNC screen and
perform unsolicited messaging, the procedure below
needs to be used.
(1) Set all setting items on the Unsolicited Message
screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press soft key
[APPLY].
(3) Start unsolicited messaging (execute the
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart) on the
personal computer.
2 Setting of the setting items on the Unsolicited
Message screen (CONNECT) and execution of the
soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY]) are possible only
in the "Not Ready" state. For the "Not Ready"
state, see "Display items" in Subsection 8.2.4.3,
"Mode selection".
3 On the setting screen on the unavailable device
side, the setting items can be set. However,
execution of the soft keys ([(OPRT)] then [APPLY])
is possible on the available device side only.
- 631 -
Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT)
Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] then open page 2 and page 3 with page
keys . The Unsolicited Message screen (CONNECT) is
displayed.
Unsolicited Message screen 2 (CONNECT) Unsolicited Message screen 3 (CONNECT)
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME (IP ADDRESS) When the DNS function is disabled, specify the IP address of the
communication destination personal computer.
When the DNS function is enabled, specify the host name of the
communication destination personal computer. (Up to 63 characters can be
specified.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")
PORT NUMBER Specify the TCP port number and UDP port number of the communication
destination personal computer.
Usually, specify "8196".
The valid input range is 5001 to 65535.
RETRY COUNT Specify the number of retries to be made when there is no response to data
transmitted by the communication function.
TIMEOUT Specify a time-out period (in sec) from the transmission of data by the
communication function until a response is made to the transmitted data.
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in sec) of the alive signal to be transmitted while the
communication function is operating normally.
Specify a value not greater than the value of TIMEOUT.
- 632 -
Item Description
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a type of control parameter. When this parameter is set to 0, the
TYPE control parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1: PMC address (response notification method)
• When set to 2: PMC address (simplified method)
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable (simplified method)
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable (simplified method)
(Note) The RTM variable is a real-time custom macro variable.
CONTROL PARAMETER Specify a control parameter for executing data transmission.
When CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE is set to 1
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Two bytes starting at a specified address are allocated in the area.
Specify a PMC address for control.
A PMC address in the R area or E area may be specified.
Only a specified address (one byte) is allocated in the area.
Specify a custom macro variable number for control.
Only a volatile common variable may be specified as a custom macro
variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
Only a volatile RTM variable may be specified as a RTM variable.
Only the variable with a specified variable number is allocated in the area.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER Specify the number of data items to be transmitted.
TRANSMISSION Specify each parameter for transmission data.
PARAMETER
(NO.1 to 3)
TYPE Specify a transmission data type. When this parameter is set to 0, the
transmission parameter is invalid.
• When set to 1 or 2: PMC address
• When set to 3: Custom macro variable
• When set to 4: Volatile RTM variable
• When set to 5: Nonvolatile RTM variable
PMC ADDRESS or Specify the start of a transmission data area
MACRO NO. When TYPE is set to 1 or 2
Specify a PMC address for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 4 or 5
Specify a RTM variable number for transmission.
- 633 -
Item Description
SIZE or NUMBER Specify the size of a transmission data area or the number of variables.
The maximum specifiable number of bytes is as follows:
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 1: 2890 bytes
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 2: 2874 bytes in total
• When TRANSMISSION NUMBER is set to 3: 2858 bytes in total
When using macro variables (custom macro variables or RTM variables), use a
conversion rate of one variable for eight bytes.
Specify a PMC area size (bytes) for transmission.
When TYPE is set to 3
Specify the number of custom macro variables for transmission.
When a macro variable number of 1000 or greater (system variable) is
used, this parameter can be set to 1 only.
Specify the number of RTM variables for transmission.
CAUTION
1 When setting a PMC address for control or a PMC address for transmission,
observe the following:
(1) When a multipath PMC is used, use the following input format:
<path-number>:<PMC-address>
When specifying the PMC address R0500 of the second PMC path, for
example, input "2:R500". When only the PMC address (R500) is input,
the specification of the first path (1:R0500) is assumed for processing.
When the key for ":" is unavailable, use the key for "/" or "EOB" instead.
(2) Ensure that a PMC address area for control never overlaps PMC areas
used by other functions (FL-net, PROFIBUS-DP, and DeviceNet).
2 When setting a macro variable for control or a macro variable for
transmission, observe the following:
(1) When a multipath CNC is used, use the following input format:
<path-number>:<variable-number>
When specifying variable number #100 of the second CNC path, for
example, input "2:100". When only the variable number (100) is input,
the specification of the first path (1:100) is assumed for processing.
When the key for ":" is unavailable, use the key for "/" or "EOB" instead.
(2) Ensure that a macro variable for control never be doubly specified as a
variable to be used for a purpose other than the unsolicited messaging
function.
- 634 -
NOTE
1 Two methods are available for PMC address specification in CONTROL
PARAMETER TYPE: response notification method and simplified method.
For details of the methods, see Subsection 8.2.4.6, "Execution methods".
2 The valid setting range of PMC addresses depends on the usable PMC
memory type. For details, refer to "PMC Programming Manual
(B-63983EN)".
3 The valid setting ranges of custom macro variable numbers and RTM variable
numbers depend on the selected options. For details, refer to "User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-63944EN)".
4 Ensure that the setting of TRANSMISSION NUMBER matches the settings of
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3). If TRANSMISSION
NUMBER is set to 3, and an invalid value is specified in any of
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, for example, execution of
soft key [APPLY] results in an error.
Operation
The settings of all setting items on the Unsolicited Message screen
(CONNECT) can be made effective as follows:
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft key [APPLY] is displayed.
2 Press soft key [APPLY].
8.2.4.5 Setting on the personal computer

For setting on the personal computer, create and set an application by
using the following FOCAS2 functions:
• cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Parameter setting 2 for unsolicited
messaging
• cnc_unsolicstart Start of unsolicited messaging
For details, refer to Chapter 5, "Unsolicited Messaging Function", in
"FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window
Library Operator's Manual".
NOTE
1 To start unsolicited messaging, the FOCAS2
function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 needs to be executed
first then the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart
needs to be executed.
2 The FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 can be
executed only in the "Not Ready" state. For
details of the state, see "Display items" in
3 When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 is
executed, the Unsolicited Message screen
(CONNECT) displays the settings made on the
personal computer.
- 635 -
8.2.4.6 Execution methods

How to execute the unsolicited messaging function is described
below.
To execute the unsolicited messaging function, three methods are
available:
• Using a PMC address for control based on the response
notification method in a ladder program
• Using a PMC address for control based on the simplified method
in a ladder program
• Using a macro variable for control based on the simplified
method in an NC program
NOTE
1 When a ladder program is used, the response
notification method and the simplified method are
available. A major difference is that the response
notification method sends RES_CODE to the ladder
program in response to data transmission but the
simplified method does not send a response.
To utilize a ladder program based on logic used
with the FS16i, for example, use the response
notification method. When RES_CODE is
unnecessary or a new ladder program is created,
the simplified method can be used.
2 RES_CODE is recorded on the Ethernet log screen
when a value other than 0x00 and 0x01 is detected.
3 For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5,
"Unsolicited Messaging Function", in "FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window
When a PMC address for control is used (response notification method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program

according to the response notification method is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a
macro variable for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of a
macro variable to be transmitted cannot be
identified when viewed from the ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for
both of control and transmission.
- 636 -
Explanation of PMC address signals for control
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to

execute the unsolicited messaging function is provided below. A
PMC address area for control consists of 2 bytes.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path
number specified) is used as a PMC address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Message transmission request signal
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for
transmission, the ladder program sets this signal to 1. The message
is then transmitted to the personal computer.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Message response reception signal
[Function] Posts the reception of a response to an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] Upon reception of a message by the personal computer, a response to
the message is transmitted to the CNC (communication function).
When the CNC (communication function) receives the response, this
signal is set to 1. When this signal is set to 1, the ladder program
reads RES_CODE then clears REQ to 0. Next, the CNC
(communication function) clears RES_CODE to 0 then sets this signal
to 0.
COM <Rxxxx+1.6>
[Name] Message transmission start signal
[Function] Posts the start of transmission of an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] When transmission of a message to the personal computer is started,
this signal is set to 1. Upon completion of message transmission, this
signal is set to 0.
RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5>

[Name] Message response reception result signal
[Function] Posts the reception result of a response to an unsolicited message.
[Output condition] The reception result of a response to a message is set. After reading
this signal, the ladder program clears REQ to 0. The CNC
(communication function) then clears this signal to 0.
- 637 -
NOTE
For details of RES_CODE, refer to Chapter 5,
"Unsolicited Messaging Function", in "FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the
response notification method is described below.
In the example below, an unsolicited message is transmitted once after
reception of the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart then the FOCAS2
function cnc_unsolicstop is received.
FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop
Not Ready Ready Sending... Receiving... Completed Ready Not Ready

State
REQ (ladder program → (1)

communication function) (2)
(3) (6)
COM (communication function
→ ladder program)
RES (communication function (5)
(4)
→ ladder program) (7)
RES_CODE (communication
function → ladder program)
Transmission completed Receive data valid
(1) After checking that RES is set to 0, the ladder program prepares a
message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function sets COM
to 1 then transmits the message.
(3) Upon completion of message transmission, the communication
function sets COM to 0.
(4) Upon reception of a response to the message, the communication
function sets RES_CODE then sets RES to 1.
(5) Because of RES set to 1, the ladder program reads RES_CODE
then sets REQ to 0.
(6) Because of REQ set to 0, the communication function clears
RES_CODE to 0.
(7) The communication function sets RES to 0.
NOTE
For details of the states, see "Display items" in
- 638 -
When a PMC address for control is used (simplified method)
A description of using a PMC address for control in a ladder program

according to the simplified method is provided below.
NOTE
A combination of a PMC address for control and a
macro variable for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of a
macro variable to be transmitted cannot be
identified when viewed from the ladder program.
In the description below, a PMC address is used for
Explanation of PMC address signals for control
A detailed description of PMC address signals for control used to

execute the unsolicited messaging function is provided below. A
PMC address area for control consists of 1 byte.
The description below assumes that Rxxxx (with no PMC path
number specified) is used as a PMC address for control.
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx#7>
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message at a PMC address for
transmission, the ladder program sets this signal to 1. The message
is then transmitted to the personal computer. Upon reception of a
response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
- 639 -
Timing chart of PMC address signals for control
The timing chart of PMC address signals for control based on the
simplified method is described below.

State
REQ (ladder program ↔ (1)

(3) (5)
Transmission processing by
communication function
Reception processing by (4)
Transmission completed Response received
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the ladder program prepares
a message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits
the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission
processing.
function completes reception processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication
function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
When a macro variable for control is used (simplified method)

A description of using a macro variable for control in an NC program
according to the simplified method is provided below.
Macro variables for control are classified as custom macros and RTM
macros, but the same execution method is applicable.
NOTE
A combination of a macro variable for control and a
PMC address for transmission is also usable. In
this case, note that the read timing of the value of
PMC data to be transmitted cannot be identified
when viewed from the NC program.
In the description below, a macro variable is used for
- 640 -
Explanation of a macro variable for control
A detailed description of a macro variable for control used to execute

the unsolicited messaging function is provided below. One macro
variable for control is used.
The description below assumes that #xxxx (with no CNC path number
specified) is used as a macro variable number for control.
REQ <#xxxx>
[Classification] Input/Output signal
[Operation] After preparing a transmission message in a macro variable for
transmission, the NC program sets this signal to 1. The message is
then transmitted to the personal computer. Upon reception of a
response to the message, the CNC (communication function) clears
this signal to 0.
NOTE
A REQ input/output value is a real number. So,
"0" means "0.0", and "1" means "1.0".
Timing chart of a macro variable for control
The timing chart of a macro variable for control based on the

simplified method is described below.

State
REQ (NC program ↔ (1)

1
0
(3) (5)
Transmission processing by
Reception processing by (4)
Transmission completed Response received
(1) After checking that REQ is set to 0, the NC program prepares a

message then sets REQ to 1.
(2) Because of REQ set to 1, the communication function transmits
the message.
(3) The communication function completes message transmission
processing.
- 641 -

function completes reception processing.
(5) Because of reception processing completed, the communication
function sets REQ to 0.
NOTE
Example of using a macro variable for control
An example of using a macro variable for control is provided below.
• Example
[Description]
An NC program on CNC path number 1 posts NC command
start date and time information as an unsolicited message to
the personal computer.
[Setting]
As a macro variable for control, volatile RTM variable
number #0 (REQ) is used. On the other hand, macro
variables for transmission are used for date and time
information managed inside the CNC (system variable
numbers #3011 and #3012).
Setting item Set value

CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0
TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3011
NUMBER 1
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3012
NUMBER 1
[Example of NC program]
A RTM variable is executed in synchronism with the
immediately following NC command according to the RTM
variable specification. At this time, the operation timing
of the immediately following NC command is not affected.
So, the NC program indicated below posts NC command 2
start date and time information as an unsolicited message to
the personal computer.
- 642 -
RTM variable for control of the unsolicited

messaging function
//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; (1)
NC program #RV[0]=1; ①
#RV[0]=1;
ZEND;
:
:
:
NC command 1
Macro call command
One machining NC command 2
cycle
:
:
:
(Tip) (1) in the example above corresponds to the number in

the timing chart provided earlier.
NOTE
1 Note that if a custom macro is used as a macro for
control, the operation timing of an NC command is
affected. If the RTM variable in the example above
is replaced with a custom macro, for example, NC
command 2 becomes unexecutable unless the
macro variable for control is changed.
2 For details of custom macros and RTM variables,
refer to "User’s Manual (Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System) (B-63944EN)".
- 643 -

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 UNM

[Data type] Bit
#4 UNM With the embedded Ethernet port, the unsolicited messaging function
is:
0: Not used
1: Used
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14882 UNS

[Data type] Bit
#4 UNS When the embedded Ethernet port is used and termination of the
unsolicited messaging function is specified from other than the
connected unsolicited message server, the function:
0: Rejects termination.
1: Accepts termination.
After these parameters are modified, the power must be turned off
then back on or the embedded Ethernet function must be terminated
then restarted for the settings to become effective.
- 644 -
8.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

DEVICES
There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded

Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.
Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of
devices.
Procedure
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft
key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[EMB/PCMCIA].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCMCIA] switches between enabled
devices.
NOTE
1 Information on a switched device is stored in
nonvolatile memory.
On the next power-on, the device last selected can
be used as is.
2 When using the unsolicited messaging function,
note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not
Ready" state, regardless of the unsolicited
message transfer state.
• When the parameter for control is set to use the
response notification method, RES and
RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder
program.
simplified method, REQ is cleared.
- 645 -
8.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS
8.4.1 FTP File Transfer Function

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.
Host file list display
A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.
Procedure
2 Press soft key [FOLDER]. The program folder screen appears. (If
the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [DEVICE CHANGE] in that order.

The soft keys for selectable devices appear.
- 646 -
4 Press soft key [EMB ETHER]. The program directory screen is

changed to the contents of the hard disk on the host computer
(embedded Ethernet host file list screen). On this screen, you
can operate files.
Embedded Ethernet host file list screen
NOTE
When using the FTP file transfer function, check
that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port.
The two conditions below determine a connection
destination on the host file list screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded
Ethernet port. Make a selection in "DEVICE
SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) A host computer can be selected from
connection destinations 1, 2, and 3. Make a
selection according to the [HOST] soft key
described later.
5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can
be switched using the page keys .
Display item
AVAILABLE DEVICE
The currently selected device is displayed.
Check that the embedded Ethernet port is selected currently.
CONNECT HOST
Number of the currently connected host of the host computer
- 647 -
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of files in the current folder.
DEVICE
Current device. When the embedded Ethernet host file list is
selected, “EMB_ETHER” is displayed.
CURRENT FOLDER
Current work folder in the host computer
FILE LIST
Information of the files and folders in the host computer
Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device to be selected from the program folder screen. To
select the embedded Ethernet host file list, press soft key [EMB
ETHER].
DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF

Switches between the outline and detailed file lists.
CREATE FOLDER
Creates a new subfolder in the current work folder.
DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.
RENAME
Renames a file or folder.
HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.
SEARCH
Searches the current folder for a file.
REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the embedded Ethernet host file
list screen.
- 648 -
8.4.1.1 Displaying and operating the file list
REFRESH, DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF
Update the file list data or change the file list type.
1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the file list data.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display only file names.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display file attributes, sizes,
dates, and file names.
NOTE
The items displayed in the detailed list depend on
the FTP server setting on the host computer.
Moving a folder
Move a folder.
1 Select a folder you want to move using cursor keys and
2 Press MDI key .
CREATE FOLDER
Create a new folder.

1 Move to a folder in which you want to create a new folder.
2 Enter a folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
DELETE
Delete a file or folder.

1 Select a file or folder you want to delete using cursor keys
and .
2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
- 649 -
DELETE (multiple files)
Delete multiple files at a time.

1 Press soft key [SELECT START].
2 Select a file or folder you want to delete using cursor keys
and .
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
The selected file is highlighted.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each file you want to delete.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
- To execute the deletion, press soft key [EXEC].
- To cancel the deletion, soft key [CANCEL].
NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.
RENAME
Rename a file or folder.

1 Select a file or folder you want to rename using cursor keys
and .
2 Enter a new file or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].
SEARCH
Search the current work folder for a file.

1 Enter a file name.
2 Press soft key [SEARCH].
HOST CHANGE
Change the connected host computer.

1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].
The connected host number changes from 1 to 2 to 3, then back to
1.
- 650 -
8.5 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.
Procedure
3 Press soft key [EMBED PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], press soft
key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to display soft key
[RSTART].
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet
communication and then restarts it.
NOTE
1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts
communication even when it is in progress.
2 This function makes a restart by software. An
actual restart may be impossible under some
conditions.
3 When using the unsolicited messaging function,
note the following:
• Processing is forcibly started from the "Not
Ready" state, regardless of the unsolicited
message transfer state.
response notification method, RES and
RES_CODE (0x01) are posted to the ladder
program.
simplified method, REQ is cleared.
- 651 -
8.6 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET

FUNCTION
With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen

is available.
The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the
embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.
Displaying and operating the PING screen
Procedure
screen for the embedded Ethernet is displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP
file transfer, press soft key [PING FTP1] Similarly, to send the
PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [PING
FTP2] or [PING FTP3], respectively.
PING connection status screen
- 652 -
6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the

address of the destination on the PING setting screen. (Page keys
are used for switching.)
PING connection status screen
7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key
[PING]. The specified number of PING commands are sent to
the specified destination.
8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft
key [PING CANCEL].
- 653 -
Displaying Communication status screen

Procedure
screen for the embedded Ethernet is displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA LAN] soft key, the Ethernet Setting
screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set.
4 To display the communication status of the embedded Ethernet,
press soft key [COM STATE].
Page keys can be used to switch between the
sending state and the receiving state.
Communication status screen
- 654 -
TASK STATE screen
Procedure
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet
port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED
PORT] or [PCMCIA LAN], respectively.
4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status of the
embedded Ethernet function to be displayed.
TAST STATE screen
The following symbols are used.

Symbol and meaning
FOCAS2 #0 C: Waiting for a connection from the host
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: FOCAS2 out of service
FOCAS2 #1,#2 W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
PMC W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
UDP W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
FTP C: Execution wait
W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
- 655 -
Symbol and meaning

UNSOLICITED MSG W: Data processing in progress (1)
N: Abnormal state
X: Not yet executed
Number: Alive signal (UDP) transmission in
progress when count-up operation is
performed
- 656 -
8.7 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

FUNCTION
This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function.
NOTE
If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA
SERVER ERROR” is issued during data transfer
using the embedded Ethernet function, check the
error details on the log screen of the embedded
Ethernet function.
Displaying the log screen
Procedure
2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or
PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key [EMBED LOG] or
[PCMCIA LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press
the continue key.)
LOG screen
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and
time when an error occurred are displayed at the right end of the line.
The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where
MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours,
mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds.
The date and time of the upper item shown above is March 11,
16:55:23.
- 657 -
To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order.
The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the
embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the
embedded Ethernet function and the basic communication
function.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.
(4) Soft key [UNSOLT MSG]
Displays the log related to the unsolicited messaging function.
Error and message
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action

E-0118 Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error has occurred because of any of the
E-0119 following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other end.
The communication channel has been logically shut
down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has logically
shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication channels are
busy.
E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 was
Message received, the parameter for the unsolicited messaging
function could not be saved for one of the following causes:
→ The mode of the unsolicited messaging function is not
set to "PC mode".
→ The state of the unsolicited messaging function is not
"Not Ready".
→ The argument "parameter-for-unsolicited-message" of
the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2 includes an
invalid value.
E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function cnc_wrunsolicprm2,
Message is wrong cnc_rdunsolicprm2, cnc_unsolicstart, or cnc_unsolicstop
was received, the argument
"parameter-number-for-unsolicited-message" was found to
be invalid.
E-0200 Received message from FTP server A message sent by the FTP server is directly displayed.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server Software of the FTP server may not be running. Start the
software of the FTP server.
- 658 -

E-0207 The router is not found The specified IP address of the router may be wrong.
Alternatively, the router may be turned off. Check whether
the IP address of the router has been correctly specified
and whether the router is turned on.
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The specified IP address of the FTP server may be wrong.
Alternatively, the FTP server may be turned off. Check
whether the IP address of the FTP server has been
correctly specified and whether the FTP server is turned on.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check whether a correct user name and password are
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check whether a correct user name and password are
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder logging into the FTP server.
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error has occurred because of any of the
following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other end.
The communication channel has been logically shut
down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has logically
shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
E-0901 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address is not written in the hardware.
Alternatively, the hardware has been damaged.
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network.
One possible solution is to divide the network.
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Specify an IP address.
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Specify a correct subnet mask in the designated format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Specify a subnet mask.
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP address
of the local node and the IP address of the router.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP address
of the local node and the IP address of the DNS server.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check whether a correct host name is specified.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check whether a correct domain name is specified.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B0C Port No of a remote FTP server is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong The specified user name may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong The specified password may contain a prohibited character.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong The specified log-in folder name may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To allow a set-up, disable the DHCP client function.
E-0B19 Embedded Ethernet port isn't found The software or hardware of embedded Ethernet function
E-0B1A cannot be recognized. Check whether the software has
been incorporated. Check whether the hardware is sound.
- 659 -

E-0B27 Unsolicited Message function isn't available The software condition for using the unsolicited messaging
function is not satisfied. The cause may be one of the
following:
→The version of communication software is not supported
yet.
→ NC parameters for using the unsolicited messaging
function are not set.
For supported versions of communication software and the
NC parameters, see Subsection 18.2.4, "Setting of the
Unsolicited Messaging Function".
E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong In the CNC mode, the FOCAS2 function
cnc_wrunsolicprm2 cannot be executed.
E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The state of the unsolicited messaging function was other
than "Not Ready", so that the parameters for the unsolicited
messaging function could not be updated. The cause may
be one of the following:
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", the FOCAS2 function
cnc_wrunsolicprm2 or cnc_unsolicstart was executed.
→ In a state other than "Not Ready", soft key [APPLY] was
pressed.
E-0B2B Cannot refresh parameter of Unsolicited The parameters for the unsolicited messaging function
Message could not be updated. The cause may be one of the
following:
→ The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred.
→ A parameter for the unsolicited messaging function
includes an invalid value.
E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission The parameter for the unsolicited messaging function,
parameter of Unsolicited Message TRANSMISSION NUMBER or TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER (NO. 1 to NO. 3), includes an invalid value.
E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of The sum of sizes specified by the parameters for the
Unsolicited Message exceeds the limitation unsolicited messaging function, TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER NO. 1 to NO. 3, exceeds the maximum
specifiable number of bytes. For the maximum specifiable
number of bytes, see the setting item "TRANSMISSION
PARAMETER" in Subsection 18.2.4.4, "Setting on the CNC
screen".
E-XXXX (No message) An internal error has occurred.
Make a notification of the error number.
- 660 -
B-63945EN/03 9.DIGITAL SERVO
9 DIGITAL SERVO
This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of
digital servo and adjustment of reference position.
9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS.........................662

9.2 FSSB DISPLAY AND SETTING SCREEN............................673
9.3 SERVO TUNING SCREEN.....................................................682
9.4 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) ...690
9.5 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING....................694
9.6 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE .....................................696
9.7 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ...................................697
- 661 -
9.DIGITAL SERVO B-63945EN/03
9.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS
This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is

used for field adjustment of machine tool.
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 (SVS) 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.
1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.
3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.
4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following

operation: Function key → → [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.
Parameter No.2000
Parameter No.2020
Parameter No.2001
Parameter No.1820
Parameter No.2084
Parameter No.2085
Parameter No.2022
Parameter No.2023
Parameter No.2024
Parameter No.1821
- 662 -
(1) Initial set bit

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01
#0 PLC01 0: Values of parameters No.2023 and No.2024 are used as they are:
1: Values of parameters No.2023 and No.2024 are multiplied by 10.
#1 DGPRM 0: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1: Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
(2) Motor ID No.

Select the motor ID No. of the servo motor to be used, according
to the motor model and drawing number (the middle four digits
of A06B-XXXX-BXXX) listed in the tables on subsequent
pages.
Table 9.1 (a) αiS series servo motor

Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90D0 90E0
specification
αiS 2 /5000 0212 262 A A
αiS 2 /6000 0218 284 G G
αiS 4 /5000 0215 265 A A
αiS 8 /4000 0235 285 A A
αiS 8 /6000 0232 290 G G
αiS 12 /4000 0238 288 A A
αiS 22 /4000 0265 315 A A
αiS 30 /4000 0268 318 A A
αiS 40 /4000 0272 322 A A
αiS 50 /3000 0275 324 B B
αiS 50 /3000 FAN 0275-Bx1x 325 A A
αiS 100 /2500 0285 335 A A
αiS 200 /2500 0288 338 A A
αiS 300 /2000 0292 342 A A
αiS 500 /2000 0295 345 A A
Loading is possible with the servo software of the series and edition
listed above or subsequent editions.
The value for an x varies depending on whether an option is provided
or not.
- 663 -
Table 9.1 (b) αiF series servo motor

Motor
specification
αiF 1/5000 0202 252 A A
αiF 2/5000 0205 255 A A
αiF 4/4000 0223 273 A A
αiF 8/3000 0227 277 A A
αiF 12/3000 0243 293 A A
αiF 22/3000 0247 297 A A
αiF 30/3000 0253 303 A A
αiF 40/3000 0257-Bx0x 307 A A
αiF 40/3000 FAN 0257-Bx1x 308 A A
or not.
Table 9.1 (c) αiS (HV) series servo motor

Motor
specification
αiS 2/5000HV 0213 263 A A
αiS 2/6000HV 0219 287 G G
αiS 4/5000HV 0216 266 A A
αiS 8/4000HV 0236 286 A A
αiS 8/6000HV 0233 292 G G
αiS 12/4000HV 0239 289 A A
αiS 22/4000HV 0266 316 A A
αiS 30/4000HV 0269 319 A A
αiS 40/4000HV 0273 323 A A
αiS 50/3000HV FAN 0276-Bx1x 326 A A
αiS 50/3000HV 0276-Bx0x 327 B B
αiS 100/2500HV 0286 336 B B
αiS 200/2500HV 0289 339 B B
αiS 300/2000HV 0293 343 B B
αiS 500/2000HV 0296 346 B B
αiS 1000/2000HV 0298 348 B B
or not.
- 664 -
Table 9.1 (d) αiF (HV) series servo motor

Motor
specification
αiF 4/4000HV 0225 275 A A
αiF 8/3000HV 0229 279 A A
αiF 12/3000HV 0245 295 A A
αiF 22/3000HV 0249 299 A A
Table 9.1 (e) αCi series servo motor

Motor
specification
αC4/3000i 0221 271 A A
αC8/2000i 0226 276 A A
αC12/2000i 0241 291 A A
αC22/2000i 0246 296 A A
αC30/1500i 0251 301 A A
Table 9.1 (f) βiS series servo motor

Motor
specification
βiS 0.2/5000 0111 260 A A
βiS 0.3/5000 0112 261 A A
βiS 0.4/5000 0114 280 A A
βiS 0.5/5000 0115 281 A A
βiS 0.5/6000 0115 281 G G
βiS 1/5000 0116 282 A A
βiS 1/6000 0116 282 G G
βiS 2/4000 0061 253 B B
βiS 4/4000 0063 256 B B
βiS 8/3000 0075 258 B B
βiS 12/3000 0078 272 B B
βiS 22/2000 0085 274 B B
- 665 -
Table 9.1 (g) LiS series linear motor

Note: The following linear motors are driven by 200V.
Motor
Motor model Motor type No. 90E0 90E0
specification
LiS 300A1/4 0441-B200 351 G G
LiS 600A1/4 0442-B200 353 G G
LiS 900A1/4 0443-B200 355 G G
LiS 1500B1/4 0444-B210 357 G G
LiS 3000B2/2 0445-B110 360 G G
LiS 3000B2/4 0445-B210 362 G G
LiS 4500B2/2 0446-B110 364 G G
LiS 6000B2/2 0447-B110 368 G G
LiS 6000B2/4 0447-B210 370 G G
LiS 7500B2/2 0448-B110 372 G G
LiS 7500B2/4 0448-B210 374 G G
LiS 9000B2/2 0449-B110 376 G G
LiS 9000B2/4 0449-B210 378 G G
LiS 3300C1/2 0451-B110 380 G G
LiS 9000C2/2 0454-B110 384 G G
LiS 11000C2/2 0455-B110 388 G G
LiS 15000C2/2 0456-B110 392 G G
LiS 15000C2/3 0456-B210 394 G G
LiS 10000C3/2 0457-B110 396 G G
LiS 17000C3/2 0459-B110 400 G G
Note: The following linear motors are driven by 400V.
Motor
specification
LiS 1500B1/4 0444-B210 358 G G
LiS 3000B2/2 0445-B110 361 G G
LiS 4500B2/2HV 0446-B010 363 G G
LiS 4500B2/2 0446-B110 365 G G
LiS 6000B2/2HV 0447-B010 367 G G
LiS 6000B2/2 0447-B110 369 G G
LiS 7500B2/2HV 0448-B010 371 G G
LiS 7500B2/2 0448-B110 373 G G
LiS 9000B2/2 0449-B110 377 G G
LiS 3300C1/2 0451-B110 381 G G
LiS 9000C2/2 0454-B110 385 G G
LiS 11000C2/2HV 0455-B010 387 G G
LiS 11000C2/2 0455-B110 389 G G
LiS 15000C2/3HV 0456-B010 391 G G
LiS 10000C3/2 0457-B110 397 G G
LiS 17000C3/2 0459-B110 401 G G
- 666 -
(3) Arbitrary AMR function

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0 (Axis)
* Set "00000000".
(4) CMR
1820 Command multiply ratio
1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27

1
Set value＝ + 100
CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48
Set value=2×CMR
1822 Value of the numerator of arbitrary command multiplier n/m
1823 Value of the denominator of arbitrary command multiplier n/m
To set an arbitray command multiplier, the corresponding option

is required.
(5) Turn off the power then back on.
(6) N/M of feed gear (F⋅FG)
2084 n for flexible feed gear
2085 m for flexible feed gear
Setting for the α Pulsecoder in the semi-closed mode
Necessary position
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767) feedback pulses per
motor revolution (as irreducible
= fraction)
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) 1,000,000 (Note 2)
(Note 1)
NOTE
1 For both F⋅FG number and denominator, the
maximum setting value (after reduced) is 32767.
2 αi Pulsecoders assume one million pulses per
motor revolution, irrespective of resolution, for the
flexible feed gear setting.
3 If the calculation of the number of pulses required
per motor revolution involves p, such as when a
rack and pinion are used, assume π to be
approximately 355/113.
- 667 -
[Example] For detection in 1 mm units, specify as follows:

Number of necessary
Ball screw lead
position pulses F⋅FG
(mm/rev)
(pulses/rev)
10 10000 1/100
20 20000 2/100 or 1/50
30 30000 3/100
[Example]
If the machine is set to detection in 1,000 degree units with
a gear reduction ratio of 10:1 for the rotation axis, the table
rotates by 360/10 degrees each time the motor makes one
turn.
1000 position pulses are necessary for the table to rotate
through one degree.
The number of position pulses necessary for the motor to
make one turn is:
360/10 × 1000 = 36000 with reference counter =36000
F⋅FG numerator 36000 36
= =
F⋅FG denominator 1,000,000 1000
Setting for use of a separate detector (full-closed)
Number of position pulses

corresponding to a
F⋅FG numerator (≤ 32767) predetermined amount of travel
(as
F⋅FG denominator (≤ 32767) = Number of position pulses irreducible
corresponding to a fraction)
predetermined amount of travel
from a separate detector
[Example]
To detect a distance of 1 µm using a 0.5 µm scale, set the
following:
Numerator of F⋅FG L/1 1
= =
Denominator of F⋅FG L/0.5 2
<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One 8 mm n = 1/m = 125 n = 2/m = 25
revolution of 10 mm n = 1/m = 100 n = 1/m = 10
motor 12 mm n = 3/m = 250 n = 3/m = 25
- 668 -
(7) Direction of travel
2022 Rotational direction of motor

111 : Normal (clockwise) -111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)
Number of speed pulses, Number of position pulses
Closed loop
Semi-closed
Serial linear Serial rotary
loop Parallel type
scale scale
Command unit (µm) 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1 1/0.1
Initial bit setting b0=0 b0=0 b0=0 b0=0
Number of speed pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192
Number of position pulses 12500(*1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 1) (*2 - Example 2)
Set 8192 as the number of speed pulses. For the linear motor, make
settings according to "Linear Motor Parameter Setting" in the αi series
parameter manual.
NOTE
1 Setting of the number of position pulses for the semi-closed loop
(indicated by (*1) in the above table)
Set 12500.
2 As the number of position pulses, set the number of pulses fed back
from a separate detector when the motor makes one revolution. (The
flexible feed gear has no relevance to the calculation of the number
of position pulses.)
Example 1:
When a ball screw (direct connection) with a 10-mm lead and a
separate detector with a resolution of 0.5 µm per pulse are used
When the motor makes one revolution, the following pulses are fed
back from the separate detector:
10/0.0005 = 20,000
Accordingly,
Number of position pulses = 20,000
Example 2:
When a serial rotary scale with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses per
revolution is used, the number of position feedback pulses is
exceptionally calculated by the following:
12500 × (deceleration ratio between the motor and table)
When the deceleration ratio between the motor and table is 10:1, for
example, the number of position pulses is:
12,500 × (1/10) = 1250
3 When the set number of position pulses is greater than 32767
With the conventional NC, bit 0 (high resolution bit) to be initially set
was changed according to the command unit as required. With the
Series 30i, there is no dependency between the command unit and
bit 0 to be initially set.
The conventional way of setting poses no problem, but the method
described below makes the setting much easier.
- 669 -
With a position feedback pulse conversion coefficient, the number of

position pulses is set using the product of two parameters.
2024 Number of position pulses
2185 Conversion coefficient for the number of position feedback pulses
(Example of setting)
When a linear scale with a minimum resolution of 0.1 (m is used and
the travel distance per motor revolution is 16 mm:
Ns = (travel distance per motor revolution (mm))/(minimum resolution
of detector (mm))
= 16 mm/0.0001 mm = 160000 (>32767) = 10000 × 16
So, set the following:
A: 10000
B: 16
NOTE
If the detector of the motor is an αi pulse coder (the
number of speed pulses = 8192), select a power of
2 (such as 2, 4, 8, and so on) as a conversion
coefficient whenever possible. (The position gain
value used inside the software becomes more
accurate.)
(9) Reference counter
1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 to 99999999)
(a) For the semi-closed loop

Reference counter = Number of position pulses required per motor
revolution or the same number divided by an integer
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the motor and table is
not an integer when a rotation axis is used, a
reference counter capacity needs to be set so that
the point where reference counter = 0 (grid point)
always appears at the same position relative to the
table.
Example of setting)
αi Pulsecoder, semi-closed loop (1 µm detection)
Required number of
Lead of ball screw Reference Grid width
position pulses
(mm/revolution) counter (mm)
(pulses/revolution)
10 10000 10000 10
20 20000 20000 20
30 30000 30000 30
- 670 -
If there is an error between the required number of position pulses per

motor revolution and the setting of the reference counter, the reference
position varies, depending on the start point.
Such an error needs to be eliminated by changing the detection unit. In
this case, a reference counter capacity may be set using a fraction.
Example of setting)
System with detection unit = 1 µm, ball screw lead = 20
mm/revolution, and deceleration ratio = 1/17
(i) Method of setting a reference counter capacity as a fraction

Required number of position pulses per motor revolution =
20000/17
Set the parameters as follows:
1821 Reference counter capacity of each axis (numerator) (0 to 99999999)
2179 Reference counter capacity of each axis (denominator) (0 to 32767)
The parameter for a denominator is not presently displayed on

the servo screen. So, a denominator needs to be set on the
parameter screen.
In this example, set numerator = 20000, and denominator = 17.
NOTE
The reference counter assumes only an integer. So,
if a fraction is set for a reference counter capacity,
the gap to the point where reference counter = 0 is
compensated for.
(In pulse control theory, a position less than one
pulse cannot be controlled. So, grid interval
compensation is performed so that a grid point error
is less than one detection unit at all times.)
(ii) Method of changing the detection unit

20000/17
The values of all of the following parameters are multiplied by
17 to change the detection unit to 1/17 µm:
Parameter to be changed Series 30i
FFG × 17 Servo screen
CMR × 17 Servo screen
Reference counter × 17 Servo screen
Effective area × 17 No. 1826, 1827
Positional deviation limit value during movement × 17 No. 1828
Positional deviation limit value during a stop × 17 No. 1829
Backlash amount × 17 No. 1851, 1852
- 671 -
As the detection unit is changed from 1 µm to 1/17 µm, the

values of all parameters to be set using the detection unit must be
multiplied by 17.
CAUTION
In addition to the parameters listed above, there are
parameters to be set using the detection unit.
This change eliminates an error between the required number of

position pulses per motor revolution and the reference counter.
20000
Reference counter = 20000
(b) For the closed loop

Reference counter = Z phase (reference position) interval/detection unit or
the same number divided by an integer
If the reference counter does not assume an integer, see the

example of semi-closed loop.
NOTE
If the rotation ratio between the separate detector
and table is not an integer when a rotation axis is
used, a reference counter capacity needs to be set
so that the point where reference counter = 0 (grid
point) always appears at the same position relative
to the table.
Example of setting)
Example 1)
When Z phase interval = 50 mm and detection unit = 1 µm
Reference counter = 50,000/1 = 50,000
Example 2)
When detection unit = 0.001° with a rotation axis
Reference counter = 360/0.001 = 360,000
Example 3)
When there is only one Z phase as in the case of a linear scale
Set a simple number such as 10000 and 50000 for the reference
counter.
6. Turn off the power then back on.
- 672 -
9.2 FSSB DISPLAY AND SETTING SCREEN
Connecting the CNC control unit to servo amplifiers via a high-speed

serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one
fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in
machine tool electrical sections.
Axis settings are calculated automatically according to the
interrelationships between axes and amplifiers entered on the FSSB
setting screen. Parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1936 to 1939, 14340 to
14375, and 14376 to 14407 are specified automatically according to
the results of the calculation.
Display
The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axis
information. This information can also be specified by the operator.

2 To display [FSSB], press continuous menu key several
times.
3 Pressing soft key [FSSB] causes the AMP SET screen (or the
previously selected FSSB setting screen) to appear, with the
following soft keys displayed.
The FSSB setting screens include: AMP SET, AXIS SET, and AMP
MAINTENANCE.
Pressing soft key [AMP] causes the AMP SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [AXIS] causes the AXIS SET screen to appear.
Pressing soft key [MAINTE] causes the AMP MAINTENANCE
screen to appear.
- 673 -
<1> Amplifier setting screen

The amplifier setting screen consists of two sections: the first
section displays information about the slave, while the second
section displays information about the separate detector interface
units.
Page keys and can be used to switch between the
sections.
- 674 -
The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items:

• NO. (slave number)
Up to 18 slaves (up to 16 amplifiers and up to 2 separate
detector interface units) connected to each FSSB line with
serial numbers assigned starting with the slave closest to the
CNC are displayed.
A slave number on the amplifier setting screen consists of a
number representing an FSSB line (1 or 2) followed by a
hyphen (-) and the number of a slave unit connected to the
FSSB in the order of connections closer to the CNC.
If slaves are connected to the second FSSB line, the slaves
are displayed after the slaves connected to the first FSSB
line.
• AMP (amplifier type)
The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which
stands for "amplifier," a number that indicates the placing of
the amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and
a letter such as L (first axis), M (second axis), or N (third
axis) indicating the placing of the axis in the amplifier.
• AXIS NO. (controlled axis number)
The controlled axis number set in each of parameters Nos.
14340 to 14375 is displayed.
If a number specified in these parameters falls outside the
range of between 1 and the maximum number of controlled
axes, 0 is displayed.
• NAME (controlled axis name)
The axis name assigned to a parameter (No. 1020)
corresponding to a particular controlled axis number is
displayed. If an extended axis name is valid, the axis name
in the parameter (No. 1025/1026) is also displayed. If the
controlled axis number is 0, - is displayed.
• The following items are displayed as amplifier information:
- UNIT (servo amplifier unit type)
- SERIES (servo amplifier name)
- CURRENT (maximum rating)
• The following items are displayed as separate detector
interface unit information:
- SEPARATE
This display consists of the letter M, which stands for
"separate detector interface unit" and a number
indicating the placing of the pulse module, as counted
from that nearest to the CNC.
- TYPE
This display is a letter indicating the type of the
separate detector interface unit.
- PCB ID
This display consists of four digits indicating the
separate detector interface unit ID (hexadecimal). The
separate detector interface uni ID is followed by SDU
(8-AXES) for the eight-axis separate detector module
or SDU (4-AXES) for the four-axis separate detector
module.
- 675 -
<2> Axis setting screen

The axis setting screen displays the information shown below:
This axis setting screen displays the following items:

• AXIS (controlled axis number)
This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis.
• AMP (type of the amplifier connected to each axis)
• M1 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 1)
The connector number for separate detector interface unit 1
stored in the SRAM is displayed.
• 1-DSF
If the number of servo HRV3 and HRV4 controlled axes
that can be controlled by one DSP is limited, the number of
axes controllable by one DSP stored in the SRAM is
displayed. When 0 is displayed, no limitation is imposed.
• Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)
The value stored in the SRAM is displayed. It is spindle
number for the Cs contour controlled axis.
• TNDM
The value stored in the SRAM is displayed. Consecutive
odd and even numbers are displayed for the master and
slave axes for tandem control.
- 676 -
<3> Amplifier maintenance screen

The amplifier maintenance screen displays maintenance
information for servo amplifiers. This screen consists of the
following two pages, either of which can be selected by pressing
the or key.
The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items:

• AXIS (controlled axis number)
• AMP (type of amplifier connected to each axis)
• SERIES (servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to
each axis)
- 677 -
• UNIT (unit type of a servo amplifier connected to each axis)

• AXES (maximum number of axes controlled by an
amplifier connected to each axis)
• CUR. (maximum rating for amplifiers connected to each
axis)
• EDITION (unit version number of an amplifier connected to
each axis)
• TEST (date of test performed on an amplifier connected to
each axis)
Example) 030123 = January 23, 2003
• MAINTE-NO. (engineering change number for an amplifier
connected to each axis)
Setting
On an FSSB setting screen (other than the amplifier maintenance
screen), pressing soft key [(OPRT)] displays the following soft keys:
To enter data, place the machine in MDI mode or the emergency stop
state, position the cursor to the point where a desired item is to be
input, then enter the desired data and press soft key [INPUT] (or the
key on the MDI panel).
When soft key [SET] is pressed after data has been entered, a warning
message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the
data is satisfactory, the corresponding parameter is set up.
To restore the previous value of a parameter if, for example, an
entered value is incorrect, press soft key [READ].
When the power is turned on, values are read from the parameters (No.
1023, 1905, 1936 to 1939, 14340 to 14375, or 14376 to 14407) and
displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB
setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the
parameter screen using the MDI or a G10
command. Use only the FSSB screen to enter
values for these parameters.
- 678 -
<1> Amplifier setting screen
The amplifier setting screen displays the following items:

• NO. (controlled axis number)
For this item, enter a value of between 1 and the maximum
number of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside this
range is entered, the warning message "INVALID
FORMAT" appears. If the entered controlled axis number is
duplicate or 0, the warning message "SPECIFIED DATA IS
OUT OF RANGE" appears when soft key [SET] is pressed
to assert the entered value. In this case, no value can be
entered for the parameter.
- 679 -
<2> Axis setting screen
On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified:

M2 (connector number for separate detector interface uni 2)
For an axis on which to use each separate detector interface
unit, enter a connector number with a number 1 to 8
(maximum number of connectors on a separate detector
interface unit).
When a separate detector interface unit is not connected and
a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
warning message “ILLEGAL DATA” is displayed. When
a separate detector interface unit is connected and a number
that falls outside the valid range is entered, the warning
message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is displayed.
• 1-DSF
If the number of servo HRV3 and HRV4 controlled axes
that can be controlled by one DSP is limited, set the number
of axes controllable by one DSP.
Number of servo HRV3 controlled axes Setting: 3
Number of servo HRV4 controlled axes Setting: 1
The same value is set for axes other than Cs contour
controlled axes.
If a value other than 0, 1, and 3 is input, the warning
"INVALID FORMAT" is output.
• Cs (Cs contour controlled axis)
Enter spindle number (1 to 8) for the Cs contour controlled
axis. If a number other than 0 to 8 is entered, the warning
message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is displayed.
- 680 -
• TNDM
Enter odd and even numbers for axes for tandem control or
EGB. These numbers must be consecutive and within a
range between 1 and the number of controlled axes. If a
number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the
warning message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is
displayed.
When soft key [SET] is pressed on the axis setting screen after
data entry, the warning message “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE”
is displayed if any of the following conditions is satisfied.
• The setting disables the connection of controlled axes with
amplifiers and separate detector interface units.
• With an axis, a value other than 0 is set for two or more of
M1, M2, M3, and M3.
• A value other than 0 is specified for both CS and TNDM for
an axis.
• 1-DSP is 1 and TNDM is not 0 for an axis.
• 1-DSP is 3 and TNDM is specified for a multiple of four for
an axis.
• A duplicate value is specified for M1.
• A duplicate value is specified for Cs.
• A duplicate value is specified for TNDM.
• An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TNDM.
- 681 -
9.3 SERVO TUNING SCREEN
9.3.1 Parameter Setting

Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS
#0 SVS 0: Servo tuning screen is not displayed.

1: Servo tuning screen is displayed.
9.3.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen
1 Press function key key, continuous menu key , and

soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
2 Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.
<1> <9>
<2> <10>
<3> <11>
<4> <12>
<13>
<5> <14>
<6> <15>
<7> <16>
<8> <17>
<18>
(1) Function bit : Parameter No.2003

(2) Loop gain : Parameter No.1825
(3) Tuning start :
(4) Set period :
(5) Integral gain : Parameter No.2043
(6) Proportional gain : Parameter No.2044
(7) Filter : Parameter No.2067
(Parameter No.2021)+256
(8) Velocity gain Set value 256 ×100
(9) Alarm 1 : Diagnosis No.200
- 682 -

(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error (Diagnosis No.300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(17) Current(A) : Indicate current with A (peak value).
(18) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm 1 OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA
Alarm 2 ALD EXP
Alarm 3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH
Alarm 4 DTE CRC STB PRM
Alarm 5 OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
Alarm 6 SFA
Alarm 7 OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
Alarm 8 DTE CRC STB SPD
Alarm 9 FSD SVE IDW NCE IFE
NOTE
The empty fields do not represent alarm codes.
9.3.3 Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors
Alarm 1 Alarm 5 Alarm 2

Description Action
OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA MCC FAN ALD EXP
1 0 0 Overcurrent alarm (PSM)
1 0 1 Overcurrent alarm (SVM) 1
1 0 1 Overcurrent alarm 1
(software)
1 Overvoltage alarm
1 Excessive regenerative
discharge alarm
1 0 0 Power supply undervoltage
(PSM)
1 1 0 DC link undervoltage
(PSM)
1 0 1 Control power supply
undervoltage (SVM)
1 1 1 DC link undervoltage
(SVM)
1 0 0 Overheat (PSM) 2
1 1 0 Motor overheat 2
1 MCC welding, precharge
1 0 0 Fan stop (PSM)
1 0 1 Fan stop (SVM)
1 OVC alarm 3
NOTE
For the alarms with no action number, see the
maintenance manual of the servo amplifier.
- 683 -
Action 1: Related to overcurrent alarms

An overcurrent alarm is issued when an excessively large current
flows in the main circuit.
If an overcurrent alarm is always issued after the emergency stop
state is canceled or at the time of gradual acceleration/
deceleration, the cause may be a defective amplifier, cable
connection error, broken cable, or parameter setting error.
First, check if the servo parameters indicated below are set to the
standard values. If the servo parameters (No.2004, No.2040, and
No.2041) are set to the standard values, check the amplifier and
cable connections according to the maintenance manual of the
amplifier.
No.2004 No.2040 No.2041
If an overcurrent alarm is issued only at the time of abrupt

acceleration/deceleration, the use condition is too severe.
Increase the time constant and see what happens.
CAUTION
If the emergency stop state is canceled when the
power line to the motor is disconnected, an
overcurrent alarm (software) may be issued. If this
poses a problem, set the following parameter to 1:
Bit 0 of parameter No. 2207: Ignores an overcurrent
alarm (software).
Action 2: Related to overheat alarms

If an overheat alarm is issued after a long-time continuous
operation, the temperature of the motor or amplifier may be high.
Stop the operation for a while and see what happens. If an
overheat alarm is still issued about 10 minutes after the power is
turned off, the hardware is probably faulty.
If an overheat alarm is issued intermittently, increase the time
constant or increase stop times in the program to suppress an
increase in temperature.
Action 3: Related to an OVC alarm

If an OVC alarm is issued, check if the parameters indicated
below are set to the standard values.
No.1877, No.1878, No.1893
No.2062, No.2063, No.2065
No.2161, No.2162, No.2163, No.2164
If the parameters are set to the standard values, increase the time
constant or increase stop times in the program to suppress an
increase in temperature.
- 684 -
9.3.4 Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and Separate Serial

Pulsecoder
(1) For the αi Pulsecoder

An alarm is identified from the data of alarms 1, 2, 3, and 5. The
meaning of each bit is indicated below.
Alarm 3 Alarm 5 1 Alarm 2

Description Action
CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH LDM PMS FBA ALD EXP
1 Soft phase alarm 2
1 Battery voltage zero 1
1 1 1 0 Count error alarm 2
1 EEPROM error alarm
1 Battery undervoltage (warning) 1
1 Pulse error alarm
1 LED error alarm
CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a Pulsecoder failure. Replace the
Pulsecoder.
(2) For the separate serial detector coder

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 7. The meaning of
each bit is indicated below.
Alarm 7
Description Action
OHA LDA BLA PHA CMA BZA PMA SPH
1 Soft phase alarm 2
1 Pulse error alarm
1 Battery voltage zero 1
1 Count error alarm 2
1 Phase alarm 2
Battery undervoltage
1 1
(warning)
1 LED error alarm
Separate detector overheat
1
alarm
CAUTION
The alarms with no action number are considered to
be caused by a detector failure. Replace the
detector.
Action 1: Battery-related alarms

Check if a battery is connected. When the power is turned on for
the first time after a battery is connected, a battery voltage zero
alarm is issued. In such a case, turn off the power then turn on
the power again. If a battery voltage zero alarm is still issued,
check the battery voltage. If a battery undervoltage alarm is
issued, check the voltage and replace the battery.
- 685 -
Action 2: Alarms that may be caused by noise

If an alarm is issued intermittently or an alarm is issued after the
emergency stop state is canceled, the cause of the alarm is
probably noise. In this case, provide sufficient noise protection.
If an alarm is issued even after noise protection is provided,
replace the detector.
9.3.5 Alarms Related to Serial Communication

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 4 and alarm 8.
Alarm 4 Alarm 8
Description
DTE CRC STB PRM DTE CRC STB SPD
1
1 Serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1
1
1 Separate serial Pulsecoder communication alarm
1
Action:
An error occurred in serial communication. Check if the cable is
connected correctly and also check if the cable is not
disconnected and broken. If a CRC or STB error occurs, the
cause may be noise. In this case, provide noise protection. If an
alarm is always issued after the power is turned on, the
Pulsecoder, amplifier control board (i series), or separate detector
interface unit (i series) may be faulty.
9.3.6 Alarms Related to Disconnection

An alarm is identified from the data of alarms 1, 2, and 6.
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 6
Description Action
OVL LVA OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA ALD EXP SFA
Hard disconnection
1 1 1 0 (separate A/B phase 1
disconnection)
Soft disconnection (closed
1 0 0 0 2
loop)
Soft disconnection (α
1 0 0 1 3
Pulsecoder)
Action 1:
This alarm is issued when a separate A/B phase scale is used.
Check if the A/B phase detector is connected correctly.
- 686 -
Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the position feedback pulse change is
smaller than the velocity feedback pulse change. This means that
this alarm is not issued in a semi-closed loop. Check if the
separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly. If
the separate detector outputs position feedback pulses correctly,
such a situation that only the motor makes turns in the reverse
direction at the start of machine movement because of a large
backlash between the motor position and scale position is
considered to have occurred.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2003 TGAL
#1 TGAL 1: The parameter-set detection level is used for a soft disconnection

alarm.
2064 Soft disconnection alarm level
Standard setting 4: An alarm is issued when the motor makes a 1/8 revolution.
Increase the setting of this parameter.
Action 3:
This alarm is issued when synchronization between phase data
and absolute position data sent from the built-in Pulsecoder is
lost. While the power to the NC is turned off, unplug the
Pulsecoder cable, then plug the cable once again after about 10
minutes. If this alarm is still issued, replace the Pulsecoder.
9.3.7 Alarm Related to Invalid Parameter Settings

An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 4.
Alarm 4
Description
DTER CRC STB PRM
Invalid parameter detected by the
1
servo software
When PRM = 1, an invalid parameter is detected by the servo

software. Read the value indicated by diagnosis 352, and troubleshoot
according to "FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series Parameter
Manual".
When PRM = 0, read the bit value indicated by diagnosis 280, and
determine the cause according to the following:
Diagnosis 280#0 = 1: In parameter (No. 2020) used for motor module
specification, a value not within the specifiable range is specified.
Diagnosis 280#2 = 1: In parameter (No. 2023), an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
Diagnosis 280#3 = 1: In parameter (No. 2024), an incorrect value such
as a value equal to or less than 0 is set.
- 687 -
Diagnosis 280#4 = 1: In parameter (No. 2022), a correct value (111 or

-111) is not set.
Diagnosis 280#6 = 1: In parameter (No. 2023), an incorrect value is
set.
9.3.8 Others
An alarm is identified from the data of alarm 5. The meaning of each
bit is indicated below.
Alarm 5
Description Action
OFS MCC LDM PMS FAN DAL ABF
1 Feedback mismatch alarm 1
1 Semi-closed/closed loop excessive error alarm 2
1 Current offset error alarm 3
Action 1:
This alarm is issued when the move direction of the position
detector becomes opposite to the move direction of the speed
detector. Check the rotation direction of the separate detector. If
the rotation direction of the separate detector is opposite to the
rotation direction of the motor, take the following action:
For the A/B phase detector:
Exchange the connections of A and A with each other.
For the serial detector:
Reverse the signal direction setting of the separate detector.
Even with the A/B phase detector, the signal direction can be
reversed by setting the parameter below. (This method cannot be
used when absolute position communication is required.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2018 RVRSE
#0 RVRSE Whether to reverse the signal direction of the separate detector can be
set.
0: Does not reverse the signal direction of the separate detector.
1: Reverses the signal direction of the separate detector.
If there is a large twist between the motor and separate detector, this
alarm may be issued in abrupt acceleration/deceleration. In such a case,
change the detection level.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2201 RNLV
#1 RNLV The detection level of a feedback mismatch alarm can be changed.

1: Detected at 1000 min-1 or more
0: Detected at 600 mm-1 or more
- 688 -
Action 2:
This alarm is issued when the difference between the motor
position and separate detector position exceeds the
semi-closed/closed loop excessive error level. Check if the dual
position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly. If the
dual position feedback conversion coefficient is set correctly,
increase the alarm level. If this alarm is still issued after changing
the level, check the connection direction of the scale.
2078 Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator)
2079 Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)
2118 Dual position feedback semi-closed/full-closed loop error level
[Setting] Detection unit. When 0 is set, no detection operation is performed.
Action 3:
The current offset value (equivalent to the current value during
an emergency stop) of the current detector becomes abnormally
high. If this alarm is still issued after the power is turned off then
back on, the current detector is considered to be faulty. When
using the αi series, replace the amplifier.
- 689 -
9.4 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)
Overview
Speed
Rapid traverse FL rate

(Parameter No. 1420α) (Parameter No. 1425α)
Time
Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (Parameter No. 1620α)
*DECα
PCZ
Grid
Grid shift amount Reference counter capacity

(Parameter No. 1850) (Parameter No. 1821)
10mm/rev
10000P
Error Proportion Speed
CMR M
counter gain loop
Command +
- ×4 (Serial)
Reference
F⋅FG PC
counter
GRID
Counter capacity 10000P/rev (Flexible feed gear)

10000P
- 690 -
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx

#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTE

Set a reference counter size.
As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference
position return based on the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set
the interval of mark 1.
1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis
NOTE

To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount
set in this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the
reference counter can be specified as the grid shift.
In case of parameter SFDx(No.1008#4) is 0: Grid shift
In case of parameter SFDx(No.1008#4) is 1: Reference point shift
NOTE
For setting the reference position without dogs,
only the grid shift function can be used.
(The reference position shift function cannot be
used.)
- 691 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APC APZ OPT

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power
must be turned off before operation is continued.
#1 OPTx Position detector
0: A separate pulse coder is not used.
1: A separate pulse coder is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale
with reference marks or a linear scale with an
absolute address zero point (full-closed system).
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment
is performed or after the absolute position detector is replaced, this
parameter must be set to 0, power must be turned off and on, then
manual reference position return must be performed. This completes
the positional correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1
automatically.
#5 APCx Position detector

0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
- 692 -
- Separate type Pulsecoder or linear scale is used
1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]
Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set

to the reference counter capacity.
* When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of

the distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer
may be used as a reference counter capacity:
(Example)
(1µm)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc
- 693 -
9.5 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING
When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return,
this function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set
by MTB.
When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position
once set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is
replaced or absolute
position is lost, perform this setting.
Overview
Speed
Reference position return

FL rate (PRM 1425)
Time
JOG
ZRN
+Jα
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZP α
Operation
<1> Move the tool along an axis for setting the reference position in
the reference position return direction in jog feed and position the
tool near the reference position.
<2> Select the manual reference position return mode and set the feed
axis and direction select signal (+ or – direction) for the axis for
setting the reference position to 1.
<3> The tool is positioned at the nearest grid (electric grid based on
the one-rotation signal of the position detector) in the reference
position return direction specified in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter
No. 1006 from the current position. This position is set as the
reference position.
<4> After the in-position status is confirmed, the reference position
return completion signal (ZP1) and reference position
establishment signal (ZRF1) are set to 1.
* After the reference position has been set, select the reference
position return mode (ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an
axis-and-direction- select signal, then the tool returns to the
reference position.
- 694 -
Parameter
There are the following related parameters.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx

#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx

NOTE
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction
- 695 -
9.6 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE
Overview
The αi servo system can report the warning status before one of the
following target alarms occurs.
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.
For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting
tools from the time a warning occurs by the time a servo alarm occurs.
Signal
Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <F093.4 to 7>
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo
amplifier.
[Output condition] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier
and their corresponding warning signals.
Warning status signals Time from when a warning

Corresponding alarm messages SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1 state signal is issued to
(F093.7) (F093.6) (F093.5) (F093.4) until an alarm occurs
444 n AXIS: INV. COOLING FAN 1 0 0 0 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
601 n AXIS: INV. RADIATOR FAN 1 0 0 1 Until overheat occurs
443 n AXIS: CNV. COOLING FAN 1 1 0 0 Until overheat occurs
606 n AXIS: CNV. RADIATOR FAN 1 1 0 1 Until overheat occurs
431 n AXIS: CNV. OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute
607 n AXIS: CNV. SINGLE PHASE 1 1 1 1 PSMR: Five seconds,
FAILURE PSM: One minute
A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below.

Occurrence of a warning
Servo amplifier
SVWRN1-4
(Warning)
PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stop

during this time period with the PMC to
stop the machine without damage. The
time period varies with the warning type.
Activation
Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1
- 696 -
9.7 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN
Overview
In the αi servo system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
(Remark: Some instances of these units do not have ID information.)
- Servo motor
- Pulsecoder
- Servo amplifier module
- Power supply module
ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units

during first startup of the CNC and then recorded. Next time (and the
subsequent time) the CNC is started, the ID information that can be
read is compared with one recorded at the first startup time in order to
monitor any change to the connected units. (If there is a difference
between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID
information of an unit that does not have ID information can be
displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference
between these IDs appears.)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SVI IDW

#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is:

0: Prohibited.
1: Not prohibited.
#1 SVI The servo information screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 697 -
Displaying the servo information screen
1 Press the function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft

key.
2 Press the [SERVO INFO] soft key to display the screen as shown
below.
* Servo information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a

difference between the ID information in screen and the
actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded
by *, as shown below.
- 698 -
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates
the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to
update the registered data, as described in the
editing section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.
Editing the servo information screen
1 Assume that parameter IDW (No.13112#0) = 1.

2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.
3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the servo information
screen" to display the screen as shown below.
4 To move the cursor on the screen, use the and

keys.
- 699 -
Screen operation
Mode Key operation Use

Viewing (*1) Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Editing (*2) Soft key
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the cursor
position with the character string in key-in buffer.
[CANCEL] Deletes the character string in key-in buffer.
[READ ID] Transfers the ID information the connected
device at the cursor has to the key-in buffer.
Only the items preceded by * (*3) are valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been changed
on the servo information screen in flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been
changed on the servo information screen and
loads ID information from flash ROM.
Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen basis.
Cursor key Scrolls up or down the selection of ID
information.
*1 Viewing mode: when parameter IDW (No.13112#0) = 0

*2 Editing mode: when parameter IDW (No.13112#0) = 1
*3 If there is a difference between the ID information in screen and
the actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded
by *.
NOTE
For axes that are not used by the αi servo system,
ID information of connected units cannot be
obtained.
- 700 -
B-63945EN/03 10.AC SPINDLE
10 AC SPINDLE
This chapter outlines the serial interface spindle amplifiers and
explains related parameters.
10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE .....................................702

10.1.1 OUTLINE OF SPINDLE CONTROL.......................702
10.1.2 SPINDLE SETTING AND TUNING SCREEN .......704
10.1.3 AUTOMATIC SETTING OF STANDARD
PARAMETERS.........................................................714
10.1.4 WARNING INTERFACE .........................................716
10.1.5 SPINDLE INFORMATION SCREEN......................718
- 701 -
10.AC SPINDLE B-63945EN/03
10.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE
10.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control
S command M command
NC PMC
M03, M04, M05, M19
FIN
*SSTP (Spindle stop)
Motor speed
SOVx (Spindle override)
SF, GR1O, GR2O, GR3O

(For milling machining)
GR1, GR2 (For lathe cutting)
S SOR (Orientation)
(Parameters Nos. 3735 to
3752) 0
R01O to R12O
1
Orientation speed
(bit 1 (ESF) of parameter No.3705, R01I to R12I
parameter No.3732, and bit 5 0 1
(ORM) of parameter No.3706) SIND
Output polarity (Bits 7 (CWM) and

SGN (0=+, 1=-)
6 (TCW) of parameter No.3706)
0 1
SSIN
*ESP, MRDY,
SFR, SRV, ORCM etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1, LDT2

ORAR, ALM etc.
Communication
function
Communication cable
Serial spindle
Communication
amplifier
function
Spindle
Operator's panel motor PC
Load meter LM
Speedometer
Spindle
SM
- 702 -
10.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series

(Bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 0)
Output Motor speed
4095 Max
Parameter
Gear 2 Gear 3 No.3736
Gear 1
Parameter
No.3735
0
S code
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter -1
(min )
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
10.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series

(Bit 2 (SGB) of Parameter No.3705 = 1)
Output Motor speed

Parameter
4095 Max No.3736
Parameter
No.3752
Parameter
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
No.3751
Parameter
No.3735
0
S code
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter -1
(min )
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743
10.1.1.3 T series
Output Motor speed
4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
Gear 4
S code
-1
(min )
0
0
0 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter
No.3741 No.3742 No.3743 No.3744
- 703 -
10.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen
10.1.2.1 Display method

(1) Confirm the parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS
#1 SPS 0: The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.
1: The spindle tuning screen is displayed.
(2) Press the function key to select the screen for setting
parameters and other data.
(3) Press the continuous menu key .
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning
screen appears.
(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be

selected using soft keys.
<1> [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
<2> [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
<3> [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen
(6) With the page keys , a spindle to be displayed can

be selected (only when multiple serial spindles are connected).
- 704 -
10.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen
- Gear selection
The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1
- Spindle
Select a spindle for which data is to be set.
S11 : Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S12 : Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S21 : Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
S22 : Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
Switching between the main spindle and the subspindle is performed

by spindle switching control. Spindle switching control is the
function for driving two spindle motors with one spindle amplifier.
For details, refer to the following manual.
Section, “I-5.2 SPINDLE SWITCHING CONTROL” in the
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi /βi series, FANUC
BUILT-IN SPINDLE MOTOR Bi seriesPARAMETER
MANUAL (B-65280EN)
- 705 -
- Parameters
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Gear ratio (HIGH) 4056 4056
4216 4216
Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW) 4058 4058
4217 4217
Gear ratio (LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed (gear1) 3741 3741
Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196
Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None
- 706 -
10.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen
- Operation mode
1 : SPEED CONTROL
2 : SPINDLE ORIENTATION
3 : SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL
4 : RIGID TAPPING
5 : SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
6 : SP.POSITIONING CONTROL
- Gear selection
- Spindle
The descriptions of these two items are the same as those for the
spindle setting screen.
- Displayed parameters
The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle positioning Synchronization
Normal operation Orientation Rigid tapping Cs contour control
control control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/ ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference Shift spindle stop deceleration constant Shift reference Shift reference
position position (%) position position
Shift reference Shift reference
position position
*1) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed

parameter items, see Section 10.1.2.5.
- 707 -
- Displayed monitoring items

The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation
mode.
Spindle positioning Synchronization
Normal operation Orientation Rigid tapping Cs contour control
control control
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed
Feedrate Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed
Position deviation S Position deviation S Position deviation S1 Position deviation S Position deviation S
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous Synchronous
deviation deviation
*1)
|Spindle data|
Motor speed [min-1] = × Max. motor speed (*)
16383
(*) Parameter No. 4020: Main spindle
Parameter No. 4196: Subspindle
- 708 -
10.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen
- 709 -
- Spindle alarm
1 : Motor overheat 51 : Converter DC link overvoltage 86 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
2 : Excessive speed deviation 52 : ITP signal error I undetected
3 : DC link fuse blown 53 : ITP signal error II 87 : Spindle sensor signal error
4 : Input fuse blown 54 : Overload current alarm 88 : Radiator cooling fan stopped
6 : Temperature sensor disconnection 55 : Power line switch state error 89 : SSM error
7 : Excessive speed 56 : Internal cooling fan stopped 110 : Error in communication between
9 : Main circuit overload 57 : Excessive converter deceleration amplifiers
11 : DC link overvoltage power 111 : Converter control power supply
12 : DC link overcurrent 58 : Converter main circuit overload undervoltage
13 : CPU internal data memory error 59 : Converter cooling fan stopped 112 : Excessive converter regenerative
15 : Output switch/spindle switch alarm 61 : Alarm of position feedback error power
16 : RAM error between semi-closed and closed 113 : Converter cooler radiation fan
18 : Sum check error modes stopped
19 : Excessive U phase current offset 65 : Travel distance error during magnetic 120 : Communication data alarm
20 : Excessive V phase current offset pole determination 121 : Communication data alarm
21 : Position sensor polarity setting error 66 : Error in communication between 122 : Communication data alarm
24 : Transfer data error/stop spindle amplifiers 123 : Spindle switch circuit error
27 : Position coder disconnection 67 : Reference position return command 124 : Invalid speed specified for learning
29 : Short-time overload error in FSC/EGB mode control
30 : Input section overcurrent 69 : Safety speed exceeded 125 : Invalid degree of dynamic
31 : Speed detection disconnection 70 : Axis data error characteristic compensation
32 : Transfer RAM error 71 : Safety parameter error element for learning control
33 : DC link charge error 72 : Motor speed found mismatching 126 : Spindle speed exceeded
34 : Parameter setting error 73 : Motor sensor disconnection 127 : Invalid learning cycle
36 : Error counter overflow 74 : CPU test alarm 128 : Excessive speed deviation alarm
37 : Speed detector setting error 75 : CRC test alarm on spindle synchronous control
41 : Position coder one-rotation signal 76 : Safety function unexecuted 129 : Excessive positional deviation
detection error 77 : Axis number found mismatching alarm on spindle synchronous
42 : Position coder one-rotation signal 78 : Safety parameter found mismatching control
undetected 79 : Initial test operation error 130 : Speed polarity error in torque
43 : Signal of the differential speed control 80 : Alarm in spindle amplifier tandem operation
position coder disconnected communication destination 135 : Safety speed zero monitoring error
46 : Threading position sensor 81 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal 136 : Safety speed zero monitoring
one-rotation signal detection error detection error mismatch
47 : Position coder signal error 82 : Motor sensor one-rotation signal 137 : Device communication error
49 : Overflow of converted motor speed for undetected
differential spindle speed control 83 : Motor sensor signal error
50 : Excessive speed command 84 : Spindle sensor disconnection
calculation value under spindle 85 : Spindle sensor one-rotation signal
synchronization detection error
- Operation
Following 6 modes are available:
a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour control
f. Spindle positioning control
- 710 -
- Load meter
The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
Load meter data × Max. output value of load
Load meter [%] =
32767 meter (*)
(*) Parameter No. 4127: High-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4274: High-speed winding of subspindle
Parameter No. 4093: Low-speed winding of main spindle
Parameter No. 4279: Low-speed winding of subspindle
- Control input signal

Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:
TLML Torque limit command (low) SPSL Spindle selection signal

TLMH Torque limit command (high) MCFN Power line switching
CTH1 Gear signal 1 SOCN Soft start/stop
CTH2 Gear signal 2 RSL Output switching request
SRV Spindle reverse rotation RCH Power line state confirm
SFR Spindle forward rotation INDX Orientation stop pos. change
ORCM Spindle orientation ROTA Rotation direction of ORCM
MRDY Machine ready NRRO Short-cut of ORCM
ARST Alarm reset signal INTG Speed integral control signal
*ESP Emergency stop DEFM Differential mode command
- Control output signals

Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following
signals:
ALM Alarm signal TLM5 Torque limitation

SST Speed zero signal ORAR Orientation end signal
SDT Speed detecting signal CHP Power line switched signal
SAR Speed arrival signal CFIN Spindle switch complete
LDT1 Load detecting signal 1 RCHP Output switch signal
LDT2 Load detecting signal 2 RCFN Output switch complete signal
- 711 -
10.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on

spindle tuning screen
- Normal operation mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain (HIGH) 4048 4048
4212 4212
Integral gain (LOW) 4049 4049
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236
Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231
- Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
4213 4213
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MED.HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MED.LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237
Gain change upon
4064 4220 4064 4220
completion of orientation
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PC-type orientation stop
4031 4204 4031 4204
position
- Synchronization control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
4214 4214
4221 4221
4222 4222
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032
Shift amount 4034 4034
- 712 -
- Rigid tapping mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
4214 4214
4221 4221
4222 4222
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount at servo
4073 4223 4073 4223
mode
- Cs contour control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
Proportional gain (HIGH) 4046 4046
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
Reference position shift 4135 4135
- Spindle positioning control mode

S11: S12: S21: S22:
4214 4214
4221 4221
Loop gain (MED.HIG) 4066 4066
4222 4222
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Reference position shift 4073 4223 4073 4223
- 713 -
10.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters

The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set
automatically.
* The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the
specifications defined by the machine tool builder. The
parameters defined by the machine tool builder are set as the
standard values (initial values) by this automatic setting function.
Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set
parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters
4000 and later).
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.

2 Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP
#7 LDSP The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0: Not set automatically.
(*)1: Set automatically.
3 Set a motor model code.
4133 Motor model code
Code Motor model Amplifier

301 αiI 0.5/10000 (3000/10000min ) αiSP2.2
-1
302 αiI 1/10000 (3000/10000min ) αiSP2.2

-1
304 αiI 1.5/10000 (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5

-1
305 αiI 1.5/15000 (3000/150000min ) αiSP15

-1
306 αiI 2/10000 (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5

-1
307 αiI 2/15000 (3000/15000min ) αiSP22

-1
308 αiI 3/10000 (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5

-1
309 αiI 3/12000 (1500/12000min ) αiSP11

-1
310 αiI 6/10000 (1500/10000min ) αiSP11

-1
311 αiI 0.5/10000HV (3000/10000min ) αiSP5.5HV

-1
312 αiI 8/8000 (1500/8000min ) αiSP11

-1
313 αiI 1/10000HV (3000/10000min ) αiSP5.5HV

-1
314 αiI 12/7000 (1500/7000min ) αiSP15

-1
315 αiI 1.5/10000HV (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5HV

-1
316 αiI 15/7000 (1500/7000min ) αiSP22

-1
317 αiI 2/10000HV (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5HV

-1
318 αiI 18/7000 (1500/7000min ) αiSP22

-1
319 αiI 3/10000HV (1500/10000min ) αiSP5.5HV

-1
320 αiI 22/7000 (1500/7000min ) αiSP26

-1
321 αiI 6/10000HV (1500/10000min ) αiSP11HV

-1
322 αiI 30/6000 (1150/6000min ) αiSP45

-1
323 αiI 40/6000 (1500/6000min ) αiSP45

-1
324 αiI 50/4500 (1150/4500min ) αiSP55

-1
- 714 -
Code Motor model Amplifier

325 αiI 8/8000HV (1500/8000min ) αiSP11HV
-1
326 αiI 12/7000HV (1500/7000min ) αiSP15HV

-1
327 αiI 15/7000HV (1500/7000min ) αiSP30HV

-1
328 αiI 22/7000HV (1500/7000min ) αiSP30HV

-1
329 αiI 30/6000HV (1150/6000min ) αiSP45HV

-1
401 αiI 6/12000 (1500/12000, αiSP11

4000/12000min-1)
402 αiI 8/10000 (1500/10000, αiSP11
4000/10000min-1)
403 αiI 12/10000 (1500/10000, αiSP15
4000/10000min-1)
404 αiI 15/10000 (1500/10000, αiSP22
4000/10000min-1)
405 αiI 18/10000 (1500/10000, αiSP22
4000/10000min-1)
406 αiI 22/10000 (1500/10000, αiSP26
4000/10000min-1)
407 αiIP 12/6000 (500/1500, αiSP11
750/6000min-1)
408 αiIP 15/6000 (500/1500, αiSP15
750/6000min-1)
409 αiIP 18/6000 (500/1500, αiSP15
750/6000min-1)
410 αiIP 22/6000 (500/1500, αiSP22
750/6000min-1)
411 αiIP 30/6000 (400/1500, αiSP22
575/6000min-1)
412 αiIP 40/6000 (400/1500, αiSP26
575/6000min-1)
413 αiIP 50/6000 (575/1500, αiSP26
1200/6000min-1)
414 αiIP 60/4500 (400/1500, αiSP30
750/4500min-1)
415 αiI 100/4000HV (1000/3000, αiSP75HV
2000/4000min-1)
418 αiIP 40/6000HV (400/1500, αiSP30HV
575/6000min-1)
4 Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.
- 715 -
10.1.4 Warning Interface
Overview
The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the
warning state is entered, a report to the PMC is sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing
cutting load from the time a warning occurs by the time an overheat
alarm occurs. In addition, diagnostic information also contains
warning numbers.
Signal
Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <F264#0 to #7, F265#0>
[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi
spindle amplifier.
[Output condition] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number
consisting of SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning
number of the αi spindle having the smallest axis number is output.
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.
Warning
Contents Details
number
56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output.
Since the spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output,
an alarm occurs.
88 Radiator cooling fan If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal
stopped is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at
this time, use the PMC to perform processing as
needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
04 Open-phase detected If an open-phase is detected in the main power
in the converter main supply, the warning signal is output. Since the
power supply spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute (for the αiPS) or about five
seconds (for the αiPSR) after the warning signal is
output, an alarm occurs.
58 Converter main circuit If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is
overloaded overloaded, the warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
an alarm occurs.
59 Converter cooling fan If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the
stopped warning signal is output. Since the spindle continues
to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform
processing as needed.
an alarm occurs.
- 716 -
Warning
Contents Details
number
113 Converter radiator If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops,
cooling fan stopped the warning signal is output. Since the spindle
continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to
perform processing as needed.
If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an
alarm occurs.
01 Motor overheat When the motor temperature increases beyond the
overheat warning detection level (set by a
parameter), a warning signal is output. At this time,
spindle operation is continued. So, perform
necessary processing with the PMC.
An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has
reached the overheat alarm detection level.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
F265 SPWRN9
Diagnosis screen
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic
screen.
712 Warning status of spindle

The number of a warning caused on each spindle is indicated.
If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.
- 717 -
10.1.5 Spindle Information Screen
Overview
In the αi spindle system, ID information output from each of the
connected units is obtained and output to the CNC screen.
The units that have ID information are shown below.
• Spindle amplifier (SP)
• Power Supply (PS)
ID information is automatically read from each of the connected units
during first startup of the CNC and then recorded. During second or
later startup, the ID information recorded during first startup can be
compared with the ID information read this time on the screen to
check whether the configuration of the connected units is changed. (If
there is a difference between them, the alarm mark (*) appears.)
The recorded ID information can be edited. Therefore, the ID
information of an unit that does not have ID information can be
displayed. (However, the alarm mark (*) indicating a difference
between these IDs appears.)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13112 SPI IDW

#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is:

0: Prohibited.
1: Not prohibited.
#2 SPI The servo information screen is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 718 -
Displaying the spindle information screen
1 Press the function key, then press the [SYSTEM] soft

key.
2 Press the [SPINDLE INFO] soft key to display the screen as

shown below.
* Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a

difference between the ID information in screen and the
actual ID information, the corresponding items are preceded
by *, as shown below.
- 719 -
- Spindle switch control

When spindle switch control is used, the ID information of the
subspindle is also displayed.
Additional Information
Even if replacement is performed reasonably such
as for repairing, this function incorrectly indicates
the * mark when it detects the replacement.
To clear the * mark, follow the steps below to
update the registered data, as described in the
editing section later.
(1) Make the registered data editable. (Parameter
IDW (No. 13112#0) = 1)
(2) On the edit screen, place the cursor on the item
from which you want to delete the * mark.
(3) Operate the soft keys [READ ID], [INPUT], and
[SAVE] in that order.
- 720 -
Editing the spindle information screen
1 Assume that parameter No.13112#0(IDW) = 1.

2 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator's panel.
3 Follow the steps shown in "Displaying the spindle information
screen" to display the screen as shown below.
4 To move key-in buffer on the screen, use the page keys
and .
- 721 -
Screen operation on the editing screen
Mode Key operation Use

Viewing Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen
(*1) basis.
Editing (*2) Soft key
[INPUT] Replace the selected ID information at the
cursor position with the character string in
key-in buffer.
[CANCEL] Deletes the character string in key-in buffer.
[READ ID] Transfers the ID information the connected
device at the cursor has to the key-in buffer.
Only the items preceded by * (*3) are valid.
[SAVE] Saves the ID information that has been
changed on the spindle information screen in
flash ROM.
[RELOAD] Cancels the ID information that has been
changed on the spindle information screen
and loads ID information from flash ROM.
Page key Scrolls up or down on a screen-by-screen
basis.
Cursor key Scrolls up or down the selection of ID
information.
*1 Viewing mode: when parameter IDW (No.13112#0) = 0
*2 Editing mode: when parameter IDW (No.13112#0) = 1
*3 Spindle information is stored in flash ROM. If there is a
difference between the ID information in screen and the actual
ID information, the corresponding items are preceded by *.
NOTE
The ID information of the spindle motor is not
displayed automatically. To display the ID
information, enter it manually in the edit mode.
- 722 -
B-63945EN/03 11.TROUBLESHOOTING
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.
11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES ..........................724

11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED ....................................726
11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE..............................730
11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ....................734
11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE .............740
11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF...........746
11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE
POWER IS TURNED ON......................................................748
11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT
BE PERFORMED INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE
PERFORMED PROPERLY...................................................750
11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT
TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS......................................753
11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS
OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT .................................754
11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM) .........................................................755
11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS
ABNORMAL) ........................................................................759
11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN)............................................................761
11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ......................................762
11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)........................................764
11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) ALARM
SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED)............................765
11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS
ABNORMAL) ........................................................................765
11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT) ..........766
11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) ................766
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) ......................767
11.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS
SMALL) .................................................................................768
11.22 SERVO ALARMS .................................................................769
11.23 SPC ALARMS .......................................................................772
11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS ..............................................................772
11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS...............................................................773
11.26 SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND
I/O Link ..................................................................................789
- 723 -
11.TROUBLESHOOTING B-63945EN/03
11.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES
When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of

failure occurred and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
machine.
Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
When? With what operation? What failure?
Grasp the kind of failure

↓
Appropriate action
↓
Recovery
11.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred
(1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)

(2) With what operation
(3) What failure occurred
1 When did the failure occur?

• Date and time?
• Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
• Occurred when the power was turned on?
• Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other
disturbances to the power supply?
How many times has it occurred
• Only once?
• Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day,
or per month?)
2 With what operation did it occur ?
• What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference
position return mode
• If during program operation,
- Where in the program ?
- Which program No. and sequence No. ?
- What program ?
- Occurred during axial movement ?
- Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?
- Failure specific to the program ?
• Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
(Check the repeatability of the failure.)
• Occurred during data input/output ?
<Feed axes and spindles>
• For a failure related to feed axis servo
(1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
(2) Occurred only for a certain axis ?
- 724 -
• For a failure related to spindles

When did the failure occur ? (during power-on, acceleration,
deceleration, or constant rotation)
3 What failure occurred ?
• Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for
alarms SV alarms, OT alarms, or SP alarms.)
• Is the screen correct ?
• If machining dimensions are incorrect
(1) How large is the error ?
(2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
(3) Are the offsets correct ?
4 Other information
• Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be
external noise to the power supply or inductive noise on
machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line
and see if noise come from the relays or compressors.
• Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
See Section 5.11, “COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST
NOISE.”
• Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
(1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
(2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
(3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
• How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
Refer to manual about noise.
• Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following
items :
(1) Name of the NC unit
(2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine
(3) Software series/version of the NC
(4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
(for a failure related to the servo)
(5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor
(for a failure related to a spindle)
• See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for
the locations of the NC unit and servo/spindle
amplifiers.
• We use the following specification codes :
Servo /spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Hxxx
Servo/spindle amplifier : A06B-xxxx-Bxxx
NOTE
The mark ‘x’ represents a number.
- 725 -
11.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION

CAN BE EXECUTED
Points
(1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnosis function
Causes and Countermeasures
1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change
(1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
DISPLAY for detail.)
(a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)

If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is
input. Check the following signal using the PMC's diagnosis
function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0008 *ESP
G0008 *ESP
*ESP : ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.
(b) It is a reset status

When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned.
Check the following signal using the PMC's diagnosis
function (PMCDGN).
(i) An input signal from the PMC functions

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW
ERS : When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.
RRW : When RRW is 1, reset & rewind signal is input.
(ii) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions

When the signals in 1) are 0, <RESET> key may be
functioning. Check the contact of <RESET> key using
a tester.
When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.
- 726 -
(c) Confirm the status of modes

Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of
screen as follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input.
Check mode select signal using PMC's diagnosis function
(PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY.
(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT : EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1
(2) Check diagnosis functions 0000 and 1010 of the CNC. Check the
items for which 1 is displayed at right side.
* Items with (a) to (d) relate with manual and automatic

operation and its detail is shown below.
(a) In-position check is being done

It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the
contents of the following diagnosis number. (It is 1 in the
following condition)
DGN0300 Position Error > PARAM1826 In-position width
- 727 -
(i) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.

1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)
(b) Jog feedrate override is 0%

Check the signals using the PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address
becomes
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
(c) Interlock or start lock signal is input

There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which
interlock signal is used by the machine tool builder at the
parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
#0 (ITL) ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)
#2 (ITX) ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the PMC's

signal status screen.
(i) Interlock signals (*IT, *CSL, and *BSL) are input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *BSL *CSL *IT
*IT=0, *CSL=0, and *BSL=0 show that interlock
signal is input.
(ii) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.
- 728 -
(d) The NC is in the reset state.

In this state, "RESET" is display as the state indication of
the previous item 1-(1)-(b). So, not only manual operation
but also all automatic operations are disabled. So, referring
to the item "Manual and automatic operations are disabled",
make an investigation.
2 When machine coordinate value does not update on position display
Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0044 MLK
G0108 MLK8 MLK7 MLK6 MLK5 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

MLK : All axes machine lock
MLKn : Each axis machine lock
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.
- 729 -
11.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
Points
(1) Check whether position display is operating.
(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic function.
1 Position display (relative, absolute, machine coordinate) does not change
(1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).

When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is
not selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using the
PMC's signal status screen.
<Mode select signal>

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal
using the PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J8 +J7 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G0102 -J8 -J7 -J6 -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1

When a bit is "1", the corresponding feed axis direction selection
signal has been entered.
+ J
1 : Feed along the 1st axis
:
8 : Feed along the 8th axis
+ : Feed in the + direction
- : Feed in the - direction
- 730 -
Example)
In the normal state, pressing the "+X" button on the
operator's panel causes the signal +Jn to be displayed as "1".
* This signal becomes effective when the rise of the signal is
detected. If, therefore, the direction selection signal has
been entered before jog mode selection, axis movement is
not performed; set the bit "0" and then re-check the signal.
* Items with (a) to (d) relate with manual and automatic


DGN0300 Position Error>Parameter No.1826 In-position width
- 731 -
(b) Jog feedrate override is 0%

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address
becomes
1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
(c) Interlock or start lock signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL

(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(d) NC is in a reset state

In this state, not only manual operation but also automatic
operation is disabled. Make an investigation according to
the item of "Manual operation and automatic operation are
disabled."
- 732 -
(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.
1423 Jog feedrate per axis
(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected

This function feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation
and whether this function is used or not is selected by the
following parameter:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV
JRV Jog feed and incremental feed are :
0 : Of feed per minute
1 : Of feed per revolution
(a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is

calculated by synchronizing with rotation of the spindle.
Therefore, rotate the spindle.
(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated,
check the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the
cable between the position coder and the CNC if it is
short-circuited or ungrounded.
(6) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental
feed, and manual handle feed cannot be performed.
- 733 -
11.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
Points
If manual handle operation cannot be performed, the probable causes
include the following:
• The servo is not activated.
• Manual pulse generators are not connected properly to the I/O
module.
• The I/O link of the I/O module is not allocated, or is not allocated
properly.
• A related input signal is not input due to a parameter setting error.
Also use CNC diagnosis functions to check the internal status.

1 The servo is not activated
Check that the LED on the servo amplifier indicates "0". If a number
other than "0" is indicated, the servo is not activated. In this state,
even JOG operation and automatic operation cannot be operated.
Check the servo-related parameters and the wiring.
2 Checking the manual pulse generators

(1) Cable failures (such as breaks)
Examine the cables for faults such as breaks and short-circuits,
referring to the figure below.
CNC Distributed I/O module
(motherboard) Operator's panel I/O module
First manual pulse
JA3 #1
generator
IOLINK
(JD1A) JD1B
Second manual
#2
pulse generator
Third manual pulse

#3
generator
CNC Distributed I/O module

Manual pulse
(motherboard) Operator's panel I/O module
generators
JD1A Shield JD1B JA3 Shield
SIN(01) (03)SOUT HA1(01) HA1

*SIN(02) (04)*SOUT HB1(02) HB1 First
SOUT(03) (01)SIN +5V(09) +5V
*SOUT(04) (02)*SIN 0V(12) 0V
0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V HA2(03) HA2
0V(13) (13)0V HB2(04) HB2
Second
0V(14) (14)0V +5V(18) +5V
0V(14) 0V
HA3(05) HA3
HB3(06) HB3
Third
+5V(20) +5V
0V(16) 0V
- 734 -
(2) Manual pulse generator failures

When rotated, a manual pulse generator generates the signals shown
below.
Using an oscilloscope, measure the signals from the screw terminal
block located at the rear of a manual pulse generator. If no signals are
output, measure the +5 V voltage.
Rear of a manual pulse generator

Screw terminal
block
HA: Manual pulse generator phase A signal
HB: Manual pulse generator phase B signal
+5V 0V HA HB
When rotated in the plus direction When rotated in the minus direction
1:1
+5V
HA On Off On Off
0V
+5V
HB On Off On Off
0V
1:1
1/4 1/4 (phase difference)
Check the on/off ratio and the phase difference between HA and HB.
- 735 -
3 Checking the parameters and input signals

See Section “CNC STATE DISPLAY.”
(1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the screen.
When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual handle mode 1 0 0
(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A
G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A
G0411 HS4E HS3E HS2E HS1E
G0412 HS5E
When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator's panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.
Selected axis HSnE HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA

no selection 0 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 0 1 0 0
5th axis 0 0 1 0 1
6th axis 0 0 1 1 0
7th axis 0 0 1 1 1
8th axis 0 1 0 0 0
9th axis 0 1 0 0 1
10th axis 0 1 0 1 0
11th axis 0 1 0 1 1
12th axis 0 1 1 0 0
13th axis 0 1 1 0 1
14th axis 0 1 1 1 0
15th axis 0 1 1 1 1
16th axis 1 0 0 0 0
- 736 -
Selected axis HSnE HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA

17th axis 1 0 0 0 1
18th axis 1 0 0 1 0
19th axis 1 0 0 1 1
20th axis 1 0 1 0 0
21st axis 1 0 1 0 1
22nd axis 1 0 1 1 0
23rd axis 1 0 1 1 1
24th axis 1 1 0 0 0
NOTE
In the above table, n is the number of the manual
pulse generator (MPG) and up to 5 MPGs can be
used. A feed axis is selected by 4-bit code of A to E.
(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct

Check the following signals using the PMC's signal status screen.
Also confirm the following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1
In handle mode, the travel distance per step can be changed.
MP2 MP1 Step feed Handle feed

0 0 × 1 × 1
0 1 × 10 × 10
1 0 × 100 × Mn
1 1 × 1000 × Nn
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 MPX
#5 MPX In Manual handle feed mode, manual handle feed amount selection
signal is
0 : same for all manual pulse generator, and it is set by signals
MP1 and MP2<Gn019.4,.5>.
1 : differ to each other manual pulse generator, and it’s setting signal
as follow:
1st. Manual Pulse Generator : MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,.5>
2nd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP21,MP22<Gn087.0,.1>
3rd. Manual Pulse Generator : MP31,MP32<Gn087.3,.4>
4th. Manual Pulse Generator : MP41,MP42<Gn087.6,.7>
5th. Manual Pulse Generator : MP51,MP52<Gn380.0,.1>
- 737 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx
#0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse

generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction
7113 Manual handle feed magnification m
7114 Manual handle feed magnification n
7131 Manual handle feed magnification m2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator
7132 Manual handle feed magnification n2 / 2nd. manual pulse generator
7133 Manual handle feed magnification m3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator
7134 Manual handle feed magnification n3 / 3rd. manual pulse generator
7135 Manual handle feed magnification m4 / 4th. manual pulse generator
7136 Manual handle feed magnification n4 / 4th. manual pulse generator
7137 Manual handle feed magnification m5 / 5th. manual pulse generator
7138 Manual handle feed magnification n5 / 5th. manual pulse generator
(4) The specified axis is the index table indexing axis. <M series>
For the index table indexing axis (B-axis), jog feed, incremental feed,
and manual handle feed cannot be performed.
4 Checking the CNC diagnosis functions

- 738 -
* Items with (a) to (c) relate with manual and automatic


DGN0300 Position Error>Parameter No.1826 In-position width
(b) Interlock or start lock signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL

(i) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT
*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
(c) NC is in a reset state

In this state, not only manual operation but also automatic
operation is disabled. Make an investigation according to
the item of "Manual operation and automatic operation are
disabled."
- 739 -
11.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE
Points
(1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator's
manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.

When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item "Jog operation cannot be done".
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select
status of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic
operation status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and
cycle stop state.
1 When cycle operation is not started (Cycle start LED does not light)
"****" is displayed at status display on screen.
(1) Mode select signal is not correct.

When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI : Manual data input mode (MDI)
MEM : Memory operation mode
RMT : Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode
signal with following PMC's signal status screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1
DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select

- 0 0 0 Manual data input mode
0 0 0 1 Automatic operation (memory) mode
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode
(2) Cycle start signal is not input

This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0
when it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from
1 to 0. Check the state of the signal using PMC's diagnosis
function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST
ST : Cycle start signal
(3) Feed hold signal is input

Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold
button is not pressed.
- 740 -
Check the state of this signal using the PMC's diagnosis function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
*SP : Feed hold signal
2 When an automatic operation is in progress (Cycle start LED is lit)

CNC's status display shows "STRT" on the screen.
(1) Check information displayed with CNC diagnosis number 0.

Check the items for which 1 is displayed at the right side.

[Data type] Bit
INPOSITION CHECK In-position check is being done.
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% Feedrate override is 0%.
JOG FEED OVERRIDE 0% Jog feedrate override is 0%.
INTER/START LOCK ON Interlock/start lock is on.
SPEED ARRIVAL ON The system is waiting for the speed arrival signal to turn on.
WAIT REVOLUTION The system is waiting for the spindle one-rotation signal in threading.
STOP POSITION OCDER The system is waiting for the rotation of the position coder in spindle
feed per revolution.
FEED STOP A feed stop was made.
* Items with a to e relate with an automatic operation and

their details are as follows :
(a) In-position check (confirming positioning) is being done

Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis
is not completed.
Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the
servo position error amount. Check it CNC's diagnosis
function as follows:
DGN 300 Position error > PARAM1826 In-position width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning
of an axis completes and when the amount becomes within
the in-position width, it is assumed that positioning
completes and the next block is executed.
(b) Feedrate override is at 0%

Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a
programmed feedrate. Check the override signals using the
PMC's signal status screen.
- 741 -
• Normal override signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
*FVn : Feedrate override
<2nd override signal (option)>
Feed rate is overridden more finely using the signals below:
See MTB's manual whether this feature is equipped.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0013 *AFV7 *AFV6 *AFV5 *AFV4 *AFV3 *AFV2 *AFV1 *AFV0
*AFVn : 2nd feed rate override
• State of override signal

*FV7 . . . . . *FV0 *AFV7 . . . *AFV0
11111111 0% 11111111 0%
11111110 1% 11111110 1%
: : : :
10011011 100% 10011011 100%
: : : :
00000001 254% 00000001 254%
00000000 0% 00000000 0%
(c) Manual feedrate override is 0% (dry run)

Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog
feed.
But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an automatic
operation, override values set with these signals become
valid to the following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN
Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.
1410 Dry run rate

The rate when the following override value is 100%.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is
[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *JV0 Override

1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%
- 742 -
(d) Interlock signal is input

There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters
are set by machine tool builders for which interlock
function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 ITX ITL
ITL 0: Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.
ITX 0: Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC's
(i) Interlock signals (*IT, *CSL, and *BSL) are input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *BSL *CSL *IT
*IT=0, *CSL=0, and *BSL=0 show that interlock
signal is input.
(ii) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis's interlock
signal is input.
(iii) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached

axis is specified for travelling.
* This function is valid when CNC parameter RMBx
(No.1005#7)=1. For whether this function is running
or not, confirm the following signal using the PMC's
signal status screen. Check the axis concerned.
1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH8 DTCH7 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
DTCHn If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.
2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach

function to the corresponding axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx
RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0: Not released
1: Released
(Equivalent to the control axis detachment signals DTCH1,
DTCH2, and so forth)
- 743 -
(e) CNC is waiting for spindle speed arrival signal to be input

Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in
a program.
Confirm the signal state using the PMC's signal status
screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR
When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified
speed.
* This function is valid when the parameter SAR (No.3708#0)=1.
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function

Confirm the following parameter and signals from the PMC.
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis
(b) Rapid traverse override signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1
G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0

(HROV-0) (HROV=1)
ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 . . . *HROV0 Override
0 0 100% 1111111 0%
1 1 50% 1111110 1%
0 1 25% : :
1 1 F0 0011011 100%
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function
(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.

Feedrate (other than G00) is clamped at this upper feedrate.
1430 Maximum feedrate in each axis
(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
(i) Position coder does not rotate

Check the connection between spindle and position
coder
The following failure is considered:
- Timing belt is broken
- Key is removed
- Coupling is loose
- Connector of signal cable is loosened
- 744 -
(ii) Position coder is faulty
(c) Thread cutting does not operate
(i) Position coder does not rotate

Check the connection between spindle and position
coder
The following failure is considered:
- Timing belt is broken
- Key is removed
- Coupling is loose
- Connector of signal cable is loosened
(ii) Position coder is faulty

Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier
when serial interface spindle is used or connected to
the CNC when analog interface spindle is used.
For details of connection, refer to the following.
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display
on the screen (position screen).
(However, it is not displayed when parameter DPS (No.
3105#2) is set to 0).
• αi series spindle amplifier
CNC Position coder

JA7B JYA3
JA41 SPM
JA7A Spindle motor
Position coder
JA7B JYA3
SPM
JA7A Spindle motor
(d) A cutting feed block containing a feedrate command (F

command) with a feedrate of 0 is specified.
If the parameter FCO (No.1404#7) is set to 1, alarm PS0011
is not issued even if a feedrate command (F command) with
a feedrate of 0 is issued.
- 745 -
11.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF
Points
(1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator's panel.
(3) Confirm CNC's diagnosis function.

Check the states of the related signals on the signal status screen of
PMC.
a. Emergency stop is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0008 *ESP
G0008 *ESP
*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :
b. External reset signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS
#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.
* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02

when an M02 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.
c. Reset button on the MDI is pressed

An automatic operation is put into a reset status when key on
the MDI panel is pressed.
d. Reset & rewind signal is input

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW
#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
* This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30

when an M30 is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.
e. Servo alarm has generated

When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the
reset state and operation stop.
f. Cycle operation is in a feed hold state

The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
(1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a
manual operation mode.
- 746 -
(2) Feed hold signal is input.
• Mode select signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
Automatic
operation Automatic operation (AUTO) 0 0 1
Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 1
Manual Handle/step 1 0 0
operation TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0
• Feed hold signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP
#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.
g. It become single block stop during automatic operation

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 SBK
#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.
- 747 -
11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE

POWER IS TURNED ON

If nothing is displayed on the LCD at power-up or if the LCD is
locked with "LOADING GRAPHIC SYSTEM", the probable causes
include the following:
- For the LCD-mounted type

• The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
• The necessary software is not installed.
• The motherboard, display control card, CPU card, or inverter
board is defective.
- For the stand-alone type

• The LCD unit is not connected to the power supply.
• The LCD cable or backlight cable is not connected.
• The LCD unit is not connected to the CNC with the optical cable
or the cable is broken.
• The necessary software is not installed.
• The main board, display control card, or LCD unit is defective.
If “LOADING GRAPHIC SYSTEM” is displayed on a 15” display
for the 30i/31i/32i, this indicates that the display control circuit has
started up normally, but the CNC has not started up or communication
with the CNC has not been established.
- LED display
Referring to Item, “LED display of main board” in Section 2.4, 3.4, or
4.4, check the LED on/off status of the main board.
If the motherboard has started up normally and the LED display
indicates normal operation, a probable cause is a fault of the display
system, such as a cable not connected or a defective inverter board.
If the LED display is locked in the middle of the startup process, the
probable causes include defective hardware (or installation failure)
and the necessary software not installed.
- Connection of the LCD and backlight cables

Check that the LCD and backlight cables are connected firmly to the
corresponding connectors.
These cables are connected before shipment from FANUC. This check
is, however, required because the cables may be disconnected during
maintenance.
- The necessary software is not installed

If necessary software is not stored in the FROM module, the CNC
may not start up.
- 748 -
- Defective printed circuit board

If the main board or display control card is defective or is not
correctly installed, the CNC may not start up.
Check that the card PCBs are engaged firmly with the connectors on
the motherboard.
If any of the above actions does not solve the problem, replace the
display control card, CPU card, and main board.
- Installation positions of the display control card and CPU card

Referring to Section 5.3, “MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING
CARD PCBS,” check the installation status.
- 749 -
11.8 INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES CANNOT BE

PERFORMED, INPUT/OUTPUT CANNOT BE PERFORMED
PROPERLY

If the I/O Link is not established, if the signals from an I/O device
cannot be input normally to the CNC, or if the signals from the CNC
cannot be output to an I/O device, the probable causes include the
following:
• The I/O device is not turned on, or the power supply is not at the
appropriate voltage.
• The I/O Link cable is not connected correctly or appropriately.
• The grounding is not correct.
• The input/output signals are not connected correctly.
• I/O Link allocation is not performed, or is not performed
properly.
- PMC alarm
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
If "ER32 NO I/O DEVICE" is displayed on the alarm screen of the
PMC, no I/O devices are recognized.
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE

If "ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx yyGROUP)" is displayed on the
alarm screen of the PMC, the number of I/O devices connected to
channel xx of the I/O Link is not the same as the number of devices
allocated to the I/O Link.
- I/O Link screen of the PMC

From the function key menu, select [PMC MAINTE] and [I/O
LINK] in that order. The I/O devices recognized by the CNC are
displayed. From this screen, the devices that are connected normally
can be determined.
- 750 -
Screen display example
This example indicates that the I/O Link is as shown in the figure
below.
I/O module for

Control unit connector panel
JD51A Group 0
Operator's panel I/O

module
Group 1
- Checking the power supplies of the I/O devices

Check that the connected I/O devices are connected properly to the
power supplies and that the voltages are as prescribed.
Check that the power-on sequence is correct.
Time at which an I/O device is to be turned on
Before the CNC is turned on or within 500 ms after the
CNC is turned on
When the CNC is turned off, the I/O devices must also be turned off.
（Refer to Section “TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO
THE CONTROL UNIT” in the CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE) (B-63943EN) for details）
- 751 -
- Connection of cables
As in the example shown on the previous page, I/O Link cables are
used to connect JD1A (JD51A) and JD1B.
JD1A (JD51A) represents an upper unit while JD1B represents a
lower unit.
Check that the cables are connected correctly.
- Connection of ground wires

Check that the ground wires are connected and are not loose.
- Connection of I/O signals

Check that the input/output signals to be connected to each I/O device
are connected correctly.
For operator's panel I/O modules and for connector panel I/O modules,
also check that the 0 V or +24 V input signal is connected to the
common pin and that the +24 V output signal is connected to the DO
common pin.
- I/O Link allocation

Check that I/O Link allocation has been performed correctly.
From the function key menu, select [PMC CONF],
[MODULE], and [EDIT] in that order. The allocation edit screen
appears.
After editing allocation, be sure to write the sequence program onto
the flash ROM using the PMC data I/O screen. Otherwise, the
changes will be lost when the power is turned off.
- 752 -
11.9 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS INPUT TO

AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS
If data is input to an invalid address in a connector panel I/O unit (for

example, data that should be input to X004 is actually input to X010
in a connector panel I/O unit), the most likely causes are as follows:
(1) The I/O Link allocation is wrong.

→ Perform the check described in Section 11.8.
(2) The unit-to-unit cables (CA52-to-CA53) are not connected

correctly.
If the connection is wrong, expansion unit 1 is allocated the
address of expansion unit 3, as shown below.
→ Connect the unit-to-unit cables as shown below:
Correct connection (the allocation starts with X0)
CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53 CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
X0-2 X3-5 X6-8 X9-11
Incorrect connection (the allocation starts with X0)
CA52 CA52 CA53 CA53 CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1 Expansion 2 Expansion 3
X0-2 X9-11 X6-8 X3-5
(3) The setting of the rotary switch on an expansion unit is wrong

If the rotary switch is set to 1, one unit number is skipped. If set
to 2, two unit numbers are skipped. Usually, the setting must be 0.
(For those units without a rotary switch, unit numbers cannot be
skipped.)
→ See the following example and refer to the Connection
Manual (Hardware) (B-63943EN).
Example) Rotary switch setting on expansion unit 1=1
CA52 CA53
Basic Expansion 1
X0-2 X6-8 ⇐ X3 to X5 are skipped.
- 753 -
11.10 IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA IS OUTPUT

TO AN EXPANSION UNIT
The most likely cause is that power is not being supplied to the
expansion unit.
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 18 pin and No.
50 pin of the expansion unit, DI and DO signals are not input and
output.
→ Check whether +24-V power is supplied to No. 1 pin and No. 3
pin of the expansion unit, when DI signals are input and DO
signals are not output.
- 754 -
11.11 ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER

INTERFACE ALARM)
START
YES
Alarm SR0085?
NO - Check baud rate and

other I/O parameters
YES - I/O device is faulty
Alarm SR0086?
NO NO
Is I/O parameter
correct?
YES - Reset the parameter

according to the item
of data I/O.
OFF
Is power of I/O ?
ON
- Turn on I/O device
NO
Is cable connection
right?
YES
- Connect the cable
- I/O device is faulty
- Mother board or serial
communication board
Alarm SR0087? is faulty
- I/O device is faulty

- Mother board or serial
communication board
is faulty
Causes
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) Mother board or serial communication board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
- 755 -
Countermeasures
(a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.
Check the following setting data and parameters:
- Setting
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm SR0086 will generate.
- Parameter
Value of parameter 0020
0 1 2
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122
Baud rate 103 113 123
0135#3 - - -
Communication method
RS-232C
MOTHER BOARD
Connector
JD56A JD36A
NOTE
Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit
numbers.
Example) 0101#7: bit7 of parameter No. 0101.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
NFD 0: Feed is output before and after data in data output
(FANUC PPR)
1: Feed is not output (standard).
ASI 0: Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1: Data input code is ASCII.
1: No. of stop bits is 2.
- 756 -
0102 Type of I/O device

0112
0122 Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE
0 RS–232–C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/ B2)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,
FANUC Handy File,
4 RS–232–C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G,
6
0103 Baud rate

0113
0123 Value Baud rate 11 9600
7 600 12 19200
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble
(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external

I/O device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC.
(baud rate, stop bits, etc.)
If they are not the same, change the setting.
(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is

possible to realize communication using the spare I/O
device.
(c) Main board or serial communication control module is faulty
(i) When parameter No.0020 is 0, 1, or 2 (JD56A, JD36A of

Main board)
Replace the module since main board may be faulty.
(d) Cable between CNC and I/O device is faulty.

Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.
- 757 -
- Connection
Main board
RS232C (JD56A)
Punch panel
RS232C (JD36A)
Such as I/O device
- Cable connection
RS232C (JD56A)
(JD36A)
Punch panel
RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
Connector : Half-pitch Connector :DBM-25S
G G
20-pins (PCR)
- 758 -
11.12 ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS

ABNORMAL)
Contents
Reference position return was executed when the following condition
is not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis
is moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed
equivalent to 128 pulses of position error amount (DGN300).
Countermeasures
START
Check whether position gain is greater than 128

pulses (DGN 300) before or during reference position Position error amount :
return. DGN 300
YES
128 or more (1) Next page
NO
Raise the speed
Check feed rate command:

PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate [mm/min]
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate [mm/min]
-1
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain [0.01sec ]
F×5000/3
Position error =
G × detection unit [µm/PULSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is
4 on the position display screen, detection unit is 0.1 µm.
Check rapid traverse override signals :

ROV1 ROV2 Override
ROV1 DGN 014.0
0 0 100%
ROV2 DGN 014.1 0 1 50%
1 0 25%
PRM 1421 F0 rate 1 1 F0 rate
Check reference position return deceleration signal

*DEC1 to *DEC8 DGN 009.0 to 009.7
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed
rate becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate
- 759 -
(1)
Check whether the motor rotated more than one

rotation (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than
128 pulses of position error amount.
NO Return start position is too close

Rotated ?
- Change the return start position.
- Move the machine at faster that 128
YES
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.
Check that voltage of Pulsecoder is higher than 4.75 V.

To measure Pulsecoder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and - or +5V and 0V terminals.
NO
More than 4.75V
YES
Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low

- Pulse coder is faulty
Change Pulsecoder or motor
CAUTION
(1) After the Pulsecoder or motor is exchanged,
reference position or machine's standard point may
be different from former one. Please set it correctly.
Reference
A speed more than 128 pulses is required because
if speed is lower that this, one-rotation signal does
not function stably, causing improper position
detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed
corresponding to a positional deviation of 1280
pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as
the minimum positional deviation with which
reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the
minimum positional deviation. If bit 0 of parameter
No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)
- 760 -
11.13 ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION

RETURN)
Absolute position data in the serial Pulsecoder was lost.

(This alarm will be generated when serial Pulsecoder is exchanged or
position feedback signal cable of the serial Pulsecoder is
disconnected).
Countermeasures
Machine position must be memorized using the following method:
- When reference position return function is present

1 Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for
which this alarm was generated. When manual reference
position return cannot be executed because of an another alarm,
set parameter APCx (No.1815#5) to 0 and release the alarm and
perform manual operation.
2 Press key at the end of reference position return to release
the alarm.
- When reference position return function is not present

Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
position.
- When serial Pulsecoder is changed

Since the reference position is different from the former one, change
the grid shift value (parameter No. 1850) to correct the position.
Related parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the
absolute position detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment
is performed or after the absolute position detector is replaced, this
parameter must be set to 0, power must be turned off and on, then
manual reference position return must be performed. This completes
the positional correspondence between the machine position and the
position on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1
automatically.
#5 APCx Position detector

0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder)
- 761 -
11.14 ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF)

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal VRDY of a servo
amplifier does not turn on or if the signal turns off during operation.
There are cases in which this alarm is issued because another servo
alarm is issued. If this occurs, first take the action for the first alarm.
Check the power magnetic circuit around the amplifier. The servo
amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be defective.
- VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
- Example of connection around the amplifier (Typical example)
(Servo (Servo
amplifier) amplifier) Control
power
supply
Emergency stop
circuit
Serial spindle
Servo Servo Servo

motor motor motor
3-phase AC
Circuit
breaker reactor
Single-
phase Circuit
breaker
- 762 -
Check items
• Is the PSM control power supply on?
• Has an emergency stop been canceled?
• Is a terminating connector connected to the JX1B connector of
the terminating amplifier?
• Is MCC on? If there is an external MCC sequence in addition to
the MCC contact of the PSM, check that sequence also.
• Is the power for driving MCC supplied?
• Is the breaker on?
• Has some alarm been issued in the PSM or SPM?
- Replacing the servo amplifier

If no problem is found in the power magnetic circuit around the
amplifier, replace the servo amplifier.
- Replacing the axis control cards

If the above action does not solve the problem, replace the axis control
cards.
- 763 -
11.15 ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)

This alarm is issued if the servo ready signal (VRDY) of a servo
amplifier remains on.
The servo amplifier or the axis control cards on the CNC may be
defective.
- VRDY
CNC Servo amplifier
MCON: From the CNC to the servo amplifier

(Turn MCC on to request the activation of the
servo motor)
VRDY: From the servo amplifier to the CNC

(Notifies that the servo is ready)
The exchange of this information is performed via the FSSB (optical

cable).
This alarm is issued if VRDY remains on when the CNC turns MCON
off or if VRDY turns on before the CNC turns MCON on.
- Replacing the servo amplifier

The servo amplifier may be defective. Replace the servo amplifier.
- Replacing the axis control cards

If replacing the servo amplifier does not solve the problem, replace the
axis control cards.
- 764 -
11.16 ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED)

ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED)

Alarm SV0462 is issued if a slave (servo amplifier) cannot receive
correct data due to an FSSB communication error.
Alarm SV0463 is issued if the CNC cannot receive correct data due to
an FSSB communication error.
If these alarms are issued, the alarm message indicates the number of
the defective axis (axis name).
- Servo amplifier or optical cable

Any of the optical cables between the CNC control unit and the
amplifier corresponding to the axis number indicated in the alarm
message may be defective.
Or, any of the first amplifier to the amplifier corresponding to that
axis number may be defective.
- Axis control cards

The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
11.17 ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS

ABNORMAL)
Digital servo parameters are abnormal.

(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
Parameter No. 2020 : Motor format number
Parameter No. 2022 : Motor rotation direction
Parameter No. 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
Parameter No. 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
Parameter No. 1023 : Servo axis number
Parameter No. 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Parameter No. 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.

Parameter No. 2047 : Observer parameter
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.

Refer to section 9.1 "Initial Setting of Servo Parameters" .
- 765 -
11.18 ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT)

This alarm is issued if the ambient temperature of the CNC control
unit is abnormally high. As an installation condition, the ambient
temperature of the CNC must not exceed 58°C (for LCD-mounted
type CNC) or 55°C (for stand-alone type CNC).
- Ambient temperature
A temperature monitoring circuit is installed on the main board, and
causes this alarm to be issued if the ambient temperature is abnormally
high.
Take appropriate action to the cabinet that houses the CNC control
unit so that the temperature falls within the proper temperature range
(0 to 58°C (for LCD-mounted type CNC) or 0 to 55°C (for
stand-alone type CNC)).
If it is obvious that the ambient temperature is not abnormal, the main
board may be defective.
11.19 ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR)

This alarm is issued if a fault occurs in any of the fan motors, such as
the stoppage of a fan motor during the operation of the CNC.
- Fan motors
Fan motors are installed in the uppermost portion of the CNC control
unit. Each fan motor is attached with an alarm detector circuit, which
notifies the CNC of a fault such as the stoppage of the fan motor,
thereby issuing this alarm.
If this alarm is issued, replace the fan motor according to "Replacing
the fan motor".
- 766 -

ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT)

These alarms are issued due to a failure in the optical cable, axis
control card, or a slave such as a servo amplifier connected to the
FSSB.
No. Message Description

SV5134 FSSB:OPEN In the initialization, the FSSB could not be
READY TIME in an open ready sate. The axis card is
OUT thought to be defective.
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGUR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
ATION ERROR The connecting amplifier type is
incompatible with the FSSB setting value.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN The initialization of the FSSB was
TIME OUT completed, but it could not be opened.
Or, the connection between the CNC and
the amplifier in is incorrect.
- Checking the parameter settings

Check that the FSSB-related parameters are set correctly.
- Power supplies of the servo amplifiers

Check the power supplies of the servo amplifiers connected to the
FSSB.
- Replacing the axis control cards, optical cables, and servo amplifiers
Replace the axis control cards on the CNC.
Replace the optical cables and servo amplifiers connected to the FSSB,
one at a time, to identify the defective item.
- 767 -
11.21 ALARM SV5136 (FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL)

The number of servo amplifiers recognized by the FSSB is insufficient,
compared with the number of controlled axes.
- FSSB setting screen

If this alarm is issued, display the amplifier setting screen from the
FSSB setting screen. Only the servo amplifiers recognized on the
FSSB are displayed.
- Optical cable or servo amplifier

The optical cable that connects together the last recognized amplifier
and the next one may be defective.
Or, either of the amplifiers connected together with that optical cable
may be defective. Check the power supplies of the amplifiers.
- Power fault of a servo amplifier

This alarm may be issued if a power fault occurs in a servo amplifier.
A power fault occurs if the amplifier control power supply voltage
drops, if the +5 V conductor of the Pulsecoder cable is ground, or for
other reasons.
- Axis control cards

The axis control cards installed on the CNC may be defective.
- 768 -
11.22 SERVO ALARMS
For an explanation of the following servo alarms, refer to the FANUC

AC SERVO MOTOR αi series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series,
SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series Maintenance Manual (B-65285EN).
Number Message Description

SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital servo parameter setting is incorrect.
When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 1, an illegal

parameter was detected by the servo software. Identify the
cause with reference to diagnosis information No. 352.
When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 0, the CNC

software detected an illegal parameter. Probable causes are
given below (see diagnosis information No. 280).
1) The value specified in parameter No. 2020 as the motor
model falls outside the specified range.
2) The motor rotation direction in parameter No. 2022 is not set
to a correct value (111 or -111).
3) The speed feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
parameter No. 2023 is set to a negative or other incorrect
value.
4) The position feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
value.
SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter (No. 2031) setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No.1729.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as a
parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
SV0431 CNV. OVERLOAD Power Supply (PS) : Overheat
Servo amplifier : Overheat
SV0432 CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL Power Supply (PS) : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
Servo amplifier : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
SV0433 CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK Power Supply (PS) : Low DC link voltage
Servo amplifier : Low DC link voltage
SV0434 INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL Servo amplifier : Low control power voltage
SV0435 INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK Servo amplifier : Low DC link voltage
SV0436 SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal (OVC).
SV0437 CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER Power Supply (PS) : Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT Servo amplifier : Motor overcurrent
SV0439 CNV. OVER VOLT DC LINK Power Supply (PS) : The DC link voltage is too high.
Servo amplifier : The DC link voltage is too high.
- 769 -

SV0440 CNV. EX DECELERATION POW. Power Supply (PS) : Excessive generative discharge
Servo amplifier :Excessive generative discharge, or abnormal
error in generative power circuit
SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor
current detection circuit.
SV0442 CNV. CHARGE FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is
abnormal.
SV0443 CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : Internal cooling fan failure.
Servo amplifier : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected Pulsecoder.
SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 UNMATCHED FEEDBACK ALARM The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector is
opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 INV. IPM ALARM Servo amplifier :The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
alarm.
SV0453 SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM Software disconnection alarm of the α Pulsecoder.
Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the
Pulsecoder cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the
Pulsecoder.
SV0454 ILLEGAL ROTOR POS DETECT The magnetic pole detection function terminated abnormally.
The magnetic pole could not be detected because the motor did
not run.
SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not be
set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with HIGH
SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not satisfied in the
system.
SV0458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current loop.
SV0459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No. 1023)
are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH SPEED HRV
control is possible for one axis and impossible for the other.
SV0460 FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued.
Probable causes are:
1. The FSSB connection cable was disconnected or broken.
2. The amplifier was turned off .
3. In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0462 SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side because
of the FSSB communication error.
SV0463 SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0465 READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor.
1. The connection command for an amplifier is incorrect.
2. The parameter (No.2165) setting is incorrect
SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH
SPEED HRV control could not be used.
- 770 -

SV0600 INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT Servo amplifier : DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE Servo amplifier : Radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 INV. OVERHEAT Servo amplifier : The servo motor has overheated.
SV0603 INV. IPM ALARM(OH) Servo amplifier :The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
SV0604 AMP. COMMUNICATION ERROR The communication between SVM and PSM is in error.
SV0605 CNV. EX. DISCHARGE POW. Power Supply (PS) : The motor regenerative power is too much.
SV0606 CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : The input power supply has a missing
phase.
SV0646 ABNORMAL ANALOG SIGNAL(EXT) An error occurred in the analog 1Vp-p output of the separate
detector. The separate detector, cable, or separate detector
interface unit may be failed.
If the hardware on the CNC is suspected to be defective as a result of

examination, replace the axis control cards.
- 771 -
11.23 SPC ALARMS
For an explanation of the following SPC alarms (serial Pulsecoder

alarms), refer to the FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series, AC
SPINDLE MOTOR αi series, SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
Maintenance Manual (B-65285EN).
Number Message Contents

SV0360 ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0361 ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0365 BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the built-in Pulsecoder cannot be received.
SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
received from the built-in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 BROKEN LED (EXT) An LED error occurred in the separate detector.
SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT LIN) A phase data error occurred in the separate linear scale.
SV0382 COUNT MISS (EXT) A pulse error occurred in the separate detector.
SV0383 PULSE MISS (EXT) A count error occurred in the separate detector.
SV0384 SOFT PHASE ALARM (EXT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the separate detector.
SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR (EXT) Communication data from the separate detector cannot be received.
SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR (EXT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being
received from the separate detector.
SV0387 ABNORMAL ENCODER (EXT) An error occurs in the separate detector. For details, contact the
manufacturer of the scale.
11.24 SPINDLE ALARMS
For an explanation of the following spindle alarms, refer to the

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series, AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi
series, SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series Maintenance Manual
(B-65285EN).
Number Contents
SP9001 to later: Spindle_n n-th spindle alarm (Spindle alarm display 01 or
larger)
- 772 -
11.25 SYSTEM ALARMS
11.25.1 Overview
The FANUC 30i series makes a transition to the special processing
state called the system alarm state when a state that disables the
continuation of normal system operation is detected.
When the system alarm state is entered, the CNC screen display is
switched and the following operations are performed:
• Servo and spindle amplifier excitation is turned off.
• Disconnection of I/O link communication
Example of system alarm screen
Types of System Alarms

System alarms are classified into three types according to the
following causes:
• Software causes
• Hardware causes
• Others
- Software causes
Mainly, the CNC system software detects software errors.
Typical causes are as follows:
• Conflict in processing/data detected by the internal state
monitoring software
• Access to outside of the valid data/instruction ranges
• Division by zero
• Stack overflow
• Stack underflow
• DRAM checksum error
- 773 -
- Hardware causes
Mainly, hardware detects hardware errors.
Typical causes are as follows:
• Parity error (DRAM, SRAM, cache)
• Bus error
• Power supply alarm
• FSSB cable disconnection
- Others
Moreover, system alarms are caused by the following:
• Causes detected by peripheral software
Servo software (such as watchdog)
PMC software (such as an I/O link communication error)
- 774 -
11.25.2 Operations on the System Alarm Screen
Description of system alarm screen

When a system alarm is issued, the screen display is switched to a
screen as shown below.
This screen is referred to as the system alarm screen.
The system alarm screen consists of several pages of information.

The following key operations are used:
,
Switches between pages.
Executes the IPL monitor.
Saving of system alarm information

Various information items related to a system alarm are saved in the
SRAM.
The SRAM can store information about the latest two system alarms.
If a third system alarm is issued when information about the latest two
system alarms is stored, the information about the oldest system alarm
is discarded, and information about the new system alarm is saved.
Saved system alarm information can be output from the IPL screen to
the memory card. (This function is available only with the FANUC
Series 30i /31i /32i .)
- 775 -
Output of system alarm information

With the FANUC Series 30i /31i /32i, saved system alarm information
can be output from the IPL screen to the memory card.
For the FANUC Series 300i /310i /320i /300is /310is /320is, the
countermeasure depends on the control software version.
(A) For the following control software versions, use the SRAM batch
save function.
G001,G011,G021,G00A,G01A,G02A series
G002,G012,G022,G101,G111,G121,G131,G201 - Versions 01 to
22
G003,G013,G023,G103,G113,G123,G133,G203 - Versions 01 to
04
(B) In software versions other than those in (A), system alarm
information can be output from the IPL screen to the memory
card as in the FS 30i /31i /32i.
1. Start the IPL monitor.

If the system alarm screen is displayed when a system alarm is
issued, press the reset key.
If the power is turned off, turn on the power while holding down
"-" and ".".
2. On the IPL monitor screen, enter 5 to select "5. SYSTEM

ALARM UTILITY".
- 776 -
3. Enter 2 to select "2. OUTPUT SYSTEM ALARM FILE".
4. If the IPL monitor is executed on the system alarm screen, enter

2 to select "2. OUTPUT SYSTEM ALARM FILE FROM
DRAM".
If the power is turned off, enter 1 to select "1. OUTPUT
SYSTEM ALARM FILE FROM FILE-RAM".
5. If 1 is selected in step 4, a list of saved system alarms is

displayed. Enter the number of a file to be output.
- 777 -
6. Enter the file name to output the file.
- 778 -
11.25.3 System Alarms Detected by Hardware

System alarm 400 and subsequent system alarms indicate errors
detected by hardware.
The basic screen configuration is shown below:
(1) SERIES 30I G001Z

(2) SYS_ALM401 EXTERNAL BUS INVALID ADDRESS
(3) MAIN BOARD
(4) 2003/04/22 17:09:53
(5) PROGRAM COUNTER : 1000B52CH

｜ ACT TASK : 01000010H
｜ ACCESS ADDRESS : -
｜ ACCESS DATA : -
↓ ACCESS OPERATION : -
(6) BUS MASTER PCB : MAIN BOARD

｜ +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
｜ 02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 80010000 00000000 00010000 00000000
｜ FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 68C08216 70FE0000 00000000 00000000
｜ 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
｜
｜ BUS SLAVE PCB : CPU CARD
｜ +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
｜ 00 CPU CARD 02071004 20100000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
｜ FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 10B0FC00 CFF90001 68C30061 82160010
｜ 000000F0 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
｜
｜ INFORMATION REGISTER
｜ +--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
↓ 02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
PAGE UP OR DOWN (PAGE 1/8)
[Description of the message screen]

(1): Device name, and series and edition of CNC system software
(2): System alarm number and error message
(3): Most possibly faulty component
(4): Date and time when the error occurred
(5): Software error and other information when the error occurred
(6): Bus information when the error occurred
Item (3) indicates the most possibly faulty component. Mainly,

check the component to see whether it is defective.
Information on the system alarm screen can be output as a text file

through the PCMCIA port of the display unit (or the PCMCIA port of
the main body in the case of the open CNC of stand-alone type).
Contact the FANUC service department after obtaining the
information.
For the method of outputting it, see Section 11.25.2, "Operations on
the System Alarm Screen".
Main errors are described on the following pages.
- 779 -
System Alarm 401 (EXTERNAL BUS INVALID ADDRESS)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM401 EXTERNAL BUS INVALID ADDRESS
MAIN BOARD
2004/04/21 20:34:16
PROGRAM COUNTER : 1000B52CH

ACT TASK : 01000010H
ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -
ACCESS OPERATION : -
BUS MASTER PCB : MAIN BOARD

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 80010000 00000000 00010000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 68C08216 70FE0000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
BUS SLAVE PCB : CPU CARD

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
00 CPU CARD 02071004 20100000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 10B0FC00 CFF90001 68C30061 82160010
000000F0 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
INFORMATION REGISTER
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A problem occurred on a CNC bus.
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective or external noise may
affect the bus.
Countermeasures
Replace the displayed most possibly faulty component. In addition,
the main board, or “MASTER PCB” or “SLAVE PCB” displayed on
the system alarm screen may be defective.
This error may also be caused by external noise.
Check whether there is a noise origin around the machine and whether
the machine is grounded properly.
- 780 -
System Alarm 403 (S-BUS TIME OUT ERROR)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM441 S-BUS TIME OUT ERROR
MAIN BOARD
2004/04/21 21:24:12
PROGRAM COUNTER : 102FD028H

ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -
BUS MASTER PCB : CPU CARD

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
00 CPU CARD 02071004 20100000 00000000 00000000 00040000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 00A88820 C3F90000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
BUS SLAVE PCB : MAIN BOARD

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 00A88820 C3010000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective.
Countermeasures
- 781 -
System Alarm 404 (ECC UNCORRECTABLE ERROR)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM404 ECC UNCORRECTABLE ERROR
CPU CARD
2003/04/22 17:09:53
PROGRAM COUNTER : 100DB2E0H

ACT TASK : 0100FFFBH
ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 80010000 00000000 00080000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 68C08216 70FE0000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
BUS SLAVE PCB : CPU CARD

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
00 CPU CARD 02071004 20100000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 10B0FC00 CFF90001 68C30061 82160010
000000F0 00000000 00010000 00000000 00000000
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Causes
The printed circuit board may be defective or external noise may
affect the bus.
Countermeasures
This error may also be caused by external noise.
Check whether there is a noise origin around the machine and whether
the machine is grounded properly.
- 782 -
System Alarm 455 (FAN MOTOR STOP AND SHUTDOWN)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM455 FAN MOTOR STOP AND SHUTDOWN
FAN
2004/04/21 21:24:12
PROGRAM COUNTER : 100181E0H

ACT TASK : 0100000AH
ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -
Description
A fault occurred in the fan on the CNC control unit.
Causes
The fan may be defective.
Countermeasures
Replace the fan . See Section, “REPLACING FAN MOTORS” or
“REPLACING A FAN UNIT.”
- 783 -
System Alarm 500 (SRAM DATA ERROR(SRAM MODULE))
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM500 SRAM DATA ERROR(SRAM MODULE)
FROM/SRAM MODULE
2004/04/21 21:26:52
PROGRAM COUNTER : 1000C0C4H

ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00002000 00000000
FFFFFFFF FFFFFFFF 822088A3 C3FE0001 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00004000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Data could not be transferred to the SRAM on the FROM/SRAM
module normally.
Causes
The module may be defective or the connector may not be connected
securely.
Countermeasures
Replace the FROM/SRAM module.
If the machine does not recover from the error after replacement,
replace the main board.
- 784 -
System Alarm 502 (NOISE ON POWER SUPLY)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM502 NOISE ON POWER SUPLY
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
2004/04/21 21:26:52

ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00001000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00004000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
Noise or an instantaneous power failure occurred in the CNC power
supply.
Causes
A power fault occurs.
Countermeasures
Find and remove the cause of the error.
This error may damage SRAM data.
- 785 -
System Alarm 503 (NOISE ON POWER SUPLY)
SERIES 30I G001Z

SYS_ALM503 NOISE ON POWER SUPLY
ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY(MAIN BOARD)
2004/04/21 21:26:52

ACCESS ADDRESS : -
ACCESS DATA : -

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00001000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 03012003 22110000 A0000000 00000000 00004000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
+--+----------+-----------------------------------------------------+
02 MAIN BOARD 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Description
A fault occurred in the power supply on the main board.
Causes
The power supply module is defective.
Countermeasures
Replace the power supply module.
- 786 -
11.25.4 System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB)
Causes
An alarm was detected on the FSSB.
NOTE
”/LINEx” following a message if displayed indicates
the number of an optical connector on an axis
control card.
LINE1 : COP10A-1 on the servo card
LINE2 : COP10A-2 on the servo card
LINE3 : COP10A-3 on the additional axis board
SYS_ALM114 FSSB DISCONNECTION 114: Communication between the axis control card and 1st
(MAIN -> AMP1) /LINEx servo amplifier failed.
(MAIN -> PULSE MODULE1) /LINEx separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM116 FSSB DISCONNECTION 116: Communication between the nth and mth servo
(AMPn -> AMPm) /LINEx amplifiers failed.
SYS_ALM117 FSSB DISCONNECTION 117: Communication between the nth servo amplifier and
(AMPn -> PULSE MODULEm) /LINEx mth separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM118 FSSB DISCONNECTION 118: Communication between the nth separate detector
(PULSE MODULEn -> AMPm) /LINEx interface unit and mth servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM119 FSSB DISCONNECTION 119: Communication between the 1st and 2nd separate
(PULSE MODULE1 -> PULSE MODULE2) /LINEx detector interface units failed.
(MAIN <- AMP1) /LINEx servo amplifier failed.
(MAIN <- PULSE MODULE1) /LINEx separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM122 FSSB DISCONNECTION 122: Communication between the nth and mth servo
(AMPn <- AMPm) /LINEx amplifiers failed.
SYS_ALM123 FSSB DISCONNECTION 123: Communication between the nth servo amplifier and
(AMPn <- PULSE MODULEm) /LINEx mth separate detector interface unit failed.
SYS_ALM124 FSSB DISCONNECTION 124: Communication between the nth separate detector
(PULSE MODULEn <- AMPm) /LINEx interface unit and mth servo amplifier failed.
SYS_ALM125 FSSB DISCONNECTION 125: Communication between the 1st and 2nd separate
(PULSE MODULE1 <- PULSE MODULE2) /LINEx detector interface units failed.
Replace the optical cable for the relevant connection. If the

error still occurs after replacement, replace the relevant axis
control card, servo amplifier(s), and/or separate detector
interface unit(s).
When the arrow points to the left, a power fault may occur in
the servo amplifier or separate detector interface unit at the
base of the arrow. Check the +24 V power supply input to
the relevant unit and the +5 V power supply for the pulse
coder output from the relevant unit for an error such as a
ground fault.
SYS_ALM126 FSSB INTERNAL DISCONNECTION 126: Internal communication in the nth servo amplifier
(AMPn) -> /LINEx failed.
SYS_ALM127 FSSB INTERNAL DISCONNECTION 127: Internal communication in the nth servo amplifier
(AMPn) <- /LINEx failed.
Replace the relevant servo amplifier.
- 787 -
SYS_ALM129 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 129: A fault was detected in the power supply of the nth
(SERVO:AMPn) /LINEx servo amplifier.
SYS_ALM130 ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY 130: A fault was detected in the power supply of the nth
(SERVO:PULSE MODULEn) /LINEx separate detector interface unit.
Check the power supply of the relevant servo amplifier or

separate detector interface unit.
SYS_ALM134 FSSB LINE DATA ERROR 134: A data error occurred on the FSSB line and the nth
(AMPn) > .. > MAIN /LINEx servo amplifier received abnormal data.
SYS_ALM135 FSSB LINE DATA ERROR 135: A data error occurred on the FSSB line and the nth
(PULSE MODULEn) > .. > MAIN /LINEx separate detector interface unit received abnormal data.
Replace the relevant servo amplifier or separate detector

interface unit. If the machine does not recover from the
error after replacement, also replace the slave preceding the
relevant slave. If the error still occurs, replace the servo
card (or additional axis board).
SYS_ALM136 FSSB SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED 136 : The correct data could not be received in the servo
(AMPn -> MAIN) software because of an FSSB communication error.
SYS_ALM137 FSSB SEND CNC DATA FAILED 137 : The correct data could not be received on a slave
(AMPn <- MAIN) side because of an FSSB communication error.
Replace the relevant servo amplifier or separate detector

interface unit. If the machine does not recover from the
error after replacement, also replace the slave preceding the
relevant slave. If the error still occurs, replace the servo
card (or additional axis board).
- 788 -
11.26 SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O Link
SYS_ALM197 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR
….
EMBEDDED SOFTWARE SYSTEM ERROR:(406N-0010)
PCxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (Alarm No.)
When an alarm message as shown above is displayed, a system alarm

related to the PMC and I/O Link occurs. Possible causes include an
I/O link communication error and a fault in the PMC control circuit.
Details are listed in the following table.
Alarm number Contents Faulty location/corrective action

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A CPU error occurred in the This alarm may be due to a
PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PMC system. software/hardware fault; contact us with
PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are information on the circumstances under
PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy internal error codes. which the alarm occurred (displayed
PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy message, system configuration, operation
suspected of causing the alarm, timing of
alarm occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal error
codes.
PC030 RAM PARI xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A RAM parity error occurred in This alarm may be due to a hardware fault;
the PMC system. contact us with information on the
xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are circumstances under which the alarm
internal error codes. occurred (displayed message, system
configuration, operation suspected of
causing the alarm, timing of alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence, etc.)
as well as the displayed internal error codes.
PC050 IOLINK ER1 CHz:GRyy:xx An I/O Link communication error Check the I/O device which is located at
occurred. group number yy (0-15) in channel
z is a channel number. number z (1-4) with the following point of
yy is a group number. view.
xx is a internal error code. <1> The power of the I/O Link master and/or
There is a possibility that some slave devices is faulty.
problem occurs at the I/O Link – instantaneous power failure
device or the neighborhood. – unstable power line
However, please note that It <2> The power cable of the I/O Link master
may not show a accurate group and/or slave devices is faulty.
number with some conditions of – faulty wiring
the problem. But in any case, – incomplete contact
this indicated number helps you <3> The communication cable to the I/O
to solve the problem. Link device is faulty.
– faulty wiring
– incomplete contact
<4> The I/O Link device is faulty.
- 789 -

PC060 BUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A bus error occurred in the PMC <1> When you use a I/O Unit-Model A, no
system. base extension unit is connected
corresponding to a I/O assignment
data. Check connection of I/O devices
and I/O assignment data.
<2> When you use Power Mate as I/O Link
slave device and/or Servo Motor Beta
series I/O Link option, some system
alarm occurs in such devices.
<3> A Communication may be influenced by
noise. Check the ground wire and the
shield of the communication cables.
<4> The output of the I/O Link devices is
short-circuited.
<5> The power of the I/O Link master and/or
slave devices is faulty.
– instantaneous power failure
– unstable power line
<6> The power cable of the I/O Link master
and/or slave devices is faulty.
– faulty wiring
<7> The communication cable to the I/O
Link device is faulty.
– faulty wiring
PC060 BUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy A bus error occurred in the PMC This alarm may be due to a
system. software/hardware fault; contact us with
information on the circumstances under
which the alarm occurred (displayed
message, system configuration, operation
suspected of causing the alarm, timing of
alarm occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal error
codes.
PC070 LADDER SPE (PMCn) A stack error occurred with the Check the correspondence between the
SPE functional instruction of the CALL or CALLU instruction and the SPE
ladder program of n path. instruction.
PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR(PMCn) A RAM check error occurred. This alarm may be due to a hardware fault;
PC098 CODE PARITY ERR contact us with information on the
circumstances under which the alarm
occurred (displayed message, system
occurrence, frequency of occurrence, etc.).
- 790 -

PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR The read or write operation Contact us with information on the
PATHn between CNC and PMC failed. circumstances under which the alarm
occurrence, frequency of occurrence, etc.).
PC502 LADDER SUBaaa (PMCn) The sequence program uses the Correct the sequence program so that the
SUBaaa functional instruction SUBaaa functional instruction will not be
that is not supported in PMCn. used.
- 791 -
APPENDIX
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX A.ALARM LIST
A ALARM LIST
Appendix A, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following sections:
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)...............................................................796

(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm) ....................796
(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm) ...................................796
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm).....................................796
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm) ..................................835
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm).....................................................835
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm).............................................842
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm) ...........................................843
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm).........843
(9) Spindle alarms (SP alarm)...................................................845
(10) Overheat alarms (OH alarm).............................................847
(11) Other alarms (DS alarm) ...................................................847
(12) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm) .........851
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC) ..............................................................853
A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
Screen ...........................................................................853
A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages .....................................856
A.2.3 Operation Errors...........................................................859
A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages ............................871
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) .......................................875
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)....................................883
- 795 -
A.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
A.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)
(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm)
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm)
Alarm numbers are common to all these alarm types.

Depending on the state, an alarm is displayed as in the following
examples:
PS"alarm number" Example: PS0003
BG"alarm number" Example: BG0085
SR"alarm number" Example: SR0001

0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics
screen.
0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No.
0000#0 to “0”.
0003 TOO MANY DIGIT Data entered with more digits than permitted in the NC
instruction word.
The number of permissible digits varies according to the
function and the word.
0004 INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format. This
alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not contain
a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format. This
alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not contain
a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
0009 IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was specified, or parameter 1020 is not set.
0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to 0.
This alarm is also generated if the F code instructed for the S
code is set extremely small in a rigid tapping instruction as the
tool cannot cut at the programmed lead.
0014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading
/ synchronous feed. Modify the program.
0015 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A move command was specified for more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Either add on the simultaneous axis control extension option, or
divide the number of programmed move axes into two blocks.
- 796 -

0020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS An arc was specified for which the difference in the radius at the
start and end points exceeds the value set in parameter No.
3410. Check arc center codes I, J and K in the program.
The tool path when parameter No. 3410 is set to a large value is
spiral.
0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified
simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
To enable programming of 3 or more axes, the helical
interpolation option must be added to each of the relevant axes.
0022 R OR I,J,K COMMAND NOT FOUND The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or
coordinate I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to
the center of the arc.
0025 CIRCLE CUT IN RAPID (F0) F0 (rapid traverse in inverse feed or feed specified by an F code
with 1–digit number) was specified during circular interpolation
(G02, G03) or involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2).
0027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length
offset type C.
Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool
length offset type C.
Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool
length compensation type is C.
0028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not specified
simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
To enable programming of 3 or more axes, the helical
interpolation option must be added to each of the relevant axes.
0029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Illegal offset No.
0030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER An illegal offset No. was specified.
This alarm is also generated when the tool shape offset No.
exceeds the maximum number of tool offset sets in the case of
tool offset memory B.
0031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 The relevant data input or option could not be found for the L
No. of G10.
No data setting address such as P or R was specified.
An address command not concerned with data setting was
specified. An address varies with the L No.
The sign or decimal point of the specified address is in error, or
the specified address is out of range.
0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount
by system variables, the offset amount was excessive.
0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
COMPENSATION calculation in tool radius/tool nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT In tool radius/tool nose radius compensation, a startup or
BLK cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the
program.
- 797 -

0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for tool radius/tool nose radius compensation)
of group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in the
PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit override
by address Q.
0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
0038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in tool radius/tool nose radius
BLOCK compensation because the arc start point or end point coincides
with the arc center. Modify the program.
0039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start-up, a cancel,
G41,G42 or switching between G41 and G42 in G41 and G42 commands
(tool radius/tool nose radius compensation). The program may
cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R. Modify the
program.
0041 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER In tool radius/tool nose radius compensation, excessive cutting
COMPENSATION may occur. Modify the program.
0042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool radius
compensation or three-dimensional cutter compensation. Modify
the program.
0043 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND On a system with a DRILL-MATE ATC installed, M06 is not
specified in a block that specifies a T code. Alternatively, a T
code beyond the allowable range is specified.
0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
CYC Modify the program.
0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73) or peck drilling cycle
(G83), the amount of each-time cutting is not specified by
address Q, or Q0 is specified. Modify the program.
0046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN A command for a return to the second, third or fourth reference
COMMAND position is error. (The address P command is in error.)
Although an option for a return to the third or fourth reference
position was not set, 3 or 4 was specified in address P.
0047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT Two or more parallel axes (in parallel with a basic axis) have
been specified upon start-up of 3-dimensional tool
compensation or three-dimensional coordinate conversion.
0048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND Start-up of 3-dimensional tool compensation or
three-dimensional coordinate conversion has been attempted,
but the three basic axes used when Xp, Yp, or Zp is omitted are
not set in parameter No. 1022.
0049 ILLEGAL COMMAND(G68,G69) When three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68 or G69)
was specified, the tool compensation was not canceled. Or,
programs of three-dimensional coordinate conversion (G68,
G69) and tool compensation (G43, G44 or G49) were not
nested. Or, the three-dimensional coordinate conversion was
specified during the tool length compensation and another tool
length compensation was specified.
0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
- 798 -

0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01
(or vertical line). Modify the program.
0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, J,
K and R are specified.
0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner
CHF/CNR R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.
0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than
chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
0056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point
CHF/CNR and an angle were specified in the block next to the block in
which only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program.
0057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension
drawing programming. Modify the program.
0058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
programming. Modify the program.
0060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data input/output]
The specified number could not be found for program number
and sequence number searches.
Although input/output of a pot number of tool data or offset
input was requested, no tool number was input after power on.
The tool data corresponding to the entered tool number could
not be found.
[External workpiece number search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
number could not be found.
[Program restart]
In the program restart sequence number specification, the
specified sequence number could not be found.
0061 P OR Q COMMAND IS NOT IN THE Address P or Q is not specified in multiple repetitive cycle (G70,
MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES G71, G72, or G73) command.
BLOCK
0062 THE CUTTING AMOUNT IS ILLEGAL A zero or a negative value was specified in a multiple repetitive
IN THE ROUGH CUTTING CYCLE canned rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72) as the depth of cut.
0063 THE BLOCK OF A SPECIFIED The sequence number specified by addresses P and Q in
SEQUENCE NUMBER IS NOT multiple repetitive cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command
FOUND cannot be searched.
0064 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(FIRST rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command for the first
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
0065 G00/G01 IS NOT IN THE FIRST In the first block of the shape program specified by P of the
BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), G00
or G01 was not specified.
0066 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN THE An unavailable command was found in a multiple repetitive
MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) command block.
BLOCK
0067 THE MULTIPLE REPETIVE CYCLES A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73)
IS NOT IN THE PART PROGRAM command is not registered in a tape memory area.
STORAGE
0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70,
IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or corner R
in the last block is terminated in the middle.
0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
- 799 -

0071 DATA NOT FOUND - The address to be searched was not found.
- The program with specified program number was not found
in program number search.
- In the program restart block number specification, the
specified block number could not be found.
Check the data.
0072 DATA NOT FOUND The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125
(option), 200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete
unnecessary programs and execute program registration again.
0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs
and execute program registration again.
0074 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the
USE program number.
0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was
protected.
In program matching, the password for the encoded program
was not correct.
An attempt was made to select a program being edited in the
background as the main program.
An attempt was made to call a program being edited in the
background as a subprogram.
0076 PROGRAM NOT FOUND The specified program is not found in the subprogram call,
macro call or graphic copy.
The M, G, T or S codes are called by a P instruction other than
that in an M98, G65, G66, G66.1 or interrupt type custom
macro, and a program is called by a No. 2 auxiliary function
code.
This alarm is also generated when a program is not found by
these calls.
0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
0078 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The specified sequence No. was not found during sequence
number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in GOTO––
and M99P–– was not found.
0079 PROGRAM NOT MATCH The program in memory does not match the program stored on
tape.
Multiple programs cannot be matched continuously when
parameter No. 2200#3 is set to “1”.
Set parameter No. 2200#3 to “0” before executing a match.
0080 G37 MEASURING POSITION - For machining center series
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT When the tool length measurement function (G37) is
PROPERLY INPUT performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front
of the area determined by the ε value specified in parameter
No.6254. Alternatively, the signal does not go 1.
- For lathe
When the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
used, a measuring position reached signals (XAE1, XAE2)
does not go 1 within the range determined by the ε value
specified in parameters No.6254 and No.6255.
- 800 -

0081 G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED - For machining center series
The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified
without specifying an H code.
Correct the program.
- For lathe
The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
specified without specifying an T code.
0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE - For machining center series
The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified
together with an H code in the same block.
- For lathe
The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
specified together with an T code in the same block.
0083 G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND - For machining center series
An error has been found in axis specification of the tool length
measurement function (G37). Alternatively, a move command
is specified as an incremental command.
- For lathe
An error has been found in axis specification of the automatic
tool compensation function (G36, G37).
Alternatively, a command is specified as an incremental
command.
0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device connected
to reader/punch interface 1 before it could read a previously
received character.
0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible
causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a
defective printed circuit board.
0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by reader/punch interface 1, although a read stop
command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The
I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
0090 REFERENCE RETURN 1. The reference position return cannot be performed normally
INCOMPLETE because the reference position return start point is too close
to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate
the start point far enough from the reference position, or
specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference position return.
2. An attempt was made to set the zero position for the
absolute position detector by return to the reference position
when it was impossible to set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the
zero position of the absolute position detector after turning
the CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
0091 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION Manual return to the reference position cannot be performed
RETURN IS NOT PERFORMED IN when automatic operation is halted. Perform the manual return
FEED HOLD to the reference position when automatic operation is stopped or
reset.
0092 ZERO RETURN CHECK (G27) The axis specified in G27 has not returned to zero.
ERROR Reprogram so that the axis returns to zero.
- 801 -

0094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system
setting operation was performed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the User's manual.
0095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece
offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation
according to the User's manual.
0096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (WRK OFS P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After
CHG) the automatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset
amount changed.) Perform the correct operation according to
the User's manual.
0097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (AUTO P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After
EXEC) power ON, after emergency stop or alarms 0094 to 0097 reset,
no automatic operation is performed.) Perform automatic
operation.
0098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE RETURN A command of the program restart was specified without the
reference position return operation after power ON or
emergency stop, and G28 was found during search. Perform the
reference position return.
0099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED AFT. After completion of search in program restart, a move command
SEARCH is given with MDI.
0109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code,
or no value was specified.
0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out of
range during arithmetic calculations.
0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
0113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
commanded. Modify the program.
0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro statement
is in error. The parameter tape format is in error.
0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE A number that cannot be used for a local variable, common
variable, or system variable in a custom macro is specified.
In the EGB axis skip function (G31.8), a non-existent custom
macro variable number is specified. Or, the number of custom
macro variables used to store skip positions is not sufficient.
Alternatively, the header data in high-speed cycle machining is
improper. This alarm is issued in the following cases.
1) The header corresponding to the specified call machining
cycle number is absent.
2) The value of cycle connection information falls outside the
allowable range (0 to 999).
3) The number of data items in the header falls outside the
allowable range (1 to 65535).
4) The storage start data variable number of executable data
falls outside the allowable ranges (#20000 to
#85535/#200000 to #986431/#2000000 to #3999999).
5) The storage end data variable number of executable data
falls outside the allowable ranges
(#85535/#986431/#3999999).
6) The storage start data variable number of executable data
is the same as the variable number used by the header.
0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left side
of an expression a variable that can only be used on the right
side of an expression.
- 802 -

0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
range.
0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the
GOTO/WHILE/DO main program in the MDI or DNC mode.
0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed the
permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
0128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The specified sequence No. could not be found for sequence
NUMBER number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in GOTO--
and M99P-- could not be found.
0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. G can be
specified as an argument only in an every-block call (G66.1).
0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
0136 SPOS AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in
TIME the same block.
0137 M-CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in
BLK. the same block.
0138 SUPERIMPOSED DATA OVERFLOW The total distribution amount of the CNC and PMC is too large
during superimposed control for PMC axis control.
0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC axis
AXIS is being controlled.
0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete the
USE program being selected in the foreground. Perform the correct
operation for the background edition.
0141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN 3-D G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the 3-dimensional tool
OFFSET compensation mode. Modify the program.
0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ … or G51I_J_K_
… or parameter (No. 5411 or 5421))
0143 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the storage length of the CNC internal
data. This alarm is also generated when the result of internal
calculation of scaling, coordinate rotation and cylindrical
interpolation overflows the data storage. It also is generated
during input of the manual intervention amount.
0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose
radius compensation plane must be the same. Modify the
program.
0145 ILLEGAL USE OF G12.1/G13.1 The axis No. of plane selection parameter No. 5460 (linear axis)
and No. 5461(axis of rotation) in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode is out of range (1 to number of controlled
axes).
- 803 -

0146 ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE The modal G code group contains an illegal G code in the polar
coordinate interpolation mode or when a mode was canceled.
Only the following G codes are allowed: G40, G50, G69.1
An illegal G code was specified while in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode.
The following C codes are not allowed: G27, G28, G30, G30.1,
G31 to G31.4, G37 to G387.3, G52, G92, G53, G17 to G19,
G81 to G89, G68
In the 01 group, G codes other than G01, G02, G03, G02.2 and
G03.2 cannot be specified.
0148 SETTING ERROR Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable
range of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to
No.1714).
0149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life management data, an
address other than Q1, Q2, P1, and P2 or an unusable address
was specified.
0150 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBER The tool group number exceeded the maximum allowable value.
The tool group number (P after specification of G10 L3;) or the
group number given by the tool life management T code in a
machining program.
0151 GROUP NOT FOUND AT LIFE DATA The tool group specified in a machining program is not set in
tool life management data.
0152 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL NUMBER The number of tools registered in one group exceeded the
maximum allowable registration tool number.
0153 T-CODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data, a block in which the T code needs
to be specified does not include the T code. Alternatively, in
tool exchange method D, M06 is specified solely. Modify the
program.
0154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP - For the tool management command
H99 or D99 was specified when no tool management data
number is assigned to the spindle position. Modify the
program.
- For the tool life management command
The H99 command, D99 command, or the H/D code set by
parameters No. 13265 and No. 13266 was specified when no
tool belonging to a group is used.
0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND In the machining program, the T code that is present in the
block containing M06 does not correspond to the group currently
being used. Modify the program.
0156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands are not specified in the beginning of a
program for setting a tool group. Modify the program.
0157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS In registration of tool life management data, the group setting
command block counts of P (group number) and L (tool life)
exceeded the maximum group count.
0158 TOOL LIFE VALUE OUT OF RANGE The life value that is being set is too large. Change the setting.
0159 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Tool life management data is corrupted for some reason.
Register the tool data in the tool group or the tool data in the
group again by G10L3; or MDI input.
- 804 -

0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE A waiting M-code is in error.
<1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path 2
as waiting M codes without a P command.
<2> When the waiting M codes are not identical even though
the P commands are identical
<3> When the waiting M codes are identical and the P
commands are not identical (This occurs when a P
command is specified with binary value.)
<4> When the number lists in the P commands contain a
different number even though the waiting M codes are
identical (This occurs when a P command is specified by
combining path numbers.)
<5> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) and a waiting M code with a P command
(3-or-more-path waiting) were specified at the same time
<6> When a waiting M code without a P command was
specified for 3 or more paths.
0161 ILLEGAL P OF WAITING M-CODE P in a waiting M-code is incorrect.
<1> When address P is negative
<2> When a P value inappropriate for the system configuration
was specified
<3> When a waiting M code without a P command (2-path
waiting) was specified in the system having 3 or more
paths.
0163 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut.
An illegal value is commanded in a balance cut combination
(address P).
0169 ILLEGAL TOOL GEOMETRY DATA Incorrect tool figure data in interference check. Set correct data,
or select correct tool figure data.
0175 ILLEGAL G07.1 AXIS An axis which cannot perform cylindrical interpolation was
specified. More than one axis was specified in a G07.1 block.
An attempt was made to cancel cylindrical interpolation for an
axis that was not in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
For the cylindrical interpolation axis, set not “0” but one of 5, 6 or
7 (parallel axis specification) to parameter No. 1022 to instruct
the arc with axis of rotation (ROT parameter No. 1006#1 is set
to “1” and parameter No. 1260 is set) ON.
0176 ILLEGAL G-CODE USE(G07.1 MODE) A G code was specified that cannot be specified in the
cylindrical interpolation mode. This alarm also is generated
when an 01 group G code was in the G00 mode or code G00
was instructed.
Cancel the cylindrical interpolation mode before instructing code
G00.
- 805 -

0178 ILLEGAL COMMAND G05 The settings of bits 4 to 6 of parameter No.7501 are invalid or
G05 was specified in any of the following mode.
- Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07)
- Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1)
- Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1)
- Polar coordinates command (G16)
- Spindle speed fluctuation detection (G26)
- Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation (G41/G42)
- Normal direction control (G41.1/G42.1)
- Scaling (G51)
- Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
- Coordinate system rotation (G68)
- Canned cycle (G81 to G89)
- Constant surface speed control (G96)
- Macro interruption(M96)
0179 PARAM. (NO.7510) SETTING ERROR The number of controlled axes set by the parameter No. 7510
exceeds the maximum number. Modify the parameter setting
value.
The distribution of high-speed cycle machining stopped.
0190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED (G96) An illegal value was specified in P in a G96 block or parameter
No. 5844.
0194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A Cs contour control mode, spindle positioning command, or
SYNCHRO-MODE rigid tapping mode was specified during the spindle
synchronous control mode or simple spindle synchronous
control mode.
0197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cs-axis when the
MODE Cs contour control switching signal was off.
0199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
0200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value was out of range or was not
specified. The parameter (Nos. 5241 to 5243) setting is an S
value which can be specified for the rigid tap.
Correct the parameters or modify the program.
0201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID The command F code for a cutting feedrate is a zero.
TAP If the value of F command is much smaller than that of the S
command, when a rigid tap command is specified, this alarm is
generated. This is because cutting is not possible by the lead
specified by the program.
0202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (System
error)
0203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S
command is incorrect. Modify the program.
0204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid
M code (M29) block and G84 (or G74) block. Modify the
program.
0205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Although a rigid M code (M29) is specified in rigid tapping, the
rigid mode DI signal (DGN G061.0) is not ON during execution
of the G84 (or G74) block. Check the PMC ladder diagram to
find the reason why the DI signal is not turned on.
0206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (RIGID Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode. Modify the
TAP) program.
0207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping.
- 806 -

0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 1 The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted
during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an
M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Modify
the program.
2 The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an
interrupt macro during pocket machining in a multiple
repetitive canned cycle.
0212 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for
the plane other than the Z-X plane. Correct the program.
0213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In feed axis synchronization control, the following errors
SYNCHRO-MODE occurred during the synchronous operation.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual operation to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return
command without specifying the manual reference position
return after the power was turned on.
0214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type
SYNCHRO-MODE is executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
0217 DUPLICATE G51.2(COMMANDS) G51.2 is further commanded in the G51.2 mode. Modify the
program.
0218 NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND P or Q is not commanded in the G51.2 block, or the command
value is out of the range. Modify the program. For a polygon
turning between spindles, more information as to why this alarm
occurred is indicated in DGN No. 471.
0219 COMMAND G51.2/G50.2 G51.2 and 50.2 were specified in the same block for other
INDEPENDENTLY commands. Modify the program in another block.
0220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the
SYNCHR-MODE NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous
axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder.
0221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or
SYNCHR-MODE balance cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program.
0222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG-EDIT Input and output are executed at a time in the background
edition. Execute a correct operation.
0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED A reference return has not been performed before the start of
automatic operation.
(Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0)
Perform a reference position return.
0230 R CODE NOT FOUND Cut depth R is not specified in the block including G161.
Alternatively, the value specified for R is negative.
Modify the program.
0231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52 Errors occurred in the specified format at the
programmable-parameter input.
0232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes were specified as helical axes in the helical
COMMAND interpolation mode. Five or more axes were specified as helical
axes in the helical interpolation B mode.
0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using it.
0241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 The end point of an involute curve on the currently selected
plane, or the center coordinate instruction I, J or K of the
corresponding basic circle, or basic circle radius R was not
specified.
- 807 -

0242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2 An illegal value was specified in the involute curve.
The coordinate instruction I, J or K of the basic circle on the
currently selected plane or the basic circle radius R is “0”, or the
start and end points are not inside the basic circle.
0243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The end point is not positioned on the involute curve that
passes through the start point, and this error exceeds the
permissible error limit (parameter No. 2510).
0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be
BLOCK specified in the same block as a T code, was specified with a T
code.
0247 THE MISTAKE IS FOUND IN THE When an encrypted program is output, EIA is set for the output
OUTPUT CODE OF DATA. code. Specify ISO.
0250 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL Z AXIS A Z-axis move command was performed in the same block for
COMMAND M06 command.
0251 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL T An unusable T code was specified in M06Txx.
COMMAND
0253 G05 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED A binary operation was specified during advanced preview
control mode.
0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the
program. For the T system, one of the following functions is
specified during scaling, this alarm is generated.
- finishing cycle (G70 or G72)
- outer surface rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G73)
- end side rough-cutting cycle (G72 or G74)
- closed loop cutting cycle (G73 or G75)
- end side cutting-off cycle (G74 or G76)
- outer surface or inner surface cutting-off cycle (G75 or G77)
- multiple repetitive threading cycle (G76 or G78)
- face drill cycle (G83 or G83)
- face tap cycle (G84 or G84)
- face boring cycle (G85 or G85)
- side drill cycle (G87 or G87)
- side tap cycle (G88 or G88)
- side boring cycle (G89 or G89)
- outer surface turning cycle or inner surface boring cycle (G77
or G20)
- threading cycle (G78 or G21)
- end side turning cycle (G79 or G24)
(Specify G codes for systems B and C in that order.)
0301 RESETTING OF REFERENCE Although parameter No. 1012#0 (IDGx) was set to 1 to inhibit
RETURN IS INHIBITED the reference position from being set again for a return to the
reference position without a dog, an attempt was made to
perform a manual return to the reference position.
0302 SETTING THE REFERENCE The reference position could not be set for a return to the
POSITION WITHOUT DOG IS NOT reference position without a dog. Possible causes are:
PERFORMED - The axis was not moved in the direction of a return to the
reference position for jog feeding.
- The axis was moved in the direction opposite to the direction
of a manual return to the reference position.
- 808 -

0303 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS When the setting of a reference position at any position was
NOT PERFORMED possible in Cs contour control (parameter CRF (No. 3700#0) =
1), a G00 command was issued for the Cs contour axis without
a return to the reference position after the serial spindle was
switched to Cs contour control mode.
Perform a reference position return with a G28 command before
issuing a G00 command.
0304 G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT Although a reference position was not set, an automatic return
ZERO RETURN to the reference position (G28) was commanded.
0305 INTERMEDIATE POSITION IS NOT Although a G28 (automatic return to the reference position),
ASSIGNED G30 (return to the second, third, or fourth reference position), or
G30/1 (return to the floating reference position) command was
not issued after power-up, G29 (return from the reference
position) was commanded.
0306 MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or K
command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is
specified.
0307 CAN NOT START REFERENCE An attempt was made to set a butt-type reference position for an
RETURN WITH MECHANICAL axis for which to use the function to set a reference position
STOPPER SETTING without a dog.
0308 G72.1 NESTING ERROR G72.1 was specified again during G72.1 rotation copying.
0309 G72.2 NESTING ERROR G72.2 was specified again during G72.2 parallel copying.
0310 FILE NOT FOUND The specified file could not be found during a subprogram or
macro call.
0311 CALLED BY FILE NAME FORMAT An invalid format was specified to call a subprogram or macro
ERROR using a file name.
0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during direct
input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (parameter No. 3405#4 = 1)
was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a comma
was specified.
0313 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND The variable-lead threading increment specified in address K
exceeds the specified maximum value in variable-lead
threading. Or, a negative lead value was specified.
0314 ILLEGAL SETTING OF POLYGONAL An axis was specified invalidly in polygon turning.
AXIS For polygon turning:
A tool rotation axis is not specified.
(Parameter No. 7610)
For polygon turning between spindles:
Valid spindles are not specified.
(Parameter Nos. 7640 to 7643)
- A spindle other than the serial spindle.
- A spindle is not connected.
0315 ILLEGAL NOSE ANGLE COMMAND An invalid tool tip angle is specified in a multiple repetitive
IS IN THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE canned threading cycle (G76).
0316 ILLEGAL CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN An minimum depth of cut higher than the thread height is
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE specified in a multiple repetitive canned threading cycle (G76).
0317 ILLEGAL THREAD COMMAND IS IN A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
THE THREAD CUTTING CYCLE canned threading cycle (G76) as the thread height or the depth
of cut.
- 809 -

0318 ILLEGAL RELIEF AMOUNT IS IN THE Although an escape directions is set in a multiple repetitive
DRILLING CYCLE canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a negative value is
specified for ∆d.
0319 THE END POINT COMMAND IS Although the ∆i or ∆k travel distance is set to 0 in a multiple
ILLEGAL IN THE DRILLING CYCLE repetitive canned cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75), a value other
than 0 us specified for a U or W.
0320 ILLEGAL MOVEMENT A negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive canned
AMOUNT/CUTTING AMOUNT IS IN cutting-off cycle (G74 or G75) as ∆i or ∆k (travel distance/the
THE DRILLING CYCLE depth of cut).
0321 ILLEGAL REPEATED TIME IS IN THE A zero or a negative value is specified in a multiple repetitive
PATTERN REPEATING CYCLE canned closed loop cycle (G73) as a repeated time.
0322 FINISHING SHAPE WHICH OVER OF An invalid shape which is over the cycle starting point is
STARTING POINT specified in a shape program for a multiple repetitive canned
rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72).
0323 THE FIRST BLOCK OF SHAPE Type II is specified in the first block of the shape program
PROGRAM IS A COMMAND OF specified by P in a multiple repetitive canned rough-cutting cycle
TYPE II (G71 or G72). Z (W) command is for G71.
X (U) command is for G72.
0324 THE INTERRUPTION TYPE MACRO An interruption type macro was issued during the multiple
WAS DONE IN THE MULTIPLE repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
REPETIVE CYCLES
0325 UNAVAILABLE COMMAND IS IN An usable command was issued in a shape program for a
SHAPE PROGRAM multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73).
0326 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70,
IS A DIRECT DRAWING G71, G72, or G73), a command for direct input of drawing
DIMENSIONS dimensions in the last block is terminated in the middle.
0327 MODAL THAT MULTIPLE REPETIVE A multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73) was
CYCLES CANNOT BE DONE commanded in a modal state in which a multiple repetitive
canned cycle could not be commanded.
0328 ILLEGAL WORK POSITION IS IN THE The specification for the blank side for a tool nose radius
TOOL NOSE RADIUS compensation (G41 or G42) is incorrect in a multiple repetitive
COMPENSATION canned cycle (G71 or G72).
0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
0330 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN THE An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned cycle(G90,
TURNING CANNED CYCLE G92, or G94).
0331 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER IN AX[] An illegal value is specified for an AX[] axis number.
0332 ILLEGAL AXIS ADDRESS IN An illegal value is specified for an AXNUM[] axis address.
AXNUM[]
0333 TOO MANY SPINDLE COMMANDS Multiple spindle commands could be found in the same block in
using an expansion spindle name.
Only one spindle could be commanded in the same block.
0334 OFFSET IS OUT OF EFFECTIVE An offset data which was out of the effective range was
RANGE specified. (malfunction prevention function)
0335 PLURAL M CODE Multiple M codes are commanded simultaneously in a block for
a wait function with peripheral devices by an M code.
0336 TOOL COMPENSATION For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to
COMMANDED MORE TWO AXES command the offset to other axes without canceling the offset.
Or, for a tool length compensation C, multiple axes are specified
in G43 or G44 block.
0337 EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL The command value exceeded the maximum amount of
VALUE incremental. (malfunction prevention function)
- 810 -

0338 CHECK SUM ERROR An incorrect value was detected in a check sum.
(malfunction prevention function)
0340 ILLEGAL RESTART(NANO With manual absolute turned on, an attempt was made to restart
SMOOTHING) the operation in nano smoothing mode after performing the
manual interaction.
0341 TOO MANY COMMAND BLOCK There are more blocks than can be commanded consecutively
(NANO SMOOTHING) in nano smoothing mode.
0342 CUSTOM MACRO INTERRUPT A custom macro interrupt was enabled in nano smoothing
ENABLE IN NANO SMOOTHING mode. Or, nano smoothing mode was commanded with a
custom macro interrupt enabled.
0343 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN NANO G43, G44, or G49 was commanded during a nano smoothing.
SMOOTHING
0344 CANNOT CONTINUE NANO An illegal command or operation by which a nano smoothing
SMOOTHING could not be continued was performed.
0345 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL Z AXIS A tool change position on the Z-axis is incorrect.
POS
0346 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL TOOL NUM A tool change position is not set.
0347 TOOL CHANGE ILLEGAL COMMAND Tool changing is commanded twice or more in the same block.
IN SAME BLK.
0348 TOOL CHANGE Z AXIS POS NOT A tool change spindle on the Z-axis is not set.
ESTABLISHED
0349 TOOL CHANGE SPINDLE NOT STOP A tool change spindle stop is not stopped.
0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal synchronization control axis number (parameter No.
THE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL 8180) is set.
AXIS SET ERROR.
0351 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to synchronization control was
THE SYNC CONTROL IS CAN'T BE moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
USED. synchronization control by a synchronization control axis
selection signal.
0352 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform synchronization control for
the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further
great-grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
3) An attempt was made to operate synchronization control
although a parent-child-grandchild relation was not set.
0353 THE INSTRUCTION WAS DONE FOR This error occurred when:
THE AXIS WHICH WAS NOT ABLE - For synchronization
TO MOVE. 1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the slave axis.
- For composition
1) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8163#7NUMx is set to 1.
2) A move command was issued to the axis for which
parameter No. 8162#7MUMx is set to 1.
0354 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the master axis
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN being parking during synchronization control, but an axis
SYNC MODE reference position is not set for the slave axis.
0355 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal composite control axis number (parameter No. 8183)
THE COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS is specified.
SET ERROR.
- 811 -

0356 BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, While the axis being subject to composite control was moving,
THE COMP CONTROL IS CAN'T BE an attempt was made to start or cancel the composite control by
USED. a composite control axis selection signal.
0357 COMPOSITE CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when an attempt was made to perform
COMPOSITION ERROR. composite control for the axis during a synchronization,
composition, or superposition.
0359 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN This error occurred when G28 was specified to the composite
WITH THE REF POS NOT FIXED IN axis during composite control, but a reference position is not set
COMP MODE to the other part of the composition.
0360 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF An illegal superposition control axis number (parameter No.
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL AXIS 8186) is specified.
SET ERROR.
0361 While the axis being subject to superposition control was
BECAUSE THE AXIS IS MOVING, moving, an attempt was made to start or cancel the
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL IS superposition control by a superposition control axis selection
CAN'T BE USED. signal.
0362 SUPERPOSITION CONTROL AXIS This error occurred when:
COMPOSITION ERROR. 1) An attempt was made to perform superposition control for
the axis during a synchronization, composition, or
superposition.
2) An attempt was made to synchronize a further
great-grandchild for a parent-child-grandchild relation.
0363 THE G28 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO This error occurred when G28 was specified to the
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE superposition control slave axis during superposition control.
AXIS.
0364 THE G53 WAS INSTRUCTED IN TO This error occurred when G53 was specified to the slave axis
THE SUPERPOS CONTROL SLAVE being moved during superposition control.
AXIS.
0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS The maximum control axis number or maximum control spindle
NUMBER number which could be used within a path was exceeded.
PER PATH (For a loader path, this alarm is generated if the number of axis
per path is set to 5 or greater.)
0366 IMPROPER G-CODE IN TURRET When the turret change tools method was selected (parameter
METHOD No. 5040#3 (TCT) = 0), G43, G43.1, G43.4, G43.5, or G43.7
was commanded.
0367 3-D CONV. WAS COMMANDED IN A three-dimensional coordinate conversion was commanded
SYNC MODE AS THE PARAMETER during synchronization control when the parameter PKUx
PKUx(NO.8162#2) IS 0. (No.8162#2) was 0.
0368 OFFSET REMAIN AT OFFSET When the ATC change tools method was selected (parameter
COMMAND No. 5040#3 (TCT) = 1) during G43, G43.1, G43.4, or G43.5
mode, G43.7 was commanded. Or, G43, G43.1, G43.4, or
G43.5 was commanded during G43.7 mode.
0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the
torque limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).
- The specified torque Q value in the torque limit switch
instruction is out of range. The torque Q range is 1 to 254.
- The high-speed continuous skip option is not present.
- 812 -

0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The
address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The
address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
3) P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
4) <T series > The specified value of address P of G72 or G74
falls outside the range. Address P ranges from 1 to 4 in the
multistage skip function. P1-4 was specified in G72 or G74
even though the multistage skip function option is not
present.
0371 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 In a command format for a programmable parameter input, an
attempt was made to change the parameter for an encryption
(No. 3220), key (No. 3221), or protection range (No.3222 or
No.3223) as a "the encryption function for the key and program."
Modify the program.
0372 REFERENCE RETURN An attempt was made to perform an automatic return to the
INCOMPLETE reference position on the orthogonal axis before the completion
of a return to the reference position on the angular axis.
However, this attempt failed because a manual return to the
reference position during angular axis control or an automatic
return to the reference position after power-up was not
commanded. First, return to the reference position on the
angular axis, then return to the reference position on the
orthogonal axis.
0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell
commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed
signal is selected in different paths.
0374 ILLEGAL REGISTRATION OF TOOL G10L75 or G10L76 data was registered during the following
MANAGER(G10) data registration:
- From the PMC window.
- From the FOCAS2.
- By G10L75 or G10L76 in another system.
Command G10L75 or G10L76 again after the above operation
is completed.
0375 CAN NOT ANGULAR Angular axis control is disabled for this axis configuration.
CONTROL(SYNC:MIX:OVL) 1) When some related axes under angular axis control are not
in synchronous control mode or when one angular axis is not
paired with the other angular axis or one Cartesian axis is
not paired with the other Cartesian axis in synchronous
control
2) When some related axes under composite control are not in
composite control mode or when one angular axis is not
paired with the other angular axis or one Cartesian axis is
not paired with the other Cartesian axis in composite control
3) When related axes under angular axis control is switched to
superposition control mode1)
0376 SERIAL DCL: ILLEGAL PARAMETER 1. When Parameter No.1815#1 is set to “1”, parameter
No.2002#3 is set to “0”
2. The absolute-position detection function is enabled.
(Parameter No.1815#5 is set to “1”. )
0387 ILLEGAL RTM DI/DO VAR There is no DI/DO variable that has a specified signal address
(alphabet, number).
- 813 -

0389 ILLEGAL RTM SIGNAL BIT Bits other than bits 0 to 7 cannot be specified with a DI/DO
signal.
0391 RTM BRANCH OVER The number of branches supported with real time custom
macros was exceeded.
0392 TOO MANY SENTENCE CONTROL Many reserved words (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, ZDO, ZEND,
G65, M99) for RTM control were used in a real time macro
command.
0393 NO SENTENCE CONTROL In a real time macro command, there is no data to be assigned.
0394 ILLEGAL SENTENCE CONTROL The matching of reserved words (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE,
ZDO, ZEND, G65, M99) for RTM control is incorrect.
0395 ILLEGAL NC WORD CONTROL Control code G65 or M99 for calling a subprogram or returning
from a subprogram is not coded correctly.
0396 ILLEGAL RTM SENTENCE In other than a real time macro command, a reserved word
CONTROL (ZONCE, ZEDGE, ZWHILE, ZDO, or ZEND) for RTM control is
used.
0397 RTM BUFFER OVER There is no buffer available for real time macro commands.
Too many blocks read in advance are buffered as triggers used
by real time macro commands.
0398 'ID OVER IN BUFFER In blocks read in advance, there are too many real time macro
commands with the same ID.
0399 'ID EXECUTION IN SAME TIME An attempt was made to execute real time macro commands
with the same ID by using the same NC statement as a trigger.
0400 ONESHOT CMDOVER Too many one-shot real time macro commands are specified.
0401 EXEC CMD NUM OVER IN SAME The number of real time macro commands that can be executed
TIME simultaneously was exceeded
0402 ILLEGAL TOKEN FOR RTM A token, variable, or function that is not supported by the real
time custom macro function was detected.
0403 ACCESS TO RTM PROTECT VAR An attempt was made to access a protected variable.
0404 RTM ERROR An error related to a real time macro command occurred.
0406 CODE AREA SHORTAGE The storage size of the real time macro area is insufficient.
0407 DOULE SLASH IN RTM MODE In the compile mode, an attempt was made to set the compile
mode again.
0408 G90 IS NOT PERMITTED The absolute command cannot be specified.
0409 ILLEGAL AXIS NO An invalid axis number is specified.
0410 MIDDLE POINT IS NOT ZERO An intermediate point other than 0 is specified with G28.
0411 SIMULTANEOUSLY AXES OVER The maximum number of axes that can be controlled
simultaneously was exceeded.
0412 ILLEGAL G CODE An unusable G code was used.
0413 ILLEGAL ADDRESS An unusable address was used.
0414 ILLEGAL PMC AXIS NO. An invalid PMC axis number is specified.
0415 GROUP IS IN USE The group to which the specified axis belongs is already in
used.
0416 UNABLE TO USE THE AXIS The specified axis cannot be used.
0417 AXIS IS UNABLE TO MOVE The specified axis is placed in the inoperative state.
0418 ILLEGAL FEED SETTING An incorrect feedrate is set.
0419 ILLEGAL DISTANCE SETTING A travel distance beyond the specifiable range is specified.
0420 CONSTANT NUMBER P A subprogram is specified not by using a constant.
0421 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT G54 With G65, an invalid argument, L, is used.
0422 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT G54 With G65, an invalid argument is used.
0423 NO PMC AXIS CONTROL OPTION The option for PMC axis control is missing.
0424 MULTIPLE AXES IN ONE GROUP Multiple axes are using one group.
0425 ONE AXIS USE MULTIPLE GROU One axis is using multiple groups.
- 814 -

0429 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G10.6 When retract was started in a threading block, a retract
command had been issued for the long axis direction of
threading.
0430 TOOL LIFE PAIRS ZERO Tool life management group number parameter No.6813 is 0.
0431 ILLEGAL T/R DATA OF TOOL LIFE The arbitrary group number (T) or remaining amount setting (R)
is invalid.
0432 UNAVAILABLE POSTURE IN TPC A command specifying an impossible tool posture was issued in
tool posture control. Review the machine configuration and
command.
0436 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN WSC An incorrect parameter was specified in compensation of
workpiece placement error.
- The basic three axes are not specified in parameter No.1022.
0437 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN WSC An invalid command related to compensation of workpiece
placement error was specified.
- An illegal G code was specified in the workpiece placement
error compensation mode.
- There is an error in the modal setting used when the
compensation of workpiece placement error is started.
- G54.4 was not specified solely.
- There is not the P command in the block including the G54.4
command. Alternatively, the value following P is out of the
range.
- Compensation of workpiece placement error was specified
redundantly.
0438 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN TOOL When compensation of workpiece placement error is performed
DIRC CMP in a 5-axis cutting machine (compensation in the tool direction
(bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 is 0)), an illegal parameter
is set.
- Acc./Dec. before interpolation is disabled. Set parameter No.
1660.
- Acc./Dec. before rapid traverse interpolation is disabled. Set
bit 1 of parameter No. 1401, bit 5 of parameter No. 1950, and
parameter No. 1671.
- The parameters (No.19680 to No.19714) for configuring the
machine are incorrect.
- The axis set by parameters No. 19681 and No. 19686 is not a
rotation axis.
- The basic three axes are not set in parameter No. 1022.
- Bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 is set to 0 when tool length
compensation is performed during compensation of workpiece
placement error. Set this parameter to 1.
0439 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN TOOL DIRC When compensation of workpiece placement error was
CMP performed in a 5-axis cutting machine (compensation in the tool
direction (bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 is 0)), an illegal
command was issued.
- An unspecifiable G code was specified.
- There is an error in the modal setting used during startup.
- An axis not related to 5-axis machining was specified.
- The absolute coordinates of a rotation axis could not be
obtained in the startup block of compensation of workpiece
placement error or tool center point control.
0445 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION The positioning command was issued in the speed control
mode. Check the SV speed control mode in-progress signal.
- 815 -

0446 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G96.1, G96.2, G96.3, and G96.4 are specified in the block that
G96.1/G96.2/G96.3/G96.4 includes other commands. Modify the program.
0447 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA The live tool axis is incorrectly set. Check the parameter for
spindle control with servo motor.
0455 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRINDING In grinding canned cycles:
1) <M series> The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not
match.
2) <M series/T series > The amount of travel of the grinding
axis is not specified.
0456 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN GRINDING Parameters related to grinding canned cycles are incorrectly set.
Probable causes are given below.
1) <M series/T series> The axis number of the grinding axis is
incorrectly set (parameters No. 5176 to No. 5179).
2) <M series> The axis number of the dressing axis is
incorrectly set (parameters No. 5180 to No. 5183).
3) <M series/T series> The axis numbers of the cut axis,
grinding axis, and dressing axis (only for the M series)
overlap.
0460 ILLEGAL TORCH AXIS NUMBER The axis number set in parameter No. 5490 (torch control axis)
exceeds the number of control axes.
0461 ILLEGAL SETTING OF ROTATE AXIS The parameter setting (bit 0 of parameter No. 1006 = 1) of the
FOR TORCH rotation axis is not applied to the torch turning axis.
1014 ILLEGAL FORMAT OF PROGRAM Address O or N is not followed by a number.
NO.
1016 EOB NOT FOUND EOB (End of Block) code is missing at the end of a program
input in the MDI mode.
1018 M99 IN MAIN PROGRAM A M99 was commanded during main program when the
parameter AMM (No. 7712#4) = 1 was set.
1059 COMMAND IN BUFFERING MODE The manual intervention compensation request signal MIGET
became “1” when a advanced block was found during automatic
operation.
To input the manual intervention compensation during automatic
operation, a sequence for manipulating the manual intervention
compensation request signal MIGET is required in an M code
instruction without buffering.
1077 PROGRAM IN USE An attempt was made in the foreground to execute a program
being edited in the background.
The currently edited program cannot be executed, so end
editing and restart program execution.
1079 PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND The program of the specified file No. is not registered in an
external device. (external device subprogram call)
1080 DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB Another external device subprogram call was made from a
PROGRAM CALL subprogram after the subprogram called by the external device
subprogram call.
1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL The external device subprogram call is not possible in this
MODE ERROR mode.
1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in the
same block.
1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the same
block.
1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.
- 816 -

1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in the
type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom
macros.
1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified. [#_OFSxx] does not
match the tool offset memory option configuration.
1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro
interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.
1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the left
side of an expression.
1120 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT FORMAT The specified argument in the argument function (ATAN, POW)
is in error.
1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
1125 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The description of the expression in a custom macro statement
contains an error.
A parameter program format error.
The screen displayed to enter periodic maintenance data or item
selection menu (machine) data does not match the data type.
1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1 to
99999999).
1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets (]) in a custom macro statement.
1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([) in a custom macro statement.
1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement.
1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a character
NAME that cannot be used in a variable name.
1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters.
1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT
FORMAT ERROR statement is in error.
- 817 -

1144 G10 FORMAT ERROR The G10 L No. contains no relevant data input or corresponding
option.
Data setting address P or R is not specified.
An address not relating to the data setting is specified. Which
address to specify varies according to the L No.
The sign, decimal point or range of the specified address are in
error.
1145 G10.1 TIME OUT The response to a G10.1 instruction was not received from the
PMC within the specified time limit.
1146 G10.1 FORMAT ERROR The G10.1 instruction format is in error.
1152 G31.9/G31.8 FORMAT ERROR The format of the G31.9 or G31.8 block is erroneous in the
following cases:
- The axis was not specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
- Multiple axes were specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
- The P code was specified in the G31.9 or G31.8 block.
1153 CANNOT USE G31.9 G31.9 cannot be specified in this modal state. This alarm is also
generated when G31.9 is specified when a group 07 G code
(e.g. tool radius compensation) is not canceled.
1160 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the position data within the CNC.
This alarm is also generated if the target position of a command
exceeds the maximum stroke as a result of calculation such as
coordinate conversion, offset, or introduction of a manual
intervention amount.
1180 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN PARKING All of the axis specified for automatic operation are parked.
1196 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED An illegal axis was specified for drilling in a canned cycle for
drilling.
If the zero point of the drilling axis is not specified or parallel
axes are specified in a block containing a G code in a canned
cycle, simultaneously specify the parallel axes for the drilling
axis.
1200 PULSCODER INVALID ZERO The grid position could not be calculated during grid reference
RETURN position return using the grid system as the one–revolution
signal was not received before leaving the deceleration dog.
This alarm is also generated when the tool does not reach a
feedrate that exceeds the servo error amount preset to
parameter No. 1841 before the deceleration limit switch is left
(deceleration signal *DEC returns to “1”).
1202 NO F COMMAND AT G93 F codes in the inverse time specification mode (G93) are not
handled as modal, and must be specified in individual blocks.
1223 ILLEGAL SPINDLE SELECT 1) An attempt was made to execute an instruction that uses the
spindle although the spindle to be controlled has not been
set correctly.
2) Interpolation type rigid tapping was specified in a path in
which the Cs contour control function is not enabled.
1282 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 3-D OFFSET An illegal G code was specified in the 3-dimensional tool
compensation mode.
1283 ILLEGAL IJK IN 3-D OFFSET When bit 0 (ONI) of parameter No. 6029 is set to 1, I, J, and K
commands are specified without the decimal point in
3-dimensional tool compensation mode.
1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
- 818 -

1300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The axis No. address was specified even though the parameter
is not an axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
Axis No. cannot be specified in pitch error compensation data.
1301 MISSING ADDRESS The axis No. was not specified even though the parameter is an
axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error compensation
data from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
Or, data No. address N, or setting data address P or R are not
specified.
1302 ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER A non–existent data No. was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
An invalid address R value is specified in a pattern program for
each machining purpose on the high–speed high–precision
setting screen.
This alarm is also generated when illegal word values are found.
1303 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER An axis No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled axes was found while loading parameters from a tape
or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1304 TOO MANY DIGIT Data with too many digits was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape.
1305 DATA OUT OF RANGE Out–of–range data was found while loading parameters or pitch
error compensation data from a tape.
The values of the data setting addresses corresponding to L
Nos. during data input by G10 was out of range.
This alarm is also generated when NC programming words
contain out–of–range values.
1306 MISSING AXIS NUMBER A parameter which requires an axis to be specified was found
without an axis No. (address A) while loading parameters from a
tape.
1307 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN Data with an illegal sign was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape, or by entry of the
G10 parameter. A sign was specified to an address that does
not support the use of signs.
1308 MISSING DATA An address not followed by a numeric value was found while
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a
tape.
1329 ILLEGAL MACHINE GROUP An machine group No. address exceeding the maximum
NUMBER number of controlled machine groups was found while loading
parameters from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1330 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER An spindle No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled spindles was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1331 ILLEGAL PATH NUMBER An path No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled path was found while loading parameters from a tape
or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1332 DATA WRITE LOCK ERROR Could not load data while loading parameters, pitch error
compensation data and work coordinate data from tape.
1333 DATA WRITE ERROR Could not write data while loading data from tape.
1360 PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE Illegal parameter setting. (Set value is out of range.)
(TLAC)
1361 PARAMTER SETTING ERROR 1 Illegal parameter setting. (axis of rotation setting)
(TLAC)
- 819 -

1362 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR 2 Illegal parameter setting (tool axis setting)
(TLAC)
1370 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR Out–of–range data was set during setting of the
(DM3H-1) three–dimensional handle feed parameter.
1371 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An illegal axis of rotation was set during setting of the
1372 PARAMETAR SETTING ERROR An illegal master axis was set during setting of the
1373 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An illegal parallel axis or twin table was set during setting of the
1470 G40.1 –G42.1 PARAMETER MISS A parameter setting related to normal direction control is illegal.
The axis number of a normal direction controlled axis is set in
parameter No. 5480, but that axis number is in the range of the
number of controlled axes.
The axis set as a normal direction controlled axis is not set as a
rotation axis (ROTx, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006) = 1 and
No.1022=0).
Set the feedrate at which to insert rotation about a normal
direction controlled axis in parameter No. 5481, in the range of 1
to 15000 mm/min.
1508 DUPLICATE M-CODE (INDEX TABLE A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
REVERSING) (index table indexing)
1509 DUPLICATE M-CODE A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
(SPOS AXIS ORIENTATION) (spindle positioning, orientation)
1510 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
POSITIONING) (spindle positioning, positioning)
1511 DUPLICATE M-CODE (SPOS AXIS A function to which the same code as this M code is set exists.
RELEASE) (spindle positioning, mode cancel)
1531 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT When the feedrate instruction contains valid data below the
(F-CODE) decimal point, the alarm is set and the F code contains valid
data below the decimal point.
1532 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT When the feedrate instruction contains valid data below the
(E-CODE) decimal point, the alarm is set and the E code contains valid
data below the decimal point.
1533 ADDRESS F UNDERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the F and
S codes is too slow in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
1534 ADDRESS F OVERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the F and
S codes is too fast in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
1535 ADDRESS E UNDERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the E and
S codes is too slow in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
1536 ADDRESS E OVERFLOW (G95) The feedrate for the hole drilling axis calculated from the E and
S codes is too fast in the feed per single rotation mode (G95).
1537 ADDRESS F UNDERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the F instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too slow.
1538 ADDRESS F OVERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the F instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too fast.
1539 ADDRESS E UNDERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the E instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too slow.
1540 ADDRESS E OVERFLOW The speed obtained by applying override to the E instruction is
(OVERRIDE) too fast.
1541 S-CODE ZERO “0” has been instructed as the S code.
1542 FEED ZERO (E-CODE) “0” has been instructed as the feedrate (E code).
1543 ILLEGAL GEAR SETTING The gear ratio between the spindle and position coder, or the
set position coder number of pulses is illegal in the spindle
positioning function.
- 820 -

1544 S-CODE OVER MAX The S command exceeds the maximum spindle rotation
number.
1548 ILLGAL AXIS MODE The spindle positioning axis/Cs contour control axis was
specified during switching of the controlled axis mode.
1561 ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of the
minimum indexing angle.
1564 INDEX TABLE AXIS – OTHER AXIS The index table indexing axis and another axis have been
SAME TIME specified in the same block.
1567 INDEX TABLE AXIS DUPLICATE Index table indexing was specified during axis movement or on
AXIS COMMAND an axis for which the index table indexing sequence was not
completed.
1580 ENCODE ALARM (PSWD&KEY) When an attempt was made to read a program, the specified
password did not match the password on the tape and the
password on tape was not equal to 0.
When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the
password was not in the range 0 to 99999999.
The password parameter is No. 2210.
1581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) When an attempt was made to punch an encrypted tape, the
punch code parameter was set to EIA. Set parameter ISO (No.
0000#1) to “0”. An incorrect instruction was specified for
program encryption or protection.
This alarm is generated if an attempt is made to perform
program editing, deletion, or range-specified punch-out in the
protected range in the lock state. Or, a program outside the
protected range is specified in rage specification punch-out in
the unlock state.
The protected range is defined from the program No. preset by
parameter No. 3222 up to the program No. preset to parameter
No. 3223. When both parameters are set to “0”, the protected
range becomes O9000 to O9999.
1590 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics
screen.
1591 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No.
0000#0 to “0”.
1592 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end of
the NC program is read.
For the program restart function, this alarm is generated if a
specified block is not found.
1593 EGB PARAMETER SETTING ERROR Error in setting a parameter related to the EGB
(1) The setting of SYN, bit 0 of parameter No. 2011, is not
correct.
(2) The slave axis specified with G81 is not set as a rotation
axis. (ROT, bit 0 of parameter No. 1006)
(3) Number of pulses per rotation (Parameter (No. 7772 or No.
7773) or (No. 7782 or 7783) is not set.)
(4) For a hobbing-machine-compatible command, parameter No.
7710 is not specified.
- 821 -

1594 EGB FORMAT ERROR Error in the format of the block of an EGB command
(1) T (number of teeth) is not specified in the G81 block.
(2) In the G81 block, the data specified for one of T, L, P, and Q
is out of its valid range.
(3) n the G81 block, only one of P and Q is specified.
(4) In the G81.5 block, there is no command for the master or
slave axis.
(5) In the G81.5 block, data out of the specified range is
specified for the master or slave axis.
1595 ILL-COMMAND IN EGB MODE During synchronization with the EGB, a command that must not
be issued is issued.
(1) Slave axis command using G27, G28, G29, G30,G30.1,
G33, G53, etc.
(2) Inch/metric conversion command using G20, G21, etc.
1596 EGB OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the calculation of the synchronization
coefficient.
1597 EGB AUTO PHASE FORMAT ERROR Format error in the G80 or G81 block in EGB automatic phase
synchronization
(1) R is outside the permissible range.
1598 EGB AUTO PHASE PARAMETER Error in the setting of a parameter related to EGB automatic
SETTING ERROR phase synchronization
(1) The acceleration/deceleration parameter is not correct.
(2) The automatic phase synchronization parameter is not
correct.
1618 ILLEGAL P-DATA(WHEEL WEAR There is an error in P-data in compensation selection of grinding
COMPENSATION) wheel wear compensation. Alternatively, the P command is not
present.
1619 ILLEGAL AXIS(WHEEL WEAR The compensation axis was switched in the grinding wheel wear
COMPENSATION) compensation mode or compensation vector hold mode.
Alternatively, parameters No. 5071 and No. 5072, which
determine the axis to be subjected to grinding wheel wear
compensation, are incorrectly set.
1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND [I/O Device]
An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
[G30 Zero Return]
The P address Nos. for instructing No. 2 to No. 4 zero return
are each out of the range 2 to 4.
[Single Rotation Dwell]
The specified spindle rotation is “0” when single rotation dwell
is specified.
[3-dimensional tool compensation]
A G code that cannot be specified was specified in the
3-dimensional tool compensation mode.
Scaling instruction G51, skip cutting G31 and automatic tool
length measurement G37 were specified.
1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even
though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
- 822 -

1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
1809 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41/G42 Specified direction tool length compensation parameters are
incorrect.
A move instruction for a axis of rotation was specified in the
specified direction tool length compensation mode.
1820 ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE 1. An each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was turned “1” in the state in which all axes on the path
including the axis on which to perform preset with the each
axis workpiece coordinate system were not stopped or in
which a command was in execution.
2. When an M code for performing preset with an each axis
workpiece coordinate system preset signal was specified,
the each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was not turned “1”.
3. The auxiliary function lock is enabled.
4. When bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001 was set to 0 (M, S,
T, and B codes are not output in the high speed program
check mode), an M code for turning “1” an each axis
workpiece coordinate system preset signal in the high speed
program check mode was specified.
1823 FRAMING ERROR(1) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 1 was not detected.
1830 DR OFF(2) The data set ready input signal DR of the I/O device connected
to reader/punch interface 2 turned OFF.
1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device connected
to reader/punch interface 2 before it could read a previously
received character.
1833 FRAMING ERROR(2) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 was not detected.
1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data from the I/O
device connected to reader/punch interface 2 even though the
NC sent a stop code (DC3) during data reception.
1889 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G54.3 An illegal command was issued in G54.3 block.
(1) An attempt was made to command G54.3 in a mode in which
it cannot be accepted.
(2) The command was not issued in a single block.
1898 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G54.2 An illegal parameter (Nos. 6068 to 6076) was specified for
fixture offset.
1912 V-DEVICE DRIVER ERROR (OPEN) An error occurred during device driver control.
1960 ACCESS ERROR (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card accessing
This alarm is also generated during reading when reading is
executed up to the end of the file without detection of the EOR
code.
1961 NOT READY (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is not ready.
1962 CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD) The memory card has run out of space.
1963 CARD PROTECTED (MEMORY The memory card is write–protected.
CARD)
1964 NOT MOUNTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card could not be mounted.
1965 DIRECTORY FULL (MEMORY CARD) The file could not be generated in the root directory for the
memory card.
1966 FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY CARD) The specified file could not be found on the memory card.
1967 FILE PROTECTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is write–protected.
- 823 -

1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY Illegal memory card file name
CARD)
1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY CARD) Check the file name.
1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled.
1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase.
1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low.
1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory card.
1990 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND The axis specified by the smooth interpolation (G5.1Q2) is
illegal.
1993 SPL:CAN'T MAKE VECTOR The end point and the 2 previous point are the same in
generation of the 3-dimensional tool compensation vector by the
end point for smooth interpolation.
1995 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The parameter settings (parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089) for
G41.2/G42.2 determining the relationship between the axis of rotation and the
rotation plane are incorrect.
1999 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G41.3 The parameter settings (parameter Nos. 6080 to 6089) for
determining the relationship between the axis of rotation and the
rotation plane are incorrect.
2002 NO KNOT COMMAND (NURBS) Knot has not been specified, or a block not related to NURBS
interpolation was specified in the NURBS interpolation mode.
2003 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND (NURBS) An axis not specified as a control point was specified in the No.
1 block.
2004 ILLEGAL KNOT There is an insufficient number of knot individual blocks.
2005 ILLEGAL CANCEL (NURBS) The NURBS interpolation mode was turned OFF even though
NURBS interpolation was not completed.
2006 ILLEGAL MODE (NURBS) A mode that cannot be paired with the NURBS interpolation
mode was specified.
2007 ILLEGAL MULTI-KNOT Nested knots for each level can be specified for the start and
end points.
2032 EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA An error was returned in the built-in Ethernet/data server
SERVER ERROR function.
For details, see the error message screen of the built-in
Ethernet or data server.
2051 #200-#499ILLEGAL P-CODE MACRO An attempt was made to enter a custom macro common
COMMON INPUT(NO OPTION) variable not existing in the system.
2052 #500-#549P-CODE MACRO The variable name cannot be entered.
COMMON SELECT(CANNOT USE The SETVN command cannot be used with the P-CODE macro
SETVN) common variables #500 to #549.
2053 THE NUMBER OF #30000 IS An attempt was made to enter a P-CODE-only variable not
UNMATCH existing in the system.
2054 THE NUMBER OF #40000 IS An attempt was made to enter an extended P-CODE-only
UNMATCH variable not existing in the system.
2060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The parameter for the pivot tool length compensation is
G43.4/G43.5 incorrect.
- 824 -

2061 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control.
- A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point
control (type 2) mode.
- With a table rotary type or mixed-type machine, a I, J, or K
command was specified in the tool center point control (type 2)
command (G43.5) block.
- A command that does not move the tool center point (only a
rotation axis is moved) was specified for the workpiece in the
G02 mode.
- G43.4 or G43.5 was specified in the tool center point control
mode.
- When the workpiece coordinate system is set as the
programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.
19696 is 1), G02 or G03 was specified while the rotation axis
was not perpendicular to the plane.
4010 ILLEGAL REAL VALUE OF OBUF : The real value for a output buffer is in error.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words in a block exceeds the maximum. The
maximum is 26 words. However, this figure varies according to
NC options. Divide the instruction word into two blocks.
5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that
exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation amounts.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The dry run feedrate parameter No. 1410 or maximum cutting
feedrate parameter No. 1422 for each axis has been set to 0.
5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the
end of the NC program is read.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate parameter No. 1430 has been
set to 0.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND A transfer could not be made because of no trace data.
5015 NO ROTATION AXIS No rotation axis was found in a handle feed in the tool axis
direction or in the tool axis right angle direction.
5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a
CODES block. Alternatively, an M code which must be specified without
other M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M
codes.
5018 POLYGON SPINDLE SPEED ERROR In G51.2 mode, the speed of the spindle or polygon
synchronous axis either exceeds the clamp value or is too small.
The specified rotation speed ratio thus cannot be maintained.
For polygon turning between spindles:
More information as to why this alarm occurred is indicated in
DGN No. 471.
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART ERROR An invalid value is set in parameter No. 7310, which specifies
the axis order in which the tool is moved along axes to the
machining restart position in dry run. A value ranging from 1 to
the number of controlled axes may be set in this parameter.
5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Three-dimensional coordinate conversion has been specified
three or more times.
To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation,
then specify the coordinate conversion.
- 825 -

5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR Errors for three-dimensional coordinate conversion command
are:
(1) No I, J, or K command was issued in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion command block. (without coordinate
rotation option)
(2) All of I, J, or K command were 0 in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion command block.
(3) No rotation angle R was not commanded in
three-dimensional coordinate conversion command block.
5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP) The setting of a parameter related to straightness compensation
contains an error.
Possible causes include:
- A non-existent axis number is set in a moving or compensation
axis parameter.
- More than 128 pitch error compensation points are set
between the furthest points in the negative and position
regions.
- The straightness compensation point numbers do not have
correct magnitude relationships.
- No straightness compensation point is found between the
furthest pitch error compensation point in the negative region
and that in the positive region.
- The compensation per compensation point is either too large
or too small.
5050 ILL-COMMAND IN G81.1 MODE During chopping, a move command has been issued for the
chopping axis.
5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for switching the major axis has been specified for
circular threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the
length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for circular
threading.
5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN The axis parameter setting to perform an exponential
G02.3/G03.3 interpolation is in error.
Parameter No. 5641:
A liner axis number for performing an exponential interpolation
Parameter No. 5642:
A rotation axis number for performing an exponential
interpolation
The settable value is 1 to the number of control axes, but it must
not be duplicated.
5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3 The exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3) has a
format error.
The command range for address I or J is -89.0 to -1.0 or +1.0 to
+89.0. No I or J is specified or out-of -range value is specified.
No address R, or 0 is specified.
5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.3/G03.3 The value specified in an exponential interpolation command
(G02.3/03.3) is illegal. A value that does not allow exponential
interpolation is specified. (For example, the value for In is 0 or
negative.)
5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting
of axes having different increment systems.
5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC AXIS) Axes having different increment systems have been specified in
the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting
of parameter No. 8010.
- 826 -

5066 RESTART ILLEGAL SEQUENCE A sequence number from 7000 to 7999 was read during the
NUMBER search for the next number in a restart program for the back or
restart function.
5068 FORMAT ERROR IN G31P90 No travel axis was specified. Two or more travel axes were
specified.
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a
decimal point.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a
single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same
group have been specified in a single block.
5085 SMOOTH IPL ERROR 1 A block for specifying smooth interpolation contains a syntax
error.
5110 IMPROPER G-CODE (AICC MODE) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the AI contour control
mode.
5115 ILLEGAL ORDER (NURBS) There is an error in the specification of the rank.
5116 ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE (NURBS) Monotone increasing of knots is not observed.
5117 ILLEGAL 1ST CONTROL POINT The first control point is incorrect.
(NURBS) Or, it does not provide a continuity from the previous block.
5118 ILLEGAL RESTART (NURBS) After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on,
NURBS interpolation was restarted.
5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation command has an
error. Specifically, this error is caused by one of the following:
1) L = 0 is specified.
2) Q = 0 is specified.
3) R/, R/, C is specified.
4) Zero is specified as height increment.
5) Zero is specified as height difference.
6) Three or more axes are specified as the height axes.
7) A height increment is specified when there are two height
axes.
8) Q is specified when radius difference = 0.
9) Q < 0 is specified when radius difference > 0.
10) Q > 0 is specified when radius difference < 0.
11) A height increment is specified when no height axis is
specified.
5123 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The difference between a specified end point and the calculated
IN SPIRAL end point exceeds the allowable range (parameter 3471).
5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in
any of the following modes:
1) Scaling
2) Polar coordinate interpolation
3) In tool radius⋅tool nose radius compensation mode, the
center is set as the end point.
5130 NC AND SUPERIMPOSE AXIS In the PMC superposition axis control, the NC command and
CONFLICT The PMC axis control command were conflicted. Modify the
program and the ladder.
5131 NC COMMAND IS NOT COMPATIBLE The PMC axis control and three-dimensional coordinate
conversion or a polar coordinate interpolation were specified
simultaneously.
5132 CANNOT CHANGE SUPERIMPOSED The superposition axis was selected for the axis for which the
AXIS PMC superposition axis is being controlled.
- 827 -

5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE JUDGED Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement
value direct input B function.
[For 1-contact input]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Y-axis).
[For the movement direction discrimination specification]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis).
3. The direction indicated by the tool compensation write
signal does not match the movement direction of the axis.
5196 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION During HPCC or during the execution of a 5-axis-related
function, an unavailable function was used.
5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the reference point
MODE auto setting parameter (No.1819#2) is set to "1". Move the
machine to reference position by manual operation and execute
manual reference return.
5242 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER A master axis number or a slave axis number was not set
correctly when the flexible synchronization control mode was
turned from off to on during automatic operation.
5243 DATA OUTRANGE A gear ratio was not set correctly when the flexible
synchronization control mode was turned from off to on during
automatic operation.
5244 TOO MANY DI ON - During automatic operation, the mode signal was not turned on
or off if the flexible synchronization control mode was turned
from off to on or or from on to off, after an M code was
executed.
- An attempt was made to turn on or off the flexible
synchronization control mode when the axis was not stopped.
- 828 -

5245 OTHERAXIS ARE COMMANDED - For a flexible synchronization control group for which a PMC
axis was a master axis, an attempt was made to turn on the
synchronous mode during time other than automatic operation.
- An attempt was made to turn on a synchronization group for
which an PMC axis was a master axis when there existed a
flexible synchronization control group for which a non-PMC,
normal axis was a master axis.
- The master and slave axes as synchronous axes overlap the
EGB axis.
chopping axis.
axis related to angular axis control.
axis related to composite control.
axis related to superposition control.
- The slave axis as a synchronous axis overlaps the axis related
to synchronization control.
- The reference position return mode is turned on (was turned
on).
5255 G12.4/G13.4 FORMAT ERROR The specified P, I, and K are incorrect or I is less than K.
5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation was specified in MDI
MODE mode. (Depending on the setting of the parameter MCR (No.
5008#4))
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch panel
cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. Correct the
cause then turn on the power again.
5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER In a spindle select function by address P for a multiple spindle
control,
1) Address P is not specified.
2) Parameter No.3781 is not specified to the spindle to be
selected.
3) An illegal G code which cannot be commanded with an
S_P_; command is specified.
4) A multi spindle cannot be used because the parameter EMS
(No. 3702#1) is 1.
5) The spindle amplifier number of each spindle is not set in
parameter No. 3717.
6) A prohibited command for a spindle was issued (parameter
No. 11090).
7) An invalid value is set in parameter No. 11090.
5312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G10 One of formats in G10L75, G10L76, or G10L77 to G11
L75/76/77 commands is in error, or the command value is out of data
range. Modify the program.
5316 TOOL TYPE NUMBER NOT FOUND A tool with the specified tool-type number could not be found.
Modify the program or register the tool.
5317 ALL TOOL LIFE IS OVER The lives of all tools with the specified tool-type number have
expired.
Replace the tool.
5320 DIA./RAD. MODE CAN’T BE In any of the following states, diameter/radius specification was
SWITCHED . switched:
1) When a buffered program is being executed
2) When a movement is being made on the axis
- 829 -

5329 M98 AND NC COMMAND IN SAME A subprogram call which is not a single block was commanded
BLOCK during canned cycle mode.
5339 ILLEGAL FORMAT COMMAND IS 1. The value of P, Q, or L specified by
EXECUTED IN SYNC/MIX/OVL G51.4/G50.4/G51.5/G50.5/G51.6/G50.6 is invalid.
CONTROL. 2. A duplicate value is specified by parameter No. 12600.
5346 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT The coordinate establishment of the Cs contour control axis is
not made.
Perform a manual reference position return.
1. When Cs coordinate establishment is made for the Cs-axis
for which the Cs-axis reference position status signal
CSPENx is 0
2. When positional information is not sent from the spindle
amplifier
3. When the servo off state is entered during the start of
Cs-axis coordinate establishment
4. When the Cs-axis is subjected to synchronous control or
superposition control
5. When the emergency stop state is entered during coordinate
establishment
6. When an attempt is made to release composite control for
the Cs axis being subjected to coordinate establishment
7. When an attempt is made to start synchronous, composite,
or superposition control for the Cs axis being subjected to
coordinate establishment.
5360 TOOL INTERFERENCE CHECK This alarm is issued when interference with another tool is
ERROR caused by a data modification based on G10 data input or file
reading or when an attempt is made to modify the tool figure
data of a tool registered in the cartridge.
5361 ILLEGAL MAGAZINE DATA Tools stored in the cartridge are interfering with each other.
Reregister the tools in the cartridge, or modify the tool
management data or tool figure data. If this alarm is issued, no
tool interference check is made when tools are registered in the
cartridge management table. Moreover, empty pot search
operation does not operate normally. If this alarm is issued, the
power must be turned off before operation is continued.
5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other
than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion
after returning to the reference position.
- 830 -

5364 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN PROGRAM (1) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the high speed
CHECK program check mode.
(2) The angular axis control option or customer's board option is
enabled.
(3) One of the following operations was performed.
- Chopping in the high speed program check mode
- Starting the high speed program check mode during
chopping
- High speed cycle machining in the high speed program
check mode
- Reference position return of an axis for which the reference
position is not established, in the high speed program
check mode
(4) Switching of PMC axis selection signal EAX*<G0136> was
performed.
(5) G10 was specified for bit 3 (PGR) of parameter No. 3454 in
the high speed program check mode.
(6) G10 was specified for bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001 in
the high speed program check mode.
5365 NOT CHANGE OF PROGRAM (1) Switching of high speed program check input signal
CHECK MODE PGCK<Gn290.5> was performed during execution of the
program.
5381 INVALID COMMAND IN FSC MODE An attempt was made to issue the following commands:
- When the reference position for the master axis under flexible
synchronization control has not been established, G28
command for the master axis.
- G27/G28/G29/G30/G30.1/G53 command for a slave axis.
5391 CAN NOT USE G92 Workpiece coordinate system setting G92 (or G50 for the lathe
system G-code system A) cannot be specified.
(1) After tool length compensation was changed by tool length
compensation shift type, G92 was specified when no
absolute command is present.
(2) G92 was specified in the block in which G49 is present.
5406 G41.3/G40 FORMAT ERROR (1) The G41.3 or G40 block contains a move command.
(2) The G41.3 block contains a G or M code that suppresses
buffering.
5407 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G41.3 (1) In the G41.3 mode, a G code of group 01 other than G00
and G01 is specified.
(2) In the G41.3 mode, an offset command (a G code of group
07) is specified.
(3) The block next to G41.3 (startup) specifies no movement.
5408 G41.3 ILLEGAL START_UP (1) In a mode of group 01 other than G00 and G01, G41.3
(startup) is specified.
(2) The included angle between the tool vector and move vector
is 0 or 180 degrees at the time of startup.
5420 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN A parameter related to tool center point control is illegal.
G43.4/G43.5 - Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. Set
parameter No. 1660.
- Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled. Set bit 1 of parameter No. 1401, bit 5 of parameter
No. 19501, parameter No. 1671, and parameter No. 1672.
- 831 -

5421 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5 An illegal command was specified in tool center point control.
- A rotation axis command was specified in tool center point
control (type 2) mode.
- With a table rotary type or mixed-type machine, a I,J,K
command was specified in the tool center point control (type 2)
command (G43.5) block.
- A command that does not move the tool center point (only a
rotation axis is moved) was specified for the workpiece in the
G02 mode.
- When the workpiece coordinate system is set as the
programming coordinate system (bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No.
19696 is 1), G02 or G03 was specified while the rotation axis
was not perpendicular to the plane.
- A G code not specifiable during the tool center point control
mode was specified.
- The modal code used to specify tool center point control is
incorrect.
- During the tool center point control mode, an axis not related
to tool center point control was specified.
- When bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 is set to 0 to
disable tool direction compensation, tool center point control is
specified during the workpiece setting error
compensation/tilted working plane command mode.
- When tool posture control is enabled under tool center point
control (type 2), a command is specified to set a tool posture
near a singular point. (This alarm may be suppressed with bit
3 (NPC) of parameter No. 19696.) Check the machine
configuration and specification.
- When tool posture control is enabled under tool center point
control (type 1), a rotary axis angular displacement that
disables tool posture control is specified. Check the machine
configuration and specification.
- During tool center point control (type 2) or tool posture control,
NURBS interpolation is specified. Check the specification.
5422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN G43.4/G43.5 An attempt was made to make a movement at an axis feedrate
exceeding the maximum cutting feedrate by tool center point
control.
5424 ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION The rotation axis position for specifying the tool axis direction is
not ±90° × n (n = 0, 1, 2,･･･).
5425 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset number is incorrect.
5430 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN 3-D CIR In a modal state in which three-dimensional circular interpolation
cannot be specified, a three-dimensional circular interpolation
(G02.4/G03.4) is specified. Alternatively, in three-dimensional
circular interpolation mode, a code that cannot be specified is
specified.
5432 G02.4/G03.4 FORMAT ERROR A three-dimensional circular interpolation command
(G02.4/G03.4) is incorrect.
5433 MANUAL INTERVENTION IN In three-dimensional circular interpolation mode (G02.4/G03.4),
G02.4/G03.4 (ABS ON) manual intervention was made when the manual absolute switch
was on.
5435 PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE (TLAC) Illegal parameter setting.
(Set value is out of range.)
Check parameters No. 19655, No. 19656, No. 19657, and No.
1022.
- 832 -

5436 ILLEGAL PARAMETER SETTING OF Illegal parameter setting.
ROTARY AXIS(TLAC) (axis of rotation setting)
5437 ILLEGAL PARAMETER SETTING OF Illegal parameter setting.
MASTER ROTARY AXIS(TLAC) (master axis of rotation setting)
5445 CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN Corner circular interpolation (G39) of tool radius/tool nose radius
G39 compensation is not specified alone but is specified with a move
command.
5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference avoidance vector, the
interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool nose
radius compensation does not work.
5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation operation will lead to danger.
5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an
already created interference avoidance vector.
5456 TOO MANY G68.2 NESTING Tilted working plane command G68.2 was specified more than
once.
To perform another coordinate conversion, perform cancellation,
then specify the coordinate conversion.
5457 G68.2 FORMAT ERROR A G68.2 format error occurred.
5458 ILLEGAL USE OF G53.1 - G53.1 was specified preceding G68.2.
- G53.1 needs to be specified solely.
- There is no angle solution for the rotation axis that controls the
tool direction in the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate
system.
- In the setting by which compensation in the tool direction is not
performed (when bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 is 0),
G53.1 was specified in the workpiece placement error
compensation mode.
5459 MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT - The parameter No. 19665 to No. 19667, No. 19680 to No.
19744 for configuring the machine are incorrect.
- The axis specified with parameter No. 19681 or No. 19686 is
not a rotary axis.
- In parameter No. 1022, the basic three axes are not set.
- A rotary axis end point found by the NC with tool center point
control type 2, 3-dimensional cutter compensation type 2, or
the tilted working plane command is not within the range set by
parameter No. 19741 to No. 19744.
- No rotary axis end point was found with tool center point
control type 2 or 3-dimensional cutter compensation type 2.
Check the machine configuration and specification.
- On a machine whose rotary axis is a virtual axis, tool center
point control type 2 or 3-dimensional cutter compensation type
2 was specified.
- When programming is performed in the workpiece coordinate
system, tool center point control type 2 or 3-dimensional cutter
compensation type 2 is specified.
- 833 -

5460 ILLEGAL USE OF 3-DIMENSIONAL - In the 3-dimensional cutter compensation mode (except the
CUTTER COMPENSATION tool side offset function for a tool rotation type machine), a
move command other than G00/G01 is specified.
- With a table rotation type machine, when bit 1 (PTD) of
parameter No. 19746 is set to 1, a plane selection is made
with an axis other than the basic three axes at the start of
3-dimensional cutter compensation.
- When bit 1 (SPG) of parameter No. 19607 is set to 1, there is
a discrepancy between the machine type set in parameter No.
19680 and a G code specifying 3-dimensional cutter
compensation (G41.2, G42.2, G41.4, G42.4, G41.5, or G42.5).
- With a machine that is not of the tool rotation type, G41.3 is
specified.
- When bit 5 (WKP) of parameter No. 19696 is set to 0, and bit 4
(TBP) of parameter No. 19746 is set to 0, 3-dimensional cutter
compensation and tool center point control are used at the
same time.
- A rotation axis command is specified in the 3-dimensional
cutter compensation mode (type 2).
- With a table rotation type or mixed type machine, IJK is
specified in a block that specifies 3-dimensional cutter
compensation (type 2) (G41.6/G42.6).
- An illegal G code is specified in the 3-dimensional cutter
compensation mode.
- When 3-dimensional cutter compensation is specified, the
modal state is illegal.
- When the table coordinate system is set as the programming
coordinate system, table rotate and 3-dimensional cutter
compensation are specified after the start of tool center point
control.
- There is a difference in type1/type 2 specification between
3-dimensional cutter compensation and tool center point
control.
- When 3-dimensional cutter compensation and tool center point
control are used at the same time, one of these functions that
is specified earlier than the other is canceled earlier.
5461 ILLEGAL USE OF A move command other than G00 or G01 was performed during
G41.2/G42.2/G41.5/G42.5 3-dimensional cutter compensation in a mixed-type machine.
5462 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G68.2/G69) (1) The modal setting used when G68.2 or G69 is specified is
incorrect.
(2) An unspecifiable G code was specified in the G68.2 mode.
(3) The offset vector of tool radius/tool nose radius
compensation is not canceled when G68.2 or G69 is
specified.
5463 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN A parameter related to 3-dimensional cutter compensation is
3-DIMENSIONAL CUTTER illegal.
COMPENSATION - Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled. Set
parameter No. 1660.
- Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
disabled. Set bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401, bit 5 (FRP) of
parameter No. 19501, and parameter Nos. No.1671 and 1672.
- 834 -
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm)

SW0100 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON The parameter setting is enabled (PWE, one bit of parameter
No. 8000 is set to “1”).
To set the parameter, turn this parameter ON. Otherwise, set
to OFF.
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)

SV0001 SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
compensation for synchronization exceeded the parameter
(No. 8325) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for a slave axis.
SV0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 2 In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
synchronization error exceeded the parameter (No. 8332)
setting value. When the synchronization is not completed
after power-up, the determination is made by the parameter
value (No. 8332) multiplied by the parameter (No. 8330)
multiplier.
This alarm occurs only for a slave axis only.
SV0003 SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE/SUPERI Since as axis in synchronization, composition, or
MPOSED CONTROL MODE CAN'T BE superposition mode caused a servo alarm, the mode could
CONTINUED not be continued, If one of the axes in a mode causes a
servo alarm, all axes relating to the axis enter the servo-off
state. This alarm is generated to enable the cause of the
servo-off state to be checked.
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip
command operation exceeded the limit value of the
parameter No.6287.
SV0005 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN) In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of the machine coordinate between a master
and slave axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8314) setting
value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
SV0006 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS For the slave axis under tandem control, absolute position
detection is set (parameter bit 5 (APC) of parameter No.
1815 = 1).
SV0007 SV ALM ANOTHER PATH(MULTI AMP.) When a multiaxis amplifier was used in a multipath system
across paths, a servo alarm occurred on an axis belonging to
another path.
When a system with two or more paths and multiple servo
axes between paths are controlled by a multiaxis amplifier, if
a servo alarm occurs on an axis belonging to another path of
the same amplifier, the MCC of the amplifier goes down and
SV0401 V-READY OFF occurs on an axis belonging to the
local path in the same amplifier. Since SV0401 is caused
by a servo alarm occurred on an axis in another path,
SV0007 is caused together to clearly indicate the fact.
The axis belonging to another path in the same amplifier
resolves the cause of the servo alarm.
- 835 -

SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION Since the absolute-position detector caused a
ERROR communication error, the correct machine position could not
be obtained. (data transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0302 APC ALARM: OVER TIME ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused an overtime
error, the correct machine position could not be obtained.
(data transfer error)
SV0303 APC ALARM: FRAMING ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a framing error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0304 APC ALARM: PARITY ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a parity error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0305 APC ALARM: PULSE ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a pulse error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained.
The absolute-position detector, or cable is thought to be
defective.
SV0306 APC ALARM: OVER FLOW ERROR Since the amount of positional deviation overflowed, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
Check to see the parameter No. 2084 or No. 2085.
SV0307 APC ALARM: MOVEMENT EXCESS Since the machine moved excessively, the correct machine
ERROR position could not be obtained.
SV0360 ABNORMAL CHECKSUM(INT) The checksum alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0361 ABNORMAL PHASE DATA(INT) The phase data abnormal alarm occurred on the built–in
Pulsecoder.
SV0362 ABNORMAL REV. DATA(INT) The speed count abnormal alarm occurred on the built-in
Pulsecoder.
SV0363 ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT) The clock alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT) A digital servo soft detected an abnormality on the built in
Pulsecoder.
SV0365 BROKEN LED(INT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 PULSE MISS(INT) A pulse error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 COUNT MISS(INT) A count error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 SERIAL DATA ERROR(INT) The communications data could not be received from the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 BROKEN LED(EXT) Separate detector error
SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT) An abnormal alarm in the position data occurred on the
separate detector.
SV0382 COUNT MISS(EXT) A count error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0383 PULSE MISS(EXT) A pulse error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0384 SOFT PHASE ALARM(EXT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
separate detector.
- 836 -

SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR(EXT) The communications data could not be received from the
separate detector.
SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR(EXT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the standalone detector.
SV0387 ABNORMAL ENCODER(EXT) An abnormality occurred on a separate detector. For more
information, contact the scale manufacturer.
SV0401 IMPROPER V_READY OFF Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
ON, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was OFF.
SV0403 CARD/SOFT MISMATCH The combination of the axis control card and the servo
software is incorrect.
Probable causes are given below.
- The correct axis control card is not attached.
- The correct servo software is not installed in flash memory.
SV0404 IMPROPER V_READY ON Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
OFF, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was ON.
SV0407 EXCESS ERROR The difference value of the amount of positional deviation for
the synchronization axis exceeded the setting value. (during
synchronization control only)
SV0409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected on the servo motor, or during
Cs axis or spindle positioning.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping exceeded
the parameter (No. 1829) setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling became
excessive than the parameter setting value.
SV0413 LSI OVERFLOW The counter for the amount of positional deviation overflowed
SV0415 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The velocity exceeding the travel velocity limit was
commanded.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 1, an illegal

parameter was detected by the servo software. Identify the
cause with reference to diagnosis information No. 352.
When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 0, the CNC

software detected an illegal parameter. Probable causes
are given below (see diagnosis information No. 280).
1) The value specified in parameter No. 2020 as the motor
model falls outside the specified range.
2) The motor rotation direction in parameter No. 2022 is not
set to a correct value (111 or -111).
3) The speed feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
value.
4) The position feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
value.
SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter (No. 2031) setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No.1729.
- 837 -

SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified
as a parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
SV0431 CNV. OVERLOAD PSM : Overheat
β series SVU : Overheat
SV0432 CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL PSM : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
PSMR : The control power supply voltage has dropped.
β series SVU : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
SV0433 CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM : Low DC link voltage
PSMR : Low DC link voltage
α series SVU : Low DC link voltage
β series SVU : Low DC link voltage
SV0434 INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM : Low control power voltage
SV0435 INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM : Low DC link voltage
SV0436 SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal
(OVC).
SV0437 CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM : Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM : Motor overcurrent
α series SVU : Motor overcurrent
β series SVU : Motor overcurrent
SV0439 CNV. OVER VOLT DC LINK PSM : The DC link voltage is too high.
PSMR : The DC link voltage is too high.
β series SVU : The DC link voltage is too high.
SV0440 CNV. EX DECELERATION POW. PSMR : Excessive generative discharge
α series SVU : Excessive generative discharge, or abnormal
error in generative power circuit
SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the
motor current detection circuit.
SV0442 CNV. CHARGE FAILURE PSM : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
PSMR : The spare charge circuit for the DC link is abnormal.
SV0443 CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM : Internal cooling fan failure.
PSMR : Internal cooling fan failure.
β series SVU : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected
Pulsecoder.
SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 UNMATCHED FEEDBACK ALARM The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector
is opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 INV. IPM ALARM SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an alarm.
α series SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected
an alarm.
SV0453 SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM Software disconnection alarm of the α Pulsecoder.
Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the
Pulsecoder cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the
Pulsecoder.
- 838 -

SV0454 ILLEGAL ROTOR POS DETECT The magnetic pole detection function terminated abnormally.
The magnetic pole could not be detected because the motor
did not run.
SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not
be set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with
HIGH SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not
satisfied in the system.
SV0458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current
loop.
SV0459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No.
1023) are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH
SPEED HRV control is possible for one axis and impossible
for the other.
SV0460 FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued.
1. The FSSB connection cable was disconnected or broken.
2. The amplifier was turned off .
3. In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0462 SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side
SV0463 SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
SV0465 READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor.
1. The connection command for an amplifier is incorrect.
2. The parameter (No.2165) setting is incorrect
SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control
for use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which
HIGH SPEED HRV control could not be used.
SV0474 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:SV ) The servo detected that the positional deviation during a stop
exceeded the setting (parameters No. 1839 and No. 1842) in
the n-axis.
SV0475 EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV) The servo detected that the positional deviation during a
travel exceeded the setting (parameters No. 1838 and No.
1841) in the n-axis.
SV0476 ILLEGAL SPEED CMD.(SV ) The servo detected that the speed command exceeded the
safety speed (parameters No. 13821 to No. 13824 (during
position control) or parameters No. 13826 to No. 13829
(during speed control)) during safety monitoring (when safety
monitoring request signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep
the safety speed.
SV0477 ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(SV) The servo detected that the machine position fell outside the
safety area (setting by parameters No. 13831 to No. 13838)
during safety monitoring (when safety monitoring request
signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the safety area.
A machine position check is performed only on the axis for
which the reference position has been established. The
axis for which the reference position is not established is not
subjected to a machine position check.
- 839 -

SV0478 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(SV) The servo detected that an error occurred during transfer of
axis data in the n-axis.
When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the
servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for the
servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 of the
corresponding axis to 1 and then 0 and turn off the power of
the entire system). When using a multiaxis amplifier, this
operation may not clear the alarm. In this case, repeat this
operation for the axes on which the alarm persists.
If an alarm occurs due to a cause other than the above,
replace the servo amplifier.
SV0481 SAFETY PARAM ERROR(SV) The servo detected that a safety parameter error occurred in
the n-axis.
SV0484 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR(SV) A safety function error related to the servo was detected in
the n-axis.
- The servo or CNC detected that the safety function was not
executed in the servo.
- The result of a servo safety function check did not match
the result of a CNC safety function check.
- An error occurred during a test of the CPU of the servo.
- An error occurred during a check of RAM of the servo.
SV0488 SELF TEST OVER TIME An MCC interruption test was not complete within the set
period of time (parameter No. 1946). Check the MCC
contact.
SV0489 SAFETY PARAM ERROR(CNC) The CNC detected that a safety parameter error occurred in
the n-axis.
SV0490 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR(CNC) A CNC safety function error occurred in the n-axis.
- The servo detected that the safety function was not
executed in the CNC.
- The result of a servo safety function check did not match
the result of a CNC safety function check.
SV0494 ILLEGAL SPEED CMD.(CNC) The CNC detected that the speed command exceeded the
safety speed (parameters No. 13821 to No. 13824 (during
position control) or parameters No. 13826 to No. 13829
(during speed control)) during safety monitoring (when safety
monitoring request signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep
the safety speed.
SV0495 ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(CNC) The CNC detected that the machine position fell outside the
safety area (set range by parameters No. 13831 to No.
13838) during safety monitoring (when safety monitoring
request signal *VLDVx is 0) in the n-axis. Keep the safety
area.
A machine position check is performed only on the axis for
which the reference position has been established.
- 840 -

SV0496 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA(CNC) The CNC detected that an error occurred during transfer to
axis data.
When an alarm occurred because the configuration of the
servo amplifier was changed, set the axis number for the
servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 of the
corresponding axis to 1 and 0 again and turn off the power of
the entire system). When using a multiaxis amplifier, this
operation may not clear the alarm. In this case, repeat this
operation for the axes on which the alarm persists.
If an alarm occurs due to a cause other than the above,
replace the servo amplifier.
SV0498 AXIS NUMBER NOT SET(CNC) The CNC detected that the axis number of the n-axis was not
set for the servo amplifier. The axis number is set
automatically, so turn off the power of the entire system.
SV0600 INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT SVM : DC link overcurrent.
β SVU : DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE SVM : Radiator cooling fan failure.
β SVU : Radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 INV. OVERHEAT SVM : The servo motor has overheated.
SV0603 INV. IPM ALARM(OH) SVM : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
β SVU : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module) detected an
overheat alarm.
SV0604 AMP. COMMUNICATION ERROR The communication between SVM and PSM is in error.
SV0605 CNV. EX. DISCHARGE POW. PSMR : The motor regenerative power is too much.
SV0606 CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE PSM : External radiator cooling fan failure.
PSMR : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE PSM : The input power supply has a missing phase.
PSMR : The input power supply has a missing phase.
SV0646 ABNORMAL ANALOG SIGNAL(EXT) An error occurred in the analog 1Vp-p output of the separate
detector. The separate detector, cable, or separate detector
interface unit may be failed.
SV1025 V_READY ON (INITIALIZING ) The ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control which should
be OFF is ON while the servo control is ON.
SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly.
A negative value, duplicate value, or greater value than the
number of control axes was set to the parameter No. 1023
"The servo axis number of each axis."
SV1055 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS In tandem control, the setting of the parameter No. 1023 is
incorrect.
SV1056 ILLEGAL TANDEM PAIR In tandem control, the setting of the parameter TDM
(No.1817#6) is incorrect.
SV1067 FSSB:CONFIGURATION ERROR(SOFT) An FSSB configuration error occurred (detected by software).
The connected amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV1068 DUAL CHECK SAFETY ALARM An alarm that turns off the MCC of the entire system
occurred in the Dual Check Safety function.
SV1069 EXCESS ERROR(SERVO OFF:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during
servo-off exceeded the set value (parameter No. 1840) in the
n-axis.
SV1070 EXCESS ERROR(SERVO OFF:SV) The servo detected that the positional deviation during
servo-off exceeded the set value (parameter No. 1840) in the
n-axis.
- 841 -

SV1071 EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during a
travel exceeded the set value (parameters No. 1838 and No.
1841) in the n-axis.
SV1072 EXCESS ERROR(STOP:CNC) The CNC detected that the positional deviation during a stop
exceeded the set value (parameters No. 1839 and No. 1842)
in the n-axis.
SV1100 S-COMP. VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of compensation for the straightness exceeded
a maximum value of 32767.
SV5134 FSSB:OPEN READY TIME OUT In the initialization, the FSSB could not be in an open ready
sate. The axis card is thought to be defective.
SV5136 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMP. IS The number of amplifier identified by the FSSB is insufficient
INSUFFICIENT than the number of control axes. Or, the setting of the
number of axes or the amplifier connection is in error.
SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGURATION ERROR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
The connecting amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV5139 FSSB:ERROR Servo initialization has not completed successfully. It is
probable that an optical cable failed or a connection between
the amplifier and another module failed.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The initialization of the FSSB was completed, but it could not
be opened. Or, the connection between the CNC and the
amplifier in is incorrect.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB could not be opened although the CNC permitted
the opening of the FSSB.
Check the connection between the CNC and the amplifier.
SV5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION 1. This alarm is issued if axes, whose servo axis numbers
(parameter No. 1023) are even and odd numbers, are
allocated to the amplifiers connected to the FSSBs of
different paths.
2. This alarm is issued if an attempt is made to set up for
use of the pulse modules connected to the FSSBs of
different paths. And the system did not satisfy the
requirements for performing HIGH SPEED HRV control.
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)

OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 1.
OT0502 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the positive direction.
OT0503 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 2 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 2. Or, in the
chuck tail stock barrier, an entry to the inhibited area was
made during movement in the negative direction.
OT0504 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 3.
OT0505 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 3 ) Exceeded the - side stored stroke check 3.
OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the
stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
during automatic operation.
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
- 842 -

OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was
triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the
stroke end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
during automatic operation.
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0508 INTERFERENCE:+ A tool moving in the positive direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
OT0509 INTERFERENCE:- A tool moving in the negative direction along the n axis has
fouled another tool post.
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the negative direction during
the stroke check before movement.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the positive direction during the
stroke check before movement.
OT0514 (n) INTERFERENCE:+ An interference occurred on the plus side of the n-axis in a
rotation area interference check.
OT0515 (n) INTERFERENCE:- An interference occurred on the minus side of the n-axis in a
rotation area interference check.
OT1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER The permissible acceleration parameter for the optimum
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) torque acceleration/deceleration is in error. A possible cause
is either of the following:
(1) The ratio of a negative acceleration to a positive
acceleration is not more than the limit value.
(2) The time to reduce to a velocity of 0 exceeded the
maximum time.
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)

IO1001 FILE ACCESS ERROR The resident–type file system could not be accessed as an
error occurred in the resident–type file system.
IO1002 FILE SYSTEM ERROR The file could not be accessed as an error occurred in the
CNC file system.
IO1030 CHECK SUM ERROR The checksum of the CNC part program storage memory is
incorrect.
IO1032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE Accessing of data occurred outside the CNC part program
storage memory range.
IO1104 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS The maximum number of tool life management pairs is
exceeded. Modify the setting of the maximum number of tool
life management pairs in parameter No. 6813.
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)

PW0000 POWER MUST BE OFF A parameter was set for which the power must be turned
OFF then ON again.
PW0001 X-ADDRESS(*DEC) IS NOT ASSIGNED. The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address
could not be assigned correctly for the deceleration dog
(*DEC) for a return to the reference position.
- 843 -

PW0002 PMC address is not correct(AXIS). The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect.
- The parameter No.3021 setting is incorrect.
PW0003 PMC address is not correct(SPINDLE). The address to assign the spindle signal is incorrect.
- The parameter No.3022 setting is incorrect.
PW0004 SETTING THE LOADER SYSTEM PATH The loader system could not be assigned correctly.
IS NOT CORRECT. The parameter No. 984 setting is incorrect.
- The number of loader systems and the number of systems
specified to the loader system in the parameter No.
984#0(LCP) does not match.
- The parameter No. 984#0 of the system 1 is set to 1.
PW0006 POWER MUST BE OFF (ILL-EXEC-CHK) The malfunction prevention function detected an alarm to
require the power off.
PW0007 X-ADDRESS(SKIP) IS NOT ASSIGNED The X address of PMC could not be assigned correctly.
Possible causes are:
- During the set of parameter No. 3012, the skip signal of the
X address was not assigned correctly.
- During the set of parameter No. 3019, the address other
than the skip signal of the X address was not assigned
correctly.
PW0008 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(DCS PMC) On the DCS PMC side:
- An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0009 CPU SELF TEST ERROR(PMC) On the PMC side:
- An error was detected by the CPU self diagnosis function.
- An error was detected by the RAM check function.
PW0010 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(DCS On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O
PMC) cross check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0011 SAFE I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(PMC) On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
check function in system-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0012 USER I/O CROSS CHECK ERROR(DCS On the DCS PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O
PMC) cross check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0013 USER I/O CROSS CHECK On the PMC side, an error was detected by the I/O cross
ERROR(PMC) check function in user-defined safety-related DI/DO.
PW0014 CPU TEST ALARM (CNC) An error occurred in a test of the CPU of the CNC.
PW0015 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that an error occurred in a safety
parameter for other than servo axes or spindle axes.
PW0016 RAM CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a RAM check of the CNC.
PW0017 INEXECUTION OF SAFETY The safety function was not executed normally in the CNC.
FUNCTIONS
PW0018 CRC CHECK ERROR An error was detected in a CRC check of the CNC.
- 844 -

PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect.
This alarm occurs in the following cases:
- When the number of pitch error compensation points on the
axis on which slope compensation is executed exceeds
128 between the most negative side and most positive side
- When the size relationship between the slope
compensation point Nos. is incorrect
- When the slope compensation point is not located between
the most negative side and most positive side of pitch error
compensation
- When the compensation per compensation point is too
small or too great.
PW1103 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.128) The parameter for setting 128 straightness compensation
points or the parameter compensation data is incorrect,
PW5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.) The parameter for setting straightness compensation is
incorrect.
PW5390 R-ADDRESS SETTING IS ILLEGAL The start address or the set range of the PMC R addresses
set by parameters No.13541 and No.13542 is invalid.
(9) Spindle alarms (SP alarm)

SP0740 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has exceeded
the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0741 RIGID TAP ALARM : EXCESS ERROR The positional deviation of the moving spindle has exceeded
the set value during rigid tapping.
SP0742 RIGID TAP ALARM : LSI OVERFLOW An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid
tapping.
SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR This alarm is generated if the system does not properly
terminate a mode change. The modes include the Cs contour
control, spindle positioning, rigid tapping, and spindle control
modes. The alarm is activated if the spindle control unit does
not respond correctly to the mode change command issued
by the NC.
SP0754 ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected in a spindle motor.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SP0755 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The CNC CPU detected that the safely function of the n-th
spindle was not executed. Alternatively, the result of a CNC
safety function check did not match the result of a spindle
safety function check.
SP0756 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA The CNC CPU detected that the connection state and the
hardware setting of the spindle amplifier were incompatible
on the n-th spindle. If an alarm occurs because of the
configuration change of the spindle amplifier , set the spindle
amplifier correctly.
SP0757 SAFETY SPEED OVER The CNC CPU detected that during safety monitoring (when
safety monitoring request signal *VLDPs is 0), the spindle
motor speed was greater than the safety speed (parameter
No. 4372, 4438, 4440, or 4442) on the n-th spindle. Operate
within the safety speed.
SP1202 SPINDLE SELECT ERROR In a multi spindle control, the spindle number other than the
valid spindle number was selected by a position coder select
signal. An attempt was made to select the spindle number of
the system having no valid spindle.
- 845 -

SP1210 TOOL CHANGE SP MOTION The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much.
OVERFLOW (specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1211 TOOL CHANGE SP ORTN EXCESS During a tool change, a too much orientation error was
ERROR detected for the spindle.
(specific to the FANUC ROBODRILL)
SP1212 TOOL CHANGE SP MOVE EXCESS During a tool change, a too much moving error was detected
ERROR for the spindle.
SP1213 TOOL CHANGE SP STOP EXCESS During a tool change, a too much stop error was detected for
ERROR the spindle.
SP1214 TOOL CHANGE SP ILLEGAL During changing tools, an abnormal spindle sequence was
SEQUENCE detected.
SP1220 NO SPINDLE AMP. Either the cable connected to a serial spindle amplifier is
broken, or the serial spindle amplifier is not connected.
SP1221 ILLEGAL MOTOR NUMBER The spindle No. and the motor No. are incorrectly matched.
SP1224 ILLEGAL SPINDLE-POSITION CODER The spindle–position coder gear ratio was incorrect.
GEAR RATIO
SP1225 CRC ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A CRC error (communications error) occurred in
communications between the CNC and the serial spindle
amplifier.
SP1226 FRAMING ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A framing error occurred in communications between the
CNC and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1227 RECEIVING ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A receive error occurred in communications between the
CNC and the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1228 COMMUNICATION ERROR (SERIAL A communications error occurred between the CNC and the
SPINDLE) serial spindle amplifier.
SP1229 COMMUNICATION ERROR SERIAL A communications error occurred between serial spindle
SPINDLE AMP. amplifiers (motor Nos. 1 and 2, or motor Nos. 3–4).
SP1231 SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The position deviation during spindle rotation was greater
than the value set in parameters.
SP1232 SPINDLE EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The position deviation during spindle stop was greater than
the value set in parameters.
SP1233 POSITION CODER OVERFLOW The error counter/speed instruction value of the position
coder overflowed.
SP1234 GRID SHIFT OVERFLOW Grid shift overflowed.
SP1240 DISCONNECT POSITION CODER The analog spindle position coder is broken.
SP1241 D/A CONVERTER ERROR The D/A converter for controlling analog spindles is
erroneous.
SP1243 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The setting for the spindle position gain is incorrect.
SETTING(GAIN)
SP1244 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of distribution to a spindle is too much
SP1245 COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR A communication data error was detected on the CNC.
SP1700 SAFETY PARAM ERROR The CNC detected that a safety parameter error occurred in
the n-th spindle.
SP1969 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1970 SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Initialization of spindle control ended in error.
SP1974 ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
- 846 -

SP1975 ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An position coder error was detected on the analog spindle.
SP1976 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION The amplifier No. could not be set to the serial spindle
ERROR amplifier.
SP1977 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION An error occurred in the spindle control software.
ERROR
SP1978 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION A time–out was detected during communications with the
ERROR serial spindle amplifier.
SP1979 SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION The communications sequence was no longer correct during
ERROR communications with the serial spindle amplifier.
SP1980 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR Defective SIC–LSI on serial spindle amplifier
SP1981 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during reading of the data from SIC–LSI on
the analog spindle amplifier side.
SP1982 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during reading of the data from SIC–LSI on
the serial spindle amplifier side.
SP1983 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR Could not clear on the spindle amplifier side.
SP1984 SERIAL SPINDLE AMP. ERROR An error occurred during re–initialization of the spindle
amplifier.
SP1985 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Failed to automatically set parameters
SP1986 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR An error occurred in the spindle control software.
SP1987 SERIAL SPINDLE CONTROL ERROR Defective SIC–LSI on the CNC
SP1996 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER The spindle was assigned incorrectly. Check to see the
SETTING following parameter. (No.3716 or 3717)
(10) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)

OH0700 LOCKER OVERHEAT CNC cabinet overheat
OH0701 FAN MOTOR STOP PCB cooling fan motor abnormality
OH0704 OVERHEAT Spindle overheat due to detection of changes in the spindle
speed
- When the cutting load is large, offload the cutting
conditions.
- Check if the cutting tool became dull.
- Check if the spindle amplifier malfunctions.
(11) Other alarms (DS alarm)

DS0001 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV) In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of positional deviation between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8323) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
DS0002 SYNC EXCESS ERROR ALARM 1 In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of synchronization between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8331) setting value.
This alarm occurs only for the slave axis.
DS0003 SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE The system is in the synchronize adjust mode.
DS0004 EXCESS MAXIMUM FEEDRATE The malfunction prevention function detected the command
in which a value exceeding the maximum speed was
specified.
- 847 -

DS0005 EXCESS MAXIMUM ACCELERATION The malfunction prevention function detected the command
in which a value exceeding the maximum acceleration was
specified.
DS0006 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
DS0010 ILLEGAL REFERENCE AREA The malfunction prevention function detected an invalid
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
DS0014 TOOL CHANGE DETECT MACHINE A machine lock is turned on for the Z axis for which the tool is
LOCK being changed.
DS0015 TOOL CHANGE DETECT MIRROR A mirror image is turned on for the Z axis for which the tool is
IMAGE being changed.
DS0016 SERIAL DCL:FOLLOW-UP ERROR (1) The settings of parameters No.1883 and No.1884 fall
outside the range.
(2) The current position at establishment of the origin
subtracted by the distance between the reference
positions (detection unit) exceeded ±2147483647.
Change the current position or reference position to
prevent this situation.
DS0017 SERIAL DCL:REF-POS ESTABLISH The travel amount at the FL speed at establishment of the
ERR origin exceeded the setting of parameter No. 14010.
DS0018 SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC CTRL) Of the master and slave axes for feed axis synchronous
control, one axis is a linear scale with the origin and the other
is not a linear scale with the origin. In such a configuration,
the feed axis synchronous control selection signal
(SYNC<Gn138> or SYNCJ <Gn140>) needs to be set to 0 to
establish the origin.
DS0020 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE An attempt was made to perform an automatic return to the
reference position on the perpendicular axis before the
completion of a return to the reference position on the
angular axis.
However, this attempt failed because a manual return to the
reference position during angular axis control or an automatic
return to the reference position after power-up was not
commanded. First, return to the reference position on the
angular axis, then return to the reference position on the
perpendicular axis.
DS0022 DUAL CHECK SAFETY IS NOT Bit 6 (DCE) of parameter No. 1902 has set the Dual Check
WORKED Safety function to be disabled.
DS0023 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP VAL) The setting of the inclination compensation parameter is
incorrect.
The compensation per compensation point is too large or too
small.
- 848 -

DS0024 UINT SIGNAL WAS ILLEGALLY INPUT An interruption custom macro was started during movement
to the machining restart position at the dry run speed.
DS0025 G60 CANNOT BE EXECUTED The state of a mirror image is different between the time
when look-ahead of a block for unidirectional positioning was
performed and the time when execution of the block was
started, so unidirectional positioning cannot be performed.
Modify the program.
DS0026 MISMATCH OF ANGULAR AXIS(D.C.S) On angular axis control, one of the angular/perpendicular
axes is the scale with ref-pos, and the other of them is not
the scale with ref-pos. Such system is not admired.
DS0027 MISMATCH OF SYNCHRONOUS Master/slave axes of axis synchronous control, one of them
AXIS(D.C.S) is the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks, and
the other of them is not the linear scale with distance-coded
reference marks.
Please establish reference position with the input signal
SYNCn<G138>, SYNCJn<G140> or parameter setting to 0.
DS0029 UNAVAILABLE ROT AXIS MOVE IN TPC In tool posture control, the rotation axis fell outside the set
operation range (parameters No. 19741 to No. 19744).
Review the machine configuration and command.
DS0030 TOOL DIRC CMP IMPOSSIBLE When tool center point control is performed in the angular
surface machining command mode or workpiece placement
error compensation is performed in a 5-axis cutting machine,
if settings are made to make compensation in the tool
direction (bit 0 (RCM) of parameter No. 11200 is 1), the
position of the rotation axis could not be obtained.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data I/O]
The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No.
search could not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool
data), but either no tool numbers have been input since
power ON or there is no data for the entered tool No.
[External workpiece No. search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece No.
could not be found.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator
message or external alarm message, but five or more
displays were required simultaneously.
DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND An attempt to cancel an external operator message or
external alarm message failed because the specified
message number was not found.
DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS0300 APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN A setting to zero position for the absolute position detector
(association with reference position and the counter value of
the absolute position detector) is required. Perform the return
to the reference position.
This alarm may occur with other alarms simultaneously.
In this case, other alarms must be handled first.
DS0306 APC ALARM: BATTERY VOLTAGE 0 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which data can no longer be held. Or,
the power was supplied to the Pulsecoder for the first time.
The battery or cable is thought to be defective. Replace the
battery with the machine turned on.
- 849 -

DS0307 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 1 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which a replacement is required.
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0308 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 2 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector dropped
to a level at which a replacement was required in the past.
(including during power off)
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0309 APC ALARM: REF RETURN An attempt was made to set the zero point for the absolute
IMPOSSIBLE position detector by MDI operation when it was impossible to
set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the zero
position of the absolute position detector after turning the
CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
DS0310 NOT ON RETURN POINT The return position recorded during retraction is not reached
during recovery. The position may be displaced during
recovery due to a machine lock or mirror image.
Perform the operation again after making a reset.
DS0405 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF The axis specified in automatic zero return was not at the
correct zero point when positioning was completed.
Perform zero return from a point whose distance from the
zero return start position to the zero point is 2 or more
revolutions of the motor.
Other probable causes are:
- The positional deviation after triggering the deceleration
dog is less than 128.
- Insufficient voltage or malfunctioning Pulsecoder.
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH) The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address
(high bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW) The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low
bits).
DS1124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR An output request was issued
during external data output, or an output request was issued
for an address that has no output data.
DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0
to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a
sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory
mode or the reset state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a
tool No. during loading by the G10 code.
DS1150 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter malfunction
DS1184 PARAMETER ERROR IN TORQUE An invalid parameter was set for torque control.
The torque constant parameter is set to “0”.
DS1185 OVER MAXIMUM FEED The maximum cutting feedrate or rapid traverse feedrate was
exceeded in G54.3.
- 850 -

DS1448 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (D.C.S.) The setting value of parameter for reference marks is
satisfied the following any conditions.
- The absolute-position detection function is enabled.
- Either parameter 1821 (mark-1 interval) or parameter 1882
(mark-2 interval) is set to 0.
- Parameters 1821 and 1882 have identical settings.
- The difference between the settings made for parameters
1821 and 1882 is greater than or equal to twice either
setting.
- The setting value of parameters 1883 and 1884 are over
the valid data range.
DS1449 REFERENCE MARK ARE DIFFERENT In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the actual interval
FROM PARAMETER of reference marks is different from parameter
(No.1821,1882) setting value.
DS1450 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1st reference position return (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 17h (Hex))
was specified when the manual reference position return was
not executed with the reference position return function
enabled (parameter ZRN (No. 1005#0) set to “0”).
DS1451 IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND The PMC axes cannot be controlled in this state.
DS1512 EXCESS VELOCITY The feedrate of the linear axis during polar coordinate
interpolation exceeded the maximum cutting feedrate.
DS1514 ILLEGAL MOTION IN G12.1 MODE In a hypothetical axis direction compensation during the polar
coordinate interpolation mode, an attempt is made to travel
to the area in which the travel cannot be made.
DS1553 EXCESS VELOCITY IN G43.4/G43.5 The axis rate was attempt to exceed the maximum cutting
feedrate and travel by the pivot tool length compensation.
DS1710 ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER There are errors in the parameters of permissible
(OPTIMUM TORQUE ACC/DEC) acceleration for Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration.
One of the following is the cause.
1) The ratio of the acceleration for deceleration to the
acceleration for the acceleration is lower than the limited
value.
2) The time to decelerate to 0 is larger than the maximum.
DS1931 MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT One of parameters Nos. 19665 to 19667 and Nos.19680 to
19744 used to configure the machine contains an error.
DS1932 DI.THML SIGNAL ON One of the parameters used to configure the machine is
rewritten while the tool direction thermal displacement
compensation function is enabled.
DS1933 NEED REF RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) The relation between a machine coordinate of an axis in
synchronization, composition, or superposition control, and
the absolute, or relative coordinate was displaced.
Perform the manual return to the reference position.
(12) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm)

IE0001 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 1 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0002 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored stroke
check 1 on the negative side was exceeded.
- 851 -

IE0007 EXCESS MAXIMUM REV. DATA The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
which a value exceeding the maximum speed was specified.
IE0008 ILLEGAL ACC/DEC The malfunction prevention function detected the
acceleration/deceleration error.
IE0009 ILLEGAL MCN COODINATE The malfunction prevention function detected the displacement of
a machine coordinate in the check point.
- 852 -
A.2 ALARM LIST (PMC)
A.2.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen

The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be
displayed on the PMC alarm screen.
Alarm number Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR <1> Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> If this error recurs even after you have
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program is too large.
program. The sequence program is invalid.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
count option that allows you to set a
larger program size.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE <1> Reduce the size of the sequence The sequence program exceeds the
ERROR(OPTION) program. size specified by the ladder step
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step count option.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH Change the sequence program so that it The PMC type specified in the
specifies the adequate PMC type, by using sequence program does not match
the programmer. the type of the PMC actually in use.
ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER <1> Restore the backup CNC parameter No ladder step count option is found.
STEP) data.
<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step
ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH Contact us. An unsupported function is used in
the sequence program.
ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK <1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, The nonvolatile memory of the PMC
ERROR by holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at system needs to be initialized in such
the same time. cases as when you have changed
<2> Replace the backup batteries. the PMC model.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY <1> Enter the sequence program again. The parity of the sequence program
<2> If this error recurs even after you have is invalid.
entered the sequence program again,
the error may be due to a hardware
fault. In that case, contact us.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Enter the sequence program again. An interrupt was specified while the
BY I/O sequence program was being read.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR A function key was pressed during
screen again, and terminate the editing the editing of the ladder program,
operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key. causing a switch to the CNC screen.
ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty.
ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS Correct the sequence program; change the An out-of-range parameter number is
OUT OF RANGE parameter number specified in a functional specified in the TMR, TMRB, CTR,
instruction to a value that is within the CTRB, DIFU, or DIFD functional
allowable range. instruction.
- 853 -

ER28 NO OPTION(I/O LINK Contact us; specify the I/O Link point count The I/O Link point count expansion
CHx) expansion option for the indicated channel. option is not specified for CHx.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE <1> Check whether the power of each I/O None of the I/O devices, such as the
device is on. I/O Link, connection unit, and Power
<2> Check whether the power of each I/O Mate, is connected.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Check cable connections.
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR Contact us; replace the faulty hardware. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.
or
ER33 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn)
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(xx) <1> Check the cable connections to the An I/O device communication error
or devices of group xx. occurred on the slave side of group
ER34 I/O LINK ERROR(CHn xx) <2> Check whether the power of each I/O xx.
device has been turned on before the
CNC.
<3> Replace any device of group xx in
which the PMC control module is
embedded.
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT Reduce the output data count of group xx. The output data count of I/O Link
DATA IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT regarded as invalid.
DATA IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA Reduce the input data count of group xx. The input data count of I/O Link
IN GROUP(xx) group xx exceeds the upper limit (33
or bytes). The superfluous data is
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA regarded as invalid.
IN GROUP(CHn xx)
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or The slot number for the I/O Link
BASE less. exceed the upper limit (10). The
or slot number larger than 11 is
ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN regarded as invalid.
BASE(CHn)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT Reduce the total amount of output data of The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) all groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT and later on the output side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT Reduce the total amount of input data of all The I/O area for the I/O Link is
DATA OVER(xx) groups to 128 bytes or less. insufficient.
or (The area allocated to the group xx
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT and later on the input side is
DATA OVER(CHn xx) regarded as invalid.)
ER50 PMC EXECUTION ORDER Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to The set execution order of the
ERROR 11902. multi-PMC function is invalid.
ER51 PMC EXECUTION Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to The set execution percentage of the
PERCENTAGE ERROR 11907. multi-PMC function is invalid.
ER52 IOLINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to The I/O Link channel assignment to
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11913. the PMC system is invalid.
ER53 IOLINK CHANNEL Check CNC parameter Nos. 11915 to The I/O Link channel division
DEVIDE ERROR 11918. function setting is invalid.
ER54 NC-PMC I/F Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to The interface assignment between
ASSIGNMENT ERROR 11929. NC and PMC is invalid.
- 854 -

ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION Check CNC parameter No. 11930. The set ladder level 1 execution
CYCLE ERROR cycle is invalid.
ER97 IO LINK FAILURE(CHx <1> Check the cable connections to the I/O The I/O module assignment of group
yyGROUP) devices of group yy. yy does not match the number of the
<2> Check the power of each I/O device. I/O devices that are actually
<3> Check the parameter settings for the connected.
selectable I/O Link assignment No I/O device that is connected to
function. the channel associated with this
alarm will be linked.
The ladder program runs regardless
of the occurrence of this alarm.
WN02 OPERATE PANEL Correct the Series 0 operator's panel The Series 0 operator's panel
ADDRESS address that is set in the PMC system address that is set in the PMC
ERROR parameter. system parameter is invalid.
WN03 ABORT <1> Check the ladder program to verify that The ladder program was stopped
NC-WINDOW/EXIN it is free from errors, and then restart while communication was in progress
the ladder program (press the RUN between CNC and PMC.
key). This alarm may cause the WINDR,
<2> Turn on the power of the CNC again. WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB functional
instructions to malfunction.
WN07 LADDER SP Correct the sequence program so that the There are too many levels of nesting
ERROR(STACK) subprogram has eight or fewer levels of (levels more than 8) for the CALL or
nesting. CALLU functional instruction to call
the subprogram.
WN09 SEQUENCE PROGRAM If you want to use a changed sequence You have changed the sequence
IS NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH program again next time you power on the program using the LADDER
ROM system, write the sequence program to flash DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or DATA
ROM. If you have made any unwanted I/O screen, but you have not yet
change to the sequence program by written the changed sequence
mistake, read the original sequence program to flash ROM. If you shut
program from flash ROM. down the system without writing the
changed sequence program to flash
ROM, the changes you have made
will be nowhere next time you turn on
the power.
WN10 NO OPTION(STEP <1> Add the step sequence option. No step sequence option was found
SEQUENCE) <2> Arrange so that the step sequence when the system attempted to
subprogram will not be called. execute a step sequence.
- 855 -
A.2.2 PMC System Alarm Messages

PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A CPU error occurred in the PMC
PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the system.
PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy circumstances under which the alarm xxxxxxxx and yyyyyyyy are internal
PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy occurred (displayed message, system error codes.
PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy configuration, operation suspected of
occurrence, frequency of occurrence,
etc.) as well as the displayed internal
error codes.
PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM parity error occurred in the
fault; contact us with information on the PMC system.
circumstances under which the alarm aa and bb are internal error codes.
error codes.
PC050 IOLINK CHn aabb:xxyy <1> Check whether the I/O assignment An I/O Link communication error
data matches the actual I/O device occurred.
connections. n is a channel number.
<2> Check whether all the cables are aabb and xxyy are internal error
connected properly. codes.
<3> Check the cable specifications. The possible causes of this alarm are
<4> Replace the interface module, as follows:
cable, master printed circuit board, (1) No base is connected even if data
and/or other components of the is assigned for base extension
I/O device, as appropriate. when I/O Unit-Model A is used.
(2) One or more cables are
connected improperly.
(3) One or more cables are faulty.
(4) One or more I/O devices (I/O Unit,
Power Mate, etc.) are faulty.
(5) The power of the master and/or
slave I/O Link device is faulty.
(6) The DO output of the I/O device is
short-circuited.
(7) The master printed circuit board is
faulty.
- 856 -

PC051 IOLINK ER2 CHz:yy:xx:ww:vv <1> When you use a I/O Unit-Model A, An I/O Link communication error
no base extension unit is occurred.
connected corresponding to a I/O z is a channel number.
assignment data. Check yy, xx, ww, vv are internal error code.
connection of I/O devices and I/O
assignment data.
<2> When you use Power Mate as I/O
Link slave device and/or Servo
Motor Beta series I/O Link option,
some system alarm occurs in such
devices.
<3> A Communication may be
influenced by noise. Check the
ground wire and the shield of the
communication cables.
<4> The output of the I/O Link devices
is short-circuited.
<5> The power of the I/O Link master
and/or slave devices is faulty.
– instantaneous power failure
– unstable power line
<6> The power cable of the I/O Link
master and/or slave devices is
faulty.
– faulty wiring
<7> The communication cable to the
I/O Link device is faulty.
– faulty wiring
PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware A bus error occurred in the PMC
PC061 FL-R xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the system.
circumstances under which the alarm
error codes.
PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence between the A stack error occurred with the CALL
CALL or CALLU instruction and the or CALLU functional instruction of the
SPE instruction. ladder program.
PC090 NMI(___) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware An NMI event occurred in the PMC
fault; contact us with information on the control software for an unknown
circumstances under which the alarm reason.
error codes.
- 857 -

PC092 USER TRAP aa:xxxxxxxx This alarm may be due to a hardware An attempt was made to execute a
fault; contact us with information on the TRAP instruction that was not used in
circumstances under which the alarm the PMC control software.
error codes.
PC093 INT(SYS) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy This alarm may be due to a hardware An interrupt occurred in the PMC
PC094 INT(TRAP) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy fault; contact us with information on the control software for an unknown
PC095 INT(EX) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy circumstances under which the alarm reason.
PC096 INT(IN) xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy occurred (displayed message, system
error codes.
PC087 PARITY ERR (LADDER-2) This alarm may be due to a hardware A RAM check error occurred.
PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER) fault; contact us with information on the
PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM) circumstances under which the alarm
error codes.
PC501 NC/PMC INTERFACE ERR Contact us with information on the The read or write operation between
PATH_ circumstances under which the alarm CNC and PMC failed.
etc.).
PC502 ILLEGAL FUNCTION (SUB xx) Correct the sequence program so that The sequence program uses the xx
the xx functional instruction will not be functional instruction that is not
used. supported.
- 858 -
A.2.3 Operation Errors
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screen

INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric value. The input address or numeric value is
invalid.
PROGRAM IS PROTECTED BY Enter the password. The screen cannot be displayed because
PASSWORD the program is protected by the password.
ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME Input a existent subprogram number or A nonexistent subprogram number or
symbol. symbol is specified.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Input a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string is
specified.
THE NET IS NOT FOUND The specified net is not found.
THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND The specified address is not found.
THE FUNCTIONAL The specified functional instruction is not
INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND found.
WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT Specify a bit address for the write coil You entered a byte address when
ADDRESS search. specifying an address used for the write
coil search.
SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED The system cannot pick up all the nets. The system failed to pick up all the nets
Choose the nets to pick up, by using because there were 128 nets or more to
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER be picked up.
display screen, and then perform the
net pickup operation manually.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The ladder data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the ladder FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
data. another application is accessing the ladder
data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the This function is protected by the
PROTECTED programmer protection function or programmer protection function or 8-level
8-level protection function. protection function.
- 859 -

EDITOR screen

THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a
per-subprogram basis, you cannot edit the
subprogram frame nets (END1, END2,
END3, SP, and SPE).
TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY Reduce the range of data to copy. The selected range of data exceeds the
Perform the copy operation several size of the copy buffer.
times, copying a smaller range of data
at a time.
TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE Reduce the size of data to paste. An attempt was made to paste data whose
size exceeded the free space of the
sequence program.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a bit
match for the alteration operation. address to a byte address.
BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types An attempt was made to alter a byte
match for the alteration operation. address to a bit address.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Check the address to be input, and • A character string was entered that was
then enter it correctly. unacceptable as a PMC address.
• A wildcard (*) was specified in an
inappropriate manner.
• Ether "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW
ADDRESS" was not entered.
THE ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY Enter a write-permitted address. • An attempt was made to alter a write
coil address to a write-prohibited bit
address.
• An attempt was made to alter an
address set in an output parameter of a
functional instruction to a
write-prohibited bit address.
THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE Check the types of the address in The type of the addresses in "OLD
MISMATCHED "OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW ADDRESS" does not match that in "NEW
ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter ADDRESS".
the correct address or addresses.
***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL Define symbol data in "OLD No symbol data is defined in "OLD
ADDRESS". ADDRESS".
***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL Make sure that the address types Symbol data is already defined in "NEW
match for the alteration operation. ADDRESS".
- 860 -

EDITOR screen (when updating)

OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper There is no COME that corresponds to
position. If the COM is unnecessary, this COM.
remove it.
END IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN COM position. If COM is unnecessary, remove between COM and COME.
END2 IN COM it.
JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must have JMPE is found between COM and COME,
same COM/COME status. Review JMP and JMP and corresponding JMPE have
range and COM range, to adjust not to different COM/COME status.
overlap with each other: it is possible that
one range includes the other completely.
SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between COM and
position. If the COM is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper There is no COM that corresponds to this
position. If the COME is unnecessary, COME.
remove it.
DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural CTRs have the same number as
(WARNING) remove them. If all of them are their parameter. (This is warning.)
necessary, assign other number to
parameter of them to make them unique.
(If two or more instructions with same
parameter number will never be active
simultaneously at one time, the Ladder
program has a possibility to work
correctly, however, it is recommended
from safety and maintenance points of
view, that all these instructions should
have different parameter number with
each other.)
ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct CTR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
number defined by each PMC model.
DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD If some of them are unnecessary, Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same
NUMBER remove them. If all of them are number as their parameter. (This is
(WARNING) necessary, assign other number to warning.)
each other.)
ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct DIFU or DIFD has parameter number that
number not to exceed the maximum is out of range.
- 861 -

NO END Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in END, END1, END2 or END3 is not found.
NO END1 proper position.
NO END2
NO END3
DUPLICATE END1 Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are found.
DUPLICATE END2
DUPLICATE END3
GARBAGE AFTER END Remove unnecessary nets, and move There are some nets after END, END2 or
GARBAGE AFTER END2 necessary nets to proper position so that END3, which will not be executed.
GARBAGE AFTER END3 they will be executed.
OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper There is no JMPE that corresponds to this
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMP.
remove it.
JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM JMP and corresponding JMPE must have JMP and corresponding JMPE have
LEVEL same COM/COME status. Review JMP different COM/COME status.
range and COM range, to adjust not to
COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must COME is found between JMP and JMPE,
have same JMP/JMPE status. Review and COM and corresponding COME have
COM range and JMP range, to adjust not different JMP/JMPE status.
to overlap with each other: it is possible
that one range includes the other
completely.
END IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper END,END1,END2, or END3 is found
END1 IN JMP position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove between JMP and JMPE.
END2 IN JMP it.
END3 IN JMP
SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper SP or SPE is found between JMP and
position. If the JMP is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have JMPB and its destination differ in
same COM/COME status. Review range COM/COME status.
of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not to
JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same JMPB jumps to different program level.
program level, or within a subprogram. If
the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If
LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in
proper position. If it should be JMPC,
correct it.
LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.
is missing, add it in proper position.
JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a JMPC is used in other than subprogram.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If it should be
JMPB or JMP, correct it.
LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If LBL Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.
is missing, add it in proper position:
JMPC jumps into level 2.
- 862 -

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a Destination of JMPC is not level 2.
subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is
unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL of
same L-address that the JMPC is
intended to jump exists in the
subprogram, assign different L-address
to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB
or JMP, correct it.
JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of any JMPC jumps to LBL between COM and
COM and COME pair. If the JMPC is COME.
unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is
located wrong, move it to correct
position. If the L-address of JMPC is
wrong, correct it.
JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper There is no JMP that corresponds to this
position. If the JMPE is unnecessary, JMPE.
remove it.
TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error There are too many LBLs.
still occurs, adjust the construction of
program to use less LBLs.
DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unnecessary, Same L-address is used in plural LBLs.
remove them. If all of these LBLs is
necessary, assign other L-addresses to
them to make all LBLs unique.
OVERLAPPED SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper There is no SPE that corresponds to this
position. If the SP is unnecessary, SP.
remove it.
SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper position. There is no SP that corresponds to this
If the SPE is unnecessary, remove it. SPE.
END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper END is found between SP and SPE.
position. If END is in wrong place, move
it to proper position.
DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary, Same P-address is used in plural SPs.
remove them. If all of these SPs is
necessary, assign other P-addresses to
them to make all SPs unique.
DUPLICATE TMRB NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRBs have the same number as
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMRB NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMRB has parameter number that is out
number not to exceed the maximum of range.
- 863 -

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER If some of them are unnecessary, Plural TMRs have the same number as
each other.)
ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign correct TMR has parameter number that is out of
number not to exceed the maximum range.
NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If Subprogram that is called by
the subprogram is missing, create it. CALL/CALLU is not found.
UNAVAILABLE INSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program is Unsupported instruction for this PMC
correct one. If this program is correct model is found.
one, all these unsupported instructions
have to be removed.
SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subprogram. SP is found in wrong place.
Correct it so that no SP exists in other
place.
LADDER PROGRAM IS This ladder program must be all cleared Ladder program may be broken by some
BROKEN once, and remake ladder program. reason.
NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not found.
CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2 or CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.
in subprograms. Do not use any other
places.
SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to SP is found in level 3.
correct position. If the SP is unnecessary,
remove it.
- 864 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screen

ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL Specify the name of an available The entered name of functional instruction
INSTRUCTION NAME functional instruction. is invalid.
TOO MANY FUNCTIONAL Only one functional instruction is Too many functional instructions are in
INSTRUCTIONS IN ONE NET allowed to constitute a net. If one net.
necessary, divide the net into plural
nets.
TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that Net is too large. When a net is converted
step number in a net may become into the object, the net exceeds 256 steps.
small.
NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to No signal is provided for logical operation.
output of functional instruction that has
no output, causes this error. If coil is
not necessary, remove it. If necessary,
connect it to meaningful input.
OPERATION AFTER FUNCTION Output of functional instruction can not No logical operation with functional
IS FORBIDDEN be connected to a contact, nor to instruction output is permitted, except
conjunction with other signal that will write coils.
be implemented by logical-or
operation.
WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Write coil is not found even if it is Write coil is expected, but not found.
expected. Add proper write coil to the
net.
BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost Coil is located in bad position.
column. Any coil located at other place
must be erased once, and place
necessary coils in correct place.
SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected Some contacts are connected with short
by short circuit, and correct circuit. CTR has a parameter number
connections. that is out of the range.
FUNCTION AFTER Functional instruction can not be used Functional instruction is used in output
DIVERGENCE IS FORBIDDEN in output section of net. If necessary, section of net.
divide the net into plural nets.
ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME Left terminals of all coils in a net must When a net contains more than one coil,
INPUT be connected to same input point. the coils should not have any contact
beside them affects only of the coils.
BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition Some condition input of functional
inputs of the functional instruction. instruction is not connected correctly.
Especially for functional instruction that
has more than one condition input,
check if connections to condition inputs
interfere with each other.
NO CONNECTION Find gap that is expected to be There is signal connected to nowhere.
connected, and correct the connection.
NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find Net is too complicated to analyze.
unnecessarily bending connection, or
coils that are connected to different
point.
PARAMETER IS NOT SUPPLIED Enter all of the relay addresses, and Relay with blank address, or blank
parameters of functional instructions. parameter of functional instruction, is
found.
- 865 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen

TOO MANY CHARACTERS Make sure that the entered character The number of characters in the entered
string is within the allowable input length. character string exceeds the allowable input
length. Some of the characters are discarded.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication The title data cannot be displayed because
MODIFIED with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other online communication with FANUC
applications from accessing the title data. LADDER-III is in progress or another
application is accessing the title data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen

TOO MANY CHARACTERS Make sure that the entered address is The number of characters in the entered
within the allowable input length. address exceeds the allowable address input
length.
ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Enter an address correctly. No address was entered during the batch
input of address, symbol, and comment data
using the SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITOR
screen.
ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Enter an address correctly. The specified address is invalid, or the
entered address character string contains a
space or spaces.
THE ADDRESS ALREADY Specify another address. An already registered address was entered.
HAS AN ENTRY
THE SYMBOL NAME IS Specify another symbol. An already registered symbol was entered.
ALREADY USED
PMC ADDRESS MUST BE Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS No PMC address was entered when new
ENTERED field. symbol/comment data is registered.
TOO LONG SYMBOL Make sure that the symbol consists of 16 The entered symbol exceeds the specified
NAME characters or less. number of characters.
TOO LONG COMMENT Make sure that the comment consists of The entered comment exceeds the specified
STRING 30 characters or less. number of characters.
BAD SYMBOL NAME Define a symbol that contains no space. The entered symbol contains a space or
spaces.
THE STRING IS NOT Specify another character string for the The search was done for the specified
FOUND search. character string but did not find it.
OUT OF SPACE Create free space for the sequence The symbol/comment editing area has no free
program, by deleting unnecessary ladder space.
or message data.
PROGRAM IS BEING Disconnect the online communication The symbol/comment data cannot be
MODIFIED with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or another
symbol/comment data. application is accessing the symbol/comment
data.
THIS FUNCTION IS Cancel the protection by the programmer This function is protected by the programmer
PROTECTED protection function or 8-level protection protection function or 8-level protection
function. function.
- 866 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR

screen

INPUT INVALID Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the The delimiter code - semicolon (;) - was
batch message input process. not entered in the batch message input
process.
ILLEGAL NUMBER Enter a four-digit number as the The entered message number contains
message number. any nonnumeric character, or a number
shorter than four digits was entered.
THE NUMBER IS OUT OF Make sure that the entered message The entered message number is out of the
RANGE number is in the range between 1000 1000-9999 range.
and 9999.
CLOSING "@" IS NOT FOUND When entering kana or other Japanese One of the @ sign pair is missing.
characters, make sure that they are
enclosed within a pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a character string correctly The number of characters entered
CHARACTERS IN "@-@" between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs is not even.
ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN "@-@" Enter a character string correctly One or more invalid character codes exist
between a pair of @ signs. between the pair of @ signs.
BAD NUMBER OF Enter a two-byte code correctly The number of characters in the two-byte
CHARACTERS FOR 2-BYTE between @02 and 01@. code (characters entered between @02
CODE and 01@) is not a multiple of four.
ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE Enter a two-byte code correctly The two-byte code (characters entered
between @02 and 01@. between @02 and 01@) contains one or
more characters other than the JIS codes.
CLOSING CONTROL CODE "01" Enter the closing control code. The two-byte code (characters entered
IS NOT FOUND between @02 and 01@) lacks the closing
control code (01).
CONTROL CODE "XX" IS Remove any repeated control code. The starting control code (02), closing
REPEATED control code (01), and/or umlaut code (0D)
is repeated.
CLOSING "]" IS NOT FOUND Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes The delimiter codes for numerical data are
are entered in pairs. not entered in pairs.
BAD NUMERICAL DATA Specify the numerical data correctly. The format of the numerical data is invalid.
FORMAT
BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR Enter an available address. The address section of the numerical data
NUMERIAL DATA is invalid.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The message data cannot be displayed
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other because online communication with
applications from accessing the FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
message data. another application is accessing the
message data.
- 867 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO Specify 15 or a smaller value as the The entered group number is too large.
LARGE group number.
BASE NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B The entered base number is too large.
(##, #1 - #10).
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO LARGE Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot The entered slot number is too large.
number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).
For other I/O units, specify 10 or a
smaller value.
SLOT NUMBER IS TOO SMALL Check the I/O unit name. The entered slot number is too small.
I/O UNIT NAME MISMATCH Check the I/O unit name or address. The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y
address, or the output I/O unit is
assigned to the X address.
ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables The entered I/O unit name is invalid.
3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.
NOT ENOUGH SPACE Enter the data again after creating free There is not enough free address space
space by deleting the data allocated for the size of the I/O unit you are going
behind the current cursor position or by to assign.
other adequate means. This error also occurs if you attempt to
assign the I/O unit to an already
allocated address space.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The I/O module data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the I/O with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress
module data. or another application is accessing the
I/O module data.
PROTECTED programmer protection function or programmer protection function or
8-level protection function. 8-level protection function.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen

INPUT INVALID Enter a correct numerical value. The entered numerical value or its input
format is invalid.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string was
entered.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED Disconnect the online communication The system parameter data cannot be
with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other displayed because online communication
applications from accessing the with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or
system parameter data. another application is accessing the
system parameter data.
- 868 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screen

format is invalid.
entered.
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen

format is invalid.
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen

TRACE FUNCTION IS ALREADY Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or some FANUC LADDER-III or some other
IN USE other application finishes using the application is currently using the trace
trace function before executing it. function.
NO SAMPLING ADDRESS Specify a bit address as a sampling No sampling address is specified in the
address in the trace parameter. trace parameter.
NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS Specify a bit address as the stop The stop trigger address is not specified in
trigger address in the trace parameter. the trace parameter.
NO SAMPLING TRIGGER Specify a bit address as the sampling The sampling trigger address is not
ADDRESS trigger address in the trace parameter. specified in the trace parameter.
Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value that is within A nonnumeric value or an out-of-range
the specified data range of the relevant parameter value was entered.
trace parameter.
entered.
BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Specify a bit address as the stop or A byte address was specified as the stop
sampling trigger address. or sampling trigger address.
INVALID STOP TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the stop trigger
ADDRESS be used as the stop trigger address. address is invalid.
INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER Enter a PMC signal address that can The bit address entered as the sampling
ADDRESS be used as the sampling trigger trigger address is invalid.
address.
- 869 -
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O diagnosis screen

ENTER STRING TO SEARCH. Enter a string before starting a No search string is specified.
search.
I/O DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IS NOT To use the I/O diagnosis function, The I/O diagnosis function cannot be
SUPPORTED update the PMC system software. used because the PMC system
software is an older version.
INPUT INVALID Check the entered string. The entered string is invalid.
LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN Check the information displayed on The program is corrupted.
the PMC alarm screen and reload the
program.
NO GROUP FORMAT. Use [GROUP] on the I/O diagnosis No group display is set.
(setting) screen.
PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED. Retry after completing the function The program cannot be referenced
that is using the program. because it is being used by another
function.
REACHED TO THE END OF To make another search, specify a The search has been completed until
SYMBOL DATA. string again. the end of the data has been reached.
SYMBOL ORDER IS NOT Use the FANUC LADDER-III to The format of this program does not
AVAILABLE. convert the program to one with an allow sorting and display in symbol
expanded function. order.
THE GROUP IS NOT FOUND Check the specified group. The specified group is not found.
FORCING IS PROTECTED ON THIS Disable the programmer protection The forced input/output function is
PATH. function. currently protected on the selected
PMC path.
THE STRING IS NOT FOUND Check the specified string. The specified string is not found.
- 870 -
A.2.4 I/O Communication Error Messages

The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their
meanings and actions are listed below.
Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operation

MEMORY CARD IS NOT READY Check whether a memory card is No memory card is installed.
installed.
MEMORYCARD IS FULL Delete files to create available space. There is no available space in the memory
card.
MEMORYCARD IS WRITE Release the write protection of the The memory card is write-protected.
PROTECTED memory card.
MEMORYCARD IS NOT Format the memory card in FAT16. The memory card cannot be recognized.
FORMATTED (It cannot be recognized if formatted in
FAT32.)
TOO MANY FILES IN Delete unnecessary files to reduce the There are too many files.
MEMORYCARD number of files.
FILE NOT FOUND On the list screen, check the file name The specified file cannot be found.
or file number.
FILE IS READ-ONLY Check the attributes of the file. Write to the specified file is not permitted.
FILE NAME IS INVALID Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The file name is illegal.
COULD NOT FORMAT MEMORY The NC cannot format this memory The memory card cannot be formatted.
CARD card. Format the memory card in
FAT16 using another PC. (It cannot
be recognized if formatted in FAT32.)
UNSUPPORTED MEMORYCARD Replace the memory card with another This memory card is not supported.
one.
CAN NOT DELETE FILE Check the attributes of the file. An error occurred when a file was deleted
from the memory card.
MEMORYCARD BATTERY Replace the battery of the memory The battery of the memory card has
ALARM card. become weak.
THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY Change the file name to another one. The file name is already used.
USED
MEMORYCARD ACCESS Replace the memory card with another The memory card cannot be accessed.
ERROR one.
DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a mismatch.
MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the memory
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry. card.
MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FILE NUMBER CAN NOT If the file does not exist, the key entry The file number cannot be selected.
SELECTED is invalid. If this error occurs even
when the cursor is placed at a file
name, contact the FANUC service
center.
THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT Check the total number of files on the The entered file number is not present.
EXIST list screen. The entered number exceeds the total
number of files.
FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED Enter a numeric value not exceeding A value up to 128 can be entered as the
TO "128" 128. file number.
- 871 -

MEMORY CARD IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other Some other function is currently using the
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the memory card.
memory card.
MEMORY CARD IS WRITE Cancel the write protection of the The memory card is write protected.
PROTECTED memory card, or use another memory
card that is not write protected.
UNSUPPORTED MEMORY Use another memory card. This is an unsupported type of memory
CARD card.
COULD NOT DELETE FILE Check the read/write permission The file cannot be deleted.
attribute of the file.
TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER Delete unnecessary old trace result file No more trace result file can be created
or files. because the maximum trace result file
number (file extension) has been reached.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.
Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operation

NOT IN EMG STOP MODE Place the system in the emergency The system is not in the emergency stop
stop state. state.
INVALID LADDER PROGRAM Check the program. The transfer program is illegal.
DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a mismatch.
FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY Wait until the PMC user completes Another PMC user is using the flash ROM.
OTHER FUNCTION processing, then retry.
FLASH ROM HEADER ROM This file cannot be read. Check the An attempt was made to read a file, but its
DATA ID IS ILLEGAL type of the file. ROM data ID was illegal.
FLASH ROM IS USED BY This file cannot be read. Check the The ROM data ID of the file you attempted
OTHER FUNCTION type of the file. to read is invalid.
INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact the FANUC service center, An error due to an internal factor occurred.
and report the displayed message Details on the error are displayed in
correctly. parentheses.
- 872 -
Error messages displayed during FLOPPY or other input/output device I/O

operation

ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER Specify a file of the PMC parameter The specified file is not of the PMC
FORMAT format. Also, check the specified file parameter format.
to see whether its content is not
disrupted.
ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT Specify a file of the handy file format. The specified file is not of the handy file
Also, check the specified file to see format.
whether its content is not disrupted.
UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT Specify file of recognizable format Can not recognize the format of specified
such as PMC parameter format, or file.
check the contents of the file.
FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER IS Specify file name or file number for the Need file name or file number to identify
REQUIRED operation. file to read, compare, or delete.
COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT Check the communication parameters Communication with the I/O device has
such as baud rate, and retry to been timeout.
communicate.
I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED Check the power of I/O device is ON. Any I/O device is not connected, or some
OR IN ERROR STATUS Check the I/O device is connected. error has occurred in it.
Check the cable that connects I/O
device with PMC is correct one. If
some error has occurred in I/O device,
solve it.
RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK Check the PMC's communication Invalid data has been received.
THE COMMUNICATION parameters such as baud rate match
PARAMETERS the ones of I/O device.
RECEIVED DATA HAS Check the communication parameters Too many data have received at once.
OVERRUN about flow control.
OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING Use the other channel, or stop the Others function is using this channel.
THIS CHANNEL function.
BAD COMMUNICATION Check the communication parameters Setting parameters of communication are
PARAMETER such as baud rate. not correct.
OTHER FUNCTION IS USING I/O Wait until function that using I/O Another function such as FANUC
FUNCTION function do finish, or stop the function. LADDER-III is using I/O function.
UNKNOWN HANDY FILE Check the file. The received data is not a program of the
FORMAT DATA PMC system or is a program of some
other incompatible type.
ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING Set a valid baud rate. The set baud rate is invalid.
ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER Set a valid channel number. The set channel number is invalid.
ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING Set a valid parity bit. The set parity bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING Set a valid stop bit. The set stop bit is invalid.
ILLEGAL WRITE CODE Set a valid output code. The set output code is invalid.
SETTING
SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN Wait until On-line function, do finish the Can not input/output of sequence
USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION using I/O function. In general, both of program, because On-line function is
I/O function and On-line function using sequence program.
should not be used at the same time.
- 873 -
Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices during

the I/O operations

ERROR OCCURS IN LADDER Check the PMC alarm screen and Data cannot be output because there is an
PROGRAM correct the indicated program error error in the ladder program.
accordingly.
UNKNOWN DATA TYPE Check the file. The PMC type of the input data is
unknown.
MUST BE IN EMERGENCY Set the NC to the emergency stop The NC is not in the emergency stop state
STOP state. when the PMC parameter is read.
PWE MUST BE ON Set PWE to 1 on the NC setting PWE on the NC setting screen is 0 during
screen. reading from the PMC parameter.
MUST BE IN EDIT MODE Set the NC to the EDIT mode. The NC is not in the EDIT mode during
writing to the PMC parameter.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT Release the protection by the Protection is made by the programmer
ALLOWED programmer protection function or protection function or 8-level protection
8-level protection function. function.
PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
PMC parameter. referenced by this function.
THIS DEVICE IS USED BY Retry after terminating the other The specified device is currently used by
OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be used
specified device. by this function.
PMC PARAMETER IS Retry after terminating the other The PMC parameter is currently used by
PROTECTED BY OTHER function that is currently using the some other function and cannot be
FUNCTION PMC parameter. changed by this function.
LADDER TYPE UNMATCH Specify a program of a valid type. The specified program is of a different
type and cannot be read.
TOO LARGE LADDER Check the file. Or, change to a step The ladder program is too large to read.
PROGRAM number option that allows you to set a
LADDER PROGRAM IS USED Retry after terminating the other The ladder program is currently used by
BY OTHER FUNCTION function that is currently displaying the some other function and cannot be
ladder program. referenced by this function.
- 874 -
A.3 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE)
When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed

on the CNC.
NOTE
*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the red LED is on, the SPM
indicates a 2-digit alarm number. When the yellow
LED is on, the SPM indicates an error number that
designates a sequence problem (for example,
when a rotation command is entered with the
emergency stop state not released).
See "Error Codes (Serial Spindle)."
*2 For information about serial spindle alarms for
numbers that are not listed below, refer to the
following documents according to the actual
spindle motor to be connected.
• FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-65285EN)
• Technical reports etc.
SPM
Number Message indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
SP9001 SSPA:01 MOTOR 01 1 Check and correct the The thermostat embedded in the motor
OVERHEAT peripheral temperature and winding operated.
load status. The internal temperature of the motor
2 If the cooling fan stops, exceeds the specified level.
replace it. The motor is used in excess of the
continuous rating, or the cooling
component is abnormal.
SP9002 SSPA:02 EX 02 1 Check and correct the The motor speed cannot follow a
DEVIATION SPEED cutting conditions to specified speed.
decrease the load. An excessive motor load torque is
2 Correct parameter No. 4082. detected.
The acceleration/deceleration time in
parameter No. 4082 is insufficient.
SP9003 SSPA:03 DC-LINK 03 1 Replace the SPM unit. The PSM becomes ready (00 is
FUSE IS BROKEN 2 Check the motor insulation indicated), but the DC link voltage is
status. too low in the SPM.
3 Replace the interface cable. The fuse in the DC link section in the
SPM is blown. (The power device is
damaged or the motor is
ground-fault.)
The JX1A/JX1B connection cable is
abnormal.
SP9004 SSPA:04 POWER 04 Check the state of the input The PSM found a missing power
SUPPLY ERROR power supply to the PSM. supply phase. (PSM alarm 5)
- 875 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9006 THERMAL SENSOR 06 1 Check and correct the The temperature sensor of the motor
DISCONNECT parameter. is disconnected.
2 Replace the feedback cable.
SP9007 SSPA:07 OVER 07 Check for a sequence error. The motor speed has exceeded
SPEED (For example, check whether 115% of its rated speed. When the
spindle synchronization was spindle axis was in position control
specified when the spindle mode, positional deviations were
could not be turned.) accumulated excessively (SFR and
SRV were turned off during spindle
synchronization.)
SP9009 SSPA:09 09 1 Improve the heat sink Abnormal temperature rise of the
OVERHEAT MAIN cooling status. power transistor radiator
CIRCUIT 2 If the heat sink cooling fan
stops, replace the SPM unit.
SP9010 SSPA:10 LOW VOLT 09 1 Replace the cables. The control power voltage of the
INPUT POWER 2 Replace the spindle spindle amplifier is reduced.
amplifier control printed
circuit board.
SP9011 SSPA:11 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of
OVERVOLT POWER 2 Check the input power the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm
CIRCUIT voltage and change in power indication: 7)
during motor deceleration. PSM selection error. (The maximum
If the voltage exceeds 253 output specification of the PSM is
VAC (for the 200-V system) exceeded.)
or 530 VAC (for the 400-V
system), improve the power
supply impedance.
SP9012 SSPA:12 12 1 Check the motor insulation The motor output current is
OVERCURRENT status. abnormally high.
POWER CIRCUIT 2 Check the spindle A motor-specific parameter does not
parameters. match the motor model.
3 Replace the SPM unit. Poor motor insulation
SP9013 SSPA:13 CPU DATA 13 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
MEMORY FAULT printed circuit board. component is detected. (RAM within
the SPM is abnormal.)
SP9015 SSPA:15 SPINDLE 15 1 Check and correct the The switch sequence in spindle
SWITCHING FAULT ladder sequence. switch/output switch operation is
2 Replace the switching MC. abnormal.
The switching MC contact status
check signal and command do not
match.
SP9016 SSPA:16 RAM 16 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
ERROR printed circuit board. component is detected. (RAM for
external data is abnormal.)
SP9018 SSPA:18 18 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
SUMCHECK printed circuit board. component is detected. (Program
ERROR PROGRAM ROM data is abnormal.)
ROM
SP9019 SSPA:19 EXCESS 19 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value for the U
U phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
- 876 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9020 SSPA:20 EXCESS 20 Replace the SPM unit. Abnormality in an SPM component is
OFFSET CURRENT detected. (The initial value of the V
V phase current detection circuit is
abnormal.)
SP9021 POS SENSOR 21 Check and correct the The polarity parameter setting of the
POLARITY ERROR parameters. position sensor is wrong.
(No. 4000#0, 4001#4)
SP9024 SSPA:24 SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC-to-spindle The CNC power is turned off (normal
TRANSFER ERROR cable away from the power power-off or broken cable).
cable. An error is detected in
2 Replace the cable. communication data transferred to
the CNC.
SP9027 SSPA:27 27 1 Replace the cable. 1 The spindle position coder
DISCONNECT 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor (connector JY4) signal is abnormal.
POSITION CODER signal. 2 The signal amplitude (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
(Unconnected cable, adjustment
error, etc.)
SP9029 SSPA:29 29 Check and correct the load Excessive load has been applied
OVERLOAD status. continuously for a certain period of
time. (This alarm is issued also when
the motor shaft has been locked in
the excitation state.)
SP9030 SSPA:30 30 Check and correct the power Overcurrent is detected in PSM main
OVERCURRENT supply voltage. circuit input. (PSM alarm indication:
INPUT CIRCUIT 1)
Unbalanced power supply.
PSM selection error (The maximum
PSM output specification is
exceeded.)
SP9031 SSPA:31 MOTOR 31 1 Check and correct the load The motor cannot rotate at a
LOCK OR status. specified speed. (A level not
DISCONNECT 2 Replace the motor sensor exceeding the SST level for the
DETECTOR cable (JY2 or JY5). rotation command has existed
continuously.)
Abnormality in the speed detection
signal.
SP9032 SSPA:32 SIC-LSI 32 Replace the SPM control Abnormality in an SPM control circuit
RAM FAULT printed circuit board. component is detected. (The LSI
device for serial transfer is
abnormal.)
SP9033 SSPA:33 33 1 Check and correct the power Charging of direct current power
SHORTAGE supply voltage. supply voltage in the power circuit
POWER CHARGE 2 Replace the PSM unit. section is insufficient when the
magnetic contractor in the amplifier
is turned on (such as open phase
and defective charging resistor).
- 877 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9034 SSPA:34 ILLEGAL 34 Correct a parameter value Parameter data exceeding the
PARAMETER according to the manual. allowable limit is set.
If the parameter number is
unknown, connect the spindle
check board, and check the
indicated parameter.
SP9036 SSPA:36 36 Check whether the position An error counter overflow occurred.
OVERFLOW gain value is too large, and
ERROR COUNTER correct the value.
SP9037 SSPA:37 ILLEGAL 37 Correct the value according to The setting of the parameter for the
SETTING the parameter manual. number of pulses in the speed
VELOCITY detector is incorrect.
DETECTOR
SP9041 SSPA:41 ILLEGAL 41 1 Check and correct the 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
1REV SIGN OF parameter. position coder (connector JY4) is
POSITION CODER 2 Replace the cable. abnormal.
3 Re-adjust the BZ sensor 2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
signal. Re-adjust the BZ JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
sensor signal. abnormal.
3 Parameter setting error
SP9042 SSPA:42 NO 1REV 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1-rotation signal of the spindle
SIGN OF POSITION 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor position coder (connector JY4) is
CODER signal. disconnected.
2 The 1-rotation signal (connector
JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
disconnected.
SP9043 SSPA:43 43 Replace the cable. The differential speed position coder
DISCONNECT signal (connector JY8) in SPM type 3
POSITION CODER is abnormal.
DEF. SPEED
SP9047 SSPA:47 ILLEGAL 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the
SIGNAL OF 2 Re-adjust the BZ sensor spindle position coder (connector
POSITION CODER signal. JY4) is abnormal.
3 Correct the cable layout 2 The A/B phase signal (connector
(vicinity of the power line). JY2) of the MZ or BZ sensor is
abnormal.
The relationship between the A/B
phase and 1-rotation signal is
incorrect (Pulse interval mismatch).
SP9049 SSPA:49 DEF. 49 Check whether the calculated In differential speed mode, the speed
SPEED IS OVER differential speed value of the other spindle converted to the
VALUE exceeds the maximum motor speed of the local spindle has
speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
differential speed is calculated by
multiplying the speed of the other
spindle by the gear ratio).
SP9050 SSPA:50 50 Check whether the calculated In spindle synchronization, the speed
SYNCRONOUS value exceeds the maximum command calculation value
VALUE IS OVER motor speed. exceeded the allowable limit (the
SPEED motor speed is calculated by
multiplying the specified spindle
speed by the gear ratio).
- 878 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9051 SSPA:51 LOW VOLT 51 1 Check and correct the power Input voltage drop was detected. (PSM
POWER CIRCUIT supply voltage. alarm indication: 4) (Momentary power
2 Replace the MC. failure or poor MC contact)
SP9052 SSPA:52 ITP FAULT 52 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
1 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9053 SSPA:53 ITP FAULT 53 1 Replace the SPM control NC interface abnormality was
2 printed circuit board. detected (the ITP signal stopped).
2 Replace the spindle
board in the CNC.
SP9054 SSPA:54 54 Review the load state. An overload current was detected.
OVERCURRENT
SP9055 SSPA:55 ILLEGAL 55 1 Replace the magnetic The power line state signal of the
POWER LINE contactor. magnetic contactor for selecting a
2 Check and correct the spindle or output is abnormal.
sequence.
SP9056 COOLING FAN 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control
FAILURE circuit stopped.
SP9057 CONV. EX. 57 1 Decrease the An overload was detected in the
DECELERATION acceleration/deceleration regenerative resistance. (PSMR alarm
POW. duty. indication: 8)
2 Check the cooling condition Thermostat operation or short-time
(peripheral temperature). overload was detected.
3 If the cooling fan stops, The regenerative resistor was
replace the resistor. disconnected, or an abnormal
4 If the resistance is abnormal, resistance was detected.
replace the resistor.
SP9058 CNV. OVERLOAD 58 1 Check the PSM cooling The temperature of the radiator of
status. the PSM has increased abnormally.
2 Replace the PSM unit. (PSM alarm indication: 3)
SP9059 CNV. COOLING FAN 59 Replace the PSM unit. The cooling fan in the PSM stopped.
FAILURE (PSM alarm indication: 2)
SP9061 SERIAL SPINDLE 61 Check parameter settings. The error between the semi-closed
ALARM and full-closed sides when the dual
position feedback function is used is
too large.
SP9065 SERIAL SPINDLE 65 1 Check parameter settings. The move distance is too long when
ALARM 2 Check sensor connections the magnetic pole is confirmed
and signals. (synchronization spindle)
3 Check power line
connections.
SP9066 COM. ERROR 66 1 Replace the cable. An error was found in communication
BETWEEN SP 2 Check and correct the between amplifiers.
AMPS connection.
- 879 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9069 SAFETY SPEED 69 1 Check the specified speed. In the state in which safety speed
OVER 2 Check parameter settings. monitoring was enabled, the system
3 Check the sequence. detected that the motor speed
exceeded the safety speed or
detected an error during a free-run
stop.
SP9070 ILLEGAL AXIS DATA 70 1 Check connections (JA7A of An error was detected in an axis
the second spindle requires number check.
a dedicated connector).
2 Replace the SPM control
printed-circuit board.
SP9071 SAFETY 71 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in an axis
PARAMETER printed-circuit board. parameter check.
ERROR
SP9072 MISMATCH RESULT 72 1 Replace the SPM control A mismatch was detected between
OF MOTOR SPEED printed-circuit board. the safety speed check results of the
CHECK 2 Replace the spindle SPM and those of the CNC.
board in the CNC.
SP9073 MOTOR SENSOR 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. The motor sensor feedback signal is
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. not present.
3 Check and correct the
connection.
4 Adjust the sensor.
SP9074 CPU TEST ERROR 74 Replace the SPM control An error was detected in a CPU test.
SP9075 CRC ERROR 75 Replace the spindle amplifier An error occurred in a spindle
control printed circuit board. amplifier CRC test.
SP9076 INEXECUTION OF 76 Replace the SPM control The SPM detected that safety
SAFETY printed-circuit board. functions were not executed.
FUNCTIONS
OF AXIS NUMBER printed-circuit board. the axis number check results of the
CHECK 2 Replace the spindle SPM and those of the CNC.
board in the CNC.
OF SAFETY printed-circuit board. the safety parameter check results of
PARAMETER 2 Replace the spindle the SPM and those of CNC.
CHECK interface printed circuit
board in the CNC.
SP9079 INITIAL TEST 79 Replace the spindle amplifier An error was detected in a spindle
ERROR control printed circuit board. amplifier initial test.
SP9080 ALARM AT THE 80 Remove the cause of the During inter-SPM communication, an
OTHER SP AMP. alarm of the remote SPM. alarm was generated on the remote
SPM.
SP9081 1-ROT MOTOR 81 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
SP9082 NO 1-ROT MOTOR 82 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the motor
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
- 880 -
SPM
(*1)
SP9083 MOTOR SENSOR 83 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. motor sensor feedback signal.
SP9084 SPNDL SENSOR 84 1 Replace the feedback cable. The spindle sensor feedback signal
DISCONNECTED 2 Check the shield processing. is not present.
connection.
parameter.
SP9085 1-ROT SPNDL 85 1 Check and correct the The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR ERROR parameter. sensor cannot be correctly detected.
SP9086 NO 1-ROT SPNDL 86 1 Replace the feedback cable. The one-rotation signal of the spindle
SENSOR 2 Adjust the sensor. sensor is not generated.
SP9087 SPNDL SENSOR 87 1 Replace the feedback cable. An irregularity was detected in a
SIGNAL ERROR 2 Adjust the sensor. spindle sensor feedback signal.
SP9088 COOLING RADI FAN 88 Replace the SPM external The external cooling fan stopped.
FAILURE cooling fan.
SP9089 COOLING RADI FAN 89 1 Check the connection Submodule SM (SSM) error
FAILURE between the SPM and the (synchronous spindle)
submodule SM (SSM).
2 Replace the submodule
SM(SSM).
SP9110 AMP b0 1 Replace the communication Communication error between
COMMUNICATION cable between amplifier and amplifier and module
ERROR module.
2 Replace the SPM or PSM
control printed circuit board.
SP9111 CONV. LOW VOLT b1 Replace the PSM control Low converter control power supply
CONTROL printed circuit board. voltage (PSM indication = 6)
SP9112 CONV. EX. b2 1 Check the regenerative Excessive converter regenerative
DISCHARGE POW. resistance. power (PSM indication = 8)
2 Check the motor selection.
3 Replace the PSM
SP9113 CONV. COOLING b3 Replace the cooling fan. Stopped cooling fan of the converter
FAN FAILURE radiator (PSM indication = A)
SP9120 COMMUNICATION C0 1 Replace the communication Communication data alarm
DATA ERROR cable between CNC and
SPM.
printed circuit board.
3 Replace the CNC side
spindle interface printed
circuit board.
- 881 -
SPM
(*1)
SPM.
circuit board.
SPM.
circuit board.
SP9123 SERIAL SPINDLE C3 Replace the submodule Submodule SW (SSW) error (spindle
ALARM SW(SSW). switching)
SP9135 SAFETY SPEED D5 Perform operation within the The motor position exceeded the
ZERO ERROR(SP) safety speed zero range. safety speed zero monitoring width.
SP9136 MISMATCH RESULT D6 Replace the spindle amplifier The spindle amplifier speed zero
OF SAFETY SPEED control printed circuit board. determination result did not match
ZERO CHECK(SP) the CNC speed zero determination
result.
- 882 -
A.4 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE)
NOTE
*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications
differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow
LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error
code is indicated with a 2-digit number. An error
code is indicated in the CNC diagnosis, No.712.
When the red LED is on, the SPM indicates the
number of an alarm generated in the serial spindle.
→ See “(9) Serial spindle alarms (SP alarm).”
SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
01 Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. For MRDY,
are two types of signals including the input signal and pay attention to the parameter setting regarding the
PSM contact signal) nor MRDY (machine ready use of the MRDY signal (parameter No. 4001#0).
signal) is input, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF
(reverse rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation
command) is input.
03 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings.
sensor is not used (position control not performed)
(bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of parameter No. 4002 = 0, 0, 0, 0), but
a Cs contour control command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
04 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings.
sensor is not used (position control not performed)
(bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of parameter No.4002 = 0, 0, 0, ), but
a servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, etc.)
or spindle synchronization command is input.
In this case, the motor is not excited.
05 The orientation function option parameter is not Check the orientation function parameter settings.
specified, but ORCM (orientation command) is
input.
06 The output switching control function option Check the output switching control function
parameter is not specified, but low-speed parameter settings and the power line state check
characteristic winding is selected (RCH = 1). signal (RCH).
07 A Cs contour control command is input, but SFR Check the sequence.
(clockwise rotation command)/SRV
(counterclockwise rotation command) is not input.
08 A servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, Check the sequence.
etc.) control command is input, but SFR (clockwise
rotation command)/SRV (counterclockwise rotation
command) is not input.
09 A spindle synchronization command is input, but Check the sequence.
SFR (clockwise rotation command)/SRV
(counterclockwise rotation command) is not input.
- 883 -
SPM
indication Faulty location and remedy Description
(*1)
10 A Cs contour control command is input, but another Do not switch to another mode during a Cs
mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or contour control command.
orientation) is specified. Before moving to another mode, cancel the Cs
contour control command.
11 A servo mode (rigid tapping, spindle positioning, Do not switch to another mode during a servo
etc.) command is input, but another mode (Cs mode command.
contour control, spindle synchronization, or Before moving to another mode, cancel the servo
orientation) is specified. mode command.
12 A spindle synchronization command is input, but Do not switch to another mode during a spindle
another mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or synchronization command.
orientation) is specified. Before moving to another mode, cancel the
spindle synchronization command.
14 Both SFR (clockwise rotation command) and SRV Issue either of them.
(counterclockwise rotation command) are input at
the same time.
17 The speed detector parameter settings (bits 2, 1, Check the parameter settings.
and 0 of parameter No. 4011) are not valid.
There is no corresponding speed detector.
18 The parameter settings are such that a position Check the parameter settings and the input signal.
sensor is not used (position control not performed
(bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4002), but
position coder system orientation is issued.
24 If index is performed continuously in position coder Check INCMD (incremental command).
system orientation, an incremental operation is If an absolute position command is to follow, be
performed first (INCMD = 1), then an absolute sure to perform absolute position command
position command (INCMD = 0) is input. orientation first.
29 The parameter settings are such that the In the αi series spindle amplifier, the shortest-time
shortest-time orientation function is used (bit 6 of orientation function cannot be used. Use
parameter No. 4018 = 0, Nos. 4320 to 4323 ≠0). normal-system orientation.
31 The hardware configuration is such that the spindle Check the CNC model.
FAD function cannot be used.
In this case, the motor is not activated.
33 The hardware configuration is such that the spindle Check the CNC model.
EGB function cannot be used.
34 Both the spindle FAD function and the spindle EGB The two functions cannot be used at the same
function are enabled. time. Enable either function only.
34 The submodule SM (SSM) is faulty or the Submodule SM (SSM) error (synchronous
connection between SPM and SSM is in error. spindle)
*2 PSM contact signal

Between ESP1 and ESP2 on the PSM
Contact open: Emergency stop
Contact closed: Normal operation
- 884 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX B.LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
B
Fuse and fan
LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS
Ordering
Item Remarks
information
Fuse LCD-mo For i series control unit (7.2”/8.4”/10.4”) A02B-0236-K100
unted For i series control unit (15” ) A02B-0236-K101
type For is series control unit
Stand-al For control unit A02B-0265-K100
one type For i series display unit (10.4”) A02B-0303-K101
For i series display unit (15” ) A02B-0236-K100
For is series display unit
For PANEL i A08B-0084-K020
Others For operator’s panel I/O module A03B-0815-K001
For standard machine operator’s panel
For connector panel I/O module A03B-0815-K002
For operator’s panel connection unit A02B-0163-K111
For I/O Link-AS-i A03B-0815-K001
For terminal type I/O module A03B-0823-K001
Fan LCD-mo For basic unit (no-slot) A02B-0303-K120
motor unted For basic unit (one- or two-slot) A02B-0303-K121
type
Stand-al For basic unit (two-slot) A02B-0303-K120
one type For is series display unit
For basic unit (four-slot) A02B-0303-K122
For PANEL i (40-mm square) A08B-0084-K100
For PANEL i (60mm square) A08B-0084-K101
For PANEL i (for HDD unit) A08B-0084-K102
Others
Ordering
Item Remarks
information
Battery For LCD-mounted and stand-alone A02B-0200-K102
type control unit memory backup,
For PANEL i
For separate absolute pulse A06B-6050-K061
coder
Back light For 7.2” LCD A02B-0236-K112
Touch panel For 10.4” LCD A02B-0236-K110
protection sheet For 10.4” LCD (full-cover type) A02B-0303-K110
For 12.1” LCD A08B-0236-K118
For 15” LCD A08B-0082-K020
Pen for touch panel A02B-0236-K111
- 885 -
C.BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
C BOOT SYSTEM
Appendix C, "BOOT SYSTEM", consists of the following sections:
C.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................ 887

C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
PROCEDURE.......................................................................... 891
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS ............. 906
- 886 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX C.BOOT SYSTEM
C.1 OVERVIEW
The boot system load the CNC system software (Flash ROM →
DRAM), then starts it so that software can be executed.
The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in Flash ROM

A file is read from the FAT16-formatted memory card and
written to the flash memory.
(A FAT32-formatted memory card cannot be recognized.)
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in Flash ROM
(3) Checking a file (series and edition) in Memory card
(4) Deleting a file from Flash ROM
(5) Deleting a file from Memory card
(6) Saving a file in Flash ROM to a Memory card
(7) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a Memory card
(8) Formatting of a Memory card
This manual describes the activation of the boot system, as well as the
screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.
CAUTION
1 This control unit supports the use of a Memory card
as an input/output device. The Flash ATA card is
available:
See the order list for details of the supported Memory
card types.
2 On a Memory card, only those files that are in the
root directory can be accessed for display, reading,
and writing. Those in subdirectories cannot be used.
3 The time required to read or write each data item
varies depending on the Memory card type, the
status of use, and other factors.
4 For flash ATA cards, only those recommended by
FANUC are available.
5 When formatting a flash ATA card, use the quick
formatting method, which clears the file allocation
table and the directory information on the root
directory. An unformatted flash ATA card needs to
be formatted in FAT16 with a PC or the like. (A
FAT32-formatted ATA card cannot be recognized.)
- 887 -
C.1.1 Displaying the Power ON Sequence
(1) RAM TEST :END

(2) ROM TEST :END [60W1A]
(3) DRAM ID :xxxxxxxx
(4) SRAM ID :xxxxxxxx
(5) FROM ID :xxxxxxxx
*** MESSAGE ***

(7) LOADING CNC DATA-1 xxxxxx/xxxxxx
END
RAM TEST :END

(2) ROM TEST :ERROR Processing is stopped in the event of an
error
*** MESSAGE ***

(6) ROM PARITY ERROR:NC BASIC. HIT SELECT. SELECT key → SYSTEM MONITOR
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]
Details of display items

(1) WORK RAM test results are displayed. In the event of an error,
however, the sequence is not displayable, and LED indication is
conducted without error display.
(2) BOOT ROM parity test results are displayed. During normal
operation, the series and edition are displayed. In the event of an
error, processing is stopped.
(3) The ID of the DRAM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(4) The ID of the SRAM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(5) The ID of the FROM MODULE installed in the CNC is
displayed.
(6) The CNC BASIC software in flash memory is checked for
validity and, in the event of an error, an error is displayed. In the
event of an error, clicking the [SELECT] soft key allows you to
select the SYSTEM MONITOR screen.
(7) This message indicates that the CNC BASIC software is being
transferred to flash memory to DRAM.
- 888 -
C.1.2 Starting the Boot System

In ordinary system activation, the boot system automatically transfers
files from Flash ROM to DRAM in the background.
The user is not aware of this operation. However, the boot system
must be operated manually, from menu screen, when maintenance is
to be carried out or when the Flash ROM does not contain a required
file.
(1) In system maintenance, for example, to replace a file in ROM
Operation : Turn the power on by simultaneously pressing the
two soft keys at the right end. If no soft keys are provided as with
a touch panel, use MDI numeric keys 6 and 7.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
After an FROM ID and other items are displayed on the CNC

screen, releasing the key brings you to the SYSTEM MONITOR
screen.
(2) When the flash memory does not contain a file required to start
the CNC
Immediately after the CNC is turned on, the boot system starts
transferring files from Flash ROM to DRAM. If, for some reason,
a file required to start the CNC (NC BASIC) is not in Flash
ROM or has been destroyed, the boot system is automatically
started.
C.1.3 System Files and User Files

The boot system organizes files in Flash ROM into two main groups :
system files and user files. These two file types have the following
characteristics :
System files
CNC and servo control software provided by FANUC
User files
PMC sequence program (ladder), P-CODE macro program, and other
user-created files
- 889 -
Naming convention for user files

Each of the files in flash ROM has a specific name based on its type.
These file names are used by the following items described later.
• SYSTEM DATA CHECK
• SYSTEM DATA DELETE
• SYSTEM DATA SAVE
The correspondence between the file names and their types is shown
below.
File name Type

PMC□ Ladder
PMCS Ladder (for dual check safety)
M□PMCMSG PMC message multi-language data
CEX □.□M C language executor user application
CEX□○○○○ C language executor user data
PD□□_□□□ Macro executor user application
□: One numeric
○: One alphanumeric
- 890 -
C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING

PROCEDURE
When the boot system is first started, the MAIN MENU screen is
displayed. This screen is described below :
MAIN MENU screen
(1) SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60W1 - 01 (1) Screen title. The series and edition of
the BOOT SYSTEM are displayed at
(2) 1.END the right end.
(3) 2.USER DATA LOADING (2) Function for terminating the boot
(4) 3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING system and starting the CNC.
(5) 4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK (3) Function for writing data to Flash
(6) 5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE ROM.
(7) 6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE (4) Function for writing data to Flash
(8) 7.SRAM DATA BACKUP ROM.
(9) 8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT (5) Function for checking the edition of a
file in ROM.
(6) Function for deleting a file from Flash
*** MESSAGE *** ROM or Memory card.
(10) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (7) Function for making a backup copy of
the data stored on the Memory card.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] (8) Function for backing up and restoring
the SRAM area
(9) Function for formatting a Memory card.
(10) Simple operating instructions and error
messages are displayed.
Operating procedure
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key to select the desired function.
After positioning the cursor to the desired function, press the
[SELECT] soft key. Before executing a function, for a confirmation, it
maybe need to press the [YES] or [NO] soft key.
Basic operation
Position the cursor. Select a function Check the selection
[ UP ] [SELECT] [ YES ]
[ DOWN ] [ NO ]
Execute the Return to original

function Select END state
- 891 -
C.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen
Description
This screen is used to read a system or user file from a Memory card
into Flash ROM.
The USER DATA LOADING screen is used to load ROM data from a
Memory card to flash memory.
The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen is used to check the contents
of the ROM card installed in a Memory card and then load ROM data
from the Memory card to flash memory.
Screen configuration
(1) SYSTEM DATA LOADING (1) Screen title.

(2) MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123) (2) The size of the free space of the
(3) 1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 Memory card is displayed.
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00 (3) A list of files in the Memory card is
(4) 3 END displayed.
*** MESSAGE *** (4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.

(5) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ] (5) Message
Operating procedure
(1) Position the cursor to the file to be read from the Memory card
and written to Flash ROM. Then, press the [SELECT] soft key.
- A single page can list up to ten file names.
- If the Memory card contains ten or more files, the remaining
files are displayed on another page.
To display the next page, press the soft key.
To display the previous page, press the soft key.
The END option is displayed on the last page.
(2) When you select a file from the USER DATA LOADING screen,
you are prompted for confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA LOADING
MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)
1 G001A_B1.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
2 G001A_B2.MEM 1048704 2003-01-01 12:00
3 END
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
- 892 -
(3) When you select a file from the SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen, a ROM data confirmation screen is displayed for
confirmation.
SYSTEM DATA CHECK & DATA LOADING
G001A_B1.MEM
1 G001 001A
2 G001 021A
3 G001 041A
4 G001 061A
5 G001 081A
6 G001 0A1A
7 G001 0C1A
8 G001 0E1A
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(4) To start loading, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the
[NO] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD xxxxxx/xxxxxx
(5) When loading terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error
occurs, see C.3
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING COMPLETE.
HIT SELECT KEY.
NOTE
The CNC option parameters corresponding to
"FANUC Remote Option System" are saved in the
option information file (file name: OPRM INF) in
FROM. If this file is rewritten, the option
parameters need to be certified because their
settings are changed.
- 893 -
C.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen
Description
This screen is used to list files in Flash ROM or Memory card,
together with the corresponding numbers of management units in each
file and the series and edition of the software.
(1) SYSTEM DATA CHECK (1) Screen title.
(2) 1.FROM SYSTEM (2) Select the FROM SYSTEM screen.

(3) 2.MEMORY CARD SYSTEM (3) Select the MEMORY CARD SYSTEM
(4) 3.END screen.
(4) Returning to the MAIN MENU.
*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY. (5) Message
Screen configuration (FROM SYSTEM screen)

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM The
2 NC BAS-2(0008) number of management units
3 NC BAS-3(0008) constituting each file appears in
4 NC BAS-4(0008) parentheses to the right of the filename.
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
(3) 7 END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.
*** MESSAGE ***

(4) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY. (4) Message
- 894 -
Screen configuration (MEMORY CARD SYSTEM screen)

*** MESSAGE ***

Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.
(2) Select the file that you want to confirm (for example, "NC
BAS-1 (0008)").
(3) For the selected file, the management unit numbers are listed,
together with the series and editions of the management units.
After checking the listed data, select the [SELECT] soft key to
return to the file selection screen.

NC BAS-1(0008)
(2) 1 G001 001A 0000 (2) The following items are displayed for
2 G001 021A 0001 each management unit:
3 G001 041A 0002 - Series
4 G001 061A 0003 - ROM number and edition
5 G001 081A 0004 - Internal management-unit number
6 G001 0A1A 0005 If a check result cannot be displayed, a
7 G001 0C1A 0006 "@" is displayed.
8 G001 0E1A 0007
*** MESSAGE ***
HIT SELECT KEY.

- 895 -
Others (Parity information for the system file and user file)
The NC BAS-1, DGD0SRVO, and other system files in Flash ROM
contain parity information in each management unit. If the file name
field or parity field on the check screen contains a non-ASC II
character or an "@", the Flash ROM may have been destroyed or a
damaged file may have been read. Re-read the data from the Memory
card.
The PMC1, and other user files do not contain parity information in
each management unit. A non-ASCII character or an "@" may appear
in the series/edition information. In this case, it does not indicate that
the file has been damaged.
- 896 -
C.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen
Description
This screen is used to delete a user file from Flash ROM or Memory
card.
(1) SYSTEM DATA DELETE (1) Screen title.
(2) 1.FROM SYSTEM (2) Select the FROM SYSTEM screen.

(3) 2.MEMORY CARD SYSTEM (3) Select the MEMORY CARD SYSTEM
(4) 3.END screen.
*** MESSAGE ***

Screen configuration (FROM SYSTEM screen)

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM
2 NC BAS-2(0008) The number of management units
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
7 PMC1 (0001)
*** MESSAGE ***

- 897 -
Screen configuration (MEMORY CARD SYSTEM screen)

*** MESSAGE ***

(5) SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.
(5) Message
Operating procedure
(1) Select either the FROM SYSTEM or MEMORY CARD
SYSTEM screen.
(2) Select the file you want to delete.
(3) The following message is displayed for confirmation.
*** MESSAGE ***

DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(4) To start deleting, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel, press the
[NO] key.
*** MESSAGE ***

EXECUTING
ADDRESS xxxx:
(5) When deleting terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key. If an error
occurs, see C.3
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen)
The system files are protected from accidental deletion. User files,
however, are not protected. Protected system files can be overwritten
from the USER DATA LOADING / SYSTEM DATA LOADING
screen.
- 898 -
C.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen
Description
This screen is used to write a user file in Flash ROM to a Memory
card. Only user files can be saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card.
System files cannot be saved.
(1) SYSTEM DATA SAVE (1) Screen title.

FROM DIRECTORY
(2) 1 NC BAS-1(0008) (2) Names of files in Flash ROM
2 NC BAS-2(0008) The number of management units
5 DGD0SRVO(0003)
6 PS0B (0006)
7 PMC1 (0001)
*** MESSAGE ***

Operating procedure
(1) Select the file you want to save.
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message :
*** MESSAGE ***

SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) To start saving, press the [YES] key. To cancel, press [NO].
*** MESSAGE ***
STORE TO MEMORY CARD
- 899 -
(4) When saving terminates normally, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] key. The names of files
written to the Memory card are listed. Check the file names by,
for example, making a note of the list.
*** MESSAGE ***

FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC1.000
Saving ATA PROG

A file whose file name is ATA PROG contains an NC program.
Even if you want to save this file, if the boot software is of the
60W1/07 edition or later, you cannot save it on this SYSTEM DATA
SAVE screen, because it is saved together with SRAM data on the
SRAM DATA UTILITY screen.
Others (System files and user files on SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen)
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE function provides a safeguard against
free copying of the system files.
User files, however, are not protected.
Files saved from Flash ROM to a Memory card have the following
names :
Header ID in Flash ROM File name in Memory card

PMC1 → PMC1.xxx
PD010.5M → PD0105M.xxx
PD011.0M → PD0110M.xxx
"xxx" is replaced by one of 32 numbers "000", "001", …, and "031".

For example, if you attempt to save the file "PMC1 " from Flash
ROM to a Memory card, it will be saved with a name of "PMC1.000"
if no file with a name of "PMC1.000" is found on the Memory card. If,
however, that file is saved to a Memory card that already contains a
file named PMC1.000, the saved file is named PMC1.001. As files are
added, the extension is incremented up to a maximum of PMC1.031.
Any no-longer used numbers in the sequence of the extension
numbers are used in as sending order. If two or more files having
identical names but different extension numbers are normally saved to
the Memory card, check the file names displayed subsequently.
- 900 -
C.2.5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen
Description
This screen is used to collectively save and restore parameters, tool
compensation memories, and other data, retained after the CNC power
in SRAM is turned off, to and from a Memory card.
(1) SRAM DATA BACKUP (1) Screen title.
(2) 1.SRAM BACKUP ( CNC -> MEMORY CARD ) (2) Menu

2.RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD -> CNC )
(3) 3.END (3) Returning to the MAIN MENU.
(4) SRAM FILE SIZE : 1MBYTE (4) The SRAM file size is displayed.
(Displayed after a processing option is
selected.)
(5) SRAMBAK.001 (5) The name of the file currently being
saved or loaded is displayed. (Displayed
*** MESSAGE *** after a processing option is selected.)
SET MEMORY CARD NO.001
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.
*** MESSAGE ***

Operating procedure (Backing up data)

(1) Select "1.SRAM BACKUP" The following confirmation
message is displayed. To start backup, press the [YES] soft key.
(2) If the data cannot be saved entirely onto a single Memory card, a
message such as that shown below is displayed. With the power
still on, insert the second Memory card and press the [YES] key.
Press the [NO] key to cancel saving.
*** MESSAGE ***

SET MEMORY CARD NO.002
(3) In this way, you can divide SRAM data onto a maximum of 999
Memory card for backup.
- 901 -
(4) Upon the termination of backup, the system displays the

following message. Press the [SELECT] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
Operating procedure (Restoring the data)

(1) Select "2.RESTORE SRAM" The following confirmation
message is displayed. To start restoration, press the [YES] soft
key.
(2) A message such as that shown below is displayed. Insert the first
Memory card containing SRAMBACK.001 and press the [YES]
key. Press the [NO] key to cancel restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
SET MEMORY CARD INCLUDING SRAMBAK.001
(3) If another Memory card is required, a message such as that

shown below is displayed. With the power still on, insert the
second Memory card and press the [YES] key. Press the [NO]
key to cancel restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
SET MEMORY CARD INCLUDING SRAMBAK.002
(4) Replace the second card with another, if required. Repeat this
step until backing up all data.
(5) Upon the termination of restoration, the system displays the

*** MESSAGE ***
SRAM RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
- 902 -
CAUTION
1 Backup files will be created with a file name of
SRAMBAK.xxx, where xxx is replaced with a
number between 001 and 999 sequentially.
On the first Memory card, a backup file is created
with a name of SRAMBAK.001. If all data is not
contained on the single card, a backup file
containing the excess data is created with a name
of SRAMBAK.002 on the second Memory card.
In this way, you can divide data onto a maximum
of 999 Memory card for saving.
2 Check that the Memory card used for backup does
not contain a file with a name of SRAMBAK.xxx
before performing a BACKUP operation. You can
check a list of file names on a Memory card by
using the SYSTEM DATA LOADING function.
3 The Memory card used for backup needs to be
formatted in FAT16.
4 Depending on the boot software edition, the file
contents to be backed up and the file name differ:
- 60W1/06 edition or earlier
File contents: SRAM data
File name: SRAMBAK.xxx
- 60W1/07 edition or later
File contents: SRAM data, NC program (ATA
PROG in flash ROM)
File name: SRAM_BAK.xxx
Data previously backed up by an older edition of
boot software can be restored by a newer one.
- 903 -
C.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen
Description
This function is used to format a Memory card. Memory cards must be
formatted before they can be used for the first time or before they can
be re-used after their data has been destroyed or lost because of, for
example, battery failure.
Operating procedure
(1) From the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU screen, select
"8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT."
(2) The system displays the following confirmation message. Press

the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
(3) The system displays the following message asking whether to

delete all data on the Memory card. To format the Memory card,
press the [YES] key.
*** MESSAGE ***
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.
ALL DATA IN THE MEMORY CARD IS LOST.
(4) The system displays the following message during formatting :

*** MESSAGE ***
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.
(5) When a card has been formatted normally, the system display the
*** MESSAGE ***
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
- 904 -
C.2.7 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM
Description
The function is used to terminate the boot system and activate the
CNC.
Operating procedure
From the MAIN MENU screen, select "1. END." The system displays
the "ARE YOU SURE? HIT YES OR NO" message. To terminate the
boot system and activate the CNC, press the [YES] soft key. Press the
[NO] soft key, and you will be brought back to the MAIN MENU.
*** MESSAGE ***

C.2.8 Cautions
CAUTION
Bear the following cautions in mind if using boot
software of the 60W1/06 edition or later:
When restoring the following data in this system,

be sure to restore a pair of SRAM data and ATA
PROG data which were backed up at the same
time.
(ATA PROG data is in flash ROM.)
- Restoring SRAM data
- Restoring ATA PROG data
SRAM data and ATA PROG data are related to

each other. Storing either data would impair data
consistency. (This may result in events such as
destruction of program files.)
If, for some reason, you need to restore either
SRAM or ATA PROG data only, be sure to
initialize program files (perform a clear operation)
before restoration.
- 905 -
C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS
The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical

order.
Message Description and required action

D DEVICE ERROR (xxxx) An attempt to write data to Flash ROM was unsuccessful.
Turn the power off and back on again. If the second attempt
also fails, the Flash ROM may have been damaged or
destroyed. Replace the Flash ROM module.
F FILE CLOSE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
HIT SELECT KEY. may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
damaged electrically, or the Memory card may not be
inserted in the slot securely.
FILE DELETE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
FILE OPEN ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. Confirm that the Memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card is FAT16-formatted. (If the Memory card is formatted
in FAT32, it cannot be recognized.)
FILE READ ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
FILE SAVE ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE. There is insufficient free Flash ROM to store the selected
HIT SELECT KEY. file. Delete any unnecessary files from Flash ROM.
Alternatively, replace the Flash ROM module with another
with a larger size.
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE. The selected file cannot be read into Flash ROM. The
HIT SELECT KEY. selected file or the header information for Flash ROM may
have been damaged or destroyed.
ILLEGAL SRAM MODULE. The SRAM module ID is illegal. Check the drawing No. of
HIT SELECT KEY. the SRAM module.
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. HIT SELECT KEY. The extension number added to a file name exceeds 031.
Either replace the Memory card or delete any unnecessary
backup files.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The Memory card's battery is exhausted. Replace the
HIT SELECT KEY. battery.
MEMORY CARD DISMOUNT ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
MEMORY CARD FORMAT ERROR Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
may have gone dead, the Memory card may have been
- 906 -
Message Description and required action

M MEMORY CARD FULL. The Memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from
HIT SELECT KEY. the Memory card. Alternatively, replace the Memory card
with another card having sufficient free space.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. Check that the Memory
HIT SELECT KEY. card has been FAT-formatted.
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. The Memory card is not inserted into its slot. Check that the
HIT SELECT KEY. Memory card is pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED. HIT SELECT Although writing to the Memory card was selected, the write
KEY. inhibit switch is set. Disable the write inhibit switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to a Memory card failed. The Memory card’s battery
R ROM PARITY ERROR:NC BASIC. HIT NC BASIC data is not correct. Use SYSTEM DATA CHECK
SELECT. to check that CNC system software is installed.
S SRAM TEST ERROR (ECC) An error was detected in the SRAM module. You can start
up the system because data has been automatically
restored. Replace the SRAM module, however, just in case
that the data may be disarranged in the future.
- 907 -
D.MEMORY CARD SLOT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
D MEMORY CARD SLOT

Appendix D, "MEMORY CARD SLOT", consists of the following
sections:
D.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................909
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) .............................910
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION .........................................912
- 908 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX D.MEMORY CARD SLOT
D.1 OVERVIEW
Whether a memory card slot is provided or not depends on the

hardware configuration. See the following table:
Hardware
Card slot on LCD unit Card slot on control unit
configuration
Type 1 Provided No card slot
Provided
Type 2 Provided (This slot, however, cannot
be used.)
Provided
Type 3 (when PANEL i is used) Provided
(See NOTE given below.)
(Supplementary)
- Types 1 to 3 indicate hardware configuration. See Section D.3.
NOTE
When the hardware configuration is type 3,
software write operation and other operations are
implemented by open CNC functions.
- 909 -
D.2 MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS)
Flash ATA card (Data I/O)

Compact flash card (Data I/O)
NOTE
Use memory cards that are recommended by or
purchased from FANUC.
Use of the compact flash card adapter in the card slot on the display unit side
When a compact flash card is inserted into a compact flash card
adapter (A02B-0303-K150) (referred to below as the CF adapter)
purchased from FANUC, and then the CF adapter is inserted into the
card slot on the display unit side, the compact flash card lock function
is available, the memory card interface cover can be closed with the
CF adapter inserted.
1. Insertion
- Set a compact flash card in the CF adapter
(A02B-0303-K150).
- Check that lock lever A is lifted, then insert the CF adapter
into the memory card interface.
- Lower lock lever A.
- Close the memory card interface cover.
NOTE
1 For continuous operation with a CF adapter
inserted, be sure to lower lock lever A and close
the memory card interface cover.
2 The lock function is enabled only when a CF
adapter (A02B-0303-K150) is used.
3 Insert a CF adapter so that the plane bearing the
label faces the screen.
2. Extraction
- Open the cover of the memory card interface.
- Push up lock lever A.
- Push eject button B once. The button protrudes.
- Push eject button B again. The CF adapter is ejected.
- Hold the CF adapter with fingers and pull it out.
- Close the memory card interface cover.
NOTE
When the lock lever is lowered (locked), the eject
button cannot be pushed.
- 910 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX D.MEMORY CARD SLOT
Lock lever A
Compact flash card
Eject button B
Compact flash card adapter
- 911 -
D.3 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
Type 1
LCD-mounted type
Card slot on
display unit side
Control unit (LCD-mounted type)
Type 2
Stand-alone type (with an LCD unit)
Optical cable
Card slot on control
unit side
Card slot on
display unit side LCD unit for stand-alone type
Control unit (stand-alone type)
Type 3
When the HSSB interface is used to connect the personal computer or
PANEL i
(Whe PANEL i is
used)
Card slot on display
unit side
Card slot on control
unit side
Optical cable
HSSB
board
Personal Computer or PANEL i
Control unit (stand-alone type)
- 912 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX E.LED DISPLAY
E LED DISPLAY
Appendix E, "LED DISPLAY", consists of the following sections:
E.1 OVERIVIEW............................................................................914
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ..............915
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)..................918
- 913 -
E.LED DISPLAY APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
E.1 OVERIVIEW
On the CNC, a 7-segment LED is installed.

The 7-segment LED indication changes according to the operating
status of the CNC.
The 7-segment LED indications provided after the power is turned on
until the CNC is ready for operation and when system errors occur are
described below.
- 914 -
E.2 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON)

Table E.2 (a) Meanings of LED Indications
LED Display Meaning
Power not turned on (power-off state)
Initialization completed and ready for operation
CPU started up
(BOOT system)
Initialization of G/A
(BOOT system)
Initialization of various functions
Task initialization
System configuration parameter check

Additional board waiting 2
Installation of various drivers

All files cleared
Title display
System ROM test
State where the CPU is not started after the power is turned
on
(BOOT system)
BOOT system ended, NC system started
(BOOT system)
FROM initialization
Loading of embedded software
Loading of software for optional boards
IPL monitoring in progress
DRAM test error

(BOOT system, NC system)
BOOT system error

(BOOT system)
File cleared
Optional board waiting 1
- 915 -
LED Display Meaning

Loading of basic system software
(BOOT system)

Final system operation check
Indicator initialization
(BOOT system)
FROM initialization
(BOOT system)
OPEN CNC BOOT (NCBOOT32) being executed
BOOT monitoring in progress
(BOOT system)
If processing stops during startup due to a CNC error, and the system
alarm screen is not displayed, take corrective action referring to Table
E.2 (b).
Table E.2 (b) Faulty Regions and Check Items If Processing Stops
during Startup
LED
Faulty region and check item
display
The power supply (24V) or the power module may be faulty.
The main board or the stand-alone type display may be

faulty.
Check the alarm LED "LOW" (Note 1) on the main board.

If "LOW" is lit:
The CPU card may be faulty.
If "LOW" is not lit:
The main board or the CPU card may be faulty.
The SRAM/FROM module or the main board may be faulty.
The main board or the stand-alone type display may be

faulty.
- 916 -
NOTE
Refer to Section 2.4 for LCD-mounted type
30i/31i/32i.
Refer to Section 3.4 for LCD-mounted type
300is/310is/320is.
Refer to Section 4.4 for stand-alone. (The name is
alarm LED "4".)
- 917 -
E.3 7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)
LED Meaning
Display Action
ROM PARITY error
The SRAM/FROM module may be faulty.
An FROM file for program memory cannot be created.
The state of the file for program memory on the FROM is
checked with the BOOT system.
Rearrange the FROM.
Check the FROM size.
Software-detected system alarm
If it is generated during startup: Use BOOT to check the state
of the built-in software in FROM, and check the size of DRAM.
In other cases: Check the error on the alarm screen and take
corrective action.
The DRAM/SRAM/FROM ID is invalid.
(BOOT system, NC system)
The CPU card or the SRAM/FROM module may be faulty.
A servo CPU timeout occurred.
Check the state of servo software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
The servo card or the additional axis board may be faulty.
An error occurred when embedded software is incorporated.
Check the state of embedded software on the FROM with the
BOOT system.
The indicator cannot be recognized.
The display may be faulty.
Hardware-detected system alarm
Check the error on the alarm screen and take corrective
action.
Software for optional boards could not be loaded.
Check the state of software for optional boards on the FROM
with the BOOT system.
An error occurred in waiting for an optional board.
The option board or the PMC module may be faulty.
The BOOT FROM was updated.
(BOOT system)
Turn on the power again.
DRAM test error
The ID of the indicator is invalid.
Check the indicator.
The ID of the BASIC system software does not math that of the
hardware.
Check the combination of the BASIC system software and the
hardware
- 918 -
F.MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)
F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC

(BOOT-UP AND IPL)
Appendix F, "MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND
IPL)", consists of the following sections:
F.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................920
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES .......................................922
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS .............................................924
F.3.1 BOOT Screen ...............................................................924
F.3.2 IPL Screen ....................................................................928
F.4 OTHER SCREENS ..................................................................929
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen.......................................................929
F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ..................930
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen...................................................931
- 919 -
F. MAINTENANCE OF OPEN
CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
F.1 OVERVIEW
When the Series 300i/310i/320i/300is/310is/320is is used or the CNC

is connected to the PC over HSSB, Ncboot32.exe can be used for the
maintenance of the CNC.
NOTE
When the CNC is connected to the PC over
Ethernet, use the standard LCD/MDI for the
maintenance of the CNC.
Unless otherwise specified, the following examples assume the use of

Ncboot32.exe of the Windows 2000/XP version.
Ncboot32.exe provides the following functions:
• BOOT screen (for CNC system data maintenance, SRAM backup,
and so forth)
• IPL screen (for clearing SRAM, and so forth)
• Display of the CNC power-on screen
• Display of CNC alarm screen
• Re-connection in case of the occurrence of a communication
error
• Start of a registered application program
• Automatic display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next
startup of the CNC (for the Series 300i/310i/320i only)
• Saving and restoration of auto backup data (for the Series 300is
only)
For Windows 2000/XP, Ncboot32.exe is copied to the System 32
folder of Windows during driver installation.
For Windows CE.NET (Series 300is/310is/320is), it has been installed
in the Storage Card\FANUC folder.
At the start of Windows, Ncboot32.exe starts automatically, and
resides in the system tray.
(Icon at the center)
Supplementary 1: Multi-connection (Windows 2000/XP only)

Ncboot32.exe supports HSSB multi-connection. The CNCs connected
by HSSB are managed as nodes. The boot, IPL, and system alarm
screens are displayed in windows that are opened independently for
each node.
Supplementary 2: Termination method

Normally, Ncboot32.exe need not be terminated. If you need to
terminate it, however, see the "System tray" explanation, below:
Display the popup menu and select "End".
When the Ncboot32.exe window is open, End cannot be selected.
- 920 -
System tray (Series 300i/310i/320i)

Right-click the icon in the system tray, and the popup menu, shown
below, appears at the lower left corner of the screen.
Selecting [Open] causes the status screen to open.

Selecting [About] causes the version information dialog box to appear.
Selecting [End] causes Ncboot32.exe to terminate.
Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.
System tray (Series 300is/310is/320is)

Keep tapping the icon in the system tray for one second or longer, and
the popup menu, shown below, appears at the lower left corner of the
screen.
For equipment without a touch panel, the popup menu can be

displayed by restarting "\Storage Card\FANUC\Ncboot32.exe" with
the icon having been registered in the system tray.
Selecting [Open] causes the option setting screen to open.

Selecting [Save] causes the contents of the Registry to be stored and
causes the registered files to be saved in the "\Storage Card\Backup"
folder. If auto backup fails, the files in this folder are used for
recovery.
Selecting [About] causes the version information dialog box to appear.
Selecting [End] causes Ncboot32.exe to terminate.
Double-clicking the icon in the system tray causes Open in the menu
to be automatically selected.
NOTE
Depending on when to tap, the popup menu may
not be displayed normally. If this occurs, repeat
tapping until it is displayed normally.
- 921 -
F.2 CHANGING START SEQUENCES
By pressing the MDI keys 6 and 7 and turning the power ON or by

setting the rotary switch provided on the main board of the CNC main
unit (for the stand-alone type or LCD-mounted type Series 300is) to
the F position, you can perform maintenance work using the BOOT
and IPL screens.
During normal operation

1. The CNC starts without waiting for communication to be
established.
2. After communication is established, the PC performs
initialization described below.
3. Start FOCAS2.
4. Start a registered application program.
5. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.
During maintenance
1. Wait until communication with the CNC is established.
2. Display the boot screen.
3. Display the IPL screen.
4. Display the CNC power-on screen.
5. Start FOCAS2.
6. Start a registered application program.
7. Perform monitoring for communication errors and CNC system
alarms.
- 922 -
• Location of rotary switch
• LCD-mounted type Series 300is/310is/320is
Rear view
Power supply
module
Rotary switch
• Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i
Rotary switch
- 923 -
F.3 EXPLANATION OF SCREENS
NOTE
To open each screen of Ncboot32.exe, you are
recommended to use either the mouse or touch panel.
F.3.1 BOOT Screen
The area where the file is to be placed can be changed by using the
[Setting...] button.
Select the memory card on the CNC or a PC folder. The file location
may be changed at any time.
"Memory Card on CNC": Specify the memory card slot of the

CNC.
1. LCD-mounted type CNC : Beside the display unit
2. Stand-alone type CNC (without a display unit) : Control unit
3. Stand-alone type CNC (with a display unit) : Beside the display unit
(The display unit represents a LCD unit with no PC functions.)
"Folder": Specify a folder on the PC.

To use the memory card slot beside PANEL i, select "Folder" and
specify the drive name given to the memory card by Windows.
- 924 -
F.3.1.1 System data manipulation

The following screen is used for manipulating system data (including
control software and ladder programs) on the NC.
[Load...] opens the file selection screen. Specify a file to be loaded.

[Save] saves the selected NC system data in a file.
[Check] checks the selected NC system data.
[Delete] deletes the selected NC system data.
- 925 -
F.3.1.2 SRAM operation

This screen is used to store and restore NC SRAM data.
[Backup]: Saves SRAM data to a file.

[Restore]: Restore SRAM data from a file.
The progress of the operation is indicated in the lower part of the
screen. The name of the backup file is automatically determined
according to the SRAM size and cannot be changed.
The CNC has the function of automatically saving the data of SRAM
in FROM (boot software version 60W1-07 and later). The PC can
restore the data that was saved automatically to SRAM. Press the
[AutoBackup...] button to display the following screen.
Select a saved image under "Name" and press the [Restore] button to
restore the SRAM data of the CNC.
- 926 -
F.3.1.3 File operation

The following screen is used for operating files on a memory card in
the CNC or in a folder of the PC.
[Delete] deletes a selected file.

[Format] formats the memory card. This button is valid when the
memory card is selected by [Setting...]
[Refresh] updates the file list to the latest state. After changing
memory cards or floppy disks, click this button.
- 927 -
F.3.2 IPL Screen
NOTE
The contents of the IPL screen vary depending on
the CNC model. Follow the instructions displayed in
the menu.
The CNC allows functions to be performed according to the key status

set at power-on.
The open CNC does not allow this operation. On the IPL screen,
however, equivalent functions can be executed.
For details of the menu on the IPL screen and supported functions, see
the table given in Section F.3.2.1.
F.3.2.1 Functions on the IPL screen
Corresponding MDI key operation

Title on IPL screen at power-on
(Operation with a standard CNC)
0. EXIT
1. IPL MONITOR <-> + <.>
- 928 -
F.4 OTHER SCREENS
F.4.1 CNC Alarm Screen
This screen appears when a system alarm is issued in the CNC. (The
above screen is an example. The displayed information varies
depending on the system alarm issued in the CNC.)
- 929 -
F.4.2 Status Screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only)

To open the status screen, double-click the icon in the system tray.
Alternatively, in the menu popped up by right-clicking, click OPEN.
Node: Node number

Name: Node name. (Define the node name in advance by using the
HSSB applet on the control panel.)
Bus: Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)
Status: Status (in hexadecimal)
Bit 2: End of boot processing
Bit 3: End of IPL processing
Bit 4: Rotary switch position 0
Bit 5: Display of 30 lines on IPL/system alarm screen
Bit 8: CNC system alarm
Pop up this window on communication error: By checking this item,
this screen is opened automatically when a communication error
occurs.
Clicking the [Close] button closes the screen.

Clicking the [Setting...] button opens the option setting screen.
Clicking the [About...] button opens the version information screen.
NOTE
The Series 300is/310is/320is does not provide a
status screen.
- 930 -
F.4.3 Option Setting Screen

On the option setting screen, application programs can be registered.
Any programs for use with FOCAS2 will not run unless they are
started after communication establishment with CNC. By registering
these programs in Ncboot32.exe, they can be executed in
synchronization with the start of FOCAS2.
For the Series 300is, it is possible to perform auto backup and

configure MDI keys.
F.4.3.1 Option setting screen (Series 300i/310i/320i)

Clicking the [Settings...] button on the status screen causes the option
setting screen to open. On the option setting screen, an application
must be registered with each node that requires it. In addition, it is
possible to set the display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next
startup of the CNC.
[Node] selects a node. In the list box in the center of the screen, the
programs registered for the selected node are displayed.
[New...] registers a new program. When a blank character is included
in the path, it is enclosed with double quotation marks.
[Remove] deletes a selected line.
[Edit] allows editing of a selected line. This button is used to edit
arguments. The character string %d in the command line is replaced
by a node number. To represent % itself, describe %%.
Example: To start the CNC screen display function after FOCAS2

starts at that node, code the following:
“C:\Program Files\CNCScreen\CNCScrn.exe” /Node=%d
- 931 -
To set the display of the BOOT/IPL screen during the next startup of
the CNC, select the "Boot Option" tab on the option setting screen.
If a CNC that is not grayed out is checked, the BOOT/IPL screen

appears during the next startup of the CNC, regardless of the setting of
the rotary switch on the CNC side. This display setting is enabled
only once and automatically cleared by Ncboot32.exe.
- 932 -
F.4.3.2 Option setting screen (Series 300is/310is/320is)

To open the option setting screen, double-tap the icon in the system
tray. Alternatively, select [Open] from the popup menu of the system
tray.
NOTE
For any changes made on the option setting screen
of the Series 300is/310is/320is to take effect, you
must turn the power off and back on.
CNC setting screen
[Status]-[CNC] : Status (in hexadecimal)

Bit2 : End of boot processing
Bit3 : End of IPL processing
Bit4 : Rotary switch position 0
Bit5 : Display of 30 lines on IPL/system alarm screen
Bit8 : CNC system alarm
[Status]-[Bus] :
Hardware communication status (0: Communication error, 1:
Communication established)
[MDI]-[Type] allows you to select an MDI key type.

Auto : QWERTY MDI key type, M and T series
standard MDI key type
M series : MDI keyboard for M series
T series : MDI keyboard for T series
Selecting [MDI]-[Use sticky keys] allows you to use the functions of

the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys without pressing these keys in
combination with other keys. For example, you can press Alt first and
then 'F' instead of pressing Alt and 'F' at the same time. If you remove
the check mark, you must press Alt and 'F' at the same time.
[MDI]-[Definition file] allows you to specify a customized MDI key
definition file.
- 933 -
Device setting screen
Place a check mark next to [Allow CNC to use Windows devices] to

make the devices on Windows (Ethernet, serial, and PCMCIA
devices) usable by the CNC.
Place a check mark next to [Watch fan motors for display unit] to
check the operation of the display unit of the stand-alone type CNC; if
an error is detected, an error message is displayed.
Backup setting screen
Place a check mark next to [Enable battery backup unit] to

automatically save the contents of the Registry and files when the
power is turned off. A dedicated battery is used to supply power
during a saving operation after the power is turned off.
Place a check mark next to [Backup Windows registry] to
automatically save the contents of the Registry when the power is
turned off.
- 934 -
NOTE
Usually, the contents of the Registry are not
changed and, therefore, no problems will arise if
they are not automatically saved. You are
recommended to remove the check mark next to
Auto saving of Registry just in case.
[Battery life span] allows you to set the number of days after which a
message prompting you to save manually is to be displayed during
long-period operation.
[Battery alarm] indicates the state of the battery dedicated for backup
(in hexadecimal notation).
0000 : Normal
0001 : The previous auto saving not completed
Other : Battery hardware error value
Start/Load/Save setting screen

This screen allows you to edit save, restore, and start files and to
check execution results. Start allows you to select the file to be started
when the power is turned on. Save allows you to select the file to be
saved when the power is turned off. Load allows you to select the file
to be restored when the power is turned on.
The following shows the Save screen as an example. The screen

layout and the main operating instructions are common to the Start,
Load, and Save screens.
- 935 -
The [New...] button is used to register a new file. Pressing the button
causes the following dialog box to appear, allowing you to specify a
file.
- Start screen
In the [File name] field, specify a full path name of the

file to be executed.
In the [Parameter] field, specify the program argument.
- Load/Save screen
[Type] is used to specify whether the file is on the Disk

(object store) or it is a memory mapped file.
In the [File name] field, specify the full path name if the
file is on the Disk; specify the name of the file mapping
object if it is a memory mapped file.
NOTE
The name of a file mapping object is used
as a temporary file for use during saving
and restoration. You must, therefore,
specify a string characters effective as a
file name.
In the [Memory size] field, specify the size of the
memory mapped file. For a file on the Disk, you need not
specify the size because it is calculated from the actual
file name.
The [Remove] button allows you to cancel the registration of the

selected line.
The [Edit...] button allows you to change the changes made with the
[New...] button.
The [Up] button is used to move a selected line up in the registration
sequence.
The [Down] button is used to move a selected line down in the
registration sequencer.
- 936 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT
G MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE
TYPE UNIT
Appendix G, "MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT",
consists of the following sections:
G.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................938

G.2 OPERATION ............................................................................939
G.3 OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTION .....................................940
- 937 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
G.1 OVERVIEW
Overview
The FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i of stand-alone type has a 7-segmentL
ED, rotary switch, and push switch.
When there is no MDI or MDI cannot be used due to a malfunction,
battery backed-up data can be saved or restored if the rotary switch
and push switch are operated.
NOTE
When MDI is available, use maintenance operation
of the BOOT function.
Layout of the 7-segment LED and switches

The 7-segment LED, the rotary switch, and the push switch are
located as shown in the following photo:
7-segment LED (STATUS)
Rotary switch (MTSW)
Push switch (PSW)
- 938 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
G.2 OPERATION
Operation before power-on

Before turning on the power, select a function number by using the
rotary switch. When the power is turned on after the selection with the
rotary switch, the number corresponding to the selected function
number is indicated on the LED. The indication blinks at intervals of
about one second.
Function number
Each function is assigned a number. This number is called a function
number hereinafter in this manual. The function numbers that can be
selected with the rotary switch are listed below. Do not set the
reserved function numbers.
Function
Explanation
number
0 Normal state.
1 Set a display unit number in the Ethernet Display
function.
2 Set a node number in the Ethernet Display function.
3 Reserved
4 Checks settings in the Ethernet Display function.
5 Clears all data in memory.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Saves battery backed-up main board data in a memory
card at a time.
9 Reserved
A Restores battery backed-up main board data from a
memory card at a time.
B Reserved
C Reserved
D Reserved
E Does not wait for the display unit.
F Performs maintenance work.
- 939 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
G.3 OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTION
Function number 1
This function sets a display unit number in the Ethernet Display
function.
(1) Check that number 1 blinks on the LED, and press the push
switch.
(2) If the push switch is pressed, the 16 numbers from 0 to F are
displayed on the LED in sequence at one second intervals.
When the display unit number to be set is displayed on the LED,
press the push switch.
0 : Not used.
1 : The HSSB connection display unit or CNC-specific
display unit is set.
2 to 4 : Not used.
5 : The Ethernet connection display unit is set.
6 to F : Not used.
(3) The selected display unit number blinks on the LED. Press the
push switch again.
(4) The selected display unit number is displayed on the LED and
saved in the CNC.
Function number 2
This function sets a node number in the Ethernet Display function.
switch.
(2) If the push switch is pressed, the 16 numbers from 0 to F are
displayed on the LED in sequence at one second intervals.
When the node number to be set is displayed on the LED, press
the push switch.
The node number ranges from 0 to 7.
(3) The selected node number blinks on the LED. Press the push
switch again.
(4) The node number is displayed on the LED and the display unit
number is saved in the CNC.
Function number 4
This function checks settings in the Ethernet Display function.
switch.
(2) When the push switch is pressed, 0 and 1 are displayed on the
LED alternately at one second intervals. When 0 is displayed,
(3) The selected number 0 blinks on the LED. Press the push
switch to stop blinking.
(4) The three numbers from 0 to 2 are displayed in sequence at one
second intervals again. When the number to be checked is
displayed on the LED, press the push switch.
0 : Not used.
1 : A display unit number is checked.
2 : A node number is checked.
- 940 -
G.MAINTENANCE OF
(5) The selected number blinks. Press the push switch to stop
blinking.
Function number 5
This function clears all the battery backed-up SRAM data.
The settings of the Ethernet Display function are also cleared and the
display unit number and node number are set to 1 and 0, respectively.
switch.
(2) Number 5 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(3) Display of the LED changes in the order: "-", "F", and "0".
(4) After all-clear operation terminates normally, the LED display
stops changing at number 0.
(5) Turn off the power, return the rotary switch to the original
position, and turn on the power again.
WARNING
1 This operation enables the CNC system to start up
solely (initial state). Accordingly, to recover
various functional operations, the cleared data
needs to be set again.
2 This operation can be performed by those
personnel who received the training of
maintenance and safety.
Function number 8
This function saves battery backed-up main board data in a memory
card at a time. The data saved using this function can be restored at a
time by performing the operation for function number A or by using
the SRAM DATA UTILITY function of the boot function.
(1) Inset a memory card with enough free space into the memory
card slot (MEMORY CARD CNM1B) of the main body.
switch.
(3) Number 8 is displayed on the LED. Press the push switch.
(4) While data is saved in the memory card, display of the LED is
rotating clockwise.
(5) If the data cannot fit in one memory card, number 3 blinks.
Replace the memory card with another one, and press the push
switch.
(6) If the data cannot be written to the memory card, number 2
blinks on the LED. Replace the memory card with another one
and press the push switch.
(7) When the data has been saved normally, number 0 is displayed
on the LED. If the data cannot be saved normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
(8) If the data cannot be backed up because it is illegal, number 1
blinks on the LED. In this case, it is impossible to save the data
at a time. Back up individual data items one by one, then perform
all-clear operation.
- 941 -
G. MAINTENANCE OF
Function number A
This function restores battery backed-up main board data from a
memory card at a time.
(1) Insert the memory card in the memory card slot (MEMORY
CARD CNM1B) of the control unit.
(2) Check that A blinks on the LED, and press the push switch.
(3) When letter A is displayed on the LED, press the push switch.
(4) While data is being restored from the memory card, the LED
indication turns counterclockwise.
(5) If the entire data cannot be restored from the single memory card,
number 3 blinks. Replace the memory card with the next memory
card, and press the push switch.
(6) If the memory card cannot be recognized correctly, number 2
blinks on the LED. Check the memory card status, and press the
push switch.
(7) When the data has been restored normally, number 0 is displayed
on the LED. If the data cannot be restored normally, number 1 is
displayed on the LED.
Function number E
This setting does not wait for the display unit. Use this setting for a
configuration without a display unit.
- 942 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION
H ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION

Appendix H, "ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION", consists of the
following sections:
H.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................944
H.2 EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION...................946
H.3 DISPLAY UNIT NUMBER SETTING AND
CONFIRMATION....................................................................949
H.3.1 Display Unit Number Setting...................................949
H.3.2 Display Unit Number Confirmation.........................950
H.4 NODE NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION ..........951
H.4.1 Method of Node Number Setting .............................951
H.4.2 Method of Node Number Confirmation...................952
H.5 CHANGING START SEQUENCES .......................................953
H.6 NCBOOT32E.exe.....................................................................954
H.6.1 Boot Screen ..............................................................956
H.6.2 File Storage Location Selection ...............................957
H.6.3 System Data Operation.............................................958
H.6.4 S-RAM Operation ....................................................959
H.6.5 File Operation...........................................................960
H.6.6 IPL Screen................................................................961
H.6.7 CNC Alarm Screen...................................................962
H.6.8 Status Screen ............................................................963
H.6.9 Option Setting Screen ..............................................964
H.6.10 Changer Screen ........................................................966
H.7 STARTING OF THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY
FUNCTION ..............................................................................967
- 943 -
H.ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
H.1 OVERVIEW
Up to eight CNCs of stand-alone type and one PANEL i unit (which

may be hereinafter referred to as a personal computer) can be
connected with each other via Ethernet to use the personal computer
as a display unit for the CNCs.
Hub
ハブ
PANEL i Ethernet
M M M
....... Embedded Ethernet

(embedded port)
Stand-alone type Series 30i/31i/32i

(Up to eight CNCs can be connected.)
• CNC screens that can be displayed and operated by Ethernet
Display function
CNC screen for maintenance (NCBOOT32E.exe)
- Display and operation of the boot screen
- Display and operation of the IPL screen
- Display of the CNC power-on screen
- Display of the CNC alarm screen
CNC screen for normal operation (CNCScrnE.exe)
- Display and operation of the general CNC screen
• Number of connectable CNCs
Up to eight CNCs can be connected to one personal
computer.
• Ethernet address setting
- The IP address of a CNC is the half-fixed address
192.168.1.(10+N) [from 192.168.1.10 to 192.168.1.17].
The value of N at the end is set using a rotary switch. The
IP address of the personal computer needs to be fixed at
192.168.1.200.
The TCP port numbers 8193 and 8198 are used for the
CNCs, and the UDP port number 8197 is used for the
personal computer. (No port number needs to be set.)
- When Ethernet Display function option is not selected, the
IP address of a CNC connectable to the personal computer
is 192.168.1.10 only.
- 944 -
NOTE
1 When using Ethernet Display function, note the following:
• The screen update interval of Ethernet Display function is longer than that of a
CNC-dedicated display unit. Even when a higher-performance personal
computer is used, the screen update interval cannot be made shorter than that
of a CNC-dedicated display unit.
• When high-load machining such as high-speed and high-precision machining is
performed, Ethernet Display function is more affected than a CNC-dedicated
display unit, so a longer screen update interval may result.
• As described in Appendix H.2, "EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION",
Ethernet Display function is designed for a system where multiple machines
share a display unit or a system that does not need a display unit usually. For
example, when using a machine that the machine operator operates by
displaying and operating the CNC screen at all times as in the case of using
MANUAL GUIDE i, use a CNC-dedicated display unit.
2 Only CNCs of stand-alone type can be used.
3 When Ethernet Display function is used, the PCMCIA Ethernet card cannot be
used. When using FANUC LADDER-III and SERVO GUIDE, use the embedded
port (Ethernet connector (CD38A) on the control unit).
4 Ethernet Display function cannot be operated with Fast Ethernet board.
5 When Ethernet Display function is used, the HSSB connection needs to be cleared
or the CNC-dedicated display unit needs to be disconnected. When a
CNC-dedicated display unit is to be connected, software for the graphic function
needs to be installed on the CNC.
6 For a personal computer (or PANEL i), select a CPU and memory size that can
sufficiently handle the connected CNCs and application software used. When
multiple CNCs are used, it is recommended to select Pentium III (866 MHz or
higher) for the CPU and a memory of 256 MB or more.
7 When PANEL i is used, the USB interface QWERTY MDI, FA full keyboard, or
general full keyboard is required. Refer to "FANUC PANEL i CONNECTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64223EN/02)".
8 When Ethernet Display function is used, the DHCP client function is automatically
disabled.
9 In a personal computer environment based on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or
later, a security warning screen as shown below is displayed when Ethernet
Display function is used for the first time. Select "Unblock".
- 945 -
H.2 EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION
Example 1: When multiple CNCs share a display unit

PANEL i is shared as a display unit by five CNCs.
CNC screen display and operation

(permanent connection)
Hub
CNCScrnE
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
JA JA JA JA JA
41 41 41 41 41
M M M M M
E E E E E
M M M M M
JA JA JA JA JA
O O O O O
41 41 41 41 41
R R R R R
Y Y Y Y Y
C JA C JA C JA C JA C JA
A 41 A 41 A 41 A 41 A 41
E E E E E
T T T T T
H H H H H
E E E E E
R R R R R
LADDER-III SERVO GUIDE

CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2
C C C C C
O O O O O
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
SLOT1 SLOT1 SLOT1 SLOT1 SLOT1
SLOT2 SLOT2 SLOT2 SLOT2 SLOT2
LE LE LE LE LE
D D D D D
1 1 1 1 1
LE LE LE LE LE
D D D D D
2 2 2 2 2
S S S S S
WI WI WI WI WI
T T T T T
C C C C C
P P P P P
S S S S S
W W W W W
PANEL i CNC1 CNC2 CNC3 CNC4 CNC5

(192.168.1.200) (192.168.1.10) (192.168.1.11) (192.168.1.12) (192.168.1.13) (192.168.1.14)
The software required for this configuration is indicated below.
<CNC>
1. Control software for Ethernet Display function (series
656N/edition 01 or later)
2. Boot software (series 60W1/edition 13 or later)
3. Control software for Embedded Ethernet function (series
656E/edition 10 or later)
4. Communication management software (series 656F/edition 10 or
later)
5. Ethernet Display function (option)
6. CNC Screen Display function (option)
<Personal computer>
1. Disk for CNC Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later)
- 946 -
Example 2: When no display unit is required

No display unit is required usually. However, a notebook personal
computer is connected as a display unit to a CNC for maintenance.
CNC screen display and operation

(temporary connection)
CNCScrnE
LADDER-III SERVO GUIDE
Notebook PC CNC
(192.168.1.200) (192.168.1.10)
The software required for this configuration is indicated below.
<CNC>
1. Control software for Ethernet Display function (series
656N/edition 01 or later)
2. Boot software (series 60W1/edition 13 or later)
3. Control software for Embedded Ethernet function (series
656E/edition 10 or later)
4. Communication management software (series 656F/edition 10 or
later)
5. CNC Screen Display function (option)
NOTE
When a personal computer and CNC are connected
with each other on a one-to-one basis, the optional
Ethernet Display function may not be selected. In
this case, the node number is fixed at "0" (IP
address: 192.168.1.10).
<Personal computer>
1. Disk for CNC Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later)
- 947 -
Example 3: When a connection is made with a factory network

Personal computer 1 is connected to hub 1 as a display unit for CNC1,
CNC2, and CNC3. Personal computer 2 is connected to hub 2 as a
display unit for CNC4, CNC5, and CNC6. To communicate with
personal computer 3 on the factory network, a Fast Ethernet board is
added to each CNC, and personal computer 3 and all CNCs are
connected to hub 3.
Operation monitor
Office
PC 3
(192.168.2.100)
CIMPLICITY iCELL
CNC screen display and

operation Factory
Hub 3
ハブ3
Hub 1 Hub 2
CNCScrnE ハブ 1 ハブ2
CNC1 CNC2 CNC3 CNC4 CNC5 CNC6
PC 1 PC 2
(192.168.1.200) (192.168.1.200)
Embedded Ethernet
Fast Ethernet board

Embedded Ethernet (192.168.1.10) (192.168.1.11) (192.168.1.12) Embedded Ethernet (192.168.1.10) (192.168.1.11) (192.168.1.12)
Fast Ethernet board (192.168.2.10) (192.168.2.11) (192.168.2.12) Fast Ethernet board (192.168.2.20) (192.168.2.21) (192.168.2.22)
NOTE
The basic network configuration based on Ethernet
Display function consists of only CNCs and a
personal computer for display. If the network has
a personal computer to which CNCs do not
communicate, CNC communication processing load
increases, and the display speed can slow down.
So, avoid connecting with the network at the whole
factory. However, when a personal computer is to
be connected temporarily for a purpose other than
display, the personal computer can be connected to
the network by satisfying the IP address system
above.
- 948 -
H.3 DISPLAY UNIT NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION
To use Ethernet Display function, set the display unit number to "5"
(Sets the display unit for Ethernet connection) with the rotary switch.
H.3.1 Display Unit Number Setting
Set the rotary switch to "1" (Function number 1) then turn on the
power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to set the
display unit number.
Function number 1
(1) Check that "1" is blinking on the 7-segment LED then press the
push switch.
(2) Each of the sixteen numbers "0" to "F" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When "5" is
displayed, press the push switch.
(3) On the 7-segment LED, "5" blinks.
The display unit numbers are defined as follows:
0 : Not used
1 : Sets the display unit as a display unit connected to
: HSSB or a CNC-dedicated display unit.
2 to 4 : Not used
5 : Sets the display unit for Ethernet connection.
6 to F : Not used
(4) Press the push switch again. The blinking stops and the display
unit number "5" is saved to the CNC.
(5) Set the rotary switch to a proper position according to Appendix
H.5, "START SEQUENCE SWITCHING". Next, turn off the
CNC then turn on the CNC again.
CAUTION
Never turn off the power to the CNC until steps (1)
through (4) above for display unit number setting
are completed.
- 949 -
H.3.2 Display Unit Number Confirmation

Two methods of confirming the currently set display unit number are
available as described below.
Confirming the display unit number at power-on

power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to confirm the
display unit number.
Function number 4
push switch.
(2) Each of the two numbers "0" and "1" is displayed on the
(4) Press the push switch again. Each of the three numbers "0"
through "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED at intervals of
about one second. When "1" is displayed on the 7-segment LED,
(6) Press the push switch once more. The blinking stops and the
display unit number saved to the CNC is displayed. Check that
the display unit number "5" is set.
Confirming the display unit number in normal operation

When the CNC is performing normal operation, the display unit
number blinks on the 7-segment LED while the push switch is held
down with the rotary switch set to "2".
NOTE
Upon completion of display unit number
confirmation, be sure to return the rotary switch to
the previous position.
- 950 -
H.4 NODE NUMBER SETTING AND CONFIRMATION
With Ethernet Display function, a node number needs to be set to

determine the value of N at the end of IP address 192.168.1.(10+N) of
a CNC.
H.4.1 Method of Node Number Setting
power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to set a node
number.
Function number 2
push switch.
(2) Each of the sixteen numbers "0" through "F" is displayed on the
7-segment LED at intervals of about one second. When a node
number to be set is displayed on the 7-segment LED, press the
push switch.
NOTE
The numbers "0" through "F" are displayed. Note,
however, that a number within the range 0 to 7
needs to be selected.
(3) The node number to be set blinks on the 7-segment LED.

(4) Press the push switch again. The blinking stops and the node
number is saved to the CNC.
CAUTION
Never turn off the power to the CNC until steps (1)
through (4) above for node number setting are
completed.
NOTE
Set a node number that does not duplicate the
node number of another CNC.
- 951 -
H.4.2 Method of Node Number Confirmation

Two methods of confirming the currently set node number are
available as described below.
Confirming the node number at power-on

power to the CNC. Next, perform the operation below to confirm the
node number.
Function number 4
push switch.
(2) Each of the two numbers "0" and "1" is displayed on the
(4) Press the push switch again. Each of the three numbers "0"
through "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED at intervals of
about one second. When "2" is displayed on the 7-segment LED,
(6) Press the push switch once more. The blinking stops and the
node number saved to the CNC is displayed.
Confirming the node number in normal operation

When the CNC is performing normal operation, the node number
blinks on the 7-segment LED while the push switch is held down with
the rotary switch set to "3".
NOTE
Upon completion of node number confirmation, be
sure to return the rotary switch to the previous
position.
- 952 -
H.5 CHANGING START SEQUENCES
The start procedure can be changed by using the rotary switch on a

CNC.
In normal operation: "0" (Function number 0)

When a CNC is started, the CNC waits for establishment of
communication with the personal computer.
The personal computer displays the CNC screen used in normal
operation.
When no display unit is connected: "E" (Function number E)

When a CNC is started, the CNC does not wait for establishment of
communication with the personal computer. This means that the
CNC is started even when no personal computer is connected as a
display unit.
When the CNC is connected with the personal computer, the
personal computer displays the CNC screen used in normal
operation.
In maintenance operation: "F" (Function number F)

When a CNC is started, the CNC waits for establishment of
communication with the personal computer.
The personal computer displays the boot screen.
NOTE
When the rotary switch is set to "0" or "F", the
CNC is not started until communication with the
personal computer is established.
Tip: Hardware locations related to Ethernet Display function
CNM1B: Memory card slot
CD38A: Embedded Ethernet

(embedded port)
COP21A: LCD connector
STATUS: 7-segment LED
MTSW: Rotary switch

PSW: Push switch
- 953 -
H.6 NCBOOT32E.exe
NCBOOT32E.exe is software that monitors communication between

the personal computer and CNCs and displays a maintenance screen
as needed.
NOTE
NCBOOT32E.exe is held on the Disk for CNC
Screen Display function (version 02.7 or later).
Set the rotary switch to "F" (Function number F) then start the CNC.
The boot screen and the IPL screen are displayed in this order.
With NCBOOT32E.exe, application software to be started after the
IPL screen is displayed can also be registered. Usually, CNC Screen
Display function (CNCScrnE.exe) is registered.
NCBOOT32E.exe resides on the system tray after the start-up.

By right-clicking the icon (circled on the screen below) on the system
tray, the pop-up menu shown below is displayed.
When [Open] is selected, the status screen is displayed.

When [Settings...] is selected, the option setting screen is displayed.
When [Screen Changer] is selected, the changer screen is displayed.
When [About...] is selected, the version information dialog box is
displayed.
When [End] is selected, NCBOOT32E.exe ends.
Double-clicking the icon on the system tray displays the status screen.
- 954 -
By left-clicking the icon on the system tray, the pop-up menu shown
below is displayed. Those CNCs that are not currently connected are
dimmed.
When a node number is selected from the pop-up menu, the current
screen (boot screen, IPL screen, CNC alarm screen, or screen of an
automatically started application) of the currently connected CNC can
be displayed in the forefront.
NOTE
To operate NCBOOT32E.exe, the use of a mouse
or a touch panel is recommended.
- 955 -
H.6.1 Boot Screen
If the rotary switch on a CNC is set to "F" (Function number F), the
boot screen is displayed when communication between
NCBOOT32E.exe and the CNC is established.
When multiple CNCs are connected, multiple boot screens are
displayed.
The following operations can be performed on the boot screen:

• Selection of a location to which an F-ROM/S-RAM file is to be
saved (the memory card of the CNC or a folder on the hard disk
of the personal computer)
• Writing files of system data (such as NC control software and
ladder programs) to the F-ROM of the CNC
• Saving system data held on the F-ROM to a file
• Checking system data held on the F-ROM
• Deleting system data from the F-ROM
• Backing up the data held on the S-RAM of the CNC to a file
• Restoring the S-RAM data backed up to a file to the CNC
• Restoring the S-RAM data automatically backed up to the
F-ROM
• Formatting the memory card of the CNC
- 956 -
H.6.2 File Storage Location Selection

Clicking the [Settings...] button displays the screen shown below.
Specify a location for storing a system data file or S-RAM data file.
Select the memory card of the CNC or a folder on the hard disk of the
personal computer.
The selection can be changed at any time.
- 957 -
H.6.3 System Data Operation

Clicking the [System Data] tab displays a screen as shown below.
The screen is used to operate system data written in the F-ROM of the
CNC.
Clicking the [Load...] button displays the file selection screen.
Select a file or files to be stored in the F-ROM of the CNC then click
the [Load] button. The selected file or files are written into the
F-ROM of the CNC.
Clicking the [Save] button saves system data selected from the
F-ROM of the CNC to a file.
Clicking the [Check] button checks selected system data and displays
check information.
Clicking the [Delete] button deletes selected system data from the
F-ROM of the CNC.
NOTE
Only user files holding ladder programs and so
forth can be operated as system data with the
[Save] button and [Delete] button.
- 958 -
H.6.4 S-RAM Operation

Clicking the [SRAM] tab displays a screen as shown below.
This screen is used to operate data stored in the S-RAM of the CNC.
Clicking the [Backup] button backs up S-RAM data to a file.

Clicking the [Restore] button restores S-RAM data backed up to a file
to the CNC.
Clicking the [AutoBackup...] button displays the file selection screen.
The screen displays S-RAM data automatically backed up by the CNC

to the F-ROM.
To restore data, select the data then click the [Restore] button. The
name of a backup file is automatically determined and cannot be
modified.
- 959 -
H.6.5 File Operation

Clicking the [File] tab displays a screen as shown below.
This screen is used to operate files on the memory card of the CNC or
on the hard disk of the personal computer.
Clicking the [Delete] button deletes a selected file.

Clicking the [Format] button formats the memory card of the CNC.
This button is enabled only when the memory card is selected with
[Settings...].
Clicking the [Refresh] button updates the list of files. Click this
button when the memory card is replaced.
NOTE
When the memory card is formatted, all data on the
memory card is erased.
- 960 -
H.6.6 IPL Screen

By clicking the [Close] button on the boot screen, the boot screen
disappears and the IPL screen is displayed.
When multiple CNCs are connected, multiple IPL screens are
displayed.
On the IPL screen, the following functions can be selected:

• Starting of the IPL monitor
• Clearing of data stored in the S-RAM of the CNC
• Clearing of CNC parameters
Supplement)
If a CNC-dedicated display unit is connected, a function of
SYSTEM SERVICE MENU of the IPL screen can be operated
according to the corresponding MDI key operation performed at
CNC power-on time. If Ethernet Display function is used,
however, such MDI key operation is disabled. In this case,
select a desired function from SYSTEM SERVICE MENU on
the IPL screen.
(Tip)
SYSTEM SERVICE MENU items
MDI key operations on
corresponding to the operations listed in
CNC-dedicated display unit
right-hand column
at power-on time
0. END None
1. IPL MONITOR <－> + <．>
- 961 -
H.6.7 CNC Alarm Screen

The CNC alarm screen is displayed when a system alarm occurs from
a CNC.
If a system alarm occurs from multiple CNCs, multiple CNC alarm
screens are displayed.
(The screen above is just an example. Display information varies

according to a system alarm issued from a CNC.)
CAUTION
If a system alarm occurs due to a very serious fault
related to the memory, main CPU, or Embedded
Ethernet, the CNC system alarm screen might not
be displayed.
For details of CNC alarm screen operation and display, see Section
11.25, "SYSTEM ALARMS", and Section 11.26, "SYSTEM
ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O LINK".
- 962 -
H.6.8 Status Screen

When any of the following operations is performed, a screen as shown
below is displayed:
• Double-click the icon on the system tray
• Right-click the icon on the system tray then click [Open] on the
pop-up menu
By checking [Pop up this window on communication error]
beforehand, the screen is displayed immediately when a
communication error occurs.
On the status screen, the IP address and MAC address, current

communication status, and other statuses of each CNC currently
connected can be checked.
Node : CNC node number (0 to 7)

When a duplicate IP address or MAC address is specified for
a CNC, the node number is followed by "X". In this case,
normal communication is disabled.
Name : Name of a CNC based on the IP address and MAC address
Blank : Not connected
---- : Duplicate IP address or MAC address
Com : Communication status
Blank : Disconnected
0000 : Status that the communication was established
once but it is being disconnected now
0001 : Connecting
8000 : Communication error in progress
---- : Duplicate IP address or MAC address
Status : CNC status
Blank : Disconnected
0001 : Boot processing in progress
0002 : Boot processing completed
0003 : IPL processing in progress
0004 : IPL processing completed
0010 : Steady state
0011 : The node number is not 0 though CNC does not
have the option of Ethernet Display function
8??? : System alarm issued
---- : Communication stopped, communication error,
duplicate IP address or MAC address
- 963 -
H.6.9 Option Setting Screen

When any of the operation is performed, a screen as shown below is
displayed:
• Right-click the icon on the system tray then click [Settings…] on
the pop-up menu
• Click [Settings…] on the status screen
On the option setting screen, application software for display to be

started after IPL processing can be registered.
Moreover, checking the check box enables interaction with the
changer screen. In this case, when a node screen on the changer
screen is selected, such application software is displayed in the
forefront to enable operation.
When a node is selected from the [Node] list box, the name of the
application software registered for the node is displayed at the center
of the screen.
Clicking the [New...] button can register an application name. If the
path includes a blank character, enclose the path in double quotation
marks.
Clicking the [Remove] button deletes a selected application name.
Clicking the [Edit] button enables a selected application name to be
edited. When an argument is specified, the character string "%s" in
the command line is replaced with an IP address. To represent "%"
itself, code "%%".
Example)
To operate CNC Screen Display function, code an application
name as follows:
“C:\Program Files\CNCScreenE\CNCScrnE.exe” /H=%s:8193
For each node (CNC), multiple applications can be registered on the

option setting screen. All registered applications are started
simultaneously.
- 964 -
If a register application cannot be started normally, the dialog box

"Node [xxx]:Couldn't execute the Application Program.[yyy]" is
displayed. ([xxx] represents a node number, and [yyy] represents a
command line character string.)
- 965 -
H.6.10 Changer Screen

When any of the following operations is performed, a screen as shown
below is displayed:
• Right-click the icon on the system tray then click [Screen
Changer] on the pop-up menu
• Click [Screen Changer] on the status screen
• Press the hotkey (Ctrl-Alt-N)
The changer screen is displayed in the forefront with other screens

hidden behind.
The node number concaved on the changer screen satisfies all of the
following conditions:
• Application started by NCBOOT32E.exe
• Application displayed in the forefront
By clicking a node number other than the one currently concaved, the
application related to the clicked node number can be displayed in the
forefront.
Pressing the Shift+Fx key displays the application related to Shift+Fx
in the forefront.
Shift+F1: Node0, Shift+F2: Node1, Shift+F3: Node2, Shift+F4:
Node3, Shift+F5: Node4, Shift+F6: Node5, Shift+F7: Node6,
Shift+F8: Node7
If the changer target application that should have been automatically
started is terminated, the dialog box "Node [xxx]:The registered
Application Program has terminated. Restart? [yyy]" is displayed.
Clicking the [Yes] button starts the application again. ([xxx]
represents a node number, and [yyy] represents a command line
character string.)
NOTE
When you click the [No] button, the changer target
application is not started again. Even if the
changer target application is manually started later,
interaction with the changer screen is disabled.
If a registered application is not found, the dialog box "Node [xxx]:No
Application Program exists for this node." is displayed. ([xxx]
represents a node number.)
- 966 -
H.7 STARTING OF THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION
To operate CNCScrnE.exe (CNC Screen Display function) after CNC

initialization, the application name of CNC Screen Display function
needs to be registered on the option setting screen of
NCBOOT32E.exe. At this time, add an argument (/H=%s:8193) for
specification of the IP address and port number of the CNC to the
application name.
If CNC Screen Display function is operated when no argument is
added to the application name, the screen shown below is displayed,
and the IP address and port number must be set.
When a connection is made with a CNC, a CNC screen as shown

below is displayed.
The title bar indicates the IP address and port number of the CNC.
NOTE
To use CNC Screen Display function, its option is
required.
- 967 -
Related NC parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13114 P15
[Data type] Bit
P15 With CNC Screen Display function, the screen is displayed in:
1: 15-inch display unit mode
0: 10.4-inch display unit mode
NOTE
This parameter is effective when CNC Screen
Display function is used with the FS30i/31i/32i-A of
stand-alone type.
- 968 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX I.IPL MONITOR
I IPL MONITOR
Appendix I, "IPL MONITOR", consists of the following sections:
I.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................970
I.2 STARTING OF THE IPL MONITOR .....................................970
I.3 IPL MENU ...............................................................................971
- 969 -
I.IPL MONITOR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
I.1 OVERVIEW
With the IPL monitor, the following operations can be performed:

1) Clearing of individual files
CNC parameters, tool compensation data, and so forth can be
cleared.
2) Output of system alarm information
System alarm information stored as history information can be
output to the memory card.
WARNING
1 From the IPL monitor menu, do not select an item
other than the items listed below.
The other items represent functions for FANUC
service.
0. END IPL
3. CLEAR FILE
5. SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY
2 When an individual file is cleared, all data stored in
the file is cleared and initialized. So, before
clearing an individual file, back up the data of the file
as needed.
3 If a system label error has occurred, perform a clear
operation according to Appendix J, "MEMORY
CLEAR OPERATION", instead of clearing of an
individual file.
I.2 STARTING OF THE IPL MONITOR
The IPL monitor can be started according to the procedure below.
Other than open CNCs

<1> Turn on the power by pressing the MDI keys [.] and [-]
simultaneously.
<2> The IPL monitor screen is displayed.
Open CNCs
<1> Start NCBOOT32.
<2> Select "1. IPL MONITOR" on the IPL screen.
<3> The IPL monitor screen is displayed.
For details, see Appendix F, "MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
(BOOT-UP AND IPL)".
- 970 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX I.IPL MONITOR
I.3 IPL MENU
When the IPL monitor is started, the following screen is displayed.
Enter a menu item number by using the corresponding MDI key.

One of the following menu items can be selected:
0 : END IPL
3 : CLEAR FILE
5 : SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY
END IPL
This menu item ends the IPL monitor and starts the CNC.
CLEAR FILE
This menu item clears and initializes displayed individual files.
1 : All files except option parameter files
2 : CNC parameter files
3 : Tool compensation data
Tool compensation memory A, B, and C, tool nose radius
compensation data (including virtual tool tip direction),
Y-axis offset data, second geometric offset, and so forth
4 : Program storage files
A default folder definition file is included.
5 : PMC parameter files
7 : Custom macro files
Macro variables, macro variable names
8 : Macro executor files
P code variables
9 : Touch panel data files
NOTE
The displayed individual file items vary, depending
on the system configuration.
- 971 -
I.IPL MONITOR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
A file can be cleared according to the following procedure:

<1> Enter the number of a file to be cleared.
<2> The IPL monitor displays "CLEAR FILE OK ? (NO=0,YES=1)".
Enter "1" to clear the file. To cancel the clearing of the file,
enter "0".
<3> When "1" is entered, the specified file is cleared then the menu
above is displayed again.
<4> To clear an additional file, repeat steps <1> through <3>.
To quit, enter "0".
SYSTEM ALARM UTILITY

System alarm information can be output to the memory card.
For details, see Section 11.25, "SYSTEM ALARMS" in Chapter 11,
"TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE".
- 972 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX J.MEMORY CLEAR
J MEMORY CLEAR
Appendix J, "MEMORY CLEAR", consists of the following sections:
G.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................974
G.2 OPERATION METHOD..........................................................974
G.3 DATA TYPES TO BE CLEARED ..........................................976
- 973 -
J.MEMORY CLEAR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
J.1 OVERVIEW
If an unexpected error occurs, such as the "SYSTEM LABEL CHECK

ERROR" at system startup or the "SYSTEM ALARM", which may be
generated suddenly, this function can start up the CNC system in its
initial state to return the system to the state in which restoration work
can be performed, by clearing all data stored in CNC memory.
J.2 OPERATION METHOD
1. Starting method
<1> For FS30i-A
When turning the power ON to the CNC, turn the power ON
while pressing the MID keys and at the same time
and holding them down. Keep holding them down until the
memory all clear approval screen is displayed.
<2> For FS300i-A/ FS300is-A

Use the NC BOOT32 function to display the IPL menu.
From the IPL menu, select "2. BACK-UP CNC DATA ALL
CLEAR".
For details, see the chapter on "Maintenance Operations (Boot
and IPL) for Open CNC".
- 974 -
2. Memory all clear approval screen

Performing the operation in 1. causes the following screen to be
displayed, asking you whether to execute all clear.
Memory All Clear Approval Screen
From the screen shown above, select between the following

operation and execute it:
- If you do not want to execute memory all clear, press the
numeric key "0". All clear will be canceled.
- To execute memory all clear, press the numeric key "1".
All clear will be executed.
WARNING
1 When this operation is performed, the CNC system
enters a state (initial state) in which it can start up
by itself. To restore various function operations,
therefore, you must reconfigure cleared data.
2 This operation can be performed only by personnel
who have been trained in maintenance and safety.
- 975 -
J.MEMORY CLEAR APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
J.3 DATA TYPES TO BE CLEARED
The various data types to be cleared by this operation are as follows:
Data type Data area

System label SRAM
Option parameters SRAM
Data related to C language executor
SRAM
(such as SRAM disk data)
Data related to macro executor
(such as P code variables, extended P code variables, user SRAM
file data)
NC parameters SRAM
Pitch error compensation data SRAM
Custom macro variables, variable name SRAM
Data related to PMC
SRAM
(such as parameters, KEEP relay value)
Data related to part program SRAM/
(such as program main body, folder data) FROM
Tool offset data SRAM
Default folder data SRAM
Workpiece coordinate system addition data SRAM
Tool life management data SRAM
Rotary table dynamic fixture offset data SRAM
System alarm history data SRAM
Software operator’s panel data SRAM
Three-dimensional error compensation data SRAM
Periodic maintenance data SRAM
Extended keep memory data SRAM
Interpolation type straightness compensation data SRAM
M code group data SRAM
Data related to Fast Data Server / Fast Ethernet (such as
SRAM
parameters)
Operation history data SRAM
Bi-directional pitch error compensation data
SRAM
Extended bi-directional pitch error compensation data
Touch panel data SRAM
Profibus master/slave function data SRAM
Data related to customer’s board (such as parameters) SRAM
DeviceNet master function data SRAM
FL-net function data SRAM
Rigid tapping retraction data SRAM
Y-axis offset data SRAM
Tool nose radius compensation value data SRAM
Cutter compensation value data SRAM
Second tool geometry offset data SRAM
Data of interference check for each path SRAM
Workpiece shift value data SRAM
Embedded Ethernet data SRAM
Data of protection of Data at Eight Levels SRAM
Various data of tool management function SRAM
Real time custom macro data SRAM
- 976 -
Data type Data area

FSSB data SRAM
MNUAL GUIDE i data SRAM
Dual check safety data SRAM
Data related to C language board function SRAM
CAUTION
The types of data stored in SRAM/FROM differ
depending on the system configuration.
- 977 -
K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
K PANEL i BIOS SETUP

What is "BIOS setup"?
BIOS setup is the program to specify BIOS settings. Based on the
settings, the operating environment is defined.
Before shipment from the factory, Default values are set and, usually,
these settings need not be changed. Changing the settings may cause
troubles to occur. We recommend that you use the Default settings
unless they present problems.
Settings made by BIOS setup are stored in internal memory. This

memory stores these values with a battery.
CAUTION
1 Use the Default BIOS settings (state before
shipment from the factory) unless they present
problems.
FANUC does not conduct evaluation with BIOS
settings other than the Default ones. If changing
the BIOS settings for some reason or other,
therefore, you are required to perform sufficient
operation confirmation.
2 BIOS setup requires an input device. Get ready
either of the input devices below:
- PS/2 keyboard connected to the PS/2 port of this
device
- USB keyboard connected to the USB port of this
device
- Standard front panel of a device for automakers
The MDI unit and soft keys cannot be used with
BIOS setup. Connect a separate keyboard to this
device.
3 Use the setting of Quick Boot like Disabled.
Roles of keys on the setup screen

The roles of the key used with the setup screen are as follows:
- [↓] [↑] keys : Each moves the cursor.
- [←] [→] keys : Each switches menus.
- [ENTER] key : Selects the item at the cursor position.
- [ESC] key : Cancels the current setting.
- [-] [+] keys : Each changes the setting of the item.
- [F1] key : Shows the entire help text for BIOS/SETUP.
- [F9] key : Returns all menu settings to standard ones.
- [F10] key : Saves the settings and exits from BIOS setup.
- 978 -
B-63945EN/03 APPENDIX K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP
Starting setup
1. Terminate your work and save data.
2. Turn the power OFF, connect an input device such as a full
keyboard, and start up the system again.
3. While "Press <F2> to enter SETUP" appears at the bottom of the
screen, press the "F2" key, then BIOS setup starts and the menu
screen is displayed.
4. The menu screen is displayed. Change BIOS settings as
desired.
PhoenixBIOS 4.0 Release 6.0
Copyright 1985-2002 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All rights Reserved BIOS series/version
FANUC BIOS, 6150/03

Copyright 2002, FANUC LTD
All rights Reserved CPU TYPE
CPU = Intel (R) Pentium(R) III processor 866MHz

639K System RAM Passed
253M Extended RAM Passed
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
Fixed Disk 0 : -----
初期画面 (通常起動時)
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
Ending setup
Changes made with BIOS setup (including loaded default values) take
effect after you save the settings and restart the system. Use either of
the following methods to save the settings and restart the system.
(Method 1)
Press the ESC key or select the EXIT item with a cursor key,
then the EXIT selection screen is displayed.
Then, select "Exit Saving Changes" and press the Enter key.
(Method 2)
Press the F10 key and the message "Save Configuration changes
and exit now?" is displayed. Select "Yes".
To end setup without saving changes, use the following method:
Press the ESC key or select the EXIT item with a cursor key, then the
EXIT selection screen is displayed.
Then, select "Exit Discarding Changes" and press the Enter key.
- 979 -
K.PANEL i BIOS SETUP APPENDIX B-63945EN/03
BIOS messages
When the power is turned ON, Power On Self Test is executed. If an
error is detected, any of the following BIOS message may be
displayed.
Message with a circle in the Solution required column
Some hardware error may have occurred. Solve the problem.
Message with a triangle in the Solution required column
This message may be displayed if battery supply is stopped, for
example. If it is displayed several times, some action is
required.
Error Solution
BIOS message Meaning
code required
○ CPU Temperature Exceeds The CPU temperature is too high. The radiator FIN may
the Upper Limit – FATAL not be in proper contact with the CPU.
○ Ambient Temperature Exceeds The ambient temperature is too high. The heat radiation of
the Upper Limit –FATAL (*1) the cabinet may not be performed correctly.
Ambient Temperature Exceeds

the Upper Limit (*2)
○ Ambient Temperature Exceeds The ambient temperature is too low. Wait until the
the Lower Limit –HDD stopped temperature rises.
(*1) (In the BIOS06 edition or later, the system automatically
Ambient Temperature Exceeds starts when the temperature rises. In an earlier edition of
the Lower Limit (*2) BIOS, turn on the power.)
○ CPU Fan Failure. – FATAL The FAN for the 60-square base unit is stopped.
○ Case Fan Failure. The FAN for the 40-square base unit is stopped.
○ HDD Fan Failure. The FAN for the HDD is stopped.
○ CMOS Battery Failure. (*1) The battery is removed or has run down.
CMOS Battery Low – Press ‘B’

Key. (*2)
0200 ○ Failure Fixed Disk The hard disk cannot be recognized correctly.
0210 ○ Stuck Key Keyboard operation error. Check to see if a key on the
keyboard is held down.
0211 Keyboard Error or not Keyboard error. Check the connection.
connected
0251 △ System CMOS checksum bad Because the results of a CMOS data check were not correct,
– Default configuration used. the system is started with standard settings.
0271 △ Check date and time settings The date and time settings are not set. (This message is
generated if battery supply is stopped.)
Use BIOS setup or the setting function on the OS to set the
correct date and time.
0280 △ Previous boot incomplete – The system could not be started normally the last time and,
Default configuration used therefore, it is started with standard settings.
(*1) : Pentium 3 PANEL i BIOS 6150/05 or before
(*2) : Pentium 3 PANEL i BIOS 6150/06 or later and Pentium M PANEL i
- 980 -
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
INDEX
ALARM SV5137
<Number>
(FSSB: CONFIGURATION ERROR) ..........................767
10.4" Display Unit for 2-Unit Display .......................... 273
ALARM SV5197 (FSSB: OPEN TIME OUT) .............767
10.4” Display Unit ........................................................ 259
Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors ....................683
15” Display Unit ........................................................... 265
Alarms Related to Disconnection..................................686
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (BLINKING)....... 918
Alarms Related to Serial Communication .....................686
7-SEGMENT LED INDICATIONS (TURNED ON) ... 915
Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and Separate Serial
<α > Pulsecoder .....................................................................685
αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ........................ 697 Analog Input Separate Detector Interface Unit .............411
αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE .......................... 696 Attaching.......................................................................470
ATTACHING AND DETACHING LCD/MDI UNITS 469
<A>
AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP..................................482
AC SPINDLE................................................................ 701
AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE ....740
Additional Axis Board .................................................. 379
Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters....................714
Additional Spindle Board.............................................. 381
Automatic start of trace setting .....................................541
Addresses ...................................................................... 510
ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG <B>
METHOD) .................................................................... 690 Backup Unit ..................................................................312
ADJUSTMENT OF THE BRIGHTNESS OF BACKUP UNIT ............................................................241
THE MONOCHROME LCD .......................................... 75 Basic Configuration of PMC .........................................489
ALARM DS0300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE Basic Specifications ......................................................505
POSITION RETURN) .................................................. 761 Basic Unit......................................................................191
ALARM LIST............................................................... 795 BATTERY FOR ABSOLUTE PLUSE CODERS ........464
ALARM LIST (CNC) ................................................... 796 Bode graph ....................................................................142
ALARM LIST (PMC)................................................... 853 Boot Screen ............................................................ 924,956
ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) ............................ 875 BOOT SYSTEM ...........................................................886
ALARM OH0700 (OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT).. 766
<C>
ALARM OH0701 (OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR) ....... 766
Cabinet ..........................................................................453
ALARM PS0090 (REFERENCE POSITION
Cable clamp and shield processing................................450
RETURN IS ABNORMAL) ......................................... 759
Cautions ........................................................................905
Alarm Related to Invalid Parameter Settings ................ 687
CAUTIONS IN REPLACING PCB’S ..........................471
ALARM SR0085 TO SR0087 (READER/PUNCHER
Changer Screen .............................................................966
INTERFACE ALARM) ................................................ 755
CHANGING START SEQUENCES ..................... 922,953
ALARM SV0401 (V READY OFF) ............................. 762
Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)........517
ALARM SV0404 (V READY ON)............................... 764
Circle graph...................................................................124
ALARM SV0417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS
CNC Alarm Screen................................................. 929,962
ABNORMAL)............................................................... 765
CNC Display Unit for Automotive Manufacturers .......277
ALARM SV0462 (SEND CNC DATA FAILED) ........ 765
CNC STATE DISPLAY .................................................41
ALARM SV0463 (SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED).... 765
Collective Monitor Function .................................. 558,559
ALARM SV5134
COLOR SETTING SCREEN..........................................68
(FSSB: OPEN READY TIME OUT)............................ 767
Compensating the Touch Panel .............................. 243,373
ALARM SV5136
(FSSB: NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL) ................... 768
i-1
INDEX B-63945EN/03
CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ......................601

CONNECTORS AND CARDS ............................. 163,215 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS..................646
Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output .. 475 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA
Connecting the Ground Terminal of the Control Unit... 455 ETHERNET CARD ......................................................602
Contents Displayed ......................................................... 22 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS OUTSIDE
CONTROL UNIT ......................................................... 252 CABINET .....................................................................444
CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES ................. 724 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE).........................883
Correspondence between operation mode and ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS ...906
parameters on spindle tuning screen ............................. 712 ETHERNET DISPLAY FUNCTION............................943
COUNTERMEASURES AGAINST NOISE................ 446 EXAMPLE OF NETWORK CONFIGURATION........946
CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF.. 746 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ......609
Example of setting the FTP file transfer function .........615
<D>
Execution methods ........................................................636
Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen) .................................. 528
Execution of Trace ........................................................538
DATA TYPES TO BE CLEARED............................... 976
Execution Order and Execution Time Percentage.........495
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND
EXPLANATION OF SCREENS ..................................924
NOTE............................................................................. s-2
Demounting a DIMM Module ...................................... 406 <F>
Detaching ...................................................................... 469 Fast Ethernet Board.......................................................375
DeviceNet Master Board............................................... 391 File operation ........................................................ 927, 960
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .............................................. 22 File Storage Location Selection ....................................957
DIGITAL SERVO ........................................................ 661 FL-net Board .................................................................384
DISPLAY AND OPERATION.........................................1 Fourier graph.................................................................136
Display method ................................................... 16,45,704 FSSB DISPLAY AND SETTING SCREEN.................673
Display Unit .................................................................. 192 FTP File Transfer Function ...........................................646
Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is................................ 325 Function Keys ...................................................................5
DISPLAY UNIT FOR 30i/31i/32i ................................ 259 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS............................2
DISPLAY UNIT FOR is SERIES CNC........................ 298 Functions on the IPL screen ..........................................928
Display Unit Number Confirmation.............................. 950
<G>
Display Unit Number Setting........................................ 949
General Screen Operations................................................3
DISPLAY UNIT NUMBER SETTING AND
Grounding .....................................................................446
CONFIRMATION ........................................................ 949
Grounding methods .......................................................447
Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen) .................. 547
Grounding types ............................................................446
Displaying and operating the file list ............................ 649
Displaying Diagnosis Screen .......................................... 22 <H>
Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Half-Size Kana Input on the Maintenance Information
Screen) .......................................................................... 530 Screen............................................................................155
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen................................... 682 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE............734
Displaying the Maintenance Information Screen .......... 152 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION ................ 213,245,912
Displaying the Power ON Sequence ............................. 888 Hardware Configuration Screen ......................................17
Distributed I/O Setting .................................................. 432 HARDWARE OVERVIEW................................... 213,246
DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING......... 694 HSSB Interface Board ...................................................382
<E> <I>
Editing Ladder Programs .............................................. 552 I/O .......................................................................... 195,330
i-2
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
I/O Communication Error Messages ............................. 871 LIST OF ADDRESSES.................................................562

I/O Link-AS-i Converter ............................................... 413 List of Basic Units.........................................................313
I/O Signals of PMC ....................................................... 489 List of Display Unit for 300i/310i/320i (PANEL i) ......319
IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, DATA IS List of Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i...............................315
INPUT TO AN UNEXPECTED ADDRESS ................ 753 LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS .............................885
IN A CONNECTOR PANEL I/O UNIT, NO DATA List of Printed Circuit Boards .......................................232
IS OUTPUT TO AN EXPANSION UNIT.................... 754 LIST OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND
INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS ............. 662 UNITS...........................................................................232
INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA............................... 472 List of Printed Circuit Boards of Control Unit ..............313
INPUT FROM AND OUTPUT TO I/O DEVICES List of Units ..................................................................234
CANNOT BE PERFORMED, INPUT/OUTPUT LIST OF UNITS AND PRINTED CIRCUIT
CANNOT BE PERFORMED PROPERLY .................. 750 BOARDS................................................................ 191,313
Inputting and Outputting Parameters............................... 83 LOAD BASIC SYSTEM ..............................................905
Inputting CNC Parameters ............................................ 478 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values..................... 480 FUNCTION................................................................... 657
Inputting Part Programs ................................................ 481
<M>
Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount................ 480
Main Board ...................................................................215
Inputting Tool Compensation Amount.......................... 480
Main Board of Display Unit for is Series CNC.............298
INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA .......................... 475
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN.............152
INSERTING AND EXTRACTING A COMPACT
MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC
FLASH / GUI CARD ON THE DISPLAY CONTROL
(BOOT-UP AND IPL) ..................................................919
CARD ........................................................................... 407
MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT .937
INSERTING AND EXTRACTING OPTION PCB ...... 400
MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED
Interface Between CNC and PMC ......................... 488,498
ETHERNET FUNCTION .............................................652
Inverter PCBs, Connector Units, and Fan Adapter
MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED
PCBs ............................................................................. 228
TYPE AND STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE) .374
Inverter PCBs, Fan Adapter PCBs, and Connector
MDI Unit................................................................ 192,329
Units.............................................................................. 308
Measures Against Surges due to Lightning ...................462
Investigating the Conditions under which Failure
MEMORY CARD FORMAT Screen............................904
Occurred........................................................................ 724
MEMORY CARD SLOT ..............................................908
IPL MENU.................................................................... 971
MEMORY CARD TYPES (FUNCTIONS) ..................910
IPL MONITOR ............................................................. 969
MEMORY CLEAR.......................................................973
IPL Screen.............................................................. 928,961
Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm
<J> Screen............................................................................853
JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE .................... 730 Method A of gear change for M series (Bit 2 (SGB) of
Parameter No.3705 = 0) ................................................703
<L>
Method B of gear change for M series (Bit 2 (SGB) of
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR
Parameter No.3705 = 1) ................................................703
SCREENS ([PMC LADDER])...................................... 545
Method of Extraction ...................................... 400,402,408
LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is
Method of Insertion......................................... 400,404,408
HARDWARE................................................................ 212
Method of Node Number Confirmation ........................952
LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE ...... 157
Method of Node Number Setting ..................................951
LED DISPLAY ............................................................. 913
Mode selection ..............................................................628
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)......................... 427
i-3
INDEX B-63945EN/03
MONITORING I/O DIAGNOSIS Outline of Spindle Control ............................................702

([I/O DGN] SCREEN) .................................................. 542 Outputting CNC Parameters..........................................476
Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)...... 549 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values ..................477
Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) .... 515 Outputting Data...............................................................62
Mounting a DIMM Module........................................... 406 Outputting Part Program ...............................................477
MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING CARD PCBS ..... 402 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount .............476
MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING DIMM Outputting System Configuration Data ...........................21
MODULES ................................................................... 405 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount .......................477
Mounting the Case Cover.............................................. 357 OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE....................................159
Multi-Path PMC Interface............................................. 499
<P>
MULTI-PMC FUNCTION ........................................... 493
PANEL i BIOS SETUP.................................................978
<N> PANEL i PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD ......................292
NCBOOT32E.exe ......................................................... 954 Parameter ................................................................. 71,156
NET EDITOR screen .................................................... 555 Parameter Setting ..........................................................682
NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC Parameters ..................................................................46,85
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED........................... 726 PMC DIAGNOSIS AND MAINTENANCE SCREENS
NODE NUMBER SETTING AND ([PMC MAINTE]).........................................................515
CONFIRMATION ........................................................ 951 PMC Signal Addresses..................................................490
Noise Suppressor........................................................... 460 PMC SPECIFICATIONS..............................................505
Notes .......................................................................... 74,87 PMC System Alarm Messages ......................................856
NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION............76
THE POWER IS TURNED ON.................................... 748 PREFACE ......................................................................p-1
Printed Circuit Boards...................................................193
<O>
Printed Circuit Boards for 15" Display Units................174
OPERATING MONITOR............................................... 45
Printed Circuit Boards for 7.2"/8.4"/10.4" Display
Operating the Maintenance Information Screen............ 153
Units ..............................................................................163
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN .............................. 512
PROFIBUS Board .........................................................388
OPERATION ................................................................ 939
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen ..............................557
Operation after execution of trace ................................. 539
Operation Errors............................................................ 859 <R>
OPERATION METHOD .............................................. 974 Related NC parameters.................................... 614,620,644
OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTION ......................... 940 Removing the Case Cover.............................................353
Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....... 606 Replacement Procedure.................................................237
Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......... 610 REPLACING A FAN UNIT .........................................337
Operations for Color Setting ........................................... 69 REPLACING BATTERY .............................................201
Operations on the System Alarm Screen....................... 775 Replacing Fan Motor.............................................. 206,373
Option Board Mounting Location ................................. 399 REPLACING FUSE ON CONTROL UNIT .................199
Option Setting Screen ............................................ 931,964 REPLACING FUSE ON UNIT.....................................239
Option setting screen (Series 300i/310i/320i) ............... 931 REPLACING FUSES ON VARIOUS UNITS..............437
Option setting screen (Series 300is/310is/320is)........... 933 REPLACING is SERIES CNC DISPLAY UNIT
OPTIONAL BOARD.................................................... 375 MAITENANCE PARTS ...............................................370
OTHER SCREENS ....................................................... 929 REPLACING MAINTENANCE PARTS FOR CNC
Other Units...................................................... 196,331,409 DISPLAY UNIT FOR AUTOMOTIVE
Others..................................................................... 235,688 MANUFACTURERS....................................................342
i-4
B-63945EN/03 INDEX
Replacing Method ......................................................... 240 Setting of Trace Parameter

REPLACING PANEL i MAINTENANCE PARTS ..... 352 ([TRACE SETING] Screen)..........................................533
Replacing the 10.4” LCD backlight .............................. 364 Setting on the CNC screen ............................................631
Replacing the Battery........................ 240,333,348,352,372 Setting on the personal computer ..................................635
Replacing the Compact Flash Card ............................... 346 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT .....473
Replacing the CPU Unit................................................ 362 Setting up DHCP...........................................................617
Replacing the Fan.......................................................... 360 Setting up DNS ............................................................. 616
Replacing the fan for the HDD ..................................... 361 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function ............................616
Replacing the fan in the PANEL i................................. 360 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
Replacing the Fan Motor....................................... 240, 348 FUNCTION................................................................... 605
Replacing the Fuse ................................................. 359,372 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) ....................532
REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE CONTROL UNIT 332 Soft Key Structure.............................................................2
REPLACING THE FUSE OF THE DISPLAY UNIT .. 340 Soft Keys...........................................................................6
Replacing the Fuse of the Unit ...................................... 347 Software Configuration Screen .......................................18
Replacing the GUI Card................................................ 344 SPC ALARMS ..............................................................772
Replacing the LCD Backlight ................................ 209,364 SPINDLE ALARMS.....................................................772
Replacing the Main Board............................... 197,236,370 Spindle Information Screen...........................................718
Replacing the Main PCB............................................... 342 Spindle monitor screen..................................................709
Replacing the Touch Panel Protection Sheet Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ...............................704
................................................................. 240,349,368,373 Spindle setting screen....................................................705
RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET.......... 651 Spindle tuning screen ....................................................707
SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen...................................901
<S>
SRAM operation ...........................................................926
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................ s-1
S-RAM Operation .........................................................959
SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING
STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE....244
PROCEDURE ............................................................... 891
STARTING OF THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY
Screen Display ........................................................... 68,77
FUNCTION................................................................... 967
Separate Detector Interface Unit ................................... 409
STARTING OF THE IPL MONITOR ..........................970
Separating Signal Lines................................................. 458
Starting the Boot System...............................................889
SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE .......................... 702
Status Screen .................................................................963
SERVO ALARMS ........................................................ 769
Status Screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ...................930
SERVO GUIDE MATE .................................................. 88
STRUCTURE ...............................................................158
SERVO TUNING SCREEN ......................................... 682
SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED
Setting and Displaying Counter Values
ETHERNET DEVICES ................................................645
([COUNTR] Screen) ..................................................... 520
SYSTEM ALARMS......................................................773
Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) . 523
System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB) ........787
Setting and Displaying Keep Relays
System Alarms Detected by Hardware..........................779
([KEEP RELAY] Screen) ............................................. 522
SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND
Setting and Displaying Variable Timers
I/O Link.........................................................................789
([TIMER] Screen) ......................................................... 518
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN .......................16
Setting I/O Address for I/O Link................................... 497
SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen.................................894
SETTING I/O MODULES............................................ 432
SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen ...............................897
Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.............. 605,624
System data manipulation .............................................925
Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..................... 610
System Data Operation..................................................958
Setting of the Unsolicited Messaging Function............. 621
i-5
INDEX B-63945EN/03
SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen.................................... 899

System Files and User Files .......................................... 889
System Relay Addresses (R9000, Z0)........................... 500
<T>
T series .......................................................................... 703
Terminal Board Type I/O Module................................. 421
Terminal Type I/O Module Setting ............................... 435
TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS........... 160,214,247
Tracing Data.................................................................... 60
Transition of the PMC Screens ..................................... 514
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 723
<U>
USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING
Screen............................................................................ 892
<W>
Warning Interface.......................................................... 716
WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION ... s-3
WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS.............. s-6
WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT ........... s-5
Warnings That Occurs on the Maintenance Information
Screen............................................................................ 155
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED
TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ....................................... s-7
Wave Display .................................................................. 89
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY.......................... 47
Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen ................................ 48
Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen .......................... 49
WHAT IS PMC? ........................................................... 489
<X>
XY graph....................................................................... 112
<Y>
Y-time graph ................................................................... 90
i-6
Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-63945EN)
03 Dec., 2007 All revision
Addition of functions
Addition of following models
02 Jun, 2004 - Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A5
- Series 31i /310i /310is-MODEL A
- Series 32i /320i /320is-MODEL A
01 May, 2003
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is/31i/310i/310is/32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-63945EN/03)
Addition of the specification of Main board
1. Type of applied technical documents
Name FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A

FANUC Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A
FANUC Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Spec.No. /Version B-63945EN/03
2. Summary of change
2. Summary of change
Group Name / Outline New, Add, Applicable

Correct, Date
Delete
Basic
Function
Optional
Function
Unit
Maintenance Addition of the specification of Main Add At once

parts board
Notice
Correction
Another
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is/31i/310i/310is/

32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
CUST.
01 08.04.03 A. Koizumi New issue DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01
Edit. DATE Design Description SHEET 1 / 10

We add the specification of Main board in the P.C.B. list at the
following paragraph.
3.4.1 Main Board
4.4 CONTROL UNIT
(P.163)

Name CNC model Specification Remarks
Main board A1 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8100-0980 Old Specification
Main board A2 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8100-0981 Old Specification
Main board A3 32i-A (without A20B-8100-0982 Old Specification
Ethernet)
Main board A4 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0400 Old Specification
Main board A6 32i-A (without A20B-8101-0402
Ethernet)
Main Board A7 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8100-0983
Main Board A8 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0403

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

(P.174)
Main board specification

Name CNC model Specification Remarks
Main board B1 for 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0022 Old Specification
15-inch display unit (For Old TP)
A20B-8101-0632 New Specification
(For New TP)
(For Old TP)
Main board B2 for 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0026 Old Specification
15-inch display unit (For Old TP)
(For New TP)
Main board F1 for 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0372 Old Specification
15-inch display unit A20B-8101-0702 New Specification
Main board F2 for 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0376
15-inch display unit

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

(P.193)

30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A1 A20B-8100-0980 00301 Old Specification
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
31i-A, 32i-A main board A2 A20B-8100-0981 00302 Old Specification
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
32i-A main board A3 A20B-8100-0982 00303 Old Specification
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A4 A20B-8101-0400 00320 Old Specification
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
32i-A main board A6 A20B-8101-0402 00322
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A7 A20B-8100-0983 0030B
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A8 A20B-8101-0403 0032B
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” LCD)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board B1 A20B-8101-0022 00306 Old Specification
(for 15” LCD) A20B-8101-0632 00332
31i-A, 32i-A main board B2 A20B-8101-0026 00312
(for 15” LCD)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board F1 A20B-8101-0372 0031A Old Specification
(for 15” LCD) A20B-8101-0702 00336
31i-A, 32i-A main board F2 A20B-8101-0376 0031E
(for 15” LCD)

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

(P.215)
3.4.1 Main Board
- Specification
Item Specification Remarks
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0020
(For Old TP)
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0028
(For New TP)
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (For 10.4"LCD)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0634
(For Old TP)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0630
(For New TP)
A20B-8101-0023 Old Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (For 12.1"LCD)
A20B-8101-0637 New specification
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0021
(For Old TP)
New Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0635
(For Old TP)
New Specification
A20B-8101-0631
(For New TP)
A20B-8101-0024 (For old TP)
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (For 10.4"LCD)
A20B-8101-0029 (For new TP)
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (For 12.1"LCD) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0025
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (For 10.4"LCD)
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (For 12.1"LCD)
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (For 15"LCD)
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (For 15"LCD) A20B-8101-0375

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

(P.174)
Name Parent specification Ordering code Remarks

Main board C1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0303-H105 A20B-8101-0020 ID=00304
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0634 ID=00330
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
New Specification
A20B-8101-0630 ID=00330
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
New Specification
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0637 ID=00333
New Specification

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

For LCD units
A20B-0303-D515
/D516/D525/D526
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0635 ID=00331
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D515
/D516/D525/D526
New Specification
A20B-8101-0631 ID=00331
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D515
/D525/D551
New Specification
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0028 ID=00304
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0634 ID=00330
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
New Specification
A20B-8101-0630 ID=00330
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
New Specification
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0637 ID=00333
New specification

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

C2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0306-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=00305
For LCD units
A20B-0303-D515
/D516/D525/D526
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0635 ID=00331
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D515
/D516/D525/D526
New Specification
A20B-8101-0631 ID=00331
For LCD units
A02B-0303-D515
/D525/D551
New Specification
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505
and D506
A20B-8101-0029 ID=00310
For LCD unit
A02B-0303-D505
and D541
G1 (300is-A, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0303-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0700 ID=00334
New Specification

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

G3 (300is-A, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
Old Specification
A20B-0801-0703 ID=00337
New Specification
G2 (300is-A, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0701 ID=00335
New Specification
G1 (310is-A5, for 10.4"LCD) A02B-0303-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=00318
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0700 ID=00334
New Specification
G3 (310is-A5, for 12.1"LCD) A02B-0303-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=0031B
Old Specification
A20B-0801-0703 ID=00337
New Specification
G2 (310is-A5, for 15"LCD) A02B-0303-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=00319
Old Specification
A20B-8101-0701 ID=00335
New Specification

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

(P.232)
4.4 CONTROL UNIT

30i/300i/300is-A, 31i/310i/310is-A5 A16B-3200-0520 Old Specification
Main board D1
31i/310i/310is-A, 32i/320i/320is-A A16B-3200-0521
Main board D2
30i/300i/300is-A, 31i/310i/310is-A5 A16B-3200-0522
Main board D3

30i/300i/300is-A, 31i/310i/310is-A5 A16B-3200-0520 00308 Old Specification
Main board D1
31i/310i/310is-A, 32i/320i/320is-A A16B-3200-0521 00309
Main board D2
31i/310i/310is-A, 32i/320i/320is-A A16B-3200-0522 0030A
Main boardD3

CUST.
DRAW. NO. B-63945EN/03-01

Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Maintenance Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL A

FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ................s-2

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

WARNINGS RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION

(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation

2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics

3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the

4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended

6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the

WARNINGS RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken

WARNINGS RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO DAILY

Model name Abbreviation

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

Table 2 Related manuals

The above servo motors and the corresponding spindles can be

2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i HARDWARE ............................... 157

2.8 REPLACING BATTERY ............................................................................ 201

4.7.1 Main Board of Display Unit for is Series CNC....................................................298

5 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND

5.8 SETTING I/O MODULES........................................................................... 432

7 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC........................................... 488

7.6.4 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen .....................................................................557

9.3.3 Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors ...........................................................683

10 AC SPINDLE ....................................................................................... 701

11 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 723

11.7 NOTHING IS DISPLAYED ON THE LCD WHEN THE POWER IS

F MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL) ..................... 919

G MAINTENANCE OF STAND-ALONE TYPE UNIT.............................. 937

H.6.7 CNC Alarm Screen...............................................................................................962

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS.......................................2

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS

1.1.1 Soft Key Structure

1.1.2 General Screen Operations

Chapter selection soft keys Continuous menu key

3 When the screen of a desired chapter is displayed, press the

4 Select a desired operation with the operation selection soft key.

Return menu key Operation selection soft keys

5 To return to the display of chapter selection soft keys, press the

A general screen display procedure is provided above.

- Button design change depending on soft key state

• Operation selection soft keys

• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys

1.1.3 Function Keys

Press this key to display the position screen.

Press this key to display the program screen.

Press this key to display the offset/setting screen.

Press this key to display the system screen.

Press this key to display the message screen.

Press this key to display the graphics screen.

Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro

Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro

1.1.4 Soft Keys

Position display screen

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

FANUC Series 30/300/300*s-MODEL A

FANUC Series 31/310/310*s-MODEL A